This is a modern-English version of Woman's Institute Library of Cookery. Volume 5: Fruit and Fruit Desserts; Canning and Drying; Jelly Making, Preserving and Pickling; Confections; Beverages; the Planning of Meals, originally written by Woman's Institute of Domestic Arts and Sciences. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.






WOMAN'S INSTITUTE LIBRARY OF COOKERY

VOLUME FIVE



FRUIT AND FRUIT DESSERTS

CANNING AND DRYING

JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, AND PICKLING

CONFECTIONS

BEVERAGES

THE PLANNING OF MEALS



WOMAN'S INSTITUTE OF DOMESTIC ARTS AND SCIENCES, Inc.






PREFACE

This volume, the fifth of the Woman's Institute Library of Cookery, deals with the varieties of fruits and the desserts that can be made from them, the canning and preserving of foods, the making of confections of every description, beverages and their place in the diet, and every phase of the planning of meals.

This volume, the fifth of the Woman's Institute Library of Cookery, covers different types of fruits and the desserts that can be made from them, how to can and preserve foods, making all kinds of confections, beverages and their role in the diet, and every aspect of meal planning.

With fruits becoming less seasonal and more a daily food, an understanding of them is of great value to the housewife. In Fruit and Fruit Desserts, she first learns their place in the diet, their nature, composition, and food value. Then she proceeds with the preparation and serving of every variety of fruit. Included in this section also are fruit cocktails, those refreshing appetizers often used to introduce a special meal.

With fruits becoming less seasonal and more part of everyday meals, understanding them is really valuable for anyone managing a household. In Fruit and Fruit Desserts, she first learns about their role in the diet, their characteristics, composition, and nutritional value. Then she moves on to how to prepare and serve all kinds of fruit. This section also includes fruit cocktails, those refreshing appetizers often used to start a special meal.

To understand how to preserve perishable foods in the seasons of plenty for the times when they are not obtainable is a valuable part of a housewife's knowledge. Canning and Drying deals with two ways of preserving foodstuffs, treating carefully the equipment needed and all the methods that can be employed and showing by means of excellent illustrations, one of them in natural colors, every part of the procedure followed. The fruits and vegetables that permit of canning, as well as certain meats and fish, are taken up in a systematic manner.

To know how to preserve perishable foods during seasons of abundance for when they're unavailable is an essential skill for anyone managing a household. Canning and Drying covers two methods of preserving food, carefully discussing the necessary equipment and all the techniques that can be used, along with great illustrations, including one in natural colors, to demonstrate every step of the process. It systematically addresses the fruits and vegetables that can be canned, as well as certain meats and fish.

Jelly Making, Preserving, and Pickling continues a discussion of the home preservation of foods, showing how they can be kept for long periods of time not by sterilization, but with the aid of preservatives. Each one of these methods is treated as to its principles, equipment, and the procedure to be followed. After trying the numerous recipes given, the housewife will be able to show with pride the results of her efforts, for nothing adds more to the attractiveness and palatability of a meal than a choice jelly, conserve, marmalade, or jam.

Jelly Making, Preserving, and Pickling continues the conversation about preserving food at home, explaining how it can be stored for extended periods not through sterilization, but with the use of preservatives. Each of these methods is discussed in terms of its principles, equipment, and the steps to follow. After experimenting with the various recipes provided, the homemaker will proudly showcase the fruits of her labor, as nothing enhances the appeal and taste of a meal like a selection of jelly, conserve, marmalade, or jam.

Confections deals with that very delightful and fascinating part of cookery--confection making. Not only are home-made confections cheaper than commercially made ones, but they usually contain more wholesome materials, so it is to the housewife's advantage to familiarize herself with the making of this food. Recipes are given for all varieties of confections, including taffies, caramels, cream candies, and the confections related to them. Fondant making is treated in detail with illustrations showing every step and directions for making many unusual kinds.

Confections explores that charming and interesting aspect of cooking—making sweets. Not only are homemade confections less expensive than store-bought ones, but they also tend to have healthier ingredients, making it beneficial for the homemaker to learn how to make these treats. Recipes are provided for a wide range of confections, including taffies, caramels, cream candies, and others. Fondant making is discussed in detail, complete with illustrations for each step and instructions for creating many unique types.

Though beverages often receive only slight consideration, they are so necessary that the body cannot exist very long without them. In Beverages is discussed the relation of beverages to meals, the classes of beverages, and the preparation of those required by the human system, as well as the proper way to serve them. In addition to coffee, tea, cocoa, chocolate, and cereal beverages, fruit, soft, and nourishing drinks receive their share of attention.

Though drinks often get little thought, they are essential because the body can't survive very long without them. In Beverages, the connection between drinks and meals is explored, along with the types of drinks, how to prepare those needed by the human body, and the best ways to serve them. Besides coffee, tea, cocoa, chocolate, and cereal drinks, fruit, soft, and nourishing beverages also get their due focus.

To be a successful home maker, it is not enough for a housewife to know how to prepare food; she must also understand how to buy it, how to look after the household accounts, what constitutes correct diet for each member of her family, how to plan menus for her regular meals and for special occasions, and the essentials of good table service. All these things, and many more, she learns in The Planning of Meals, which completes this volume.

To be a successful homemaker, a housewife needs more than just cooking skills; she also has to know how to shop for groceries, manage household expenses, understand the right nutrition for each family member, plan regular and special occasion menus, and the basics of good table service. All of this, and much more, is covered in The Planning of Meals, which wraps up this volume.






CONTENTS

FRUIT AND FRUIT DESSERTS

CANNING AND DRYING

JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, AND PICKLING

CONFECTIONS

BEVERAGES

THE PLANNING OF MEALS

INDEX






FRUIT AND FRUIT DESSERTS

FRUIT IN THE DIET

1. FRUIT, as is generally understood, is the fleshy, juicy product of some plant or tree which, when ripe, is suitable for use as food. Although some fruits are seedless, they generally contain the seeds of the plants or trees that produce them. Many fruits require cooking to make them palatable, others are never cooked, and still others may be cooked or eaten raw, as desired.

1. FRUIT, is generally understood to be the fleshy, juicy product of some plant or tree that is suitable for food when ripe. While some fruits are seedless, they usually contain the seeds of the plants or trees that produce them. Many fruits need to be cooked to be enjoyable, others are never cooked, and some can be cooked or eaten raw, depending on preference.

Fruits, because they are wholesome, appetizing, and attractive, occupy a valuable place in the diet. In fact, it is these qualities rather than their food value that accounts for the popularity of fruits among all people. In addition to causing fruits to appeal to the esthetic sense, their attractiveness serves another important purpose. It is said that Nature made them attractive in color, odor, and flavor in order that birds might be allured to attack them for food and, by spreading the seeds, assist in their propagation.

Fruits, being healthy, tasty, and visually appealing, hold an important spot in our diet. In fact, these qualities, rather than just their nutritional value, explain why fruits are popular with everyone. Besides appealing to our sense of beauty, their attractiveness serves another key purpose. It's said that Nature made them colorful, fragrant, and flavorful so that birds would be drawn to eat them and, by spreading the seeds, help in their growth.

2. Fruits are gradually growing to be less seasonal and more a daily food, and are thus constantly becoming more prevalent in the diet. This condition may be attributed to the present rapid means of transportation and the excellent methods of cold storage that exist. Through these agencies it is possible to ship more or less perishable fruits long distances from their native localities and at times of the year other than the particular season in which they are at their best in the places where they are grown. Thus, fruits that were formerly considered a luxury may now be served regularly, even on the tables of persons having only moderate means.

2. Fruits are becoming less seasonal and more of a daily food, making them more common in our diets. This change can be credited to the rapid transportation methods we have today and the great cold storage techniques available. Because of these advancements, it's possible to ship perishable fruits over long distances and at times of the year when they're not in peak condition where they’re grown. Therefore, fruits that used to be seen as a luxury can now be served regularly, even for people with only modest incomes.

The fact that fruits are being more extensively used every day is as it should be, for this food is entitled to an important place in the diet of all persons. So important is fruit in the diet that it must be looked on not as one of the things that may be taken or omitted as a person wishes without making any difference either way, but as a food to include in one form or another in nearly every meal. The child who is so young that it cannot take any solid food may have fruit juices included in its diet to decided advantage; but children who are slightly older and adults may take the fruits cooked or raw instead of in the form of juices.

The fact that fruits are being used more and more every day is exactly how it should be, because this food deserves an important spot in everyone's diet. Fruits are so vital that they shouldn't be seen as optional items that can be included or left out without any impact; rather, they should be part of nearly every meal in some way or another. Very young children who can't eat solid food can benefit from having fruit juices in their diet, while slightly older children and adults can enjoy fruits, either cooked or raw, instead of just as juices.

3. As far as the composition of fruits is concerned, it is such that most fresh fruits are not particularly high in food value. However, they are characterized by other qualities that make up for what they lack in this respect; then, too, what they contain in the way of heat-producing or tissue-building material is easily digestible. Most fruits contain considerable acid, and this food substance makes them stimulating to the appetite. Advantage of this fact is taken when fruits are served at the beginning of a breakfast or when several of them are combined in a fruit cocktail and served before luncheon or dinner. This acid produces real stimulation in the stomach, resulting in a flow of gastric juice from the glands of the stomach walls. In addition, the delightful color, the fragrant odor, or the pleasant taste of fruit, although a mental effect, is just as real and just as valuable as the actual stimulation of the acids.

3. When it comes to the composition of fruits, most fresh fruits aren't particularly high in nutritional value. However, they have other qualities that make up for this shortcoming; plus, what they do contain in terms of heat-producing or tissue-building materials is easy to digest. Most fruits have a considerable amount of acid, which makes them appetizing. This is why fruits are often served at the beginning of breakfast or combined in a fruit cocktail before lunch or dinner. The acidity provides real stimulation in the stomach, leading to a flow of gastric juice from the stomach walls. Additionally, the vibrant colors, fragrant aromas, and pleasant tastes of fruits, while a mental effect, are just as real and valuable as the actual stimulation provided by the acids.

4. Many fruits are eaten raw, while others are cooked either because they require cooking to make them appetizing or because it is desired not to use them in their raw state. The cooking of fruits has a variety of effects on them, being sometimes advantageous and other times detrimental. The flavor is always changed by the application of heat, and in some cases the acid that fruit contains becomes stronger. On the other hand, the fibrous material, or cellulose, of fruits is softened by cooking and thus becomes more digestible. Then, too, the sugar that is usually added to fruits in their cooking increases their food value. Because of these facts, cooked fruits have considerable value and, like raw fruits, should have an important place in the diet. Those fruits which are dried and usually eaten raw, such as figs and dates, supply much nourishment in an easily digestible form.

4. Many fruits are eaten raw, while others are cooked either because they need to be cooked to taste good or because people prefer not to eat them raw. Cooking fruits can have various effects, sometimes beneficial and other times harmful. The flavor always changes when heat is applied, and in some cases, the acidity of the fruit becomes stronger. On the flip side, the fibrous material, or cellulose, in fruits becomes softer when cooked, making it easier to digest. Additionally, the sugar that's often added during cooking boosts their nutritional value. Because of these reasons, cooked fruits are quite valuable and, like raw fruits, should be an important part of the diet. Dried fruits, which are usually eaten raw, like figs and dates, provide a lot of nutrients in an easily digestible form.

5. The medicinal value of fruit has long been considered to be of importance, but this may be almost entirely disregarded, for, with the exception of the fact that most fruits are valuable as a laxative, there is nothing to consider. However, several fruits, such as blackberries and bananas, have an anti-laxative effect, and large quantities of these should for the most part be avoided, especially in the feeding of children.

5. The health benefits of fruit have been recognized for a long time, but this might be mostly overlooked. Except for the fact that many fruits are effective as laxatives, there's not much else to note. However, some fruits, like blackberries and bananas, can actually have the opposite effect, and it's best to limit their intake, especially when feeding children.

6. In general, fruits are divided into two classes, namely, food fruits and flavor fruits. As their names imply, food fruits are valuable as food, whereas flavor fruits are those distinguished by a characteristic flavor. It should be remembered that the flavors, as well as the odors, of fruits, are due chiefly to what is known as their volatile, or ethereal, oils. Fruits in which these oils are very strong are often irritating to certain persons and cause distress of some sort after eating.

6. Generally, fruits are categorized into two types: food fruits and flavor fruits. As their names suggest, food fruits are valued for their nutritional content, while flavor fruits are recognized for their distinct flavors. It's important to note that the flavors and aromas of fruits primarily come from their volatile, or essential, oils. Fruits with strong concentrations of these oils can often irritate some people and lead to discomfort after consumption.

7. In this Section, it is the purpose to acquaint the housewife with the relative value and uses of the various kinds of fruit, to teach her the best methods of preparation, and to supply her with recipes that will encourage her to make greater use of this valuable food in her family's diet. In this discussion, however, the general classification of fruits is not followed. Instead, the various fruits are arranged alphabetically under the headings Berries, Non-Tropical Fruits, Citrus Fruits, Tropical Fruits, Melons, and Dried Fruits, in order to simplify matters. While it is hardly possible to use fruits too extensively, they must not be allowed to take the place of other more nourishing foods that are required by the body. Therefore, in order to make proper use of them, their value in the diet should not be overlooked.

7. In this section, the goal is to help the homemaker understand the value and uses of different types of fruit, to teach her the best ways to prepare them, and to provide her with recipes that will inspire her to incorporate this nutritious food more into her family's meals. However, this discussion doesn't follow the usual classification of fruits. Instead, the fruits are organized alphabetically under the categories of Berries, Non-Tropical Fruits, Citrus Fruits, Tropical Fruits, Melons, and Dried Fruits for easier reference. While it's nearly impossible to use fruits too much, they shouldn't replace other essential foods that the body needs. So, to use them wisely, their nutritional value in the diet shouldn't be overlooked.


NATURE OF FRUITS

ADVANCE IN FRUIT CULTIVATION


8. It is sometimes difficult to distinguish between vegetables and fruits. For instance, the tomato is in reality a fruit, but it is commonly used as a vegetable, and rhubarb is more of a vegetable than a fruit, but it is always used as a fruit. It can therefore be seen that the line between vegetables and fruits is not clearly drawn. It is well to remember that fruit is usually the edible pulpy mass covering the seeds of various plants and trees, and that it is generally cooked or eaten raw with sugar, whereas vegetables are seldom sweetened in cooking.

8. It can be tricky to tell the difference between vegetables and fruits. For example, the tomato is technically a fruit, but people typically use it like a vegetable, while rhubarb is more like a vegetable yet is always treated as a fruit. This shows that the distinction between vegetables and fruits isn't clearly defined. It's important to remember that fruit usually refers to the juicy part that contains the seeds of different plants and trees, and it’s often cooked or eaten fresh with sugar, while vegetables are rarely sweetened when cooked.

9. Great strides have been made in the cultivation of fruit. Many varieties that formerly grew wild are now commonly cultivated. Most of the cultivated fruits are superior to the same kind in the wild state, at least in size and appearance, but often there seems to be a loss of flavor. Through cultivation, some fruits that were almost inedible in their wild state on account of containing so many seeds have been made seedless. Also, through cross-cultivation, varieties of fruit different from what formerly existed have been obtained. An example of such fruit is the loganberry which is a cross between a red raspberry and a blackberry and retains many of the qualities of each. However, some small fruits, such as blueberries, or huckleberries, are still grown wild and marketed only from their wild source.

9. Significant progress has been made in growing fruits. Many varieties that used to grow in the wild are now commonly farmed. Most cultivated fruits are better in size and appearance than their wild counterparts, but often they seem to lose some flavor. Through cultivation, some fruits that were nearly inedible in their wild state because they had too many seeds have been made seedless. Additionally, through crossbreeding, new varieties of fruit that didn’t exist before have been created. A good example is the loganberry, which is a hybrid of a red raspberry and a blackberry and keeps many qualities of both. However, some small fruits, like blueberries and huckleberries, are still harvested from the wild and only available from their natural sources.

10. While fruit is usually improved by cultivation, there has been a tendency through this means to produce fruits that will stand up for long periods of time, so that they may be marketed at great distances from the place where they are grown. For instance, apples, especially those found in the market in the spring, and other fruits, which look very fine, will many times be found to have a tough skin and to be almost tasteless.

10. While fruit is typically enhanced by farming, there has been a trend toward producing fruits that can last a long time, so they can be sold far from where they are grown. For example, apples, especially those available in the spring, and other fruits that look very appealing, often turn out to have tough skin and be nearly tasteless.

In general, fruits of delicate flavor and texture cannot be kept very long after they have ripened. To stand shipping, they must be picked in their green stage; then if they are kept in the right temperature they will ripen after picking. Bananas that are to be shipped a long distance are picked when perfectly green, but by the time the consumer buys them they are usually well ripened. In addition to bananas, a few other tropical fruits are shipped out of their native climates in small numbers and are sold at very high prices. However, many tropical fruits cannot be shipped to the Northern States because of their perishable nature.

In general, fruits with delicate flavors and textures can't be stored for long after they ripen. To withstand shipping, they need to be picked while still green; if kept at the right temperature, they'll ripen after being harvested. Bananas meant for long-distance shipping are picked when completely green, but by the time consumers buy them, they are usually nicely ripe. Along with bananas, a few other tropical fruits are shipped out of their native regions in small quantities and sold at very high prices. However, many tropical fruits can't be shipped to the Northern States due to how easily they spoil.


COMPOSITION AND FOOD VALUE OF FRUITS

COMPOSITION OF FRUITS

11. The composition of fruits is a matter of considerable importance, for on it the food value of the fruits depends. To a certain extent, the composition of all fruits is the same, but the varieties of this food differ in their food values almost as greatly as do vegetables. Many of them are extremely low in this respect, while a few of them are rather high. In order to determine the place that fruit should have in a meal, it is necessary to obtain a definite idea of the composition as well as the food value of the different varieties.

11. The makeup of fruits is really important because it determines their nutritional value. While all fruits share some similarities in composition, the different types can vary significantly in their nutritional content, much like vegetables do. Some fruits are very low in nutrients, while a few are quite rich. To figure out the role fruits should play in a meal, it’s essential to have a clear understanding of both their composition and the nutritional value of the different types.

12. PROTEIN AND FAT IN FRUITS.--Such small quantities of protein and fat are contained in fruits that very little attention need be given to these substances. Exceptions are found in avocados, or alligator pears, and in ripe olives, both of which are high in fat. Then, too, there is a small amount of protein in grapes and some other fruits, but it is not sufficient to merit consideration.

12. PROTEIN AND FAT IN FRUITS.--Fruits contain such small amounts of protein and fat that they don't require much attention. The exceptions are avocados, or alligator pears, and ripe olives, both of which are high in fat. There's also a small amount of protein in grapes and a few other fruits, but it's not enough to be significant.

13. CARBOHYDRATE IN FRUIT.--Whatever food value fruits may have, whether it be high or low, is due to the carbohydrate they contain. Some green fruits and bananas contain a very small amount of starch, but on the whole the carbohydrate of fruits is in the form of sugar and is in solution in the fruit juices. The chief form of this carbohydrate is known as levulose, or fruit sugar. However, glucose, another form of sugar, is also found in nearly all fruits, grapes and dried fruits, such as figs, raisins, etc., containing an unusually large amount. In addition, cane sugar is contained in the majority of fruits. Pectin is also a carbohydrate that is found in large quantities in some fruits, while in other fruits it is lacking. This substance is related to the gums and to cellulose. Although it is one of the carbohydrates from which no food value is derived, it is of considerable importance, because it is responsible for the jelly-making properties of fruits.

13. CARBOHYDRATE IN FRUIT.--The nutritional value of fruits, whether high or low, comes from the carbohydrates they contain. Some green fruits and bananas have a tiny amount of starch, but generally, the carbohydrates in fruits are primarily sugars dissolved in the fruit juices. The main type of carbohydrate is known as levulose, or fruit sugar. Additionally, glucose, another type of sugar, is found in almost all fruits, with grapes and dried fruits like figs and raisins having especially high amounts. Most fruits also contain cane sugar. Pectin is another carbohydrate found in large quantities in certain fruits, while it may be absent in others. This substance is related to gums and cellulose. Although it doesn't provide any nutritional value, it's very important because it gives fruits their jelly-making properties.

14. In fruits that are not fully matured, or, in other words, green fruits, the sugar has not developed to so great an extent as it has in perfectly ripe fruits. Consequently, such fruits are not so high in food value as they are when they become ripe. As is well known, it is the sugar of fruits that accounts for their sweet taste, for the sweeter the fruits, the more sugar and the less acid they contain. The quantity of this substance varies from 1 per cent. in lemons to 20 per cent. in some other fresh fruits, such as plums. In dried fruits, the amount of sugar is much higher, reaching as high as 60 per cent. or even more in such fruits as figs, dates, and raisins.

14. In fruits that are not fully matured, or green fruits, the sugar hasn't developed as much as it has in perfectly ripe fruits. As a result, these fruits aren't as nutritious as when they become ripe. It's well known that the sugar in fruits is what gives them their sweet taste; the sweeter the fruits, the more sugar and the less acid they have. The amount of sugar can range from 1 percent in lemons to 20 percent in some other fresh fruits, like plums. In dried fruits, the sugar content is much higher, reaching up to 60 percent or even more in fruits like figs, dates, and raisins.

15. CELLULOSE IN FRUIT.--In fruits, as in vegetables, cellulose is found in varying quantities. The larger the quantity, the lower will be the food value of the fruit, except where the water has been evaporated, as in the case of dried fruits. The digestibility of this cellulose, however, is not worth considering, for, while it is possible that small amounts of very young and tender cellulose from fruits may be digested, on the whole this characteristic may be disregarded. The skins and seeds of fruits, as well as the coarse material that helps to make up the pulp, are known as refuse and are treated as such by the human digestive tract; but it is to this waste material, or cellulose, that the laxative quality of fruit is largely due.

15. CELLULOSE IN FRUIT.--Fruits, like vegetables, contain varying amounts of cellulose. Generally, the more cellulose there is, the lower the nutritional value of the fruit, unless the water has been removed, like in dried fruits. The digestibility of this cellulose isn’t significant; while it’s possible that small amounts of very young and tender cellulose from fruits might be digestible, overall, this can be overlooked. The skins and seeds of fruits, along with the coarse material that contributes to the pulp, are considered byproducts and are treated as such by our digestive system; however, it’s this waste material, or cellulose, that mainly gives fruit its laxative effect.

In cases where there are digestive or intestinal troubles, it is often necessary to remove the cellulose before the fruit is eaten. The coarse material may be removed and that which is more tender may be broken up by pressing the fruit through a sieve or a strainer of some kind. The cooking of fruits is another means of making the cellulose in them more easily digested, for it softens, or disintegrates, the various particles of the indigestible material. When fruit is taken for its laxative effect and the irritation of the cellulose needs no consideration, the skins of the fruits may be eaten instead of being rejected. However, to avoid any trouble, they should be well chewed.

In cases of digestive or intestinal issues, it’s often necessary to remove the cellulose before eating the fruit. The tough material can be discarded, and the softer parts can be broken down by pressing the fruit through a sieve or strainer. Cooking fruits is another way to make the cellulose easier to digest, as it softens or breaks down the indigestible particles. When fruit is consumed for its laxative effect and the irritation from the cellulose isn’t a concern, the skins can be eaten instead of thrown away. However, to prevent any issues, they should be chewed thoroughly.

16. Minerals in Fruit.--All fruits contain a certain percentage of mineral salts. The quantity varies in the different kinds of fruits, but it averages about 1 per cent. These salts have the opposite effect on the blood from those found in meats and cereals, but they act in much the same way as the minerals of vegetables. In other words, they have a tendency to render the blood more alkaline and less acid. They are therefore one of the food constituents that help to make fruit valuable in the diet and should be retained as far as possible in its preparation. In fact, any method that results in a loss of minerals is not a good one to adopt in the preparation of fruits.

16. Minerals in Fruit.--All fruits contain a certain percentage of mineral salts. The quantity varies among different types of fruits, but it averages around 1 percent. These salts have the opposite effect on the blood compared to those found in meats and grains, but they work similarly to the minerals in vegetables. In other words, they tend to make the blood more alkaline and less acidic. Therefore, they are one of the nutrients that make fruit important in the diet and should be preserved as much as possible during preparation. In fact, any method that leads to a loss of minerals is not a good choice when preparing fruits.

The minerals commonly found in fruits are iron, lime, sodium, magnesium, potash, and phosphorus. These are in solution in the fruit juices to a very great extent, and when the juices are extracted the minerals remain in them.

The minerals typically found in fruits are iron, calcium, sodium, magnesium, potassium, and phosphorus. These minerals are dissolved in the fruit juices to a large extent, and when the juices are extracted, the minerals stay in them.

17. Acids in Fruit.--Some fruits contain only a small amount of acid, while others contain larger quantities. It is these acids, together with the sugar and the volatile oils of fruits, that constitute the entire flavor of this food. Most ripe fruits contain less acid than unripe ones, and cooked fruits are often higher in acid than the same fruits when raw.

17. Acids in Fruit.--Some fruits have only a small amount of acid, while others have more. It’s these acids, along with the sugar and the fragrant oils in fruits, that make up the overall flavor of this food. Most ripe fruits have less acid than unripe ones, and cooked fruits often have higher acid levels than the same fruits when they’re raw.

Numerous kinds of acid are found in the different varieties of fruits. For example, lemons, oranges, grapefruit, and a few other fruits belonging to the class known as citrus fruits contain citric acid; peaches, plums, apricots, and apples, malic acid; and grapes and many other fruits, tartaric acid.

Numerous types of acids are present in different kinds of fruit. For instance, lemons, oranges, grapefruit, and a few other fruits classified as citrus contain citric acid; peaches, plums, apricots, and apples contain malic acid; and grapes and many other fruits contain tartaric acid.



TABLE I
COMPOSITION AND FOOD VALUE OF FRUITS
FruitWaterProteinFatCarbohydrateMineral
Matter
Food Value
per Pound,
in Calories
Apples, fresh84.6.4.514.2.3290
Apples, dried28.11.62.266.12.01,350
Apricots, fresh85.01.1--13.4.5270
Apricots, dried29.44.71.062.52.41,290
Bananas75.31.3.622.0.8460
Blackberries86.31.31.010.9.5270
Cherries80.91.0.816.7.6365
Cranberries88.9.4.69.9.2215
Currants85.01.5--12.8.7265
Dates15.42.12.878.41.31,615
Figs, fresh79.11.5--18.8.6380
Figs, dried18.84.3.374.22.41,475
Grapefruit86.9.8.211.6.5240
Grapes77.41.31.619.2.5450
Huckleberries81.9.6.616.6.3345
Lemons89.31.0.78.5.5205
Muskmelons89.5.6--9.3.6185
Nectarines82.9.6--15.9.6305
Oranges86.9.8.211.6.5240
Peaches89.4.7.19.4.4190
Pears84.4.6.514.1.4295
Persimmons66.1.8.731.5.9630
Pineapple89.3.4.39.7.3200
Plums78.41.0--20.1.5395
Pomegranates76.81.51.619.5.6460
Prunes, fresh79.6.9--18.9.6370
Prunes, dried22.32.1--73.32.31,400
Raisins14.62.63.376.13.41,605
Raspberries, red85.81.0--12.6.6255
Raspberries, black84.11.71.012.6.6310
Rhubarb94.4.6.73.6.7105
Strawberries90.41.0.67.4.6180
Watermelon92.4.4.26.7.3140

18. The juice of fruits that contain very little sugar and a large quantity of acid, such as the lemon, may be used for the seasoning of food in much the same way that vinegar is used. It may also be diluted with other liquids and used for a beverage. Then, again, various kinds of fruit juices are subjected to a process of fermentation and, through the production of another acid, are made into vinegar and wines. When apples are treated in this way, the fermentation produces acetic acid and, in addition, a certain amount of alcohol. It is on this principle that the making of wines depends.

18. The juice from fruits that have very little sugar and a lot of acid, like lemons, can be used to season food just like vinegar. It can also be mixed with other liquids to make a drink. Additionally, different types of fruit juices undergo fermentation, which produces another acid and turns them into vinegar and wines. When apples are fermented, they create acetic acid and some alcohol. This principle is what wine-making is based on.

19. WATER IN FRUIT.--The water content of fresh fruits is very high, reaching 94 per cent. in some varieties. Dried fruits, on the other hand, contain much less water, their content being in some cases as low as 15 to 20 per cent. It naturally follows that the fruits low in water are high in food value, while those containing considerable water have in their composition less of the material that adds food value. The high percentage of water in fresh fruits, together with the acids they contain, accounts for the fact that these fruits are so refreshing. Fruits of this kind, in addition to having this refreshing quality, help to provide the necessary liquid in the diet.

19. WATER IN FRUIT.--Fresh fruits have a very high water content, reaching as much as 94 percent in some varieties. Dried fruits, however, have much less water, with some containing as low as 15 to 20 percent. Naturally, this means that fruits low in water have a higher food value, while those that contain a lot of water have less of the nutrients that contribute to food value. The high water content in fresh fruits, combined with the acids they have, explains why these fruits are so refreshing. In addition to being refreshing, these fruits also help provide the necessary liquids in our diet.

20. TABLE SHOWING COMPOSITION AND FOOD VALUE OF FRUITS.--Just as fruits vary in their composition, so do they vary in their food value. This fact is clearly shown in Table I, which gives the percentage of food substances contained in different fruits and the food value per pound, in calories, that these fruits contain. As in the table showing the composition and food value of vegetables given in Vegetables, Part 1, the figures in this table are taken from Atwater's Table of American Food Materials and refer to the edible part of the material. Reference to Table I, as progress is made with the study of fruits and their preparation, will be of much assistance in learning the place that fruits occupy in the dietary.

20. TABLE SHOWING COMPOSITION AND FOOD VALUE OF FRUITS.--Just like fruits differ in their composition, they also differ in their nutritional value. This is clearly illustrated in Table I, which provides the percentage of nutrients found in various fruits and the calorie content per pound of these fruits. Similar to the table showing the composition and nutritional value of vegetables found in Vegetables, Part 1, the data in this table is sourced from Atwater's Table of American Food Materials and pertains to the edible portions of the fruits. Referring to Table I while studying fruits and their preparation will be very helpful in understanding the role that fruits play in a balanced diet.


FOOD VALUE OF FRUITS

21. EFFECT OF RIPENESS ON FRUITS.--There is a very marked difference between ripe and green fruits as to their composition, flavor, texture, palatability, and digestibility. Green fruits, containing more acid than ripe ones, serve some purposes for which ripe fruits of the same variety cannot be used so well. For instance, a very much better jelly can be made from grapes that are not entirely ripe than from those which have completely ripened. Green fruits contain less sugar than do ripe ones, and so they are more sour to the taste. In some cases, the carbohydrate found in green fruits is partly in the form of starch, which in the process of development is changed to sugar. The cellulose of green fruits, especially that distributed throughout the pulp of the fruit itself, is usually tougher and harder than that which is found in the same fruit after it has ripened.

21. EFFECT OF RIPENESS ON FRUITS.--There is a noticeable difference between ripe and unripe fruits in terms of their composition, flavor, texture, taste, and digestibility. Unripe fruits, which have more acid than ripe ones, serve some purposes better than ripe fruits of the same variety. For example, a much better jelly can be made from grapes that are not fully ripe than from those that have completely ripened. Unripe fruits have less sugar than ripe ones, making them taste more sour. In some cases, the carbohydrates in unripe fruits are partly in the form of starch, which is converted to sugar as the fruit develops. The cellulose in unripe fruits, especially within the pulp, is usually tougher and harder than in the same fruit once it has ripened.

22. DIGESTIBILITY OF FRUITS.--The ripeness and freshness of fruits determine their digestibility to a great extent, but the peculiarities of each person have much to do with this matter. Many times a particular fruit will agree with almost every one but a few exceptional persons, and, for no apparent reason except their own peculiarities of digestion, it disagrees very badly with them. Abnormal conditions of the alimentary tract, however, cannot be taken into consideration in a general discussion on the digestibility of foods, for it is a subject that cannot be treated except from a dietetic standpoint. A safe rule to follow when a fruit is found to disagree with a person is to omit it from that person's diet. This need not prove a hardship, for the wide range, or variety, of fruits makes it possible to find one or more kinds that will agree with each person.

22. DIGESTIBILITY OF FRUITS.--The ripeness and freshness of fruits significantly affect how well they are digested, but individual differences also play a big role. Often, a specific fruit may work well for nearly everyone except for a few people who, for reasons related to their unique digestive systems, have a bad reaction to it. However, unusual conditions of the digestive tract shouldn't be included in a general discussion about food digestibility, as this topic should be approached from a dietary perspective. A good rule of thumb when a fruit doesn't sit well with someone is to eliminate it from their diet. This doesn't have to be difficult, since the wide variety of fruits available allows for finding one or more types that suit each person's needs.

23. As has been explained, sugar is the food material from which the nutritive value of fruits is obtained. With the exception of a few predigested foods, manufactured in such a way that they can be digested easily, this sugar is probably the most easily digested form of food that can be obtained. This substance, being held in solution in the fruit juices, which are encased in a cellulose covering, depends to some extent for its digestion on the hardness of the cellulose. When this covering is old and hard or green and tough, as the case may be, it is difficult for the digestive juices to break through and attack the sugar contained inside. As this difficulty is not encountered when fruit is fresh and ripe, its freshness and ripeness become important factors in digestibility. Cooking is also an important factor because it softens the cellulose, but there are certain other changes made by cooking that must be taken into consideration as well.

23. As explained, sugar is the source of the nutrients found in fruits. Besides a few specially processed foods that are made for easy digestion, this sugar is likely the easiest type of food to digest. This substance, dissolved in fruit juices that are contained within a cellulose skin, relies partly on the toughness of the cellulose for digestion. When this skin is old and hard or green and tough, it becomes hard for digestive juices to penetrate and access the sugar inside. This problem doesn’t arise when the fruit is fresh and ripe, making its freshness and ripeness key factors in how well it can be digested. Cooking is also significant because it softens the cellulose, but there are other changes that cooking brings about which need to be considered too.

24. EFFECT OF COOKING ON FRUIT.--Cooking affects fruits in numerous ways, depending on the condition of the fruit itself, the method used, and the length of time the heat is applied. When fruits are cooked in water or in a thin sirup, the cellulose becomes softened. On the other hand, if they are cooked in a heavy sirup, as, for instance, in the making of preserves, the cellulose becomes hardened and the fruit, instead of breaking up, remains whole or nearly so and becomes tough and hard in texture. The addition of quantities of sugar, as in the latter case, besides helping to keep the fruit whole, increases its food value.

24. EFFECT OF COOKING ON FRUIT.--Cooking influences fruits in many ways, depending on the fruit's condition, the cooking method, and how long heat is applied. When fruits are cooked in water or a light syrup, the cellulose softens. However, if cooked in a thick syrup, like when making preserves, the cellulose hardens and the fruit stays whole or almost whole, becoming tough and hard in texture. Adding a lot of sugar, as in the latter case, not only helps keep the fruit intact but also boosts its nutritional value.

25. Another change that usually takes place when fruit is cooked is in its flavor. This change is due either to an increase in the acid contained in the fruit or to a decrease in the amount of sugar. Some authorities believe that cooking increases the amount of acid, while others hold the view that, when fruit is cooked without removing the skins and seeds, the acid contained in the seeds and skins and not noticeable when the fruit is fresh, is released during the cooking. Such is undoubtedly the case with plums. The change that is brought about in the sugar by the cooking of fruits consists in changing the cane sugar into levulose and dextrose, which are not so sweet. This change accounts for the fact that some cooked fruits are less sweet than others, in spite of the fact that the acid does not seem to be increased.

25. Another change that usually happens when fruit is cooked is its flavor. This change occurs either because the acid in the fruit increases or the sugar content decreases. Some experts think that cooking boosts the amount of acid, while others believe that when fruit is cooked with the skins and seeds intact, the acid from those parts, which isn't noticeable when the fruit is fresh, is released during cooking. This is definitely true for plums. The alteration in the sugar during the cooking of fruits involves converting cane sugar into levulose and dextrose, which are less sweet. This change explains why some cooked fruits are not as sweet as others, even though the acid doesn't seem to increase.

26. In addition to producing certain changes in fruit, cooking, if done thoroughly, renders fruits sterile, as it does other foods; that is, it kills any bacteria that the fruits may contain. Advantage of this fact is taken when fruits are canned for future use. Although most persons prefer raw fruit to that which is cooked, there are some who object to eating this food raw, but who are not always certain as to the reason for their objection. Like other raw foods, fruits in their fresh state contain vitamines; that is, a substance that helps to keep the body in a healthy, normal condition. These are found to some extent in cooked fruits, but not in the same quantity as in raw ones; consequently, as much use as possible should be made of raw fruits in the diet.

26. In addition to causing certain changes in fruit, cooking, when done thoroughly, makes fruits sterile, just like other foods; it kills any bacteria that might be present. This fact is taken advantage of when fruits are canned for later use. While most people prefer fresh fruit over cooked fruit, some individuals avoid eating it raw and aren’t always sure why. Like other raw foods, fresh fruits contain vitamins, which help keep the body healthy and functioning well. These vitamins are present in cooked fruits, but not in the same amounts as in raw ones; therefore, we should include as much raw fruit as possible in our diet.


FRUITS AND THEIR PREPARATION AS FOOD

PREPARING AND SERVING FRUITS

27. REQUIRED SANITARY CONDITIONS.--Since large quantities of fruits are eaten raw, it is necessary that they be handled in the most sanitary manner if disease from their use be prevented. However, they are often in an unsanitary condition when they reach the housewife. For instance, they become contaminated from the soiled hands of the persons who handle them, from the dirt deposited on them during their growth, from the fertilizer that may be used on the soil, from flies and other insects that may crawl over them, and from being stored, displayed, or sold in surroundings where they may be exposed to the dirt from streets and other contaminating sources. Because of the possibility of all these sources of contamination, it is essential that fruits that are not to be cooked be thoroughly washed before they are eaten. It is true that a certain amount of flavor or food material may be lost from the washing, but this is of little importance compared with the possibility of preventing disease.

27. REQUIRED SANITARY CONDITIONS.--Since a lot of fruits are eaten raw, it's essential that they are handled in the cleanest way possible to avoid disease. However, they often arrive at the housewife's home in an unsanitary state. For example, they can be contaminated by the dirty hands of those who handle them, the dirt collected during their growth, the fertilizers used on the soil, by flies and other insects that might crawl over them, and from being stored, displayed, or sold in places where they can be exposed to dirt from the streets and other contaminating sources. Given the risk of these contamination sources, it's crucial that fruits meant to be eaten raw are thoroughly washed beforehand. While some flavor or nutrients might be lost during washing, this is a minor issue compared to the risk of causing illness.

28. WASHING FRUITS.--The manner of washing fruits depends largely on the nature of the fruit. Fruits that have a sticky surface, such as raisins, figs, and dates, usually have to be washed in several waters. Hard fruits, such as pears, apples, plums, etc., should be washed with running water. Berries and softer fruits require more careful procedure, it usually being advisable to pour them into a pan containing water and then, after stirring them around in the water until all dirt is removed, take them from the water, rather than pour the water from them. In any event, all fruits eaten raw should be properly washed.

28. WASHING FRUITS.--The way you wash fruits mostly depends on the type of fruit. Fruits with a sticky surface, like raisins, figs, and dates, usually need to be washed in several bowls of water. Hard fruits, such as pears, apples, plums, and so on, should be rinsed under running water. Berries and softer fruits require a more careful approach; it’s usually better to place them in a bowl of water and then gently stir them until all the dirt is removed, taking them out of the water instead of dumping the water off them. In any case, all fruits meant to be eaten raw should be washed thoroughly.

29. SERVING FRUITS.--While the serving of fruits is a simple matter, it should be done in as dainty a way as possible, so as not to detract from their natural attractiveness. If the skins are to remain on the fruits while serving, a knife, preferably a fruit knife, should be served with them, and nothing smaller than a salad plate should be used. The carefully washed leaves of the fruit served make an attractive garnish. For instance, large, perfect strawberries with the stems on, when heaped on a plate garnished with strawberry leaves and served with a small dish of powdered sugar, are always attractive. Likewise, a bunch of grapes served on grape leaves never fails to attract.

29. SERVING FRUITS.--Serving fruits is a straightforward task, but it should be done in a way that's visually appealing to highlight their natural beauty. If the skins are to stay on the fruits, a knife, ideally a fruit knife, should be provided with them, and no smaller than a salad plate should be used. The carefully washed leaves of the fruit served can make a lovely garnish. For example, large, perfect strawberries with stems intact, piled on a plate decorated with strawberry leaves and accompanied by a small dish of powdered sugar, are always appealing. Similarly, a bunch of grapes served on grape leaves never fails to impress.

A mixture of a number of fruits, such as peaches, pears, and plums, or, in winter, oranges, bananas, and apples, piled in a large bowl and passed after salad plates have been distributed, not only makes an excellent dessert, but permits the persons served to take their choice.

A mix of several fruits, like peaches, pears, and plums, or, during winter, oranges, bananas, and apples, piled in a big bowl and passed around after the salad plates have been handed out, not only makes a great dessert but also lets everyone choose what they want.

Fresh berries, sliced peaches, bananas, oranges, etc. may be served in sauce dishes, which should be placed on a service plate. They may be passed or served from a bowl by the hostess. Canned or stewed fruits may be served in the same way.

Fresh berries, sliced peaches, bananas, oranges, etc. can be served in small bowls, which should be placed on a serving plate. They can be passed around or served from a bowl by the host. Canned or stewed fruits can be served in the same way.


BERRIES

NATURE AND CARE

30. BERRIES are among the most perishable fruits and begin to come into market early in the summer season. In most localities, the berry season begins with strawberries and ends with blackberries. Because the numerous varieties are somewhat juicy and soft and therefore extremely perishable, they will not stand shipping and storage for long periods of time. The quality of berries depends much on the nature of the season, as well as on the locality in which the berries are grown. If there is a good supply of rain, the berries will be very moist, containing a large amount of pulp in proportion to seeds and skins; but if the season is very dry, the berries are likely to be less moist and consequently less palatable. A general use of berries, and to almost every one the most important, is the making of jams, jellies, and preserves.

30. BERRIES are some of the most perishable fruits and start arriving in markets early in the summer. In most areas, the berry season kicks off with strawberries and wraps up with blackberries. Since there are many varieties that are quite juicy and soft, they are extremely perishable and can't be shipped or stored for long periods. The quality of berries heavily relies on the season and the location where they are grown. If there's plenty of rain, the berries will be very juicy, with a lot of pulp compared to seeds and skins; but in a dry season, the berries tend to be less juicy and therefore less tasty. One of the main uses of berries, and arguably the most important for many, is making jams, jellies, and preserves.

In the preparation of berries for the table, they should be handled as little as possible in order to prevent them from breaking up and losing their shape. After being purchased, they should be kept where it is cool until they are to be used. It is advisable not to wash them until just before serving, as the extra handling usually bruises them and causes them to spoil.

In getting berries ready for the table, you should handle them as little as possible to avoid them breaking apart and losing their shape. Once bought, keep them in a cool place until you’re ready to use them. It’s best not to wash them until just before serving, since extra handling can usually bruise them and make them spoil.

The different varieties of berries are here taken up in alphabetical order so as to make the matter easy for reference. Those of which extensive use is made contain one or more recipes that may be followed without any hesitation. In a few instances, as in the case of currants, recipes are not included, as the fruits are limited to only a few uses and directions for these occur elsewhere.

The various types of berries are arranged in alphabetical order to make them easy to find. Those that are used extensively include one or more recipes that can be followed without any doubt. In a few cases, like with currants, recipes are not included since the fruits have only a few uses, and instructions for these can be found elsewhere.


BLACKBERRIES

31. BLACKBERRIES come late in the summer season. Good varieties of cultivated blackberries, which are large in size and contain comparatively few seeds, are the best for use. However, in some localities, uncultivated blackberries grow in sufficient quantities to be useful for food. Blackberries are used extensively for jam, as they make an excellent kind that appeals to most persons. Their juice may be used for jelly, but if the berries are to be utilized most successfully in this way they must be picked before they are thoroughly ripe or some fruit that will supply an additional quantity of pectin may have to be combined with them. Fresh blackberries may be served for dessert with sugar and cream. Otherwise, the use of this fruit in desserts is not very extensive, except where the canned berries are used for pastry or pie or are eaten for sauce or where the jam is used in making up various dessert dishes.

31. BLACKBERRIES come late in the summer. The best varieties of cultivated blackberries are large and have relatively few seeds, making them ideal for use. However, in some areas, wild blackberries grow in enough quantities to be useful for food. Blackberries are widely used for jam, as they make a delicious option that most people enjoy. Their juice can be used for jelly, but to achieve the best results, the berries need to be picked before they are fully ripe, or you might need to mix in some fruit that adds extra pectin. Fresh blackberries can be served as dessert with sugar and cream. Other than that, their use in desserts is limited, except for canned berries used in pastries or pies, or served as a sauce, or when the jam is incorporated into various dessert recipes.

Very little preparation is necessary in getting blackberries ready to serve. They should simply be looked over carefully, so that all imperfect ones and all foreign matter may be removed, and then washed in cold water.

Very little preparation is needed to get blackberries ready to serve. They should just be checked carefully to remove any imperfect ones and any foreign matter, and then washed in cold water.

32. BLACKBERRY SPONGE.--One of the few desserts made from fresh blackberries is that explained in the accompanying recipe and known as blackberry sponge. This is very delicious, for the berries are combined with cake and the combination then served with whipped cream.

32. BLACKBERRY SPONGE.--One of the few desserts made from fresh blackberries is the recipe provided here, called blackberry sponge. This dessert is incredibly tasty, as the berries are mixed with cake and served with whipped cream.

BLACKBERRY SPONGE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. blackberries
  • 3/4 c. sugar
  • 1 c. water
  • 4 pieces plain loaf or sponge cake
  • Whipped cream

Heat half of the berries with the sugar and the water until they are mushy. Then force the whole through a sieve. Cut the cake into cubes and put them into a bowl. Pour the juice and the blackberry pulp on the cake. Press the mixture down with a spoon until it is quite solid and set in the refrigerator or some other cold place to cool. Turn out of the bowl on a large plate, garnish with the remaining berries, heap with the whipped cream, and serve.

Heat half of the berries with the sugar and water until they're soft. Then strain the mixture through a sieve. Cut the cake into cubes and place them in a bowl. Pour the juice and blackberry pulp over the cake. Press the mixture down with a spoon until it's firm, then put it in the refrigerator or another cool place to chill. Turn it out onto a large plate, garnish with the remaining berries, top with whipped cream, and serve.


BLUEBERRIES

33. BLUEBERRIES, which are not cultivated, but grow in the wild state, are a many-seeded berry, blue or bluish-black in color. Huckleberries, although belonging to a different class, are commonly regarded as blueberries by many persons. Berries of this kind occur in many varieties. Some grow on low bushes close to the ground, others are found on taller bushes, and still others grow on very tall bushes. Again, some grow in dry ground in a mountainous region, others grow in a level, sandy soil, and other varieties succeed better on swampy soil. Berries of this class are not so perishable as most other berries, but in many localities they cannot be purchased at all, for, as a rule, they are used only in the immediate vicinity in which they grow.

33. BLUEBERRIES, which aren’t farmed but grow wild, are a multi-seeded berry that is blue or bluish-black in color. Huckleberries, while classified differently, are often considered blueberries by many people. This type of berry comes in various varieties. Some grow on low bushes close to the ground, others are found on taller bushes, and some grow on very high bushes. Additionally, some thrive in dry mountainous areas, others do well in flat, sandy soil, and other varieties prefer swampy ground. Berries of this type are not as perishable as most other berries, but in many areas, they can’t be bought at all because, generally, they are only used in the nearby regions where they grow.

Blueberries have small seeds and coarse, tough skins. They contain very little acid, but are excellent for pies and sauce. However, they will make jelly very well if there are a few partly ripe berries among them, and their flavor is improved if some fruit containing acid is added to them. To prepare them for use, whether they are to be served raw or cooked, look them over carefully in order that all green or spoiled ones are removed and then wash them well in cold water.

Blueberries have tiny seeds and rough, tough skins. They have very little acidity but are great for pies and sauces. However, they can make excellent jelly if there are a few partly ripe berries mixed in, and their flavor gets better if you add some acidic fruit. To get them ready to use, whether you're serving them raw or cooking them, go through them carefully to remove any green or spoiled ones, then wash them thoroughly in cold water.

34. PRESSED BLUEBERRY PUDDING.--A delicious pudding can be made by combining blueberries with slices of bread. The accompanying recipe gives directions for pudding of this kind.

34. PRESSED BLUEBERRY PUDDING.--You can make a tasty pudding by mixing blueberries with slices of bread. The following recipe provides instructions for this type of pudding.

PRESSED BLUEBERRY PUDDING

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 1 qt. blueberries
  • 1 c. water
  • 1/2 c. sugar
  • 8 slices bread
  • Whipped cream

Put the blueberries, water, and sugar into a saucepan and boil for a few minutes. Put four of the slices of bread, which should be cut about 1/2 inch thick, in the bottom of a square pan. Pour one-half of the blueberries and the juice over the bread, and put the four remaining slices of bread on top of the berries. Pour the rest of the blueberries and juice over the bread. Place another square pan over the top and weight it down so as to press the pudding. Then set the pudding in the refrigerator until it is cool. Cut into squares, remove from the pan, and serve with sweetened whipped cream.

Put the blueberries, water, and sugar in a saucepan and boil for a few minutes. Place four slices of bread, cut to about 1/2 inch thick, in the bottom of a square pan. Pour half of the blueberries and the juice over the bread, and then add the remaining four slices of bread on top of the berries. Pour the rest of the blueberries and juice over the bread. Place another square pan on top and weigh it down to press the pudding. Then put the pudding in the fridge until it cools. Cut it into squares, remove it from the pan, and serve with sweetened whipped cream.

35. BLUEBERRY PUDDING.--A baking-powder-biscuit dough baked with blueberries makes a very appetizing dessert. To serve with a pudding of this kind, a cream or a hard sauce should be made.

35. BLUEBERRY PUDDING.--A baking powder biscuit dough baked with blueberries makes a really tasty dessert. To serve with this kind of pudding, you should prepare a cream or a hard sauce.

BLUEBERRY PUDDING

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • Baking-powder-biscuit dough
  • 1 qt. blueberries
  • 1/2 c. sugar

Make a rather thin baking-powder-biscuit mixture. Spread a layer of this in the bottom of a square pan and cover it with a layer of the blueberries. Pour 1/4 cupful of the sugar over the berries and then cover with another layer of the dough. Over this, pour the remainder of the berries and sprinkle the rest of the sugar over all. Place in the oven and bake for about 20 minutes. Remove from the oven, cut into squares, and serve with cream or hard sauce.

Make a fairly thin biscuit mixture using baking powder. Spread a layer of this in the bottom of a square pan and top it with a layer of blueberries. Sprinkle 1/4 cup of sugar over the berries, then cover it with another layer of dough. On top of that, add the remaining berries and sprinkle the leftover sugar over everything. Place it in the oven and bake for about 20 minutes. Take it out of the oven, cut it into squares, and serve with cream or hard sauce.


CRANBERRIES

36. CRANBERRIES grow wild in many localities, but most persons who use them buy them in the market as a cultivated fruit. Their season begins in the fall and lasts until early spring, and during this time they can usually be obtained in the market. They contain considerable acid and consequently require a great deal of sugar to make them sufficiently sweet to be palatable. They are more often served as an accompaniment to a dinner course, especially with turkey or other poultry, than eaten as a sauce. At times they are used in the making of muffins, pudding, and various kinds of pastry.

36. CRANBERRIES grow wild in many areas, but most people who use them buy them in stores as a cultivated fruit. Their season starts in the fall and lasts until early spring, and during this time they are usually available in the market. They have a high acidity and therefore need a lot of sugar to make them sweet enough to enjoy. They are more commonly served as a side dish for dinner, especially with turkey or other poultry, rather than eaten as a sauce. Sometimes they are used in making muffins, pudding, and various types of pastries.

One of the advantages of cranberries is that they keep very well in the raw state. However, before they are cooked, they should be looked over carefully, freed of any stems, foreign material, and spoiled berries, and then washed thoroughly in cold water.

One of the benefits of cranberries is that they last a long time in their raw form. However, before cooking them, you should carefully check for any stems, foreign objects, and spoiled berries, and then wash them thoroughly in cold water.

37. CRANBERRY SAUCE.--One can hardly imagine a turkey dinner without cranberry sauce as one of the accompaniments; but it may be served when meats other than turkey are used. In fact, because of its tart flavor, it forms a most appetizing addition to any meal.

37. CRANBERRY SAUCE.--It’s hard to picture a turkey dinner without cranberry sauce as one of the sides, but it can be served with other meats too. In fact, thanks to its tart flavor, it makes a delicious addition to any meal.

CRANBERRY SAUCE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1-1/2 c. water
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 4 c. cranberries

Add the water to the cranberries and place over the fire to cook in a closely covered kettle. As soon as the skins of the berries have cracked, add the sugar. Cook slowly for a few minutes or until the sugar is completely dissolved. Remove from the fire and cool before serving.

Add the water to the cranberries and put them over the heat in a tightly covered pot. Once the skins of the berries have burst, add the sugar. Cook slowly for a few minutes or until the sugar is fully dissolved. Remove from the heat and let it cool before serving.

38. CRANBERRY JELLY.--If the cranberries are preferred without the skins, cranberry jelly should be tried. When cool, this solidifies and may be served in attractive ways.

38. CRANBERRY JELLY.--If you prefer cranberries without the skins, you should try making cranberry jelly. Once it cools, it solidifies and can be served in appealing ways.

CRANBERRY JELLY

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 c. water
  • 1 qt. cranberries
  • 2 c. sugar

Pour the water over the cranberries and cook them for 10 or 15 minutes. Then mash them through a sieve or a colander with a wooden potato masher. Add the sugar to the mashed cranberries. Return to the heat and cook for 5 to 8 minutes longer. Turn into a mold and cool.

Pour the water over the cranberries and cook them for 10 to 15 minutes. Then mash them through a sieve or colander with a wooden potato masher. Add the sugar to the mashed cranberries. Return to the heat and cook for another 5 to 8 minutes. Pour into a mold and let cool.


RASPBERRIES

39. RASPBERRIES come in two general varieties, which are commonly known as red and black. There are many species of each kind, and all of them are much favored, as they are delicious fruit. As a raw fruit, raspberries have their most satisfactory use, but they may be made into several excellent desserts and they are also much used for canning and preserving. They are a perishable fruit and so do not keep well. Because of their softness, they have to be washed very carefully to prevent them from breaking or becoming mushy.

39. RASPBERRIES come in two main types, commonly known as red and black. There are many species of each type, and all are highly regarded because they are delicious. Raspberries are best enjoyed fresh, but they can also be made into several excellent desserts and are widely used for canning and preserving. They are a perishable fruit, so they don't last long. Due to their softness, they need to be washed very gently to avoid crushing or getting mushy.

40. RED-RASPBERRY WHIP.--No more dainty dessert can be made than raspberry whip, which is explained in the accompanying recipe. Cake that is not very rich, such as ladyfingers or sponge cake, makes a very good accompaniment for this dessert.

40. RED-RASPBERRY WHIP.—There's no more delicate dessert than raspberry whip, as detailed in the recipe below. A light cake, like ladyfingers or sponge cake, pairs wonderfully with this dessert.

RED-RASPBERRY WHIP

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. raspberries
  • 1 c. powdered sugar
  • 2 egg whites

Put the raspberries, sugar, and egg whites into a bowl. Mash the berries before starting to whip. Beat the mixture with an egg whip until it is reduced to a pulpy mass and is stiff and fluffy. Pile lightly into a bowl, chill, and serve with ladyfingers or sponge cake.

Put the raspberries, sugar, and egg whites into a bowl. Mash the berries before you start whipping. Beat the mixture with a whisk until it turns into a pulpy mass and is stiff and fluffy. Lightly pile it into a bowl, chill, and serve with ladyfingers or sponge cake.

41. RASPBERRY SHORTCAKE.--Either black or red raspberries make a delicious shortcake when combined with a cake or a biscuit mixture. Directions for making such a shortcake are given in the accompanying recipe.

41. RASPBERRY SHORTCAKE.--Both black and red raspberries create a tasty shortcake when mixed with a cake or biscuit batter. Instructions for making this shortcake are provided in the recipe below.

RASPBERRY SHORTCAKE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. raspberries
  • 1 c. sugar
  • Biscuit or plain-cake dough

Mash or chop the berries, as preferred, and add the sugar to them. Bake the biscuit or plain-cake dough in a single, thick layer, and when it has been removed from the pan split it into halves with a sharp knife. Spread half the berries between the two pieces of biscuit or cake and the remaining half on top. Cut into pieces of the desired size and serve with plain or whipped cream.

Mash or chop the berries, as you like, and mix in the sugar. Bake the biscuit or plain cake batter in a single, thick layer. Once it's out of the pan, carefully slice it in half with a sharp knife. Spread half of the berries between the two layers of biscuit or cake, and place the rest on top. Cut into your desired size and serve with plain or whipped cream.


STRAWBERRIES

42. STRAWBERRIES are perhaps more popular than any other kind of berry. They are reddish in color, have a somewhat acid flavor, and range in size from 1/2 inch to 2 inches in diameter. Strawberries are much used for jams and preserves; they may also be used for making a delicious jelly, but as they lack pectin this ingredient must be supplied. These berries are eaten fresh to a great extent, but are also much used for pastry making and for various kinds of dessert; in fact, there is practically no limit to the number of recipes that may be given for strawberries. Before they are used in any way, they should be washed thoroughly in cold water and then their hulls should be removed.

42. Strawberries are probably more popular than any other type of berry. They are red, have a slightly tart flavor, and range in size from 1/2 inch to 2 inches in diameter. Strawberries are commonly used for jams and preserves; they can also be made into a tasty jelly, but since they don’t contain pectin, that needs to be added. These berries are mostly eaten fresh, but they’re also widely used in pastries and various desserts; in fact, there’s practically no end to the number of recipes that can be created with strawberries. Before using them in any way, they should be washed thoroughly in cold water, and then their stems should be removed.

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

43. STRAWBERRY SHORTCAKE.--For strawberry shortcake, either a biscuit or a plain-cake mixture may be used, some persons preferring the one and other persons the other. This may be made in a large cake, as shown in Fig. 1, and then cut into pieces, or it may be made into individual cakes, as Fig. 2 shows. Whichever plan is followed, the cakes are split in the same way and the crushed berries inserted between the halves. This dish may be made more attractive in appearance if a few of the finest berries are saved and used as a garniture.

43. STRAWBERRY SHORTCAKE.--For strawberry shortcake, you can use either a biscuit or a plain cake mixture, with some people preferring one over the other. This can be made as a large cake, like in Fig. 1, and then cut into pieces, or as individual cakes, as shown in Fig. 2. Whichever method you choose, you split the cakes the same way and add the crushed berries between the halves. This dish can look more appealing if you save a few of the best berries to use as a garnish.

STRAWBERRY SHORTCAKE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. strawberries
  • 1 c. sugar
  • Biscuit or plain cake dough

Mash or chop the berries, add the sugar to them, and let them stand until the sugar has dissolved. Bake the biscuit or plain-cake dough in a single thick layer or, if desired, bake it in individual cakes, cutting the biscuit dough with a cookie cutter and putting the cake mixture in muffin pans. Remove from the pan, cut in two with a sharp knife, and spread half of the berries over the lower piece. Set the upper piece on the berries. In the case of the large cake, sprinkle powdered sugar over the top and then on this arrange a number of the largest and finest of the berries, as Fig. 1 shows, as a garniture. Cut in pieces of the desired size and serve with or without either plain or whipped cream. In preparing the individual cakes, spread a spoonful or two of the crushed berries over the top, as Fig. 2 shows, and serve with whipped cream.

Mash or chop the berries, mix in the sugar, and let them sit until the sugar dissolves. Bake the biscuit or plain cake batter in a single thick layer, or if you prefer, bake them as individual cakes by cutting the biscuit dough with a cookie cutter and placing the batter in muffin pans. Take them out of the pan, slice in half with a sharp knife, and spread half of the berries over the bottom piece. Place the top piece on the berries. For the large cake, sprinkle powdered sugar on top and arrange some of the biggest and finest berries on it as shown in Fig. 1 for decoration. Cut into pieces of your desired size and serve with or without plain or whipped cream. For the individual cakes, spoon a dollop or two of the crushed berries on top as shown in Fig. 2, and serve with whipped cream.

44. STRAWBERRY WHIP.--Strawberries may be used instead of raspberries in the recipe for red-raspberry whip. When prepared in this way and served with fresh cake, strawberries make a very appetizing dessert.

44. STRAWBERRY WHIP.--You can use strawberries instead of raspberries in the recipe for red-raspberry whip. When made this way and served with fresh cake, strawberries create a delicious dessert.

45. OTHER STRAWBERRY DESSERTS.--If it is desired to serve strawberries just with sugar, they can be made attractive with very little effort. Garnish a plate with some of the strawberry leaves and on them place a few fine large strawberries that have been washed but have not had the hulls removed. Serve a small dish of powdered sugar with the strawberries, so that they may be dipped into the sugar and eaten by holding the hull of the berry in the fingers. Strawberries crushed with sugar and served with blanc mange or custard also make a very delicious dessert.

45. OTHER STRAWBERRY DESSERTS.—If you want to serve strawberries simply with sugar, you can make them look appealing with very little effort. Decorate a plate with some strawberry leaves and place a few large, washed strawberries on top, leaving the hulls intact. Serve a small dish of powdered sugar alongside the strawberries, so guests can dip them in the sugar and eat them by holding the hulls. Strawberries crushed with sugar and served with panna cotta or custard also make a tasty dessert.

[Illustration: FIG. 2]

MISCELLANEOUS BERRIES

46. CURRANTS come in three varieties--red, white, and black. They are not often eaten fresh, but are generally utilized for making jellies, jams, and preserves, or for pastry and pies. When they are to be used for jelly, it is not necessary to pick them from the stems, as they may be washed and cooked on their stems. Some varieties of currants are dried and these are used extensively in the making of cakes, cookies, etc. The usefulness of this fruit as a food is not so great as many others. No recipes are given for it because of its little use in the fresh form.

46. CURRANTS come in three varieties—red, white, and black. They’re not usually eaten fresh; instead, they’re mostly used for making jellies, jams, and preserves, or for pastries and pies. When making jelly, you don’t need to remove them from their stems, as they can be washed and cooked while still attached. Some types of currants are dried and are widely used in making cakes, cookies, and more. This fruit isn’t as commonly used in food as many others. No recipes are provided for it due to its limited use in the fresh form.

47. GOOSEBERRIES, like currants, are somewhat limited in their variety of uses, being seldom used except for jelly, preserves, and pies. Before gooseberries are ripe they are light green in color and rather sour in taste, but as they ripen the amount of acid they contain decreases, so that they become sweet in flavor and change to brownish-purple. Green gooseberries are often canned for pies, and when in this state or when partly ripe they are also made up into many kinds of preserves and jelly. In their preparation for these uses, both the stems and the blossom ends should be removed. As a rule, berries of this kind keep very well and stand considerable handling because their outside skin is very tough.

47. GOOSEBERRIES, like currants, have a limited range of uses, mostly being used for jelly, preserves, and pies. When they are not ripe, gooseberries are light green and quite sour, but as they ripen, the acid content decreases, making them sweeter and turning them a brownish-purple. Green gooseberries are often canned for pies, and when they’re in this state or partially ripe, they are also made into various types of preserves and jelly. When preparing them for these uses, both the stems and the blossom ends should be removed. Generally, these berries keep well and can withstand considerable handling because their skin is quite tough.

48. LOGANBERRIES are a fruit produced by crossing a variety of red raspberries with a species of blackberry. They are not very common, but are an excellent berry and are well liked by those who can obtain them. They may be used for any purpose for which either raspberries or blackberries are used. Therefore, in the recipes given for these two kinds of berries, loganberries may be substituted whenever they can be obtained.

48. LOGANBERRIES are a fruit created by crossing a type of red raspberry with a kind of blackberry. They're not very common, but they're a fantastic berry and are loved by those who can get them. They can be used for any purpose that you would use raspberries or blackberries. So, in the recipes provided for these two types of berries, you can substitute loganberries whenever they're available.



NON-TROPICAL FRUITS

NATURE AND USE


49. Besides the berries that have just been described, there are a large number of fruits that are grown in temperate climates and are therefore regarded as NON-TROPICAL FRUITS. Extensive use is made of these fruits in the regions in which they are grown or in places that are within easy shipping distances of the source of supply. All of them have a protective covering, or skin, and consequently keep for long periods of time if they are not too ripe when picked. Those which contain the highest percentage of water are the most perishable.

49. In addition to the berries mentioned earlier, there are many fruits that thrive in temperate climates and are considered NON-TROPICAL FRUITS. These fruits are widely used in the areas where they are cultivated or in locations that are close enough for easy shipping. All of them have a protective skin, which allows them to stay fresh for a long time as long as they aren't overripe when harvested. The fruits with the highest water content are the ones that spoil the quickest.


APPLES

50. APPLES, of which there are at least a thousand varieties, are probably the best known of the non-tropical fruits. Some apples mature early in the summer, while others do not ripen until late in the fall. The late apples can be kept during the entire winter if they are properly stored, but the summer varieties must generally be used immediately, as they do not have good keeping qualities. In each locality in which apples are grown, a few varieties seem to be especially popular and are used to the exclusion of others. Some apples are good for one purpose and some for another. For instance, many that are excellent if eaten raw are not good for cooking purposes, and others that cook well are not suitable for eating. It is therefore a good idea for the housewife to become familiar with the varieties of apples raised in her community and to learn the use to which each kind can be put to advantage.

50. APPLES, which come in at least a thousand varieties, are probably the most well-known non-tropical fruits. Some apples are ready to eat early in the summer, while others don’t ripen until late in the fall. Late-season apples can be stored throughout the winter if kept properly, but summer varieties typically need to be used right away since they don't last long. In every area where apples are grown, a few specific varieties tend to be particularly popular and are preferred over others. Some apples are great for one purpose and not for another. For example, many that are perfect for eating raw don’t work well for cooking, and others that cook nicely aren’t suitable for eating fresh. Therefore, it’s a good idea for anyone who cooks to familiarize themselves with the apple varieties available in their area and learn the best uses for each one.

Apples of all kinds may be prepared in a large variety of ways. They are much used for sauce, pie, and numerous desserts, as well as for jelly and, with various fruit mixtures, for jams and preserves. The juice of apples, which upon being extracted is known as cider, is used in a number of ways, but its most important use is in the manufacture of vinegar.

Apples come in many varieties and can be prepared in a wide range of ways. They're commonly used for making sauce, pie, and various desserts, as well as for jelly and, when combined with other fruits, for jams and preserves. The juice from apples, which is known as cider once it’s extracted, has several uses, but its most significant use is in producing vinegar.

51. APPLE SAUCE.--When apple sauce is to be made, apples that are somewhat sour and that will cook soft easily should be selected. This is a dessert that can be made all during the winter when it is often difficult to obtain other fruits fresh. It is usually served when roast pork is the main dish of a meal, but is just as appetizing when served with other foods.

51. APPLE SAUCE.--To make apple sauce, choose apples that are a bit sour and will cook down easily. This is a dessert you can make throughout the winter when it's often hard to find fresh fruits. It's typically served alongside roast pork, but it's just as delicious with other dishes.

APPLE SAUCE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 10 medium-sized apples
  • 1/2 c. water
  • 1 c. sugar

Wash the apples, cut them in quarters, remove the cores, and, if desired, peel them. Put them into a saucepan, add the water, and allow them to cook until they are very soft. If the apples are inclined to be dry, a little more water may be necessary. When done, force them through a colander or a sieve, add the sugar to the pulp, and return to the stove. Cook until the sugar is completely dissolved and, if necessary, until the apple sauce is slightly thickened, stirring frequently to prevent scorching. Remove from the heat, and season with lemon peel cut fine, cinnamon, or nutmeg.

Wash the apples, cut them into quarters, remove the cores, and peel them if you want. Place them in a saucepan, add the water, and let them cook until they're very soft. If the apples seem dry, you might need to add a bit more water. Once done, push them through a colander or a sieve, mix the sugar into the pulp, and put it back on the stove. Cook until the sugar completely dissolves and, if needed, until the apple sauce thickens a little, stirring often to avoid burning. Take it off the heat and season with finely chopped lemon peel, cinnamon, or nutmeg.

If there are apples in supply that do not cook well for apple sauce, they may be peeled, quartered, and cored, and cooked with the sugar and water. Then, instead of being forced through a sieve, they should be allowed to remain in pieces in the sirup.

If there are apples available that don’t cook well for applesauce, they can be peeled, quartered, and cored, then cooked with sugar and water. Instead of being pushed through a strainer, they should be kept in pieces in the syrup.

52. PORCUPINE APPLES.--A pleasing change in the way of an apple dessert may be had by making porcupine apples.

52. PORCUPINE APPLES.--A fun twist on an apple dessert can be achieved by making porcupine apples.

PORCUPINE APPLES

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 6 large apples
  • 1 c. sugar
  • 1 c. water
  • 2 doz. almonds
  • Currant jelly

Wash, core, and pare the apples. Make a sirup by bringing the sugar and water to the boiling point. Put the apples into the sirup, cook on one side for several minutes, and then turn and cook on the other side. Do not allow the apples to cook completely in the sirup, but when they are still hard remove them and continue to boil the sirup down. Set the apples in a shallow pan, stick the almonds, which should be blanched, into them so that they will project like porcupine quills, sprinkle them with sugar, and bake in the oven until they are soft and the almonds slightly brown. Remove from the oven, fill the center of each with currant jelly, pour the juice over them, and serve.

Wash, core, and peel the apples. Make a syrup by boiling the sugar and water together. Place the apples in the syrup, cook on one side for several minutes, then flip and cook on the other side. Don’t let the apples cook all the way in the syrup; when they’re still firm, take them out and keep boiling down the syrup. Arrange the apples in a shallow pan, insert blanched almonds into them so they stick out like porcupine quills, sprinkle with sugar, and bake in the oven until they’re soft and the almonds are lightly browned. Take them out of the oven, fill the center of each with currant jelly, drizzle the juice over them, and serve.

53. BAKED APPLES.--Nothing is more palatable than baked apples if a juicy, sour variety can be secured.

53. BAKED APPLES.--Nothing is more delicious than baked apples if you can get your hands on a juicy, tart variety.

BAKED APPLES

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 6 medium-sized sour apples
  • 1/2 c. brown sugar
  • 1/2 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 Tb. butter
  • 1/2 c. water

Wash and core the apples, place them in a baking dish, and fill the centers with the brown sugar mixed with the cinnamon. Put a small piece of butter on top of each apple, pour the water in the bottom of the pan, set in the oven, and bake until the apples are soft. Baste frequently with the juice that collects in the bottom of the pan. Serve hot or cold, as desired.

Wash and core the apples, place them in a baking dish, and fill the centers with the brown sugar mixed with the cinnamon. Put a small piece of butter on top of each apple, pour water in the bottom of the pan, put it in the oven, and bake until the apples are soft. Baste frequently with the juice that collects at the bottom of the pan. Serve hot or cold, based on your preference.

Apples baked in this way may be improved in flavor by serving grape juice over them. Heat the grape juice, and then, if the apples are to be served hot, pour about 2 tablespoonfuls over each apple just before serving. In case the apples are to be served cold, pour the hot grape juice over them and then allow them to cool.

Apples baked this way can taste better if you drizzle grape juice over them. Heat the grape juice, and if you’re serving the apples hot, pour about 2 tablespoons over each apple right before serving. If you’re serving the apples cold, pour the hot grape juice over them and let them cool down.

54. MAPLE APPLES.--Apples cooked in maple sirup have a very pleasing flavor. The sirup that remains in the pan is poured over the apples when they are served.

54. MAPLE APPLES.--Apples cooked in maple syrup have a really nice flavor. The syrup left in the pan is poured over the apples when they're served.

MAPLE APPLES

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)

6 medium-sized apples

1 c. maple sirup

Wash, peel, and core the apples. Bring the maple sirup to the boiling point in a saucepan. Drop the apples into the hot sirup, cook first on one side, and then turn and cook on the other. As soon as they become soft, remove from the sirup, pour the sirup over them, and serve.

Wash, peel, and core the apples. Heat the maple syrup in a saucepan until it boils. Add the apples to the hot syrup, cooking one side first, then turning them to cook the other side. Once they’re soft, take them out of the syrup, pour the syrup over them, and serve.

55. STEAMED APPLES.--If it is desired to retain the color in apples that have red skins, they should be steamed instead of baked, for the color is lost in baking. Prepare apples that are to be steamed by washing them and removing the cores. Place the apples in a pan with a perforated bottom, put this over a pan of boiling water, cover closely, and steam until they are soft. Serve in any desired way. They will be found to be delicious in flavor and attractive in appearance.

55. STEAMED APPLES.--If you want to keep the color of red-skinned apples, steam them instead of baking, since baking causes the color to fade. Prepare the apples for steaming by washing them and removing the cores. Place the apples in a pan with holes in the bottom, set it over a pan of boiling water, cover it tightly, and steam until they are soft. Serve however you like. They will be delicious in flavor and visually appealing.


APRICOTS

56. APRICOTS, in appearance, are a cross between peaches and plums. They are grown extensively in the western part of the United States, but they can be grown in any climate where peaches and plums are raised. As they contain considerable acid, they require a large quantity of sugar when they are cooked with their skins and seeds. They are used most frequently for canning, but they make excellent marmalades and jams. They are also dried in large quantities and, in this form, make delicious desserts.

56. APRICOTS look like a mix between peaches and plums. They're widely grown in the western US, but can thrive in any climate suitable for peaches and plums. Since they have a fair amount of acidity, they need a lot of sugar when cooked with their skins and seeds. They are mostly used for canning, but they also make fantastic marmalades and jams. Additionally, they are dried in large quantities and, in this form, make tasty desserts.

57. APRICOT SOUFFLÉ.--No more attractive as well as delicious dessert can be prepared than apricot soufflé, which is illustrated in Fig. 3. The apricots are just tart enough to give it a very pleasing flavor.

57. APRICOT SOUFFLÉ.--There's no dessert that's both more appealing and tasty than apricot soufflé, as shown in Fig. 3. The apricots have just the right amount of tartness to create a delightful flavor.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]
APRICOT SOUFFLÉ

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • 4 Tb. flour
  • 1/3 c. sugar
  • Pinch of salt
  • 1 c. scalded milk
  • 3 eggs
  • 1/2 tsp. vanilla
  • 1 can apricots

Melt the butter, add the flour, sugar, and salt, and stir in the hot milk. Bring this mixture to the boiling point. Separate the yolks and whites of the eggs. Beat the yolks until they are thick and lemon-colored, and then pour the hot mixture over them, stirring constantly to prevent the eggs from curding. Beat the whites until they are stiff, fold them into the mixture, and add the vanilla. Place the apricots without juice in a layer on the bottom of the buttered baking dish, pour the mixture over them, and bake for 45 to 60 minutes in a hot oven, when it should be baked through and slightly brown on top and should appear as in Fig. 3. Remove from the oven and serve with the sirup from the apricots. Whipped cream may also be added if desired.

Melt the butter, then add the flour, sugar, and salt, and mix in the hot milk. Bring this blend to a boil. Separate the egg yolks from the whites. Whisk the yolks until they're thick and lemon-colored, then pour the hot mixture over them, stirring constantly to prevent the eggs from scrambling. Whip the egg whites until stiff, gently fold them into the mixture, and add the vanilla. Layer the apricots without juice on the bottom of a buttered baking dish, pour the mixture over them, and bake for 45 to 60 minutes in a hot oven, until it's fully cooked, slightly browned on top, and looks like in Fig. 3. Take it out of the oven and serve with the syrup from the apricots. Whipped cream can also be added if you like.


CHERRIES

58. CHERRIES come in numerous varieties, some of which are sweet and others sour. The method of using them in cookery depends largely on the kind of cherry that is to be used. Any of the varieties may be canned with varying quantities of sugar and then used for sauce. They also make excellent preserves, especially the sour varieties. However, they do not contain pectin in sufficient quantity for jelly, so that when cherry jelly is desired, other fruit or material containing pectin must be used with the cherries. When purchased in the market, cherries usually have their stems on. They should be washed before the stems are removed. The seeds may be taken out by hand or by means of cherry seeders made especially for this purpose.

58. CHERRIES come in many varieties, some sweet and others sour. How they’re used in cooking largely depends on the type of cherry being used. Any variety can be canned with different amounts of sugar and then used for sauce. They also make great preserves, especially the sour types. However, they don’t have enough pectin for jelly, so when cherry jelly is needed, other fruits or ingredients that contain pectin must be used alongside the cherries. When you buy cherries at the store, they usually still have their stems. They should be washed before removing the stems. The pits can be taken out by hand or with cherry pitters designed for this purpose.

59. CHERRY FRITTERS.--Something different in the way of dessert can be had by making cherry fritters according to the accompanying recipe.

59. CHERRY FRITTERS.--You can try something unique for dessert by making cherry fritters using the recipe provided.

CHERRY FRITTERS

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 c. flour
  • 2 tsp. baking powder
  • 1/4 tsp. salt
  • 2 Tb. sugar
  • 1/2 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • 1/2 c. cherries cut into halves

Mix and sift the dry ingredients, add the milk and egg, and beat all together well. Add the melted butter and fold in the cherries. Drop by spoonfuls into hot fat and fry until brown. Remove from the fat, sprinkle with powdered sugar, and serve.

Mix and sift the dry ingredients, then add the milk and egg, and beat everything together well. Stir in the melted butter and gently fold in the cherries. Drop spoonfuls into hot oil and fry until golden brown. Remove from the oil, sprinkle with powdered sugar, and serve.


GRAPES

60. GRAPES are a fruit extensively cultivated both for eating and for the making of wines and raisins. Although found in many varieties, they naturally divide themselves into two general classes: those which retain their skins, such as the Malaga, Tokay, Muscat, Cornichon, Emperor, etc., and those which slip out of their skins easily, such as the Concord, Niagara, Delaware, Catawba, etc.

60. Grapes are a fruit widely grown for both eating and for making wines and raisins. Although there are many varieties, they naturally fall into two main categories: those that keep their skins, like Malaga, Tokay, Muscat, Cornichon, Emperor, etc., and those that easily slip out of their skins, like Concord, Niagara, Delaware, Catawba, etc.

Grapes are much used as a fresh fruit. When they are to be used in this way, the bunches should be put into a colander and washed thoroughly by running cold water over them. Then all the imperfect ones should be removed and the grapes kept cool until they are to be served. Clean grape leaves make an attractive garnish for the individual plates or the serving dish on which the grapes are placed. Grapes are also used extensively for making jelly and grape juice, a beverage that is well liked.

Grapes are commonly enjoyed as a fresh fruit. When using them this way, place the bunches in a colander and wash them thoroughly with cold water. Then, remove any damaged grapes and keep the good ones cool until it's time to serve. Clean grape leaves can be a nice garnish for individual plates or the serving dish with the grapes. Grapes are also widely used to make jelly and grape juice, a popular beverage.

61. It will be found that through proper care grapes can be kept a long time in the fall after they are removed from the vines, provided perfect bunches are obtained and they are picked before they have become too ripe. To preserve such grapes, dip the ends of the stems into melted sealing wax in order to prevent the evaporation of moisture through the stems. Then, in a cool, dry place, lay the bunches out on racks in a single layer, taking care not to crush nor bruise them.

61. You'll find that if you take good care of them, grapes can be kept for a long time in the fall after being picked from the vines, as long as you get perfect bunches and pick them before they're overripe. To preserve these grapes, dip the ends of the stems in melted sealing wax to stop moisture from evaporating through them. Then, in a cool, dry place, lay the bunches out on racks in a single layer, being careful not to crush or bruise them.

62. UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITH WATER.--Grape juice may be made either with or without water. That in which water is used in the making usually requires no diluting when it is served as a beverage. Concord grapes are perhaps used more commonly for the making of grape juice than any other variety, but other kinds, particularly Catawbas and Niagaras, may be used as well.

62. UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITH WATER.—Grape juice can be made with or without water. The version that includes water typically doesn’t need to be diluted when served as a drink. Concord grapes are probably the most commonly used for making grape juice, but other types, especially Catawba and Niagara grapes, can also be used.

UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITH WATER
  • 12 qt. grapes
  • 2 qt. water
  • 4 lb. sugar

Wash the grapes and remove them from the stems. Put them with the water into a preserving kettle, and heat gradually until the skins of the grapes burst. Dip off as much juice as possible, and put it into a jelly bag. Continue to heat and dip off the juice in this way until the pulp is comparatively dry. Then add a little more water to the pulp and put it in the bag to drip. When all the juice has dripped through the bag, pour it back into the preserving kettle, add the sugar, and bring to the boiling point. Stir frequently, so that the sugar will be well dissolved. Pour into jars or bottles, seal, and sterilize by cooking for about 5 minutes in hot water that nearly covers the bottles. Any large receptacle that will hold sufficient water may be used as a sterilizer.

Wash the grapes and remove them from the stems. Put them in a pot with water and heat gradually until the skins of the grapes burst. Dip off as much juice as possible and strain it through a jelly bag. Keep heating and straining the juice this way until the pulp is relatively dry. Then add a little more water to the pulp and let it drip through the bag. Once all the juice has dripped through, pour it back into the pot, add the sugar, and bring it to a boil. Stir frequently to ensure the sugar dissolves completely. Pour into jars or bottles, seal them, and sterilize by boiling in hot water that nearly covers the containers for about 5 minutes. Any large container that can hold enough water can be used for sterilization.

63. UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITHOUT WATER.--When grape juice is made without water, it is both thick and rich. Consequently, it should usually be diluted with water when it is served as a beverage.

63. UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITHOUT WATER.--When grape juice is made without water, it is both thick and rich. Therefore, it is usually diluted with water when served as a drink.

UNFERMENTED GRAPE JUICE WITHOUT WATER
  • 12 qt. grapes
  • 3 lb. sugar

Wash the grapes, remove them from the stems, and put them into a preserving kettle. Heat very slowly and mash with a spoon, so that enough juice will be pressed out and thus prevent the grapes from scorching. Remove the juice as it forms and put it into a jelly bag. When all of it has been taken from the grapes and strained through the jelly bag, strain the pulp and put all the juice into a preserving kettle, add the sugar, and bring to the boiling point. Pour into bottles or jars, seal, and sterilize in a water bath for about 5 minutes.

Wash the grapes, detach them from the stems, and place them in a pot for preserving. Heat them very slowly and mash with a spoon to release enough juice and prevent burning. Remove the juice as it collects and transfer it into a jelly bag. Once all the juice has been extracted from the grapes and strained through the jelly bag, strain the pulp, and pour all the juice into the preserving pot. Add the sugar and bring it to a boil. Pour into bottles or jars, seal them, and sterilize in a water bath for about 5 minutes.


PEACHES

64. PEACHES may be divided into two general classes: those having a yellow skin and those having a white skin. In each of these classes are found both clingstone and freestone peaches; that is, peaches whose pulp adheres tightly to the seed, or stone, and those in which the pulp can be separated easily from the stone. When peaches are purchased for canning or for any use in which it is necessary to remove the seeds, freestones should be selected. Clingstones may be used when the stones are allowed to remain in the fruit, as in pickled peaches, and for jams, preserves, or butters, in which small pieces may be used or the entire peach mashed. Whether to select yellow or white peaches, however, is merely a matter of taste, as some persons prefer one kind and some the other.

64. Peaches can be categorized into two main types: those with a yellow skin and those with a white skin. Within each of these categories, you’ll find both clingstone and freestone peaches; that is, peaches whose flesh sticks tightly to the pit, and those where the flesh can be easily separated from the pit. When buying peaches for canning or any use where you need to remove the pits, you should choose freestones. Clingstones can be used when the pits are kept in the fruit, like in pickled peaches, and for jams, preserves, or butters, where you might use small pieces or mash the whole peach. Choosing between yellow or white peaches is really just a matter of personal preference, as some people like one type better while others prefer the other.

65. Peaches are not satisfactory for jelly making, because they do not contain pectin. However, the juice of peaches makes a very good sirup if it is sweetened and cooked until it is thick. Such sirup is really just as delicious as maple sirup with griddle cakes. Peaches are used to a large extent for canning and are also made into preserves, jams, and butters. In addition, they are much used without cooking, for they are favored by most persons. When they are to be served whole, they should be washed and then wiped with a damp cloth to remove the fuzz. The skins may be removed by blanching the peaches in boiling water or peeling them with a sharp knife. If they are then sliced or cut in any desirable way and served with cream and sugar, they make a delicious dessert.

65. Peaches aren't ideal for making jelly because they lack pectin. However, peach juice creates a really good syrup when it’s sweetened and cooked down until thick. This syrup is just as tasty as maple syrup on pancakes. Peaches are widely canned and also turned into preserves, jams, and butters. Plus, they are often eaten raw, as most people enjoy them that way. When serving them whole, they should be washed and wiped with a damp cloth to get rid of the fuzz. You can remove the skins by blanching the peaches in boiling water or peeling them with a sharp knife. If you slice or cut them in any way and serve them with cream and sugar, they make a delicious dessert.

66. STEWED PEACHES.--Fresh stewed peaches make a very desirable dessert to serve with simple cake or cookies. Children may very readily eat such dessert without danger of digestive disturbances. Adding a tablespoonful of butter to the hot stewed peaches and then serving them over freshly made toast makes a delightful breakfast dish. The cooked peaches may also be run through a sieve, reheated with a little flour or corn starch to thicken them slightly, and then served hot on buttered toast.

66. STEWED PEACHES.--Fresh stewed peaches are a great dessert to serve with simple cake or cookies. Kids can easily enjoy this dessert without worrying about upset stomachs. Adding a tablespoon of butter to the hot stewed peaches and serving them over freshly made toast creates a delicious breakfast dish. The cooked peaches can also be strained, reheated with a bit of flour or cornstarch to thicken them slightly, and then served hot on buttered toast.

STEWED PEACHES

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 1-1/2 qt. peaches
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 1 c. water

Peel the peaches, cut into halves, and remove the seeds. Put the sugar and water over the fire to cook in a saucepan and bring to a rapid boil. Add the peaches and cook until they may be easily pierced with a fork.

Peel the peaches, cut them in half, and remove the pits. In a saucepan, heat the sugar and water until it boils rapidly. Add the peaches and cook until they can be easily pierced with a fork.

67. BAKED PEACHES.--When peaches are to be baked, select large firm ones. Wash them thoroughly and cut them into halves, removing the stones. Place the peaches in a shallow pan, fill the cavities with sugar, and dot the top of each half with butter. Set in the oven and bake until the peaches become soft. Serve hot or cold, either with or without cream, as desired.

67. BAKED PEACHES.--To bake peaches, choose large, firm ones. Wash them well and cut them in half, taking out the pits. Put the peaches in a shallow pan, fill the centers with sugar, and add a little butter on top of each half. Place them in the oven and bake until the peaches are soft. Serve them hot or cold, with or without cream, depending on your preference.


PEARS

68. PEARS, like apples, come in summer and winter varieties. The summer varieties must be utilized during the summer and early fall or must be canned at this time to preserve them for future use. Winter pears, however, may be stored, for they keep like apples. A number of the small varieties of pears are much used for pickling. Pears are most valuable when they are canned and used for sauce. They cannot be used for jelly, because they do not contain sufficient acid nor pectin. The juice from canned pears, because of its mild flavor, is often found to be valuable in the feeding of invalids or persons who have gastric troubles. It is usually advisable to pick pears before they are entirely ripe, for then they may be kept for a considerable length of time and will ripen slowly.

68. PEARS, like apples, come in summer and winter types. The summer types should be used during the summer and early fall or canned at that time to preserve them for later. Winter pears, on the other hand, can be stored because they last like apples. Many small varieties of pears are commonly used for pickling. Pears are most useful when canned and made into sauce. They can’t be used for jelly since they don’t have enough acid or pectin. The juice from canned pears, due to its mild flavor, is often valuable for feeding people who are ill or have stomach issues. It’s typically best to pick pears before they’re fully ripe, so they can be stored for a while and will ripen slowly.

69. BAKED PEARS.--Although pears are rather mild in flavor, they are delicious when baked if lemon is added. Wash thoroughly pears that are to be baked, cut them into halves, and remove the cores. Place them in a shallow pan, fill the holes in the center with sugar, dot with butter, and place a thin slice of lemon over each piece. Pour a few spoonfuls of water into the pan, set in the oven, and bake until the pears can be easily pierced with a fork. Remove from the oven and serve hot or cold.

69. BAKED PEARS.--Even though pears have a mild flavor, they become delicious when baked with a bit of lemon. Wash the pears thoroughly, cut them in half, and remove the cores. Place them in a shallow pan, fill the centers with sugar, add some butter, and top each half with a thin slice of lemon. Pour a few spoonfuls of water into the pan, put it in the oven, and bake until the pears can be easily pierced with a fork. Take them out of the oven and serve either hot or cold.


PLUMS

70. PLUMS are among the very strong acid fruits. Some varieties of them seem to be more tart after they are cooked than before, but, as already explained, this condition is due to the fact that the acid contained in the skin and around the seeds is liberated during the cooking. This fruit, of which there are numerous varieties, is generally used for canning, preserving, etc. It does not make jelly successfully in all cases unless some material containing pectin is added. Very firm plums may have the skins removed by blanching if it seems advisable to take them off.

70. PLUMS are among the most acidic fruits. Some varieties seem to be more tart after cooking than they are raw, but as mentioned earlier, this is because the acid in the skin and around the seeds is released during cooking. This fruit, which comes in many varieties, is typically used for canning and preserving. It doesn't always set into jelly without adding something that contains pectin. Very firm plums can have their skins removed by blanching if it's considered necessary.

71. STEWED PLUMS.--Because of the many varieties of plums with their varying degrees of acidity, it is difficult to make a recipe with a quantity of sugar that will suit all kinds. The recipe given here is suitable for medium sour plums, such as egg plums and the common red and yellow varieties. Damsons and green gages will probably require more sugar, while prune plums may require less.

71. STEWED PLUMS.--Due to the many types of plums and their different levels of acidity, it's challenging to create a recipe with a specific amount of sugar that will work for all varieties. The recipe provided here is ideal for medium sour plums, like egg plums and the common red and yellow types. Damsons and greengages will likely need more sugar, while prune plums might need less.

STEWED PLUMS

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 1-1/2 qt. plums
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 3/4 c. water

Wash the plums and prick each one two or three times with a fork. Bring the sugar and water to the boiling point and, when rapidly boiling, add the plums. Cook until they are tender, remove from the fire, cool, and serve.

Wash the plums and poke each one two or three times with a fork. Bring the sugar and water to a boil, and once it's boiling quickly, add the plums. Cook until they are soft, take them off the heat, let them cool, and serve.


QUINCES

72. QUINCES are one of the non-perishable fruits. They mature late in the fall and may be kept during the winter in much the same way as apples. While quinces are not used so extensively as most other fruits, there are many uses to which they may be put and much can be done with a small quantity. For instance, various kinds of preserves and marmalades may be made entirely of quinces or of a combination of quinces and some other fruit. They also make excellent jelly. As their flavor is very strong, a small quantity of quince pulp used with apples or some other fruit will give the typical flavor of quinces. When combined with sweet apples, they make a very delicious sauce.

72. QUINCES are one of the fruits that don't spoil easily. They ripen late in the fall and can be stored throughout the winter, much like apples. Although quinces aren't as commonly used as many other fruits, they have plenty of potential, and even a small amount can go a long way. For example, you can make various kinds of preserves and marmalades completely with quinces or by mixing them with other fruits. They also make fantastic jelly. Because their flavor is quite strong, just a little quince pulp mixed with apples or other fruits will impart that distinct quince taste. When paired with sweet apples, they create a delicious sauce.

The skin of quinces is covered with a thick fuzz, which can be removed by wiping the fruit with a damp cloth. A point that should be remembered about quinces is that they are extremely hard and require long cooking to make them tender and palatable.

The skin of quinces has a thick fuzz that can be wiped off with a damp cloth. It's important to remember that quinces are very hard and need to be cooked for a long time to become tender and tasty.

73. STEWED QUINCES AND APPLES.--The combination of quinces and apples is very delicious. Sweet apples, which are difficult to use as a cooked fruit because of a lack of flavor, may be combined very satisfactorily with quinces, for the quinces impart a certain amount of their strong flavor to the bland apples and thus the flavor of both is improved.

73. STEWED QUINCES AND APPLES.--The mix of quinces and apples is really tasty. Sweet apples, which can be hard to cook with because they lack flavor, pair wonderfully with quinces, as the quinces add some of their strong taste to the mild apples, enhancing the flavor of both.

STEWED QUINCES AND APPLES

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. sweet apples
  • 1 pt. quinces
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 1 c. water

Wash, peel, core, and quarter the fruit. Add the sugar to the water and place over the fire until it conies to a rapid boil. Then add the quinces and cook until they are partly softened. Add the sweet apples and continue the cooking until both are tender. Remove from the fire, cool, and serve.

Wash, peel, core, and quarter the fruit. Add the sugar to the water and heat it until it comes to a rapid boil. Then add the quinces and cook until they start to soften. Add the sweet apples and keep cooking until both are tender. Remove from heat, let it cool, and serve.


RHUBARB

74. RHUBARB is in reality not a fruit, but it is always considered as such because it is cooked with sugar and served as a fruit. It has the advantage of coming early in the spring before there are many fruits in the market. As it contains a large quantity of oxalic acid, it is very sour and must be cooked with considerable sugar to become palatable, the addition of which makes the food value of cooked rhubarb very high. Rhubarb is much used for pies and is frequently canned for sauce. It is also used as a cheap filler with a more expensive fruit in the making of marmalades, conserves, and jams.

74. RHUBARB is actually not a fruit, but it’s always treated like one because it's cooked with sugar and served as a dessert. It has the advantage of being available early in the spring when there aren’t many fruits in the market. Since it contains a lot of oxalic acid, it’s very tart and needs to be cooked with a considerable amount of sugar to taste good, which also makes the nutritional value of cooked rhubarb quite high. Rhubarb is commonly used for pies and is often canned for sauce. It’s also used as an inexpensive filler with more expensive fruits when making marmalades, conserves, and jams.

The stems of some varieties of rhubarb are characterized by a great deal of red color, while others are entirely green. The red rhubarb makes a more attractive dish when it is cooked and served than the green, but it has no better flavor. The outside of the stem has a skin that may be removed by catching hold of it at one end with a knife and stripping it off the remainder of the stem. It is not necessary to remove the skin from young and tender rhubarb, but it is often an advantage to remove it from rhubarb that is old. It should be remembered that the stems of rhubarb contain considerable water and so require very little liquid in their cooking.

The stems of some rhubarb varieties are really red, while others are completely green. The red rhubarb looks more appealing when cooked and served compared to the green, but it doesn’t taste any better. The outer skin of the stem can be peeled off by gripping one end with a knife and pulling it off along the stem. You don’t need to peel young and tender rhubarb, but it can be helpful to remove the skin from older rhubarb. Keep in mind that rhubarb stems contain a lot of water, so they need very little liquid when cooking.

75. STEWED RHUBARB.--Two methods of stewing rhubarb are in practice, the one to select depending on the way it is preferred. In one method, which keeps the pieces whole, the sugar and water are brought to the boiling point before the rhubarb is added, while in the other, the rhubarb is cooked with water until it is soft and the sugar then added.

75. STEWED RHUBARB.--There are two ways to stew rhubarb, depending on your preference. In one method, which keeps the pieces intact, you bring the sugar and water to a boil before adding the rhubarb. In the other method, you cook the rhubarb with water until it’s soft and then add the sugar.

STEWED RHUBARB

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1/2 c. water
  • 1 qt. cut rhubarb

Mix the sugar and water in a saucepan and bring to the boiling point. Wash the stems of the rhubarb and cut into inch lengths. Add the rhubarb to the sirup and cook until it is tender enough to be pierced with a fork. If desired, a flavoring of lemon peel may be added. Turn into a dish, allow to cool, and serve.

Mix the sugar and water in a saucepan and bring to a boil. Wash the rhubarb stems and cut them into inch-long pieces. Add the rhubarb to the syrup and cook until it's tender enough to be pierced with a fork. If you want, you can add some lemon peel for flavor. Pour it into a dish, let it cool, and serve.

If the other method is preferred, cook the rhubarb with the water until it is soft and then add the sugar.

If you prefer the other method, cook the rhubarb with the water until it's soft, then add the sugar.


CITRUS FRUITS

CHARACTERISTICS


76. Fruits that contain citric acid are grouped together and are known as CITRUS FRUITS. All of these are similar in structure, although they differ in size, as will be observed from Fig. 4. Here the citrus fruits most commonly used are illustrated, the large one in the center being a grapefruit; the two to the left, oranges; the two to the right, lemons; and the two in the front, tangerines.

76. Fruits that have citric acid are categorized as CITRUS FRUITS. They all share a similar structure, although their sizes vary, as you can see in Fig. 4. This illustration shows the most commonly used citrus fruits: the large one in the center is a grapefruit; the two on the left are oranges; the two on the right are lemons; and the two in the front are tangerines.

[Illustration: FIG. 4]

All varieties of these fruits are tropical or semitropical and are shipped to the North in boxes that contain various numbers, the number that can be packed in a box depending on the size of the fruit. The south, southeastern, and western parts of the United States supply practically all of these fruits that are found in the northern markets. They stand storage well and keep for long periods of time if they are packed before they are too ripe. These characteristics, together with the fact that they are at their prime at different times in different localities, make it possible to market such fruits during the entire year, although they are much better at certain seasons than at others.

All types of these fruits are tropical or subtropical and are shipped north in boxes containing different quantities, depending on the fruit size. The southern, southeastern, and western regions of the United States provide nearly all of these fruits available in northern markets. They store well and last a long time if packed before they get too ripe. These features, along with the fact that they reach their peak at different times in different areas, make it possible to sell these fruits year-round, even though they are much better at some times than at others.

77. The majority of citrus fruits contain a fair amount of sugar and a great deal of water; consequently, they are very juicy and refreshing. A few of them, however, such as lemons and limes, contain very little sugar and considerable acid and are therefore extremely sour. In the use of such varieties, sugar must be added to make them palatable.

77. Most citrus fruits have a decent amount of sugar and a lot of water; as a result, they're very juicy and refreshing. However, a few of them, like lemons and limes, have very little sugar and a lot of acid, making them really sour. When using these types, sugar needs to be added to make them taste good.

The greatest use made of citrus fruits is that of serving them raw. However, they are also used in the making of marmalades, conserves, and such confections as candied fruits. Then, too, the juice of a number of them, such as lemons, oranges, and limes, makes very refreshing beverages, so these varieties are much used for this purpose.

The best way to enjoy citrus fruits is by eating them fresh. However, they are also used to make marmalades, preserves, and treats like candied fruits. Additionally, the juice from several varieties, like lemons, oranges, and limes, creates really refreshing drinks, so these types are commonly utilized for that.


GRAPEFRUIT

78. Grapefruit, also known as shaddock, is a large, pale-yellow fruit belonging to the citrus group. One variety, known as the pomelo, is the kind that is commonly found in the market. It is slightly flattened on both the blossom and stem ends.

78. Grapefruit, also called shaddock, is a big, pale-yellow fruit that belongs to the citrus family. One type, known as the pomelo, is the one that's usually seen in stores. It's a bit flattened at both the blossom and stem ends.

Grapefruit has a typical flavor and a slightly bitter taste and contains neither a great deal of sugar nor a large amount of acid. Because of its refreshing, somewhat acid pulp and juice, it is highly prized as a fruit to be eaten at breakfast or as an appetizer for a fruit cocktail. It is also much used in the making of fruit salads.

Grapefruit has a distinct flavor and a slightly bitter taste, and it doesn’t contain a lot of sugar or acid. Due to its refreshing, somewhat tangy pulp and juice, it is highly valued as a fruit to enjoy at breakfast or as an appetizer in a fruit cocktail. It's also commonly used in fruit salads.

79. SELECTION OF GRAPEFRUIT.--Grapefruit should be selected with care in order that fruit of good quality may be obtained. Some persons think that to be good grapefruit should be large, but it should be remembered that size is not the factor by which to judge the quality. The fruit should be heavy for its size and the skin should be fine-grained and even. Coarse-grained skin, as a rule, is thick and indicates that the pulp is rather pithy and without juice.

79. SELECTION OF GRAPEFRUIT.--Grapefruit should be chosen carefully to ensure you get high-quality fruit. Some people believe that good grapefruit has to be large, but it's important to remember that size isn’t the best way to determine quality. The fruit should feel heavy for its size, and the skin should be smooth and even. Coarse skin is usually thick and suggests that the pulp is pithy and lacking in juice.

[Illustration: FIG. 5] [Illustration: FIG. 6]

80. PREPARATION OF GRAPEFRUIT.--Different ways of serving grapefruit are in practice, and it is well that these be understood. This is generally considered a rather difficult fruit to eat, but if care is exercised in its preparation for the table it can be eaten with comfort. For preparing grapefruit, a narrow, sharp-bladed paring knife may be used. As is well known, a grapefruit is always cut apart half way between the stem and the blossom ends and a half served to each person.

80. PREPARATION OF GRAPEFRUIT.--There are different ways to serve grapefruit, and it's important to know them. It's often seen as a tricky fruit to eat, but with the right preparation, it can be enjoyed comfortably. To prepare grapefruit, you can use a narrow, sharp paring knife. Typically, a grapefruit is cut in half between the stem and blossom ends, with one half served to each person.

81. One method of preparing grapefruit consists in cutting the skin in such a way that the seeds can be taken out and the pulp then easily removed with a spoon. To prepare it in this way, cut the grapefruit into halves, and then, with a sharp knife, cut around the pithy core in the center, cutting off the smallest possible end of each of the sections. With this done, remove the seeds, which will be found firmly lodged near the core and which can be readily pushed out with the point of the knife. Then cut down each side of the skin between the sections so as to separate the pulp from the skin. Around the edge next to the outside skin, cut the pulp in each section with a single jab of the knife, taking care not to cut the skin between the sections. The entire pulp of each section, which will be found to be loose on both sides and ends if the cutting is correctly done, can then be readily removed with a spoon.

81. One way to prepare grapefruit is by cutting the skin so that the seeds can be removed, allowing the pulp to be easily taken out with a spoon. To do this, cut the grapefruit in half, and then use a sharp knife to cut around the pithy core in the middle, trimming off the smallest possible piece from each section. Once that's done, take out the seeds, which will be lodged near the core and can be pushed out easily with the tip of the knife. Next, cut down each side of the skin between the sections to separate the pulp from the skin. Around the edge next to the outer skin, make a single cut in each section's pulp, being careful not to cut through the skin between the sections. If the cutting is done correctly, the entire pulp of each section will be loose on both sides and ends, making it easy to scoop out with a spoon.

[Illustration: FIG. 7] [Illustration: FIG. 8]

82. In another method of preparing this fruit for the table, all the skin inside of the fruit is removed and nothing but the pulp is left. This method, which is illustrated in Figs. 5 to 10, inclusive, requires a little more time and care than the previous one, but the result justifies the effort. After cutting the grapefruit into halves, remove the seeds with a sharp knife, as shown in Fig. 5. Then, with the same knife, cut the grapefruit from the skin all the way around the edge, as in Fig. 6; also, cut down each side of the skin between the sections, so as to separate the pulp from the skin, as in Fig. 7. With the pulp loosened, insert a pair of scissors along the outside edge, as in Fig. 8, and make a slanting cut toward the core.

82. Another way to prepare this fruit for serving is to remove all the skin from inside and leave just the pulp. This method, shown in Figs. 5 to 10, requires a bit more time and care than the previous one, but the result is worth the effort. After cutting the grapefruit in half, take out the seeds with a sharp knife, as shown in Fig. 5. Then, with the same knife, cut around the edge of the grapefruit to separate it from the skin, as in Fig. 6; also, cut down each side of the skin between the sections to free the pulp from the skin, as in Fig. 7. Once the pulp is loosened, use a pair of scissors along the outside edge, as in Fig. 8, and make a slanting cut towards the core.

Then, as in Fig. 9, cut the core loose from the outside skin. Repeat this operation for each section. If the cutting has been properly done, the core and skin enclosing the sections may be lifted out of the grapefruit, and, as shown in Fig. 10, will then be in the form of a many-pointed star. As only the pulp remains in the outside skin, the grapefruit can be eaten without difficulty.

Then, as shown in Fig. 9, separate the core from the outer skin. Do this for each section. If you've cut it correctly, you should be able to lift the core and the skin surrounding the sections out of the grapefruit, and, as illustrated in Fig. 10, it will look like a many-pointed star. With only the pulp left inside the outer skin, eating the grapefruit will be easy.

[Illustration: FIG. 9] [Illustration: FIG. 10]

83. SERVING GRAPEFRUIT.--When grapefruit has been properly ripened, it is rather sweet, so that many persons prefer it without sugar; but when sugar is desired, the fruit is very much more delicious if it is prepared some time before it is to be served, the sugar added to it, and the fruit placed in a cool place. If this is done in the evening and the grapefruit is served for breakfast, a large amount of very delicious juice will have collected through the night. At any rate, grapefruit is best if it is sweetened long enough before it is served to give the sugar a chance to penetrate.

83. SERVING GRAPEFRUIT.--When grapefruit is properly ripe, it’s quite sweet, so many people prefer it without sugar. However, if you want to add sugar, the fruit tastes much better if you prepare it a little while before serving. Just sprinkle the sugar on it and place the fruit in a cool spot. If you do this in the evening and serve the grapefruit at breakfast, you'll have a lot of delicious juice collected overnight. In any case, grapefruit is best if it’s sweetened well in advance to allow the sugar to soak in.


LEMONS

84. LEMONS are a citrus fruit raised in tropical regions. They are shipped to other climates in cases that hold from 180 to 540, depending on the size of the lemons, 300 to the case being a medium and commonly used size. Their quality is judged like that of grapefruit; that is, by their weight, the texture of their skin, and their general color and shape.

84. LEMONS are a citrus fruit grown in tropical regions. They are shipped to different climates in boxes that hold from 180 to 540, depending on the size of the lemons, with 300 to the box being a typical and commonly used size. Their quality is assessed like that of grapefruit; specifically, by their weight, the texture of their skin, and their overall color and shape.

Lemons contain very little sugar, but they are characterized by a large amount of acid. Because of this fact, their juice is used to season foods in much the same way as vinegar is used. In fact, their chief uses are in making desserts and in seasoning such foods as custards, pudding sauces, etc. However, their juice is also much used in the making of beverages, such as lemonade and fruit punch.

Lemons have very little sugar, but they’re full of acid. Because of this, their juice is used to enhance the flavor of foods just like vinegar. In fact, they’re mainly used in desserts and to flavor things like custards and pudding sauces. However, their juice is also widely used in making drinks, such as lemonade and fruit punch.


ORANGES

85. ORANGES belong to the group of citrus fruits, but they differ from both lemons and grapefruit in that they contain more sugar and less acid. Two kinds of oranges supply the demands for this fruit, Florida and California oranges. Florida oranges have a skin more the color of lemons and grapefruit and contain seeds, but they are considered to be the finest both as to flavor and quality. California oranges, which have a bright-yellow or orange skin, are seedless and are known as navel oranges. As soon as the Florida season ends, the California season begins; consequently, the market season for this fruit is a lengthy one. The russet of oranges is caused by the bite of an insect on the skin. To be shipped, oranges are packed in cases that will contain from 48 to 400 to the case.

85. ORANGES are a type of citrus fruit, but they are different from both lemons and grapefruits because they have more sugar and less acid. There are two main types of oranges that meet the demand for this fruit: Florida and California oranges. Florida oranges have a skin color more similar to lemons and grapefruits and contain seeds, but they are considered the best in terms of flavor and quality. California oranges, which have bright yellow or orange skin, are seedless and known as navel oranges. As soon as the Florida season ends, the California season begins; therefore, the market season for this fruit is quite long. The russet on oranges is caused by insect bites on the skin. For shipping, oranges are packed in cases that can hold anywhere from 48 to 400 oranges.

Probably no citrus fruit is used so extensively as oranges. Because of their refreshing subacid flavor, they are much eaten in their fresh state, both alone and in combination with other foods in numerous salads and desserts.

Probably no citrus fruit is used as much as oranges. Their refreshing tangy flavor makes them popular to eat fresh, both on their own and mixed with other foods in many salads and desserts.

[Illustration: FIG. 11]

86. PREPARATION OF ORANGES.--Several attractive ways of preparing oranges for the table when they are to be eaten raw are shown in Fig. 11.

86. PREPARATION OF ORANGES.--Several appealing methods of preparing oranges for the table when they are to be eaten raw are shown in Fig. 11.

To prepare them in the way shown at the left, cut the orange into two parts, cutting half way between the stem and blossom ends, and loosen the pulp in each half in the manner explained in Art. 81 for the preparation of grapefruit. Then the pulp may be eaten from the orange with a spoon.

To get them ready as shown on the left, cut the orange in half, slicing halfway between the stem and blossom ends. Then, loosen the pulp in each half as described in Art. 81 for preparing grapefruit. After that, you can scoop out the pulp from the orange with a spoon.

[Illustration: FIG. 12]

If an orange is to be eaten in sections, the skin may be cut from the stem to the blossom end about six times and then loosened from the one end and turned in toward the orange in the manner shown in the central figure of the group. It will then be easy to remove the skin.

If you're going to eat an orange in segments, cut the skin from the top to the bottom about six times, then loosen it from one end and fold it in toward the orange, as shown in the central figure of the group. This will make it easy to remove the skin.

[Illustration: FIG. 13]

Sometimes it is desired to serve sliced oranges, as shown at the right. To prepare oranges in this way, remove the skin from the orange, cut it in halves lengthwise, and then slice it in thin slices crosswise. Arrange the slices on a plate and serve as desired.

Sometimes it's nice to serve sliced oranges, as shown on the right. To prepare oranges this way, peel the orange, cut it in half lengthwise, and then slice it thinly crosswise. Arrange the slices on a plate and serve as desired.

87. When oranges are to be used for salads, or for any purpose in which merely the pulp is desired, as, for instance, orange custard, all the skin between the sections must be removed, as it makes any warm mixture bitter. To secure the pulp without any of the skin, first peel the orange, as shown in Fig. 12, in the same way an apple is peeled, beginning at one end and peeling around and around deeply enough to remove with the skin all the white pithy material under it. If the knife is a sharp one and the peeling is carefully done, there will be little waste of the pulp. When the orange is entirely peeled, cut each section from the skin by passing the knife as closely as possible between the pulp and the skin, as shown in Fig. 13. The sections thus obtained may be used whole or cut into pieces of any desired size.

87. When you want to use oranges for salads or any dish where you only need the pulp, like orange custard, you need to remove all the skin between the sections because it can make warm mixtures taste bitter. To get the pulp without any skin, start by peeling the orange, like you would an apple, beginning at one end and peeling all the way around deeply enough to take off all the white pithy material along with the skin. If you use a sharp knife and peel carefully, there should be minimal waste of the pulp. Once the orange is fully peeled, cut each section away from the skin by sliding the knife as closely as possible between the pulp and the skin. The sections you get can be used whole or chopped into any size you prefer.


MISCELLANEOUS CITRUS FRUITS

88. In addition to grapefruit, lemons, and oranges, the three principal varieties of citrus fruits, this group also includes kumquats, limes, mandarins, and tangerines. These fruits are not of so much importance in the diet as the other varieties, but when they are used as foods they have a food value about equal to that of apples the same in size. They are not in such common use as the citrus fruits already discussed, but it is well for every housewife to know what they are and to what use they can be put.

88. Along with grapefruit, lemons, and oranges, the three main types of citrus fruits, this group also includes kumquats, limes, mandarins, and tangerines. These fruits aren't as crucial in the diet as the other varieties, but when consumed, they have a nutritional value similar to that of apples of the same size. They aren’t as commonly used as the citrus fruits mentioned earlier, but it’s helpful for every homemaker to know what they are and how they can be utilized.

89. KUMQUATS are an acid fruit resembling oranges in color but being about the size and shape of small plums. They are used principally for the making of marmalades and jams, and in this use both the skin and the pulp are included.

89. KUMQUATS are a tart fruit that looks like orange but are about the size and shape of small plums. They are mainly used for making marmalades and jams, and both the skin and the flesh are used in these recipes.

90. LIMES look like small lemons. They are very sour and do not contain sugar in any quantity. They are valued chiefly for their juice, which is utilized in the making of drinks, confections, etc.

90. Limes look like small lemons. They're very sour and have almost no sugar. They're mainly valued for their juice, which is used in making drinks, sweets, and more.

91. MANDARINS and TANGERINES are really varieties of oranges and are used in much the same way. They have a very sweet flavor. Their skin does not cling so closely as the skin of oranges. For this reason they are known as glove oranges and are very easily peeled.

91. MANDARINS and TANGERINES are basically types of oranges and are used similarly. They have a very sweet taste. Their skin doesn’t stick to the fruit as much as orange skin does. Because of this, they’re called glove oranges and are super easy to peel.


TROPICAL FRUITS

VARIETIES


92. Besides the citrus fruits, which may also be regarded as tropical fruits because they grow in tropical regions, there are a number of other fruits that may be conveniently grouped under the heading Tropical Fruits. The best known of these are bananas and pineapples, but numerous others, such as avocados, guavas, nectarines, pomegranates, tamarinds, and mangoes, are also raised in the tropical countries and should be included in this class. The majority of these fruits stand shipment well, but if they are to be shipped to far distant places they must be picked before they become too ripe and must be packed well. As bananas and pineapples are used more extensively than the other tropical fruits, they are discussed here in greater detail; however, enough information is given about the others to enable the housewife to become familiar with them.

92. In addition to citrus fruits, which can also be considered tropical because they thrive in tropical areas, there are several other fruits that can be conveniently categorized as Tropical Fruits. The most well-known of these are bananas and pineapples, but many others, including avocados, guavas, nectarines, pomegranates, tamarinds, and mangoes, are also grown in tropical countries and should be included in this group. Most of these fruits can endure shipping well, but to ensure they arrive in good condition in distant locations, they need to be harvested before they get too ripe and must be packed properly. Since bananas and pineapples are more commonly used than the other tropical fruits, they are discussed in more detail here; however, there is enough information provided about the others for the housewife to become familiar with them.


BANANAS

93. BANANAS are a tropical fruit that have become very popular with the people in the North. As they are usually picked and shipped green and then ripened by a process of heating when they are ready to be put on the market, it is possible to obtain them in a very good condition. It should be remembered, however, that they are not ripe enough to eat until all the green color has left the skin. The stem of the bunch may be green, but the bananas themselves should be perfectly yellow. Black spots, which are sometimes found on the skins, indicate overripeness or bruises. When the spots come from overripeness, however, they do not injure the quality of the fruit, unless there are a great many of them; in fact, many persons consider that bananas are better when the skins are black than at any other time.

93. Bananas are a tropical fruit that have become very popular with people up North. Since they are usually picked and shipped while still green, and then ripened through a heating process when they’re ready to hit the market, you can find them in excellent condition. It’s important to remember, though, that they aren’t ripe enough to eat until all the green color has disappeared from the skin. The stem of the bunch may still be green, but the bananas themselves should be bright yellow. Black spots, which sometimes appear on the skins, indicate overripeness or bruises. However, if the spots are due to overripeness, they don’t really affect the quality of the fruit unless there are a lot of them; in fact, many people believe that bananas taste better when the skins are black than at any other time.

94. Just under the skin of the banana is some pithy material that clings to the outside of the fruit and that has a pungent, disagreeable taste. This objectionable taste may be done away with by scraping the surface of the banana slightly, as shown in Fig. 14, after the skin is removed.

94. Just beneath the skin of the banana is some fibrous material that sticks to the outside of the fruit and has a strong, unpleasant taste. This bad taste can be eliminated by lightly scraping the surface of the banana, as shown in Fig. 14, after peeling off the skin.

The strong, typical flavor that characterizes bananas is due to the volatile oil they contain. It is this oil that causes bananas to disagree with some persons. The common yellow variety has a milder flavor than red bananas and certain other kinds and, consequently, is more popular. If the oil of bananas does not prove irritating, much use should be made of this fruit, because its food value is high, being about double that of apples and oranges.

The strong, typical flavor that defines bananas comes from the volatile oil they have. This oil is what makes bananas hard for some people to digest. The common yellow variety has a milder flavor compared to red bananas and some other types, which is why it's more popular. If the oil in bananas isn’t irritating, you should eat this fruit often, because it’s very nutritious, providing about twice the food value of apples and oranges.

[Illustration: FIG. 14]

95. Bananas are eaten raw more often than in any other way, but many persons find cooked bananas very agreeable. Then, too, it is sometimes claimed that cooked bananas are more digestible than raw ones because of the starch that bananas contain. However, this argument may be discounted, for a well-ripened banana contains such a small quantity of starch that no consideration need be given to it.

95. Bananas are most often eaten raw, but many people enjoy cooked bananas as well. It's also said that cooked bananas are easier to digest than raw ones because of the starch they contain. However, this can be overlooked, as a well-ripened banana has such a small amount of starch that it shouldn't really be a concern.

[Illustration: FIG. 15]

96. BAKED BANANAS.--If bananas are to be cooked, they can be made very appetizing by baking them with a sirup made of vinegar, sugar, and butter. When prepared in this way, they should be cut in two lengthwise, and then baked in a shallow pan, as Fig. 15 shows.

96. BAKED BANANAS.--If you're cooking bananas, they can be really delicious when baked with a syrup made from vinegar, sugar, and butter. To prepare them this way, cut the bananas in half lengthwise and bake them in a shallow pan, as shown in Fig. 15.

BAKED BANANAS

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 6 bananas
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • 1/3 c. sugar
  • 3 Tb. vinegar

Remove the skins from the bananas, scrape the surface as in Fig. 14, and cut them in half lengthwise. Arrange the halves in a shallow pan. Melt the butter and mix it with the sugar and the vinegar. Pour a spoonful of the mixture over each banana and then set the pan in the oven. Bake in a slow oven for about 20 minutes, basting frequently with the remainder of the sirup during the baking. Remove from the oven and serve hot.

Take the peels off the bananas, scrape the surface as shown in Fig. 14, and slice them in half lengthwise. Place the halves in a shallow pan. Melt the butter and combine it with the sugar and vinegar. Pour a spoonful of the mixture over each banana, then put the pan in the oven. Bake in a low oven for about 20 minutes, basting frequently with the remaining syrup while baking. Take it out of the oven and serve hot.

97. Banana Fritters.--Delicious fritters can be made with bananas as a foundation. The accompanying recipe, if carefully followed, will result in a dish that will be appetizing, especially to those who are fond of this fruit.

97. Banana Fritters.--You can make tasty fritters using bananas as the base. If you follow the recipe closely, you'll end up with a dish that's really appealing, especially for those who love this fruit.

BANANA FRITTERS

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 4 bananas
  • 1 Tb. lemon juice
  • 1/2 c. flour
  • 2 Tb. sugar
  • 1/4 tsp. salt
  • 1/3 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 1 Tb. butter, melted
  • Powdered sugar

Remove the skins from the bananas, scrape them, and cut them once lengthwise and once crosswise. Sprinkle the pieces with the lemon juice. Make a batter by mixing and sifting the flour, sugar, and salt. Stir in the milk gradually, and add the yolk of the beaten egg and the melted butter. Lastly, fold in the beaten egg white. Sprinkle the bananas with powdered sugar, dip them into the batter, and fry in deep fat until brown. Sprinkle again with powdered sugar and serve.

Remove the peels from the bananas, scrape them, and cut them once lengthwise and once crosswise. Sprinkle the pieces with lemon juice. Make a batter by mixing and sifting the flour, sugar, and salt. Gradually stir in the milk, then add the yolk of the beaten egg and the melted butter. Finally, fold in the beaten egg whites. Sprinkle the bananas with powdered sugar, dip them in the batter, and fry in hot oil until brown. Sprinkle again with powdered sugar and serve.


PINEAPPLES

98. Pineapples are grown in the southern part of the United States, on the islands off the southeastern coast, and in Hawaii. They vary in size according to the age of the plants. It requires from 18 to 20 months for the fruit to develop, and the plants yield only four or five crops. Much of this fruit is canned where it is grown, but as it is covered with a heavy skin it will tolerate shipping long distances very well. It is shipped to the market in cases that contain from 24 to 48 pineapples to the case. Usually, for a few weeks during the summer, the price of fresh pineapples is reasonable enough to warrant canning them.

98. Pineapples are grown in the southern United States, on the islands off the southeastern coast, and in Hawaii. Their size varies depending on the age of the plants. It takes about 18 to 20 months for the fruit to develop, and the plants produce only four or five harvests. A lot of this fruit is canned where it is grown, but since it has a thick skin, it can be shipped over long distances very well. It is sent to market in boxes that hold between 24 to 48 pineapples. Typically, for a few weeks in the summer, the price of fresh pineapples drops enough to make canning them worthwhile.

[Illustration: FIG. 16] [Illustration: FIG. 17]

99. The food value of pineapples is slightly lower than that of oranges and apples. However, pineapples have a great deal of flavor, and for this reason they are very valuable in the making of desserts, preserves, marmalades, and beverages of various kinds. It is said that the combination of pineapple and lemon will flavor a greater amount of food than any other fruit combined. Another characteristic of pineapples is that they contain a ferment that acts upon protein material and therefore is sometimes thought to aid considerably in the digestion of food. The probabilities are that this ferment really produces very little action in the stomach, but its effect upon protein material can readily be observed by attempting to use raw pineapple in the making of a gelatine dessert. If the pineapple is put in raw, the gelatine will not solidify; but if the pineapple is heated sufficiently to kill this ferment, it has no effect whatsoever upon the gelatine.

99. The nutritional value of pineapples is slightly lower than that of oranges and apples. However, pineapples are very flavorful, which makes them highly valued for desserts, preserves, marmalades, and various beverages. It's said that the combination of pineapple and lemon can enhance the flavor of more dishes than any other fruit combination. Another feature of pineapples is that they contain an enzyme that affects protein material, which is why they are sometimes thought to significantly aid in digestion. The truth is that this enzyme likely has minimal impact in the stomach, but its effect on protein can easily be seen when trying to use raw pineapple in a gelatin dessert. If you add raw pineapple, the gelatin won’t set; however, if you heat the pineapple enough to deactivate the enzyme, it won't affect the gelatin at all.

100. SELECTING PINEAPPLES.--When pineapples are to be selected, care should be exercised to see that they are ripe. The most certain way of determining this fact is to pull out the center leaves of each pineapple that is chosen. As shown in Fig. 16, grasp the pineapple with one hand and then with the other pull out, one at a time, several of the center leaves of the tuft at the top. If the fruit is ripe a sharp jerk will usually remove each leaf readily, but the harder the leaves pull, the greener the pineapple is.

100. SELECTING PINEAPPLES.--When choosing pineapples, make sure they are ripe. The best way to check is by pulling out the center leaves from each pineapple you pick. As shown in Fig. 16, hold the pineapple in one hand and use the other hand to pull out several of the center leaves from the tuft at the top, one at a time. If the fruit is ripe, a quick tug will usually remove each leaf easily, but if the leaves are hard to pull, the pineapple is still green.

[Illustration: FIG. 18] [Illustration: FIG. 19]

An overripe pineapple is just as unsatisfactory as one that is not ripe enough. When a pineapple becomes too ripe, rotten spots begin to develop around the base. Such spots can be easily detected by the discoloration of the skin and such a pineapple should not be selected.

An overripe pineapple is just as disappointing as one that isn’t ripe enough. When a pineapple gets too ripe, rotten spots start to appear around the base. You can easily spot these by the color changes in the skin, and you should avoid choosing such a pineapple.

101. PREPARATION OF PINEAPPLE.--Some persons consider pineapple a difficult fruit to prepare, but no trouble will be experienced if the method illustrated in Figs. 17 to 19 is followed. Place the pineapple on a hard surface, such as a wooden cutting board, and with a large sharp knife cut off the tuft of leaves at the top. Then, as shown in Fig. 17, cut the pineapple into 1/2-inch slices crosswise of the head. When the entire pineapple has been sliced, peel each slice with a sharp paring knife, as in Fig. 18. With the peeling removed, it will be observed that each slice contains a number of eyes. Remove these with the point of a knife, as Fig. 19 shows. After cutting out the core from the center of each slice, the slices may be allowed to remain whole or may be cut into pieces of any desirable size or shape. Pineapple prepared in this way is ready either for canning or for desserts in which it is used fresh.

101. PREPARATION OF PINEAPPLE.--Some people think preparing pineapple is tricky, but it’s easy if you follow the method shown in Figs. 17 to 19. Place the pineapple on a sturdy surface, like a wooden cutting board, and use a large sharp knife to slice off the tuft of leaves at the top. Then, as seen in Fig. 17, cut the pineapple into 1/2-inch slices crosswise. Once you've sliced the entire pineapple, use a sharp paring knife to peel each slice, as shown in Fig. 18. After peeling, you'll notice each slice has a number of eyes. Remove these with the tip of a knife, as illustrated in Fig. 19. After cutting out the core from the center of each slice, you can leave the slices whole or cut them into any size or shape you prefer. Pineapple prepared this way is ready for canning or for use in fresh desserts.

102. PINEAPPLE PUDDING.--One of the most satisfactory desserts made from pineapple is the pudding given here. It is in reality a corn-starch pudding in which grated pineapple is used for the flavoring.

102. PINEAPPLE PUDDING.--One of the most satisfying desserts made with pineapple is the pudding described here. It's essentially a corn-starch pudding flavored with grated pineapple.

PINEAPPLE PUDDING

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2-1/2 c. scalded milk
  • 1/3 c. corn starch
  • 1/2 c. sugar
  • 1/4 tsp. salt
  • 1/4 c. cold milk
  • 1-1/2 c. grated pineapple, canned or fresh
  • 2 egg whites

Scald the milk by heating it over the fire in a double boiler. Mix the corn starch, sugar, and salt, and dissolve in the cold milk. Add to the scalded milk in the double boiler and cook for about 15 or 20 minutes. Remove from the fire and add the grated pineapple from which all juice has been drained. Then fold in the whites of the eggs beaten stiff. Pour into molds previously dipped in cold water, allow to cool, and serve with cream.

Scald the milk by heating it over the stove in a double boiler. Combine the cornstarch, sugar, and salt, and dissolve them in the cold milk. Add this mixture to the scalded milk in the double boiler and cook for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove from heat and stir in the grated pineapple, making sure all the juice has been drained. Then gently fold in the beaten egg whites until stiff. Pour into molds that you've dipped in cold water, let it cool, and serve with cream.


MISCELLANEOUS TROPICAL FRUITS

103. AVOCADOS.--The avocado, which is also known as the alligator pear, is a large pear-shaped, pulpy fruit raised principally in the West Indies. It has a purplish-brown skin and contains just one very large seed in the center. The flesh contains considerable fat, and so the food value of this fruit is rather high, being fully twice as great as a like quantity of apples or oranges.

103. AVOCADOS.--The avocado, also called the alligator pear, is a large, pear-shaped fruit that's mostly grown in the West Indies. It has a purplish-brown skin and contains a single, large seed in the middle. The flesh has a significant amount of fat, making its nutritional value relatively high, about twice that of the same amount of apples or oranges.

This fruit, which is gaining in popularity in the Northern States, is very perishable and does not stand shipment well. As a rule, it reaches the northern market green and is ripened after its arrival. It is an expensive fruit and is used almost entirely for salads. As its flavor is somewhat peculiar, a taste for it must usually be cultivated.

This fruit, which is becoming more popular in the Northern States, is very perishable and doesn't ship well. Generally, it arrives in the northern market while still green and ripens after it gets there. It's an expensive fruit and is mostly used in salads. Since its flavor is a bit unusual, people usually need to develop a taste for it.

104. GUAVAS.--The guava is a tropical fruit that is extensively grown in the southern part of the United States. Guavas come in two varieties: red guava, which resembles the apple, and white guava, which resembles the pear. The fruit, which has a pleasant acid pulp, is characterized by a more or less peculiar flavor for which a liking must be cultivated. It can be canned and preserved in much the same way as peaches are.

104. GUAVAS.--The guava is a tropical fruit that is widely grown in the southern United States. There are two types of guavas: red guava, which looks like an apple, and white guava, which looks like a pear. The fruit has a pleasantly tangy pulp and has a unique flavor that you may need to get used to. It can be canned and preserved just like peaches.

Because guavas are very perishable, they cannot be shipped to northern markets, but various products are made from them and sent to every market. Preserved and pickled guavas and confections made from what is known as guava paste are common, but guava jelly made from the pulp is probably the best known product.

Because guavas spoil quickly, they can’t be shipped to northern markets; however, various products are made from them and sent to every market. Preserved and pickled guavas, along with treats made from something called guava paste, are common, but guava jelly made from the pulp is probably the most popular product.

105. NECTARINES.--The tropical fruit called the nectarine is really a variety of peach, but it differs from the common peach in that it has a smooth, waxy skin. Also, the flesh of the nectarine is firmer and has a stronger flavor than that of the peach. Nectarines are not shipped to the northern markets to any extent, but they are canned in exactly the same way as peaches are and can be secured in this form.

105. NECTARINES.--The tropical fruit known as the nectarine is actually a type of peach, but it stands out because it has a smooth, waxy skin. Additionally, the flesh of the nectarine is firmer and has a more intense flavor compared to that of the peach. Nectarines aren’t shipped to northern markets very much, but they are canned just like peaches and can be found in that form.

106. PERSIMMONS.--The persimmon is a semitropical plum-like fruit, globular in shape and an orange-red or yellow in color. It comes in many varieties, but few of them find their way into the northern markets. The Japanese persimmon, which resembles a tomato in color, is the variety most frequently purchased. Persimmons are characterized by a great deal of very pungent acid, which has a puckery effect until the fruit is made sweet and edible by exposure to the frost. In localities where they are plentiful, persimmons are extensively used and are preserved for use during the winter season.

106. PERSIMMONS.--The persimmon is a semi-tropical fruit that looks like a plum, round in shape and orange-red or yellow in color. It comes in many varieties, but few are available in northern markets. The Japanese persimmon, which is similar in color to a tomato, is the most commonly bought variety. Persimmons are known for their strong acidity, which creates a puckery sensation until the fruit ripens and becomes sweet after exposure to frost. In areas where they are abundant, persimmons are widely used and preserved for the winter season.

107. POMEGRANATES.--The pomegranate is about as large as a full-sized apple and has a hard reddish-yellow rind. Most varieties contain many seeds and a comparatively small amount of red edible pulp. Pomegranates of various kinds are grown in the southern part of the United States and in other warm climates. They are used extensively in the localities where they are grown and are much enjoyed by persons who learn to care for their flavor. A cooling drink made from their pulp finds much favor.

107. POMEGRANATES.--The pomegranate is roughly the size of a large apple and has a tough reddish-yellow skin. Most types have a lot of seeds and a relatively small amount of tasty red pulp. Pomegranates of different varieties are cultivated in the southern United States and other warm regions. They are widely used in the areas where they grow and are greatly appreciated by those who develop a taste for their flavor. A refreshing drink made from their pulp is quite popular.

108. TAMARINDS AND MANGOES.--Although tamarinds and mangoes are practically unknown outside of tropical countries, they are considered to be very delicious fruits and are used extensively in their native localities.

108. TAMARINDS AND MANGOES.--Even though tamarinds and mangoes are mostly unfamiliar outside of tropical countries, they are regarded as delicious fruits and are widely used in their home regions.

The tamarind consists of a brown-shelled pod that contains a brown acid pulp and from three to ten seeds. This fruit has various uses in medicine and cookery and is found very satisfactory for a cooling beverage.

The tamarind has a brown shell pod that holds a brown tangy pulp and usually contains between three to ten seeds. This fruit is used in both medicine and cooking, and it's particularly popular for making a refreshing drink.

Mangoes vary greatly in size, shape, flavor, and color. Some varieties are large, fleshy, and luscious, while others are small and stringy and have a peculiar flavor.

Mangoes come in all sorts of sizes, shapes, flavors, and colors. Some types are big, juicy, and delicious, while others are small and fibrous with a strange taste.


MELONS

109. CANTALOUPES AND MUSKMELONS.--The variety of melons known as muskmelons consists of a juicy, edible fruit that is characterized by a globular shape and a ribbed surface. Cantaloupes are a variety of muskmelons, but the distinction between them is sometimes difficult to understand. For the most part, these names are used interchangeably with reference to melons.

109. CANTALOUPES AND MUSKMELONS.--The type of melons called muskmelons includes a juicy, edible fruit that has a round shape and a ribbed skin. Cantaloupes are a type of muskmelon, but the difference between them can be hard to grasp. Generally, these terms are used interchangeably when talking about melons.

Considerable variation occurs in this fruit. Some cantaloupes and muskmelons are large and others are small; some have pink or yellow flesh and others have white or light-green flesh. All the variations of color and size are found between these two extremes. The flesh of these fruits contains considerable water; therefore, their food value is not high, being only a little over half as much as that of apples.

There’s a lot of variety in this fruit. Some cantaloupes and muskmelons are big while others are small; some have pink or yellow flesh, and others have white or light green flesh. You can find all kinds of colors and sizes between these two extremes. The flesh of these fruits has a lot of water, so their nutritional value isn't very high, being just a bit more than half that of apples.

110. If melons suitable for the table are desired, they should be selected with care. To be just at the right stage, the blossom end of the melon should be a trifle soft when pressed with the fingers. If it is very soft, the melon is perhaps too ripe; but if it does not give with pressure, the melon is too green.

110. If you want melons that are good to eat, you should choose them carefully. To be at the perfect stage, the end where the blossom was should feel slightly soft when you press it with your fingers. If it’s too soft, the melon might be overripe; but if it doesn’t give at all when you press it, then it’s too unripe.

111. Various ways of serving muskmelons and cantaloupes are in practice. When they are to be served plain as a breakfast food or a luncheon dessert, cut them crosswise into halves, or, if they are large, divide them into sections lengthwise. With the melons cut in the desired way, remove all the seeds and keep the melons on ice until they are to be served. The pulp of the melon may also be cut from the rind and then diced and used in the making of fruit salads. Again, the pulp may be partly scraped out of the melon and the rinds then filled with fruit mixtures and served with a salad dressing for a salad or with fruit juices for a cocktail. The pulp that is scraped out may be diced and used in the fruit mixture, and what is left in the rind may be eaten after the contents have been eaten.

111. There are various ways to serve muskmelons and cantaloupes. When serving them plain as a breakfast item or a dessert for lunch, cut them in half crosswise or, if they're large, slice them into sections lengthwise. After cutting the melons, remove all the seeds and keep them on ice until you’re ready to serve. The melon flesh can also be scooped out from the rind, diced, and used in fruit salads. Alternatively, you can scrape some of the flesh out of the melon and fill the rinds with fruit mixtures, serving them with a salad dressing for a salad or with fruit juices for a cocktail. The scooped flesh can be diced and added to the fruit mixture, and any flesh left in the rind can be eaten after the filling has been enjoyed.

112. CASABA MELONS.--The variety of melons known as casaba, or honeydew, melons are a cross between a cucumber and a cantaloupe. They have white flesh and a rind that is smoother than the rind of cantaloupes. Melons of this kind are raised in the western part of the United States, but as they stand shipment very well, they can usually be obtained in the market in other regions. They are much enjoyed by those who are fond of this class of fruit. Their particular advantage is that they come later in the season than cantaloupes and muskmelons, and thus can be obtained for the table long after these other fruits are out of season. Casaba melons may be served in the same ways as cantaloupes.

112. CASABA MELONS.--Casaba, or honeydew, melons are a mix between a cucumber and a cantaloupe. They have white flesh and a smoother rind than cantaloupes. This type of melon is grown in the western United States, but since they ship well, they can typically be found in markets in other areas. They are popular among those who enjoy this type of fruit. One of their main benefits is that they are available later in the season than cantaloupes and muskmelons, so you can enjoy them long after those other fruits are out of season. Casaba melons can be served the same way as cantaloupes.

113. WATERMELONS.--A very well-known type of melon is the watermelon. It is grown principally in warm climates of the Southern States, as the season in the North is not sufficiently long to allow it to develop. This is a large fruit, having a smooth green skin that is often mottled or striped, and a pinkish pulp containing many seeds and having a sweet, watery juice. The large amount of water contained in this fruit makes its food value very low, it being lower in this respect than muskmelons and cantaloupes. The volatile oil it contains, which is responsible for its flavor, proves irritating to some persons who eat it.

113. WATERMELONS.--A well-known type of melon is the watermelon. It primarily grows in the warm climates of the Southern States, as the Northern season isn't long enough for it to fully develop. This is a large fruit with smooth green skin that is often mottled or striped, and a pinkish flesh filled with many seeds and a sweet, watery juice. The high water content makes its nutritional value very low, even lower than muskmelons and cantaloupes. The volatile oil it contains gives it flavor, but can irritate some people who eat it.

114. Watermelon is delicious when it is served ice cold. Therefore, before it is served, it should be kept on ice for a sufficient time to allow it to become thoroughly cold. Then it may be cut in any desirable way. If it is cut in slices, the slices should be trimmed so that only the pink pulp that is edible is served, the green rind being discarded. As an appetizer, watermelon is delicious when cut into pieces and served in a cocktail glass with fresh mint chopped fine and sprinkled over the top. Small pieces of watermelon cut with a French vegetable cutter make a very attractive garnish for fruit salads and other fruit mixtures.

114. Watermelon is delicious when it's served ice cold. So, before serving, it should be chilled on ice for a sufficient amount of time to ensure it's fully cold. After that, it can be cut in any preferred way. If it's sliced, the pieces should be trimmed to serve only the pink, edible pulp, discarding the green rind. As an appetizer, watermelon is tasty when cut into pieces and served in a cocktail glass with fresh mint finely chopped and sprinkled on top. Small pieces of watermelon cut with a French vegetable cutter make a really attractive garnish for fruit salads and other fruit mixes.


FRUIT COCKTAILS

115. Cocktails made of a combination of fruits are often served as the first course of a meal, usually a luncheon or a dinner, to precede the soup course. In warm weather, they are an excellent substitute for heavy cocktails made of lobster or crab, and they may even be used to replace the soup course. The fruits used for this purpose should be the more acid ones, for the acids and flavors are intended to serve as an appetizer, or the same purpose for which the hot and highly seasoned soups are taken. Therefore, they are seldom made sweet and are not taken for their food value. Besides being refreshing appetizers, they afford a hostess an opportunity to carry out a certain color scheme in a meal. Many kinds of fruit may be combined into cocktails, but directions for the cocktails that are usually made are here given. Fruit cocktails should always be served ice cold.

115. Fruit cocktails are often served as the first course of a meal, typically at lunch or dinner, and come before the soup course. In warmer weather, they're a great alternative to heavy lobster or crab cocktails and can even replace the soup entirely. The fruits chosen should be more on the acidic side, as their acidity and flavors are meant to act as an appetizer, similar to how hot and spicy soups are used. As a result, they are usually not sweet and are not meant for their nutritional value. Besides being refreshing starters, they allow a hostess to maintain a particular color scheme throughout the meal. Many types of fruit can be mixed into cocktails, but here are the common recipes. Fruit cocktails should always be served very cold.

116. GRAPEFRUIT COCKTAIL.--The cocktail here explained may be served in stemmed glasses or in the shells of the grapefruit. If the fruit shells are to be used, the grapefruit should be cut into two parts, half way between the blossom and the stem ends, the fruit removed, and the edges of the shell then notched. This plan of serving a cocktail should be adopted only when small grapefruits are used, for if the shells are large more fruit will have to be used than is agreeable for a cocktail.

116. GRAPEFRUIT COCKTAIL.--The cocktail described here can be served in stemmed glasses or in the halves of the grapefruit. If you choose to use the fruit halves, cut the grapefruit in half, between the blossom and the stem ends, scoop out the fruit, and notch the edges of the shell. This method of serving a cocktail should only be used with small grapefruits, as larger shells would require more fruit than is suitable for a cocktail.

GRAPEFRUIT COCKTAIL

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 grapefruits
  • 2 oranges
  • 1 c. diced pineapple, fresh or canned
  • Powdered sugar

Remove the pulp from the grapefruits and oranges in the manner previously explained. However, if the grapefruit shells are to be used for serving the cocktail, the grapefruit should be cut in half and the pulp then taken out of the skin with a sharp knife. With the sections of pulp removed, cut each one into several pieces. Add the diced pineapple to the other fruits, mix together well and set on ice until thoroughly chilled. Put in cocktail glasses or grapefruit shells, pour a spoonful or two of orange juice over each serving, sprinkle with powdered sugar, garnish with a cherry, and serve ice cold.

Remove the pulp from the grapefruits and oranges as previously explained. However, if you're using the grapefruit halves as serving bowls for the cocktail, cut the grapefruit in half and scoop out the pulp with a sharp knife. Once you've removed the sections of pulp, chop each one into several pieces. Add the diced pineapple to the other fruits, mix everything together well, and chill on ice until it's completely cold. Serve in cocktail glasses or grapefruit shells, pour a spoonful or two of orange juice over each serving, sprinkle with powdered sugar, garnish with a cherry, and serve ice cold.

117. SUMMER COCKTAIL.--As strawberries and pineapples can be obtained fresh at the same time during the summer, they are often used together in a cocktail. When sweetened slightly with powdered sugar and allowed to become ice cold, these fruits make a delicious combination.

117. SUMMER COCKTAIL.--Since strawberries and pineapples are available fresh at the same time in the summer, they are often mixed together in a cocktail. When lightly sweetened with powdered sugar and chilled, these fruits create a tasty combination.

SUMMER COCKTAIL

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 c. diced fresh pineapple
  • 2 c. sliced strawberries
  • Powdered sugar

Prepare a fresh pineapple in the manner previously explained, and cut each slice into small pieces or dice. Wash and hull the strawberries and slice them into small slices. Mix the two fruits and sprinkle them with powdered sugar. Place in cocktail glasses and allow to stand on ice a short time before serving.

Prepare a fresh pineapple as described earlier, and cut each slice into small pieces or dice. Wash and hull the strawberries, then slice them into small pieces. Combine the two fruits and sprinkle with powdered sugar. Serve in cocktail glasses and let them chill on ice for a short time before serving.

118. FRUIT COCKTAIL.--A fruit cocktail proper is made by combining a number of different kinds of fruit, such as bananas, pineapple, oranges, and maraschino cherries. As shown in Fig. 20, such a cocktail is served in a stemmed glass set on a small plate. Nothing more delicious than this can be prepared for the first course of a dinner or a luncheon that is to be served daintily. Its advantage is that it can be made at almost any season of the year with these particular fruits.

118. FRUIT COCKTAIL.--A proper fruit cocktail is made by mixing various types of fruit, like bananas, pineapple, oranges, and maraschino cherries. As shown in Fig. 20, this cocktail is served in a stemmed glass on a small plate. Nothing more delicious can be prepared for the first course of a dinner or a lunch that’s meant to be served elegantly. The great thing about it is that you can make it almost any time of the year with these specific fruits.

[Illustration: FIG. 20]
FRUIT COCKTAIL

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 bananas
  • 1 c. canned pineapple
  • 2 oranges
  • 1 doz. maraschino cherries
  • Lemon juice
  • Powdered sugar

Peel the bananas and dice them. Dice the pineapple. Remove the pulp from the oranges in the manner previously explained, and cut each section into several pieces. Mix these three fruits. Cut the cherries in half and add to the mixture. Set on ice until thoroughly chilled. To serve, put into cocktail glasses as shown in the illustration, and add to each glass 1 tablespoonful of maraschino juice from the cherries and 1 teaspoonful of lemon juice. Sprinkle with powdered sugar and serve.

Peel the bananas and chop them into small pieces. Chop the pineapple. Remove the pulp from the oranges as explained earlier, and cut each section into several pieces. Mix these three fruits together. Cut the cherries in half and add them to the mix. Place it on ice until completely chilled. To serve, put it into cocktail glasses as shown in the picture, and add 1 tablespoon of maraschino cherry juice and 1 teaspoon of lemon juice to each glass. Sprinkle with powdered sugar and serve.


DRIED FRUITS

VARIETIES OF DRIED FRUITS


119. The fruits that have been discussed up to this point are fresh fruits; that is, they are placed on the markets, and consequently can be obtained, in their fresh state. However, there are a number of fruits that are dried before they are put on the market, and as they can be obtained during all seasons they may be used when fresh fruits are out of season or as a substitute for canned fruits when the household supply is low. The chief varieties of dried fruits are dates, figs, prunes, which are dried plums, and raisins, which are dried grapes. Apples, apricots, and peaches are also dried in large quantities and are much used in place of these fruits when they cannot be obtained in their fresh form. Discussions of the different varieties of dried fruits are here given, together with recipes showing how some of them may be used.

119. The fruits we've talked about so far are fresh fruits; that is, they are available in markets and can be purchased in their fresh state. However, there are several fruits that are dried before hitting the market, and since they can be found year-round, they can be used when fresh fruits aren’t in season or as a substitute for canned fruits when you’re running low. The main types of dried fruits include dates, figs, prunes (which are dried plums), and raisins (which are dried grapes). Apples, apricots, and peaches are also dried in large amounts and are often used when fresh versions aren’t available. Here are discussions on the different kinds of dried fruits, along with recipes showing how some of them can be used.


DATES

120. DATES, which are the fruit of the date palm, are not only very nutritious but well liked by most persons. They are oblong in shape and have a single hard seed that is grooved on one side. As dates contain very little water and a great deal of sugar, their food value is high, being more than five times that of apples and oranges. They are also valuable in the diet because of their slightly laxative effect. When added to other food, such as cakes, hot breads, etc., they provide a great deal of nutriment.

120. DATES, which come from the date palm, are not only very nutritious but also enjoyed by most people. They have an oval shape and contain a single hard seed that has a groove on one side. Since dates have very little water and a lot of sugar, their nutritional value is high, being over five times that of apples and oranges. They’re also beneficial in the diet because they have a slight laxative effect. When added to other foods, like cakes and hot breads, they add a lot of nutrients.

121. The finest dates on the market come from Turkey and the Eastern countries. They are prepared for sale at the places where they grow, being put up in packages that weigh from 1/2 to 1 pound, as well as in large boxes from which they can be sold in bulk. It is very important that all dates, whether bought in packages or in bulk, be thoroughly washed before they are eaten. While those contained in packages do not collect dirt after they are packed, they are contaminated to a certain extent by the hands of the persons who pack them. To be most satisfactory, dates should first be washed in hot water and then have cold water run over them. If they are to be stuffed, they should be thoroughly dried between towels or placed in a single layer on pans to allow the water to evaporate. While the washing of dates undoubtedly causes the loss of a small amount of food material, it is, nevertheless, a wise procedure.

121. The best dates on the market come from Turkey and the Eastern countries. They are sold at the locations where they are grown, packed in packages that weigh between 1/2 and 1 pound, as well as in larger boxes for bulk sales. It's very important that all dates, whether bought in packages or in bulk, are washed thoroughly before eating. While packaged dates don’t collect dirt after being sealed, they can still be contaminated by the hands of the packers. For best results, dates should be washed in hot water first and then rinsed with cold water. If you plan to stuff them, they should be thoroughly dried between towels or laid out in a single layer on pans to let the water evaporate. Although washing dates may result in a small loss of food material, it’s still a smart practice.

122. Dates can be put to many valuable uses in the diet. They are much used in cakes, muffins, and hot breads and in fillings for cakes and cookies. Several kinds of delicious pastry, as well as salads and sandwiches, are also made with dates. Their use as a confection is probably the most important one, as they are very appetizing when stuffed with nuts, candy, and such foods.

122. Dates have many valuable uses in our diets. They are frequently included in cakes, muffins, and warm breads, as well as in fillings for cakes and cookies. Various tasty pastries, along with salads and sandwiches, also incorporate dates. Their role as a confection is likely the most significant, as they are quite delicious when filled with nuts, candy, and similar treats.


FIGS

123. FIGS are a small pear-shaped fruit grown extensively in Eastern countries and to some extent in the western part of the United States. The varieties grown in this country are not especially valuable when they are dried, but they can be canned fresh in the localities where they are grown. Fresh figs cannot be shipped, as they are too perishable, but when dried they can be kept an indefinite length of time and they are highly nutritious, too. In fact, dried figs are nearly as high in food value as dates, and they are even more laxative.

123. FIGS are small pear-shaped fruits that are widely grown in Eastern countries and to some extent in the western United States. The varieties cultivated here aren't particularly valuable when dried, but they can be canned fresh in their growing regions. Fresh figs can't be shipped because they're too perishable, but dried figs can be stored for a long time and are very nutritious. In fact, dried figs are almost as high in food value as dates, and they're even more effective as a laxative.

124. Dried figs are found on the market both as pressed and pulled figs. Pressed figs are those which are pressed tightly together when they are packed and are so crushed down in at least one place that they are more or less sugary from the juice of the fig. Pulled figs are those which are dried without being pressed and are suitable for such purposes as stewing and steaming.

124. Dried figs are available in the market as both pressed and pulled figs. Pressed figs are tightly packed together, causing them to be crushed in some spots, which makes them a bit sugary from the fig juice. Pulled figs are dried without being pressed and are ideal for cooking methods like stewing and steaming.

125. STEWED FIGS.--If pulled figs can be secured, they may be stewed to be served as a sauce. When prepared in this way, they will be found to make a highly nutritious and delightful breakfast fruit or winter dessert.

125. STEWED FIGS.--If you can get fresh figs, they can be stewed to be served as a sauce. When made this way, they turn into a highly nutritious and delicious breakfast fruit or winter dessert.

STEWED FIGS

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 c. pulled figs
  • 3 c. water

Wash the figs and remove the stems. Put them into a preserving kettle with the water and allow them to come slowly to the boiling point. Simmer gently over the fire until the figs become soft. If they are desired very sweet, sugar may be added before they are removed from the heat and the juice then cooked until it is as thick as is desirable. Serve cold.

Wash the figs and take off the stems. Place them in a preserving pot with water and let them slowly come to a boil. Simmer gently until the figs become soft. If you want them really sweet, add sugar before taking them off the heat and cook the juice until it’s as thick as you like. Serve cold.

126. STEAMED FIGS.--When figs are steamed until they are soft and then served with plain or whipped cream, they make a delightful dessert. To prepare them in this way, wash the desired number and remove the stems. Place them in a steamer over boiling water and steam them until they are soft. Remove from the stove, allow them to cool, and serve with cream.

126. STEAMED FIGS.--When figs are steamed until they’re soft and then served with plain or whipped cream, they make a wonderful dessert. To prepare them this way, wash the desired number and remove the stems. Place them in a steamer over boiling water and steam them until they’re soft. Take them off the heat, let them cool, and serve with cream.


PRUNES

127. PRUNES are the dried fruit of any one of several varieties of plum trees and are raised mostly in Southern Europe and California. In their fresh state, they are purple in color, but they become darker during their drying. They are priced and purchased according to size, being graded with a certain number to the pound, just as lemons and oranges are graded with a certain number to the case. In food value they are about equal to dates and figs. They contain very little acid, but are characterized by a large quantity of easily digested sugar. They also have a laxative quality that makes them valuable in the diet.

127. PRUNES are the dried fruit of various kinds of plum trees, primarily grown in Southern Europe and California. When fresh, they are purple, but they darken as they dry. Their price and purchase depend on size, being categorized by a specific number per pound, similar to how lemons and oranges are sold by the case. In terms of nutritional value, they are roughly equal to dates and figs. They have very little acid but contain a high amount of easily digestible sugar. They also have a laxative effect, making them a beneficial addition to the diet.

128. STEWED PRUNES.--A simple way in which to prepare prunes is to stew them and then add sugar to sweeten them. Stewed prunes may be served as a sauce with cake of some kind or they may be used as a breakfast fruit.

128. STEWED PRUNES.--A straightforward way to prepare prunes is to stew them and then add sugar to sweeten them. Stewed prunes can be served as a sauce with cake or enjoyed as a breakfast fruit.

STEWED PRUNES

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 lb. prunes
  • 1 c. sugar

Look the prunes over carefully, wash them thoroughly in hot water, and soak them in warm water for about 6 hours. Place them on the stove in the same water in which they were soaked and which should well cover them. Cook slowly until they can be easily pierced with a fork or until the seeds separate from the pulp upon being crushed. Add the sugar, continue to cook until it is completely dissolved, and then remove from the stove and cool. If desired, more sweetening may be used or a few slices of lemon or a small amount of lemon peel may be added to give an agreeable flavor.

Look over the prunes carefully, wash them thoroughly in hot water, and soak them in warm water for about 6 hours. Place them on the stove in the same water they soaked in, making sure it covers them well. Cook slowly until they can be easily pierced with a fork or until the seeds separate from the pulp when crushed. Add the sugar, continue cooking until it’s completely dissolved, then remove from the heat and let it cool. If you want, you can add more sweetener or a few slices of lemon or a small amount of lemon peel to give it a nice flavor.

129. STUFFED PRUNES.--After prunes have been stewed, they may have the seeds removed and then be filled with peanut butter. Stuffed in this way and served with whipped cream, as shown in Fig. 21, or merely the prune juice, they make an excellent dessert.

129. STUFFED PRUNES.--After cooking the prunes, you can remove the pits and fill them with peanut butter. When served like this, with whipped cream, as shown in Fig. 21, or just with the prune juice, they make a great dessert.

[Illustration: FIG. 21, Stewed prunes stuffed with peanut butter.]

Select prunes of good size and stew them according to the directions just given, but remove them from the fire before they have become very soft. Cool and then cut a slit in each one and remove the seed. Fill the cavity with peanut butter and press together again. Serve with some of the prune juice or with whipped cream.

Select prunes that are a good size and cook them according to the directions provided, but take them off the heat before they get too soft. Let them cool, then make a slit in each one and take out the seed. Stuff the cavity with peanut butter and press them back together. Serve with some of the prune juice or with whipped cream.

130. PRUNE WHIP.--A very dainty prune dessert can be made from stewed prunes by reducing the prunes to a pulp and then adding the whites of eggs. Directions for this dessert follow:

130. PRUNE WHIP.--You can make a delightful prune dessert from stewed prunes by mashing them into a pulp and then mixing in egg whites. Here are the directions for this dessert:

PRUNE WHIP

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 c. prune pulp
  • 1/4 c. powdered sugar
  • 2 egg whites
  • Whipped cream

Make the prune pulp by removing the seeds from stewed prunes and forcing the prunes through a sieve or a ricer. Mix the powdered sugar with the pulp. Beat the whites of the eggs until they are stiff and then carefully fold them into the prune pulp. Chill and serve with whipped cream.

Make the prune pulp by taking the seeds out of cooked prunes and pushing the prunes through a sieve or a ricer. Combine the powdered sugar with the pulp. Whip the egg whites until they are stiff, and then gently fold them into the prune pulp. Chill and serve with whipped cream.


RAISINS

131. RAISINS are the dried fruit of various kinds of grapes that contain considerable sugar and are cured in the sun or in an oven. They come principally from the Mediterranean region and from California. They have an extensive use in cookery, both as a confection and an ingredient in cakes, puddings, and pastry. In food value, raisins are very high and contain sugar in the form of glucose; however, their skins are coarse cellulose and for this reason are likely to be injurious to children if taken in too large quantities. They are also valuable as a laxative and in adding variety to the diet if they are well cooked before they are served.

131. RAISINS are dried grapes that have a lot of sugar and are dried in the sun or an oven. They mainly come from the Mediterranean region and California. They are widely used in cooking, both as a treat and as an ingredient in cakes, puddings, and pastries. Raisins are very nutritious and contain sugar in the form of glucose; however, their skins are rough cellulose, which can be harmful to children if eaten in large amounts. They are also helpful as a laxative and can add variety to meals when cooked properly before serving.

Like other dried fruits, raisins should be washed thoroughly before they are used. They may then be soaked in warm water and stewed in exactly the same way as prunes. Sugar may or may not be added, as desired. Sultana raisins, which are the seedless variety, are especially desirable for stewing, although they may be used for any of the other purposes for which raisins are used.

Like other dried fruits, raisins should be washed thoroughly before use. They can then be soaked in warm water and cooked just like prunes. Sugar can be added or not, depending on your preference. Sultana raisins, which are seedless, are especially good for cooking, but they can also be used for any other purpose that raisins serve.


DRIED APPLES, APRICOTS, AND PEACHES

132. Apples, apricots, and peaches are fruits that are used extensively in their dried form. They enable the housewife to supply her family with fruit during seasons when it is impossible to obtain fresh fruit. They may also be used to take the place of canned fruit, especially when the supply is low or has been exhausted. Besides their use as a sauce, they may be used for pies and various desserts.

132. Apples, apricots, and peaches are fruits that are widely used in their dried form. They allow the homemaker to provide her family with fruit during times when fresh fruit is unavailable. They can also replace canned fruit, especially when the supply is low or has run out. In addition to being used as a sauce, they can be used for pies and various desserts.

133. These fruits, which may all be used in just the same way, should be soaked before stewing and should be stewed according to the directions for the preparation and cooking of prunes. Then sufficient sugar to make them sweet should be added. If they are desired for sauce, they may be used without any further preparation. However, they may be substituted for fresh fruit in recipes that call for any of them or for prunes. For instance, dried apricots, after being stewed, may be passed through a sieve to make a purée and may then be used to make apricot whip or soufflé according to the directions given for other similar desserts. The flavor of apricots is very strong and a small amount of the pulp will flavor a large quantity of ice cream, sherbet, or water ice.

133. These fruits can all be used in the same way. They should be soaked before cooking and then stewed following the instructions for preparing and cooking prunes. After that, add enough sugar to make them sweet. If you're using them for a sauce, they can be used without any further preparation. However, they can also replace fresh fruit in recipes that call for any of them or for prunes. For example, dried apricots, once stewed, can be blended through a sieve to create a purée, which can then be used to make apricot whip or soufflé according to the directions for similar desserts. Apricot flavor is quite strong, and a small amount of the pulp can flavor a large quantity of ice cream, sherbet, or water ice.


FRUIT AND FRUIT DESSERTS


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) To what are the flavors and odors of fruits chiefly due?

(1) What mainly causes the flavors and smells of fruits?

(2) What food substances are found in only very small amounts in fruits?

(2) What food substances are only found in tiny amounts in fruits?

(3) Mention the kinds of carbohydrate to which the food value of fruits is chiefly due.

(3) List the types of carbohydrates that are primarily responsible for the nutritional value of fruits.

(4) What parts of fruits make up the cellulose they contain?

(4) What parts of fruits contribute to the cellulose they have?

(5) Discuss the value of minerals in fruits.

(5) Talk about the importance of minerals in fruits.

(6) Of what value in cookery are fruits containing large quantities of acid?

(6) What value do fruits with high acid content have in cooking?

(7) What qualities of fruits are affected as they ripen?

(7) What qualities of fruits change as they ripen?

(8) Discuss the digestibility of fruits.

(8) Talk about how easy it is to digest fruits.

(9) What are the effects of cooking on fruit?

(9) What are the effects of cooking on fruit?

(10) What sanitary precautions concerning fruits should be observed?

(10) What hygiene measures should be taken when dealing with fruits?

(11) (a) How do weather conditions affect the quality of berries? (b) What is the most important use of berries in cookery?

(11) (a) How do weather conditions impact the quality of berries? (b) What is the main use of berries in cooking?

(12) Name some varieties of apples that can be purchased in your locality that are best for: (a) cookery; (b) eating.

(12) Name some varieties of apples that can be bought in your area that are best for: (a) cooking; (b) eating.

(13) How can peach juice be utilized to advantage?

(13) How can peach juice be used to its advantage?

(14) Mention the citrus fruits.

List the citrus fruits.

(15) Describe a method of preparing grapefruit for the table.

(15) Explain how to prepare grapefruit for serving.

(16) Describe the preparation of oranges for salads and desserts.

(16) Explain how to prepare oranges for salads and desserts.

(17) Describe the appearance of bananas in the best condition for serving.

(17) Describe what bananas look like when they're in the best condition for serving.

(18) (a) Give a test for the ripeness of pineapples. (b) Describe the most convenient method of preparing pineapples.

(18) (a) Provide a way to check if pineapples are ripe. (b) Explain the easiest method for preparing pineapples.

(19) Discuss the use of fruit cocktails.

(19) Talk about how to use fruit cocktails.

(20) Describe the general preparation of dried fruits that are to be stewed.

(20) Describe how to prepare dried fruits that will be stewed.






CANNING AND DRYING

NECESSITY FOR PRESERVING FOODS

1. The various methods of preserving perishable foods in the home for winter use originated because of necessity. In localities where the seasons for fruits and vegetables are short, the available supply in early times was limited to its particular season. Then foods had to be preserved in some way to provide for the season of scarcity. It was not possible, as it is now, to obtain foods in all parts of the country from localities that produce abundantly or have long seasons, because there were no means of rapid transportation, no cold storage, nor no commercial canning industries.

1. The different ways of preserving perishable foods at home for winter came about out of necessity. In areas where the seasons for fruits and vegetables are short, the available supply was limited to its specific season. Therefore, foods had to be preserved somehow to prepare for the scarcity season. Unlike today, it wasn't possible to get foods from different parts of the country that produce abundantly or have longer seasons because there were no means of fast transportation, no cold storage, or commercial canning industries.

2. In the small towns and farming communities, the first preservation methods for meats, as well as for fruits and vegetables, were pickling, curing, drying, and preserving. Not until later was canning known. It was this preserving of foodstuffs in the home that led to the manufacture and commercial canning of many kinds of edible materials. These industries, however, are of comparatively recent origin, the first canning of foods commercially having been done in France about a hundred years ago. At that time glass jars were utilized, but it was not until tin cans came into use later in England that commercial canning met with much favor.

2. In small towns and farming communities, the first methods for preserving meats, fruits, and vegetables were pickling, curing, drying, and preserving. Canning wasn’t known until later. It was this home preservation of food that led to the manufacturing and commercial canning of various edible products. However, these industries are relatively new; the first commercial canning of foods took place in France about a hundred years ago. At that time, glass jars were used, but it wasn’t until tin cans were introduced later in England that commercial canning gained popularity.

3. Both canning in the home and commercial canning have had many drawbacks, chief among which was spoiling. It was believed that the spoiling of canned foods was due to the presence of air in the jars or cans, and it is only within the last 50 years that the true cause of spoiling, namely, the presence of bacteria, has been understood. Since that time methods of canning that are much more successful have been originated, and the present methods are the result of the study of bacteria and their functions in nature. It is now definitely known that on this knowledge depends the success of the various canning methods.

3. Both home canning and commercial canning have had several drawbacks, the main one being spoilage. People used to think that spoilage in canned foods was caused by air in the jars or cans, and it’s only in the last 50 years that the real cause of spoilage, which is the presence of bacteria, has been understood. Since then, much more effective canning methods have been developed, and today’s techniques are the result of studying bacteria and their roles in nature. It is now well-established that the success of different canning methods relies on this understanding.

4. Since commercial canning provides nearly every kind of foodstuff, and since cold storage and rapid transportation make it possible to supply almost every locality with foods that are out of season, it has not been deemed so necessary to preserve foods in the home. Nevertheless, the present day brings forth a new problem and a new attitude toward the home preservation of foods. There are three distinct reasons why foods should be preserved in the home. The first is to bring about economy. If fruits, vegetables, and other foods can be procured at a price that will make it possible to preserve them in the home at a lower cost than that of the same foods prepared commercially, it will pay from an economical standpoint. The second is to promote conservation; that is, to prevent the wasting of food. When fruits and vegetables are plentiful, the supply is often greater than the demand for immediate consumption. Then, unless the surplus food is preserved in some way for later use, there will be a serious loss of food material. The third is to produce quality. If the home-canned product can be made superior to that commercially preserved, then, even at an equal or a slightly higher cost, it will pay to preserve food in the home.

4. Since commercial canning offers almost every type of food, and with cold storage and fast transportation making it possible to provide almost every area with out-of-season foods, it hasn’t seemed as necessary to preserve food at home. However, nowadays, there's a new challenge and a shift in how people view home food preservation. There are three clear reasons why preserving food at home is important. The first is cost-effectiveness. If fruits, vegetables, and other foods can be bought at a price that allows for home preservation at a lower expense than buying them prepped commercially, it makes economic sense. The second is to promote waste reduction; that is, to avoid wasting food. When fruits and vegetables are in season, sometimes the supply exceeds the immediate demand. If surplus food isn’t preserved for later use, it results in significant food loss. The third reason is to achieve quality. If home-canned products can be better than commercially preserved options, then even if the cost is the same or slightly higher, home preservation becomes worthwhile.

5. Of the methods of preserving perishable foods, only two, namely, canning and drying, are considered in this Section. Before satisfactory methods of canning came into use, drying was a common method of preserving both fruits and vegetables, and while it has fallen into disuse to a great extent in the home, much may be said for its value. Drying consists merely in evaporating the water contained in the food, and, with the exception of keeping it dry and protected from vermin, no care need be given to the food in storage. In the preparation of dried food for the table, it is transformed into its original composition by the addition of water, in which it is usually soaked and then cooked.

5. When it comes to preserving perishable foods, only two methods are discussed in this section: canning and drying. Before effective canning methods were developed, drying was a popular way to preserve fruits and vegetables. While it's not as commonly used at home anymore, it still has value. Drying simply involves removing the water from the food, and apart from keeping it dry and safe from pests, there isn't much maintenance needed while it's stored. To prepare dried food for eating, you just add water to it, usually soaking it first and then cooking it.

The drying of food is simple, and no elaborate equipment is required for carrying out the process. Dried food requires less space and care in storage than food preserved in any other way, and both paper and cloth containers may be used in storing it. When storage space is limited, or when there is a very large quantity of some such food as apples or string beans that cannot be used or canned at once, it is advisable to dry at least a part of them. When used in combination with canning, drying offers an excellent means of preserving foods and thus adding to their variety.

The drying of food is straightforward, and you don't need fancy equipment to do it. Dried food takes up less space and is easier to store than food preserved in other ways, and you can use both paper and cloth containers for storage. When you're short on storage space or have a large amount of something like apples or green beans that you can't use or can right away, it's a good idea to dry at least some of them. When combined with canning, drying is a great method for preserving food and adding more variety.

6. Canning has a greater range of possibilities than drying. A larger number of foods can be preserved in this way, and, besides, the foods require very little preparation, in some cases none at all, when they are removed from the cans. Practically every food that may be desired for use at some future time may be canned and kept if the process is carried out properly. These include the perishable vegetables and fruits of the summer season, as well as any winter vegetables that are not likely to keep in the usual way or that are gathered while they are immature.

6. Canning offers more options than drying. You can preserve a wider variety of foods this way, and the prep is minimal—sometimes even none at all—when you take the food out of the cans. Almost any food you might want to use later can be canned and stored if the process is done correctly. This includes perishable summer vegetables and fruits, as well as winter vegetables that won't last well through traditional storage or that are harvested while still young.

Many ready-to-serve dishes may be made up when the ingredients are the most plentiful and canned to keep them for the time when they are difficult or impossible to obtain otherwise. Such foods are very convenient in any emergency. Often, too, when something is being cooked for the table, an extra supply may be made with no greater use of fuel and very little extra labor, and if the excess is canned it will save labor and fuel for another day. In the same way, left-over foods from the table may be preserved by reheating and canning them. Many foods and combinations of foods may be made ready for pies and desserts and then canned, it being often possible to use fruits that are inferior in appearance for such purposes.

Many ready-to-eat meals can be prepared when the ingredients are in abundance and canned to save them for times when they are hard or impossible to find. These foods are very handy in emergencies. Also, when something is being cooked for the meal, an extra batch can be made with no more fuel and very little extra work, and if the extra is canned, it will save effort and fuel for another day. Similarly, leftovers from the meal can be preserved by reheating and canning them. Many foods and combinations can be prepared for pies and desserts and then canned, often using fruits that are not as visually appealing for such purposes.

Soup may be canned. It may be made especially for canning, or it may be made in larger quantity than is required for a meal and the surplus canned. For canning, it is an excellent plan to make soup more concentrated than that which would be served immediately, as such soup will require fewer jars and will keep better. Water or milk or the liquid from cooked vegetables or cereals may be added to dilute it when it is to be served.

Soup can be canned. It can be specifically prepared for canning, or it can be made in larger batches than needed for one meal, with the extra being canned. When canning, it's a good idea to make the soup more concentrated than what would be served right away, as this will require fewer jars and will preserve better. Water, milk, or the liquid from cooked vegetables or grains can be added to dilute it when it's time to serve.

Meat and fish also may be canned, and many times it is advisable to do this, especially in the case of varieties that cannot be preserved to advantage by such methods as salting, pickling, or curing.

Meat and fish can also be canned, and often it's a good idea to do this, especially for types that can't be preserved effectively by methods like salting, pickling, or curing.

7. The preservation of foods by canning and drying should not be looked at as an old-fashioned idea; rather, it is a matter in which the housewife should be vitally interested. In fact, it is the duty of every housewife to learn all she can about the best methods to employ. Canning methods have been greatly improved within the last few years, and it is a wise plan to adopt the newer methods and follow directions closely. Especially should this be done if foods canned by the older methods have spoiled or if mold has formed on top of the food in the jars.

7. Preserving food through canning and drying shouldn’t be seen as an outdated practice; instead, it's something every home cook should care about. In fact, it's essential for every home cook to learn as much as possible about the best techniques to use. Canning methods have significantly improved over the last few years, so it’s smart to embrace these newer methods and stick to the instructions carefully. This is especially important if foods preserved using older techniques have gone bad or if mold has appeared on the surface of the food in the jars.

In order to preserve foods successfully and with ease, the housewife should realize the importance of carrying out details with precision and care. The exactness with which the ingredients are measured, the choice and care of utensils, the selection and preparation of the food to be canned--all have a direct bearing on whether her results will be successful or not.

To successfully and easily preserve food, the homemaker should understand the significance of paying attention to details with precision and care. The accuracy of measuring ingredients, the choice and maintenance of utensils, and the selection and preparation of the food to be canned—all directly affect whether her efforts will be successful or not.

By observing such points and exercising a little ingenuity, the economical housewife may provide both a supply and a convenient variety of practical foods for winter use. For example, one single fruit or vegetable may be preserved in a number of ways. Thus, if there is a very large supply of apples that will not keep, some may be canned in large pieces, some may be put through a sieve, seasoned differently, and canned as apple sauce, and some may be cut into small pieces and canned for use in making pies. Apple butter and various kinds of jams and marmalades may be made of all or part apples, or the apples may be spiced and used as a relish. Combining fruits of different flavor in canning also adds variety. In fact, neither quinces nor apples canned alone are so delicious as the two properly combined and canned together.

By paying attention to these points and using a bit of creativity, the budget-conscious homemaker can create a good supply and a nice variety of practical foods for winter. For instance, one type of fruit or vegetable can be preserved in several ways. So, if there are a lot of apples that won’t last, some can be canned in large pieces, some can be mashed, seasoned differently, and canned as apple sauce, and some can be chopped into small pieces and canned for use in pies. Apple butter and various types of jams and marmalades can be made from all or some of the apples, or the apples can be spiced and used as a condiment. Mixing fruits with different flavors in the canning process also adds variety. In fact, neither quinces nor apples canned on their own are as tasty as when they’re properly combined and canned together.

In the same way, if the housewife will watch the markets closely and make good use of materials at hand, she may provide canned foods at comparatively little cost. Of course, the woman who has a garden of her own has a decided advantage over the one who must depend on the market for foods to can. The woman with access to a garden may can foods as soon as they have been gathered, and for this reason she runs less risk of losing them after they have been canned. Nevertheless, as has been pointed out, it is really the duty of every housewife to preserve food in the home for the use of her family.

In the same way, if a homemaker pays close attention to the markets and makes good use of available materials, she can provide canned foods at relatively low cost. Of course, a woman with her own garden has a significant advantage over one who has to rely on the market for canning supplies. The woman with access to a garden can can foods as soon as they are harvested, which means she is less likely to lose them after canning. Nevertheless, as has been emphasized, it is truly the responsibility of every homemaker to preserve food at home for her family's use.


CANNING

PRINCIPLES OF CANNING

8. CANNING consists in sealing foods in receptacles, such as cans or jars, in such a way that they will remain sterile for an indefinite period of time. Several methods of canning are in use, and the one to adopt will depend considerably on personal preference and the money that can be expended for the equipment. In any case, successful results in canning depend on the care that is given to every detail that enters into the work. This means, then, that from the selection of the food to be canned to the final operation in canning not one thing that has to do with good results should be overlooked.

8. CANNING involves sealing food in containers, like cans or jars, so they stay sterile for an unlimited time. There are several canning methods available, and the choice you make will largely depend on your personal preferences and how much money you can spend on equipment. Ultimately, achieving good results in canning relies on the attention given to every detail throughout the process. This means that from selecting the food to be canned to the final steps of the canning process, every aspect related to successful outcomes should be taken seriously.

9. SELECTION OF FOOD FOR CANNING.--A careful selection of the food that is to be canned is of great importance. If it is in good condition at the time of canning, it is much more likely to remain good when canned than food that is not. The flavor of the finished product also depends a great deal on the condition of the food. Fruits have the best flavor when they are ripe, but they are in the best condition for canning just before they have completely ripened. Immediately following perfect ripeness comes the spoiling stage, and if fruits, as well as vegetables, are canned before they are completely ripe, they are, of course, farther from the conditions that tend to spoil them. This, however, does not mean that green fruits or vegetables should be canned.

9. SELECTION OF FOOD FOR CANNING.--Choosing the right food for canning is really important. When the food is in good shape at the time of canning, it's much more likely to stay good once it's canned than food that's not. The taste of the finished product is also heavily influenced by the food's condition. Fruits taste best when they're ripe, but they're in the best shape for canning just before they fully ripen. Right after they reach perfect ripeness, they start to spoil, and if fruits and vegetables are canned before they are completely ripe, they are, of course, less likely to spoil. However, this doesn't mean that you should can green fruits or vegetables.

Whenever possible, any food that is to be canned should be perfectly fresh. The sooner it is canned after it has been gathered, the more satisfactory will be the results. For instance, it is better to can it 12 hours after gathering than 24 hours, but to can it 2 hours after is much better. Fruits, such as berries, that are especially perishable should not be allowed to stand overnight if this can be prevented; and it is absolutely necessary to can some vegetables, such as peas, beans, and corn, within a very few hours after gathering. Unless this is done, they will develop a bad flavor because of flat sour, a condition that results from the action of certain bacteria. Imperfect fruits should not be canned, but should be used for making jam, marmalade, or jelly.

Whenever possible, any food that’s going to be canned should be perfectly fresh. The sooner it gets canned after being picked, the better the results will be. For example, it’s better to can it 12 hours after picking than 24 hours, but canning it just 2 hours later is much better. Fruits, like berries, that spoil quickly shouldn’t be left overnight if it can be avoided; and it’s crucial to can some vegetables, like peas, beans, and corn, within just a few hours after picking. If this isn’t done, they can develop a bad taste due to flat sour, which happens because of certain bacteria. Overripe fruits shouldn’t be canned, but instead should be used to make jam, marmalade, or jelly.

10. WHY CANNED FOODS SPOIL.--Canned foods spoil because of the action of micro-organisms that cause fermentation, putrefaction, and molding. The reasons for the spoiling of food are thoroughly discussed in Essentials of Cookery, Part 2, and in that discussion canning is mentioned as one of the means of preserving food or preventing it from spoiling. However, when canning does not prove effective, it is because undesirable bacteria are present in the food. Either they have not been destroyed by the canning process or they have been allowed to enter before the jar was closed, and have then developed to such an extent as to cause the food to spoil. Odors, flavors, and gases result from the putrefaction, fermentation, or molding caused by these bacteria, and these make the foods offensive or harmful, or perhaps both.

10. WHY CANNED FOODS SPOIL.--Canned foods spoil due to the action of microorganisms that lead to fermentation, decay, and mold growth. The causes of food spoilage are discussed in detail in Essentials of Cookery, Part 2, where canning is highlighted as a method for preserving food and preventing spoilage. However, when canning fails, it's typically because harmful bacteria are present in the food. These bacteria may not have been eliminated during the canning process or might have entered before the jar was sealed, allowing them to grow enough to spoil the food. Odors, flavors, and gases result from the decay, fermentation, or molding caused by these bacteria, making the food unpleasant or unsafe, or possibly both.

11. PREVENTING CANNED FOODS FROM SPOILING.--From what has just been said, it will be seen that the success of canning depends entirely on destroying harmful micro-organisms that are present in the food and preventing those present in the air from entering the jars in which the food is placed.

11. PREVENTING CANNED FOODS FROM SPOILING.--As we've just discussed, the key to successful canning relies entirely on eliminating harmful microorganisms found in the food and keeping those in the air from entering the jars where the food is stored.

Some foods are more difficult to keep than others, because bacteria act on them more readily and the foods themselves contain nothing that prevents their growth. Among such foods are meat, fish, peas, corn, beans, and meat soups. On the other hand, some foods contain acids that prevent the growth of bacteria, and these keep easily. Among these are rhubarb, cranberries, and green gooseberries. However, foods that keep easily are few, and in most cases extreme care in the process of canning must be exercised.

Some foods are harder to store than others because bacteria thrive on them more easily, and those foods don’t have anything to stop their growth. Examples of these foods include meat, fish, peas, corn, beans, and meat soups. On the flip side, some foods have acids that inhibit bacterial growth, making them easier to store. These include rhubarb, cranberries, and green gooseberries. However, there aren't many foods that are easy to keep, and generally, you need to be very careful during the canning process.

12. While warmth is necessary for bacterial growth, very high temperatures will destroy or retard it. In canning, a temperature as high as 212 degrees Fahrenheit, or boiling point, retards the growth of active bacteria, but retarding their growth is not sufficient. They must be rendered inactive. To do this requires either a higher temperature than boiling point or long continued cooking at 212 degrees. Spores are a protective form that many kinds of bacteria assume under unfavorable conditions. They are very difficult to kill, and unless they are completely destroyed in the canning process, they will develop into active bacteria when conditions again become favorable. The result of the spore development is the spoiling of the food.

12. While warmth is essential for bacterial growth, extremely high temperatures can destroy or hinder it. In canning, a temperature up to 212 degrees Fahrenheit, or the boiling point, slows down the growth of active bacteria, but just slowing their growth isn't enough. They need to be completely inactivated. To achieve this, either a temperature higher than boiling or prolonged cooking at 212 degrees is required. Spores are a protective form that many bacteria take on under unfavorable conditions. They are very hard to eliminate, and if they aren’t fully destroyed during the canning process, they will turn back into active bacteria once conditions become favorable again. The result of spore development is food spoilage.

13. Other things besides the application of heat assist in the keeping of canned food, as, for example, the acids of the fruits and vegetables themselves, as has been mentioned. The use of sugar also assists; the greater the quantity of sugar in solution the easier it will be to keep the food. This is proved in the case of jams and jellies, which will keep without being sealed tight or put into jars immediately after cooking. Salt helps to keep vegetables that are canned, and, in making butters, conserves, and pickles, the spices and vinegars used help to protect the foods from bacterial action. However, none of these things are essential to the keeping of any sterile food, by which is meant food in which all bacteria or sources of bacteria have been rendered inactive by the application of sufficient heat.

13. Other factors, besides applying heat, help preserve canned food, such as the natural acids in fruits and vegetables, as mentioned before. The use of sugar also plays a role; the more sugar dissolved in the solution, the easier it is to keep the food fresh. This is evident in jams and jellies, which can stay good without being sealed tightly or put into jars right after cooking. Salt helps preserve canned vegetables, and in making butters, conserves, and pickles, the spices and vinegars used contribute to protecting the foods from bacteria. However, none of these are crucial for preserving any sterile food, meaning food that has had all bacteria or potential sources of bacteria deactivated through sufficient heat treatment.

14. CANNING PRESERVATIVES.--Numerous compounds, usually in the form of powders, are advertised as being useful for keeping canned foods from spoiling. None of them should be used, however, because they are unnecessary. If the work of canning is carefully and effectively done, good foods will keep perfectly without the addition of a preservative. The pure-food laws of the United States and of many of the states themselves forbid the use of some preservatives because of their harmful effect on the human system. For this reason, to say nothing of the extra expense that would be incurred in their use, such preservatives may well be left alone.

14. CANNING PRESERVATIVES.--Many products, often in powder form, are marketed as effective for preventing the spoilage of canned foods. However, none of them should be used, as they are unnecessary. If canning is done carefully and properly, quality foods will last just fine without adding any preservatives. The pure-food laws in the United States and many states prohibit certain preservatives due to their harmful effects on human health. For this reason, not to mention the added cost of using them, it's best to avoid such preservatives altogether.


GENERAL EQUIPMENT FOR CANNING

15. The equipment required for canning depends on two things: the quantity of food to be canned at one time and, since there are several canning methods in use, the canning method that is to be employed.

15. The equipment needed for canning depends on two things: the amount of food to be canned at once and, since there are several canning methods available, the specific method that will be used.

Various kinds of elaborate equipment have been devised to make the work of canning easy as well as effective. However, it is possible to do excellent work with simple equipment, and if the matter of expense must be considered there should be no hesitation about choosing the simplest and least expensive and doing the work in the best possible way with it. It is important also that utensils already included in the household equipment be improvised to meet the needs of the canning season as far as possible.

Various types of advanced equipment have been created to make canning both easy and efficient. However, you can achieve great results with basic tools, and if cost is a concern, there’s no reason to hesitate in picking the simplest and cheapest option, making the most of it. It’s also important to adapt utensils already available in your home to meet the demands of the canning season whenever possible.

16. Whatever the canning method that is to be followed may be, there are a number of utensils and containers that go to make up the general equipment that is required. Familiarity with such an equipment is extremely necessary for correct results in canning, and for this reason the general equipment is discussed here in detail. The special equipment needed for each of the canning methods, however, is not taken up until the method is considered. In giving this general equipment, mention is made of some utensils that are convenient but not absolutely necessary. Any unnecessary, but convenient, part of a canning equipment should therefore be chosen with a view to its labor-saving qualities and its expense. A device that will make the keeping of canned foods more certain and prevent loss may be a valuable purchase; still, that which makes for greater convenience, but not absolute saving, need not be considered a necessity.

16. No matter which canning method you choose, there are several utensils and containers that make up the essential equipment needed. Being familiar with this equipment is crucial for achieving good results in canning, which is why we discuss the general equipment here in detail. The specific tools required for each canning method will be covered when we look at that method. In this overview of general equipment, we'll also mention some tools that are useful but not strictly necessary. Any extra tools that are convenient but not essential should be chosen based on their ability to save time and their cost. A tool that helps ensure canned foods last longer and reduces waste can be a worthwhile investment; however, tools that offer more convenience but don’t really save time aren’t considered essential.

17. VESSELS FOR CANNING.--The pots, kettles, and pans in ordinary use in the kitchen for cooking purposes are usually satisfactory for the canning of foods. Those made of tin or iron, however, are not so good as enameled ones or those made of other metals, such as aluminum. Especially is this true of utensils used for the canning of acid fruits or vegetables, because, if such food remains in contact with tin or iron for more than a few minutes, the acid will corrode the surface sufficiently to give the food a bad or metallic taste. In addition, such utensils often give the food a dark color. If enameled kettles are used for the cooking of foods that are to be canned, it is important that the surface be perfectly smooth and unbroken. Otherwise, it will be difficult to prevent burning; besides, chips of the enamel are liable to get into the food. Kettles for the cooking of fruits with sirup should be flat and have a broad surface. Fruit is not so likely to crush in such kettles as in kettles that are deep and have a small surface.

17. VESSELS FOR CANNING.--The pots, kettles, and pans we usually use in the kitchen for cooking are generally fine for canning foods. However, those made of tin or iron aren’t as good as enameled ones or those made from other metals like aluminum. This is especially true for utensils used to can acidic fruits or vegetables, because if those foods stay in contact with tin or iron for more than a few minutes, the acid can corrode the surface enough to give the food a bad or metallic taste. Plus, such utensils often darken the food. If you use enameled kettles for cooking foods that will be canned, it’s important that the surface is completely smooth and unbroken. Otherwise, it’ll be hard to avoid burning, and chips of the enamel could end up in the food. Kettles used for cooking fruits in syrup should be flat and have a wide surface. Fruits are less likely to get crushed in those types of kettles compared to deeper ones with smaller surfaces.

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

18. KNIVES, SPOONS AND OTHER SMALL UTENSILS.--Many of the small utensils in a kitchen equipment are practically indispensable for canning purposes. Thus, for paring fruits and vegetables and cutting out cores, blossoms, and stem ends or any defective spots, nothing is more satisfactory than a sharp paring knife with a good point. For paring acid fruits, though, a plated knife is not so likely to cause discoloring as a common steel knife. There are, however, other useful implements for special work, such as the strawberry huller, Fig. 1, for removing the stems of strawberries, and the peach pitter, Fig. 2, [Illustration: FIG. 2] for removing the stones from clingstone peaches. For placing the food to be canned into jars, both forks and large spoons are necessities. A large spoon with holes or slits in the bowl is convenient for picking fruits and vegetables out of a kettle when no liquid is desired, as well as for skimming a kettle of fruit. For packing foods into jars, a long-handled spoon with a small bowl is convenient. Still another useful small utensil is a short, wide funnel that may be inserted into the mouth of a jar and thus permit the food to be dipped or poured into it without being spilled.

18. KNIVES, SPOONS AND OTHER SMALL UTENSILS.--Many of the small utensils in a kitchen are essential for canning. For peeling fruits and vegetables and cutting out cores, blossoms, stem ends, or any bad spots, a sharp paring knife with a good point is the best tool. However, for peeling acidic fruits, a plated knife is less likely to cause discoloration than a regular steel knife. There are also other handy tools for specific tasks, like the strawberry huller, Fig. 1, for removing the stems from strawberries, and the peach pitter, Fig. 2, [Illustration: FIG. 2] for taking the pits out of clingstone peaches. To place food into jars for canning, both forks and large spoons are necessary. A large spoon with holes or slits in the bowl is useful for picking fruits and vegetables out of a pot when you don’t want any liquid, and it’s also great for skimming fruit from a kettle. For packing food into jars, a long-handled spoon with a small bowl works well. Another handy small utensil is a short, wide funnel that fits into the opening of a jar, allowing you to dip or pour food in without spilling.

19. DEVICES FOR MEASURING.--Accurate measures are necessary in canning; in fact, some of the work cannot be done satisfactorily without them. A half-pint measuring cup and a quart measure with the cups marked on it are very satisfactory for making all measures.

19. DEVICES FOR MEASURING.--Accurate measurements are essential in canning; in fact, some tasks can't be done properly without them. A half-pint measuring cup and a quart measure with marks for different cup sizes work very well for making all measurements.

Scales are often convenient, too. For measuring dry materials, they are always more accurate than measures. Many canning proportions and recipes call for the measurement of the ingredients by weight rather than by measure. When this is the case and a pair of scales is not convenient, it is almost impossible to be certain that the proportions are correct. For instance, if a recipe calls for a pound of sugar and an equal amount of fruit, a measuring cup will in no way indicate the correct quantity.

Scales are often really handy, too. For weighing dry ingredients, they’re always more precise than measuring cups. Many canning recipes and proportions ask for the ingredients to be measured by weight instead of by volume. When that’s the case and scales aren’t available, it’s nearly impossible to know if the proportions are right. For example, if a recipe requires a pound of sugar and the same amount of fruit, a measuring cup won’t accurately show the correct quantity.

20. COLANDER AND WIRE STRAINER.--For the cleansing of fruits and vegetables that are to be canned, a colander is of great assistance; also, if a large wire strainer is purchased, it may be used as a sieve and for scalding and blanching, steps in canning that are explained later.

20. COLANDER AND WIRE STRAINER.--For cleaning fruits and vegetables that are going to be canned, a colander is very helpful; also, if you get a large wire strainer, it can be used as a sieve and for scalding and blanching, which are steps in canning that will be explained later.

21. GLASS JARS.--For household canning, the most acceptable containers for food are glass jars that may be closed air-tight with jar rubbers and tops. Use is sometimes made of bottles, jars, and cans of various kinds that happen to be at hand, but never should they be employed unless they can be fitted with covers and made positively air-tight. Like utensils, the glass jars that are a part of the household supply should be used from year to year, if possible, but not at the loss of material. Such loss, however, will depend on the proper sealing of the jars, provided everything up to that point has been correctly done. All jars should be carefully inspected before they are used, because imperfect or broken edges are often responsible for the spoiling of food.

21. GLASS JARS.--For home canning, the best containers for food are glass jars that can be sealed airtight with jar rubber seals and lids. Sometimes, people use bottles, jars, and cans of various types that are available, but these should only be used if they can be sealed with covers and made completely airtight. Like other kitchen tools, the glass jars in your home supply should be reused year after year if possible, but without wasting material. However, any loss will depend on how well the jars are sealed, assuming everything else has been done correctly up to that point. All jars should be thoroughly checked before use, as imperfect or broken edges can often cause food to spoil.

In purchasing glass jars, only what are known as first quality should be selected. Cheap jars are likely to be seconds and will not prove so satisfactory. Glass jars may be purchased in sizes that hold from 1/2 pint to 2 quarts. If possible, food should be canned in the size of jar that best suits the number of persons to be served.

In buying glass jars, only choose what are referred to as first quality. Inexpensive jars are often second-rate and may not perform as well. Glass jars come in sizes ranging from 1/2 pint to 2 quarts. Whenever possible, food should be canned in the jar size that best matches the number of people being served.

If the family consists of two, pint jars will hold even more than may be used at one time, while if the family is large the contents of a quart jar may not be sufficient.

If the family has two members, pint jars will hold more than needed at one time, while if the family is large, the contents of a quart jar may not be enough.

[Illustration: FIG. 3]

22. Numerous types of glass jars are to be had. Some of them are more convenient than others and may be made air-tight more easily. These two features are the most important to consider in making a selection. Jars that close with difficulty, especially if the tops screw on, are not likely to keep food successfully because the bacteria in the air will have a chance to enter and thus cause the food to spoil.

22. There are many different types of glass jars available. Some are more convenient than others and can be sealed airtight more easily. These two features are the most important to think about when choosing one. Jars that are hard to close, especially those with screw-on lids, probably won’t keep food fresh because air can get in and spoil the food.

Glass jars used for canning foods have improved with canning methods. The old-style jars had a groove into which the cover fit, and melted sealing wax or rosin was poured into the space surrounding the cover. Later came the screw-top jar shown in Fig. 3. This type of jar has been extensively used with excellent results. Both the mouth of this jar and the jar top, which is made of metal, usually zinc, lined with glass or porcelain, have threads that match, and the jar is sealed by placing the jar rubber over the top, or ridge, of the jar and then screwing the jar top firmly in place. Such jars, however, are more difficult to make air-tight than some of the newer types. One of these jars is illustrated in Fig. 4. It is provided with a glass cover that fits on the ridge of the jar and a metal clasp that serves to hold the cover in place and to make the jar air-tight after a rubber is placed in position. Another convenient and simple type of glass jar, known as the automatic seal top, has a metal cover with a rubber attached.

Glass jars used for canning food have improved with modern canning techniques. The old jars had a groove for the lid, and melted sealing wax or rosin was poured into the space around the lid. Then came the screw-top jar shown in Fig. 3. This type of jar has been widely used with great success. Both the mouth of the jar and the lid, usually made of zinc and lined with glass or porcelain, have matching threads, and the jar is sealed by placing the rubber gasket over the top or ridge of the jar and then securely screwing the lid in place. However, these jars can be trickier to make air-tight compared to some of the newer models. One of these newer jars is illustrated in Fig. 4. It features a glass lid that fits on the jar's ridge and a metal clasp that holds the lid in place and ensures the jar is air-tight after a rubber seal is put in position. Another convenient and straightforward type of glass jar, known as the automatic seal top, comes with a metal lid that has a rubber gasket attached.

Another improvement in jars is that the opening has been enlarged so that large fruits and vegetables, such as peaches, tomatoes, etc., can be packed into them whole. With such wide-mouthed jars, it is easier to pack the contents in an orderly manner and thus improve the appearance of the product. Besides, it is a simpler matter to clean such a jar than one that has a small opening.

Another improvement in jars is that the opening has been made larger so that whole large fruits and vegetables, like peaches and tomatoes, can be packed inside. With these wide-mouthed jars, it’s easier to organize the contents neatly, making the product look better. Plus, cleaning a jar with a bigger opening is much simpler than cleaning one with a small opening.

[Illustration: FIG. 4]

23. JAR TOPS AND COVERS.--While the tops, or covers, for glass jars are made of both metal and glass, as has been stated, the glass tops meet with most favor. Of course, they are breakable, but they are even more durable than metal tops, which are usually rendered less effective by the bending they undergo when they are removed from the jar. Covers made of zinc are being rapidly abandoned, and it has been proved that the fewer the grooves and the simpler the cover, the more carefully and successfully can it be cleaned. For safety, glass tops that have become chipped or nicked on the edges that fit the jar should be replaced by perfect ones. The covers for automatic-seal jars must be pierced before they can be removed, and this necessitates a new supply for each canning. If there is any question about the first-class condition of jar covers, whether of metal or glass, tops that are perfect should be provided.

23. JAR TOPS AND COVERS.--While jar tops or covers can be made from both metal and glass, glass tops are generally preferred. Sure, they can break, but they're actually more durable than metal tops, which often become less effective due to bending when removed from the jar. Zinc covers are being phased out quickly, and it's been shown that simpler designs with fewer grooves are easier to clean effectively. For safety, any glass tops that are chipped or have nicks on the edges that touch the jar should be replaced with flawless ones. Automatic-seal jar covers need to be pierced before removal, which means you'll need a new supply for each canning session. If there are any doubts about the quality of jar covers, whether metal or glass, you should use only perfect tops.

24. JAR RUBBERS.--Jar rubbers are required with jar tops to seal jars air-tight. Before they are used, they should be tested in the manner shown in Fig. 5. Good jar rubbers will return to their original shape after being stretched. Such rubbers should be rather soft and elastic, and they should fit the jars perfectly and lie down flat when adjusted. A new supply of rubbers should be purchased each canning season, because rubber deteriorates as it grows old. Rubbers of good quality will stand boiling for 5 hours without being affected, but when they have become stiff and hard from age it is sometimes impossible to make jars air-tight. Occasionally, two old rubbers that are comparatively soft may be used in place of a new one, and sometimes old rubbers are dipped in paraffin and then used. However, if there is any difficulty in sealing jars properly with rubbers so treated, they should be discarded and good ones used.

24. JAR RUBBERS.--Jar rubbers are needed with jar lids to seal jars air-tight. Before using them, they should be tested as shown in Fig. 5. Good jar rubbers will return to their original shape after being stretched. These rubbers should be soft and elastic, fitting the jars perfectly and lying flat when adjusted. A new supply of rubbers should be bought each canning season because rubber deteriorates as it ages. Quality rubbers can withstand boiling for 5 hours without being affected, but when they become stiff and hard with age, it can be impossible to create an air-tight seal. Occasionally, two old rubbers that are still relatively soft can be used in place of a new one, and sometimes old rubbers are dipped in paraffin before use. However, if sealing jars properly with treated rubbers becomes difficult, they should be discarded and replaced with good ones.

[Illustration: FIG. 5]

25. TIN CANS.--For household canning, tin cans are not so convenient as glass jars, but in spite of this they are coming into extensive use. The kind that may be used without any special equipment has a tin lid that fits into a groove and is fastened in place with rosin or sealing wax. Some cans, however, require that the lids be soldered in place. While soldering requires special equipment, this method of making the cans air-tight is the best, and it is employed where considerable canning is done, as by canning clubs or commercial canners.

25. TIN CANS.--For home canning, tin cans aren’t as convenient as glass jars, but they are becoming widely used. The type that doesn’t need special equipment has a tin lid that fits into a groove and is secured with rosin or sealing wax. However, some cans need the lids to be soldered on. Although soldering requires special tools, this method is the best for making the cans air-tight and is used where a lot of canning happens, like in canning clubs or by commercial canners.

In the purchase of tin cans, the size of the opening should receive consideration. If large fruits and vegetables, such as peaches, pears, and tomatoes, are to be canned, the opening must be a large one; whereas, if peas, beans, corn, and other small vegetables or fruits are to be canned, cans having a smaller opening may be chosen. When acid fruits or vegetables are to be canned, use should be made of cans that are coated with shellac, as this covering on the inside of the cans prevents any action of the acid on the tin.

In buying tin cans, you should think about the size of the opening. If you plan to can large fruits and vegetables like peaches, pears, and tomatoes, you need a can with a big opening. But for smaller items like peas, beans, corn, or other small fruits and vegetables, you can go with cans that have a smaller opening. When canning acidic fruits or vegetables, use cans that are lined with shellac, as this coating on the inside prevents the acid from reacting with the tin.


CANNING METHODS

GENERAL DISCUSSION


26. The methods employed for the canning of foods include the open-kettle method, the cold-pack method, the steam-pressure method, and the oven method. Of these, the open-kettle method is perhaps the oldest household method of canning, and it is still used by many housewives. The other methods, which are newer, seem troublesome to the housewife who is familiar with the open-kettle method, yet it will only be fair to give the new methods a trial before deciding which to use. The one-period cold-pack method has much to recommend it. Foods canned in this way undergo less change in form and flavor than those canned by the open-kettle method; besides, there is less danger of spoiling. In fact, many foods, such as vegetables and meats, that cannot be canned satisfactorily by the open-kettle method will keep perfectly if they are carefully preserved by the one-period cold-pack method. The steam-pressure method requires the use of special equipment, as is explained later. While it is a very acceptable canning method, it is not accessible in many homes. The oven method is liked by many housewives, but it offers almost the same chance for contamination as does the open-kettle method.

26. The methods used for canning foods include the open-kettle method, the cold-pack method, the steam-pressure method, and the oven method. Among these, the open-kettle method is probably the oldest household canning technique, and many home cooks still use it. The newer methods might seem complicated to someone who’s accustomed to the open-kettle method, but it’s fair to try the new methods before deciding which one to stick with. The one-period cold-pack method has a lot of benefits. Foods canned this way change less in appearance and taste compared to those canned with the open-kettle method, and there's a lower risk of spoilage. In fact, many foods like vegetables and meats that can’t be canned well using the open-kettle method can be perfectly preserved with the one-period cold-pack method. The steam-pressure method requires special equipment, as explained later. While it’s a very good canning technique, it's not available in many households. The oven method is popular with many home cooks, but it poses a similar risk of contamination as the open-kettle method.


OPEN-KETTLE METHOD

27. The OPEN-KETTLE METHOD of canning is very simple and requires no equipment other than that to be found in every kitchen. It consists in thoroughly cooking the food that is to be canned, transferring it to containers, and sealing them immediately.

27. The OPEN-KETTLE METHOD of canning is very straightforward and only needs equipment that you'll find in any kitchen. It involves fully cooking the food meant for canning, placing it in containers, and sealing them right away.

28. UTENSILS REQUIRED.--Not many utensils are required for the open-kettle canning method. For cooking the food, a large enamel or metal vessel other than tin or iron should be provided. It should be broad and shallow, rather than deep, especially for fruit, as this food retains its shape better if it is cooked in a layer that is not deep. The other utensils for canning fruits and vegetables by this method are practically the same as those already discussed--measuring utensils, a knife, large spoons, pans for sterilizing jars or cans, covers, rubbers, and jars or cans into which to put the food.

28. UTENSILS REQUIRED.--You don’t need many utensils for the open-kettle canning method. For cooking the food, you should use a large enamel or metal pot, but avoid tin or iron. It should be wide and shallow rather than deep, especially for fruits, as they hold their shape better when cooked in a thinner layer. The other utensils for canning fruits and vegetables using this method are pretty much the same as those already mentioned—measuring tools, a knife, large spoons, pans for sterilizing jars or cans, lids, rubber seals, and jars or cans to pack the food into.

29. PROCEDURE.--The first step in the open-kettle canning method consists in sterilizing the containers. To do this, first clean the jars, covers, and rubbers by washing them and then boiling them in clear water for 15 to 20 minutes.

29. PROCEDURE.--The first step in the open-kettle canning method is to sterilize the containers. To do this, start by cleaning the jars, lids, and seals by washing them, then boil them in clean water for 15 to 20 minutes.

Next, attention should be given to the food that is to be canned. Look it over carefully, cut out any decayed portions, and wash it thoroughly. Sometimes roots, leaves, stems, or seeds are removed before washing, and sometimes this is not done until after washing. At any rate, all dirt or foreign material must be washed from foods before they are ready for canning.

Next, you should pay attention to the food you're going to can. Check it carefully, cut out any spoiled parts, and wash it thoroughly. Sometimes, roots, leaves, stems, or seeds are removed before washing, and sometimes this doesn't happen until after washing. Either way, all dirt or foreign materials must be cleaned off the food before it’s ready for canning.

After preparing the food, it must be cooked. If fruit is being canned, put it into the required sirup, the making of which is explained later, and cook it until it is well softened, as if preparing it for immediate table use. If vegetables are being canned, cook them in the same way, but use salt and water instead of sirup. When the food is cooked, transfer it to the sterile jars and seal at once with the sterile rubbers and covers. Then invert each jar to permit the food to cool and to test for leaks.

After preparing the food, it needs to be cooked. If you’re canning fruit, put it into the necessary syrup, which is explained later, and cook it until it’s soft, as if you were preparing it for immediate serving. If you’re canning vegetables, cook them the same way, but use salt and water instead of syrup. Once the food is cooked, transfer it to the sterilized jars and seal them right away with the sterilized lids and covers. Then turn each jar upside down to let the food cool and to check for leaks.

30. The danger of not securing good results with the open-kettle method lies in the possibility of contaminating the contents before the jar is closed and sealed. In addition to having the jars, rubbers, and covers sterile, therefore, all spoons and other utensils used to handle the cooked food must be sterile. Likewise, the jars must be filled to the top and the covers put on and made as firm and tight as possible at once, so that as few bacteria as possible will enter. If screw-top cans are used, the tops should not be twisted or turned after cooling, as this may affect the sealing. If jars leak upon being turned upside down, the contents must be removed and reheated and the jar must be fitted with another cover. Then both jar and cover must be sterilized and the contents returned and sealed immediately.

30. The risk of not achieving good results with the open-kettle method comes from the chance of contaminating the contents before the jar is closed and sealed. In addition to ensuring that the jars, rubber seals, and lids are sterile, all spoons and other utensils used to handle the cooked food must also be sterilized. Likewise, the jars should be filled to the top, and the lids should be put on firmly and tightly right away to minimize bacteria entering. If screw-top cans are used, the tops shouldn’t be twisted or turned after they cool, as this can affect the seal. If jars leak when turned upside down, the contents need to be removed, reheated, and the jar should be fitted with a new lid. Then both the jar and lid must be sterilized, and the contents returned and sealed immediately.


COLD-PACK METHOD

31. The COLD-PACK METHOD of canning differs from the open-kettle method in that the food to be canned is not cooked in a kettle before placing it in the jars and sealing them. In this method, the food to be canned is prepared by washing, peeling, scraping, hulling, stemming, seeding, or cutting, depending on the kind. Then it is scalded or blanched and plunged into cold water quickly and taken out immediately, the latter operation being called cold-dipping. After this it is placed into hot jars, covered with boiling liquid--boiling water and salt for vegetables, meats, fish, or soups, and boiling sirup for fruits. Then the filled jars are covered loosely and placed in a water bath and processed; that is, cooked and sterilized. When food that is being canned is subjected to processing only once, the method is referred to as the one-period cold-pack method; but when the food in the jars has not been blanched and cold-dipped and is processed, allowed to stand 24 hours and then processed again, and this operation repeated, it is called the fractional-sterilization method. The equipment required for the cold-pack canning method and the procedure in performing the work are taken up in detail, so that every point concerning the work may be thoroughly understood.

31. The COLD-PACK METHOD of canning is different from the open-kettle method in that the food being canned isn't cooked in a kettle before it's placed in jars and sealed. In this method, the food is prepared by washing, peeling, scraping, hulling, stemming, seeding, or cutting, depending on the type. Then it is scalded or blanched, quickly plunged into cold water, and taken out immediately, with this last step called cold-dipping. After that, it's placed into hot jars, covered with boiling liquid—boiling water and salt for vegetables, meats, fish, or soups, and boiling syrup for fruits. Then, the filled jars are loosely covered and placed in a water bath to be processed; that is, cooked and sterilized. When the food being canned is processed only once, this is referred to as the one-period cold-pack method; but when the food in the jars hasn’t been blanched and cold-dipped, is processed, allowed to sit for 24 hours, and then processed again, this is called the fractional-sterilization method. The equipment needed for the cold-pack canning method and the steps in performing the work are explained in detail so that every aspect of the process can be fully understood.

[Illustration: FIG. 6]

32. UTENSILS REQUIRED.--The utensils required for canning by the cold-pack method are shown assembled in Fig. 6. Chief among them is a sterilizer, or boiler, which consists of a large fiat-bottomed vessel fitted with a rack and a tight-fitting cover. A number of such devices are manufactured for canning by the cold-pack method, but it is possible to improvise one in the home. A wash boiler, a large pail, a large lard can, or, in fact, any large vessel with a flat bottom into which is fitted a rack of some kind to keep the jars 3/4 inch above the bottom can be used. Several layers of wire netting cut to correct size and fastened at each end to a 3/4-inch strip of wood will do very well for a rack. In any event, the vessel must be deep enough to allow the water to cover the jars completely and must have a tight-fitting cover. Besides a sterilizer, there are needed three large vessels, one for scalding the food that is to be canned, one for cold-dipping, and one for keeping the jars hot. To hold the food that is to be dipped, a sieve, a wire basket, also shown in Fig. 6, or a large square of cheesecloth must also be provided, and for placing jars in the water bath, a can lifter, a type of which is shown on the table in Fig. 6, may be needed. The remainder of the equipment is practically the same as that described under the heading General Equipment for Canning.

32. UTENSILS REQUIRED.--The utensils needed for canning using the cold-pack method are shown together in Fig. 6. The most important of these is a sterilizer or boiler, which is a large, flat-bottomed pot equipped with a rack and a tight-fitting lid. Several versions of these devices are made for canning with the cold-pack method, but you can also create one at home. A wash boiler, a large bucket, a big lard can, or really any large, flat-bottomed container that has a rack to keep the jars 3/4 inch above the bottom can work. You can make a suitable rack by using several layers of wire netting cut to the right size and secured at both ends to a 3/4-inch strip of wood. In any case, the pot needs to be deep enough to completely cover the jars with water and must have a tight-fitting lid. Besides a sterilizer, you'll need three large containers: one for heating the food that will be canned, one for cold-dipping, and one for keeping the jars hot. For holding the food to be dipped, you should also have a sieve, a wire basket (which is also shown in Fig. 6), or a large square of cheesecloth. Finally, for placing jars in the water bath, you might need a can lifter, a type shown on the table in Fig. 6. The rest of the equipment is basically the same as described under the section General Equipment for Canning.


PROCEDURE IN THE ONE-PERIOD COLD-PACK METHOD

33. PREPARING THE CONTAINERS.--The first step in the cold-pack method consists in preparing the containers for the food. The jars, rubbers, and covers, however, do not have to be sterilized as in the open-kettle method. But it is necessary first to test and cleanse the jars and then to keep them hot, so that later, when they are filled and ready to be placed in the water bath, they will not crack by coming in contact with boiling water. The best way in which to keep the jars hot is to let them stand in hot water.

33. PREPARING THE CONTAINERS.--The first step in the cold-pack method is to prepare the containers for the food. The jars, lids, and covers don’t need to be sterilized like they do in the open-kettle method. However, it’s important to test and clean the jars first, and then keep them hot, so that when they are filled and ready to go into the water bath, they won't crack from coming into contact with boiling water. The best way to keep the jars hot is to let them sit in hot water.

[Illustration: FIG. 7] [Illustration: FIG. 8]

34. PREPARATION OF THE FOOD.--Attention should next be directed to the preparation of the food to be canned; that is, clean it and have it ready for the processes that follow. The fruits or vegetables may be canned whole or in pieces of any desirable size. What to do with them is explained later, when the directions for canning the different kinds are discussed. While the food is undergoing preparation, fill the sterilizer with hot water and allow it to come to the boiling point.

34. PREPARATION OF THE FOOD.--Next, focus on getting the food ready to be canned; that means cleaning it and preparing it for the next steps. Fruits or vegetables can be canned whole or cut into any size you prefer. Details on how to handle them will be explained later when we discuss the canning instructions for each type. While you prepare the food, fill the sterilizer with hot water and let it heat up until it boils.

35. SCALDING AND BLANCHING.--When the food is made ready, the next step is to scald or blanch it. Scalding is done to loosen the skin of such food as peaches, plums, and tomatoes, so that they may be peeled easily. To scald such fruits or vegetables, dip them quickly into boiling water and allow them to remain there just long enough to loosen the skin. If they are ripe, the scalding must be done quickly; otherwise they will become soft. They should never be allowed to remain in the water after the skin begins to loosen. For scalding fruits and vegetables a wire basket or a square of cheesecloth may be used in the manner shown in Figs. 7 and 8.

35. SCALDING AND BLANCHING.--Once the food is prepared, the next step is to scald or blanch it. Scalding helps loosen the skin of foods like peaches, plums, and tomatoes so that they can be peeled easily. To scald these fruits or vegetables, quickly dip them into boiling water and keep them in there just long enough to loosen the skin. If they're ripe, the scalding should be fast; otherwise, they will get mushy. They should never stay in the water after the skin starts to loosen. You can use a wire basket or a piece of cheesecloth for scalding fruits and vegetables, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8.

Blanching is done to reduce the bulk of such foods as spinach and other greens, to render them partly sterilized, and to improve their flavor. It consists in dipping the food into boiling water or suspending it over live steam and allowing it to remain there for a longer period of time than is necessary for scalding. To blanch food, place it in a wire basket, a sieve, or a piece of clean cheesecloth and lower it into boiling water or suspend it above the water in a closely covered vessel. Allow it to remain there long enough to accomplish the purpose intended.

Blanching is done to reduce the volume of foods like spinach and other greens, to partially sterilize them, and to enhance their flavor. This process involves dipping the food into boiling water or holding it over steam for a longer time than what's needed for just scalding. To blanch food, place it in a wire basket, a sieve, or a clean piece of cheesecloth, and lower it into boiling water or suspend it above the water in a covered pot. Let it stay there long enough to achieve the desired result.

36. COLD DIPPING.--After the food to be canned is scalded or blanched, it is ready for cold-dipping. Cold-dipping is done partly to improve the color of the food. It stops the softening process at once, makes the food more firm and thus easier to handle, and helps to loosen the skin of foods that have been scalded. It also assists in destroying bacteria by suddenly shocking the spores after the application of heat. Cold-dipping, in conjunction with blanching or scalding, replaces the long process of fractional sterilization, and is what makes the one-period cold-pack method superior to this other process. To cold-dip food, simply plunge that which has just been scalded or blanched into cold water, as in Fig. 9, and then take it out at once.

36. COLD DIPPING.--After the food that will be canned is scalded or blanched, it’s ready for cold-dipping. Cold-dipping is done partly to enhance the color of the food. It immediately stops the softening process, making the food firmer and easier to handle, and helps to loosen the skin of foods that have been scalded. It also helps destroy bacteria by quickly shocking the spores after heating. Cold-dipping, combined with blanching or scalding, replaces the long process of fractional sterilization and makes the one-period cold-pack method better than this other process. To cold-dip food, simply immerse the items that have just been scalded or blanched into cold water, as shown in Fig. 9, and then take them out immediately.

37. PACKING THE JARS.--Packing the jars immediately follows cold-dipping, and it is work that should be done as rapidly as possible. Remove the jars from the hot water as they are needed and fill each with the cold-dipped fruit or vegetable. Pack the jars in an orderly manner and as solidly as possible with the aid of a spoon, as in Fig. 10. Just this little attention to detail not only will help to improve the appearance of the canned fruit, but will make it possible to put more food in the jars.

37. PACKING THE JARS.--Packing the jars comes right after cold-dipping, and it should be done as quickly as possible. Take the jars out of the hot water as you need them and fill each one with the cold-dipped fruit or vegetable. Pack the jars neatly and as tightly as you can using a spoon, as shown in Fig. 10. This small bit of attention to detail will not only enhance the look of the canned fruit but also allow you to fit more food into the jars.

[Illustration: FIG. 9]
[Illustration: FIG. 10]

When a jar is filled, pour into it whatever liquid is to be used, as in Fig. 11. As has been stated, hot sirup is added for fruits and boiling water and salt for vegetables. However, when fruit is to be canned without sugar, only water is added. With tomatoes and some greens, no liquid need be used, because they contain a sufficient amount in themselves.

When a jar is filled, pour in whatever liquid you plan to use, as shown in Fig. 11. As mentioned, hot syrup is added for fruits and boiling water and salt for vegetables. However, when fruit is being canned without sugar, only water is added. With tomatoes and some greens, no liquid needs to be added because they have enough moisture on their own.

38. PREPARATION FOR THE WATER BATH.--As the jars are filled, they must be prepared for the water bath. Therefore, proceed to place the rubber and cover on the jar. Adjust the rubber, as shown in Fig. 12, so that it will be flat in place. Then put the cover, or lid, on as in Fig. 13, but do not tighten it. The cover must be loose enough to allow steam to escape during the boiling in the water bath and thus prevent the jar from bursting. If the cover screws on, as in the jar at the left, do not screw it down tight; merely turn it lightly until it stops without pressure being put upon it. If glass covers that fasten in place with the aid of a clamp are to be used, as in the jar at the right, simply push the wire over the cover and allow the clamp at the side to remain up. Jars of food so prepared are ready for processing.

38. PREPARATION FOR THE WATER BATH.--Once the jars are filled, they need to be prepared for the water bath. Start by placing the rubber seal and cover on the jar. Adjust the rubber, as shown in Fig. 12, so that it sits flat. Then, place the cover on, as shown in Fig. 13, but don’t tighten it. The cover needs to be loose enough for steam to escape during boiling in the water bath, which will prevent the jar from bursting. If the cover screws on, like the jar on the left, don’t screw it down tightly; just turn it gently until it stops without applying pressure. If you're using glass covers that secure with a clamp, like in the jar on the right, simply push the wire over the cover and let the clamp on the side stay up. Jars prepared this way are ready for processing.

[Illustration: FIG 11]

[Illustration: FIG. 12] [Illustration: FIG. 13]

39. PROCESSING.--The purpose of the water bath is to process the food contained in the jars before they are thoroughly sealed. Therefore, when the jars are filled, proceed to place them in the water bath. The water, which was placed in the sterilizer during the preparation of the food, should be boiling, and there should be enough to come 2 inches over the tops of the jars when they are placed in this large vessel. In putting the jars of food into the sterilizer, place them upright and allow them to rest on the rack in the bottom. If the filled jars have cooled, they should be warmed before placing them in the sterilizer by putting them in hot water. On account of the boiling water, the jars should be handled with a jar lifter, as in Fig. 14. However, if the sterilizer is provided with a perforated part like that in Fig. 15, all the jars may be placed in it and then lowered in place.

39. PROCESSING. --The purpose of the water bath is to process the food in the jars before they are completely sealed. So, once you’ve filled the jars, put them in the water bath. The water that was in the sterilizer during food preparation should be boiling, and there needs to be enough water to cover the tops of the jars by 2 inches when they’re in this large pot. When placing the jars of food into the sterilizer, keep them upright and let them rest on the rack at the bottom. If the filled jars have cooled, warm them up by putting them in hot water before placing them in the sterilizer. Because of the boiling water, handle the jars with a jar lifter, as shown in Fig. 14. However, if the sterilizer has a perforated section like in Fig. 15, you can place all the jars in it and then lower them into position.

When the jars are in place, put the tight-fitting cover on the sterilizer and allow the water to boil and thus cook and sterilize the food in the jars. The length of time for boiling varies with the kind of food and is given later with the directions for canning different foods. The boiling time should be counted from the instant the water in the sterilizer begins to bubble violently. A good plan to follow, provided an alarm clock is at hand, it to set it at this time, so that it will go off when the jars are to be removed from the sterilizer.

When the jars are in place, put the tight-fitting lid on the sterilizer and let the water boil to cook and sterilize the food inside the jars. The boiling time varies depending on the type of food and will be provided later with the canning instructions for different foods. Start timing the boil from the moment the water in the sterilizer starts bubbling vigorously. A good strategy, if you have an alarm clock, is to set it at this point so it will ring when it's time to take the jars out of the sterilizer.

[Illustration: FIG. 14] [Illustration: FIG. 15]

40. SEALING THE JARS.--After processing the food in this manner, the jars must be completely sealed. Therefore, after the boiling has continued for the required length of time, remove the jars from the water with the aid of the jar lifter or the tray and seal them at once by clamping or screwing the covers, or lids, in place, as in Fig. 16. Sometimes, the food inside the jars shrinks so much in this process that the jars are not full when they are ready to be sealed. This is illustrated in Fig. 17. Such shrinkage is usually the result of insufficient blanching, or poor packing or both. However, it will not prevent the food from keeping perfectly. Therefore, the covers of such jars of food must not be removed and the jars refilled; rather, seal the jars tight immediately, just as if the food entirely filled them. If, in sealing jars removed from the water bath, it is found that a rubber has worked loose, shove it back carefully with the point of a clean knife, but do not remove the cover.

40. SEALING THE JARS.--After processing the food this way, the jars need to be completely sealed. So, once the boiling has gone on for the required amount of time, take the jars out of the water using the jar lifter or tray and seal them right away by clamping or screwing the covers or lids in place, as shown in Fig. 16. Sometimes, the food inside the jars shrinks so much during this process that the jars are not full when it's time to seal them. This is shown in Fig. 17. Such shrinkage is usually caused by insufficient blanching, poor packing, or both. However, it won’t stop the food from staying perfectly preserved. Therefore, you should not remove the covers of these jars or refill them; instead, seal the jars tightly right away, just as if the food completely filled them. If, while sealing jars taken from the water bath, you notice that a rubber seal has come loose, gently push it back into place with the tip of a clean knife, but do not remove the cover.

[Illustration: FIG. 16] [Illustration: FIG. 17]

As the jars are sealed, place them on their sides or stand them upside down, as in Fig. 18, to test for leaks, in a place where a draft will not strike them and cause them to break. If a leak is found in any jar, a new rubber and cover must be provided and the food then reprocessed for a few minutes. This may seem to be a great inconvenience, but it is the only way in which to be certain that the food will not be wasted by spoiling.

As you seal the jars, lay them on their sides or turn them upside down, like in Fig. 18, to check for leaks. Do this in a spot where there's no draft that could break them. If you find a leak in any jar, you'll need to get a new rubber seal and lid, then reprocess the food for a few minutes. This might seem like a hassle, but it's the only way to ensure the food won't spoil and go to waste.

[Illustration: FIG. 18]
[Illustration: FIG. 19]

41. WRAPPING AND LABELING.--When the jars of food have stood long enough to cool, usually overnight, they are ready for wrapping and labeling. Wrapping is advisable for practically all foods that are canned, so as to prevent bleaching, and, of course, labeling is necessary when canned food is wrapped, so as to enable it to be distinguished readily when it is in storage. To wrap canned foods, proceed as in Fig. 19. Use ordinary wrapping paper cut to a size that will be suitable for the jar, and secure it in place with a rubber band, as shown, or by pasting the label over the free edge.

41. WRAPPING AND LABELING.--Once the jars of food have cooled down, usually overnight, they're ready to be wrapped and labeled. Wrapping is recommended for almost all canned foods to prevent fading, and labeling is essential for identifying the contents when they're stored. To wrap canned foods, follow the steps in Fig. 19. Use regular wrapping paper cut to fit the jar, and keep it secure with a rubber band, as shown, or by attaching the label over the loose edge.


PROCEDURE IN THE FRACTIONAL-STERILIZATION METHOD

42. In canning food by the FRACTIONAL-STERILIZATION CANNING METHOD, the procedure is much the same as in the one-period cold-pack method. In fact, the only difference between the two is that blanching and cold-dipping are omitted, and in their stead the food in the jars is subjected to three periods of cooking. When the jars of food are made ready for processing in the sterilizer, they are put in the water bath, boiled for a short time, and then allowed to cool. After 24 hours, they are again boiled for the same length of time and allowed to cool. After another 24 hours, they are subjected to boiling for a third time. Then the jars of food are removed and sealed as in the one-period cold-pack method. By the fractional-sterilization method, the spores of bacteria contained in the food packed in the jars are given a chance to develop during the 24-hour periods after the first and second cookings, those which become active being destroyed by cooking the second and third times. Although some canners prefer this method to those already mentioned, the majority look on it with disfavor, owing to the length of time it requires.

42. In canning food using the FRACTIONAL-STERILIZATION CANNING METHOD, the process is similar to the one-period cold-pack method. The only difference is that blanching and cold-dipping are skipped, and instead, the food in the jars goes through three cooking periods. When the jars are ready for processing in the sterilizer, they are placed in the water bath, boiled for a short time, and then allowed to cool. After 24 hours, they are boiled again for the same amount of time and allowed to cool. After another 24 hours, they go through a third boiling. Then the jars of food are removed and sealed as in the one-period cold-pack method. The fractional-sterilization method allows bacteria spores in the packed food to develop during the 24-hour breaks after the first and second cookings, with those that become active being killed off during the second and third cooking. While some canners prefer this method over others, most have a negative view of it due to the time it takes.


STEAM-PRESSURE METHODS

43. For canning foods by steam pressure, special equipment is necessary. In one of the steam-pressure methods, what is known as a water-seal outfit is required, and in the other a device called a pressure cooker is employed. The work of getting the containers ready, preparing the food for canning, packing it into the jars, and sealing and testing the jars is practically the same in the steam pressure methods as in the cold-pack methods. The difference lies in the cooking and sterilization of the foods after they are in the jars and partly sealed and in the rapidity with which it may be done.

43. To can foods using steam pressure, you need special equipment. In one steam-pressure method, you need a water-seal outfit, and in the other, you use a pressure cooker. The process of getting the containers ready, preparing the food for canning, packing it into the jars, and sealing and testing the jars is pretty much the same in steam pressure methods as it is in cold-pack methods. The main difference is in how the food is cooked and sterilized after it's in the jars and mostly sealed, as well as how quickly this can be done.

44. CANNING WITH A WATER-SEAL OUTFIT.--A water-seal outfit, which may be purchased in stores that sell canning supplies, consists of a large metal vessel into which fits a perforated metal basket designed to hold jars of food. This vessel is also provided with a tight-fitting cover having an edge that passes down through the water, which is placed in the bottom of the vessel. When heat is applied to the bottom of the vessel, the water inside of it is changed into steam. The cover prevents the steam from passing out, and it collects in and around the metal basket supporting the jars of food. Enough steam is generated in this outfit to raise the temperature about 4 to 6 degrees above the boiling point. Thus, the water-seal outfit will cook the food in the cans in about one-fourth less time than will the water bath of the one-period cold-pack canning method.

44. CANNING WITH A WATER-SEAL OUTFIT.--A water-seal outfit, available at stores that sell canning supplies, includes a large metal pot with a perforated metal basket designed to hold jars of food. This pot has a tight-fitting lid that extends down into the water placed at the bottom of the pot. When heat is applied to the bottom of the pot, the water inside turns into steam. The lid keeps the steam from escaping, and it builds up around the metal basket that holds the jars of food. This setup generates enough steam to raise the temperature by about 4 to 6 degrees above the boiling point. Therefore, the water-seal outfit will cook the food in the jars in about one-fourth less time than the water bath used in the one-period cold-pack canning method.

[Illustration: FIG. 20]

45. CANNING WITH A PRESSURE COOKER.--For canning by steam pressure, a number of different kinds of pressure cookers are to be had, but in principle they are all alike and they are always made of heavy material, so as to withstand the severe steam pressure generated in them. In Fig. 20 is shown one type of pressure cooker. It is provided with a bail, or handle, for carrying it and with clamps that hold the cover firmly in place. Attached to the cover is a steam gauge, which indicates the steam pressure inside the cooker, and a pet-cock, which is used to regulate the pressure. On some cookers, a thermometer is also attached to the cover. Also, inside of some, resting on the bottom, is an elevated rack for supporting the jars of food that are to be sterilized and cooked. In operating a pressure cooker, water for generating steam is poured in until it reaches the top of this rack, but it should not be allowed to cover any part of the jars of food. Steam is generated by applying heat to the bottom of the cooker, and the longer the heat is applied the higher the steam pressure will go.

45. CANNING WITH A PRESSURE COOKER.--For steaming pressure canning, there are several types of pressure cookers available, but they all operate on the same principle and are made of heavy material to handle the intense steam pressure that builds up inside. Figure 20 shows one style of pressure cooker. It has a handle for easy carrying and clamps to securely attach the lid. The lid features a steam gauge that shows the pressure inside the cooker, and a pet-cock for adjusting the pressure. Some models also have a thermometer on the lid. Additionally, some cookers include a raised rack at the bottom to hold the jars of food that need to be sterilized and cooked. When using a pressure cooker, pour water in until it reaches the top of this rack, but make sure it doesn’t cover any part of the jars. Heat is applied to the bottom of the cooker to generate steam, and the longer you heat it, the higher the steam pressure will rise.

It is possible to secure a steam pressure of 5 to 25 pounds per square inch in a cooker of this kind. This means that the temperature reached will vary from a few degrees above boiling to about 275 degrees Fahrenheit. At a pressure of 20 pounds, the temperature will be about 260 degrees. The heavier the material used for a cooker and the more solid the construction, the higher may go the steam pressure, and, of course, the temperature. Some cookers of light construction will not permit of a pressure greater than 5 pounds, but even such cookers are very satisfactory. It is the high temperature that may be developed in a pressure cooker that greatly shortens the time required for cooking jars of food and making them sterile.

It’s possible to achieve a steam pressure of 5 to 25 pounds per square inch in a cooker like this. This means the temperature can range from just above boiling to about 275 degrees Fahrenheit. At a pressure of 20 pounds, the temperature will be around 260 degrees. The heavier the materials used for the cooker and the sturdier its construction, the higher the steam pressure and temperature can go. Some lightweight cookers won’t allow a pressure greater than 5 pounds, but even those are very effective. It’s the high temperature achievable in a pressure cooker that significantly reduces the cooking time for jars of food and ensures they’re sterilized.


CANNING WITH TIN CANS

46. For canning food in some tin cans, it is necessary to have a soldering outfit for properly closing them. This consists of a capping steel, a tipping iron, solder in small strips and in powder form, a small can of sal ammoniac, and a bottle of flux, which is a fluid that makes solder stick to tin.

46. To can food in some tin cans, you'll need a soldering kit to seal them properly. This includes a capping steel, a tipping iron, solder in small strips and powder form, a small can of sal ammoniac, and a bottle of flux, which is a liquid that helps solder adhere to tin.

47. Prepare the food that is to be canned in tin cans in the same way as for canning in jars by the cold-pack method; likewise, pack the cans in the same way, but allow the liquid and fruit or vegetables to come to within only 1/4 inch of the top. Then proceed to close the cans. Apply the flux to the groove in the top of each can where the solder is to be melted, using for this purpose a small brush or a small stick having a piece of cloth wrapped around one end. Heat the capping steel, which should be thoroughly clean, until it is almost red hot, dip it quickly into a little of the flux, and then put it into a mixture consisting of equal parts of sal ammoniac and powdered solder until it is covered with bright solder. Put the cap on the can and apply the hot capping steel covered with the solder. Hold this device firmly, press it downwards, and turn it slowly as the solder melts and thus joins the cap to the can.

47. Prepare the food that you’re going to can in tin cans just like you would for canning in jars using the cold-pack method. Also, pack the cans similarly, but make sure the liquid and fruit or vegetables are only 1/4 inch from the top. Then, close the cans. Apply the flux to the groove on top of each can where the solder will melt, using a small brush or a stick with a piece of cloth wrapped around one end. Heat the capping steel until it’s almost red hot, dip it quickly into some flux, and then into a mixture of equal parts sal ammoniac and powdered solder until it’s coated with shiny solder. Place the cap on the can and use the hot capping steel that’s covered in solder. Hold this firmly, press it down, and turn it slowly as the solder melts and seals the cap to the can.

48. After the caps are soldered in place, the air inside the cans must be driven out through the small vent, or opening, usually in the center of the cap, and the cans made air-tight. Therefore, place the cans into boiling water to within 1/2 inch of the top and let them remain there for a few minutes. Usually, 3 minutes in boiling water is sufficient. Immediately after exhausting, as this process is called, apply a little of the flux as in capping, and, with the tipping iron well heated and a strip of solder, seal the hole in the caps. After this is done, test each can for leaks by submerging it in water. If bubbles arise, it is an indication that the cover is not tight and must be resoldered.

48. After the caps are soldered on, you need to remove the air from inside the cans through the small vent, typically located in the center of the cap, and make the cans airtight. To do this, place the cans in boiling water, filling them to within 1/2 inch of the top, and let them sit for a few minutes—usually, 3 minutes in boiling water is enough. Right after exhausting (which is what this process is called), apply a bit of flux like you did when capping, and with a well-heated tipping iron and a piece of solder, seal the hole in the caps. Once you've done that, check each can for leaks by submerging it in water. If you see bubbles, it means the cover isn’t tight and needs to be resoldered.

49. The next step consists in processing the cans of food. This may be done either in a water bath or in a pressure cooker. If the cans are to be processed in a water bath, keep them in the boiling water just as long as glass jars of food would be kept there. If a pressure cooker is to be used, keep the cans in it for 6 to 40 minutes, depending on the steam pressure employed, the ripeness of the food or the necessity for cooking it, and the size of the cans employed. For canning meat or fish, processing in a pressure cooker is the most successful, as the high temperature reached in it kills bacteria, which are difficult to destroy at the boiling point.

49. The next step is to process the cans of food. You can do this either in a water bath or in a pressure cooker. If you’re using a water bath, keep the cans in the boiling water for the same amount of time you would keep glass jars of food there. If you’re using a pressure cooker, keep the cans in it for 6 to 40 minutes, depending on the steam pressure, how ripe the food is or if it needs cooking, and the size of the cans. For canning meat or fish, using a pressure cooker is the best method, as the high temperature kills bacteria that are hard to destroy at boiling point.

As soon as the cans of food are removed from the water bath or the pressure cooker, plunge them into cold water to stop the cooking and prevent the food from getting soft and mushy. Then label the cans, so that no mistake will be made as to their contents.

As soon as you take the cans of food out of the water bath or pressure cooker, drop them into cold water to stop the cooking process and keep the food from becoming soft and mushy. Then, label the cans so there's no confusion about what’s inside.

50. In another method, the tin cans may be closed without soldering the caps on. The caps used in this case are different from those which must be soldered. They are forced in place by a hand-pressure machine that may be attached to a table. Otherwise the procedure is the same as that just given.

50. In another method, the tin cans can be closed without soldering the caps on. The caps used in this case are different from the ones that need to be soldered. They are pressed into place using a hand-pressure machine that can be attached to a table. Otherwise, the procedure is the same as described earlier.


OVEN METHOD

51. The OVEN METHOD of canning is thought to be very satisfactory by many housewives, but, as it is necessary to remove the covers after cooking the contents of the jars, food canned in this way is subjected to contamination, just as in the open-kettle method. In addition, the jars are difficult to handle in the oven, owing to the extreme heat that is required to cook the food in the jars.

51. The OVEN METHOD of canning is considered quite effective by many homemakers, but since it's necessary to take off the lids after cooking the contents of the jars, food canned this way can get contaminated, similar to the open-kettle method. Also, the jars are hard to handle in the oven because of the intense heat needed to cook the food inside them.

52. In canning by the oven method, proceed by preparing the food as for the cold-pack canning method; also, fill the jars with fruit or vegetables and with liquid or sirup as in this method. Put the covers on the jars loosely, omitting the jar rubbers. Place the jars in a shallow pan of water, as in Fig. 21, and set the pan containing the jars into a stove oven, which should be only slightly warm. At the same time place the jar rubbers in a pan of boiling water, so that they may be sterilized as the food cooks. When the jars are in the oven, increase the heat gradually until the food in them boils. Then keep up a temperature that will allow the food to boil quietly for a period long enough to cook it soft and sterilize it. Usually, 30 to 45 minutes after boiling has begun will be sufficient. During the cooking some of the liquid in the jars evaporates. Therefore, when the jars of food are ready to be removed from the oven, have boiling water or sirup ready, remove the cover of each jar in turn, and fill the jar brimful with the liquid. Then place a sterilized rubber in place and fasten the cover down tight. The procedure from this point on is the same as in the other canning methods.

52. When canning using the oven method, start by preparing the food like you would for the cold-pack canning method. Fill the jars with fruits or vegetables and their liquid or syrup as you would in this method. Place the jar lids on loosely, without the jar rubbers. Set the jars in a shallow pan of water, as shown in Fig. 21, and put the pan with the jars into a stove oven that should be only slightly warm. At the same time, place the jar rubbers in a pan of boiling water to sterilize them while the food cooks. Once the jars are in the oven, gradually increase the heat until the food inside starts to boil. Then maintain a temperature that allows the food to boil gently for long enough to cook it soft and sterilize it. Typically, 30 to 45 minutes after boiling begins is enough. While cooking, some of the liquid in the jars will evaporate. So, when it’s time to take the jars out of the oven, have boiling water or syrup ready. Remove the lid from each jar one at a time, and fill the jar to the brim with the liquid. Next, place a sterilized rubber in position and secure the lid tightly. From this point on, follow the same procedure as in the other canning methods.

[Illustration: FIG. 21]

CANNING VEGETABLES AND FRUITS

PREPARATION FOR CANNING

53. In canning, as in all other tasks related to cookery, the housewife's aim should be to do the greatest amount of work, and do it well, with the least effort on her part. The results she gets in canning, then, will depend considerably on the orderly arrangement of the utensils and materials with which she is to do the work. But of greater importance is the preparation she makes to eliminate as much as she can the possibilities of contamination, for, as has been repeatedly pointed out, success in canning depends on the absence of dangerous bacteria.

53. In canning, like in all other cooking tasks, a homemaker's goal should be to achieve the most work effectively while minimizing her effort. The results she gets from canning will greatly rely on how well she organizes the tools and ingredients she's using. Even more crucial is the preparation she does to reduce the chances of contamination as much as possible because, as has often been emphasized, success in canning hinges on eliminating harmful bacteria.

54. From what has just been mentioned, it is essential that everything about the person who is to do the work and the place in which the work is to done should be clean. Clean dresses and aprons should be worn, and the hands and finger nails should be scrupulously clean. The kitchen floor should be scrubbed and the furniture dusted with a damp cloth. Any unnecessary utensils and kitchen equipment should be put out of the way and those required for canning assembled and made ready for the work. The jars should be washed and the covers tested by fitting them on without the rubbers. If a glass cover rocks, it does not fit correctly; and if a screw cover will not screw down tight, it should be discarded. Without the rubber, there should be just enough space between the cover and the jar to permit the thumb nail to be inserted as is shown in Fig. 3. The edge of each jar and each glass cover should be carefully examined every time it is used, so that none with pieces chipped off will be used, as these will admit air. This examination is made by running the finger over the edge of the jar and the cover, as is shown in Fig. 4. The jars, covers, and rubbers should be put into pans of cold water, and the water should be brought to the boiling point and allowed to boil for 15 minutes or more while the fruit or vegetables are being prepared for canning. They should be kept in the hot water until the food is ready to be placed in them. In the one-period cold-pack method, it is not necessary to boil the jars, rubbers, and covers, but this may be done if desired.

54. Based on what’s been said, it's crucial that everything about the person doing the work and the place where the work is done is clean. Clean clothes and aprons should be worn, and hands and fingernails should be impeccably clean. The kitchen floor should be scrubbed, and the furniture dusted with a damp cloth. Any unnecessary utensils and kitchen equipment should be put away, and the items needed for canning should be gathered and prepared for use. The jars should be washed, and the lids should be checked by fitting them on without the rubber seals. If a glass lid wobbles, it doesn’t fit properly; and if a screw lid won’t tighten, it should be thrown away. Without the rubber seal, there should be just enough space between the lid and the jar to fit a thumbnail, as shown in Fig. 3. The edge of each jar and each glass lid should be carefully checked every time they are used, so that none with chips will be used, as these will let in air. This check is done by running your finger along the edge of the jar and the lid, as shown in Fig. 4. Jars, lids, and rubber seals should be placed in pans of cold water, and the water should be brought to a boil and allowed to boil for 15 minutes or more while the fruit or vegetables are being prepared for canning. They should stay in the hot water until the food is ready to be packed into them. In the one-period cold-pack method, it’s not necessary to boil the jars, rubber seals, and lids, but this can be done if preferred.

To produce good-looking jars of food, the fruit or vegetables to be canned should be graded to some extent; that is, the finest of the fruits or vegetables should be separated and used by themselves, as should also those of medium quality. Often it is wise to use the poorest foods for purposes other than canning. The food may then be canned according to the chosen method, but by no means should methods be mixed. In handling the product after it has been cooked by the open-kettle method, any spoon, funnel, or other utensil must be thoroughly sterilized in the same way as the jars and their covers and rubbers; indeed, no unsterile utensil should ever be allowed to touch the food when a jar is being filled.

To make attractive jars of food, the fruits or vegetables you plan to can should be sorted to some extent; that is, the best fruits or vegetables should be set aside and used separately, as well as those of medium quality. It's often a good idea to use the least desirable foods for purposes other than canning. The food can then be canned using the selected method, but absolutely do not mix methods. When handling the product after it has been cooked using the open-kettle method, any spoon, funnel, or other utensil must be fully sterilized just like the jars and their lids and seals; in fact, no unsterilized utensil should ever come into contact with the food while a jar is being filled.

[Illustration: FIG. 22]

55. It is by the observance of such precautions as these, some of them seemingly unimportant, that the housewife will be repaid for her efforts in canning and be able to produce canned fruits and vegetables like those shown in color in Fig. 22. This illustration shows, with a few exceptions, such foods canned by the one-period cold-pack method, and merits close inspection. As will be observed, the jars are full and well packed and the color of each food is retained. Each can of food indicates careful work and serves to show the housewife what she may expect if she performs her work under the right conditions and in the right way. This illustration likewise serves to demonstrate that any food may be successfully canned by the one-period cold-pack method, a claim that cannot be made for the other canning methods. In fact, some of the foods illustrated, as, for instance, peas and corn, cannot be canned successfully by any other method.

55. By following these precautions, some of which may seem minor, the homemaker will be rewarded for her efforts in canning and will be able to produce canned fruits and vegetables like those shown in color in Fig. 22. This illustration displays, with a few exceptions, foods canned using the one-period cold-pack method and is worth a closer look. As you can see, the jars are full and well packed, and the color of each food is preserved. Each can of food reflects careful work and demonstrates to the homemaker what she can expect if she does her work under the right conditions and in the right way. This illustration also shows that any food can be successfully canned using the one-period cold-pack method, which is not a claim that can be made for other canning methods. In fact, some of the foods illustrated, such as peas and corn, cannot be successfully canned using any other method.


DIRECTIONS FOR CANNING VEGETABLES

56. CLASSIFICATION OF VEGETABLES.--To simplify the directions here given for the canning of vegetables, this food is divided into four groups, as follows:

56. CLASSIFICATION OF VEGETABLES.--To make it easier to follow the instructions for canning vegetables, this food is categorized into four groups, as follows:

1. Greens, which include all wild and cultivated edible greens, such as beet greens, collards, cress, dandelion, endive, horseradish greens, kale, mustard greens, spinach, New Zealand spinach, and Swiss chard.

1. Greens are all the wild and cultivated edible greens, like beet greens, collards, cress, dandelion, endive, horseradish greens, kale, mustard greens, spinach, New Zealand spinach, and Swiss chard.

2. Pod and related vegetables, which include asparagus, beans, both string and wax, Brussels sprouts, cabbage, cauliflower, eggplant, okra, peppers, both green and ripe, summer squash, and vegetable marrow.

2. Pod and related vegetables, which include asparagus, beans, both string and wax, Brussels sprouts, cabbage, cauliflower, eggplant, okra, peppers, both green and ripe, summer squash, and vegetable marrow.

3. Root and tuber vegetables, which include beets, carrots, kohlrabi, parsnips, rutabagas, salsify, sweet potatoes, and turnips.

3. Root and tuber vegetables, which include beets, carrots, kohlrabi, parsnips, rutabagas, salsify, sweet potatoes, and turnips.

4. Special vegetables, which include beans, both Lima and shell, corn, mushrooms, peas, pumpkin, sauerkraut, squash, succotash and other vegetable combinations, and tomatoes.

4. Special vegetables, which include Lima beans and shell beans, corn, mushrooms, peas, pumpkin, sauerkraut, squash, succotash, and other vegetable mixtures, as well as tomatoes.

The convenience of this plan will be readily seen when it is understood that, with the exception of the special vegetables, the same method of preparation and the time given for the various steps in the canning process apply to all vegetables of the same class. Thus, if directions for a vegetable belonging to a certain class are not definitely stated in the text, it may be taken for granted that this vegetable may be canned in the manner given for another vegetable of the same class.

The convenience of this plan will be easy to see when you realize that, except for the special vegetables, the same preparation method and the time needed for the different steps in the canning process apply to all vegetables in the same category. So, if instructions for a vegetable in a specific category aren’t clearly stated in the text, you can assume this vegetable can be canned in the same way as another vegetable in that category.

57. GENERAL DIRECTIONS.--The canning of vegetables may be most successfully done by the one-period cold-pack method. Tomatoes, however, because of the large quantity of acid they contain, may be canned and kept with little difficulty by the open-kettle method, but they will be found to keep their shape better if the cold-pack method is employed.

57. GENERAL DIRECTIONS.--You can successfully can vegetables using the one-period cold-pack method. However, tomatoes, due to their high acid content, can be canned and stored easily using the open-kettle method, but they maintain their shape better with the cold-pack method.

The time required for cooking any vegetable after it is packed in jars depends on the kind and the age. Therefore, if a vegetable is hard or likely to be tough, it may be necessary to increase the time given in the directions; whereas, if it is young and tender or very ripe, as in the case of tomatoes, the time for cooking may perhaps have to be decreased. Because, in altitudes higher than sea level, the boiling point of water is lower than 212 degrees Fahrenheit, the length of time for boiling foods in the water bath must be increased after an altitude of 500 feet is reached. Therefore, for every additional 500 feet over the first 500 feet, 10 per cent. should be added to the time given for the boiling in water. In case a pressure cooker is used, however, this is not necessary.

The cooking time for any vegetable after it is packed in jars depends on its type and freshness. If a vegetable is hard or likely to be tough, you may need to increase the time specified in the instructions; on the other hand, if it is young and tender or very ripe, like tomatoes, you might need to decrease the cooking time. Additionally, at altitudes higher than sea level, the boiling point of water is lower than 212 degrees Fahrenheit, so the boiling time in a water bath needs to be extended once you reach an altitude of 500 feet. For every additional 500 feet above the first 500 feet, add 10 percent to the boiling time. However, if you're using a pressure cooker, this adjustment isn't necessary.

The canning directions here given are for 1-quart jars. If pint jars are to be used, decrease the salt proportionately; also, decrease the time for cooking in each case one-fifth of the time, or 20 per cent. If 2-quart jars are to be used, double the amount of salt and add to the length of time for cooking one-fifth, or 20 per cent. For instance, if a 1-quart jar of food requires 90 minutes, a pint jar of the same food would require 72 minutes and a 2-quart jar, 108 minutes.

The canning instructions provided here are for 1-quart jars. If you’re using pint jars, reduce the salt accordingly and cut the cooking time by one-fifth, or 20 percent. If you’re using 2-quart jars, double the amount of salt and add one-fifth, or 20 percent, to the cooking time. For example, if a 1-quart jar of food requires 90 minutes, a pint jar of the same food would need 72 minutes, and a 2-quart jar would take 108 minutes.


GROUP 1--GREENS

58. In canning greens, or vegetables belonging to the first group, select those which are fresh and tender. Greens that are old and inclined to be strong and tough may require longer blanching and cooking. Look the greens over carefully, rejecting all leaves that are wilted or otherwise spoiled. Cut off the roots and drop the leaves into a pan of cold water. Wash these thoroughly a number of times, using fresh water each time, in order to remove all sand and dirt that may be clinging to them. Then proceed to blanch them for 10 to 15 minutes in steam, suspending the greens over boiling water in a piece of cheesecloth, a colander, or the top of a steamer. After blanching, dip them quickly into cold water. Then pack the greens tightly into jars and add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful. No water has to be added to greens, because the leaves themselves contain sufficient water. When the jars are thus packed, adjust the covers and proceed to sterilize and cook the greens according to the directions previously given. If the water bath is to be used, boil them in it for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; but if the pressure cooker is to be employed for this purpose, cook them at a 5-pound pressure for 60 minutes or at a 10-pound pressure for 40 minutes.

58. When canning greens or vegetables from the first group, choose ones that are fresh and tender. Greens that are older and tend to be strong and tough may need longer blanching and cooking. Inspect the greens closely, discarding any wilted or spoiled leaves. Cut off the roots and place the leaves into a pan of cold water. Wash them thoroughly several times, using fresh water each time, to remove any sand and dirt that may be stuck to them. Then blanch them for 10 to 15 minutes in steam, holding the greens over boiling water using cheesecloth, a colander, or the top of a steamer. After blanching, quickly dip them into cold water. Next, pack the greens tightly into jars and add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar. There's no need to add water to the greens since the leaves have enough moisture. Once the jars are packed, adjust the lids and proceed to sterilize and cook the greens according to the earlier instructions. If using a water bath, boil them for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; if using a pressure cooker, cook at 5 pounds of pressure for 60 minutes or at 10 pounds of pressure for 40 minutes.


GROUP 2--POD AND RELATED VEGETABLES

59. The best results in canning vegetables belonging to the second group will be derived when those which are fresh and tender are selected. As has been mentioned, the sooner vegetables are canned after they are taken from the garden, the better will be the canned product. Directions for practically all vegetables included in this group are here given.

59. The best results in canning vegetables from the second group will come from choosing fresh and tender ones. As mentioned, the quicker you can vegetables after picking them from the garden, the better the canned product will be. Instructions for nearly all vegetables in this group are provided here.

60. ASPARAGUS.--Select tender asparagus, and proceed with the canning no later than 5 hours after it has been taken from the garden. Remove the hard portions at the ends of the stems, and cut the trimmed stems into pieces the length of the jars into which they are to be placed. If preferred, however, the asparagus may be cut into small pieces. Wash the cut asparagus thoroughly in cold water, and then sort out the uneven pieces that were cut off in making the stems even in length. These may be canned separately for soup. Lay the stems of asparagus in an orderly pile in a colander or a wire basket, cover it, and place it into a large vessel where it may be kept completely covered with boiling water for 5 minutes. Then cold-dip the asparagus quickly, and pack it neatly into the jars, keeping the tip ends up. Add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful and pour boiling water into each jar until it is completely full. Adjust the covers and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of food. Cook for 1-1/2 to 2 hours in the water bath, or, in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

60. ASPARAGUS.--Choose tender asparagus and start the canning process within 5 hours of harvesting it from the garden. Cut off the tough ends of the stems and slice the trimmed stems to fit the length of the jars. If you prefer, you can also cut the asparagus into smaller pieces. Rinse the cut asparagus thoroughly in cold water, then pick out any uneven pieces that were trimmed to make the stems uniform in length. These can be canned separately for soup. Arrange the asparagus stems neatly in a colander or wire basket, cover it, and submerge it completely in boiling water for 5 minutes. After that, quickly dip the asparagus in cold water and pack it tightly into the jars, ensuring the tips are facing up. Add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar and pour boiling water into each one until it's full. Secure the lids and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars. Process them for 1.5 to 2 hours in a water bath, or in a pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

61. BRUSSELS SPROUTS, CABBAGE, AND CAULIFLOWER.--In canning Brussels sprouts, cabbage, or cauliflower, first prepare each vegetable as if it were to be cooked for the table. When thus made ready, blanch it with the aid of a square of cheesecloth or a colander in live steam, over boiling water, for 10 to 15 minutes. Then cold-dip it and pack it tightly into the jars. Add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful and fill each jar with boiling water. Proceed next to sterilize and cook it according to the method selected. Boil for 90 minutes in the water bath; in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or for 40 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

61. BRUSSELS SPROUTS, CABBAGE, AND CAULIFLOWER.--When canning Brussels sprouts, cabbage, or cauliflower, first prepare each vegetable as if you were going to cook it for a meal. Once ready, blanch it using a piece of cheesecloth or a colander in live steam over boiling water for 10 to 15 minutes. Then plunge it into cold water and pack it tightly into jars. Add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar and fill each jar with boiling water. Next, sterilize and cook it according to your chosen method. Boil for 90 minutes in a water bath; in a pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

62. EGGPLANT AND SUMMER SQUASH.--Both eggplant and summer squash are canned in the same way, because the consistency of these vegetables is much alike. Select firm vegetables with no decayed spots. Blanch for 3 to 8 minutes in boiling water; cold-dip quickly; remove the skins; cut into pieces of a size that will fit into the jars; pack into the jars; and add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful. Next, adjust the jar lids and proceed according to the directions given for the method selected. In the water bath, boil for 1-1/2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds. Eggplant or summer squash so canned may be rolled in egg and crumbs and sautéd or fried, the same as fresh vegetables of this kind.

62. EGGPLANT AND SUMMER SQUASH.--Both eggplant and summer squash are canned in the same way because their textures are very similar. Choose firm vegetables without any spoiled spots. Blanch them in boiling water for 3 to 8 minutes; quickly dip them in cold water; remove the skins; cut them into pieces that will fit into the jars; pack them into the jars; and add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar. Next, secure the jar lids and follow the directions for the chosen method. In a water bath, boil for 1-1/2 hours; in a pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure. Canned eggplant or summer squash can be rolled in egg and breadcrumbs and sautéed or fried, just like fresh vegetables of this type.

63. OKRA AND GREEN PEPPERS.--Both okra and green peppers may also be canned in the same way. Prepare these vegetables for canning by washing fresh, tender pods of either vegetable thoroughly. Blanch for 5 to 15 minutes in boiling water and cold-dip quickly. Pack the pods into the jars, add a teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the lids and proceed according to directions for the method selected. In the water bath, boil for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

63. OKRA AND GREEN PEPPERS.--You can can okra and green peppers the same way. Start by washing fresh, tender pods of either vegetable thoroughly. Blanch them for 5 to 15 minutes in boiling water, then quickly dip them in cold water. Pack the pods into the jars, add a teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the lids and follow the instructions for your chosen method. In a water bath, boil for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; in a pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

64. STRING BEANS.--String beans of any variety should be canned as soon as they are gathered. If the beans to be canned are not of the stringless variety, prepare them by stringing them, following the directions given in Vegetables, Part 1. Stringless beans should be selected if possible, to avoid this part of the work. Cut out any rusted portions, cut each end from the beans, and, if preferred, cut the beans into inch lengths. When thus prepared, blanch them for 10 to 15 minutes in live steam, cold-dip quickly, and pack tightly into the jars. Add a teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, fill the jars with boiling water, adjust the lids, and cook according to the method preferred. In the water bath, boil for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

64. STRING BEANS.--You should can string beans of any type as soon as you pick them. If you’re canning beans that aren’t stringless, prepare them by stringing them, as described in Vegetables, Part 1. It’s best to choose stringless beans if possible to skip this step. Remove any rusty parts, cut off both ends of the beans, and if you prefer, chop the beans into inch-long pieces. Once prepared, blanch them for 10 to 15 minutes in live steam, quickly dip them in cold water, and pack them tightly into jars. Add a teaspoon of salt to each jar, fill with boiling water, adjust the lids, and process according to your preferred method. In the water bath, boil for 1-1/2 to 2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 60 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


GROUP 3--ROOT AND TUBER VEGETABLES

65. Only the small, young, and tender vegetables included in the third group lend themselves readily to canning. As a rule, such vegetables are allowed to mature, when they can be stored for winter use without canning them. However, many housewives like to can some of them for the variety they offer in the preparation and planning of meals.

65. Only the small, young, and tender vegetables in the third group are suitable for canning. Generally, these vegetables are allowed to fully ripen, allowing them to be stored for winter use without canning. However, many home cooks prefer to can some of them for the variety they bring to meal preparation and planning.

66. BEETS.--For canning, select small, young beets. Prepare them by cutting off the tops, which may be cooked as greens or canned separately, and all but about an inch of the stems and an inch of the roots. Scrub the trimmed beets well, and then blanch them in boiling water for 5 to 15 minutes or until the skins may be easily scraped off with a knife. Plunge them quickly into cold water and draw them out again. Then scrape off the skins and remove the roots and stems. The roots and stems are left on during the blanching and cold-dipping to prevent them from bleeding, or losing color. When thus prepared, pack the beets into jars, add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, and fill the jars with boiling water. Then adjust the jar tops and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of beets according to the directions for any preferred method. In the water bath, cook them for 1-1/2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 1 hour at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

66. BEETS.--For canning, choose small, young beets. Prepare them by cutting off the tops, which can be cooked as greens or canned separately, and leaving about an inch of the stems and roots. Scrub the trimmed beets thoroughly, then blanch them in boiling water for 5 to 15 minutes or until the skins can be easily scraped off with a knife. Quickly plunge them into cold water and take them out again. Then, scrape off the skins and remove the roots and stems. The roots and stems are left on during blanching and cold-dipping to prevent bleeding or losing color. Once prepared, pack the beets into jars, add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the jar tops and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of beets according to your preferred method. In the water bath, cook them for 1-1/2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 1 hour at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

67. CARROTS, PARSNIPS, AND TURNIPS.--Young parsnips and turnips are canned in exactly the same way as young carrots. Therefore, directions for the canning of carrots will suffice for all three of these vegetables. Prepare the carrots for canning by cutting off the tops and the roots and scrubbing them well. Blanch them for 10 to 15 minutes in boiling water, so that the skins may be easily removed, and cold-dip them. Then remove the skins by scraping, pack the carrots into the jars, add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the jar tops next, and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of carrots according to the method selected. In the water bath, cook for 1-1/2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 1 hour at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

67. CARROTS, PARSNIPS, AND TURNIPS.--Young parsnips and turnips are canned in exactly the same way as young carrots. So, the instructions for canning carrots apply to all three of these vegetables. To prepare the carrots for canning, cut off the tops and roots and scrub them thoroughly. Blanch them in boiling water for 10 to 15 minutes to make the skins easier to remove, then cold-dip them. Next, scrape off the skins, pack the carrots into jars, add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the jar tops, then sterilize and cook the jars of carrots using your chosen method. In a water bath, cook for 1-1/2 hours; in a pressure cooker, cook for 1 hour at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


GROUP 4--SPECIAL VEGETABLES

68. Vegetables of the fourth group, which include those which cannot well be classified in the other groups, lend themselves readily to combinations, such as succotash, that make for variety in food. As is true of the other vegetables, special vegetables must be fresh and sound if good results in canning are expected.

68. Vegetables in the fourth group, which don’t fit neatly into the other categories, are great for combinations like succotash that add variety to meals. Like other vegetables, specific ones need to be fresh and in good condition to achieve successful canning results.

69. LIMA AND OTHER SHELLED BEANS.--For canning, only tender beans, whether Lima or some other variety, should be chosen. Prepare them for immediate canning by shelling them--that is, taking them from the pods--blanching them for 5 to 10 minutes in boiling water, and then cold-dipping them quickly. Pack the jars to within 1/2 inch of the top, add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the covers and proceed to sterilize and cook them. In the water bath, boil for 2-1/2 to 3 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 1-1/2 hours at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 1 hour at a pressure of 10 pounds.

69. LIMA AND OTHER SHELLED BEANS.--For canning, choose only tender beans, whether Lima or another variety. Prepare them for immediate canning by shelling them—removing them from the pods—blanching them in boiling water for 5 to 10 minutes, and then quickly dipping them in cold water. Pack the jars up to 1/2 inch from the top, add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Secure the lids and proceed to sterilize and cook them. In the water bath, boil for 2-1/2 to 3 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 1-1/2 hours at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 1 hour at a pressure of 10 pounds.

70. GREEN CORN.--For canning purposes, only corn that is young and milky should be selected. Get it ready for canning by husking it and removing the silk. Then blanch it for 3 to 5 minutes in boiling water and cold-dip it quickly. Cut the kernels half way down to the cob and scrape out what remains after cutting. For best results in this operation, hold the ear of corn so that the butt end is up; then cut from the tip toward the butt, but scrape from the butt toward the tip. Next, pack the jars tightly with the corn, pressing it into them with a wooden masher. Unless two persons can work together, however, cut only enough corn for one jar and fill and partly seal it before cutting more. As corn swells in the cooking, fill each jar to within 1/2 inch of the top. The milk in the corn should fill all spaces between the kernels, provided there are any, but if it does not, boiling water may be poured in. Add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful of corn and adjust the jar lids. Boil for 3 hours in the water bath; but, if the pressure cooker is to be used, cook for 1-1/2 hours at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 1 hour at a pressure of 10 pounds.

70. GREEN CORN.--For canning, choose only young, milky corn. Prepare it by husking and removing the silk. Blanch it in boiling water for 3 to 5 minutes, then quickly dip it in cold water. Cut the kernels halfway down to the cob and scrape out what remains after cutting. To do this best, hold the ear of corn with the butt end up; cut from the tip toward the butt, but scrape from the butt toward the tip. Next, pack the jars tightly with the corn, pressing it in with a wooden masher. If two people can’t work together, cut just enough corn for one jar, fill it, and partially seal it before cutting more. Since corn expands during cooking, fill each jar to within 1/2 inch of the top. The milk from the corn should fill any spaces between the kernels; if it doesn’t, you can add boiling water. Add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar of corn and adjust the jar lids. Boil for 3 hours in a water bath; if using a pressure cooker, cook for 1-1/2 hours at 5 pounds of pressure or for 1 hour at 10 pounds of pressure.

Corn on the cob may be canned in the same way if desired, but as only three small ears can be put into a quart jar, this would seem to be a waste of space and labor. If corn on the cob is to be canned, 2-quart jars will prove more convenient than 1-quart jars.

Corn on the cob can be canned the same way if you want, but since only three small ears fit into a quart jar, it seems like a waste of space and effort. If you're going to can corn on the cob, 2-quart jars will be more convenient than 1-quart jars.

71. PEAS.--Peas for canning should be well formed and tender, and they should be canned as soon as possible after coming from the garden. Proceed by washing the pods and shelling the peas. Blanch the shelled peas for 5 to 10 minutes in live steam, and cold-dip them quickly. Pack the peas into the jars, having them come to within 1/2 inch from the top, add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, and fill the jars with boiling water. Then adjust the jar lids and proceed according to directions for the method selected. In the water bath, boil for 2 or 3 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 1-1/2 hours at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 1 hour at a pressure of 10 pounds.

71. PEAS.--For canning peas, choose ones that are well-shaped and tender, and can them as soon as possible after picking them from the garden. Start by washing the pods and shelling the peas. Blanch the shelled peas for 5 to 10 minutes using live steam, then quickly cool them down. Pack the peas into jars, filling them to within 1/2 inch from the top, add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Then secure the jar lids and follow the instructions for your chosen method. In the water bath, boil for 2 to 3 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 1-1/2 hours at 5 pounds of pressure or for 1 hour at 10 pounds of pressure.

72. PUMPKIN AND SQUASH.--The canning of pumpkin and squash is advisable when there is any possibility of their not keeping until they can be used. Prepare either of these vegetables for canning by first peeling it and cutting the edible part into inch cubes. Blanch these cubes for 10 to 15 minutes in live steam and cold-dip them quickly. Pack the jars as full as possible, and add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jar, but no water. After adjusting the jar lids, boil the jars of food for 1-1/2 hours in the water bath, or cook them for 1 hour at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 40 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds in the pressure cooker. When finished, the jars will be found to be only about half full, but the contents will keep perfectly.

72. PUMPKIN AND SQUASH.--Canning pumpkin and squash is a good idea if there's any chance they won't last until you can use them. To prepare either vegetable for canning, start by peeling it and cutting the edible part into one-inch cubes. Blanch these cubes in live steam for 10 to 15 minutes, then quickly dip them in cold water. Pack the jars as tightly as you can, and add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, but don't add any water. After sealing the jar lids, boil the jars in a water bath for 1.5 hours, or cook them in a pressure cooker for 1 hour at 5 pounds of pressure or for 40 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure. When you're done, the jars will only be about half full, but the contents will store perfectly.

If desired, pumpkin or squash may first be cooked as if preparing it for use and then put into the jars for processing.

If you want, you can cook the pumpkin or squash first, as if you're getting it ready to use, and then place it in the jars for processing.

73. SUCCOTASH.--Of course, succotash is not a vegetable, but the name of a food that results from combining corn and beans. These vegetables may be canned together to make for variety in the winter's food supply, or each may be canned separately and combined later. Clean the ears of corn in the manner previously directed; then blanch them for 5 minutes and cold-dip them. Also, remove green Lima beans from the pods, blanch them for 10 minutes, and cold-dip them. Then cut and scrape the corn off the cobs and mix it with an equal quantity of the beans. Pack the mixture into the jars to within 1/2 inch of the top, add a teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the jar tops and proceed according to the directions for the process to be employed. In the water bath, boil for 2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook for 50 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 35 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

73. SUCCOTASH.--Of course, succotash isn't a vegetable, but the name of a dish that comes from mixing corn and beans. You can can these vegetables together for variety in the winter food supply, or can each separately and combine them later. Clean the ears of corn as directed earlier; then blanch them for 5 minutes and dip them in cold water. Also, remove green Lima beans from the pods, blanch them for 10 minutes, and cold-dip them. Then cut and scrape the corn off the cobs and mix it with an equal amount of beans. Pack the mixture into jars, filling them to within 1/2 inch of the top, add a teaspoon of salt to each jar, and fill the jars with boiling water. Adjust the jar lids and follow the directions for the processing method. In a water bath, boil for 2 hours; in a pressure cooker, cook for 50 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 35 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

74. TOMATOES.--As has been stated, tomatoes may be canned successfully by the open-kettle method. If this method is to be employed, the first part of the preparation is exactly the same as for the cold-pack method, except that the jars, jar tops, and jar rubbers must be carefully sterilized.

74. TOMATOES.--As mentioned, you can successfully can tomatoes using the open-kettle method. If you choose this method, the initial preparation is the same as for the cold-pack method, except that the jars, jar lids, and jar seals must be thoroughly sterilized.

For canning, firm tomatoes should be selected if possible, as they will keep their shape better than those which are very ripe. If some are soft, they should be sorted out and canned for soup making or made into catsup. After washing the tomatoes, proceed to blanch them. The length of time required for blanching depends entirely on the condition of the tomatoes. They should be blanched for 1 to 3 minutes, or just long enough to loosen the skin. After blanching, dip them quickly into cold water and remove the skins. These, it will be found, may be removed easily and quickly. Pack the tomatoes thus prepared tightly into jars and fill them with boiling water, boiling tomato juice, or stewed tomatoes. Add a teaspoonful of salt to each jar. Then adjust the jar lids and proceed according to the directions given for the method selected. Boil for 22 minutes in the water bath; in the pressure cooker, cook for 15 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 10 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

For canning, choose firm tomatoes if possible, as they'll hold their shape better than very ripe ones. If you have some soft ones, set them aside to use for soup or to make ketchup. After washing the tomatoes, go ahead and blanch them. The time needed for blanching depends on the condition of the tomatoes. Blanch them for 1 to 3 minutes, just long enough to loosen the skin. Once blanched, quickly dip them into cold water and remove the skins. You’ll find they come off easily and quickly. Pack the prepared tomatoes tightly into jars and fill them with boiling water, boiling tomato juice, or stewed tomatoes. Add a teaspoon of salt to each jar. Then, secure the jar lids and follow the instructions for the chosen method. Boil for 22 minutes in a water bath; in a pressure cooker, cook for 15 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 10 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

75. TOMATOES FOR SOUP.--If there are soft tomatoes at hand or if tomatoes are canned by the open-kettle method, quantities of tomato juice will be available. Such material as this may be put through a sieve and boiled down for winter use in the making of soups, bisques, etc. It may be canned simply by pouring the boiling juice into sterilized jars and sealing them immediately.

75. TOMATOES FOR SOUP.--If you have soft tomatoes or if you’ve canned tomatoes using the open-kettle method, you'll have plenty of tomato juice available. You can strain this through a sieve and reduce it by boiling for winter use in soups, bisques, and more. To can it, just pour the boiling juice into sterilized jars and seal them right away.

76. TOMATOES AND CORN.--An excellent food combination results from combining stewed tomatoes with corn. Such a combination may be canned safely by either the open-kettle or the cold-pack method. The acid of the tomatoes helps to keep the corn, but the combination requires longer cooking than just plain tomatoes. Prepare each vegetable as for canning separately, but, if desired, cut the tomatoes into pieces. Mix the two foods in any desirable proportion and, for the cold-pack canning method, put the food into the jars. Add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each jarful, but no water. Then adjust the jar lids, and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of food. In the water bath, cook them 1-1/2 hours; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 50 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 35 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

76. TOMATOES AND CORN.--An excellent food combination comes from mixing stewed tomatoes with corn. This combination can be safely canned using either the open-kettle or the cold-pack method. The acidity of the tomatoes helps preserve the corn, but it requires longer cooking than just plain tomatoes. Prepare each vegetable for canning separately, but if you want, chop the tomatoes into pieces. Mix the two ingredients in any desired ratio, and for the cold-pack canning method, place the mixture into the jars. Add 1 teaspoon of salt to each jar, but don’t add any water. Then, secure the jar lids and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of food. In a water bath, cook them for 1-1/2 hours; in a pressure cooker, cook them for 50 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 35 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


DIRECTIONS FOR CANNING FRUITS

77. The chief difference between the canning of fruits and the canning of vegetables is that sugar in the form of sirup, instead of salt water, is used for the liquid. Fruits may be canned without sugar if desired, but nothing is gained by so doing, for sugar will have to be added later. Because of the sugar used in canning and the acid contained in the fruit, canned fruit has better keeping qualities than canned vegetables. In fact, it is much more likely to keep well even though it does not receive such careful attention as vegetables. It is for this reason that canned fruit does not require so much time for sterilization as vegetables do. Still it should not be inferred that care is not necessary in the canning of fruits. Indeed, the more care that is taken, the better are the results likely to be.

77. The main difference between canning fruits and canning vegetables is that sugar in the form of syrup is used as the liquid instead of salt water. Fruits can be canned without sugar if preferred, but there's no benefit to this since sugar will need to be added later. Because of the sugar in canning and the acid in the fruit, canned fruit stays fresh longer than canned vegetables. In fact, it’s much more likely to remain in good condition even if it doesn’t get as much attention as vegetables do. This is why canned fruit doesn’t need as much time for sterilization as vegetables. However, it's important to note that care is still needed when canning fruits. In fact, the more care you put into it, the better the results are likely to be.

SIRUPS FOR CANNING FRUITS

78. SIRUPS FOR CANNING.--Before the canning of fruits can be undertaken, it is necessary to possess a knowledge of the sirups that are needed. Such sirups consist simply of sugar dissolved in boiling water. The quantity of sugar and water required for a sirup depends on the acidity of the fruit and the purpose for which it is to be used. Plain canned fruits that are to be used for sauces, etc. require less sugar proportionately than those which are preserved, and fruit canned for pie making may have less than either. Thus, fruits of the same kind may be canned with sirups of different proportions. To a great extent, the quantity of sugar to use with fruit may be regulated by the taste, but it will be readily seen that such fruits as sour cherries and plums will require more sugar to make them palatable than pears and blueberries. It will be well to note, though, that the sugar does not penetrate the fruit unless the two are cooked together.

78. SYRUPS FOR CANNING.--Before you start canning fruits, you need to know about the syrups required. These syrups are simply sugar dissolved in boiling water. The amount of sugar and water needed for a syrup depends on the fruit's acidity and the intended use. Plain canned fruits meant for sauces, etc., generally require less sugar compared to those that are preserved, and fruit canned for pies may need even less. Therefore, fruits of the same type can be canned with syrups that have different proportions. The amount of sugar you use can often be adjusted based on taste, but it's clear that sour fruits like cherries and plums will need more sugar to taste good than sweeter fruits like pears and blueberries. It's also important to remember that the sugar won't soak into the fruit unless they are cooked together.

79. In order to make sirup for canning, place the desired quantities of sugar and water in a kettle and proceed to heat them. Stir the liquid while it is heating, in order to assist in dissolving the sugar. When it has begun to boil rapidly, remove the sirup from the fire and use it at once. Do not continue boiling.

79. To make syrup for canning, combine the right amounts of sugar and water in a pot and heat them up. Stir the mixture as it heats to help dissolve the sugar. Once it starts to boil vigorously, take the syrup off the heat and use it immediately. Don’t keep boiling it.

In preparing such sirups, it will be well to note that the greater the proportion of sugar to water or the longer the sugar and water are allowed to boil, the denser, or heavier, will the sirup become. It is this density of sirup that regulates its use for the different kinds of fruit and determines its nature. Thus, a sirup in which the proportion of sugar to water is so large as to make the sirup thick is known as a heavy sirup; one in which the proportion of water to sugar is so large as to make the sirup thin is called a light sirup; and one in which the proportion of sugar and water is such as to produce a sirup that is neither thick nor thin, but stands between the two extremes, is called a medium sirup.

When making these syrups, it's important to remember that the higher the amount of sugar compared to water or the longer you let the sugar and water boil, the thicker and heavier the syrup will get. It’s this density of the syrup that determines its use for different types of fruit and defines its characteristics. For example, a syrup with a high sugar-to-water ratio that makes it thick is referred to as a heavy syrup; a syrup with a high water-to-sugar ratio making it thin is called a light syrup; and a syrup where the sugar and water are balanced, producing a texture that is neither thick nor thin, is known as a medium syrup.



TABLE I
SIRUPS FOR CANNING FRUITS
Sirup No.ProportionsDegrees
With
Hydrometer
Uses
Sugar CupsWater Cups
12428Open-kettle canning, or pie
fruit canned by any method.
22330Open-kettle canning, or pie
fruit canned by any method.
32240Open-kettle canning, or sweet
fruits canned by cold-pack methods.
421-1/248Sweet fruits canned
by cold-pack methods.
52154Sour fruits canned by
cold-pack methods.
621/268Very rich fruits canned by
cold-pack methods; preserves
canned by open-kettle method.


80. The density of sirup is also affected by the amount and rapidity of evaporation that takes place in boiling, and these, in turn, depend on the amount of surface that is exposed. For instance, if a sirup is cooked in a large, flat kettle, the evaporation will be greater and more rapid than if it is cooked in a small, deep vessel. Atmospheric pressure affects the rapidity of evaporation, too. In a high altitude, evaporation takes place more slowly than at sea level, because the boiling point is lower. Thus, in the making of sirups for canning, the first point to be determined is whether the sirup desired should be light, medium, or heavy, and in its preparation the points mentioned must receive consideration.

80. The density of syrup is also influenced by how much and how quickly it evaporates during boiling, which depends on the amount of surface area exposed. For example, if syrup is cooked in a large, flat pot, evaporation will happen more quickly and in greater amounts than if it’s cooked in a small, deep pan. Atmospheric pressure also impacts the rate of evaporation. At high altitudes, evaporation occurs more slowly than at sea level because the boiling point is lower. Therefore, when making syrups for canning, the first thing to decide is whether the desired syrup should be light, medium, or heavy, and these factors must be considered during preparation.

81. For determining the density of sirup, a sirup gauge, or hydrometer, will be found useful. This device consists of a graduated glass tube attached to a bulb that is weighted with mercury. The graduations, or marks, on the tube, or top part, of the hydrometer serve to indicate the percentage of solid matter dissolved in a solution and register from to 50 degrees. To use such a gauge, partly fill a glass cylinder--an ordinary drinking glass will do--with the sirup and place the hydrometer in it. The greater the amount of solid matter dissolved in the sirup, the higher will be hydrometer float. Then read the number of degrees registered by observing the mark that is level with the surface of the sirup.

81. To measure the density of syrup, a syrup gauge or hydrometer is quite helpful. This tool consists of a graduated glass tube connected to a bulb that is weighted with mercury. The markings on the tube show the percentage of solid matter dissolved in a solution and range from 0 to 50 degrees. To use this gauge, fill a glass cylinder—an ordinary drinking glass will work—partly with syrup and place the hydrometer inside. The more solid matter dissolved in the syrup, the higher the hydrometer will float. Then, read the number of degrees by looking at the mark that aligns with the surface of the syrup.

The number of degrees that the hydrometer should register for sirups of different densities--that is, for sirups consisting of different proportions of sugar and water--are given in Table I. This table, in addition, gives the uses that should be made of such sirups, and each one is numbered so that it may be referred to readily later in the recipes for canning fruits.

The number of degrees that the hydrometer should show for syrups of different densities—that is, for syrups made up of varying amounts of sugar and water—are listed in Table I. This table also includes the uses for these syrups, and each one is numbered for easy reference later in the recipes for canning fruits.

82. CLASSIFICATION OF FRUITS.--For the sake of convenience in canning, fruits, too, are here divided into groups. These groups, three in number, together with the fruits included in each, are:

82. CLASSIFICATION OF FRUITS.--For convenience in canning, fruits are grouped here. There are three groups, along with the fruits in each:

1. Soft Fruits, which are subdivided into three kinds, namely, sweet, sour, and very sour. The sweet soft fruits include blackberries, blueberries or huckleberries, sweet cherries, elderberries, ripe gooseberries, mulberries, and black and red raspberries; the sour soft fruits, apricots, currants, grapes, peaches, and strawberries; and the very sour soft fruits, sour cherries, cranberries, green gooseberries, plums, and rhubarb.

1. Soft Fruits are divided into three types: sweet, sour, and very sour. The sweet soft fruits include blackberries, blueberries or huckleberries, sweet cherries, elderberries, ripe gooseberries, mulberries, and both black and red raspberries; the sour soft fruits consist of apricots, currants, grapes, peaches, and strawberries; and the very sour soft fruits comprise sour cherries, cranberries, green gooseberries, plums, and rhubarb.

2. Hard Fruits, which include apples, quinces, and pears.

2. Hard Fruits, including apples, quinces, and pears.

3. Special Fruits, which include ripe figs, kumquats, loquats, nectarines, persimmons, and pineapples.

3. Special Fruits, which include ripe figs, kumquats, loquats, nectarines, persimmons, and pineapples.

The advantage of this classification, as in the case of the vegetable classification, is that, as a rule, all fruits belonging to a group or a subdivision of a group may be canned in the same way and with sirup of practically the same density.

The benefit of this classification, similar to the vegetable classification, is that, generally, all fruits within a group or a subgroup can be canned in the same manner and with syrup of nearly the same thickness.

83. CANNING METHODS FOR FRUITS.--The canning of fruits may be done by the several methods previously discussed, but the Cold-pack and open-kettle methods seem to meet with most favor. On account of the sirup used in canning fruit and the acid in the fruit, the open-kettle method is usually fairly successful, whereas, in the canning of vegetables, with the exception of tomatoes, it is not so reliable. The housewife, by experiment, can determine which method will suit her needs best, but by no means should methods be mixed. If a certain method is decided on, it should be adhered to in every detail and carried through without any substitution. For all methods, as has been mentioned, the fruit should be selected when it is fresh and in good condition, as such fruit has less chance to spoil than fruit that is overripe or has decayed spots. After it is graded for size and condition, the fruit should be washed, stemmed, hulled, seeded, peeled, or halved, quartered, or sliced, depending on the kind. Then the work may be proceeded with according to the canning method that is to be followed.

83. CANNING METHODS FOR FRUITS.--Canning fruits can be done using several methods discussed earlier, but the Cold-pack and open-kettle methods are generally the most popular. Because of the syrup used in canning and the acid in the fruit, the open-kettle method tends to work well, while for vegetables—except for tomatoes—it’s less reliable. The homemaker can experiment to find which method works best for her, but it's important not to mix methods. Once a specific method is chosen, it should be followed closely with no changes. As mentioned before, the fruit should be picked when it's fresh and in good condition, as this type of fruit is less likely to spoil compared to overripe or damaged fruit. After sorting for size and quality, the fruit should be washed, stemmed, hulled, seeded, peeled, halved, quartered, or sliced, depending on the type. Then, the canning process can proceed based on the chosen method.

84. If fruits are to be canned by the open-kettle method, certain precautions must be observed in order to insure success. The sterilization of the product cannot be perfect in this method no matter how carefully the canning is done; and this means that the sugar and the fruit acids must be greatly relied on to assist in preservation. Still, the jars, jar covers, jar rubbers, and any utensils used for filling the jars must be sterilized and kept in boiling water until the fruit is ready to be canned. Another thing to guard against is the discoloring of the fruit. Any fruit that is likely to become discolored after it is prepared for canning should be kept in salt water until it is ready to be cooked. A solution consisting of 1 teaspoonful of salt to each quart of water will answer for this purpose.

84. If you're planning to can fruits using the open-kettle method, there are some important precautions to follow to ensure success. The sterilization of the product won't be perfect with this method, no matter how carefully you can, which means you'll need to rely heavily on sugar and fruit acids for preservation. That said, you must sterilize the jars, jar lids, jar seals, and any utensils used for filling the jars, keeping them in boiling water until you're ready to can the fruit. You should also be mindful of any fruit that might discolor after preparation for canning. Any fruit that tends to discolor should be kept in salt water until it's ready to be cooked. A mixture of 1 teaspoon of salt for every quart of water will work for this purpose.

After the fruit has been prepared and while the containers, etc. are being sterilized, it is necessary to prepare the sirup that is to be used. For the sweet fruits of Group 1, No. 1 or 2 sirup should be made; for the sour fruits of this group, No. 2 or 3 sirup; and for the very sour fruits, No. 4 or 5 sirup. The hard fruits may be canned by this method with No. 1, 2, or 3 sirup, while the special fruits require No. 4 or 5 sirup. If the fruit is to be canned for pie, it will be advisable to use thin sirup and then use more sweetening when pies are made.

After prepping the fruit and while the containers are being sterilized, it’s important to prepare the syrup that will be used. For the sweet fruits in Group 1, you should make syrup No. 1 or 2; for the sour fruits in this group, use syrup No. 2 or 3; and for the very sour fruits, go with syrup No. 4 or 5. Hard fruits can be canned using syrup No. 1, 2, or 3, while special fruits need syrup No. 4 or 5. If you plan to can the fruit for pies, it’s best to use a thin syrup and add more sugar when making the pies.

When the sirup is made by mixing the sugar and water and bringing it to a boil, the prepared fruit should be dropped into it and cooked. The fruit should be cooked in the sirup until it may be easily pierced with a fork or until it is soft. Berries have to be cooked only a few minutes, while the hard fruits may require from 10 to 15 minutes. The jars should be placed upright in a pan of hot water while the boiling fruit from the kettle is poured into them, and as each jar is filled the rubber should be put in place and the cover adjusted and secured. It is important to close one jar before filling another, because the longer a jar remains open the more bacteria will be permitted to enter. Even by working as rapidly as possible and taking the greatest precaution, a certain number of bacteria are bound to enter in this method of canning. After the jars are filled and sealed, they should be placed upside down or on the side to cool and test for leaks.

When you make the syrup by mixing sugar and water and heating it to a boil, drop the prepared fruit into it and cook it. The fruit should be cooked in the syrup until it's easy to pierce with a fork or until it’s soft. Berries only need a few minutes of cooking, while harder fruits might take 10 to 15 minutes. Place the jars upright in a pan of hot water while you pour the boiling fruit from the kettle into them. As you fill each jar, put the rubber seal in place and adjust and secure the lid. It's important to seal one jar before filling another because the longer a jar stays open, the more bacteria can get in. Even if you work quickly and take great care, some bacteria will inevitably enter this canning method. Once the jars are filled and sealed, turn them upside down or lay them on their sides to cool and check for leaks.

85. If the cold-pack method is employed in canning fruit, it is possible to obtain a sterilized product that is dependent for preservation on neither the sirup used nor the acid of the fruit. In this method, the jars, jar tops, covers, and utensils for handling the fruit do not have to be sterilized beforehand. They may simply be washed clean and kept hot in clean water until they are needed. After the fruits are prepared, some are blanched or scalded and cold-dipped, while others are not. They are then packed into jars and boiling sirup is poured over them. Then the rubbers are adjusted, the covers placed on, but not made tight, and the jars are placed under water in the water bath or on the racks in the pressure cooker, which should contain a small amount of water, as has been explained. After cooking the required length of time, the jars of fruit are removed from the cooking utensil, sealed, and allowed to cool.

85. If you use the cold-pack method for canning fruit, you can get a sterilized product that doesn’t rely on the syrup or the fruit's acidity for preservation. In this method, the jars, lids, covers, and tools for handling the fruit don’t need to be sterilized beforehand. They just need to be cleaned and kept hot in clean water until you’re ready to use them. After preparing the fruit, some are blanched or scalded and then cold-dipped, while others are left as they are. They are then packed into jars, and boiling syrup is poured over them. Next, the gaskets are adjusted, the lids are put on but not sealed tightly, and the jars are placed in water in the water bath or on the racks in the pressure cooker, which should have a small amount of water, as previously explained. After cooking for the required time, the jars of fruit are taken out of the cooking vessel, sealed, and left to cool.

The sirup used in the cold-pack canning method may be heavier in each case than that mentioned for the open-kettle method, because there is no evaporation, as is the case where fruits are boiled in the sirup before they are placed in the cans, but less will be required if the packing is well done.

The syrup used in the cold-pack canning method might be thicker in each case than what is mentioned for the open-kettle method, since there is no evaporation like when fruits are cooked in the syrup before being packed into cans, but you’ll need less if the packing is done properly.


GROUP 1--SOFT FRUITS

86. SWEET SOFT FRUITS.--The sweet fruits included in Group 1 --blackberries, huckleberries, elderberries, ripe gooseberries, mulberries, raspberries, and sweet cherries-may be canned in exactly the same way, so that the same general directions will apply to all. Prepare the different kinds of berries, which should be as fresh as possible, by looking them over carefully and removing the poor ones, and then washing them. To wash them, pour them into a colander and dip it up and down in a large pan of clean, cold water. The less handling such fruits receive, the more perfect will they remain for canning. Prepare sweet cherries, which should be procured with the stems on if possible, by first washing them and then stemming them. They may be pitted, or seeded, or they may be left whole, depending on personal preference. Cherries that are not pitted will keep their shape and have a good appearance, but they are not so convenient for eating as those which have been pitted.

86. SWEET SOFT FRUITS.--The sweet fruits in Group 1--blackberries, huckleberries, elderberries, ripe gooseberries, mulberries, raspberries, and sweet cherries--can be canned in exactly the same way, so the same general instructions apply to all. Prepare the different types of berries, which should be as fresh as possible, by thoroughly checking them and removing any bad ones, then washing them. To wash them, place them in a colander and dip it up and down in a large bowl of clean, cold water. The less handling these fruits receive, the better they will stay for canning. Prepare sweet cherries, which should ideally be bought with the stems still on, by washing them first and then removing the stems. They can be pitted or left whole, depending on personal preference. Cherries that aren't pitted will maintain their shape and look good, but they're not as convenient to eat as those that have been pitted.

87. After the fruit has been prepared in the manner just explained, pack it closely into the hot, clean jars, using a spoon for this purpose and turning each jar as the fruit is poured into it. Press the berries or the cherries down carefully, so that 2 quarts of them will fill a 1-quart jar. Then proceed to make the sirup. As these fruits are the sweetest, they require less sugar than any other. If such fruit after it is canned is to be used for pie making, sirup No. 1 or 2 will be suitable, but if it is to be used for sauce, No. 3 sirup may be used. When the mixed sugar and water is boiling rapidly, pour it over the fruit packed into the jars. Then place the rubbers, adjust the jar tops, and proceed to sterilize and cook the cans of fruit. Boil these in the water bath for 15 minutes, or cook them in the pressure cooker for 8 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 4 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

87. After preparing the fruit as explained, pack it tightly into hot, clean jars using a spoon and turning each jar as you pour in the fruit. Gently press the berries or cherries down so that 2 quarts will fit into a 1-quart jar. Next, make the syrup. Since these fruits are the sweetest, they need less sugar than others. If the canned fruit is meant for pie, syrup No. 1 or 2 works well, but if it’s for sauce, use syrup No. 3. Once the sugar and water mixture is boiling rapidly, pour it over the packed fruit in the jars. Then place the rubber seals, secure the jar tops, and proceed to sterilize and cook the jars of fruit. Boil them in a water bath for 15 minutes or cook them in a pressure cooker for 8 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 4 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

88. SOUR SOFT FRUITS.--Of the sour fruits, STRAWBERRIES, GRAPES, and CURRANTS require about the same quantity of sugar, that contained in sirup No. 3, 4, or 5 usually being sufficient. Otherwise, the canning process, including the length of time for processing, does not differ materially from that just given for sweet soft fruits.

88. SOUR SOFT FRUITS.--For sour fruits, STRAWBERRIES, GRAPES, and CURRANTS need about the same amount of sugar, with the sugar in syrup No. 3, 4, or 5 generally being enough. Aside from that, the canning process, including the processing time, is pretty much the same as what was described for sweet soft fruits.

In the case of strawberries, those which are of medium size and rather dark in color are best for canning; in fact, very large, light-colored strawberries will shrink more than any other kind. The berries are washed in the same way as other berries, but they should not be allowed to stand in water for any length of time, because this will tend to make them soft and mushy. Strawberries must be stemmed after they are washed, and for this purpose a strawberry huller should be utilized. Such a device, which is shown in Fig. 1, permits the stems to be removed without crushing the berries and soiling the fingers.

In the case of strawberries, medium-sized and darker-colored ones are best for canning; in fact, very large, light-colored strawberries tend to shrink more than any other type. The berries are washed just like other berries, but they shouldn't sit in water for too long, as this can cause them to become soft and mushy. After being washed, strawberries need to be stemmed, and for this, a strawberry huller should be used. This tool, shown in Fig. 1, allows you to remove the stems without crushing the berries or getting your fingers dirty.

In preparing currants for canning, the procedure is the same as for the fruits already mentioned; and the same thing is true of grapes that are not to be seeded. If the seeds are to be removed, however, the procedure up to getting the cans of fruit ready for processing is different, as is here pointed out. After washing the grapes, squeeze the pulp from the skins and then cook it in a kettle for a sufficient length of time to make it soft. Remove the seeds by forcing the pulp through a sieve. Then add as much sugar as would be used for making the required sirup, and cook until the sugar is dissolved. With this done, add the sweetened, seedless pulp to the grape skins and fill the jars with this mixture. Then continue the canning process as for the other fruits of this group.

In preparing currants for canning, the process is the same as for the fruits mentioned earlier; the same goes for grapes that won't be seeded. However, if you need to remove the seeds, the steps before getting the jars ready for processing are different, as explained here. After washing the grapes, squeeze the pulp from the skins and cook it in a pot until it softens. Remove the seeds by pushing the pulp through a sieve. Then, add as much sugar as you would use to make the required syrup, and cook until the sugar dissolves. Once that's done, add the sweetened, seedless pulp to the grape skins and fill the jars with this mixture. Then continue the canning process as you would for the other fruits in this group.

89. The procedure in canning APRICOTS and PEACHES, the other two sour soft fruits, differs slightly from that required for strawberries, grapes, and currants. So that the skins of both of these fruits may be easily removed, they must be scalded, which is an operation that corresponds to blanching in vegetable canning.

89. The process for canning APRICOTS and PEACHES, the other two tart soft fruits, is a bit different from what’s needed for strawberries, grapes, and currants. To easily peel the skins off both of these fruits, they need to be scalded, which is similar to blanching in vegetable canning.

For canning purposes, only firm, fresh apricots and peaches that are not overripe should be selected. Also, in the case of peaches, care should be taken to see that they are of the freestone variety, as such peaches may be split easily. Clingstone peaches should not be chosen unless the fruit is to be canned whole or unless an implement for removing the seeds, or stones like that shown in Fig. 2, is at hand. Proceed with the canning of either apricots or peaches by first scalding them. To do this, put the fruit in boiling water for 1 to 3 minutes, depending on its ripeness. Next, cold-dip it quickly, remove the skins, and, if desired, cut each one in half and remove the seed, or stone. When thus prepared, pack the fruit into hot jars as tightly as possible, pour sirup No. 3, 4, or 5 over them, filling each jar, adjust the rubber and jar top, and proceed as directed for the cold-pack method. In the water bath, boil the cans of fruit for 15 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 10 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or for 6 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

For canning, choose only firm, fresh apricots and peaches that aren’t overripe. Also, for peaches, make sure they are of the freestone variety, as these peaches can split easily. Avoid clingstone peaches unless you plan to can them whole or have a tool for removing the pits, like the one shown in Fig. 2. Start canning apricots or peaches by scalding them first. To do this, place the fruit in boiling water for 1 to 3 minutes, depending on how ripe it is. Then, quickly dip it in cold water, remove the skins, and if you want, cut each one in half and take out the pit. Once prepared, pack the fruit tightly into hot jars, pour sirup No. 3, 4, or 5 over them, fill each jar, adjust the rubber and jar top, and follow the instructions for the cold-pack method. In the water bath, boil the jars of fruit for 15 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 10 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 6 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

90. VERY SOUR SOFT FRUITS.--Some of the fruits of the third subdivision of Group 1, namely, SOUR CHERRIES, CRANBERRIES, and GREEN GOOSEBERRIES, may be prepared and canned in the same way as those included in the first subdivision. The cherries may be left whole or they may be seeded, as preferred, and all the fruit must, of course, be fresh. For these very sour fruits, sirups Nos. 4, 5, and 6 are required, and the processing time is 15 minutes in the water bath and 10 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or 5 minutes at a 10-pound pressure in the pressure cooker.

90. VERY SOUR SOFT FRUITS.--Some of the fruits from the third category of Group 1, specifically SOUR CHERRIES, CRANBERRIES, and GREEN GOOSEBERRIES, can be prepared and canned in the same manner as those in the first category. The cherries can either be left whole or pitted, depending on your preference, and all the fruit must be fresh, of course. For these very sour fruits, you will need syrups No. 4, 5, and 6, and the processing time is 15 minutes in the water bath and 10 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or 5 minutes at a 10-pound pressure in the pressure cooker.

91. PLUMS for canning should be fresh and firm, but not overripe. This fruit may be canned with the skins on, but some varieties permit the skins to be removed after scalding, and this may be done if desired. Prepare the plums for canning by washing them, and, if the skins are to be left on, by piercing each one in several places with a fork to prevent the skins from cracking. Then scald the plums for about 1-1/2 minutes, cold-dip them quickly, and pack them closely into the hot jars. Pour sirup No. 4, 5, or 6 over the fruit in the jars, using sirup No. 6 if they are very sour, adjust the rubbers and the covers, and proceed according to the canning method selected. In the water bath, cook for 15 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook for 10 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 6 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

91. PLUMS for canning should be fresh and firm, but not too ripe. You can can this fruit with the skins on, but some varieties allow for the skins to be removed after scalding, and you can do that if you prefer. Prepare the plums for canning by washing them, and if you're leaving the skins on, pierce each one in several spots with a fork to stop the skins from cracking. Then scald the plums for about 1-1/2 minutes, quickly dip them in cold water, and pack them tightly into the hot jars. Pour syrup No. 4, 5, or 6 over the fruit in the jars, using syrup No. 6 if they are very sour, adjust the rubbers and the lids, and then follow the canning method you've chosen. In the water bath, cook for 15 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook for 10 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 6 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

92. RHUBARB for canning should be selected when it is most tender. The variety having red stems is the most attractive after it is canned. Only the heavy stems, which should be cut from the leaves, may be canned. Cut these stems into inch lengths, blanch them 1 to 3 minutes in boiling water, and cold-dip them quickly. Then pack these pieces into the jars. If the rhubarb is being canned for sauce, fill each jar with sirup No. 5 or 6; if it is being canned for pie, use sirup No. 1, 2, or 3. Next, adjust the rubbers and covers and proceed with the processing. In the water bath, cook for 15 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook for 10 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or for 6 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

92. RHUBARB for canning should be chosen when it's at its most tender. The variety with red stems looks the best after canning. Only use the heavy stems, and remember to cut them away from the leaves. Cut these stems into 1-inch pieces, blanch them for 1 to 3 minutes in boiling water, and quickly dunk them in cold water. Then, pack these pieces into the jars. If you're canning the rhubarb for sauce, fill each jar with syrup No. 5 or 6; for pie, use syrup No. 1, 2, or 3. Next, adjust the lids and bands and proceed with the processing. In a water bath, cook for 15 minutes; in a pressure cooker, cook for 10 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 6 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


GROUP 2--HARD FRUITS

93. APPLES.--The canning of apples should be done when there is a large supply of summer apples that cannot be stored for winter use or used at once. Canning is also a good means of utilizing windfall apples. This fruit may be canned in quarters for sauce, in slices for pie, or in any other desirable shape or condition.

93. APPLES.--You should can apples when there’s a lot of summer apples that can’t be stored for winter or used right away. Canning is also a great way to use up windfall apples. You can can this fruit in quarters for sauce, in slices for pie, or in any other shape or form you prefer.

After apples for canning are selected, wash them, scald, or blanch, them for 1 to 5 minutes in boiling water, and cold-dip them quickly. Next, peel and core them, and cut each one into pieces of any desirable size. As these pieces are cut, drop them into salt water--1 teaspoonful of salt to each quart of water--to prevent them from discoloring. Then pack the fruit into the jars and fill the jars with boiling sirup. If the apples are intended for pie, use sirup No. 1, 2, or 3; if they are for sauce, use sirup No. 3, 4, or 5. When the jars are filled, adjust the rubbers and covers and proceed with the processing. If the pieces are large, cook them in the water bath for 20 minutes; if they are medium in size, cook them for 15 minutes; and if they are in the form of slices, cook them for 10 minutes. If they are to be processed in the pressure cooker, cook them for 8 to 12 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 6 to 8 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

After selecting apples for canning, wash, scald, or blanch them for 1 to 5 minutes in boiling water, then quickly dip them in cold water. Next, peel and core the apples, cutting each one into pieces of your desired size. As you cut the pieces, drop them into salt water—1 teaspoon of salt for every quart of water—to prevent discoloration. Then pack the fruit into jars and fill them with boiling syrup. If the apples are for pie, use syrup No. 1, 2, or 3; if they're for sauce, use syrup No. 3, 4, or 5. Once the jars are filled, place the rubbers and lids on and start the processing. If the pieces are large, cook them in a water bath for 20 minutes; if they're medium-sized, cook for 15 minutes; and if they're sliced, cook for 10 minutes. If you're using a pressure cooker, cook them for 8 to 12 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 6 to 8 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

If the apples to be canned are first baked or made into a sauce, simply pack them into jars and process them for a few minutes.

If you're canning apples that have been baked or turned into sauce, just pack them into jars and process them for a few minutes.

94. QUINCES.--Quinces may be canned alone, but they may be combined with apples to good advantage. If canned alone, they may require a heavier sirup than if apples are used with them. Prepare the quinces in the same way as apples. If apples are to be canned with them, cut the pieces of apples twice the size of the pieces of quinces. This should be done because more time is required for cooking the quinces soft. After packing the jars and pouring in the sirup, proceed with the processing. If quinces alone are in the jars, cook them in the water bath for 30 minutes; but if quinces and apples are combined, cook them for 20 minutes. In the pressure cooker, cook the jars of fruit for 12 to 15 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or for 10 to 12 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

94. QUINCES.--You can can quinces on their own, but combining them with apples works really well too. If you’re canning them alone, you might need to use a heavier syrup than if you mix in apples. Prepare the quinces the same way you would with apples. If you’re canning them together, cut the apple pieces twice the size of the quince pieces. This is because quinces take longer to cook until they're soft. After packing the jars and adding the syrup, continue with the processing. If there are quinces alone in the jars, cook them in a water bath for 30 minutes; but if you’ve combined them with apples, cook them for 20 minutes. In a pressure cooker, process the jars of fruit for 12 to 15 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 10 to 12 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

95. PEARS.--Pears for canning should be firm, but not hard. After sorting and washing them, blanch them for 1 to 3 minutes and cold-dip them quickly. Then pare, halve, and core them. Pack them immediately into the jars and pour sirup No. 3 or 4 over them. Next, adjust the rubbers and covers and proceed with the processing. In the water bath, cook them for 20 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 8 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or 6 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

95. PEARS.--Pears for canning should be firm, but not hard. After sorting and washing them, blanch them for 1 to 3 minutes and quickly dip them in cold water. Then peel, halve, and core them. Pack them right away into jars and pour syrup No. 3 or 4 over them. Next, adjust the seals and lids and proceed with the processing. In the water bath, cook them for 20 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook them for 8 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or 6 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


GROUP 3--SPECIAL FRUITS

96. FIGS.--Although figs are not a common fruit, there are parts of this country, particularly on the western coast, in which they are abundant. For canning, ripe figs should be selected. To prepare them, blanch them for 2 minutes in boiling water and cold-dip them. Then pack them into the jars and fill the jars by pouring sirup No. 4, 5, or 6 over the figs. Proceed with the remainder of the process as in canning peaches.

96. FIGS.--While figs aren't a widely popular fruit, there are areas in this country, especially along the western coast, where they are plentiful. For canning, choose ripe figs. To prepare them, blanch them in boiling water for 2 minutes, then quickly cool them in cold water. Next, pack them into jars and cover the figs with syrup No. 4, 5, or 6. Follow the rest of the canning process as you would for peaches.

97. KUMQUATS AND LOQUATS.--Kumquats and loquats are small acid fruits resembling oranges in color and plums in size and shape. Such fruits are not very common, but they may be obtained in some markets. To can either of these fruits, wash them, blanch for 5 minutes, cold-dip, pack into jars, and fill the jars with sirup No. 5 or 6. In the water bath, cook them for 15 minutes. In the pressure cooker, cook them for 10 minutes at a 5-pound pressure or for 5 minutes at a 10-pound pressure.

97. KUMQUATS AND LOQUATS.--Kumquats and loquats are small, tart fruits that are orange in color and similar in size and shape to plums. These fruits aren't very common, but you can find them at some grocery stores. To can either fruit, wash them, blanch for 5 minutes, dip in cold water, pack into jars, and fill the jars with syrup No. 5 or 6. In the water bath, cook them for 15 minutes. In a pressure cooker, cook them for 10 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 5 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.

98. NECTARINES.--Nectarines are a smooth-skinned variety of peach. Ripe nectarines may be canned in the same way as peaches, but they do not require so much sugar, sirup No. 2 or 3 usually being about right.

98. NECTARINES.--Nectarines are a smooth-skinned type of peach. Ripe nectarines can be canned just like peaches, but they don't need as much sugar; syrup No. 2 or 3 is usually just right.

99. PERSIMMONS.--Persimmons are a seedy, plum-like fruit common to the southern and southwestern parts of the United States. This fruit is very astringent when unripe, but is sweet and delicious when ripe or touched by frost. Well-frosted persimmons should be selected for canning. Blanch them so that the skin may be removed easily and cold-dip them quickly. Then peel them and pack them into hot jars. Fill the jars with sirup No. 6 and process them in the same way as peaches.

99. PERSIMMONS.--Persimmons are a seedy, plum-like fruit that’s common in the southern and southwestern regions of the United States. This fruit is very astringent when it’s unripe but becomes sweet and delicious once it's ripe or after it’s been touched by frost. Select well-frosted persimmons for canning. Blanch them to make the skin easier to remove, then quickly dip them in cold water. After that, peel them and pack them into hot jars. Fill the jars with syrup No. 6 and process them just like you would peaches.

100. PINEAPPLES.--Pineapples are better known than any of the other special fruits. For canning, those ripe enough to permit the center leaves to pull out easily should be selected; also, they should be free from soft or rotten spots, which are most likely to appear first near the bottom. Pineapples are graded in size by the number that may be packed in a case. These sizes are 24, 30, 36, and 42, size 24 being the largest and size 42 the smallest. Sizes 30 and 36 are best for canning.

100. PINEAPPLES.--Pineapples are more popular than any of the other specialty fruits. For canning, you should choose those that are ripe enough for the center leaves to pull out easily; they also need to be free from any soft or rotten spots, which usually show up first near the bottom. Pineapples are graded by size based on how many can fit in a case. These sizes are 24, 30, 36, and 42, with size 24 being the largest and size 42 the smallest. Sizes 30 and 36 are the best for canning.

In canning pineapples, first place each in boiling water for 10 minutes and dip it quickly into cold water. Then prepare it for the cans. This may be done by removing the peeling with a sharp knife, digging out the eyes, and then slicing or dicing; by slicing first and then peeling and taking out the eyes; or by peeling, taking out the eyes, and then shredding it with the aid of a fork. When it is prepared, pack the fruit into the jars, fill each jar with sirup No. 4 or 5, adjust the rubbers and covers, and proceed to process it. In the water bath, cook for 30 minutes; in the pressure cooker, cook for 12 minutes at a pressure of 5 pounds or for 10 minutes at a pressure of 10 pounds.

In canning pineapples, first put each one in boiling water for 10 minutes and then quickly dip it into cold water. Next, prepare it for the cans. You can do this by peeling it with a sharp knife, removing the eyes, and then slicing or dicing it; by slicing first and then peeling and taking out the eyes; or by peeling, removing the eyes, and then shredding it with a fork. Once it's ready, pack the fruit into the jars, fill each jar with syrup No. 4 or 5, adjust the rubber seals and lids, and proceed to process it. In a water bath, cook for 30 minutes; in a pressure cooker, cook for 12 minutes at 5 pounds of pressure or for 10 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure.


CANNING MEAT AND FISH

101. Both fish and meat, including that from fowl and game, may be canned at times that seem convenient and then used when an emergency arises or at a time when the same food will cost more to prepare. Fowl, game, and fish may be canned to special advantage during the season when each is plentiful. The best process for canning such foods is the one-period cold-pack method.

101. Both fish and meat, including poultry and game, can be canned at convenient times and then used during emergencies or when the cost of preparing the same food rises. Poultry, game, and fish can be canned most advantageously during their peak seasons. The best method for canning these foods is the one-period cold-pack method.

102. MEAT.--In canning meat, whether from domestic animals, fowl, or game, first cut it into pieces of a size that would be suitable for serving at the table. The meat may be left raw or it may be prepared by any desirable cooking process, such as frying, fricasseeing, braizing, etc. Careful attention must be given to the drawing of fowl that is to be canned, because the entire alimentary tract should be removed without being broken. The giblets should not be canned with the rest of the meat, as they will not keep so well. Whether the meat is to be canned raw or cooked, pack the jars as tightly as possible. If the meat is raw, add 1 teaspoonful of salt to each quart of food and fill the jars three-fourths full with boiling water. In case the jar is filled to the top, fat will rise and injure the rubber. If the meat is cooked, add any liquid that may have resulted from the cooking, as well as boiling water, provided more liquid is needed. Then, as in canning vegetables and fruit, adjust the rubbers and covers and proceed with the processing. In the case of raw meat, sterilize for 3 hours in the water bath, or for 1-1/2 hours at a 10-pound pressure in the pressure cooker. In the case of cooked meat, sterilize for 1-1/2 hours in the water bath, or for 30 minutes at a 10-pound pressure in the pressure cooker.

102. MEAT.--When canning meat, whether from domestic animals, poultry, or game, first cut it into pieces that are suitable for serving. The meat can be left raw or cooked using a preferred method like frying, fricasseeing, braising, etc. It's important to carefully remove the innards of poultry before canning, ensuring the entire digestive tract is taken out without breaking it. Do not can the giblets with the rest of the meat, as they won't preserve well. Regardless of whether the meat is raw or cooked, pack the jars as tightly as possible. If the meat is raw, add 1 teaspoon of salt for each quart of food and fill the jars three-quarters full with boiling water. If the jar is filled to the top, fat will rise and damage the rubber seal. If the meat is cooked, add any liquid from the cooking process, along with boiling water if more liquid is needed. Then, like when canning vegetables and fruits, adjust the seals and lids and continue with the processing. For raw meat, sterilize for 3 hours in the water bath, or for 1.5 hours at 10 pounds of pressure in the pressure cooker. For cooked meat, sterilize for 1.5 hours in the water bath, or for 30 minutes at 10 pounds of pressure in the pressure cooker.

103. FISH.--To prepare fish for canning, first clean it by scaling it and removing the entrails. Wrap the cleaned fish in cheesecloth and steam for 15 minutes. After steaming, remove the bones, which will come out easily, and cut the fish into pieces. Pack the pieces into the jars, and to each quart of the food add 1 teaspoonful of salt. Next, fill each jar three-fourths full with boiling water and continue with the canning in the manner directed for meat.

103. FISH.--To get fish ready for canning, first clean it by scaling and gutting it. Wrap the cleaned fish in cheesecloth and steam it for 15 minutes. After steaming, take out the bones, which should come out easily, and cut the fish into pieces. Pack the pieces into jars, adding 1 teaspoon of salt for each quart of fish. Then, fill each jar three-quarters full with boiling water and continue with the canning process as directed for meat.


STORING AND SERVING CANNED FOODS

104. After jars of canned food have been cooled and tested for leaks, carefully wiped with a damp cloth, and then wrapped and labeled, they are ready to be placed in storage. Such food should be stored in an orderly manner on shelves that may be covered to keep off dust, or in a large cupboard provided with doors that may be closed. The temperature of the room in which the canned foods are kept is of no great importance, but, in homes provided with cellars, the cellar is the logical place in which to store them.

104. Once jars of canned food have cooled and been checked for leaks, wiped down with a damp cloth, and then wrapped and labeled, they’re ready for storage. This food should be organized neatly on shelves that can be covered to keep out dust, or in a large cupboard with doors that can be closed. The room temperature where the canned foods are kept isn’t extremely important, but in homes with cellars, the cellar is the ideal place to store them.

Canned foods, no matter how well the canning may have been done, undergo gradual deterioration. Therefore, those kept for more than a year, will not be so good as those used during the first year after canning. If canned foods from a previous year are at hand when new cans are ready to be stored, the old ones should be placed to the front of the shelves and the new ones to the back, so that the old ones will be used up first.

Canned foods, no matter how well they're sealed, gradually lose quality over time. So, those that have been stored for more than a year won't be as good as those used within the first year after canning. If you have canned foods from last year when you're about to store new cans, make sure to place the old ones at the front of the shelves and the new ones at the back, so the old ones get used up first.

105. Canned foods take the place of raw foods, and whether they should be cooked or not depends on the kind. In the case of vegetables, most of them may be made ready to serve simply by heating them, although they may be used in the preparation of many dishes, as is evident from the recipes throughout the lessons. In the case of fruits, some may be served just as they come from the can; however, there are many ways of using canned fruits in the making of desserts, as is pointed out in Fruit and Fruit Desserts. In the case of meats and fish, the food, if cooked before canning, may be prepared for serving simply by heating it; whereas, if it is canned raw, some cookery method for meat will have to be applied.

105. Canned foods replace raw foods, and whether they need to be cooked depends on the type. For vegetables, most can be ready to serve just by heating them, although they can also be used in various dishes, as shown in the recipes throughout the lessons. For fruits, some can be served straight from the can; however, there are many ways to use canned fruits in desserts, as mentioned in Fruit and Fruit Desserts. For meats and fish, if cooked before canning, they can simply be heated for serving; however, if canned raw, you'll need to use a cooking method for meat.

When foods are boiled, one reason for a change in taste is that oxygen is driven off by the boiling. Therefore, to improve the taste of canned foods that are to be served without any further preparation, it is advisable, when a jar is opened, to pour the contents into an open dish and thus expose it to the air.

When foods are boiled, one reason for a change in taste is that oxygen escapes during the boiling process. So, to enhance the flavor of canned foods that will be served without any additional cooking, it's recommended that when you open a jar, you pour the contents into an open dish to let it breathe.

In opening jars of canned fruit, care must be taken not to crack or nick either the top of the jar or its cover. The cover of any kind of jar will come off easily if a little air is admitted. Insert a knife blade between the cover and jar rubber of a glass-covered jar, but do not use a knife to loosen a metal top, as it may bend the edge in places. Hot water poured over the jar will assist in opening it.

In opening jars of canned fruit, be careful not to chip or scratch the top of the jar or its lid. The lid of any jar will come off easily if you let a little air in. For a glass jar, slide a knife blade between the lid and the rubber seal, but don't use a knife to pry off a metal lid, as it might bend in some spots. Pouring hot water over the jar can help with opening it.


SCORING CANNED FOODS

106. In order that the housewife may judge the quality of her own canned products according to standards that have been set by canning authorities, a score card, together with an explanation of the terms and the procedure, is here given. The beginner in canning will do well to score her own foods, so that any fault that may be found can be corrected when similar foods are canned at another time. In fact, the chief purpose of scoring any product is to learn of faults that may be corrected. The scoring should be done as impartially as if a disinterested person were doing it, and if the cause of any trouble is not readily apparent, pains should be taken to find it out.

106. To help the home cook evaluate the quality of her canned products based on standards set by canning experts, a scorecard along with explanations of the terms and procedures is provided here. Beginners in canning should score their own foods so they can identify and fix any issues the next time they can similar items. The main goal of scoring any product is to discover faults that can be addressed. Scoring should be done as objectively as if someone impartial were doing it, and if the reason for any issues isn't immediately obvious, effort should be made to uncover it.



SCORE CARDPER CENT.
General appearance10
Method of sealing10
Proportion of food to liquid10
Flavor35
Texture of food20
Color15
Total100


107. As a rule, scoring, or judging, is done at the time the canned food is to be opened and used.

107. Generally, scoring or judging is done right when the canned food is about to be opened and used.

The general appearance is judged before the jar is opened. If a jar of food is well and symmetrically packed and has clear liquid and a good color, it should receive a perfect score of 10.

The general appearance is evaluated before the jar is opened. If a jar of food is neatly and evenly packed, has a clear liquid, and looks appealing, it should get a perfect score of 10.

The method of sealing must also be judged before the can is opened. A properly filled jar with the rubber and cover in good condition and tightly sealed should receive a perfect score of 10.

The method of sealing must also be evaluated before opening the can. A properly filled jar with the rubber and lid in good condition and tightly sealed should earn a perfect score of 10.

The proportion of food to liquid should score 10. The jars should be as full of uncrushed food as possible, and the liquid that has been added should fill all crevices to the very edge of the jar.

The proportion of food to liquid should score 10. The jars should be as filled with uncrushed food as possible, and the added liquid should fill all the gaps to the very top of the jar.

The flavor is judged after the can is opened, and if it is perfect, it is entitled to a score of 35. The flavor of canned fruit is injured by any kind of spoiling, such as molding, fermentation, etc. Fruits canned in good condition should retain the characteristic flavor of the fresh fruits; also, they should contain sufficient sugar to be agreeably sweet, but no more. Canned vegetables should retain their characteristic flavors, with no sour, musty, nor disagreeable taste, and be slightly salty. Canned meats and fish should also possess their characteristic flavors.

The flavor is assessed once the can is opened, and if it's perfect, it gets a score of 35. The flavor of canned fruit can be compromised by any type of spoilage, like molding or fermentation. Fruits that are canned in good condition should keep the distinct flavor of the fresh fruits; they should also have enough sugar to be pleasantly sweet, but not excessively so. Canned vegetables should maintain their unique flavors, with no sour, musty, or unpleasant taste, and have a slight saltiness. Canned meats and fish should also have their distinct flavors.

The texture of food is entitled to a score of 20 if it is perfect. The canned food should be whole; that is, in the original pieces as they were put into the can. Underripe fruit or insufficiently cooked fruit or vegetables do not have the proper texture; neither do overripe or uncooked foods.

The texture of food gets a score of 20 if it’s perfect. Canned food should be intact, meaning in the original pieces as they were packed. Underripe fruit or not fully cooked fruits and vegetables don’t have the right texture; the same goes for overripe or raw foods.

The color of canned food merits a score of 15 if it is right. Fruits and vegetables should have retained their natural color. Fading after canning may be prevented by wrapping the cans, as has been explained.

The color of canned food deserves a score of 15 if it's correct. Fruits and vegetables should keep their natural color. Fading after canning can be avoided by wrapping the cans, as mentioned earlier.


DRYING

PRINCIPLES OF DRYING

108. DRYING consists in removing the moisture contained in foods by evaporation and thus rendering them less susceptible to the attacks of undesirable bacteria. Dried foods, as foods so treated are called, will not replace fresh or canned foods. However, they are valuable in many cases and possess some advantages over such foods. For example, the weight of dried foods is very greatly reduced, the storage space required by them is much less, and they are easy to keep without spoiling and easy to transport. Likewise, the containers for such foods are less costly than those required for canned foods and they are easily procured, since paper boxes or paper bags are satisfactory. In fact, the housewife, by taking care of the bags and boxes that come into the home, can easily provide all the containers she will possibly need at practically no cost.

108. DRYING is the process of removing moisture from foods through evaporation, making them less vulnerable to harmful bacteria. Dried foods, as these items are known, won't take the place of fresh or canned foods. However, they offer value in many situations and have several advantages over those options. For instance, the weight of dried foods is significantly lighter, they require much less storage space, and they are easy to keep without spoiling and simple to transport. Additionally, the containers for these foods are cheaper than those needed for canned foods and are easy to find, as paper boxes or paper bags work well. In fact, a housewife can easily gather enough containers she might need at almost no cost by reusing the bags and boxes that come into the home.

109. The water in food that is to be dried may be evaporated by applying heat, by bringing the food in contact with moving air, or by subjecting it to a combination of both of these methods. The heat for drying may be obtained from the sun, as in the sun-drying method, or from the stove, as in the stove-drying method, while moving air for evaporating moisture may be obtained from an electric fan, as in the electric-fan drying method.

109. The moisture in food that needs to be dried can be removed by applying heat, exposing the food to moving air, or using a combination of both methods. Heat for drying can come from the sun, as in the sun-drying method, or from a stove, as in the stove-drying method, while moving air for evaporating moisture can be provided by an electric fan, as in the electric-fan drying method.

In the application of any of these drying methods, however, it is important to note that the more surface of food there is exposed, the more quickly will evaporation take place. Drying should therefore be done on devices constructed in such a way that air may pass up through food, as well as across its surface. In drying foods, the racks should be turned frequently, so that all parts will be exposed equally to the heat or the currents of air. Also, the food must be turned over often, in order that all parts will dry evenly.

In using any of these drying methods, it's crucial to understand that the more surface area of the food that's exposed, the faster evaporation will occur. Drying should be done on equipment designed to allow air to flow up through the food as well as across its surface. When drying foods, racks should be rotated frequently to ensure that all parts are equally exposed to heat or air currents. Additionally, the food should be flipped often to ensure even drying of all parts.

110. Any fruit or vegetable may be dried if the method is properly applied, but there is usually more or less change in both the flavor and the color of the dried food. The more rapidly the drying can be done, the more natural will the color and flavor remain; whereas, the longer the process is continued, the greater will be this change.

110. Any fruit or vegetable can be dried if the technique is done correctly, but there will typically be some change in both the flavor and color of the dried food. The faster the drying process can be completed, the more natural the color and flavor will stay; on the other hand, the longer the drying takes, the more pronounced these changes will be.

Foods should be dried when they are in such quantity that they cannot be used to advantage in the raw state, when there is no market for them, when the owner cannot afford to give them away, and when home canning ceases to be practical and profitable. In other words, if it is not practical to save foods in another way, they should be dried.

Foods should be dried when there’s so much of them that they can’t be used fresh, when there’s no demand for them, when the owner can’t afford to give them away, and when home canning is no longer practical or profitable. In other words, if saving foods in another way isn't feasible, they should be dried.


DRYING METHODS

111. DEVICES FOR DRYING.--Many manufactured devices may be had for the drying of foods. Some are made so that they may be placed on top of a stove, like that shown in Fig. 23. This device is in the form of a metal box. It has a tray for holding the food to be dried, and underneath this is a space for holding water. Water is poured into this space through a funnel in one corner, and heat for drying is supplied by heating the water. Other devices are made so that they may be suspended over a stove, put into a stove oven, or used out of doors. Still others have a heating device placed inside of them. It is possible, however, to make drying devices in the home that will answer the purpose just as well as the devices that may be bought.

111. DEVICES FOR DRYING.--There are many commercial devices available for drying foods. Some are designed to sit on top of a stove, like the one shown in Fig. 23. This device is shaped like a metal box and has a tray for holding the food to be dried, with a compartment below for holding water. Water is poured into this compartment through a funnel in one corner, and heat for drying is provided by warming the water. Other devices can be hung over a stove, placed in a stove oven, or used outdoors. Still, others have a heating element built into them. However, it is also possible to create drying devices at home that work just as effectively as the store-bought options.

[Illustration: FIG. 23]

As has been stated, drying devices should be so made that the air may pass up through the food and across its surface. A pan, a platter, or a solid board, as will be readily seen, is not so good for drying as a wooden frame of convenient size that has small slats or fine, rustless-wire netting, or screening, attached to the bottom. Such a device may be covered with cheesecloth to keep out dirt. If it is to be used in the oven or set in the sun, a nail driven part way into each corner will provide feet and thus keep it from resting on the oven floor or any other flat surface.

As mentioned, drying devices should be designed to allow air to flow up through the food and over its surface. A pan, platter, or solid board, as you can easily see, isn’t as effective for drying as a wooden frame of a suitable size that has small slats or fine, rustproof wire mesh attached to the bottom. This device can be covered with cheesecloth to keep out dust. If you plan to use it in the oven or place it in the sun, driving a nail partially into each corner will create feet and keep it from resting directly on the oven floor or any other flat surface.

For suspending food that is to be dried over a stove, a rack like that shown in Fig. 24 may be easily made in the home. As will be observed, it consists of three trays fastened together. These trays are suspended by four strings tied to another string that runs over small pulleys. The pulleys are attached to a wooden brace that is secured to the kitchen wall. The pulleys and string permit the rack to be raised or lowered, so that the food may be easily put into and taken out of the trays.

For hanging food that needs to be dried over a stove, a rack like the one shown in Fig. 24 can be easily made at home. As you can see, it has three trays connected together. These trays are suspended by four strings tied to another string that runs over small pulleys. The pulleys are attached to a wooden brace secured to the kitchen wall. The pulleys and string allow you to raise or lower the rack, making it easy to put food in and take it out of the trays.

[Illustration: FIG. 24]

112. SUN-DRYING METHOD.--If food is to be dried in the sun, spread it in a single layer on each tray, cover the trays so that no dirt will fall into them, and set them out of doors so that the sun's rays will strike them. Glass covers will help to increase the heat from the sun. As the sun changes, change the position of the trays or turn them. Food that is being dried outdoors should be brought into the house when the sun goes down and put out again the following morning. This procedure should be kept up until the food is so dry as to be leathery; that is, in a condition that will permit of bending without cracking.

112. SUN-DRYING METHOD.--When drying food in the sun, lay it out in a single layer on each tray, cover the trays to keep dirt from getting in, and place them outside for the sun to hit them. Glass covers can help amplify the sun's heat. As the sun moves, adjust the trays or rotate them. Bring the food indoors when the sun sets and set it out again the next morning. Continue this process until the food is dry enough to be leathery; meaning it should be bendable without breaking.

113. STOVE-DRYING METHOD.--If food is to be dried by the stove-drying method, it may be placed in the oven, on top of the stove, or suspended above the stove.

113. STOVE-DRYING METHOD.--If you want to dry food using the stove-drying method, you can put it in the oven, on the stovetop, or hang it above the stove.

114. If the oven is to be used, a device that fits the oven should be employed. Spread the food on the trays in single layers, and put the device into the oven. The temperature of the oven demands attention in this method. Only a very moderate heat may be applied at first, 110 degrees Fahrenheit being considered the ideal temperature for beginning. As it is difficult to hold an oven at such a low temperature if a fire is burning, the oven door should be left open to admit air. The temperature of the oven of a coal stove in which the fire is banked or is being allowed to go out is usually ideal for drying foods. If desired, the heat of an oven may be gradually increased to about 180 degrees as the food dries; but the application of greater heat is liable to scorch the food and injure its flavor. The food must be turned often to permit it to dry evenly.

114. If you plan to use the oven, make sure to use a device that fits it properly. Arrange the food on the trays in a single layer, then place the device in the oven. It's important to keep an eye on the oven temperature with this method. Start with a very low heat, ideally around 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Since it's challenging to maintain such a low temperature if a fire is lit, it's best to leave the oven door slightly open to let in air. The temperature of a coal stove with a smoldering fire or one that’s cooling down is typically perfect for drying food. If you want, you can gradually raise the heat to about 180 degrees as the food dries, but be careful not to increase the heat too much, as it can scorch the food and ruin its flavor. Make sure to turn the food frequently to help it dry evenly.

115. If food is to be dried on top of the stove, the device shown in Fig. 23 will prove satisfactory. The same arrangement may be improvised by placing a metal tray over a large flat vessel of water. Place the food to be dried in a single layer on the tray over the water. Let the water boil and keep it boiling, and turn the food frequently so that the heat will be applied to all sides. Continue this process until the food is leathery, when it may be stored.

115. If you want to dry food on the stove, the device shown in Fig. 23 works well. You can also create a similar setup by putting a metal tray over a large pot of water. Lay the food you want to dry in a single layer on the tray above the water. Bring the water to a boil and keep it boiling, turning the food regularly so that heat reaches all sides. Keep this up until the food is leathery, at which point it can be stored.

116. If food is to be dried in a rack suspended above the stove, a rack like that shown in Fig. 24 should be used. Cover the trays in the rack with a single layer of food, and dry it to the leathery stage, when it may be removed and stored. In using this device, only a coal or a wood stove is practical. When the heat coming from the stove is not great, the rack may be allowed to come close to it, and when the heat is intense the rack may be drawn up. Regulating the distance of the rack from the stove will tend to keep the food at a uniform temperature and allow it to dry evenly, especially when the food is turned from time to time.

116. If you want to dry food on a rack above the stove, use a rack like the one shown in Fig. 24. Spread the food in a single layer on the trays and dry it until it reaches a leathery texture, at which point it can be taken out and stored. This method works best with either a coal or wood stove. If the heat from the stove isn’t very strong, you can position the rack close to it; if it’s really hot, pull the rack higher up. Adjusting the distance of the rack from the stove will help maintain an even temperature and allow the food to dry consistently, especially if you turn the food occasionally.

117. ELECTRIC-FAN DRYING METHOD.--If a house is wired for electricity, drying foods by means of the air-currents generated by a moving electric fan is a simple matter. Use devices like those required for the sun and oven-drying methods. Spread the foods to be dried on the trays in a single thin layer, and arrange them so that the air from the electric fan will blow over them. Turn the trays as the food dries, so that one part does not dry sooner than another; also, turn the food frequently so as to expose all parts alike. If the fan can be placed so as to blow across a stove and thus blow heated air on the food, it will dry more quickly. A very warm kitchen is an excellent place in which to do the work with an electric fan, as the combination of air and heat does the work more rapidly than either one used alone.

117. ELECTRIC-FAN DRYING METHOD.--If your house has electricity, drying foods using the airflow from a moving electric fan is easy. Use the same equipment as for sun and oven drying. Spread the foods you want to dry on trays in a single, thin layer, and arrange them so that the air from the electric fan blows over them. Rotate the trays as the food dries, so that no part dries faster than the others; also, turn the food often to ensure all parts are dried evenly. If you can position the fan to blow across a stove, it will send heated air onto the food, speeding up the drying process. A warm kitchen works great for this method since the combination of air and heat dries the food faster than using either one alone.

118. COMBINATION DRYING METHODS.--A combination of any of the drying methods mentioned may be used effectively. Drying may be started in the sun and completed in the oven, or it may be started with an electric fan and completed in the sun or the oven. Any means whereby the time required for drying may be shortened is advantageous.

118. COMBINATION DRYING METHODS.--Any combination of the drying methods mentioned can be used effectively. You can start drying in the sun and finish it in the oven, or begin with an electric fan and finish in the sun or the oven. Any method that reduces the drying time is beneficial.


DIRECTIONS FOR DRYING VEGETABLES AND FRUITS

119. PREPARATION OF FOODS FOR DRYING.--The correct preparation of the foods before drying is very important. The thinner and smaller the pieces to be dried are cut, the more quickly may the process be completed. Any skins or hulls that would prevent the rapid evaporation of moisture from the food must be removed or broken, and every raw food that is to be dried must first be immersed in salt water made in the proportion of 1 teaspoonful of salt to each quart of water, as this prevents discoloring to a great extent.

119. PREPARATION OF FOODS FOR DRYING.--Properly getting the foods ready before drying is really important. The smaller and thinner the pieces are cut, the faster the drying process can happen. Any skins or hulls that could slow down the evaporation of moisture from the food should be removed or broken apart, and every raw food that’s going to be dried should first be soaked in a saltwater solution made with 1 teaspoon of salt for every quart of water, as this helps prevent discoloration significantly.

120. STRING BEANS.--Beans for drying should be selected while they are young and tender. Wash them and remove the strings if this is necessary. Cut them in half, lengthwise, with a sharp knife. Drop them into salt water, remove, and spread on the drying trays. Dry by any method selected.

120. STRING BEANS.--Choose beans for drying when they're young and tender. Wash them and take off the strings if needed. Cut them in half, lengthwise, with a sharp knife. Place them in salt water, take them out, and lay them on the drying trays. Dry using any method you prefer.

121. CORN.--Corn that is to be dried should be at the dough stage; younger corn contains too much water for good results. Prepare the corn by husking it and removing the silk. Then blanch it in boiling water for 5 minutes, after which cut off the grains close to the cob with a sharp knife. Spread these on the drying trays and proceed according to the method desired.

121. CORN.--Corn meant for drying should be at the dough stage; younger corn has too much moisture for optimal results. Start by husking the corn and removing the silk. Next, blanch it in boiling water for 5 minutes, then cut the kernels off the cob close to the surface with a sharp knife. Spread the kernels on the drying trays and continue with the method you choose.

122. GREENS.--Wash the greens thoroughly. Cut across the leaves several times. Drop them into salt water, remove, and spread on the drying trays. Dry by any method selected.

122. GREENS.--Wash the greens well. Cut the leaves into strips several times. Immerse them in salt water, take them out, and lay them on the drying trays. Dry using any method you prefer.

123. TUBER AND ROOT VEGETABLES.--Irish potatoes, sweet potatoes, carrots, parsnips, and even onions may be successfully dried. First peel or scrape them. Then slice or cut them into small pieces. Drop them into salt water, remove from the water, and spread them on the drying trays. Dry them by the method selected.

123. TUBER AND ROOT VEGETABLES.--Irish potatoes, sweet potatoes, carrots, parsnips, and even onions can be dried successfully. First, peel or scrape them. Then slice or cut them into small pieces. Soak them in salt water, remove them from the water, and spread them out on the drying trays. Dry them using your preferred method.

124. SMALL FRUITS.--Berries, cherries, and other small fruits may be dried, but since they contain considerable water, the drying is not accomplished very rapidly. Ripe, firm fruit should be selected and cleaned. Cherries should have the seeds, or pits, removed. Such fruits must be dried as quickly as possible, or they will spoil in the process.

124. SMALL FRUITS.--Berries, cherries, and other small fruits can be dried, but since they have a lot of moisture, the drying process takes some time. Choose ripe, firm fruit and clean it thoroughly. Make sure to remove the seeds or pits from cherries. These fruits need to be dried quickly; otherwise, they will spoil during the process.

125. APPLES, QUINCES, AND PEARS.--In order to dry apples, quinces, and pears, wash, peel, core, and cut the fruit into eighths. Put the peeled fruit into the salt water and keep it there until all are peeled and cut and ready to dry. Then spread the cut pieces in a thin layer on the drying trays and proceed according to the method desired.

125. APPLES, QUINCES, AND PEARS.--To dry apples, quinces, and pears, wash, peel, core, and slice the fruit into eighths. Soak the peeled fruit in salt water and keep it there until all the pieces are peeled, cored, and ready for drying. Then spread the slices in a single layer on the drying trays and follow the desired method.

126. PEACHES AND APRICOTS.--Peaches and apricots are most easily dried with the skin on. Wash them thoroughly and, in the case of peaches, rub the fuzz off the skins. Cut the fruit into halves, remove the seeds, or stones, and drop the halves into salt water and keep them there until they are ready to be placed on the drying trays. Dry by any process desired.

126. PEACHES AND APRICOTS.--Peaches and apricots are easiest to dry with the skin on. Wash them well and, for peaches, rub off the fuzz from the skins. Cut the fruit in half, remove the seeds or pits, and place the halves in salt water, keeping them there until you're ready to put them on the drying trays. Dry using any method you prefer.


STORING AND COOKING DRIED FOODS

127. When foods are taken from the various drying devices to be stored, they still contain a very small quantity of moisture. This moisture, however, is not distributed evenly, because some of the pieces of food are larger than others, or some have been exposed more than others to heat or air in drying. To offset this unequal drying, the containers in which the foods are to be stored should not be closed permanently as soon as the food is put into them. Rather, once a day, for about 3 days, the food should be poured from one container into another and back again several times. This will mix all the food and distribute the moisture equally.

127. When food is taken from the various drying devices for storage, it still contains a small amount of moisture. However, this moisture is not evenly distributed because some pieces of food are larger than others or some have been exposed to heat or air more during the drying process. To balance out this uneven drying, the containers used for storing the food should not be sealed permanently right after filling them. Instead, once a day for about three days, the food should be poured from one container to another and back again several times. This will mix the food and distribute the moisture evenly.

128. The object in storing dried foods is to keep them as dry as possible; that is, not to allow them to absorb moisture from the air. The best containers in which they may be placed are those coated with paraffin. Paper bags or boxes may be prepared in the home by dipping them into paraffin, although heavy paper containers already covered with paraffin may be bought in supply stores. Heavy paper or cloth bags may be used, provided they are stored in a dry place where there is no danger from rats and mice. Containers of any kind should be securely tied before storing them permanently. Bags and boxes of dried food are preferably suspended from rafters in an attic, but if this is not possible a rack or a bin located in a place that is not damp will answer.

128. The goal of storing dried foods is to keep them as dry as possible, which means preventing them from absorbing moisture from the air. The best containers for this purpose are those coated with paraffin. You can prepare paper bags or boxes at home by dipping them in paraffin, although you can also buy heavy paper containers that are already coated with paraffin in supply stores. Heavy paper or cloth bags can be used, as long as they are kept in a dry place where there's no risk from rats and mice. All containers should be securely tied before being stored long-term. Ideally, bags and boxes of dried food should be hung from rafters in an attic; however, if that's not an option, a rack or bin in a non-damp area will work as well.

It is well, in storing dried foods, to use containers that will hold only a small quantity of food, so that when some is taken out to be cooked a large amount will not be exposed. It is best to store just enough for a meal or two in each container.

It’s a good idea to use containers that only hold a small amount of dried foods, so that when you take some out to cook, a large quantity isn’t exposed. It’s best to store just enough for one or two meals in each container.

129. Before dried foods are cooked, as much as possible of the water evaporated in drying should be restored. In order to do this, soaking is necessary. The dried food should be put into cold salt water made in the proportion of 1 teaspoonful of salt to 1 quart of water and soaked for at least 1/2 hour. The salt water seems to help restore the original color of the food. When dried vegetables are to be cooked, they should be cooked in the salt water in which they are soaked; when dried fruits are to be cooked, the salt water should be poured off and fresh water used. Long, slow cooking at a low temperature is better for all kinds of dried foods than rapid cooking. The fireless cooker will be found valuable for cooking dried foods.

129. Before cooking dried foods, it's important to restore as much of the water that was lost during drying as possible. To do this, soaking is necessary. The dried food should be placed in cold saltwater made by mixing 1 teaspoon of salt with 1 quart of water and soaked for at least 30 minutes. The saltwater helps bring back the original color of the food. When cooking dried vegetables, use the saltwater in which they were soaked; for dried fruits, drain the saltwater and use fresh water instead. Cooking dried foods slowly at a low temperature is better than cooking them quickly. A fireless cooker can be very useful for making dried foods.


CANNING AND DRYING


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) Give three reasons for canning food.

(1) Provide three reasons for preserving food through canning.

(2) What foods may be canned?

(2) What foods can be canned?

(3) (a) How may satisfactory canning equipment be provided at little or no cost? (b) What metals are not good for canning or preserving kettles?

(3) (a) How can we get decent canning equipment for little or no cost? (b) Which metals are not suitable for canning or preserving kettles?

(4) (a) What are the requirements for satisfactory types of jars? (b) What are the qualities of good jar rubbers?

(4) (a) What are the requirements for acceptable types of jars? (b) What are the characteristics of good jar rubbers?

(5) What kind of tin cans should be used for canning fruits or vegetables that contain acid?

(5) What type of tin cans should be used for canning fruits or vegetables with acid?

(6) (a) Why should care be exercised in the selection of foods to be canned? (b) What points must be considered in the selection of foods for canning?

(6) (a) Why should we be careful when choosing foods to can? (b) What factors should we think about when selecting foods for canning?

(7) Why do canned foods spoil?

(7) Why do canned foods go bad?

(8) How may canned foods be prevented from spoiling?

(8) How can we stop canned foods from going bad?

(9) (a) What are spores? (b) What connection have spores with the spoiling of canned food?

(9) (a) What are spores? (b) How are spores related to the spoilage of canned food?

(10) Mention three things that assist in the keeping of canned foods.

(10) Name three things that help preserve canned foods.

(11) (a) How should jar covers and rubbers be treated in the open-kettle canning method? (b) Describe the filling and closing of jars in this method.

(11) (a) How should jar lids and seals be handled in the open-kettle canning method? (b) Explain how to fill and seal jars using this method.

(12) (a) Describe the utensil used for processing in the one-period cold-pack canning method. (b) How should jars, covers, and rubbers be treated in this method?

(12) (a) Describe the tool used for processing in the one-period cold-pack canning method. (b) How should jars, lids, and gaskets be handled in this method?

(13) (a) How are foods blanched and scalded, and why are blanching and scalding done? (b) How are foods cold-dipped, and why is cold-dipping done?

(13) (a) How are foods blanched and scalded, and why are blanching and scalding done? (b) How are foods cold-dipped, and why is cold-dipping done?

(14) (a) How should foods be packed in jars in the cold-pack canning method? (b) How should the rubber and cover be adjusted before processing? (c) When should you begin to count the boiling time for food that is being processed in the water bath?

(14) (a) How should you pack foods into jars using the cold-pack canning method? (b) How should you adjust the rubber and lid before processing? (c) When do you start counting the boiling time for food being processed in the water bath?

(15) (a) How and when should jars be closed in the cold-pack method? (b) How should jars of food be cooled?

(15) (a) When and how should jars be sealed using the cold-pack method? (b) How should jars of food be cooled down?

(16) (a) How should jars of food be treated for storage? (b) How should they be stored?

(16) (a) How should food jars be handled for storage? (b) How should they be organized?

(17) Mention some advantages of dried foods over fresh or canned ones.

(17) List some benefits of dried foods compared to fresh or canned options.

(18) What important points should be considered in the process of drying food?

(18) What key factors should be taken into account when drying food?

(19) What are the proportions of salt and water into which foods that discolor are placed before they are canned or dried?

(19) What are the ratios of salt and water used for foods that discolor before they are canned or dried?

(20) What precautions should be observed in the storing of dried foods?

(20) What precautions should be taken when storing dried foods?






JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, AND PICKLING

VALUE OF JELLIES, PRESERVES, AND PICKLES

1. Like canning and drying, JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, and PICKLING are methods of preparing perishable foods to resist decomposition and change. When treated by any of these three processes, fruits and vegetables will keep for long periods of time and will thus be ready for use during the seasons when they cannot be obtained fresh. The preservation of food by making it into jellies, preserves, and pickles does not, as in the case of canning, depend on the sterilization of the product, but rather on the use of certain ingredients that act as preservatives. These include sugar, spices, salt, and vinegar, all of which are considered harmless preservatives in both the home and the commercial preparation of foods.

1. Just like canning and drying, JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, and PICKLING are ways to prepare perishable foods so they resist spoilage and change. When fruits and vegetables go through any of these three processes, they can last a long time and will be available for use during seasons when they can’t be found fresh. The preservation of food through jellies, preserves, and pickles doesn’t rely on sterilizing the product like in canning, but instead uses certain ingredients that act as preservatives. These include sugar, spices, salt, and vinegar, all considered safe preservatives for both home and commercial food preparation.

2. The making of jelly, preserves, and pickles may seem like an extravagance in the expenditure of money for materials, as well as of time and energy on the part of the housewife. Whether this is the case or not is a matter that must be decided by the housewife herself. If these foods are not of enough value to her in the preparation of meals and the feeding of her family to make it worth her while to use her time and materials in storing them for winter use, then it is not wise for her to prepare them. But foods so preserved usually have sufficient merit to warrant the expenditure of the time and the money required in their making.

2. Making jelly, preserves, and pickles might seem like a luxury when it comes to spending money on ingredients, as well as the time and effort involved for the homemaker. Whether this is true or not is something the homemaker must decide for herself. If these foods aren't valuable enough for her in meal preparation and feeding her family to justify the time and resources spent on making them for winter, then it wouldn’t be wise for her to make them. However, these preserved foods generally have enough benefits to justify the time and money needed to create them.

3. In the first place, it will often be necessary to throw away material that would make excellent jelly or jam unless the sugar can be supplied and the time given to make this material into something that is edible and at the same time attractive. As is well known, all through the canning season, there is some material, which may have been intended for canning, but which, for some reason, cannot be used in that way. Such material should be utilized in the preparation of these foods. For instance, some of the berries and other fruits bought for canning may be found to be too ripe to make a good-looking product, but may be very satisfactory for the making of jars or jellies. Then, too, if the open-kettle method of canning is used, there is almost certain to be a superfluous amount of juice that would be wasted if it were not used in the making of jelly. Such material need not necessarily be used at the time, for it may be canned and then made up later at some more convenient time.

3. First, you'll often need to discard ingredients that could make great jelly or jam unless you have the sugar and time to turn them into something tasty and visually appealing. Throughout the canning season, there are always ingredients that might have been meant for canning, but for some reason, can't be used that way. These ingredients should be put to good use in making these foods. For example, some of the berries and fruits bought for canning might be too ripe to create an attractive product, but they can still work well for making jars or jellies. Also, if you're using the open-kettle method of canning, you'll likely have excess juice that would go to waste if not used for jelly. This material doesn't have to be processed right away; it can be canned and then turned into jelly later when it's more convenient.

In addition to material of this kind, there is often a surplus of vegetables and fruits on hand, particularly if one has access to a garden. Much of this can be canned and dried, but what is not desired for these purposes might be wasted if it were not made up into appetizing jellies, preserves, and pickles.

In addition to this kind of material, there’s often an excess of vegetables and fruits available, especially if you have a garden. A lot of this can be canned or dried, but what isn’t wanted for those purposes could go to waste if it’s not turned into tasty jellies, preserves, and pickles.

4. Even though it were not necessary to consider the matter of waste and the utilizing of surplus fruits and vegetables, there would still be sufficient reason for the making of jellies, preserves, and pickles, because these foods, when properly prepared, have great value in the meal. Jellies and preserves, because of the large quantity of sugar used in them, are foods high in carbohydrate. In view of this fact, they should be considered as a part of the meal in which they are served, instead of being used extravagantly or regarded as something extra in an already sufficiently large menu.

4. Even if it wasn’t necessary to think about waste and using leftover fruits and vegetables, there would still be plenty of reasons to make jellies, preserves, and pickles. These foods, when made correctly, add great value to meals. Jellies and preserves are high in carbohydrates due to the large amount of sugar used in them. Because of this, they should be viewed as part of the meal they accompany, rather than being treated as an extravagance or something extra in an already ample menu.

Besides their importance in food value, they should have a place in the diet because they stimulate the appetite through their attractive colors and delicious flavors. The familiar fact that a child will refuse to eat plain bread and butter, but will accept the same piece when it has been made attractive by the addition of a little jam, argues much for the use of foods of this sort in children's diet. As it is with children, so it is to a large extent with adults. During the winter months, when fruits and fresh vegetables are scarce and expensive, practically every one finds jellies and preserves appetizing, for these things, in a measure, take the place of the foods that are difficult to procure.

Besides their importance in nutrition, these foods should be included in the diet because they enhance appetite with their vibrant colors and tasty flavors. It's a well-known fact that a child will refuse to eat plain bread and butter but will happily accept the same piece when it's made appealing with a little jam. This strongly supports the idea of including such foods in children's diets. The same principle applies to adults as well. During the winter months, when fruits and fresh vegetables are hard to find and pricey, almost everyone finds jellies and preserves delicious, as they somewhat substitute for the foods that are harder to get.

5. Not so much can be said of the various kinds of pickles, as they are not so valuable in the diet from the standpoint of food values. They are made from fruits and vegetables, as are jellies and preserves, but the preservatives used in their preparation are vinegar and spices. In addition to having no food value, such ingredients produce overstimulation and irritation in the alimentary tract, toughen the cellulose in the foods used, and consequently often cause indigestion and various gastric disturbances. For these reasons, pickles should not be included in the diet of children. However, because of the stimulation they produce in the stomach, foods of this kind, if taken in small quantities, are properly served as appetizers, and can be eaten by normal adults without fear of digestive disturbances. Then, too, as every one who has meals to prepare knows, they are valuable for relieving monotony in the diet, a point that should not be overlooked.

5. Not much can be said about the different types of pickles, as they aren't very valuable in terms of nutrition. They're made from fruits and vegetables, like jellies and preserves, but they use vinegar and spices as preservatives. Besides lacking nutritional value, these ingredients can overstimulate and irritate the digestive system, make the cellulose in the foods tougher, and often lead to indigestion and various stomach issues. For these reasons, pickles shouldn't be part of children's diets. However, because of the stimulation they provide in the stomach, these foods can be served as appetizers in small amounts and can be consumed by healthy adults without worry about digestive problems. Also, as anyone who prepares meals knows, they can help break the monotony of meals, which is an important point not to overlook.

6. Because the preservation of food in jellies, preserves, and pickles is accomplished by the use of certain preservatives instead of by the sterilization of the food, as in canning, these preparations do not mold or spoil readily. Therefore, containers of a different nature from those used in canning may be used to store these foods. Jars having tightly sealed covers are not required, but such containers as wide-necked bottles, stone jars or crocks, glasses, etc. may be utilized for this purpose. In fact, containers of almost any description may be used for jellies, preserves, and pickles. They should, of course, be sealed in some way to prevent the entrance of bacteria, and various methods of accomplishing this have been devised. A very satisfactory way consists in pouring melted paraffin over the top of the food and then covering the container with a piece of heavy paper and tying this on securely with cord.

6. Since food preservation in jellies, preserves, and pickles relies on certain preservatives instead of sterilizing the food like in canning, these items don’t easily mold or spoil. This means you can use different types of containers than those used in canning to store these foods. You don’t need jars with tightly sealed lids; wide-mouth bottles, stone jars, crocks, glasses, and so on can be used instead. In fact, almost any type of container can work for jellies, preserves, and pickles. They should be sealed somehow to keep out bacteria, and there are various methods to do this. A very effective method is to pour melted paraffin over the top of the food, then cover the container with a piece of heavy paper and secure it tightly with string.

7. Since jellies, preserves, and pickles occupy a place of importance in the diet and at the same time provide an opportunity to utilize material that might otherwise be wasted, they are entitled to a certain amount of attention from the housewife. To equip her with the knowledge she needs for this work and give her practice in jelly making, preserving, and pickling, the details of these processes are taken up, step by step, in this Section.

7. Since jellies, preserves, and pickles are important in our diet and also offer a chance to use ingredients that might otherwise go to waste, they deserve some attention from the homemaker. To provide her with the knowledge she needs for this task and give her hands-on experience in making jellies, preserving, and pickling, this section will cover the details of these processes step by step.


JELLY MAKING

PRINCIPLES OF JELLY MAKING

8. JELLY MAKING consists in cooking fruit juice with sugar until, upon cooling, it will solidify, or jell. While this is not a difficult nor a complicated process, there are some housewives who do not have success with it. Often the result may be very good when a certain fruit is used, whereas it may be entirely unsatisfactory at another time, even though the same fruit is used and practically the same procedure is followed. If the best results are to be assured in jelly making, the principles that are involved in this process must first be thoroughly understood and then the correct procedure must be painstakingly followed out.

8. JELLY MAKING involves cooking fruit juice with sugar until it solidifies, or jells, as it cools. While this process isn't difficult or complicated, some home cooks struggle with it. Sometimes the result can be great when using a particular fruit, but it may turn out completely unsatisfactory at another time, even if the same fruit is used and nearly the same method is followed. To guarantee the best results in jelly making, it's essential to first have a clear understanding of the principles involved in the process and then carefully follow the correct procedure.

9. To solidify properly and thus become a desirable jelly, the fruit juice that is used for this purpose must have the following characteristics and treatment: (1) it must contain certain jelly-making properties; (2) it must be extracted properly; (3) it must be combined with the correct proportion of sugar; and (4) it must be cooked the proper length of time. There are, of course, numerous degrees of solidity of jelly, varying from that which will barely retain its shape to that which is very tough and hard, but neither extreme is desirable. To be right, the jelly should be firm enough to stand up well, but should be tender and soft when a spoon is cut into it.

9. To set correctly and become a desirable jelly, the fruit juice used for this must have the following characteristics and treatment: (1) it needs to have specific jelly-making properties; (2) it should be extracted properly; (3) it must be mixed with the right amount of sugar; and (4) it has to be cooked for the appropriate amount of time. There are, of course, various levels of firmness in jelly, ranging from one that barely holds its shape to one that is very tough and hard, but neither extreme is ideal. The right jelly should be firm enough to hold its shape well but tender and soft when a spoon is dipped into it.

10. Fruit is the principal ingredient in the making of jelly, as it is the source from which the juice is obtained. Such imperfections in fruits as poor shape or unattractive appearance do not count in this matter, since only the juice is used; but they must contain jelly-making properties in order that jelly can be made from them.

10. Fruit is the main ingredient in making jelly, as it’s the source of the juice. Flaws in the fruit, like bad shape or unappealing looks, don’t matter here, since only the juice is used; however, they must have jelly-making qualities for jelly to be made from them.

Green or slightly unripe fruits are better for jelly making than fruits that have become ripe. In fact, when in this immature state, fruits may be used to make jelly, whereas the same fruits, when perfectly ripe, often will not make jelly at all, or, if they do, will produce a jelly that is inferior in quality.

Green or slightly unripe fruits are better for making jelly than fruits that are fully ripe. In fact, when in this immature state, fruits can be used to make jelly, while the same fruits, when completely ripe, often won't make jelly at all, or if they do, will result in a jelly that's of lesser quality.

11. The chief requirement of fruits that are to be used for jelly making is that they contain acid and pectin. Pectin is the real jelly-making property of fruits. When it is in the presence of acid and combined with the correct proportion of sugar and the combination is properly boiled, a desirable jelly is the result. Without pectin, however, it is impossible to make the juice solidify, or jell. Pectin is closely related to the carbohydrates, but as it does not yield heat energy nor build tissue, its food value is not considered. In this respect, it is like the cellulose of fruits and vegetables.

11. The main requirement for fruits used in making jelly is that they have acid and pectin. Pectin is the key jelly-making component of fruits. When it’s combined with acid and the right amount of sugar and properly boiled, it results in a great jelly. However, without pectin, the juice can’t solidify or jell. Pectin is closely related to carbohydrates, but since it doesn’t provide heat energy or help build tissue, its nutritional value isn’t taken into account. In this way, it’s similar to the cellulose found in fruits and vegetables.

It is because green fruits contain more pectin than do ripe fruits that they are more suitable for jelly making. The lack of either acid or pectin need not, however, prevent the making of jelly from fruits, such as sweet fruits, that contain other jelly-making properties, for either or both may be supplied from some other source. In other words, jelly may be made from any fruit that will yield juice and flavor.

It’s because green fruits have more pectin than ripe fruits that they're better for making jelly. However, the absence of either acid or pectin doesn’t have to stop you from making jelly from sweet fruits that have other properties needed for jelly-making, since you can get either or both from another source. In other words, you can make jelly from any fruit that produces juice and flavor.


EQUIPMENT FOR JELLY MAKING

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

12. NECESSARY EQUIPMENT.--In the making of jelly, as in the preparation of many other foods, numerous utensils will be found convenient and may, if desired, be supplied to make the work easier. However, the necessary ones are comparatively few in number and, for the most part, are found in almost every kitchen. In Fig. 1 are shown assembled practically all the equipment used in the making of jelly, and if a housewife is provided with these things or substitutes for them, she will be well equipped for her work.

12. NECESSARY EQUIPMENT.--When making jelly, like with many other foods, you'll find that having various utensils is helpful and can make the process easier if you choose to use them. However, the essential tools are relatively few and are usually found in almost every kitchen. In Fig. 1, you can see almost all the equipment needed for making jelly, and if a home cook has these items or suitable alternatives, they will be well-prepared for the task.

13. KETTLES.--As will be observed, two kettles are required in jelly making. The larger one is used for cooking the fruit, and the smaller one, to cook the juice and the sugar. These should have a perfectly smooth surface, and may be made of almost any material used for such utensils, except tin or iron. These two metals are undesirable, as they are liable to lend to the jelly a disagreeable flavor and in all probability an unattractive color. The one used to cook the fruit should generally be a little larger than the other. As about 6 glassfuls of jelly may be cooked at one time, the kettle in which the juice is boiled should be of adequate size to cook this amount without danger of its boiling over. When fruit juice and sugar are boiled together, the mixture often boils up and runs over if the vessel is not large enough.

13. KETTLES.--As noted, two kettles are necessary for making jelly. The larger one is for cooking the fruit, while the smaller one is for cooking the juice and sugar. These should have a perfectly smooth surface and can be made from almost any material suitable for such utensils, except tin or iron. These two metals are not ideal because they can give the jelly an unpleasant taste and likely an unattractive color. The kettle used for the fruit should generally be a bit larger than the other. Since about 6 cups of jelly can be made at one time, the kettle for boiling the juice needs to be large enough to handle this amount without risking it boiling over. When fruit juice and sugar are boiled together, the mixture often bubbles up and spills over if the container isn't big enough.

14. JELLY BAG.--The jelly bag, which is used for straining the boiled fruit and thus obtaining the juice, may be a home-made one or, as shown in the illustration, one that is purchased for the purpose. If the bag is made at home, a heavy, closely woven material, such as flannel, should be selected, so as to prevent the tiny particles of fruit from passing through with the juice. A liquid strained in this manner will be much clearer and will make better looking jelly than that which has been run through a coarse material, such as cheesecloth. The juice can be strained very conveniently if the bag is attached to a wire arrangement, like the one shown, or to an upright standard that can be fastened to a chair or a table, for then the bag is held securely over the vessel into which the juice drips. Sometimes, especially when more than one extraction of the juice is to be made, the first extraction is made by means of a strainer or a colander and the juice thus obtained is then strained through the bag.

14. JELLY BAG.--The jelly bag, used for straining boiled fruit to get the juice, can be homemade or, as shown in the illustration, one that you buy. If you're making the bag at home, choose a heavy, tightly woven material like flannel to keep tiny fruit particles from getting through with the juice. Juice strained this way will be much clearer and will make nicer-looking jelly than juice run through a coarse material like cheesecloth. You can strain the juice conveniently if the bag is attached to a wire setup, like the one shown, or to a sturdy stand that can be secured to a chair or table. This way, the bag stays securely over the container where the juice drips into. Sometimes, especially when you need to extract juice more than once, the first extraction is done using a strainer or colander, and then that juice is strained again through the bag.

15. ADDITIONAL UTENSILS.--As accurate measurements are absolutely essential in jelly making, a measuring cup should be included in the equipment. Then, too, a quart measure will be found very convenient, especially if large quantities of materials are to be cooked at one time. A large spoon or two for stirring, skimming, and testing should also be provided. The spoon used for skimming will produce better results if the bowl contains holes that will permit the juice to drop back into the vessel, for then none of the juice will be wasted.

15. ADDITIONAL UTENSILS.--Since accurate measurements are crucial for making jelly, you should have a measuring cup as part of your tools. Additionally, a quart measuring cup will be very handy, especially when you're cooking large amounts of ingredients at once. You should also have one or two large spoons for stirring, skimming, and testing. The spoon used for skimming will work better if it has holes in the bowl, allowing the juice to fall back into the pot, ensuring that none of the juice gets wasted.

16. CONTAINERS FOR JELLY.--Various types of receptacles in which to keep jelly are in use, some turning out more attractive molds than others. The shape of the mold, however, is a matter of minor importance. Almost any wide-mouthed glass receptacle with comparatively smooth sides will do very well, since the sealing of jelly is not a difficult thing to do. Therefore, new receptacles should not be purchased if there is a supply of any suitable kind on hand, for many other containers besides purchased jelly glasses may be used for this purpose. The most convenient type, which may be bought in any store selling kitchen utensils, is that shown in Fig. 1. As will be observed, these are somewhat broad and not very tall. A mold of jelly turned from a tall, narrow glass does not stand up so well as that turned from a flat, wide one. Then, too, a tall glass is much more likely to tip and spill than a more shallow one.

16. CONTAINERS FOR JELLY.--There are many types of containers for storing jelly, some making more attractive molds than others. The shape of the mold is not that important. Almost any wide-mouthed glass container with smooth sides works well, since sealing jelly isn’t difficult. Therefore, you don’t need to buy new containers if you already have suitable ones. Many other containers besides purchased jelly glasses can be used for this. The most convenient type, which you can find in any kitchen supply store, is shown in Fig. 1. These are somewhat broad and not very tall. A jelly mold made from a tall, narrow glass doesn’t hold up as well as one made from a flat, wide glass. Plus, a tall glass is more likely to tip and spill than a shallower one.

17. Metal covers that fit the tops of the glasses, like the ones shown, are the most convenient kind that can be used, but they are not an absolute necessity. In their place may be used paper caps that fit the glasses, or the tops of the glasses may be covered with paper and then tied. Before a cover of any kind is put on a glass, paraffin, several cakes of which are arranged on a plate in Fig. 1, is melted and poured in a thin layer over the top of the jelly itself.

17. Metal lids that fit over the tops of the glasses, like the ones shown, are the most convenient option, but they aren't absolutely necessary. Instead, you can use paper caps that fit the glasses, or just cover the tops with paper and tie it on. Before putting any kind of cover on a glass, melt some paraffin—several cakes of which are shown on a plate in Fig. 1—and pour it in a thin layer over the top of the jelly itself.

To designate the kind of jelly, it is advisable to label the glasses with neat labels, a box of which is included in the equipment here shown.

To label the type of jelly, it's a good idea to use neat labels on the jars, and a box of these labels is included in the equipment shown here.

18. Paraffin-covered paper cups have been recommended to take the place of jelly glasses, and while they do very well in the case of scarcity of containers they have some disadvantages. In the first place, they can be used only once, as it is impossible to wash them. In addition, it will be necessary to wait until the jelly is partly cold before pouring it into such cups, as hot jelly will melt the paraffin on the surface of the paper.

18. Paraffin-coated paper cups have been suggested as a substitute for jelly glasses, and while they work well when there’s a shortage of containers, they come with some downsides. First, they can only be used once because you can't wash them. Additionally, you'll need to let the jelly cool down a bit before pouring it into these cups, as hot jelly will melt the paraffin on the paper's surface.


PROCEDURE IN JELLY MAKING

19. When the necessary utensils have been conveniently placed and the desired fruit has been selected, the housewife may proceed at once to the work of making jelly. Each step is here outlined in the order in which it should be taken up in doing the actual work. The entire procedure should be properly followed out in order to insure the best results, and every part of the work should be carefully done so as to avoid any waste of material.

19. Once the right utensils are in place and the chosen fruit is ready, the homemaker can get started on making jelly. Each step is outlined here in the order it should be followed during the process. To achieve the best results, it’s important to adhere to the entire procedure, and every part of the job should be done carefully to prevent wasting any materials.

[Illustration: FIG. 2]

20. COOKING THE FRUIT.--Prepare the fruit in whatever way is necessary. The preparation needed will depend, of course, on the kind of fruit selected for the jelly, but usually not so much preparation is needed as in the case of canning. For instance, when crab-apple jelly is made, the stems are removed and the fruit is cut into halves or quarters, but they need not be peeled nor have the seeds taken out. Specific directions for the different varieties of fruits are given in the various recipes. The chief precaution to take in preparing the fruit, no matter what kind is used, is to see that it is thoroughly cleaned.

20. COOKING THE FRUIT.--Prepare the fruit in whatever way is necessary. The preparation needed will depend, of course, on the type of fruit chosen for the jelly, but usually not as much preparation is required as with canning. For example, when making crab-apple jelly, the stems are removed and the fruit is cut into halves or quarters, but they don’t need to be peeled or have the seeds removed. Specific instructions for the different types of fruit are provided in the various recipes. The main thing to remember when preparing the fruit, regardless of the type used, is to ensure that it is thoroughly cleaned.

With the fruit prepared, put it into a large kettle and add enough water to start the cooking and prevent scorching. Some fruits will require more water than others, especially when they must be cooked a long time in order to soften them sufficiently to extract the juice. Juicy fruits, like plums, need only the minimum amount of water, while drier fruits, such as apples, require more. Place the kettle on the stove, as in Fig. 2, and allow the fruit to cook until it is soft or is reduced to a pulp. The length of time for cooking will also depend entirely on the kind of fruit that is being used.

Once the fruit is prepared, place it in a large pot and add enough water to begin cooking and prevent it from burning. Some fruits will need more water than others, especially if they need to be cooked for a long time to become soft enough to extract the juice. Juicy fruits like plums only need a small amount of water, while drier fruits like apples need more. Put the pot on the stove, as shown in Fig. 2, and let the fruit cook until it’s soft or has turned into a pulp. The cooking time will also depend entirely on the type of fruit being used.

21. EXTRACTING JUICE.--When the fruit is thoroughly cooked, pour the pulp and the juice that has formed into the jelly bag and allow it to drip into a pan placed directly under the bag, as shown in Fig. 3. Formerly, it was the custom to let the juice drip until no more remained in the bag. This method is followed to some extent at present, but it is falling into disuse, as it is not the most economical way of extracting the juice from the pulp. More juice can be obtained and more jelly made from the same amount of fruit if three extractions instead of one are made. Make the first extraction by pouring the pulp and juice into the bag and permitting the juice to drip only until it begins to run very slowly. Then return the pulp to the kettle, add a small quantity of water, and let it boil again for a few minutes. Pour it the second time into the jelly bag, and let it drip as before. Cook it the third time in the same way, and then allow it to drip until all the juice is extracted. At this point, mix the juice from the three extractions. They should not be used separately, for they are much different in quality, the third one being not so good as the second and the second, inferior to the first. On the other hand, when all three are mixed, an excellent quality is the result, provided all conditions are correct, and a larger quantity of juice is obtained for the jelly.

21. EXTRACTING JUICE.--Once the fruit is thoroughly cooked, pour the pulp and the juice that has formed into the jelly bag and let it drip into a pan placed directly underneath the bag, as shown in Fig. 3. In the past, it was common to let the juice drip until no more was left in the bag. This method is still used to some extent today, but it's becoming less popular because it's not the most efficient way to extract juice from the pulp. You can get more juice and make more jelly from the same amount of fruit by doing three extractions instead of one. For the first extraction, pour the pulp and juice into the bag and allow the juice to drip only until it starts to run very slowly. Then put the pulp back in the kettle, add a small amount of water, and let it boil again for a few minutes. Pour it into the jelly bag a second time and let it drip as before. Cook it a third time in the same way, then let it drip until all the juice is extracted. At this point, combine the juice from the three extractions. They shouldn't be used separately because they differ significantly in quality, with the third being not as good as the second, and the second being inferior to the first. However, when all three are mixed together, the quality is excellent, assuming all conditions are right, and you'll get a larger quantity of juice for the jelly.

[Illustration: FIG. 3]

22. The quantity of juice that may be extracted depends on the quality as well as the kind of fruit. If the season is a rainy one, the fruits will be found to contain more juice than they would in a dry season. Then, too, if the fruits are picked immediately after a rain, they will contain more juice than the same fruits before the rain. The amount of juice the fruit contains determines, of course, the quantity of water that should be added in the cooking. If only one extraction is intended, 3 to 4 quarts of water may be used for 8 quarts of fruit, depending on the kind of fruit; but if three extractions are to be made, less water should be added for each extraction. In case the extracted juice contains more water than it should have, either because the fruit contains an excessive amount of water or because too much water was added to the fruit in its cooking, the superfluous water will be extracted by boiling the juice with the sugar a little longer as the jelly is being made.

22. The amount of juice you can get depends on both the quality and type of fruit. During a rainy season, fruits tend to have more juice than they do in a dry season. Also, if you pick the fruits right after rain, they'll contain more juice than they did before the rain. The juice content in the fruit affects how much water should be added during cooking. If you're only doing one extraction, you can use 3 to 4 quarts of water for every 8 quarts of fruit, depending on the fruit type; but if you plan on making three extractions, you should use less water for each one. If the extracted juice ends up with too much water, either because the fruit itself has too much water or because you added too much water while cooking, you can remove the excess water by boiling the juice with sugar a little longer while making the jelly.

It is not always necessary to have the fleshy part of fruit for jelly making, for often the skins, seeds, and cores of fruits may be cooked with water and the juice then extracted from them. Another point to remember is that the pulp from which the juice is extracted may sometimes be used for jam or marmalade. If points like these are taken into consideration, it will not be necessary to waste any part of edible fruits.

It isn’t always necessary to use the flesh of the fruit for making jelly because often the skins, seeds, and cores of fruits can be cooked with water, and the juice can be extracted from them. Another thing to keep in mind is that the pulp from which the juice is extracted can sometimes be used for jam or marmalade. If you consider these points, you won’t have to waste any part of edible fruits.

23. TESTING THE JUICE FOR PECTIN.--When the juice has been extracted from the fruit, it should be tested for pectin in order to determine whether or not it will be satisfactory for the making of jelly. A test that can be applied by the housewife is illustrated in Fig. 4. Into a tumbler, put a tablespoonful of juice and with this mix a tablespoonful of alcohol. If, upon adding the alcohol, the fruit juice turns into a gelatinous, or jelly-like, mass that may be easily gathered up on the spoon, it may be known that pectin is present. As has already been stated, the presence of this substance in fruit juice insures the fact that jelly can be made from the juice.

23. TESTING THE JUICE FOR PECTIN.--Once you’ve extracted juice from the fruit, it should be tested for pectin to see if it’s suitable for making jelly. A simple test you can do at home is shown in Fig. 4. Take a tablespoon of juice and mix it with a tablespoon of alcohol in a glass. If the juice forms a gelatinous or jelly-like mass that can be easily collected on a spoon when you add the alcohol, it means that pectin is present. As mentioned earlier, having this substance in the juice ensures that you can make jelly from it.

[Illustration: FIG. 4]

24. USING JUICE LACKING IN PECTIN.--If, in the test for pectin, the addition of alcohol to the fruit juice does not turn the juice into a jelly-like mass, pectin is not present. Such juice, or juice that contains only a small amount of pectin, will prove unsuccessful in jelly making unless some substance or juice high in pectin is added to it. The white skin from the inside of orange, lemon, or grapefruit peelings or the juice from apples, crab apples, currants, green gooseberries, or other fruit containing a large quantity of pectin may be used for this purpose. Also, commercial pectin may be purchased and used with fruits according to the directions that accompany it.

24. USING JUICE LACKING IN PECTIN.--If, when testing for pectin, adding alcohol to the fruit juice doesn’t turn it into a jelly-like substance, it means pectin isn’t present. Juice that lacks pectin or has only a small amount won’t work for making jelly unless you add a substance or juice that’s high in pectin. You can use the white skin from the inside of orange, lemon, or grapefruit peels, or the juice from apples, crab apples, currants, green gooseberries, or other fruits that have a lot of pectin for this purpose. You can also buy commercial pectin and use it with fruits following the instructions that come with it.

It is always necessary to supply pectin in some way to such fruits as strawberries, peaches, raspberries, blueberries, cherries, pears, etc. To the sweet ones, like peaches and raspberries, lemon juice or other acid fruit juice also must be added if satisfactory jelly is desired.

It’s always important to add pectin to fruits like strawberries, peaches, raspberries, blueberries, cherries, pears, and so on. For sweeter fruits like peaches and raspberries, you also need to add lemon juice or another acidic fruit juice if you want good jelly.

25. DETERMINING PROPORTION OF SUGAR.--The only other ingredient used in jelly making, besides the fruit juice, is sugar. After the juice has been strained from the fruit, the next step is to determine how much sugar must be used. This is of extreme importance, as the success of the jelly depends very largely on whether or not the correct proportion is used. If too much sugar is added to the juice, a greater quantity of jelly will result, but it will not stand up as it should when it is turned out of the glass. On the other hand, if too little sugar is used, a smaller quantity of jelly than the required amount will be made and it will be tough and sour.

25. DETERMINING PROPORTION OF SUGAR.--The only other ingredient used in making jelly, besides the fruit juice, is sugar. After straining the juice from the fruit, the next step is to figure out how much sugar to use. This is really important because the success of the jelly largely depends on using the right amount. If you add too much sugar to the juice, you’ll end up with a larger quantity of jelly, but it won’t hold its shape when you take it out of the jar. Conversely, if you use too little sugar, you’ll end up with less jelly than needed, and it will be tough and sour.

[Illustration: FIG. 5]

26. It is difficult to give the exact proportion of sugar to use with every kind of fruit, for some fruits require more than others. However, in general, 3/4 cupful of sugar to each cupful of juice, as shown in Fig. 5, will be sufficient. This is especially true if the season has been a dry one and the fruits are neither very sour nor very juicy. After a wet season or with very sour or very juicy fruits, it will usually be necessary to use 1 cupful of sugar to each cupful of juice.

26. It's hard to determine the exact amount of sugar needed for every type of fruit since some fruits need more than others. However, as a general rule, using 3/4 cup of sugar for each cup of juice, as shown in Fig. 5, should be enough. This is particularly true in dry seasons when the fruits aren't very sour or juicy. After a wet season or with fruits that are very sour or juicy, you'll typically need to use 1 cup of sugar for each cup of juice.

27. Much waste of sugar and spoiling of jelly can be avoided by the use of the test for pectin, which has just been described. After the juice and the alcohol have been mixed, pour the mixture slowly from the glass, noting how the pectin is precipitated. If it is precipitated as one lump, a cupful of sugar may be used for each cupful of juice; if in several lumps, the proportion of sugar must be reduced to approximately three-fourths the amount of juice. If the pectin is not in lumps, but is merely precipitated, the sugar should be one-half or less of the amount of the juice.

27. You can avoid wasting sugar and ruining jelly by using the pectin test described earlier. After mixing the juice with alcohol, pour the mixture slowly from the glass and observe how the pectin forms. If it clumps together in one piece, you can use one cup of sugar for each cup of juice; if it forms several clumps, you should reduce the sugar to about three-fourths of the juice amount. If the pectin doesn't clump but simply separates, use half or less of the sugar compared to the juice.

[Illustration: FIG. 6]

28. To assist in determining the correct proportion of sugar to use in the making of jelly, the hydrometer, or sirup gauge, which is explained in Canning and Drying, will be found helpful. After the juice has been extracted, mix with a small amount of it the proportion of sugar that is to be used when the jelly is cooked. Allow the sugar to dissolve completely, pour a little of the mixture into a glass or a graduate, and insert the hydrometer, as shown in Fig. 6. Regardless of the kind of juice, the hydrometer should register 25 degrees for perfect jelly. If it registers less than 25 degrees, more sugar should be added. Then if it is necessary to add either sugar or juice, the additional ingredient should be carefully measured in order that the proportions may be correct for the making of jelly. It must not be understood that a hydrometer is an actual necessity in the making of jelly, for very good jelly can be made without measuring the ingredients in this manner. However, if a hydrometer is not used, it will be necessary to apply the best judgment possible to the rules given for the proportion of ingredients used in jelly making.

28. To help determine the right amount of sugar to use for making jelly, a hydrometer, or syrup gauge, which is explained in Canning and Drying, can be very useful. After you've extracted the juice, mix a small amount of it with the sugar you plan to use when cooking the jelly. Let the sugar dissolve completely, then pour a little of the mixture into a glass or a measuring cup, and insert the hydrometer, as shown in Fig. 6. No matter what kind of juice you're using, the hydrometer should read 25 degrees for perfect jelly. If it reads less than 25 degrees, you need to add more sugar. If you need to add either sugar or juice, make sure to measure it carefully to keep the proportions correct for making jelly. It's important to note that a hydrometer isn't absolutely necessary for making jelly; you can still make very good jelly without measuring the ingredients this way. However, if you don’t use a hydrometer, you'll need to rely on your best judgment based on the guidelines for ingredient proportions in jelly making.

29. COMBINING THE JUICE AND SUGAR.--The mixing of the juice and the sugar may seem like a trivial matter, but in reality much is involved in combining these ingredients properly. It may be done in three different ways. In the first method, which is called long boiling, the sugar and the juice are mixed cold and are then allowed to come to the boiling point together. The second, which is known as mean boiling, consists in putting the cold juice on the stove, allowing it to boil about half the required time, and then adding the sugar, which has also been heated. In the third, which is known as the short-boiling method, the juice is boiled without the sugar almost the full length of time required for making the jelly, and the sugar, which has been heated, is added just before the boiling is completed.

29. COMBINING THE JUICE AND SUGAR.--Mixing the juice and sugar might seem easy, but there's actually a lot involved in getting these ingredients to work together properly. There are three different methods to do this. The first method, called long boiling, involves mixing the cold juice and sugar together and then heating them up to boiling point. The second method, known as mean boiling, involves heating the cold juice on the stove until it's about halfway through the boiling time, and then adding heated sugar to it. The third method, referred to as the short-boiling method, has the juice boiling almost the entire time needed to make the jelly without the sugar, and then adding the heated sugar just before finishing the boiling process.

30. Experience in the use of these three methods has shown their advantages and disadvantages. The first one, or the long-boiling process, has the disadvantage of losing sugar through the skimming that is always necessary in the making of jelly. In addition, the long boiling often causes the sugar to crystallize and thus produces a jelly that would not score very high. The short boiling is not entirely satisfactory, because of the difficulty in determining just when to add the sugar to the juice. The process of mean boiling, having neither of these drawbacks and usually resulting in jelly of excellent quality, is the most satisfactory and the one that is recommended.

30. Experience with these three methods has revealed their pros and cons. The first one, the long-boiling process, loses some sugar due to the skimming that's always needed when making jelly. Plus, the extended boiling can cause the sugar to crystallize, resulting in jelly that wouldn't score very high. The short boiling method isn't completely effective either, since it's tough to figure out the right moment to add the sugar to the juice. The mean boiling method avoids both issues and typically produces high-quality jelly, making it the most reliable and recommended option.

[Illustration: FIG. 7]

To carry out this method, place the sugar in a pan in a warm oven or other place where it will gradually become heated without either melting or scorching. Put the juice over the fire in a saucepan and let it boil for 5 to 8 minutes. Then, as shown in Fig. 7, slowly add the correct proportion of hot sugar to the boiling juice, stirring constantly so that the sugar will dissolve as quickly as possible.

To use this method, put the sugar in a pan in a warm oven or somewhere it can heat up gradually without melting or burning. Place the juice in a saucepan over the heat and let it boil for 5 to 8 minutes. Then, as shown in Fig. 7, slowly add the right amount of hot sugar to the boiling juice, stirring constantly to help the sugar dissolve as quickly as possible.

31. BOILING THE JUICE AND SUGAR.--The boiling of the juice, both before and after the sugar is added, should be done rapidly. During this process, it will be found that a scum will form over the top of the juice. This should be skimmed off as it forms, for it is a detriment to the jelly. As shown in Fig. 8, draw a large spoon over the top of the boiling juice from time to time and skim off the scum that rises, placing it into any small dish that is handy. It is usually advisable to do as much skimming as possible before the sugar is added, so that only a minimum amount of sugar will be lost.

31. BOILING THE JUICE AND SUGAR.--Boil the juice quickly, both before and after adding the sugar. You’ll notice a scum forming on top of the juice during this process. Make sure to skim it off as it appears because it can spoil the jelly. As shown in Fig. 8, use a large spoon to skim the scum from the surface of the boiling juice periodically, putting it into any small dish that’s handy. It's usually a good idea to do as much skimming as possible before adding the sugar to minimize sugar loss.

The length of time required to boil the juice after the sugar is added depends very largely on the way in which the boiling is carried on. If the mixture is boiled rapidly, less time will, of course, be needed than if it is boiled slowly. Therefore, no definite time can be set for the cooking. However, several tests may be resorted to in order to determine whether the sugar and juice have boiled long enough to jell when the mixture is cold.

The time it takes to boil the juice after adding the sugar really depends on how you boil it. If you boil the mixture quickly, it will obviously take less time than if you boil it slowly. So, there’s no specific time you can set for cooking. However, you can use several tests to check if the sugar and juice have boiled long enough to jell when the mixture cools down.

[Illustration: FIG. 8]

32. TESTING THE JELLY MIXTURE.--The testing of the mixture can be done in various ways, the one to select depending on the success the housewife has in using them. A means very often resorted to consists in dipping a spoonful or two of the mixture out of the kettle and pouring it on the flat surface of a cold dish. If it is cooked sufficiently, it will solidify when it is cold and will appear just like jelly. The disadvantage of this test lies in the fact that the jelly on the stove continues to boil while the test is being made, and as this takes several minutes, the jelly is likely to overboil to a considerable extent. Tests that can be performed more quickly are therefore more satisfactory.

32. TESTING THE JELLY MIXTURE.--You can test the mixture in several ways, and you should choose based on how successful you’ve been with each method. A common approach is to scoop out a spoonful or two of the mixture from the pot and pour it onto a cold dish. If it’s cooked enough, it will set as it cools and look like jelly. The downside to this method is that the jelly on the stove keeps boiling while you're testing, and since this takes a few minutes, it can easily overboil. Therefore, methods that can be done more quickly are generally better.

33. A test that invariably proves successful consists in dipping up a spoonful of the juice and allowing it to run slowly from the spoon back into the pan. If, as shown in Fig. 9, a double row of drops forms on the spoon with the last of the jelly that remains, it may be known that the cooking is finished.

33. A test that always works is to scoop up a spoonful of the juice and let it pour slowly back into the pan. If, as shown in Fig. 9, a double row of drops forms on the spoon with the last bit of jelly that’s left, you can tell that the cooking is done.

34. Another very satisfactory test is called sheeting. In the performing of this test, a spoonful of the jelly is dipped from the pan and then poured from the spoon into the pan again. If it is cooked to the proper consistency, large drops will form at the edge of the spoon and break off quickly.

34. Another really effective test is called sheeting. To perform this test, take a spoonful of the jelly from the pan and then pour it back into the pan from the spoon. If it's cooked to the right consistency, large drops will form at the edge of the spoon and fall off quickly.

35. FILLING THE GLASSES.--As soon as it has been determined that the jelly is sufficiently cooked, it should be removed from the stove. The glasses may then be filled at once. These, together with the covers, must be thoroughly cleansed before being used, and this can be done while the jelly is cooking. After being thoroughly washed, submerge them in a pan of hot water and allow them to remain there until they are to be used. Keeping them hot in this way will prevent them from cracking when the hot jelly is poured into them. Take out one glass at a time, place it on a small plate or any small dish, and, as shown in Fig. 10, pour the hot jelly into it from the pan to within 1/4 inch of the top. Fill the remaining glasses in the same way, and then set them somewhere out of a draft to cool. If, as the jelly cools, it seems to be a little bit thin, place it somewhere in the sunshine and the heat of the sun will help to thicken it.

35. FILLING THE GLASSES.--Once it’s clear that the jelly is cooked enough, take it off the stove. You can fill the glasses right away. Make sure to clean the glasses and their lids thoroughly before using them; you can do this while the jelly cooks. After washing, submerge them in a pot of hot water and let them stay there until you’re ready to use them. Keeping them hot this way will stop them from cracking when you pour in the hot jelly. Take out one glass at a time, place it on a small plate or dish, and, as shown in Fig. 10, pour the hot jelly into it, leaving about 1/4 inch from the top. Fill the other glasses the same way, then put them somewhere out of the draft to cool. If the jelly seems a bit thin as it cools, put it in the sun, and the heat will help it thicken.

[Illustration: FIG. 9] [Illustration: FIG. 10]

36. CLOSING AND STORING THE JELLY GLASSES.--The jelly should be allowed to cool completely and should then be closed for storing. The best results are obtained by putting a thin layer of paraffin over the top of the jelly in each glass before applying the cover. To do this, put into a small saucepan as much paraffin as you think will be needed to cover the jelly you have made and set this on the stove to melt. When it has melted, pour a layer about 1/8 inch thick over the surface of the jelly, as shown in Fig. 11. As soon as it cools, it will harden and thus form a protective covering for the jelly. When it is hard, cover the glass in the desired way. Covers of tin are perhaps the most satisfactory, but if these cannot be secured, heavy paper covers that fit into the glasses snugly will answer the purpose very well. In the event of not having covers of either of these kinds, cover the tops of the glasses with paper--any good wrapping paper will do--and then tie this paper securely. Just before putting the jelly away, label each glass with a neat label on which is written the name of the jelly. Then no difficulty will be experienced in selecting at once the kind of jelly desired when one is taking a glass from the place where it is stored.

36. CLOSING AND STORING THE JELLY GLASSES.--Let the jelly cool completely before sealing it for storage. For the best results, add a thin layer of paraffin on top of the jelly in each jar before putting on the lid. To do this, place enough paraffin in a small saucepan to cover the jelly you made and heat it on the stove until melted. Once melted, pour a layer about 1/8 inch thick over the jelly's surface, as shown in Fig. 11. After it cools, it will harden and form a protective layer for the jelly. Once it's hard, cover the jar as you prefer. Tin covers are probably the best option, but if you can't find those, heavy paper covers that fit snugly will work well. If you don't have either, just cover the tops of the jars with any good wrapping paper and tie it securely. Before putting the jelly away, label each jar neatly with the name of the jelly. This way, you'll easily know which type of jelly to grab from storage.

[Illustration: FIG. 11]

SCORING JELLY

37. With jelly, as with canned fruit, it is a splendid idea for every housewife to score each kind she makes, so that she can determine how it measures up in its various characteristics. If it falls below the standard, this fact should be known, so that the fault can be remedied the next time. On the other hand, extreme satisfaction is felt if it is found to score high. To assist in scoring jelly, a score card is here given, and following it each one of the characteristics is discussed.

37. Just like with canned fruit, it's a great idea for every homemaker to rate each type of jelly she makes, so she can see how it stacks up in different aspects. If it doesn't meet the standard, she should know this, so she can fix it the next time. On the other hand, there’s a strong sense of satisfaction when it scores high. To help with scoring jelly, a scorecard is provided here, followed by a discussion of each characteristic.

SCORE CARD FOR JELLY
Per Cent.
Color20
Solidity25
Flavor25
Sugar Content25
Method of Sealing5
Total100

Color.-For jelly having the proper color, 20 per cent. is given. The fruit used in the making of jelly determines to a great extent the color of the finished product, but it is possible to have a very wide difference in the colors of jelly made from the same fruit. To be right, jelly should be clear, bright, and not too dark. If the juice is boiled too long, the jelly will be darker than it should be. If pulp has been allowed to pass through the jelly bag in straining out the juice, either through squeezing the bag or using a bag that is too thin, the jelly will be found to have a cloudy appearance.

Color.-To achieve the right color in jelly, 20 percent is recommended. The type of fruit used to make the jelly largely affects the color of the final product; however, there can be significant variations in the colors of jelly made from the same fruit. Ideally, jelly should be clear, bright, and not overly dark. If the juice is boiled for too long, the jelly will turn out darker than desired. If any pulp has made its way through the jelly bag while straining the juice—either by squeezing the bag or using a bag that's too thin—the jelly will appear cloudy.

Solidity.--When jelly is turned from the glass, it should be firm enough to stand alone. If it has not been boiled long enough, it will crush down and perhaps run like sirup. If it is boiled too long or the proportion of juice to sugar is not correct, it may be tough and leathery. Jelly whose solidity is correct scores 25 per cent. in this respect.

Solidity.--When you take jelly out of the jar, it should be firm enough to hold its shape. If it hasn't been cooked long enough, it will collapse and may even run like syrup. If it's cooked too long or the ratio of juice to sugar is off, it might be tough and rubbery. Jelly that has the right solidity earns 25 percent for this quality.

Flavor.--The characteristic flavor of the fruit used in making jelly should be retained as much as possible, and when this is the case 25 per cent. is given to the product. The flavor of the jelly is therefore dependent on the flavor of the fruit. In addition, the flavor depends on the amount of sugar used, the amount of acid in the fruit, and the length of time consumed by the boiling. Jellies boiled too long will be strong in flavor.

Flavor.--The unique taste of the fruit used to make jelly should be preserved as much as possible, and when this is achieved, it contributes 25 percent to the final product. Consequently, the taste of the jelly relies heavily on the fruit's flavor. Additionally, the taste is influenced by the amount of sugar added, the acidity of the fruit, and the duration of boiling. Jellies that are boiled for too long will have an intense flavor.

Sugar Content.--The sugar content of jelly should be determined by the amount of acid that must be sweetened. An insufficient amount of sugar will result in tough, sour jelly, while too large a quantity will make the jelly taffy-like. The correct amount of sugar, which produces the right degree of sweetness, receives a score of 25 per cent.

Sugar Content.--The sugar content of jelly should be determined by the amount of acid that needs to be balanced with sweetness. Not enough sugar will lead to tough, sour jelly, while too much sugar will make the jelly chewy like taffy. The right amount of sugar, which provides the perfect level of sweetness, gets a score of 25 percent.

Method of Sealing.--The method of sealing may seem like a matter of little importance, but if jelly is not sealed properly, it will not be in good condition when it is to be served. To score in this respect, for which 5 per cent. is given, the jelly should be covered with paraffin and then closed with a cover or with paper in order to exclude the dust and dirt.

Method of Sealing.--The sealing method might seem trivial, but if the jelly isn't sealed correctly, it won't be in good condition when served. To score in this area, which is worth 5 percent, the jelly should be covered with paraffin and then sealed with a lid or paper to keep out dust and dirt.

RECIPES FOR JELLY

38. Recipes for the kinds of jelly usually made are here given. If the directions given in the procedure for jelly making are thoroughly mastered and then applied to these recipes, the housewife will experience very little difficulty in making any of these varieties. Other jellies may, without doubt, be made by combining the proper fruits. All that has to be done in order to determine whether a certain fruit juice or combination of fruit juices will make jelly is to apply the test for pectin already explained. Whatever quantity of jelly is desired may be made, but usually it can be handled best if not more than 6 glassfuls are made at one time.

38. Here are some recipes for the types of jelly typically made. If you thoroughly understand the jelly-making process and apply it to these recipes, you shouldn’t have much trouble making any of these varieties. You can definitely create other jellies by mixing the right fruits. To find out if a particular fruit juice or combination of juices will turn into jelly, just use the pectin test explained earlier. You can make as much jelly as you want, but it’s usually easier to manage if you don’t make more than 6 jars at once.

39. CRAB-APPLE JELLY.--Crab apples are much used for jelly, as they make a product of good consistency and excellent flavor. Apples may be used in the same way as crab apples with equally good results.

39. CRAB-APPLE JELLY.--Crab apples are commonly used for jelly because they create a product with a great consistency and fantastic flavor. Regular apples can be used in the same way as crab apples and will yield equally good results.

Wash the apples thoroughly, remove the stems, and cut into quarters. Make sure that the apples contain no worms. Put them into a kettle, add about half as much water as apples, and cook slowly until the apples are soft. Strain the juice through a jelly bag. Before it stops dripping, return the pulp to the kettle, add half as much water as pulp, and allow the fruit to cook again. Make a second extraction, and in the same way make a third one. Then combine the juice, and strain all of it through a bag to make it clear. Measure 6 or 8 cupfuls of juice, and pour it into a preserving kettle. Boil for about 5 minutes, straining off the scum that rises to the top. To each cupful of juice, add 3/4 to 1 cupful of sugar that has been heated. Crab apples will require 1 cupful of sugar, but apples milder in flavor will not need more than 3/4 cupful. Boil until the test shows that it has boiled long enough. Pour into hot glasses, cool, and seal. Label and then store for later use.

Wash the apples thoroughly, remove the stems, and cut them into quarters. Make sure the apples have no worms. Put them in a pot, add about half as much water as there are apples, and cook slowly until the apples are soft. Strain the juice through a jelly bag. Before it stops dripping, return the pulp to the pot, add half as much water as the pulp, and let the fruit cook again. Make a second extraction and do the same for a third one. Then combine the juices and strain everything through a bag to make it clear. Measure out 6 or 8 cups of juice and pour it into a preserving pot. Boil for about 5 minutes, skimming off any foam that rises to the top. For each cup of juice, add 3/4 to 1 cup of heated sugar. Crab apples will need 1 cup of sugar, but sweeter apples won’t need more than 3/4 cup. Boil until a test shows it has cooked long enough. Pour into hot jars, let cool, and seal. Label and store for later use.

40. CURRANT JELLY.--If jelly having a tart flavor is desired, currant jelly should be tried. This kind of jelly is especially good to serve with the heavy course of a meal.

40. CURRANT JELLY.--If you're looking for a jelly with a tangy taste, you should try currant jelly. This jelly is especially great to serve with the heavier dishes of a meal.

Wash and stem the currants. Put them into a kettle and add about one-fourth as much water as currants. Boil until the currants are reduced to a pulp. Pour into a jelly bag and strain. Make at least one more extraction, and a third extraction if there is a fairly large quantity of pulp. When all the juice has been strained from the pulp, strain it again through the bag or a heavy cloth. Measure 6 or 8 cupfuls of juice into a kettle, boil for about 5 minutes, and then add from three-fourths to an equal amount of heated sugar. Remove the scum as it forms, taking off as much as possible before the sugar is added. Continue to boil until the tests show that the mixture has cooked sufficiently. Remove from the heat and pour into hot glasses. Cool, seal, label, and store.

Wash and stem the currants. Put them into a pot and add about one-fourth as much water as currants. Boil until the currants turn into a pulp. Pour into a jelly bag and strain. Do at least one more extraction, and a third extraction if there’s a decent amount of pulp. When all the juice has been strained from the pulp, strain it again through the bag or a thick cloth. Measure 6 or 8 cups of juice into a pot, boil for about 5 minutes, and then add three-fourths to an equal amount of heated sugar. Skim off the foam as it forms, removing as much as you can before adding the sugar. Keep boiling until the tests show the mixture is cooked enough. Remove from the heat and pour into hot jars. Let cool, seal, label, and store.

41. GRAPE JELLY.--Thoroughly ripe grapes may be used for jelly, but they are not so satisfactory for this purpose as grapes that are only partly ripe. This is due to the fact that green grapes contain more pectin and, upon being cooked, produce fewer of the cream-of-tartar crystals usually found in grape jelly than do ripe ones. The procedure for grape jelly is the same as that for currant jelly. If ripe grapes are used, 3/4 cupful of sugar will be needed to each cupful of juice; but if only partly ripe grapes are used, 1 cupful of sugar will be required for every cupful of juice.

41. GRAPE JELLY.--Fully ripe grapes can be used for jelly, but they aren't as effective as grapes that are only partially ripe. This is because green grapes have more pectin and, when cooked, create fewer of the cream-of-tartar crystals typically found in grape jelly compared to ripe ones. The method for making grape jelly is the same as for currant jelly. If you use ripe grapes, you'll need 3/4 cup of sugar for every cup of juice; however, if you use only partially ripe grapes, you'll need 1 cup of sugar for each cup of juice.

42. QUINCE JELLY.--Because of its attractive color and delicate flavor, quince jelly is much favored. The quinces may be used alone, but if a still more delicate flavor is desired, apples may be added to the quinces, or the parings and cores of the quinces may be used with apples or crab apples. To make quince jelly, proceed in the same way as for apple jelly, using 3/4 cupful of sugar to 1 cupful of juice.

42. QUINCE JELLY.--Due to its appealing color and subtle flavor, quince jelly is quite popular. You can use quinces on their own, but for an even more delicate taste, feel free to add apples, or use the peels and cores of the quinces along with apples or crab apples. To make quince jelly, follow the same method as you would for apple jelly, using 3/4 cup of sugar for every 1 cup of juice.

43. RASPBERRY JELLY.--Either black or red raspberries may be used for jelly making. To give jelly made from these fruits a better consistency, a small quantity of green grape, crab-apple, or currant juice should be added. The procedure in this case is the same as for currant jelly.

43. RASPBERRY JELLY.--You can use either black or red raspberries to make jelly. To improve the texture of the jelly from these fruits, add a little green grape, crab-apple, or currant juice. The process is the same as for making currant jelly.

44. STRAWBERRY JELLY.--Unripe strawberries contain a small amount of pectin, but thoroughly ripe ones are almost lacking in this respect. For this reason, strawberries cannot be used alone for making jelly. They make a delicious jelly, however, if currants are combined with them. For each 5 or 6 quarts of strawberries, 1 quart of currants will be sufficient to make a jelly of good consistency. Wash and hull the strawberries and then proceed as for currant jelly.

44. STRAWBERRY JELLY.—Unripe strawberries have a little pectin, but fully ripe ones have almost none. Because of this, strawberries can't be used on their own to make jelly. However, they make a tasty jelly when mixed with currants. For every 5 or 6 quarts of strawberries, you’ll need 1 quart of currants to create a jelly with a good consistency. Wash and remove the stems from the strawberries, then follow the instructions for currant jelly.

45. PLUM JELLY.--Plums make a jelly that many persons like. If it is desired to use plums alone, those which are not thoroughly ripe should be selected. Ripe plums do not contain enough pectin for jelly; therefore, a fruit high in pectin, such as crab apples, must be added. The procedure for currant jelly should be followed for plum jelly.

45. PLUM JELLY.--Plums make a jelly that many people enjoy. If you want to use only plums, choose ones that aren't fully ripe. Ripe plums don't have enough pectin for jelly, so you'll need to add a fruit that's high in pectin, like crab apples. Follow the procedure for making currant jelly to make plum jelly.

46. PEACH JELLY.--Peaches contain so little pectin that it is almost impossible to make jelly of them unless some other fruit is added in rather large quantities. Currants, crab apples, or green grapes may be used with peaches, and whichever one is selected will be needed in the proportion of about 50 per cent.; that is, half as much additional fruit as peaches is needed. In the making of peach jelly, proceed as for currant jelly.

46. PEACH JELLY.--Peaches have such low pectin levels that it's nearly impossible to make jelly from them unless you add another fruit in significant amounts. You can use currants, crab apples, or green grapes with peaches, and whichever you choose should be about 50 percent of the total; that means you need half as much of the additional fruit as you have peaches. To make peach jelly, follow the same steps as you would for currant jelly.

47. CANNING FRUIT JUICES FOR JELLY.--During the canning season, when a great deal of such work is being done, the housewife often feels that making jelly and preserves is an extravagant use of sugar. Still, fruit juices left over from canning and large quantities of fruit, such as crab apples and currants, that are not suitable for other purposes, will be wasted unless they are used for jelly. If it is not convenient to use the fruit at the time it is obtained, a good plan is to extract the juice as for jelly making and then can it. In case this is done, jelly may be made from the juice during the seasons of the year when less sugar is required for other things.

47. CANNING FRUIT JUICES FOR JELLY.--During canning season, when a lot of this work is happening, the home cook often feels that making jelly and preserves is a waste of sugar. However, leftover fruit juices from canning and large amounts of fruit, like crab apples and currants, that aren't good for other uses will go to waste unless they're made into jelly. If it's not feasible to use the fruit right away, a great idea is to extract the juice for jelly making and then can it. This way, jelly can be made from the juice during times of the year when less sugar is needed for other things.

48. To can fruit juice, extract it from the fruit as for jelly making and then bring it to the boiling point. Select bottles or jars that may be tightly closed, sterilize them, fill them with the boiling juice, and seal them. Bottles may be used for this purpose if they are well corked and then dipped into melted sealing wax or paraffin. When properly sealed, fruit juices will probably keep without any further effort to preserve them, but to make positively certain that they will not spoil, it is a wise precaution to process the filled bottles or jars in boiling water for about 6 or 8 minutes in the same way in which canned fruit is processed. When treated in this way, fruit juices will keep perfectly and may be made into jelly at any time during the winter.

48. To can fruit juice, start by extracting it from the fruit just like you would for making jelly, then heat it until it boils. Choose bottles or jars that can be sealed tightly, sterilize them, fill them with the boiling juice, and seal them up. You can use bottles for this if they're well corked and then dipped in melted sealing wax or paraffin. When sealed properly, fruit juices should last without needing any extra preservation efforts, but to be completely sure they won't spoil, it's a good idea to process the filled bottles or jars in boiling water for about 6 to 8 minutes, just like you would with canned fruit. With this method, fruit juices will stay fresh and can be turned into jelly anytime during the winter.



PRESERVING

PRINCIPLES OF PRESERVING

49. PRESERVING consists in preparing fruits in perfect condition to resist decomposition or change by cooking them in heavy sirup. The cooking is done so slightly that the original form, flavor, and color of the fruit are retained as far as possible. This process is similar to that of canning by the open-kettle method; that is, the fruit and sugar are combined and cooked to the proper consistency in the preserving kettle. Sugar is used in such quantity in the preparation of preserves that it acts as a preservative and prevents bacteria from attacking the foods in which it is used. If preserves of any kind ferment, it may be known that not enough sugar was used in their preparation. The sterilization of the product and the air-tight sealing of the containers, which are necessary in the canning of fruits and vegetables, need not be resorted to in the case of preserves.

49. PRESERVING means preparing fruits in excellent condition so they can resist spoiling or changing by cooking them in heavy syrup. The cooking is done very gently so that the fruit's original shape, taste, and color are kept as much as possible. This process is similar to canning using the open-kettle method; basically, the fruit and sugar are mixed and cooked to the right consistency in the preserving kettle. A significant amount of sugar is added to the preserves, which acts as a preservative and stops bacteria from attacking the food. If any preserves start to ferment, it indicates that not enough sugar was used in making them. Unlike canning fruits and vegetables, preserving doesn’t require sterilizing the product or sealing the containers tightly.

50. SELECTION OF FRUIT.--When fruit is to be made into preserves, much attention should be paid to its selection, for, as a rule, only the finest fruits are used for preserving. This is especially true of the smaller fruits, such as berries and cherries, for they are preserved whole. Therefore, in order that they may have a good appearance when preserved, it is necessary that they be as perfect as possible to begin with. In addition, the fruit should be thoroughly ripe, but not mushy nor overripe. As the cooking of the fruits in sirup hardens them to a certain extent, fruits that are not sufficiently ripe cannot be used, for they would be too hard when done. If care is used in selecting fruits that are to be preserved, a good-appearing product will be the result, since this process is carried on in such a way as not to impair their shape.

50. SELECTION OF FRUIT.--When making preserves, it’s important to choose the right fruit because, typically, only the best fruits are used for preserving. This is especially true for smaller fruits like berries and cherries, which are preserved whole. To ensure they look good when preserved, they must start off as perfect as possible. Additionally, the fruit should be fully ripe but not mushy or overripe. Since cooking the fruits in syrup will harden them to some extent, under-ripe fruits can’t be used, as they will end up too tough when finished. By carefully selecting the fruits for preserving, you’ll achieve an attractive final product, as the process is done in a way that maintains their shape.

51. METHODS OF PRESERVING.--Several methods of preserving fruit are in practice, but in general the same principles characterise each one. Probably the most successful method consists in bringing a certain proportion of sugar and water to the boiling point, dropping the fruit into the sirup thus formed, and cooking it for a definite length of time. Boiling fruits in heavy sirup has a tendency to make them firm and solid, rather than to cook them to pieces, as would be the case with water or a thin sirup. Even very soft berries, when used for preserves, will retain almost their original size and shape if they are properly cooked. Except for the fact that a heavier sirup is used, the process of preserving fruit is exactly like that of canning fruit by the open-kettle method. The chief precaution to take in this method is that as little water as possible be used, so that the sirup may be very thick when the fruit is added.

51. METHODS OF PRESERVING.--There are several ways to preserve fruit today, but they generally share the same basic principles. The most effective method likely involves bringing a specific amount of sugar and water to a boil, adding the fruit to the syrup formed, and cooking it for a set period. Boiling fruit in a thick syrup helps it stay firm and intact, rather than turning to mush like it would in water or a thin syrup. Even very delicate berries can keep most of their original size and shape if cooked properly for preserves. Other than using a thicker syrup, preserving fruit is essentially the same as canning fruit using the open-kettle method. The main thing to remember with this method is to use as little water as possible so that the syrup is very thick when the fruit is added.

Another method that may be recommended because it helps to keep the fruit in good condition consists in cooking it in its own juice. In this method, equal quantities of fruit and sugar are put together and allowed to stand until enough juice is formed, preferably overnight, so that the fruit may be cooked without the addition of any water. Strawberries are excellent when preserved in this way.

Another method that might be suggested for keeping the fruit in good shape is cooking it in its own juice. In this approach, equal amounts of fruit and sugar are combined and left to sit until enough juice is released, ideally overnight, so that the fruit can be cooked without adding any water. Strawberries are great when preserved this way.

Whichever method is followed, better results will be obtained if only a few quarts of fruit are cooked at a time. When a large quantity of berries, for instance, is added to the boiling sirup, they will form such a thick layer that they will have to remain over the fire a long time before they come to the boiling point. They will therefore be much more likely to crush and give the finished product a mushy appearance than if a smaller quantity, which will form a thinner layer, is cooked each time.

Whichever method you choose, you’ll get better results if you cook only a few quarts of fruit at a time. When you add a large amount of berries, for example, to the boiling syrup, they’ll create such a thick layer that they’ll need to stay over the heat for a long time before reaching the boiling point. This makes them much more likely to crush and give the final product a mushy look compared to cooking a smaller amount, which will form a thinner layer each time.

52. UTENSILS FOR PRESERVING.--The equipment necessary in the making of preserves is similar to that used for making jelly, with the exception of the dripping bag and the hydrometer. A good-sized preserving kettle is, of course, required for the cooking of the fruit and sirup; a measuring cup and a quart measure are needed for the measuring of the ingredients; and a long-handled wooden spoon or paddle is the most convenient utensil with which to stir all foods of this class. Containers similar to those used for jelly will be satisfactory receptacles in which to put preserves, but as preserved fruits are not turned out in a mold, almost any kind of wide-mouthed bottle or jar may be used for this purpose. Paraffin should also be provided, as this should always be used for the first covering to prevent the formation of molds, which are likely to grow on moist sweet substances exposed to the air. Before using paraffin for preserves, they should be allowed to stand until the surface has become absolutely dry. It is well to label preserves, too; so labels should be kept on hand for this purpose.

52. UTENSILS FOR PRESERVING.--The equipment needed for making preserves is similar to what's used for making jelly, except for the dripping bag and the hydrometer. You’ll need a good-sized preserving kettle for cooking the fruit and syrup. A measuring cup and a quart measure will be required for measuring the ingredients, and a long-handled wooden spoon or paddle is the easiest tool for stirring all these types of foods. Containers like those used for jelly work well for storing preserves, but since preserved fruits aren’t turned out in a mold, you can use almost any kind of wide-mouthed bottle or jar. Paraffin is also necessary, as it should always be used as the first layer to prevent mold from forming, which can happen on moist sweet substances exposed to air. Before using paraffin on preserves, let them sit until the surface is completely dry. It’s also a good idea to label your preserves, so keep some labels handy for this.



RECIPES FOR PRESERVED FRUITS

VARIETIES OF PRESERVED FRUITS


53. The several methods of preserving fruits result in considerable variety in the finished product. Preserves proper are those cooked in a heavy sirup, either whole or cut into pieces. In addition to being prepared in this way, fruit may be made into conserve, marmalade, jam, and butter. Specific directions for the preparation of each one of these varieties are here given, together with a number of recipes showing the kinds of fruit most suitable for the different varieties. No housewife need deprive her family of any of these delicious preparations if she will familiarize herself with the methods explained and will follow out minutely the directions given. In the making of the various kinds of preserves, just as much care must be exercised as in canning and jelly making if the best results are desired.

53. The different ways to preserve fruits lead to a wide variety of final products. Preserves are made by cooking fruits in a thick syrup, either whole or chopped up. Besides this method, fruit can also be turned into conserve, marmalade, jam, and butter. Detailed instructions for making each of these types, along with several recipes that highlight the best fruits for each variety, are provided here. No home cook has to deny their family any of these tasty treats if they learn the methods explained and closely follow the directions given. When making different kinds of preserves, just as much care is needed as when canning and making jelly if you want the best results.


PRESERVES

54. STRAWBERRY PRESERVE.--Strawberries selected for preserves should be of the dark, solid variety, if possible, since these shrink less and retain their shape and size better than do the lighter varieties. This fruit is made into preserves probably more often than any other kind, and this is not strange, for it makes a most delicious preserve.

54. STRAWBERRY PRESERVE.--When choosing strawberries for preserves, it's best to go for the dark, firm type if you can, because they shrink less and keep their shape and size better than the lighter varieties. Strawberries are probably used for preserves more than any other fruit, and that's no surprise, since they make a really tasty preserve.

STRAWBERRY PRESERVE

  • 2 qt. strawberries
  • 1/2 c. hot water
  • 1 lb. sugar

Clean the strawberries by placing them in a colander and raising and lowering them into a large pan of water. Remove the hulls and make sure that all the water is carefully drained from the berries. Add the water to the sugar and place over the fire in a preserving kettle that has a smooth surface. Stir until the sugar is dissolved, and allow the mixture to come to a rapid boil. To the rapidly boiling sirup, add the strawberries by dropping them carefully into it. Allow the fruit to come to the boiling point in the sirup, and continue to boil for 10 or 12 minutes. If the berries seem to contain an unusual amount of water, boiling for 15 minutes may be necessary. Remove from the fire and fill into hot sterilized glasses at once, or set aside to cool. It has been found that if the preserves are allowed to stand in the kettle overnight, they will improve in flavor and, because of the absorption of oxygen, which they lose in boiling, they will increase in size. If the preserves are treated in this way, it will be necessary to pour them cold into the sterilized glasses. When the preserves in the glasses are cold, pour melted paraffin over them. Cover them with metal or paper covers, label, and store for future use.

Clean the strawberries by putting them in a colander and dipping them up and down in a large bowl of water. Remove the green tops and make sure to drain all the water from the berries. Combine the water with the sugar and heat it in a preserving kettle with a smooth surface. Stir until the sugar dissolves, then let the mixture come to a rapid boil. Once it's boiling, carefully add the strawberries by dropping them in. Let the fruit reach boiling point in the syrup and keep boiling for 10 to 12 minutes. If the berries seem really watery, you might need to boil for 15 minutes. Take it off the heat and immediately pour it into hot sterilized jars, or set it aside to cool. It’s been found that if you let the preserves sit in the kettle overnight, they’ll taste better and get bigger because they absorb oxygen that they lose during boiling. If you do this, you'll need to pour them cold into the sterilized jars. Once the preserves in the jars have cooled, pour melted paraffin over them. Cover with metal or paper lids, label them, and store for later use.

55. CHERRY PRESERVE.--If sour cherries can be secured, an excellent preserve can be made of them. Cherries should, of courser be seeded, or pitted, when they are prepared in this way.

55. CHERRY PRESERVE.--If you can get sour cherries, you can make a great preserve from them. The cherries should, of course, be pitted before preparing them this way.

CHERRY PRESERVE

  • 2 qt. seeded sour cherries
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 1-1/2 lb. sugar

Drain off the superfluous juice from the cherries. Add the hot water to the sugar in a preserving kettle, and allow the mixture to come to a boil. Add the cherries and boil for 10 or 12 minutes. Have hot sterilized jelly glasses ready and fill with the hot preserves. Allow the preserves to cool, cover first with paraffin and then with metal or paper covers, and label.

Drain off the excess juice from the cherries. In a canning pot, combine the hot water with the sugar and bring the mixture to a boil. Add the cherries and boil for 10 to 12 minutes. Have hot sterilized jelly jars ready and fill them with the hot preserves. Let the preserves cool, then cover them first with paraffin and then with metal or paper lids, and label.

56. RASPBERRY PRESERVE.--Although red raspberries are a rather soft fruit, they can be used very well for preserves if care is taken not to break them into pieces by too long cooking or too rapid boiling.

56. RASPBERRY PRESERVE.--Even though red raspberries are quite delicate, they work well for preserves as long as you avoid overcooking them or boiling them too quickly, which can cause them to break apart.

RASPBERRY PRESERVE

  • 2 qt. red raspberries
  • 3/4 c. hot water
  • 1 lb. sugar

Wash the raspberries by placing them in a colander and raising and lowering them in a large pan of cold water. Mix the hot water with the sugar in a preserving kettle, place the mixture over the fire and bring to the boiling point. Add the raspberries to the boiling sirup, and when they have come to the boiling point, cook for 8 to 10 minutes. Remove the hot preserves from the fire and pour into hot sterilized jars. Allow them to cool, seal with paraffin and metal or paper covers, and label.

Wash the raspberries by putting them in a colander and moving them up and down in a large bowl of cold water. Combine the hot water with the sugar in a preserving kettle, place it over the heat, and bring it to a boil. Add the raspberries to the boiling syrup, and once they reach a boil again, cook for 8 to 10 minutes. Take the hot preserves off the heat and pour them into hot sterilized jars. Let them cool, seal with paraffin and metal or paper lids, and label.

57. PLUM PRESERVE.--A very rich, tart preserve can be made by cooking plums in a thick sirup. Those who care for the flavor of plums will find preserves of this kind very much to their taste.

57. PLUM PRESERVE.--You can make a really rich, tangy preserve by cooking plums in a thick syrup. If you enjoy the taste of plums, you'll find this type of preserve very appealing.

PLUM PRESERVE

  • 2 qt. plums
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 1-1/2 lb. sugar

Select any variety of plums desired for preserves, and wash them in cold water. Cut them in half and remove the seeds. Place the hot water and the sugar in a preserving kettle, and bring to a rapid boil. Add the plums and boil slowly for 15 minutes. Remove from the fire, pour into hot sterilized jelly glasses. Allow them to cool and cover first with paraffin and then with metal or paper covers. Before storing, label each glass neatly.

Select any type of plums you want for preserves and wash them in cold water. Cut them in half and take out the seeds. Put hot water and sugar in a preserving pot and bring it to a quick boil. Add the plums and simmer slowly for 15 minutes. Remove from heat, pour into hot sterilized jelly jars. Let them cool and cover first with paraffin, then with metal or paper lids. Before storing, label each jar neatly.

58. QUINCE PRESERVE.--Quinces combined with apples make a preserve that finds favor with many. As shown in the accompanying recipe, about one-third as many apples as quinces make the required proportion.

58. QUINCE PRESERVE.--Quinces mixed with apples create a preserve that is popular with many. As outlined in the recipe below, using about one-third as many apples as quinces provides the right proportion.

QUINCE PRESERVE

  • 3 qt. quinces, peeled and quartered
  • 1 qt. apples, peeled and quartered
  • 1-1/2 c. hot water
  • 3 lb. sugar

Select well-ripened quinces. Rub the fuzz from the skin with a cloth, and then wash, peel, quarter, and core. If desired, they may be sliced, but they are very nice when preserved in quarters. Select firm apples, wash, peel, quarter, and core them, and cut them the same size as the quinces. Add the water to the sugar, place the mixture over the fire in a preserving kettle, and let it come to a boil. Add the quinces, cook until tender, and remove from the sirup. Then cook the apples in the sirup in the same way, and when tender remove from the sirup. Place the fruits in alternate layers in hot jars. Unless the sirup is very thick, boil it until it becomes heavy; then fill each jarful of fruit with this sirup. Seal with paraffin, cover with metal or paper covers, and label.

Choose well-ripened quinces. Wipe off the fuzz from the skin with a cloth, then wash, peel, quarter, and core them. If you want, you can slice them, but they work very well preserved in quarters. Pick firm apples, wash, peel, quarter, and core them, cutting them to the same size as the quinces. Combine the water and sugar, put the mixture in a preserving kettle over heat, and bring it to a boil. Add the quinces, cook until they’re tender, then take them out of the syrup. Next, cook the apples in the syrup the same way, and when they’re tender, remove them from the syrup. Layer the fruits alternately in hot jars. If the syrup isn’t very thick, boil it until it becomes heavy; then pour the syrup over each jar of fruit. Seal with paraffin, cover with metal or paper lids, and label.

59. PEACH PRESERVE.--Although somewhat bland in flavor, peaches make an excellent preserve. Some persons prefer them cut into very small slices, while others like them preserved in large slices.

59. PEACH PRESERVE.--Although they have a somewhat mild flavor, peaches make great preserves. Some people prefer them cut into very small pieces, while others like them preserved in larger slices.

PEACH PRESERVE

  • 4 qt. peaches
  • 1-1/2 c. hot water
  • 3 lb. sugar

Select firm peaches. Wash, pare, and cut into slices of any desirable size. Add the water to the sugar in a preserving kettle, place over the fire, and allow the mixture to come to a rapid boil. Drop the sliced peaches into the sirup and cook until tender. Have hot sterilized jars ready, fill with the hot preserves, and seal with paraffin. Cover in the desired way and label.

Select firm peaches. Wash, peel, and cut into slices of any size you like. Add the water to the sugar in a preserving pot, place it over the heat, and let the mixture come to a quick boil. Drop the sliced peaches into the syrup and cook until they're tender. Have hot sterilized jars ready, fill them with the hot preserves, and seal with paraffin. Cover as you prefer and label them.


CONSERVES

60. CONSERVES do not differ materially from preserves in their preparation, but they usually consist of a mixture of two or more fruits, whereas preserves are made from a single fruit. All rules that govern the making of preserves apply equally well to the making of conserves.

60. CONSERVES are not significantly different from preserves in how they're made, but they typically include a blend of two or more fruits, while preserves are made from just one type of fruit. All the rules that apply to making preserves also apply to making conserves.

There are certain fruits that combine very well as far as flavor, color, etc. are concerned, and these are generally used together in the preparation of this food. However, almost any combination of fruits may be made into conserves. This is therefore a very good way in which to utilize small quantities of left-over fruits. Then, too, a cheap material may be combined with a more expensive one to make a larger quantity of a moderately priced product, as, for instance, rhubarb and pineapple. Again, the pulp from which juice has been extracted for jelly may be used to make conserve. In fact, a little ingenuity on the part of the housewife and familiarity with general preserving methods will enable her to make many kinds of excellent conserves, even though she may not have a definite rule or recipe to cover the use of the particular material that happens to be on hand.

There are certain fruits that pair really well in terms of flavor, color, and so on, and these are usually used together when making this food. However, almost any mix of fruits can be turned into conserves. This is a great way to use up small amounts of leftover fruit. Plus, you can mix a cheaper ingredient with a pricier one to produce a larger quantity of a moderately priced product, like rhubarb and pineapple. Also, the pulp left over after making jelly can be used to make conserve. In fact, with a little creativity and understanding of general preserving methods, anyone can make all sorts of delicious conserves, even without a specific recipe for the ingredients they have on hand.

61. STRAWBERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE.--The combination of strawberries and pineapple is an excellent one. The accompanying recipe shows how to combine these fruits to make a most appetizing conserve.

61. STRAWBERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE.--The mix of strawberries and pineapple is a fantastic one. The recipe below demonstrates how to blend these fruits to create a delicious conserve.

STRAWBERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE

  • 2 qt. strawberries
  • 1 large pineapple
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 2-1/2 lb. sugar

Prepare the strawberries as for canning. Peel and slice the pineapple, remove the eyes, and cut into small pieces. Add the water to the sugar in a preserving kettle, and allow it to come to a boil. Drop the pieces of pineapple into the sirup and cook them until they are tender. To this add the strawberries and cook for 5 or 10 minutes longer. The conserve should then be sufficiently cooked to put into the jars. If the juice seems too thin, fill the jars, which should be hot sterilized ones, about three-fourths full of the fruit, and then return the sirup to the heat and boil it until it is the right consistency. Remove the boiling sirup from the stove, and pour it over the fruit in the jars until they are full. Allow the conserve to cool, and then seal, first with paraffin and then with metal or paper covers. Label each glass and set away for future use.

Prepare the strawberries like you would for canning. Peel and slice the pineapple, remove the eyes, and chop it into small pieces. Combine the water and sugar in a preserving kettle and bring it to a boil. Add the pineapple pieces to the syrup and cook until they’re tender. Then, add the strawberries and cook for another 5 to 10 minutes. The conserve should be cooked enough to jar it. If the juice seems too thin, fill the hot sterilized jars about three-quarters full with the fruit, then return the syrup to the heat and boil it until it reaches the right thickness. Remove the boiling syrup from the heat and pour it over the fruit in the jars until they’re full. Let the conserve cool, then seal it first with paraffin and then with metal or paper lids. Label each jar and store them for later use.

62. STRAWBERRY-AND-RHUBARB CONSERVE.--Rhubarb combines very well with either strawberries or pineapple. The accompanying recipe is for strawberries and rhubarb, but if pineapple is desired, it may be substituted for the strawberries in the same quantity.

62. STRAWBERRY-AND-RHUBARB CONSERVE.--Rhubarb pairs really well with either strawberries or pineapple. The recipe below is for strawberries and rhubarb, but if you prefer, you can swap out the strawberries for pineapple in the same amount.

STRAWBERRY-AND-RHUBARB CONSERVE

  • 2 qt. strawberries
  • 1-1/2 qt. rhubarb
  • 1-1/2 c. hot water
  • 3 lb. sugar

Prepare the strawberries as for canning. Cut the rhubarb, which should be very tender, into cubes without removing the skin. Add the water to the sugar, and bring to a rapid boil in a preserving kettle. Put the rhubarb and strawberries into this sirup, and cook for at least 15 minutes. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, and when cool seal in the usual way. Label and store.

Prepare the strawberries as if you were canning them. Chop the rhubarb, which should be very tender, into cubes without peeling it. Combine the water and sugar, and bring to a rapid boil in a preserving kettle. Add the rhubarb and strawberries to this syrup, and cook for at least 15 minutes. Pour into hot sterilized jars, and once they're cool, seal them as usual. Label and store.

63. PINEAPPLE-AND-APRICOT CONSERVE.--No more delicious conserve can be made than pineapple-and-apricot conserve. The tartness of the apricots gives a flavor that is pleasing to most persons.

63. PINEAPPLE-AND-APRICOT CONSERVE.--There's no more delicious conserve than pineapple-and-apricot conserve. The tartness of the apricots adds a flavor that's enjoyable for most people.

PINEAPPLE-AND-APRICOT CONSERVE

  • 2 qt. apricots
  • 1 large pineapple
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 2-1/2 lb. sugar

Wash the apricots, plunge them into boiling water to remove the skins, and then cut into quarters. Peel and slice the pineapple, remove the eyes, and cut into cubes. Add the water to the sugar in a preserving kettle, and bring to the boiling point. Add the pineapple to the sirup, and cook until tender. Then drop in the apricots and boil several minutes longer. Have hot sterilized glasses ready, fill them with the conserve, and when cool seal in the usual way. Before putting the glasses away, label each one neatly.

Wash the apricots, dip them in boiling water to remove the skins, and then cut them into quarters. Peel and slice the pineapple, remove the eyes, and cut it into cubes. Combine the water with the sugar in a preserving pot and bring it to a boil. Add the pineapple to the syrup and cook until soft. Then add the apricots and boil for a few more minutes. Have hot sterilized jars ready, fill them with the conserve, and seal them in the usual way once they cool down. Before storing the jars, label each one neatly.

64. CRAB-APPLE-AND-ORANGE CONSERVE.--It is a good idea to make crab-apple-and-orange conserve at the same time that crab-apple jelly is made, for the pulp that remains after extracting the juice may be utilized for the conserve. However, if it is desired to make it at some other time, fresh pulp can be prepared for the purpose.

64. CRAB-APPLE-AND-ORANGE CONSERVE.--It's a good idea to make crab-apple-and-orange conserve at the same time as making crab-apple jelly, as the leftover pulp from extracting the juice can be used for the conserve. However, if you want to make it at a different time, you can prepare fresh pulp for that.

CRAB-APPLE-AND-ORANGE CONSERVE

  • 1 qt. crab-apple pulp
  • 3 lb. sugar
  • 8 oranges

To the crab-apple pulp, add the sugar, and place over the fire to boil. Peel the oranges, scoop out the white portion from the peelings, cut the peelings into thin strips, and add to the crab-apple pulp. Remove the pulp of the orange from the skins and from between the sections, cut it into small pieces, and add to the boiling mixture a few minutes before it is removed from the stove. When it has cooked thick, pour into hot sterilized glasses. Cool and then seal and label.

To the crab-apple pulp, add the sugar and heat it until it boils. Peel the oranges, remove the white part from the peel, slice the peel into thin strips, and mix it into the crab-apple pulp. Take the orange pulp out of the skins and the sections, chop it into small pieces, and add it to the boiling mixture a few minutes before taking it off the heat. When it has thickened, pour it into hot sterilized jars. Let it cool, then seal and label it.

65. PLUM CONSERVE.--A rather unusual conserve is made by combining raisins and English walnut meats with plums. The accompanying recipe gives directions for the preparation of this conserve.

65. PLUM CONSERVE.--An interesting conserve is made by mixing raisins and English walnut pieces with plums. The recipe below provides instructions for making this conserve.

PLUM CONSERVE

  • 4 qt. plums
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 2 lb. sugar
  • 1 lb. raisins
  • 2 c. English walnut meats

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and remove the seeds. Add the water to the sugar, place over the fire in a preserving kettle, and stir until the mixture comes to a rapid boil. Wash the raisins, which should be seeded, add them with the plums to the sirup, and cook until the mixture is the consistency of jelly. Just before removing from the stove, add the nut meats. Pour the mixture into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label. If very sour plums are used, increase the amount of sugar.

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and take out the seeds. Mix the water with the sugar in a preserving kettle over heat, stirring until it boils vigorously. Clean the seeded raisins and add them along with the plums to the syrup, cooking until the mixture reaches a jelly-like consistency. Just before taking it off the heat, add the nuts. Pour the mixture into hot sterilized jars, let it cool, seal, and label. If the plums are really sour, use more sugar.

66. CHERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE.--Cherries combine very well with pineapple in a conserve. Sweet cherries should, if possible, be used for this purpose.

66. CHERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE.--Cherries pair perfectly with pineapple in a conserve. If possible, use sweet cherries for this.

CHERRY-AND-PINEAPPLE CONSERVE

  • 2 qt. sweet cherries
  • 1 pineapple
  • 2 lb. sugar
  • 1 c. hot water

Wash, stem, and seed the cherries. Slice and peel the pineapple and remove the eyes. Put the sugar and water over the fire in a preserving kettle, and stir until the sirup comes to the boiling point. To this sirup add the pineapple and the cherries and cook until the juice is very thick. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Wash, stem, and pit the cherries. Slice and peel the pineapple, removing the eyes. Put the sugar and water in a saucepan over heat, and stir until the syrup boils. Add the pineapple and cherries to the syrup and cook until the juice is really thick. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let it cool, seal, and label.

67. RED-RASPBERRY-AND-CURRANT CONSERVE.--A conserve having a very attractive color and a most appetizing flavor is made by combining red raspberries with red currants.

67. RED-RASPBERRY-AND-CURRANT CONSERVE.—A conserve with a striking color and delicious flavor is made by mixing red raspberries with red currants.

RED-RASPBERRY-AND-CURRANT CONSERVE

  • 3 qt. red raspberries
  • 1 qt. red currants
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 2-1/2 lb. sugar

Look the raspberries over carefully, and remove any that show signs of spoiling. Wash the currants and stem them. Add the water to the sugar and put the mixture over the fire to boil. Add the currants to this, and stir until the mixture comes to the boiling point. Boil for several minutes, or until the mixture begins to thicken, and then add the red raspberries. Continue to boil for 2 or 3 minutes longer. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Look over the raspberries carefully and remove any that are starting to spoil. Wash the currants and remove the stems. Add the water to the sugar and heat the mixture until it boils. Add the currants and stir until it reaches a boiling point. Boil for a few minutes or until it starts to thicken, then add the red raspberries. Continue to boil for another 2 or 3 minutes. Pour into hot, sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label.

68. CARROT CONSERVE.--Conserve made from carrots will be found to be surprisingly delicious, and it has the added advantage of being inexpensive.

68. CARROT CONSERVE.--Carrot conserve is surprisingly delicious and also quite affordable.

CARROT CONSERVE

  • 1-1/2 qt. cooked cut carrots
  • Rind of 2 lemons
  • 5 c. sugar
  • 2 c. hot water
  • Juice of 3 lemons

Boil the carrots until tender and chop or put through a grinder with the lemon rind. Then mix with the sugar, water, and lemon juice, and boil for about 1/2 hour or until thick. Put into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Boil the carrots until they're soft, then chop them or run them through a grinder with the lemon rind. Next, mix in the sugar, water, and lemon juice, and boil for about 30 minutes or until it thickens. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let cool, seal them up, and label.


MARMALADES

69. MARMALADES are a form of preserves that differ from the other varieties more in the nature of the fruit used than in any other respect. For marmalades, large fruits are generally used, and, as a rule, the fruits are left in sections or in comparatively large pieces. The preparation of this food, however, differs in no way from preserves proper and conserves, the processes of cooking, sealing, storing, etc. being practically the same.

69. MARMALADES are a type of preserve that mainly differ from other varieties based on the type of fruit used. For marmalades, larger fruits are typically employed, and usually, the fruits are kept in sections or larger pieces. The way this food is prepared is no different from regular preserves and conserves; the processes of cooking, sealing, storing, and so on are practically the same.

70. ORANGE MARMALADE.--Oranges combined with half as many lemons make a marmalade that most persons like. In fact, orange marmalade is probably made more often than any other kind.

70. ORANGE MARMALADE.--Oranges mixed with half as many lemons create a marmalade that most people enjoy. In fact, orange marmalade is likely made more frequently than any other variety.

ORANGE MARMALADE

  • 12 oranges
  • 6 lemons
  • 1-1/2 qt. hot water
  • 5 lb. sugar

Peel the oranges and the lemons in the same way an apple would be peeled, inserting the knife deep enough to cut through the skin covering the sections. Remove the contents of the sections and squeeze out any juice that may remain in the thin skin. Remove the white material from the inside of the peeling, and cut the yellow portion that remains into thin strips. Add the water to the skins and simmer slowly for 1 hour. At the end of this time, add the sugar and the orange and the lemon pulp, and boil until the mixture is thick. Pour into hot, sterilized glasses, cool, and then seal and label.

Peel the oranges and lemons just like you would peel an apple, making sure to cut deep enough to get through the skin that covers the sections. Take out the contents of the sections and squeeze out any juice left in the thin skin. Remove the white part from the inside of the peel, and cut the remaining yellow part into thin strips. Add water to the peels and let them simmer slowly for 1 hour. After that, add the sugar and the pulp from the oranges and lemons, and boil until the mixture gets thick. Pour it into hot, sterilized jars, let it cool, then seal and label them.

71. ORANGE-AND-RHUBARB MARMALADE.--If a somewhat different flavor is desired in a marmalade, rhubarb instead of lemons may be used with oranges, as shown in the accompanying recipe.

71. ORANGE-AND-RHUBARB MARMALADE.--If you want a unique flavor in your marmalade, you can use rhubarb instead of lemons with oranges, as detailed in the following recipe.

ORANGE-AND-RHUBARB MARMALADE

  • 8 oranges
  • 1 qt. hot water
  • 4 lb. sugar
  • 3 qt. rhubarb cut into pieces

Prepare the oranges as for orange marmalade. Slowly cook the yellow part of the skin in 1 quart of water for 1/2 hour. To this add the sugar and the rhubarb, and cook slowly until it is quite thick. Stir in the orange pulp and cook until the mixture is again thick. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Prepare the oranges as you would for orange marmalade. Slowly cook the yellow part of the peel in 1 quart of water for 30 minutes. Then add the sugar and the rhubarb, and cook slowly until it thickens. Stir in the orange pulp and cook until the mixture thickens again. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label.

72. QUINCE MARMALADE.--Quinces cut into quarters, cooked, and then forced through a sieve make an exceptionally good marmalade, so far as both flavor and color are concerned. No other fruit need be used with the quinces, as they have enough flavor in themselves.

72. QUINCE MARMALADE.--Quinces cut into quarters, cooked, and then passed through a sieve make a really great marmalade, both in flavor and color. There's no need to mix any other fruit with the quinces since they have plenty of flavor on their own.

QUINCE MARMALADE

  • 4 qt. quartered quinces
  • 1 qt. hot water
  • 4 lb. sugar

Wipe the fuzz from the quinces, wash, quarter, and remove the cores, but do not peel. Put over the fire in a preserving kettle with the water. Cook until the quinces are soft, remove from the fire, and mash through a sieve. Add the sugar to the quince pulp, replace on the fire, and cook until the mixture is thick, stirring constantly to prevent burning. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Wipe the fuzz off the quinces, wash them, cut them into quarters, and remove the cores, but don’t peel them. Place them in a preserving pot with water over the heat. Cook until the quinces are soft, take them off the heat, and mash them through a sieve. Mix the sugar into the quince pulp, put it back on the heat, and cook until the mixture gets thick, stirring constantly to prevent burning. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label.

73. GRAPE MARMALADE.--The pulp and skins of grapes are especially satisfactory for marmalade. In fact, most persons who are fond of grapes find marmalade of this kind very appetizing.

73. GRAPE MARMALADE.--The pulp and skins of grapes are especially great for making marmalade. In fact, most people who like grapes find this type of marmalade very tasty.

GRAPE MARMALADE

  • 4 qt. stemmed grapes
  • 2 c. hot water
  • 3 lb. sugar

Separate the pulp of the grapes from the skins, put it into a preserving kettle with the water, and heat to the boiling point. Cook slowly until the seeds can be separated from the pulp, and then remove the seeds by pressing the pulp through a sieve. Return to the preserving kettle with the grape skins. Add the sugar, and cook the mixture slowly until it is thick, stirring constantly to prevent scorching. Care must be taken not to cook it too long, as the marmalade becomes quite stiff. Pour into hot, sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Separate the pulp of the grapes from the skins, put it into a pot with water, and heat it until it boils. Cook it slowly until the seeds can be separated from the pulp, then remove the seeds by pressing the pulp through a strainer. Return it to the pot with the grape skins. Add the sugar and cook the mixture slowly until it thickens, stirring constantly to avoid burning. Be careful not to cook it for too long, as the marmalade can get really stiff. Pour it into hot, sterilized jars, let it cool, seal, and label.

74. ORANGE-AND-PINEAPPLE MARMALADE.--No better combination can be secured than oranges and pineapple. To make marmalade, both fruits are cut into small pieces and then cooked in a thick sirup.

74. ORANGE-AND-PINEAPPLE MARMALADE.--You can't beat the combination of oranges and pineapple. To make marmalade, cut both fruits into small pieces and then cook them in a thick syrup.

ORANGE-AND-PINEAPPLE MARMALADE

  • 8 oranges
  • 2 c. hot water
  • 2 pineapples
  • 4 lb. sugar

Wash the oranges, cut skins and all into small pieces, remove the seeds, and boil slowly in the water until the skins are soft. Prepare the pineapples by peeling them, removing the eyes, and then shredding or cutting into very small pieces. Add the pineapple to the orange, stir in sugar, and continue to boil until the juice is at the jelly stage. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Wash the oranges, cut them into small pieces with the skin on, remove the seeds, and boil slowly in water until the skin becomes soft. Prepare the pineapples by peeling them, removing the eyes, and then shredding or cutting them into very small pieces. Add the pineapple to the oranges, stir in sugar, and keep boiling until the juice reaches the jelly stage. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label.


JAMS

75. JAM is similar to preserves, except that the fruit used is made into a pulp before it is cooked with the sugar or after a part of the cooking is done. As a rule, only whole small fruits are used for jams, but the larger fruits can be utilized for this purpose by being cut fine and made into a pulp. When small fruits are used, part or all of the seeds are sometimes removed, but generally the seeds are allowed to remain if they are not too large. Jam is made thick by long boiling, and when done is usually quite smooth. A precaution, however, that should always be taken is not to cook it too long, for jam is very unappetizing if it is too thick.

75. Jam is similar to preserves, but the fruit is turned into a pulp before it's cooked with sugar or after some cooking has occurred. Typically, only whole small fruits are used for jams, but larger fruits can also be used by cutting them up finely and making them into a pulp. When small fruits are used, some or all of the seeds are sometimes removed, but generally, the seeds are kept if they aren't too big. Jam is made thick by boiling it for a long time, and when it's finished, it usually has a smooth texture. However, a key point to remember is not to cook it for too long, as jam becomes unappetizing if it's too thick.

Fruit may be purchased purposely for jam, but for the most part, this form of preserve is made of imperfect or very ripe fruits that are not suitable for canning, preserves, and other processes that require almost perfect fruit. If this point is kept in mind, it will be possible, during the canning season, to make into a delicious jam fruit that would otherwise be wasted.

Fruit can be bought specifically for making jam, but usually, this type of preserve is made from imperfect or overly ripe fruits that aren't good enough for canning, preserves, and other processes that need nearly perfect fruit. Keeping this in mind, during the canning season, it's possible to turn fruit that would otherwise go to waste into a delicious jam.

76. STRAWBERRY JAM.--As strawberries have very small seeds, this fruit makes an excellent jam.

76. STRAWBERRY JAM.--Since strawberries have tiny seeds, this fruit makes a fantastic jam.

STRAWBERRY JAM

  • 4 qt. strawberries
  • 2 lb. sugar

Wash and hull the strawberries. Then mash them in a preserving kettle and add the sugar to them. Place over the fire, and boil slowly until the mixture becomes thick, stirring frequently to prevent the jam from sticking to the kettle and scorching. When the jam is cooked to the proper consistency, the juice should test as for jelly. Pour the mixture into hot sterilized glasses, cool, and then seal and label.

Wash and remove the stems from the strawberries. Then mash them in a large pot and add sugar. Place it on the stove and simmer slowly until the mixture thickens, stirring often to prevent it from sticking to the pot and burning. When the jam reaches the right consistency, it should pass the jelly test. Pour the mixture into hot sterilized jars, let it cool, then seal and label.

77. RASPBERRY JAM.--Both red and black raspberries are much used for jam. Some persons like to remove the seeds from raspberry jam, but as very little pulp remains after the seeds are taken out, this plan is not recommended.

77. RASPBERRY JAM.--Both red and black raspberries are widely used for jam. Some people prefer to remove the seeds from raspberry jam, but since very little pulp is left after the seeds are taken out, this method is not advisable.

RASPBERRY JAM

  • 4 qt. raspberries
  • 2 lb. sugar

Look over the raspberries carefully and then wash. Put them into a preserving kettle with the sugar. Heat to the boiling point, and cook slowly for a few minutes. Then mash the berries to a pulp, and continue to cook until the mixture thickens and the juice tests as for jelly. Pour into hot sterilized jars, cool, seal, and label.

Examine the raspberries closely and then rinse them. Place them into a preserving pot with the sugar. Heat until boiling, and cook slowly for a few minutes. Then mash the berries into a pulp and keep cooking until the mixture thickens and the juice tests as jelly. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label.

78. GREEN-GAGE JAM.--Green gages make a smooth, tart jam that appeals to most persons. The seeds of the plums are, of course, removed, but the skins are allowed to remain in the jam.

78. GREEN-GAGE JAM.--Green gages create a smooth, tangy jam that most people enjoy. The plum seeds are, of course, removed, but the skins are left in the jam.

GREEN-GAGE JAM

  • 4 qt. green-gage plums
  • 4 lb. sugar
  • 1-1/2 c. hot water

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and remove the seeds, but not the skins. Dissolve the sugar in the water over the fire, and when it comes to the boiling point, add the plums. Cook slowly until the plums are mushy and the entire mixture is thick. Pour into sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label. If sweet plums are used, decrease the quantity of sugar.

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and take out the pits, but leave the skins on. Dissolve the sugar in water over heat, and when it starts boiling, add the plums. Cook slowly until the plums are soft and the mixture thickens. Pour into sterilized jars, let cool, seal, and label. If you’re using sweet plums, use less sugar.

79. GOOSEBERRY JAM.--When gooseberries are well ripened, they make very good jam. As this fruit is rather tart, considerable sugar must be used if a sweet jam is desired.

79. GOOSEBERRY JAM.--When gooseberries are fully ripe, they make great jam. Since this fruit is quite tart, you'll need to use a good amount of sugar if you want a sweet jam.

GOOSEBERRY JAM
  • 4 qt. gooseberries
  • 3 lb. sugar

Remove the stems and blossom ends from the gooseberries and wash thoroughly. Add the sugar to the berries in a preserving kettle. Bring to a rapid boil, cook for a few minutes, and then mash the berries to a pulp. Cook until the mixture thickens and tests as for jelly. Pour into hot sterilized glasses, cool, seal, and label.

Remove the stems and blossom ends from the gooseberries and wash them thoroughly. Add the sugar to the berries in a preserving pot. Bring it to a rapid boil, cook for a few minutes, and then mash the berries into a pulp. Cook until the mixture thickens and passes the jelly test. Pour into hot sterilized jars, let it cool, seal, and label.

80. BLACKBERRY JAM.--Probably no jam is so well liked as that made from blackberries. Some varieties of these are large in size and contain considerable pulp in proportion to seeds. These are especially suitable for jam.

80. BLACKBERRY JAM.--Probably no jam is as popular as the one made from blackberries. Some types of these berries are quite large and have a high amount of pulp compared to seeds. These are particularly good for making jam.

BLACKBERRY JAM
  • 4 qt. blackberries
  • 1/2 c. hot water
  • 2 lb. sugar

Wash the berries thoroughly, and put them over the fire with the water. Bring to the boiling point, and boil slowly for a few minutes. Then mash the berries, add the sugar, and cook the mixture until, when tested, it is of a jelly-like consistency. Pour into hot, sterilized glasses, cool, and label.

Wash the berries well and put them in a pot with the water. Bring it to a boil, then simmer for a few minutes. After that, mash the berries, add the sugar, and cook the mixture until it reaches a jelly-like consistency when tested. Pour it into hot, sterilized jars, let it cool, and label.


BUTTERS

81. FRUIT BUTTERS are a form of preserves similar to jams, and are used in the place of preserves, jams, conserves, or marmalades. The fruit used for this purpose, which may be either large or small, is usually very ripe and somewhat soft. Therefore, as in the case of jams, imperfect fruits that are not suitable for other purposes can be used very well for butters.

81. FRUIT BUTTERS are a type of preserve similar to jams and are used as a substitute for preserves, jams, conserves, or marmalades. The fruit used for this purpose, whether large or small, is typically very ripe and somewhat soft. Thus, like jams, imperfect fruits that aren't suitable for other uses can work perfectly for butters.

Butters made from fruits differ from jams in that both the skins and seeds are always removed. The completed mixture is smooth and thick, having been made thick by long boiling and evaporation, rather than by the addition of large quantities of sugar. In fact, less sugar is used for butters proportionately than for any other preserved fruit. Spices are generally used in butters, so that the mixture is very highly flavored.

Butters made from fruits are different from jams because both the skins and seeds are always taken out. The final mixture is smooth and thick, achieved through long boiling and evaporation instead of adding a lot of sugar. Actually, less sugar is used in butters compared to any other preserved fruit. Spices are usually added to butters, which makes the mixture very flavorful.

To prevent butters from scorching, they should be stirred constantly for a long period of time. This stirring becomes very tiresome, but it should not be stopped or the mixture is certain to scorch. If they are properly cooked, butters keep well with very little care in storage. Crocks are generally used for the storage of butters, but glasses or jars may be substituted.

To keep butters from burning, you need to stir them constantly for a long time. This can get pretty exhausting, but you can't stop; otherwise, the mixture will definitely burn. When cooked correctly, butters store well with minimal maintenance. Typically, crocks are used for storing butters, but you can also use glasses or jars as alternatives.

82. APPLE BUTTER.--Apples are very often made into butter, but for this purpose sour apples that will cook soft should be selected. If the procedure explained in the accompanying recipe is followed, very good results may be expected.

82. APPLE BUTTER.--Apples are often turned into butter, but for this, you should choose sour apples that cook down soft. If you follow the instructions in the recipe provided, you can expect great results.

APPLE BUTTER
  • 4 qt. apples
  • 8 qt. cider
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 3 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves
  • 1 tsp. allspice

Peel the apples and quarter them. Boil the cider until it is reduced half. Add the apples to the cider, and cook slowly for about 3 hours, or until they are mushy, stirring constantly with a wooden spoon to prevent the apples from sticking to the bottom of the kettle. At the end of this time, the mixture should be thick and smooth and dark in color. If it gets too thick, more cider can be added. About 1 hour before the cooking is completed, add the sugar and the spices. Even greater care must be exercised from this time on to prevent scorching. If, after cooking 3 hours, the mixture is not sufficiently thick, continue to cook until more of the moisture is evaporated. Have hot sterilized glasses or crocks ready, fill them with the butter, cool, and seal.

Peel the apples and cut them into quarters. Boil the cider until it's reduced by half. Add the apples to the cider and cook slowly for about 3 hours, or until they’re mushy, stirring constantly with a wooden spoon to prevent the apples from sticking to the bottom of the pot. By the end of this time, the mixture should be thick, smooth, and dark in color. If it gets too thick, add more cider. About an hour before cooking is done, add the sugar and spices. Be extra careful from this point on to avoid scorching. If, after cooking for 3 hours, the mixture isn’t thick enough, keep cooking until more moisture evaporates. Have hot sterilized jars or containers ready, fill them with the butter, cool, and seal.

83. PEACH BUTTER.--Peaches are especially satisfactory when made into butter. This fruit does not require such long cooking as apples, as will be seen in the accompanying recipe.

83. PEACH BUTTER.--Peaches are particularly great when turned into butter. This fruit doesn't need to be cooked as long as apples, as you’ll see in the recipe below.

PEACH BUTTER
  • 4 qt. peaches
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 1 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1/2 tsp. cloves

Wash the peaches, rub them to remove the fuzz, cut them in half, and take out the seeds. Measure the peaches and put them with the water into the preserving kettle, bring them to a boil, and cook until they are thoroughly softened. Then press them through a sieve or a colander, return the pulp to the preserving kettle, and add the sugar and the spices. Cook slowly for 1 or 2 hours, or until it has become a rich dark, clear color. Pour the butter into hot sterilized glasses or crocks, cool, and seal.

Wash the peaches, rub off the fuzz, cut them in half, and remove the pits. Measure the peaches and put them with the water into the preserving pot, bring to a boil, and cook until they're completely soft. Then press them through a sieve or colander, return the pulp to the preserving pot, and add the sugar and spices. Cook slowly for 1 or 2 hours, or until it turns a rich dark, clear color. Pour the butter into hot sterilized jars or containers, let it cool, and seal.

84. PEAR BUTTER.--An appetizing fruit butter can be made from pears in the same way that peach butter is made.

84. PEAR BUTTER.--You can make a delicious fruit butter from pears just like you would with peach butter.

PEAR BUTTER
  • 4 qt. pears, quartered
  • 2 c. hot water
  • 1 lb. sugar
  • 2 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves

Wash, cut, and core the pears, but do not peel them. Cut them into quarters, and put the quarters into a preserving kettle with the water. Bring to the boiling point, and boil until soft or mushy. Remove from the kettle and force through a sieve or a colander. To the pulp, add the sugar and spices, return to the kettle, and cook slowly for about 2 hours, stirring constantly to prevent scorching. If 2 hours is not sufficient to cook the mixture dry, cook a little longer. Pour into hot sterilized glasses or jars, cool, and seal.

Wash, cut, and core the pears, but don't peel them. Cut them into quarters and put the quarters into a pot with the water. Bring it to a boil and cook until they're soft or mushy. Take them out of the pot and push through a sieve or colander. To the pulp, add sugar and spices, return to the pot, and cook slowly for about 2 hours, stirring constantly to avoid burning. If 2 hours isn't enough to cook the mixture down, cook it a bit longer. Pour into hot sterilized jars or glasses, let cool, and seal.

85. PLUM BUTTER.--Another very good way in which to preserve plums for future use is to make butter of them. The accompanying recipe explains the correct procedure for butter of this kind.

85. PLUM BUTTER.--Another great way to preserve plums for later use is to make plum butter. The recipe below describes the proper method for making this type of butter.

PLUM BUTTER
  • 4 qt. plums
  • 1 c. hot water
  • 3 lb. sugar
  • 2 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1/2 tsp. cloves

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and remove the seeds. Put the plums with the water into a preserving kettle, and boil until they are soft. Press them through a sieve or a colander, return to the preserving kettle, and add the sugar and spices. Boil until the mixture is thick and jelly-like, stirring constantly to prevent scorching. Pour into hot sterilized crocks or glasses, cool, and seal. If very sour plums are used, increase the amount of sugar.

Wash the plums, cut them in half, and take out the pits. Place the plums and water into a preserving pot, and boil until they’re soft. Press them through a sieve or colander, return to the pot, and add the sugar and spices. Boil the mixture until it thickens to a jelly-like consistency, stirring constantly to avoid burning. Pour into hot sterilized jars or containers, let cool, and seal. If you’re using very sour plums, add more sugar.



PICKLING

PRINCIPLES OF PICKLING

86. PICKLING consists in preserving fruits and vegetables in vinegar or brine. Each of these liquids acts as a preservative, so that the receptacles, or containers, for the food do not have to be sealed air-tight, nor does the preserved food require much care in order to have it keep perfectly.

86. PICKLING is about preserving fruits and vegetables in vinegar or brine. Both of these liquids work as preservatives, which means that the containers for the food don’t have to be sealed tightly, and the preserved food doesn’t need much maintenance to stay fresh.

The effect of the pickling liquids on both fruits and vegetables is very similar. The salt in the brine or the vinegar hardens the cellulose of the foods to such an extent that they are impervious to the action of bacteria. While this permits the foods to keep well, it also makes them difficult to digest, a fact that must be remembered when pickled foods are included in the diet.

The effect of pickling liquids on fruits and vegetables is quite similar. The salt in the brine or the vinegar toughens the cellulose of the foods so much that they become resistant to bacteria. While this helps the foods last longer, it also makes them harder to digest, which is important to consider when including pickled foods in your diet.

87. The procedure in pickling is simple. After the fruit or vegetable is cleaned and prepared in the way desired, it is merely a matter of placing the food in sterilized jars or crocks, pouring the hot preserving liquid over it, allowing it to cool, and then storing it. In some cases the food is cooked, and in others it is not. As a rule, spices of some kind or other are added, both to aid in preserving and to impart flavor.

87. The process of pickling is straightforward. Once the fruit or vegetable is cleaned and prepared as you like, it just involves putting the food in sterilized jars or containers, pouring hot preserving liquid over it, letting it cool, and then storing it. Sometimes the food is cooked, and other times it isn't. Generally, various spices are added, both to help with preservation and to add flavor.

88. Practically all large fruits and many vegetables are pickled, as is shown in the recipes that follow. Foods preserved by pickling are known as either pickles or relishes. While both products are similar in many respects, relishes are distinguished from pickles in that, as a rule, they are made up from more than one kind of fruit or vegetable and usually the pieces are cut or chopped and not put up whole. Often the foods in relishes are chopped or cut so fine as to make it almost impossible to tell what the fruit or vegetable was originally.

88. Almost all large fruits and many vegetables are pickled, as shown in the recipes that follow. Foods preserved by pickling are referred to as either pickles or relishes. While both products share many similarities, relishes are different from pickles in that they typically consist of more than one type of fruit or vegetable, and the pieces are usually chopped or diced rather than kept whole. Often, the ingredients in relishes are chopped so finely that it's nearly impossible to identify the original fruit or vegetable.

The food value of both these products is not extremely high, unless a great quantity of sugar is used in the pickling. This is sometimes the case with pickled peaches or pears, but seldom if ever with pickled vegetables.

The nutritional value of both these products isn't very high unless a lot of sugar is added during pickling. This is often true for pickled peaches or pears, but rarely, if ever, for pickled vegetables.



RECIPES FOR PICKLING

PICKLES


89. SMALL CUCUMBER PICKLES.--Perhaps the most common pickles are small cucumbers pickled according to the accompanying recipe. Such pickles meet with favor and serve very well as appetizers. The cucumbers selected should be small, so that they will be solid all the way through.

89. SMALL CUCUMBER PICKLES.--One of the most popular pickles is small cucumbers pickled using the recipe provided. These pickles are well-liked and make great appetizers. The cucumbers chosen should be small to ensure they are crunchy throughout.

SMALL CUCUMBER PICKLES
  • 1 gal. water
  • 4 c. coarse salt
  • 200 small cucumbers
  • 1/2 gal. vinegar
  • 1-1/2 tsp. celery seed
  • 1 lb. light-brown sugar
  • 1/2 tsp. mustard seed
  • 1 tsp. salt
  • 1 oz. stick cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. whole cloves

Make a brine of the water and the coarse salt, pour it over the cucumbers, and allow them to stand for 24 hours. At the end of this time, pour off the brine, wash the pickles in cold water, and place them into crocks. Heat the vinegar, add the celery seed, sugar, mustard seed, salt, cinnamon, and cloves, and bring the mixture to the boiling point. Pour this over the pickles in the crocks, cover closely while hot, and place in storage. If the pickles are desired sweet, add more brown sugar to the mixture.

Make a brine with the water and coarse salt, pour it over the cucumbers, and let them sit for 24 hours. After that, pour off the brine, rinse the pickles in cold water, and put them into crocks. Heat the vinegar, add celery seeds, sugar, mustard seeds, salt, cinnamon, and cloves, and bring the mixture to a boil. Pour this over the pickles in the crocks, cover tightly while hot, and store them. If you want the pickles to be sweet, add more brown sugar to the mixture.

90. SLICED-CUCUMBER PICKLES.--Large cucumbers cut into slices may be pickled in practically the same way as small cucumbers. At times, when small cucumbers are hard to get, large cucumbers will take their place very well. In fact, some housewives prefer sliced cucumber pickles to the small ones.

90. SLICED-CUCUMBER PICKLES.--Large cucumbers cut into slices can be pickled almost the same way as small cucumbers. Sometimes, when small cucumbers are hard to find, large cucumbers work just as well. In fact, some cooks prefer sliced cucumber pickles over the small ones.

SLICED-CUCUMBER PICKLES
  • 1 gal. sliced cucumbers
  • 1 c. coarse salt
  • 1-1/2 qt. vinegar
  • 1 pt. water
  • 1 tsp. pepper
  • 3 tsp. mustard
  • 1 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves
  • 4 onions, chopped
  • 1 c. brown sugar
  • 1 Tb. salt

Select rather large cucumbers. Wash and peel them and cut into 1/4-inch slices. Sprinkle well with salt, and mix the salt among the layers of cucumbers. Allow this to stand for 24 hours; then drain and wash in clear cold water. To the vinegar and water add the spices, onion, sugar, and salt. Heat this to the boiling point, pour over the sliced cucumbers, and pack them into jars or crocks. Seal while hot and store.

Select fairly large cucumbers. Wash and peel them, then cut into 1/4-inch slices. Sprinkle generously with salt and mix the salt among the layers of cucumbers. Let this sit for 24 hours; then drain and rinse in cold water. To the vinegar and water, add the spices, onion, sugar, and salt. Heat this to boiling, pour it over the sliced cucumbers, and pack them into jars or crocks. Seal while hot and store.

91. CUCUMBERS IN BRINE.--Cucumbers may also be preserved in brine, stored, and pickled in vinegar later in any quantity, as desired.

91. CUCUMBERS IN BRINE.--You can also preserve cucumbers in brine, store them, and then pickle them in vinegar later in any amount you want.

Pour 1 gallon of boiling water over 4 cupfuls of coarse salt. This should make brine that is heavy enough to support an egg. Wash cucumbers of any desired size, put them into a sterilized crock, in layers, and pour the brine, which has been allowed to cool, over the cucumbers until they are entirely covered. Cover the top of the crock well and store. Cucumbers preserved in this way may be taken from the brine at any time and pickled. To do this, soak them in fresh water to remove the salty taste. The fresh water may have to be poured off and replaced several times. After they have been freshened sufficiently, pickle them in vinegar and season them in any desirable way.

Pour 1 gallon of boiling water over 4 cups of coarse salt. This will create brine that is heavy enough to float an egg. Wash cucumbers of any size, place them in a sterilized jar in layers, and pour the cooled brine over the cucumbers until they are completely submerged. Cover the jar tightly and store it. Cucumbers preserved this way can be removed from the brine at any time and pickled. To do this, soak them in fresh water to get rid of the salty taste. You might need to change the fresh water several times. Once they have been rinsed enough, pickle them in vinegar and season them however you like.

92. PICKLED BEANS.--String beans that are pickled make a good relish to serve with meals. Unlike cucumbers that are pickled, the beans are cooked before the preserving liquid is added. The accompanying recipe is for either wax or green beans.

92. PICKLED BEANS.--Pickled string beans make a great side dish to serve with meals. Unlike pickled cucumbers, the beans are cooked before the preserving liquid is added. The following recipe works for either wax or green beans.

PICKLED BEANS
  • 4 qt. beans
  • 1-1/2 qt. vinegar
  • 1 c. brown sugar
  • 1 tsp. salt
  • 1/2 tsp. pepper
  • 1 tsp. allspice
  • 1 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves

Select large, firm, tender wax or green beans. Cover them with water to which has been added 1 level teaspoonful of salt to each quart and put them over the fire to cook. Boil the beans until they can be pierced with a fork, remove from the fire, drain, and pack into jars or crocks. To the vinegar add the sugar, salt, and spices. Bring this mixture to the boiling point, and pour it over the beans in the jars or crocks, filling them completely or covering the beans well. Close tight and store.

Select large, firm, tender wax or green beans. Cover them with water mixed with 1 teaspoon of salt for each quart, and put them on the heat to cook. Boil the beans until you can easily pierce them with a fork, then remove from the heat, drain, and pack them into jars or crocks. Add sugar, salt, and spices to the vinegar. Bring this mixture to a boil and pour it over the beans in the jars or crocks, filling them completely or ensuring the beans are well covered. Seal tightly and store.

93. PICKLED BEETS.--Pickled beets meet with much favor as a relish. Like pickled beans, they must be cooked before they can be pickled; also, unless they are very small, they should be sliced before pickling as the recipe points out.

93. PICKLED BEETS.--Pickled beets are quite popular as a side dish. Similar to pickled beans, they need to be cooked before pickling; additionally, unless they are very small, they should be sliced before pickling, as the recipe indicates.

PICKLED BEETS
  • 4 qt. red beets
  • 2 qt. vinegar
  • 2 c. brown sugar
  • 1 tsp. salt
  • 1/2 tsp. pepper
  • 1 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves
  • 1 tsp. allspice

Cut the tops from the red beets, leaving 1 inch of the stems and the roots attached. Scrub well with a vegetable brush, and put to cook in boiling water. Cook until the beets are tender enough to be pierced with a fork. Pour off the hot water and run cold water over them. Remove the roots and stems, and cut into slices of any desired thickness or into dice, if preferred. Pack into jars or crocks. Then bring the vinegar to a boil, and to it add the sugar, salt, and spices. Pour this hot mixture over the beets. Seal the beets while hot, cool, and store.

Cut the tops off the red beets, leaving 1 inch of the stems and roots attached. Scrub them well with a vegetable brush, then cook them in boiling water. Cook until the beets are tender enough to pierce with a fork. Drain the hot water and run cold water over them. Remove the roots and stems, then slice them to your desired thickness or dice them if you prefer. Pack them into jars or crocks. Bring the vinegar to a boil and add the sugar, salt, and spices. Pour this hot mixture over the beets. Seal the beets while hot, let them cool, and store.

94. PICKLED CAULIFLOWER.--Cauliflower is another vegetable that lends itself well to pickling. This food must be cooked, too, before pickling; and to have it just right for packing into the containers, it requires particular attention in cooking.

94. PICKLED CAULIFLOWER.--Cauliflower is another vegetable that works great for pickling. This food also needs to be cooked before pickling, and to get it just right for packing into the containers, it requires careful attention while cooking.

PICKLED CAULIFLOWER
  • 4 qt. cauliflower broken into pieces
  • 2 c. brown sugar
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1/2 tsp. pepper
  • 1 qt. vinegar
  • 1 pt. water

Select firm heads of cauliflower and break them into sections or flowerets. Immerse these in cold water to which has been added 1 teaspoonful of salt to the quart. Allow the cauliflower to stand for 1 hour in the salt water. Remove from the water, and put over the fire to cook in salt water of the same proportion as that used for soaking. Cook until the cauliflower is quite tender, but not so tender as it would be cooked to serve at the table. If this is done, the cauliflower will darken and break into pieces. It should be firm enough not to crush or break easily when it is packed into the jars. When properly cooked, pack closely into jars, add the sugar, salt, and pepper to the vinegar and water, heat to the boiling point, and pour this liquid over the cauliflower, completely covering it. Seal while hot, allow to cool, and store.

Select firm heads of cauliflower and break them into sections or florets. Immerse these in cold water with 1 teaspoon of salt per quart. Let the cauliflower sit in the salt water for 1 hour. Remove it from the water, and cook it in salt water in the same proportion as used for soaking. Cook until the cauliflower is tender but not too soft, as overcooking will cause it to darken and break apart. It should be firm enough to avoid crushing or breaking easily when packed into jars. Once properly cooked, pack tightly into jars, add sugar, salt, and pepper to the vinegar and water, heat to a boil, and pour this liquid over the cauliflower, completely covering it. Seal while hot, let it cool, and store.

95. PICKLED ONIONS.--Pickled onions are well liked by many. For pickling purposes, medium small onions of uniform size are most suitable. Owing to their nature, onions cannot be pickled so quickly as some of the vegetables mentioned, but, otherwise, the work is done in practically the same way.

95. PICKLED ONIONS.--Many people really enjoy pickled onions. For pickling, medium-sized onions that are the same size work best. Because of their nature, onions can’t be pickled as quickly as some of the other vegetables mentioned, but other than that, the process is pretty much the same.

PICKLED ONIONS
  • 4 qt. onions
  • 2 qt. spiced vinegar

Select onions that are as nearly the same size as possible. Peel them and let them stand in fresh water for 24 hours. Pour off this water, and over the onions pour a brine made by adding 2 cupfuls of salt to each gallon of water. Allow them to stand in this brine for 3 days, changing the brine once during this time. Remove the onions from the brine, and freshen in cold water for 2 hours. Drain the onions and cook them in the spiced vinegar for 1/2 hour. Any of the spiced vinegars given for the other vegetables may be used. After cooking, pack the onions with the liquid into jars, seal, cool, and store.

Select onions that are as close in size as possible. Peel them and soak them in fresh water for 24 hours. Drain this water, then pour a brine made by adding 2 cups of salt to each gallon of water over the onions. Let them sit in this brine for 3 days, changing the brine once during that period. After that, take the onions out of the brine and rinse them in cold water for 2 hours. Drain the onions and cook them in the spiced vinegar for 30 minutes. You can use any of the spiced vinegars listed for the other vegetables. Once cooked, pack the onions with the liquid into jars, seal them, cool, and store.

96. PICKLED PEACHES.--Among the fruits that may be pickled, peaches seem to meet with great favor. They, as well as pickled pears and pickled crab apples, make a relish that adds variety to the foods that are served in the home from day to day. The pickling process does not differ materially from that applied to vegetables, as the accompanying recipe shows.

96. PICKLED PEACHES.--Among the fruits that can be pickled, peaches are very popular. They, along with pickled pears and pickled crab apples, create a condiment that adds variety to the everyday meals served at home. The pickling process is not much different from the one used for vegetables, as the recipe below demonstrates.

PICKLED PEACHES
  • 2 lb. brown sugar
  • 1 qt. vinegar
  • 1 oz. stick cinnamon
  • 4 qt. peaches
  • 2 Tb. cloves

Boil the sugar, vinegar, and cinnamon together until they begin to look sirupy. Wash the peaches and rub off the fuzz. Stick one or two cloves into each peach, and drop the peaches into the sirup. Cook them until they may be easily pierced with a fork. Put them into jars, pour the sirup over them, filling each jar, and seal while hot. Allow the jars to cool and store. The peaches may be peeled if desired. It may also be more convenient to cook only part of the peaches in the sirup at one time, cooking the remainder after these have been taken out and put into jars.

Boil the sugar, vinegar, and cinnamon together until it starts to look syrupy. Wash the peaches and rub off the fuzz. Insert one or two cloves into each peach, then drop them into the syrup. Cook them until they can be easily pierced with a fork. Place them in jars, pour the syrup over them until each jar is full, and seal them while hot. Let the jars cool and store them. You can peel the peaches if you want. It might also be easier to cook only part of the peaches in the syrup at a time, cooking the rest after the first batch has been removed and jarred.

97. PICKLED PEARS.--Pears also lend themselves readily to pickling. Specific directions are not given here, because they are pickled in exactly the same way as peaches. The pears may be peeled or not, as desired.

97. PICKLED PEARS.--Pears are also great for pickling. Specific instructions aren't provided here because they're pickled in the same way as peaches. You can peel the pears or leave the skin on, depending on your preference.

98. PICKLED CRAB APPLES.--Crab apples that are to be pickled should preferably be of a large variety. The directions given for pickling peaches apply also to this fruit. The crab apples should be examined carefully to make certain that they contain no worms. Also, the stems should be left on, and they should be washed thoroughly with the blossom ends cut out.

98. PICKLED CRAB APPLES.--Crab apples that you want to pickle should ideally be of a large variety. The instructions for pickling peaches also apply to this fruit. You should carefully check the crab apples to ensure they have no worms. Additionally, keep the stems on, and wash them thoroughly, cutting out the blossom ends.


RECIPES FOR RELISHES

99. MUSTARD PICKLES.--Among the relishes, mustard pickles are very popular. This relish is made up of a large number of vegetables, namely, cucumbers, string beans, green peppers, red sweet peppers, onions, green tomatoes, cauliflower, and green Lima beans.

99. MUSTARD PICKLES.--Among the condiments, mustard pickles are really popular. This relish is made from a variety of vegetables, including cucumbers, green beans, green peppers, red bell peppers, onions, green tomatoes, cauliflower, and green Lima beans.

MUSTARD PICKLES
  • 1 pt. small cucumbers
  • 1 qt. string beans
  • 4 green peppers
  • 4 red sweet peppers
  • 1 pt. small onions
  • 1 pt. green tomatoes
  • 1 pt. cauliflower
  • 1 c. green Lima beans
  • 3/4 c. flour
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 4 Tb. powdered mustard
  • 2 tsp. tumeric
  • 1 Tb. celery seed
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1/2 tsp. pepper
  • 1 qt. vinegar
  • 1 pt. water

Wash all the vegetables and prepare them by cutting them into the desired sizes. The onions and cucumbers should be of a size that will not require cutting. Put all the vegetables together, cover them with salt water made by adding 1 cupful of salt to each 2 quarts of water, and allow them to stand in this for 24 hours. At the end of this time, drain off the brine and freshen the vegetables in clear water for about 2 hours. Mix the dry ingredients together, heat the vinegar and water, and pour it over all. Bring this mixture to the boiling point, and pour it over the vegetables. Fill the jars with the hot mixture, seal, cool, and store.

Wash all the vegetables and cut them to your preferred sizes. The onions and cucumbers should be left whole. Combine all the vegetables, cover them with saltwater made by mixing 1 cup of salt with 2 quarts of water, and let them sit for 24 hours. After that, drain the brine and rinse the vegetables in clean water for about 2 hours. Mix the dry ingredients, heat the vinegar and water, and pour it over everything. Bring this mixture to a boil, then pour it over the vegetables. Fill the jars with the hot mixture, seal them, let them cool, and store.

100. SPANISH RELISH.--Another satisfactory relish made up of a large number of vegetables and spices is Spanish relish. In its preparation, however, the vegetables are not chopped very fine.

100. SPANISH RELISH.--Another tasty relish made from a variety of vegetables and spices is Spanish relish. In its preparation, though, the vegetables are not chopped very small.

SPANISH RELISH
  • 12 green sweet peppers
  • 12 red sweet peppers
  • 12 medium-sized onions
  • 12 green tomatoes
  • 2 medium-sized heads of cabbage
  • 1 tsp. salt
  • 1 lb. brown sugar
  • 1/2 tsp. black pepper
  • 1/4 tsp. Cayenne pepper
  • 1 Tb. mustard seed
  • 1 tsp. celery seed
  • 1-1/2 qt. vinegar

Wash the vegetables and chop them into coarse pieces. Cover them with salt water made by adding 1 cupful of salt to a gallon of water and allow them to stand in this brine for 6 to 8 hours. At the end of this time, drain off the salt water and wash with clear water. Add the salt, sugar, and spices to the vinegar, and bring this mixture to the boiling point. Then pour it over the mixture of vegetables, pack all into sterilized crocks or jars, seal, cool, and store.

Wash the vegetables and chop them into large pieces. Cover them with salt water made by mixing 1 cup of salt into a gallon of water and let them soak in this brine for 6 to 8 hours. Once that's done, drain the salt water and rinse the vegetables with clean water. Combine the salt, sugar, and spices with the vinegar, and heat this mixture until boiling. Then pour it over the vegetables, pack everything into sterilized jars or containers, seal them, let them cool, and store.

101. CHOW CHOW.--Still another relish in which a variety of vegetables is used is chow chow. This relish is well and favorably known to housewives for the zest it imparts to meals.

101. CHOW CHOW.--Another condiment that uses a mix of vegetables is chow chow. This relish is well-known and appreciated by home cooks for the flavor it adds to meals.

CHOW CHOW
  • 2 qt. small green tomatoes
  • 6 green peppers
  • 6 red peppers
  • 1 small head of cabbage
  • 2 bunches celery
  • 1 pt. small onions
  • 1 qt. small cucumbers
  • 3 qt. vinegar
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 2 c. brown sugar
  • 1/2 tsp. black pepper
  • 2 Tb. mustard seed
  • 2 Tb. tumeric
  • 2 Tb. allspice
  • 1 Tb. cloves
  • 1 Tb. cinnamon

Wash the vegetables and cut them into very small pieces. Cover them with salt water made by adding 1 cupful of salt to a gallon of water, and let them stand in this for 6 to 8 hours. Drain at the end of this time, and wash with cold water. Heat the vinegar, and to it add the salt, sugar, and spices. Add this to the vegetables and cook until they are soft. Pack into sterilized jars, seal while hot, cool, and store.

Wash the vegetables and chop them into tiny pieces. Soak them in salt water made by adding 1 cup of salt to a gallon of water, and let them sit for 6 to 8 hours. After that, drain and rinse with cold water. Heat the vinegar, then stir in the salt, sugar, and spices. Combine this mixture with the vegetables and cook until they’re soft. Pack them into sterilized jars, seal while hot, let them cool, and store.

102. BEET RELISH.--A relish in which cooked beets are the principal ingredient may be made up from the accompanying recipe. As pickled beets in any form are usually well liked, this relish may be put up for the variety it offers.

102. BEET RELISH.--You can make a relish with cooked beets as the main ingredient using the recipe below. Since pickled beets are generally popular, this relish can be prepared for the variety it provides.

BEET RELISH
  • 1 qt. cooked beets, chopped
  • 1 c. horseradish root, grated
  • 1 c. vinegar
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1/2 c. sugar
  • 1 tsp. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves

Cook the beets in the usual way. When they are tender, remove the skins and chop quite fine. Add the grated horseradish to the beets. To the vinegar, add the salt, sugar, and spices and heat to the boiling point. Pour this mixture over the vegetable mixture, pack all into hot sterilized jars, seal, cool, and store.

Cook the beets as you normally would. Once they’re tender, peel off the skins and chop them finely. Mix the grated horseradish with the beets. In a separate bowl, combine the vinegar, salt, sugar, and spices, and heat until boiling. Pour this mixture over the vegetables, pack everything into hot sterilized jars, seal them, let them cool, and store.

103. CHILLI SAUCE.--Chilli sauce is a well-known relish in which ripe tomatoes, red or green peppers, and onions are combined with spices and vinegar. Although not so many vegetables are used in this relish as in those which precede, it merits a place among the canned foods prepared for future use.

103. CHILLI SAUCE.--Chilli sauce is a popular condiment that combines ripe tomatoes, red or green peppers, and onions with spices and vinegar. While it doesn't include as many vegetables as the previous relishes, it definitely deserves a spot among the canned foods made for future use.

CHILLI SAUCE
  • 2 qt. medium-sized ripe tomatoes
  • 2 red or green peppers, finely chopped
  • 2 onions, finely chopped
  • 2 c. vinegar
  • 1/2 c. sugar
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1 tsp. ground cloves
  • 2 tsp. ground cinnamon
  • 2 tsp. celery salt

Blanch the tomatoes in boiling water until the skins loosen. Then remove the skins and stem ends, chop the tomatoes, and put them into a preserving kettle with the chopped peppers and chopped onions. Heat gradually to the boiling point, add the vinegar, sugar, salt, and spices, and cook slowly until the mixture is quite thick. This will require from 2 to 3 hours. Then put the hot sauce into sterilized bottles or jars, seal, allow them to cool, and store.

Blanch the tomatoes in boiling water until the skins start to loosen. Then remove the skins and stems, chop the tomatoes, and place them in a large pot along with the chopped peppers and onions. Heat it gradually until it boils, then add the vinegar, sugar, salt, and spices, and simmer until the mixture thickens. This will take about 2 to 3 hours. After that, pour the hot sauce into sterilized bottles or jars, seal them, let them cool, and store.

104. GREEN-TOMATO PICKLE.--A pleasing relish may be made from green tomatoes after the frost has come in the fall and tomatoes on the vines will not mature.

104. GREEN-TOMATO PICKLE.--You can make a tasty relish from green tomatoes after the frost hits in the fall and the tomatoes on the vines won’t ripen.

GREEN-TOMATO PICKLE
  • 3 qt. green tomatoes, sliced
  • 2 qt. onions, sliced
  • 1 qt. vinegar
  • 1 pt. water
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1-1/2 lb. brown sugar
  • 2 Tb. cinnamon
  • 2 tsp. cloves
  • 2 tsp. allspice
  • 3 Tb. celery salt
  • 1 Tb. mustard seed

Select firm green tomatoes, wash them, and slice them. Peel the onions, and slice them into slices of the same thickness as the tomatoes, about 1/4 inch being perhaps the most desirable. Mix the tomatoes and onions, sprinkle them generously with salt, and allow them to stand for 24 hours. At the end of this time, pour off any excess liquid; then pour a small quantity of fresh water over them, and drain this off, also. To the vinegar and water, add the salt, sugar, and spices. Heat this mixture to the boiling point, pour it over the mixture of tomatoes and onions, and put into jars. Seal the jars while hot, allow them to cool, and then store.

Select firm green tomatoes, wash them, and slice them. Peel the onions and slice them to match the thickness of the tomatoes, about 1/4 inch is probably best. Mix the tomatoes and onions, sprinkle them generously with salt, and let them sit for 24 hours. After this time, pour off any extra liquid; then pour a small amount of fresh water over them and drain that off too. To the vinegar and water, add the salt, sugar, and spices. Heat this mixture until it boils, then pour it over the tomatoes and onions, and put it into jars. Seal the jars while they're hot, let them cool, and then store them.

105. RIPE-TOMATO PICKLE.--Ripe tomatoes form the basis of another relish known as ripe-tomato pickle. Like other relishes in which tomatoes are used, this relish is very satisfactory for meals in which pickles or relishes may be served.

105. RIPE-TOMATO PICKLE.--Ripe tomatoes are the main ingredient in another condiment called ripe-tomato pickle. Similar to other condiments that use tomatoes, this one is great for meals where pickles or relishes are served.

RIPE-TOMATO PICKLE
  • 2 qt. ripe tomatoes
  • 2 bunches celery
  • 3 red sweet peppers
  • 3 medium-sized onions
  • 1 qt. vinegar
  • 1 Tb. salt
  • 1 c. sugar
  • 1 Tb. mustard seed
  • 1 Tb. ground cloves
  • 1 Tb. ground cinnamon

Blanch the tomatoes until the skins loosen, and then peel them. Remove the stem ends, and cut the tomatoes into quite large pieces. Chop the celery, peppers, and onions coarsely. Cook together until they are almost tender. Pour off the water. Mix all the vegetables together, and pack them into a sterilized stone jar. To the vinegar, add the salt, sugar and spices. Boil and pour this mixture over the vegetables in the stone jar, cover, and allow this to stand at least 2 weeks before using.

Blanch the tomatoes until the skins loosen, then peel them. Remove the stem ends and cut the tomatoes into large pieces. Chop the celery, peppers, and onions into coarse pieces. Cook everything together until they're almost tender. Drain the water. Mix all the vegetables together and pack them into a sterilized glass jar. In the vinegar, add the salt, sugar, and spices. Boil and pour this mixture over the vegetables in the jar, cover it, and let it sit for at least 2 weeks before using.

106. TOMATO CATSUP.--As a condiment to be served with meats, oysters, fish, baked beans, and other foods high in protein, catsup finds considerable use. This relish, which is also called catchup and ketchup, may be made from both vegetables and fruits, but that made from tomatoes seems to be the most desirable to the majority.

106. TOMATO CATSUP.--As a condiment to serve with meats, oysters, fish, baked beans, and other protein-rich foods, catsup is widely used. This sauce, which is also known as catchup and ketchup, can be made from various vegetables and fruits, but the version made from tomatoes is generally preferred by most people.

TOMATO CATSUP
  • 1/2 bu. ripe tomatoes
  • 1/2 c. salt
  • 1 lb. brown sugar
  • 2 qt. vinegar
  • 1 Tb. ground cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. Cayenne pepper
  • 2 Tb. celery salt
  • 2 tsp. ground cloves

Remove the skins from the tomatoes by blanching and cut out the stem ends. Then slice the tomatoes, put them into a preserving kettle over the fire, cook them until they are soft, and force them through a sieve to remove the seeds. Return the pulp to the preserving kettle, add the salt, sugar, vinegar, and spices, and cook the mixture until it is reduced at least half in quantity. Pour into sterilized bottles, seal, cool, and store.

Remove the skins from the tomatoes by blanching them and cut off the stems. Then slice the tomatoes, place them in a preserving kettle over the heat, cook them until they're soft, and strain them through a sieve to get rid of the seeds. Put the pulp back in the preserving kettle, add the salt, sugar, vinegar, and spices, and cook the mixture until it reduces by at least half. Pour it into sterilized bottles, seal them, let them cool, and store.

107. GRAPE CATSUP.--Perhaps the best-known catsup made from fruit is grape catsup. Its uses are practically the same as those of tomato catsup, and it is made in much the same way.

107. GRAPE CATSUP.--One of the most popular catsups made from fruit is grape catsup. Its uses are pretty much the same as those of tomato catsup, and it’s made in a similar way.

GRAPE CATSUP
  • 4 qt. Concord grapes
  • 3 c. vinegar
  • 1 lb. brown sugar
  • 2 Tb. cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves
  • 1 tsp. allspice

Put the grapes to cook with the vinegar. When they have cooked soft enough, press through a sieve to remove the seeds and skins. Add the sugar and spices, and cook until the mixture is rather thick. Stir constantly to prevent scorching. Pour into sterilized bottles, seal, cool, and store.

Put the grapes in a pot with the vinegar. Once they’ve cooked until soft, strain them through a sieve to get rid of the seeds and skins. Add the sugar and spices, and cook until the mixture thickens. Stir constantly to avoid burning. Pour into sterilized bottles, seal them, let them cool, and store.

108. PICKLED WATERMELON RIND.--An unusual, though highly satisfactory, relish may be made from the rind of melons. The accompanying recipe is for pickled watermelon rind, but if desired muskmelon rind may be substituted. In either case, only the white part of the rind should be used.

108. PICKLED WATERMELON RIND.—An unusual, but really tasty, relish can be made from the rind of melons. The recipe below is for pickled watermelon rind, but you can also use muskmelon rind if you prefer. In either case, only the white part of the rind should be used.

PICKLED WATERMELON RIND
  • 4 qt. watermelon rind cut into strips or cubes
  • 1 oz. stick cinnamon
  • 1 Tb. cloves
  • 1 c. water
  • 3 lb. sugar
  • 1 qt. vinegar

Prepare the rind by cutting off the green skin and all the pink flesh on the inside. Cut this rind into strips 1 inch wide and 1 inch thick, and then into cubes, if desired. Cook in water until the rind may be easily pierced with a fork. Add the spices, water, and sugar to the vinegar, and boil until it becomes sirupy. Add to this sirup the cooked watermelon rind and bring to the boiling point. Then pack into sterilized jars, seal, cool, and store.

Prepare the rind by trimming off the green skin and all the pink flesh inside. Cut the rind into strips that are 1 inch wide and 1 inch thick, and then into cubes if you want. Cook it in water until it's tender enough to easily pierce with a fork. Mix the spices, water, and sugar with the vinegar, and boil until it thickens into a syrup. Add the cooked watermelon rind to this syrup and bring it back to a boil. Then pack it into sterilized jars, seal them, let them cool, and store.

109. CRAB-APPLE RELISH.--Among the fruits, crab apples lend themselves best to the making of relish. By the addition of oranges, raisins, and spices, as in this recipe, crab-apple relish is made very desirable and agreeable to the taste.

109. CRAB-APPLE RELISH.--Of all the fruits, crab apples are the best for making relish. By adding oranges, raisins, and spices, as in this recipe, crab-apple relish becomes very appealing and tasty.

CRAB-APPLE RELISH
  • 4 qt. crab apples
  • 3 c. vinegar
  • 4 oranges
  • 4 lb. brown sugar
  • 2 lb. Sultana raisins
  • 1 Tb. powdered cinnamon
  • 1 tsp. cloves
  • 1 tsp. allspice

Wash the crab apples, remove the cores, and cut the apples into small pieces. Put them into a preserving kettle, add the vinegar, the oranges, peeled and sliced, the sugar, the raisins, and the spices. Cook all slowly until the apples are soft. Pour into sterilized jars or glasses, seal, cool, and store.

Wash the crab apples, take out the cores, and chop the apples into small pieces. Place them in a preserving kettle, add the vinegar, the peeled and sliced oranges, the sugar, the raisins, and the spices. Cook everything slowly until the apples are soft. Pour into sterilized jars or glasses, seal them up, let them cool, and store.



JELLY MAKING, PRESERVING, AND PICKLING


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) (a) Give three reasons why the making and use of jelly has value. (b) When are pickles permissible in the diet?

(1) (a) Provide three reasons why making and using jelly is beneficial. (b) When can pickles be included in the diet?

(2) What is necessary for the making of good jelly?

(2) What do you need to make good jelly?

(3) Mention some important points to consider in selecting fruit for jelly making.

(3) List some key points to keep in mind when choosing fruit for making jelly.

(4) (a) What is pectin? (b) Why are ripe fruits not so satisfactory for jelly making as partly green ones?

(4) (a) What is pectin? (b) Why are ripe fruits less suitable for making jelly compared to partly green ones?

(5) Give the test for pectin.

Do the pectin test.

(6) How may jelly be made from fruit juices that do not contain pectin?

(6) How can jelly be made from fruit juices that don't have pectin?

(7) Give the best method of extracting fruit juice for jelly.

(7) Provide the best way to extract fruit juice for jelly.

(8) What material is best for jelly bags? Why?

(8) What material is best for jelly bags? Why?

(9) What is the general proportion of sugar and juice for making: (a) jelly from very sour fruits? (b) jelly from slightly sour fruits?

(9) What is the typical ratio of sugar to juice for making: (a) jelly from very sour fruits? (b) jelly from slightly sour fruits?

(10) Give the method for making jelly by the mean-boiling method.

(10) Provide the method for making jelly using the mean-boiling method.

(11) What is meant by: (a) short boiling? (b) long boiling?

(11) What do we mean by: (a) short boiling? (b) long boiling?

(12) Give two tests for determining when jelly has cooked sufficiently.

(12) Provide two tests to check if the jelly has cooked enough.

(13) (a) How should glasses be prepared before filling them with jelly? (b) How are glasses closed for storing?

(13) (a) How should jars be prepared before filling them with jelly? (b) How are jars sealed for storage?

(14) (a) What are preserves? (b) What kind of fruits should be selected for preserves?

(14) (a) What are preserves? (b) What types of fruits should be chosen for preserves?

(15) Describe the best method of making preserves.

(15) Describe the best way to make preserves.

(16) How do conserves differ from preserves?

(16) What’s the difference between conserves and preserves?

(17) How do marmalades differ from conserves?

(17) How are marmalades different from conserves?

(18) Describe jam.

Describe jelly.

(19) How does fruit butter differ from jams?

(19) What makes fruit butter different from jams?

(20) What are: (a) pickles? (b) relishes?

(20) What are: (a) pickles? (b) relishes?






CONFECTIONS

NATURE AND COMPOSITION

NATURE OF CONFECTIONS

1. CONFECTIONS are such sweetmeats as candy and similar articles, which have for their foundation sugar, sirup, honey, and the like. As is well known, the most important variety of confection is candy, and this is the one that is usually meant when the term confections is mentioned. Confections, however, are not so limited as might be imagined upon first thought, for many delicious dishes whose main ingredient is nuts, fruits, coconut, or pop corn are also placed in this class. To be sure, most of these contain sweetening material of some sort in greater or smaller quantities. Therefore, in its broadest sense, confections may be regarded as preparations having for their chief ingredient sugar or substances containing it, such as molasses, honey, etc., usually mixed with other food materials, such as nuts, fruits, chocolate, starches, and fats, to give them body and consistency, and flavored and colored in any desired way.

1. CONFECTIONS are sweet treats like candy and similar items that are primarily made from sugar, syrup, honey, and other similar ingredients. It's widely recognized that candy is the most significant type of confection, and that's generally what people mean when they refer to confections. However, confections aren't as limited as one might think at first glance, as many tasty dishes with main ingredients like nuts, fruits, coconut, or popcorn also fall into this category. Of course, most of these include some type of sweetener in varying amounts. So, in the broadest sense, confections can be seen as creations that have sugar or sugar-containing substances, like molasses or honey, as their main component, typically combined with other food items like nuts, fruits, chocolate, starches, and fats to give them structure and texture, and flavored and colored in any way desired.

2. The making of confections, and of candy in particular, is both a useful and a delightful pastime that can be indulged in even by those who are only slightly skilled. In fact, with a certain amount of knowledge of the methods used and a little practice, surprising results can be obtained by the amateur candy maker. Then, too, it is a comparatively simple matter to copy the confectioner's work. A considerable variety of candies can often be made from a simple foundation material if a little originality or ingenuity is applied.

2. Making sweets, especially candy, is a fun and useful hobby that anyone can try, even if they're not very skilled. In fact, with some knowledge of the techniques and a bit of practice, even a beginner can achieve impressive results. Plus, it's not too difficult to replicate a professional confectioner's creations. With a bit of creativity or cleverness, you can make a wide variety of candies from a basic recipe.

Since it is an easy matter to prepare foods of this kind and since they can be made at home more cheaply and of more tasty and wholesome materials, it is a decided advantage to make them rather than buy them, particularly if they are used extensively in the home. However, not so much fear need be felt now as formerly with regard to commercially made candies, for much has been done in recent years to compel the use of wholesome materials in candies, especially the cheaper ones that children are apt to buy. The pure-food laws require that no such adulterants as are not food materials and no harmful flavorings, colorings, nor alcoholic beverages be used in making confections. As can well be understood, this is a valuable protection. Consequently, at the present time, the harm, if any, resulting from eating candy comes from either the excessive or the wrong use of it.

Since it’s easy to prepare these kinds of foods and they can be made at home for less money using tastier and healthier ingredients, it’s definitely better to make them rather than buy them, especially if they’re frequently used at home. However, there’s less reason to worry about store-bought candies now than in the past, because a lot has been done in recent years to ensure that healthier ingredients are used in candies, particularly the cheaper ones that kids might buy. Food safety laws require that none of the harmful additives that aren't food ingredients, nor any harmful flavors, colors, or alcoholic ingredients be used in making candies. As you can see, this is a significant protection. Therefore, nowadays, any harm from eating candy usually comes from eating too much or the wrong kind.

3. The taste for confections of all kinds is one that is acquired, and it is often developed to harmful extremes. Therefore, these foods, like most others, should be indulged in only in moderation. They will then prove not only valuable, but entirely unharmful. The greatest precaution that should be observed in their use is in giving them to children. Very young children should not have candy at all, it being much too concentrated for digestive organs that are used to handling only diluted food materials. As they grow older and their diet begins to include more foods, a small quantity of wholesome sweets will not be harmful if it is given at meal time. Adults with normal digestion may eat a reasonable amount of candy and other confections without injury.

3. The enjoyment of all kinds of sweets is something that people learn to appreciate, and it can often be taken to unhealthy levels. So, like most foods, these treats should be enjoyed only in moderation. When consumed appropriately, they can be not only enjoyable but also completely harmless. The main precaution to keep in mind is when giving these foods to children. Very young children shouldn’t have candy at all, as it’s too rich for digestive systems that are still accustomed to processed foods. As they grow up and their diets expand, a small amount of healthy sweets can be fine if given during meals. Adults with normal digestion can enjoy a reasonable amount of candy and other sweets without any problems.

4. To assist in the making of confections in the home, the principles of candy making, as well as those which must be understood for the making of such other foods as are commonly called confections, are given in this Section. In addition, there are included explicit directions for the making of simple candies and confections and of some of the varieties that are more difficult to make. The various operations are not hard to perform, and good results may be expected if each step is carried out as directed. The operations requiring skill and dexterity, such as the coating of bonbons and chocolates, must be repeated several times if results that approach those of the professional confectioner are to be attained. Still, surprisingly good results may be obtained the first time the work is done if directions are followed explicitly.

4. To help you make sweets at home, this section explains the basics of candy making, as well as the essential principles for preparing other treats commonly known as confections. It also includes clear instructions for making simple candies and some of the more complex varieties. The various techniques aren’t too difficult to execute, and you can expect good results if you follow each step as instructed. However, tasks that require skill and precision, like coating bonbons and chocolates, may need to be practiced several times to achieve results close to those of a professional candy maker. Still, you might be pleasantly surprised by how well your first attempt turns out if you follow the directions carefully.


COMPOSITION OF CONFECTIONS

5. CARBOHYDRATE IN CONFECTIONS.--So far as their composition is concerned, confections are largely carbohydrate in the form of sugar. This food material may be one of several different varieties. As is well understood, the high percentage of carbohydrate, which in some cases may be very close to 100 per cent., greatly increases the food value of this variety of foods. Where the percentage is very high, the candies are necessarily hard, for all or nearly all the moisture is driven off in the making. In this case, as in other foods, the more water there is present, the more reduced is the total food value.

5. CARBOHYDRATE IN CONFECTIONS.--In terms of their composition, confections are mainly carbohydrates in the form of sugar. This food component can come in several different types. As is widely known, the high carbohydrate content, which can sometimes be very close to 100 percent, significantly boosts the nutritional value of these foods. When the percentage is extremely high, the candies tend to be hard, since nearly all of the moisture is removed during production. In this situation, as with other foods, the greater the amount of water present, the lower the overall nutritional value.

6. FAT IN CONFECTIONS.--To a certain extent, fat is found in these high-carbohydrate foods. It is supplied largely by the use of milk, condensed milk, cream, butter or butter substitutes, nuts, and chocolate. While these materials are usually added to produce a certain flavor or consistency, they form at the same time an ingredient that greatly increases the food value of the finished product.

6. FAT IN CONFECTIONS.--Fat is present to some degree in these high-carb foods. It mainly comes from ingredients like milk, condensed milk, cream, butter or butter substitutes, nuts, and chocolate. Although these ingredients are often included for flavor or texture, they also contribute significantly to the overall nutritional value of the final product.

7. PROTEIN IN CONFECTIONS.--Protein is not found extensively in confections unless nuts, chocolate, milk, or other foods containing it are used in their preparation. But, even then, sweets are usually eaten in such small quantities that the protein in them does not figure to any great extent, so that, at best, confections are not considered as a source of protein at any time. However, chocolate-coated nuts, as will readily be seen, are a rather high-protein food.

7. PROTEIN IN CONFECTIONS.--You won’t find a lot of protein in confections unless they include nuts, chocolate, milk, or other protein-containing ingredients. Even then, sweets are typically consumed in such small amounts that their protein content isn’t significant, so confections aren’t really seen as a source of protein at all. However, chocolate-covered nuts, as you can easily see, are fairly high in protein.

8. MINERAL SALTS IN CONFECTIONS.--Refined sugar does not contain mineral salts, so that unless other ingredients containing this food substance are added, no mineral salts will be present in confections. It is true that some of the ingredients used, such as milk, fruits, nuts, molasses, honey, maple sirup, etc., contain certain minerals; but just as confections are not taken as a source of protein, so they are not characterized by the minerals in them.

8. MINERAL SALTS IN CONFECTIONS.--Refined sugar lacks mineral salts, so unless other ingredients that contain these nutrients are added, confections won’t have any mineral salts. While some of the ingredients used, like milk, fruits, nuts, molasses, honey, and maple syrup, do have certain minerals, confections are not considered a source of protein, and similarly, they are not defined by the minerals they contain.



CONFECTION MAKING

INGREDIENTS USED IN CONFECTIONS

FOUNDATION MATERIALS

9. SUGAR.--The most important ingredient used in the making of confections is sugar. It is therefore well that the nature of this ingredient be thoroughly understood. Its chief commercial varieties are cane sugar and beet sugar, both of which produce the same results in cookery operations. When sugar is mentioned as an ingredient, plain granulated sugar is meant unless it is otherwise stated. Whether this is cane or beet sugar makes no difference. The fineness and the color of sugar are due to its refinement and the manufacturing processes through which it is put, and these are indicated by various terms and trade names, such as granulated, pulverized, and soft sugars.

9. SUGAR.—The most important ingredient used in making sweets is sugar. It's essential to understand this ingredient thoroughly. Its main types are cane sugar and beet sugar, both of which yield the same results in cooking. When sugar is mentioned as an ingredient, it means regular granulated sugar unless stated otherwise. It doesn't matter whether it's cane or beet sugar. The texture and color of sugar come from its refinement and the manufacturing processes it undergoes, which are described by various terms and brand names like granulated, powdered, and soft sugars.

The grading of granulated sugar is based on the size of its crystals, this sugar coming in three qualities. The coarsest is known as coarse granulated; the next finer, as standard granulated; and the finest, as fine granulated. There is also a fourth grade known as fancy fine, or extra-fine, granulated, and often called fruit, or berry, sugar.

The grading of granulated sugar depends on the size of its crystals, and this sugar comes in three qualities. The coarsest is called coarse granulated; the next finer is known as standard granulated; and the finest is referred to as fine granulated. There's also a fourth grade known as fancy fine or extra-fine granulated, often called fruit or berry sugar.

10. So far as candy is concerned, the coarseness of the sugar does not make a great deal of difference, although the finer sugars are perhaps a little better because they dissolve more quickly in the liquid and are a trifle less likely to crystallize after cooking. When sugar is to be used without cooking, however, its fineness makes a decided difference. Sugars finer than granulated are known as pulverized sugars and are made by grinding granulated sugar in a mill that crushes the crystals. These pulverized sugars are known on the market as coarse powdered, standard powdered, and XXXX powdered, the last being the one that should always be purchased for the making of confectionery where the use of uncooked sugar is required. One of the chief characteristics of sugars of this kind is that they lump to a great extent, the finer the sugar the larger and harder being the lumps. Before sugar that has become lumpy can be used, it must be reduced to its original condition by crushing the lumps with a rolling pin and then sifting the sugar through a fine wire sieve. As explained in Cakes, Cookies, and Puddings, Part 1, sugars of this kind are not suitable for cooking purposes, such as the preparation of cooked icings, etc. These are made from granulated or other coarse sugar, while the uncooked ones are made from XXXX, or confectioners', sugar, as it is sometimes called. Then, too, fine sugars cost more than do the granulated sugars, so it is well to remember that nothing is gained by their use.

10. When it comes to candy, the coarseness of the sugar isn't a huge issue, although finer sugars are maybe a bit better since they dissolve faster in liquids and are less likely to crystallize after cooking. However, when sugar is used without cooking, its fineness really matters. Sugars that are finer than granulated are called pulverized sugars and are created by grinding granulated sugar in a mill that crushes the crystals. These pulverized sugars are sold as coarse powdered, standard powdered, and XXXX powdered, with the last one being the ideal choice for making candy that requires uncooked sugar. A key feature of these sugars is that they tend to clump, with finer sugars forming larger and harder lumps. Before you can use lumpy sugar, you need to break it down to its original state by crushing the lumps with a rolling pin and then sifting it through a fine wire sieve. As explained in Cakes, Cookies, and Puddings, Part 1, these types of sugars aren't suitable for cooking tasks, like preparing cooked icings, etc. Those are made from granulated or other coarse sugar, while uncooked versions are made from XXXX, or confectioners' sugar, as it's sometimes called. Also, fine sugars are pricier than granulated sugars, so keep in mind that there's no benefit in using them.

11. The third variety of sugars, which are known as soft sugars, are purchased by the retail dealer by number. There are fifteen grades of this sugar, ranging from 1 to 15, and the number indicates the color of the sugar. No. 1 is practically white, while No. 15 is very dark, and the intervening numbers vary in color between these two shades. The lightness of the color indicates the amount of refinement the sugars have had. The dark-brown sugars are stronger in flavor and indicate less refinement than the light ones. When brown sugar is required for any purpose, it is usually advisable to use one of the lighter shades, because they are more agreeable in taste than the very dark ones.

11. The third type of sugars, known as soft sugars, are bought by retailers by number. There are fifteen grades of this sugar, ranging from 1 to 15, and the number indicates the sugar's color. No. 1 is almost white, while No. 15 is very dark, with the numbers in between varying in color. The lighter the color, the more refined the sugar is. Dark brown sugars have a stronger flavor and are less refined than the lighter ones. When brown sugar is needed for any purpose, it's usually best to use one of the lighter shades because they taste better than the very dark ones.

12. MOLASSES.--The liquid that remains after most of the sugar has been refined out of the cane juice is known as molasses. The juice from beets does not produce molasses; therefore, all of the molasses found on the market is the product of cane juice. A molasses known as sorghum molasses is made by boiling the sap of sorghum, which is a stout cereal grass, but this variety is seldom found on the general market, it being used locally where it is manufactured. The dark color and the characteristic flavor of molasses are due to the foreign materials that remain in the juice after the removal of the sugar. Molasses is not so sweet as sugar, but it is much used as an ingredient in the making of many delicious confections. As in the case of soft sugars, the lighter the molasses is in color, the more agreeable is the flavor of the confections made from it.

12. MOLASSES.--The liquid that remains after most of the sugar has been extracted from cane juice is called molasses. Beet juice does not produce molasses; thus, all the molasses available on the market comes from cane juice. A type of molasses known as sorghum molasses is created by boiling the sap of sorghum, a hardy cereal grass, but this variety is rarely found in the general market as it is mostly used locally where it is produced. The dark color and distinctive flavor of molasses come from the residual substances left in the juice after the sugar is removed. Molasses isn’t as sweet as sugar, but it is widely used as an ingredient in many tasty treats. Similar to soft sugars, the lighter the molasses is in color, the more pleasant the flavor of the confections made from it.

13. GLUCOSE.--Another substance much used in the making of confections is glucose. It is usually manufactured from the starch of corn and is put on the market under various trade names, but generally it is called corn sirup. Many persons have long considered glucose a harmful food, but this belief has been proved untrue. Glucose has come to be absolutely necessary in some candy making in order to produce certain results. The glucose that the confectioners use is a heavier, stickier substance than the sirups that can be purchased for table use or for cooking, but these do very well for most candy-making purposes. However, none of the glucose preparations are so sweet as sugar, maple sirup, or honey.

13. GLUCOSE.--Another ingredient commonly used in making sweets is glucose. It’s typically produced from corn starch and sold under various brand names, but it’s mostly referred to as corn syrup. Many people have long thought glucose was an unhealthy food, but this belief has been proven false. Glucose has become essential in some candy making to achieve certain effects. The glucose that candy makers use is a thicker, stickier substance than the syrups available for table use or cooking, but those are good enough for most candy-making needs. However, none of the glucose options are as sweet as sugar, maple syrup, or honey.

14. Glucose will not crystallize nor make a creamy substance; neither will it permit any substance that contains more than a very little of it to become creamy. A creamy candy containing a small amount of it will remain soft longer than that made without it; also, it will cream without danger of the formation of large crystals. Because of these characteristics, which are responsible for its use in candy making, a mixture containing glucose will not "go to sugar." Taffy-like confections and clear candies contain a large proportion of glucose, while any that are intended to be creamy, such as bonbons and the centers for chocolates, have only a small amount, if any, glucose in them.

14. Glucose won’t crystallize or create a creamy texture; it also prevents any product that has more than a tiny bit of it from becoming creamy. A creamy candy that contains a small amount of glucose will stay soft longer than one made without it; plus, it will cream without the risk of forming large crystals. Because of these traits, which are why it's used in candy making, a mixture with glucose won’t "turn to sugar." Taffy-like candies and clear confections have a high amount of glucose, while those meant to be creamy, like bonbons and chocolate centers, usually contain only a little or none at all.

15. MAPLE SIRUP AND MAPLE SUGAR.--Maple sirup and maple sugar, because of their pleasing flavor, are used extensively for candy making. Maple sirup is, of course, the basis for maple sugar, for by boiling the sirup to evaporate the water and then stirring it, maple sugar results. When the sirup is used for candy making, it must be boiled, but it seldom requires any liquid other than that which it already contains. On the other hand, maple sugar requires liquid in some form, for it must first be dissolved in a liquid and then boiled with it.

15. MAPLE SYRUP AND MAPLE SUGAR.--Maple syrup and maple sugar are widely used for making candy because of their great flavor. Maple syrup serves as the foundation for maple sugar; by boiling the syrup to evaporate the water and then stirring it, you get maple sugar. When using syrup for candy making, it needs to be boiled, but it usually doesn’t need any additional liquid beyond what it already has. In contrast, maple sugar needs some liquid because it must first be dissolved in a liquid and then boiled together with it.

16. HONEY.--Honey that has been pressed from the comb and is in the form of a heavy sirup is used in the making of various confections. It provides a delightful flavor much different from that of sugar, and when it is cooked it acts in much the same way as glucose.

16. HONEY.--Honey that has been extracted from the comb and is in the form of a thick syrup is used in making various candies. It adds a delightful flavor that's quite different from sugar, and when cooked, it behaves similarly to glucose.


FLAVORINGS

17. KINDS OF FLAVORINGS.--Flavorings are very important in the making of confections, for it is on them that much of the appetizing effect of these foods depends. In fact, unless good flavorings are secured and then used discreetly, tasty results cannot be expected.

17. KINDS OF FLAVORINGS.--Flavorings play a crucial role in making confections because they greatly influence the appealing taste of these foods. In fact, if high-quality flavorings are not obtained and used wisely, you can't expect flavorful results.

The flavorings used in candy making are in reality divided into two classes--natural and artificial.

The flavorings used in candy making are actually divided into two categories—natural and artificial.

18. NATURAL FLAVORINGS.--Under the head of natural flavorings come those which are made from the fruit or the plant that produces the desired flavor. They are known as oils and extracts.

18. NATURAL FLAVORINGS.--Natural flavorings include those derived from the fruit or plant that provides the desired flavor. They are referred to as oils and extracts.

19. The oils are obtained by pressing out the natural flavoring substance from the material containing it. They are usually very strong, so that only a little is needed to flavor a comparatively large quantity of food. Peppermint, wintergreen, and cinnamon are the oils that are used the most.

19. The oils are extracted by pressing the natural flavoring substance from the source material. They are typically very potent, so only a small amount is required to flavor a relatively large amount of food. Peppermint, wintergreen, and cinnamon are the most commonly used oils.

20. EXTRACTS are prepared by using alcohol to extract the flavoring substances from certain materials. The alcohol acts as a preservative, so that the finished extract nearly always contains a high percentage of this material. Vanilla and such flavorings as lemon and orange are examples of extracts that are usually made in this way. A few companies manufacture a product in which glycerine instead of alcohol is used as the preservative. Flavorings so prepared are in the form of a thick, sirupy substance rather than a liquid and are usually sold in a tube.

20. EXTRACTS are made by using alcohol to draw out the flavoring substances from certain materials. The alcohol also helps to preserve the extract, so the final product almost always contains a high percentage of this substance. Vanilla and flavorings like lemon and orange are examples of extracts that are typically made this way. Some companies produce a product that uses glycerine instead of alcohol as a preservative. Flavorings prepared this way are thick and syrupy rather than liquid and are usually sold in a tube.

21. ARTIFICIAL FLAVORINGS.--Flavorings classified as artificial flavorings are of two kinds: those having for their basis substances extracted from coal tar and those prepared by various chemical combinations. They are also known as synthetic flavors. With regard to both healthfulness and taste, they are not so desirable as the natural flavorings.

21. ARTIFICIAL FLAVORINGS.--Artificial flavorings fall into two categories: those made from substances extracted from coal tar and those created through various chemical combinations. They are also referred to as synthetic flavors. In terms of health and taste, they are less desirable than natural flavorings.

22. ADULTERATION OF FLAVORINGS.--As it is a common practice to adulterate flavorings, every manufacturer of these materials is obliged to state on the label of each bottle or tube of flavoring just what its contents consist of. Therefore, when the purchase is made, the label should be carefully examined. Without doubt, vanilla is adulterated more often than any other flavoring, a pure extract of vanilla being seldom found. The beans from which the flavor is extracted are very expensive, so the Tonka bean and other cheaper flavoring substances are often resorted to in the making of this flavoring. However, when large amounts of such things are used, the price of the extract should be less than that charged for the pure extract of the vanilla bean. Many chefs and professional cooks overcome this difficulty by purchasing the vanilla beans and using them for flavoring purposes by soaking or cooking small pieces of them in the material that is to be flavored or grinding the bean in a mortar and using it in the ground form.

22. ADULTERATION OF FLAVORINGS.--Since it's common to adulterate flavorings, every manufacturer of these products must list the ingredients on the label of each bottle or tube of flavoring. So, when you buy it, make sure to check the label carefully. Undoubtedly, vanilla is adulterated more often than any other flavoring, and pure vanilla extract is rarely found. The beans used for extracting the flavor are quite pricey, which is why cheaper alternatives like the Tonka bean and other flavoring agents are often used. However, if a large quantity of these substitutes is used, the price of the extract should be lower than that of pure vanilla bean extract. Many chefs and professional cooks tackle this issue by buying vanilla beans and using them for flavoring by soaking or cooking small pieces in the material they want to flavor or grinding the bean in a mortar and using it in that form.


COLORINGS

23. COLORINGS are used in the making of confections, candy in particular, for two purposes: to make them attractive and to indicate certain flavors. For instance, candies flavored with wintergreen are usually colored pink, while those containing peppermint are colored pale green or are left white. Strawberry and rose flavors are also colored pink; orange and lemon, their respective shades of yellow; violet, lavender; and pistachio and almond, green.

23. COLORINGS are used in making confections, especially candy, for two reasons: to make them visually appealing and to signal specific flavors. For example, candies flavored with wintergreen are typically pink, while peppermint candies are usually a pale green or white. Strawberry and rose flavors are also pink; orange and lemon are different shades of yellow; violet is purple, lavender is light purple; and pistachio and almond are green.

24. The substances used for coloring confections are of two general classes: vegetable and mineral, or chemical. The vegetable colorings, like the natural flavorings, are considered to be the most healthful ones. Some of the chemical colorings are derivatives of coal tar, just as are the coal-tar flavorings. Cochineal, a red color extracted from the bodies of cochineal insects, is a coloring matter much used in the preparation of confections. These coloring materials may be purchased in several forms. The ones most commonly used come in the form of liquid or paste, but frequently colorings are to be had in powder or tablet form.

24. The substances used to color candies fall into two main categories: vegetable and mineral, or chemical. Vegetable colorings, like natural flavorings, are considered the healthiest options. Some chemical colorings are derived from coal tar, just like the coal-tar flavorings. Cochineal, a red dye made from cochineal insects, is widely used in making candies. These coloring agents are available in various forms. The most commonly used ones come as liquids or pastes, but you can also find colorings in powder or tablet form.

25. Discretion must always be observed in the use of colorings. Because of their concentration, they must be greatly diluted and used in only very small amounts. As is well known, pale colors in candies are always more attractive than deep ones. Then, too, when candies contain much color, most persons are likely to consider them harmful to eat. To get the best results, only a little coloring should be added at a time, and each amount added should be mixed in thoroughly. Then the danger of getting too much coloring will be avoided. It should be remembered, however, that if colored candies are kept for any length of time or are exposed to the light, they will fade to a certain extent; consequently, these may be colored a little more deeply than those which are to be used at once.

25. Discretion should always be used when it comes to colorings. Due to their strength, they need to be significantly diluted and used in very small quantities. It's well known that lighter colors in candies are generally more appealing than darker ones. Additionally, when candies are heavily colored, most people tend to think they're unhealthy to eat. For the best results, only a small amount of coloring should be added at a time, and each addition should be mixed in thoroughly. This way, you can avoid adding too much coloring. It's also important to keep in mind that if colored candies are stored for a while or exposed to light, they will fade somewhat; therefore, these can be colored a bit more intensively than those meant for immediate use.


ACIDS

26. To prevent the creaming or the crystallizing of such candy as taffy, an acid of some kind is generally used with the cane sugar in the making of this variety of confection. The acid, upon being boiled with the sugar, changes a part of the cane sugar to invert sugar, and as this does not crystallize, the candy will not become sugary. A similar effect is obtained by adding glucose in sufficient amounts; since it does not crystallize, the cane sugar is prevented from becoming sugary.

26. To stop taffy and similar candies from getting grainy or separating, an acid is usually added to the cane sugar during the cooking process. When the acid is boiled with the sugar, it converts some of the cane sugar into invert sugar, which doesn’t crystallize, keeping the candy smooth. You can achieve a similar result by adding enough glucose; since glucose doesn’t crystallize, it helps keep the cane sugar from becoming grainy.

27. The acids most commonly used for this purpose are cream of tartar, acetic acid, vinegar, which has acetic acid for its basis, and lemon juice, which has citric acid for its basis. With each pound of sugar, it will be necessary to use 1/8 teaspoonful of cream of tartar, 1 or 2 drops of acetic acid, or 1 tablespoonful of vinegar or lemon juice in order to prevent crystallization. Lemon juice and vinegar are much more likely to flavor the candy than are cream of tartar and acetic acid. Often, if a fine-grained creamy candy is desired, a small amount of one of these acids is used. Even in small quantities, they will prevent the coarse-grained crystallization that is the natural result of the cooking and stirring of the cane sugar when nothing is done to prevent it.

27. The acids most commonly used for this purpose are cream of tartar, acetic acid, vinegar (which is based on acetic acid), and lemon juice (which is based on citric acid). For each pound of sugar, you need to use 1/8 teaspoon of cream of tartar, 1 or 2 drops of acetic acid, or 1 tablespoon of vinegar or lemon juice to prevent crystallization. Lemon juice and vinegar are more likely to flavor the candy than cream of tartar and acetic acid. Often, if you want a fine-grained, creamy candy, a small amount of one of these acids is added. Even in small amounts, they will stop the coarse-grained crystallization that naturally happens from cooking and stirring cane sugar unless measures are taken to stop it.


FOOD MATERIALS

28. In addition to the ingredients already mentioned, there are a number of materials that may be used in the making of candy to provide food value and at the same time give variety and improve the flavor and appearance of the candy. Chief among these materials are coconut, cocoa, chocolate, nuts, candied and dried fruits, milk, cream, butter, etc. Their value in candy depends on their use, so it is well to understand their nature and the methods of using them.

28. Besides the ingredients already mentioned, there are several materials that can be used to make candy, adding nutritional value while also enhancing its flavor and appearance. Key among these materials are coconut, cocoa, chocolate, nuts, candied and dried fruits, milk, cream, butter, and so on. Their value in candy depends on how they are used, so it’s important to understand their characteristics and how to use them properly.

29. COCONUT.--Either shredded or ground coconut is often used in candy to give it flavor or variety. Coconut for this purpose may be secured in a number of forms. A coconut itself may be purchased, cracked open to remove the flesh, and then prepared either by grating it or by grinding it. This will be found to be very delicious and preferable to any other kind. However, if it is not desired to prepare the coconut in the home, this material may be purchased shredded in boxes or in cans. That which comes in boxes is usually somewhat dry and is often found to be quite hard. The canned varieties remain soft, since the shredded coconut is mixed with the milk of the coconut, but these have the disadvantage of not keeping very well. Any coconut that becomes too dry for use may be softened by steaming it.

29. COCONUT.--Shredded or ground coconut is often used in candy to add flavor or variety. You can get coconut in a few different ways. You can buy a whole coconut, crack it open to remove the flesh, and then prepare it by grating or grinding it. This is usually really tasty and better than any other option. However, if you don’t want to prepare the coconut at home, you can buy it shredded in boxes or cans. The boxed variety is usually dry and can be quite hard. The canned options stay soft because the shredded coconut is mixed with the milk of the coconut, but they don't last as long. If any coconut gets too dry to use, you can soften it by steaming it.

30. COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--In the making of confections, cocoa and chocolate are used extensively for both flavoring and coating. Either of them may be used for flavoring purposes, but chocolate is always preferable, because it has a richer, deeper flavor than cocoa. Bitter chocolate should be used in preference to any kind of sweet chocolate. When it is to be cooked with candy for flavoring, it may be added to the other ingredients in pieces and allowed to melt during the cooking. It is often used without cooking, however, as when it is added to material that is to be used as centers for bonbons or opera creams. In such an event, it is first melted over steam or hot water and then worked into the candy.

30. COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--In making sweets, cocoa and chocolate are widely used for both flavoring and coating. Either can be used for flavoring, but chocolate is usually better because it has a richer, more intense flavor than cocoa. Bitter chocolate is preferred over any type of sweet chocolate. When cooking it with candy for flavoring, it can be chopped and added to the other ingredients, allowing it to melt during cooking. However, it’s often used without cooking, like when mixed into centers for bonbons or opera creams. In that case, it’s first melted over steam or hot water and then blended into the candy.

31. When desired for coating, chocolate that is sweetened is usually employed, although many persons are fond of creams that have a bitter coating. Sometimes a bitter-sweet coating, that is, a slightly sweetened chocolate, is used, and for most purposes a coating of this kind is preferred. Such chocolate must usually be purchased from a store where confectioner's supplies are sold or from a candy-making establishment. Milk chocolate and very sweet coatings may also be purchased for coating, but the eating chocolate that is sold in bars will not produce satisfactory results, and so should never be used for coating purposes.

31. When people want to coat something, they usually use sweetened chocolate, although many enjoy creams that have a bitter coating. Sometimes, a bittersweet coating, which is slightly sweetened chocolate, is used, and this type of coating is preferred for most purposes. This chocolate typically needs to be bought from a store that sells baking supplies or from a candy-making shop. Milk chocolate and very sweet coatings are also available for coating, but the eating chocolate sold in bars won’t give good results, so it should never be used for coating.

32. CANDIED AND DRIED FRUITS.--Many varieties of candied or crystallized fruits and flowers find a place in the making of confections. Sometimes they are used as an ingredient, while other times they are added to bonbons and chocolates merely for decorative purposes. Again, they are often used in boxes of fancy candies that are packed to sell at some special event or to give away. They are somewhat expensive to purchase, but if they are properly used they add such an appetizing touch and produce such gratifying and delightful results that the expenditure for them is well justified. Many of these may be prepared in the home with a certain degree of satisfaction.

32. CANDIED AND DRIED FRUITS.--Many types of candied or crystallized fruits and flowers are included in making sweets. Sometimes they're used as an ingredient, while other times they’re added to bonbons and chocolates just for decoration. They are also often included in boxes of fancy candies that are packaged for special events or as gifts. They can be a bit pricey, but when used correctly, they add a delicious touch and create enjoyable and pleasing results, making the cost worthwhile. Many of these can be made at home with a nice sense of accomplishment.

33. The two candied fruits most frequently used are candied pineapple and candied cherries, but, in addition to these candied apricots, peaches, pears, limes, lemons, and oranges are often found in the market. Cherries preserved in maraschino wine and creme de menthe add attractive touches of color to candies and make delicious confections when coated with bonbon cream or chocolate.

33. The two most commonly used candied fruits are candied pineapple and candied cherries, but you can also often find candied apricots, peaches, pears, limes, lemons, and oranges in the market. Cherries preserved in maraschino wine and creme de menthe add appealing bursts of color to candies and create delicious treats when coated with bonbon cream or chocolate.

34. Crystallized violets, rose petals, and mint leaves are used frequently in the preparation of confections. They are added merely for decoration and make very attractive candies. They can usually be purchased in confectionery stores.

34. Crystallized violets, rose petals, and mint leaves are commonly used in making sweets. They're mainly added for decoration and make the candies look very appealing. You can typically find them in candy shops.

35. Several varieties of dried fruits, chief among which are dates, figs, and raisins, are useful in the making of confections. They have the advantage of not requiring complicated manipulation, and at the same time they lend themselves to a number of delicious confections that may often be eaten by persons who cannot eat anything so rich as candy. Children can usually partake of confections made of these fruits without harm when candy would disagree with them.

35. Various kinds of dried fruits, especially dates, figs, and raisins, are great for making treats. They don't need complicated preparation, and they can be transformed into a variety of tasty desserts that people who can't handle rich candy can enjoy. Kids can usually eat confections made from these fruits without any issues, even when candy wouldn't suit them.

36. NUTS.--Nuts of various kinds probably have more extensive use in the making of confections than any other class of foods. In fact, there are few kinds of candy that cannot be much improved by the addition of nuts. Halves of such nuts as English walnuts and pecans are frequently used by being pressed into the outside of bonbons and chocolates. Then, too, pieces of various kinds of nuts are used with a filling for coated candies. Such nuts as almonds, filberts, walnuts, and peanuts are often covered singly or in clusters with the same chocolate coating that is used to coat creams. Pistachio nuts, which are light green in color, are either chopped or used in halves on chocolates or bonbons.

36. NUTS.--Nuts of different types are probably used more in making candies than any other food category. In fact, there are only a few types of candy that wouldn't be greatly enhanced by adding nuts. Halves of nuts like English walnuts and pecans are often pressed into the outside of bonbons and chocolates. Additionally, pieces of various nuts are used as fillings for coated candies. Nuts such as almonds, hazelnuts, walnuts, and peanuts are frequently covered individually or in clusters with the same chocolate coating that is used for creams. Pistachio nuts, which are light green, are either chopped or used whole on chocolates or bonbons.

37. When nuts are not desired whole for confections, they should never be put through a food chopper; rather, they should always be broken up by being cut or chopped with a knife. The simplest way in which to cut them is to spread the nuts in a single layer on a board and then with a sharp knife press down on them, having one hand on the back of the knife near the point and the other on the handle and rocking the knife back and forth across the nuts until they are as fine as desired. They may also be chopped in a chopping bowl or cut one at a time with a small, sharp knife.

37. When whole nuts aren't wanted for recipes, avoid using a food chopper; instead, always break them up by cutting or chopping with a knife. The easiest way to cut them is to spread the nuts in a single layer on a board and, using a sharp knife, press down on them with one hand on the back of the knife near the tip and the other on the handle, rocking the knife back and forth until they're as fine as you want. You can also chop them in a chopping bowl or cut them one at a time with a small, sharp knife.

38. Salted nuts, while not a confection in the true sense of the word, are closely related to confections, since they are used for the same purpose. For this reason, it seems advisable to give the methods of preparing them in connection with the preparation of confections.

38. Salted nuts, even though they aren't a candy in the strictest sense, are pretty similar to candies since they serve the same purpose. Therefore, it makes sense to include the methods for preparing them alongside the preparation of candies.

39. POP CORN.--An excellent confection and one that always appeals to children may be made from pop corn. This variety of Indian corn has small kernels with or without sharp points. To prepare it for confections; the kernels, or grains, are removed from the ears and then exposed to heat in a corn popper or a covered pan. When they become sufficiently hot, they pop, or explode; that is, they rupture their yellow coat and turn inside out. The popped kernels may be eaten in this form by merely being salted or they may be treated with various sugar preparations in the ways explained later.

39. POPCORN.—This delicious snack always delights kids and can be made from popcorn. This type of corn has small kernels that may have pointed tips or not. To make it into a treat, the kernels are taken off the ears and then heated in a popcorn maker or a covered pan. When they get hot enough, they pop, which means they burst their yellow outer shell and turn inside out. You can eat the popped kernels plain with some salt, or you can add different sweet coatings as explained later.

40. MILK, CREAM, AND BUTTER.--Milk is extensively used in the making of candy, both to obtain a certain flavor and to secure a particular consistency. Skim milk may be used for this purpose, but the richer the milk, the better will be the flavor of the finished candy. Cream, of course, makes the most delicious candy, but as it is usually expensive, it greatly increases the cost of the confection. Butter may be used with milk to obtain a result similar to that secured by the use of cream. If skim milk is used, butter should by all means be added, for it greatly improves the flavor of the candy. In any recipe requiring milk, condensed or evaporated milk may be substituted with very satisfactory results. These milks may be diluted as much as is desired.

40. MILK, CREAM, AND BUTTER.--Milk is widely used in making candy, both to achieve a specific flavor and to get a certain consistency. Skim milk can be used for this purpose, but the richer the milk, the better the flavor of the candy will be. Cream, of course, creates the most delicious candy, but since it’s usually pricey, it significantly raises the cost of the treat. Butter can be combined with milk to achieve a result similar to that of using cream. If skim milk is used, it’s definitely a good idea to add butter, as it really enhances the flavor of the candy. In any recipe that calls for milk, condensed or evaporated milk can be substituted with very satisfying results. These milks can be diluted to your liking.

Besides providing flavor, milk, cream, and butter add food value to the confections in which they are used. Most of this is in the form of fat, a food substance that is not supplied by any other ingredients, except perhaps chocolate and nuts. They are therefore particularly valuable and should always be used properly in order that the most good may be derived from them.

Besides adding flavor, milk, cream, and butter contribute nutritional value to the confections they are used in. Most of this comes from fat, a nutrient not provided by other ingredients, except maybe chocolate and nuts. They are especially valuable and should always be used correctly to maximize their benefits.

41. The chief problem in the use of milk is to keep it from curding and, if curding takes place, to prevent the curds from settling and burning during the boiling. When maple sirup, molasses, or other substances that are liable to curdle milk are to be cooked with the milk, a little soda should be added or, if possible, the milk should be heated well before it is put in. When it can be done, the milk should be cooked with the sugar before the ingredients likely to make it curdle are added.

41. The main issue with using milk is keeping it from curdling and, if it does curdle, preventing the curds from settling and burning while boiling. When cooking with maple syrup, molasses, or other ingredients that might cause milk to curdle, it's good to add a little baking soda or, if possible, heat the milk well beforehand. If you can, cook the milk with the sugar before adding any ingredients that are likely to cause curdling.

In case the milk does curdle, the mixture should be treated at once, or the result will be very unsatisfactory. The best plan consists in beating the mixture rapidly with a rotary egg beater in order to break up the curds as fine as possible, and then stirring it frequently during the boiling to keep the milk from settling and burning. As this stirring is a disadvantage in the making of candy, every precaution should be taken to prevent the curding of the milk.

If the milk does curdle, you should take care of the mixture immediately, or it will turn out poorly. The best approach is to quickly beat the mixture with a rotary egg beater to break up the curds as finely as possible, and then stir it often while it’s boiling to prevent the milk from settling and burning. Since this stirring can be a problem when making candy, you should take every precaution to avoid the milk curdling.


EQUIPMENT FOR CONFECTION MAKING

42. The utensils for candy making are few in number and simple in nature. As with all of the more elaborate foods, the fancy candies require slightly more unusual equipment, and even for the more ordinary kinds it is possible to buy convenient utensils that will make results a little more certain. But, as illustrated in Fig. 1, which shows the general equipment for confection making, practically all the utensils required are to be found in every kitchen.

42. The tools for making candy are few and straightforward. Like other complex foods, fancy candies need some specialized equipment, but for the more basic varieties, you can find handy tools that help ensure better results. However, as shown in Fig. 1, which displays the general gear for candy making, most of the essential tools are commonly found in every kitchen.

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

43. To boil the confectionery ingredients, a saucepan or a kettle is required. This may be made of copper or aluminum or of any of the various types of enamelware that are used for cooking utensils. One important requirement is that the surface of the pan be perfectly smooth. A pan that has become rough from usage or an enamelware pan that is chipped should not be used for the boiling of candy.

43. To boil the candy ingredients, you need a saucepan or a kettle. This can be made of copper or aluminum, or any type of enamelware that's used for cooking. One key requirement is that the surface of the pan must be perfectly smooth. A pan that's become rough from use or an enamelware pan that's chipped should not be used for boiling candy.

The size of the utensil to use depends on the kind and the amount of the mixture to be boiled. A sugar-and-water mixture does not require a pan much larger in size than is necessary to hold the mixture itself, for it does not expand much in boiling. However, a mixture containing milk, condensed milk, cream, or butter should be cooked in a pan much larger than is needed for the same quantity of sugar and water, for such a mixture expands greatly and is liable to boil over. The necessary size of the pan to be used should be overestimated rather than underestimated. In the cooking of candy, just as in the cooking of other foods, the surface exposed to the heat and the depth of the material to be cooked affect the rapidity of cooking and evaporation. Consequently, if rapid evaporation and quick cooking are desired, a pan that is broad and comparatively shallow should be used, rather than one that is narrow and deep.

The size of the pot you should use depends on the type and amount of mixture being boiled. A sugar-and-water mixture doesn’t need a pot much bigger than what’s necessary to hold the mixture itself since it doesn’t expand much when boiling. However, for a mixture that includes milk, condensed milk, cream, or butter, you should use a pot that’s much larger than what you would need for the same amount of sugar and water because that mixture expands a lot and can easily boil over. It’s better to overestimate the necessary pot size than to underestimate it. When making candy, just like when cooking other foods, the surface area exposed to heat and the depth of the material being cooked affect how quickly it cooks and evaporates. So, if you want fast evaporation and quick cooking, you should choose a pot that’s broad and relatively shallow instead of one that’s narrow and deep.

44. Measuring cups and spoons, a spoon for stirring, and a knife are, of course, essential in making confections. Then, too, it is often convenient to have a metal spatula and a wooden spoon or spatula. When these utensils are made of wood, they are light in weight and consequently excellent for stirring and beating. If egg whites are used in the preparation of a confection, an egg whip is needed. When candy must be poured into a pan to harden, any variety of pan may be used, but generally one having square corners is the most satisfactory. Then if the candy is cut into squares, none of it will be wasted in the cutting.

44. Measuring cups and spoons, a stirring spoon, and a knife are, of course, essential for making sweets. It’s also often useful to have a metal spatula and a wooden spoon or spatula. Wooden utensils are lightweight and great for stirring and mixing. If you’re using egg whites in the sweet recipe, you’ll need an egg whip. When pouring candy into a pan to set, you can use any type of pan, but a pan with square corners typically works best. This way, when you cut the candy into squares, you won’t waste any pieces.

45. A thermometer that registers as high as 300 or 400 degrees Fahrenheit is a valuable asset in candy making when recipes giving the temperature to which the boiling must be carried are followed. A degree of accuracy can be obtained in this way by the inexperienced candy maker that cannot be matched with the usual tests. A small thermometer may be used, but the larger the thermometer, the easier will it be to determine the degrees on the mercury column. A new thermometer should always be tested to determine its accuracy. To do this, stand the thermometer in a small vessel of warm water, place the vessel over a flame, and allow the water to boil. If the thermometer does not register 212 degrees at boiling, the number of degrees more or less must be taken into account whenever the thermometer is used. For instance, if the thermometer registers 208 degrees at boiling and a recipe requires candy to be boiled to 238 degrees, it will be necessary to boil the candy to 234 degrees because the thermometer registers 4 degrees lower than it should.

45. A thermometer that reads up to 300 or 400 degrees Fahrenheit is a valuable tool in candy making when following recipes that specify the boiling temperature. This allows even inexperienced candy makers to achieve a level of accuracy that can't be matched with the usual tests. You can use a small thermometer, but the larger it is, the easier it will be to read the mercury column. Always test a new thermometer to check its accuracy. To do this, place the thermometer in a small container of warm water, put the container over a flame, and let the water boil. If the thermometer doesn't read 212 degrees when boiling, you'll need to adjust for the difference every time you use it. For example, if the thermometer reads 208 degrees while boiling and a recipe calls for boiling the candy to 238 degrees, you should boil the candy to 234 degrees because the thermometer is 4 degrees lower than it should be.

46. The double boiler also finds a place in candy making. For melting chocolate, coating for bonbons, or fondant for reception wafers, a utensil of this kind is necessary. One that will answer the purpose very well may be improvised by putting a smaller pan into a larger one containing water. In using one of this kind, however, an effort should be made to have the pans exactly suited to each other in size; otherwise, the water in the lower pan will be liable to splash into the pan containing the material that is being heated.

46. The double boiler is also useful in candy making. It's essential for melting chocolate, coating bonbons, or for fondant used in reception wafers. You can easily make one by placing a smaller pan inside a larger one filled with water. However, when using this makeshift setup, it's important to ensure that the pans fit each other well in size; otherwise, the water in the bottom pan might splash into the pan with the material being heated.

For the coating of bonbons, a coating fork, which is merely a thin wire twisted to make a handle with a loop at one end, is the most convenient utensil to use. However, this is not satisfactory for coating with chocolate, a different method being required for this material.

For coating bonbons, a coating fork, which is just a thin wire twisted to create a handle with a loop at one end, is the easiest tool to use. However, this isn’t effective for coating with chocolate; a different method is needed for that material.

47. A number of candies, such as fondant, bonbon creams, and cream centers for chocolates, can be made much more satisfactorily if, after they are boiled, they are poured on a flat surface to cool. Such treatment permits them to cool as quickly as possible in a comparatively thin layer and thus helps to prevent crystallization. When only a small amount of candy is to be made, a large platter, which is the easiest utensil to procure, produces fairly good results. For larger amounts, as, for instance, when candy is being made to sell, some more convenient arrangement must be made. The most satisfactory thing that has been found for cooling purposes is a marble slab such as is found on an old-fashioned table or dresser. If one of these is not available, and the kitchen or pastry table has a vitrolite or other heavy top resembling porcelain, this will make a very good substitute.

47. A variety of candies, like fondant, bonbon creams, and cream centers for chocolates, can be made much more effectively if, after boiling, they are poured onto a flat surface to cool. This method allows them to cool as quickly as possible in a relatively thin layer, which helps prevent crystallization. When making a small batch of candy, a large platter—easily available—gives decent results. For larger quantities, such as when making candy for sale, a more practical setup is needed. The best option for cooling is a marble slab, like those found on traditional tables or dressers. If one isn't available, a kitchen or pastry table with a vitrolite or heavy surface that looks like porcelain works as a great substitute.

48. To prevent the hot candy from running off after it is poured on a slab or any similar flat surface, a device of some kind should be provided. A very satisfactory one consists of four metal bars about 3/4 to 1 inch in width and thickness and as long as desired to fit the slab, but usually about 18 inches in length. They may be procured from a factory where steel and iron work is done, or they may be purchased from firms selling candy-making supplies. These bars are merely placed on top of the slab or flat surface with the corners carefully fitted and the candy is then poured in the space between the bars. When it is desired to pour out fudge, caramels, and similar candies to harden before cutting, the metal bars may be fitted together and then placed on the slab in such a way as to be most convenient. Fudge, however, may be cooled satisfactorily in the pan in which it is cooked if the cooling is done very rapidly.

48. To keep hot candy from spilling over after it's poured onto a slab or any flat surface, you should use some kind of barrier. A really effective one consists of four metal bars that are about 3/4 to 1 inch wide and thick, and as long as needed to fit the slab, usually around 18 inches. You can get these from a factory that does steel and iron work, or you can buy them from companies that sell candy-making supplies. Just place the bars on top of the slab or flat surface, making sure the corners fit snugly, and then pour the candy into the space between the bars. When you want to pour out fudge, caramels, or similar candies to set before cutting, the metal bars can be assembled and positioned on the slab in the most convenient way. However, fudge can also be cooled effectively in the pan it was cooked in, as long as the cooling process is done quickly.

49. A satisfactory cooling slab may be improvised by fastening four pieces of wood together so as to fit the outside edge of the slab and extend an inch or more above the surface. If such a device is used, plaster of Paris should be poured around the edge of the slab to fill any space between the wood and the slab. In using a slab or similar surface for purposes of this kind, a point that should be remembered is that a part of it should never be greased, but should be reserved for the cooling of fondant and certain kinds of center creams, which require only a moistened surface.

49. You can create a decent cooling slab by nailing together four pieces of wood to fit around the outer edge of the slab and extend at least an inch above the surface. If you use this setup, you should pour plaster of Paris around the edge of the slab to fill any gaps between the wood and the slab. When using a slab or similar surface for this purpose, remember that one section should never be greased; it should be kept clear for cooling fondant and certain types of center creams that only need a damp surface.

50. Many of the candies that are turned out on a flat surface must be worked to make them creamy. For this purpose, nothing is quite so satisfactory as a putty knife or a wallpaper scraper. If a platter is used, a putty knife is preferable, for it has a narrower blade than a wallpaper scraper; but where candy is made in quantity and a large slab is used, the larger scraper does the work better. For use with a platter, a spoon is perhaps the best utensil when a putty knife is not in supply.

50. Many of the candies that are spread out on a flat surface need to be worked to make them creamy. For this, nothing works better than a putty knife or a wallpaper scraper. If you're using a platter, a putty knife is better because it has a narrower blade than a wallpaper scraper; however, when making candy in large quantities on a big slab, the larger scraper does a better job. If you're using a platter and don’t have a putty knife, a spoon is probably the best tool to use.

51. Scales are valuable in candy making because they permit exact measurements to be made. However, they are not an actual necessity, for almost all recipes give the ingredients by measure, and even if this is not done, they may be purchased in the desired weight or transposed into equivalent measure. Scales, of course, are required if it is desired to weigh out candy in small amounts or in boxes after it is made.

51. Scales are important in candy making because they allow for precise measurements. However, they aren't absolutely necessary since most recipes provide ingredient amounts by volume, and even if they don't, ingredients can be bought in the needed weight or converted to equivalent measurements. Scales are definitely needed if you want to weigh candy in small portions or in boxes after it’s made.

52. Waxed paper is a valuable addition to candy-making supplies, there being many occasions for its use. For instance, caramels and certain other candies must be wrapped and waxed paper is the most suitable kind for this purpose. Then, too, chocolate-coated candies and bonbons must be placed on a smooth surface to which they will not stick. Waxed paper is largely used for this purpose, although candy makers often prefer white oilcloth, because its surface is ideal and it can be cleansed and used repeatedly. Often a candy- or cracker-box lining that has been pressed smooth with a warm iron may be utilized. For such purposes, as when reception wafers are to be dropped, it is necessary that the surface of the paper used be absolutely unwrinkled.

52. Waxed paper is a great addition to candy-making supplies, as there are many situations where it's needed. For example, caramels and certain other candies need to be wrapped, and waxed paper is the best option for this. Additionally, chocolate-covered candies and bonbons should be placed on a smooth surface that they won't stick to. While waxed paper is commonly used for this, candy makers often opt for white oilcloth because its surface is perfect and can be cleaned and reused. Sometimes, a candy or cracker box lining that’s been smoothed with a warm iron can also be used. For tasks like dropping reception wafers, it’s important that the paper’s surface is completely wrinkle-free.


PROCEDURE IN CONFECTION MAKING

COOKING THE MIXTURE

53. WEATHER CONDITIONS.--If uniformly good results are desired in candy making, certain points that determine the success or failure of many candies, although seemingly unimportant, must be observed. Among these, weather conditions form such a large factor that they cannot be disregarded. A cool, clear day, when the atmosphere is fairly dry, is the ideal time for the making of all kinds of candies. Warm weather is not favorable, because the candy does not cool rapidly enough after being cooked. Damp weather is very bad for the making of such candies as the creamy ones that are made with egg white and that are desired to be as soft as possible and still in condition to handle. In view of these facts, candy should be made preferably on days when the weather is favorable if the element of uncertainty, so far as results are concerned, would be eliminated.

53. WEATHER CONDITIONS.--If you want consistently good results in candy making, there are a few key points that can significantly impact the success or failure of various candies, even if they seem minor. Weather conditions play such an important role that they can't be overlooked. A cool, clear day with fairly dry air is the best time to make all types of candies. Warm weather is not ideal because the candy doesn't cool quickly enough after cooking. Damp weather is especially bad for making creamy candies that include egg whites and need to be as soft as possible while still being workable. Given these factors, it's best to make candy on days with favorable weather to eliminate the uncertainty of the results.

54. COMBINING THE SUGAR AND LIQUID.--The proportion of liquid and sugar to use in making candy varies to some extent with the kind of ingredients used and with the quantity of candy being made. In the making of quantities up to several pounds, the usual proportion is one-third as much liquid as sugar, but with larger amounts of sugar the quantity of liquid may be slightly decreased.

54. COMBINING THE SUGAR AND LIQUID.--The amount of liquid and sugar to use when making candy can vary depending on the type of ingredients and the total amount of candy you’re making. For batches up to several pounds, the common ratio is one-third as much liquid as sugar, but if you're using larger amounts of sugar, you might need to use a little less liquid.

With the quantities decided on, mix the sugar and liquid and put them over the fire to boil. Stir at first to prevent the sugar from settling and burning, continuing the stirring either constantly or at intervals until the boiling begins. At this point, discontinue the stirring if possible. Mixtures that do not contain milk usually require no further stirring, and many times stirring is unnecessary even in those which do contain milk; but whenever any stirring is required, as little as possible should be done. The rule that applies in this connection is that the sugar should be entirely dissolved before the boiling begins and that all unnecessary agitation should then cease.

Once you’ve measured the right amounts, combine the sugar and liquid and put them on the stove to boil. Stir initially to keep the sugar from settling and burning, and keep stirring either constantly or occasionally until it starts to boil. At that point, try to stop stirring. Mixtures that don’t have milk usually don’t need any more stirring, and often even those with milk don’t need much stirring; but whenever stirring is needed, do it as little as possible. The key rule here is that the sugar should be fully dissolved before the boiling starts, and any unnecessary stirring should stop after that.

55. BOILING THE MIXTURE.--When the mixture begins to boil, wash down the sides of the kettle with a small cloth wet with clean water. This treatment should not be omitted if especially nice candy is desired, for it removes all undissolved sugar and helps to prevent crystallization later. In case merely sugar and water make up the ingredients, a cover may be placed on the kettle; then the steam that is retained will keep any sirup that may splash on the sides from crystallizing. This cannot be done, however, with mixtures containing milk and butter, for they will in all probability boil over.

55. BOILING THE MIXTURE.--When the mixture starts to boil, wipe down the sides of the pot with a small cloth dampened with clean water. Don’t skip this step if you want particularly nice candy, as it removes any undissolved sugar and helps prevent crystallization later. If the ingredients consist only of sugar and water, you can put a lid on the pot; the trapped steam will prevent any syrup that splatters on the sides from crystallizing. However, this isn’t possible with mixtures that include milk and butter, as they are likely to boil over.

56. The boiling of candy should be carried on quickly, for slow boiling often proves a disadvantage. A sugar-and-water mixture may, of course, be boiled more rapidly than any other kind, because there is not the danger of its boiling over nor of burning before the water is evaporated that there is with a mixture containing material that may settle and burn. It should be remembered that candy does not begin to burn until the water has entirely evaporated.

56. Candy should be boiled quickly since slow boiling can be a disadvantage. A sugar-and-water mixture can be boiled faster than other types because there's less risk of it boiling over or burning before the water evaporates, unlike mixtures that contain ingredients that might settle and burn. It's important to remember that candy doesn’t start to burn until all the water has evaporated.

57. The length of time candy should boil is also a matter to which attention should be given. This depends somewhat on the kind that is being made, but largely on the rapidity with which the boiling is carried on. Thus, to time the boiling of candy is the most uncertain way of determining when the boiling has continued long enough. The inaccuracy of measurement, the size and shape of the pan, and the rate of speed in boiling cause a variation in the time required. Consequently, it would be rather difficult for the same person to get identical conditions twice and much more difficult for two persons to produce the same results.

57. The length of time candy should boil is something that requires attention. This depends somewhat on the type being made, but mostly on how quickly it’s boiling. Therefore, timing the boiling of candy is an unreliable way to know when it has boiled long enough. Factors like measurement inaccuracies, the size and shape of the pan, and the boiling speed cause variations in the required cooking time. As a result, it would be quite challenging for the same person to recreate identical conditions twice, and even more difficult for two different people to achieve the same results.

58. TESTING CANDY.--Since accurate results cannot be obtained by timing the boiling of candy, other tests must be found that will be reliable. As has already been stated, a thermometer is perhaps the most accurate means that can be adopted for this purpose. However, if one is not available, the testing of a small quantity of the hot mixture by cooling it in cold water will be found to be fairly accurate. Ice water is not necessary nor particularly desirable for this kind of testing. In fact, water just as it comes from the faucet is the best, as it is quickly obtained and its temperature will not vary greatly except in very hot or very cold weather. Of course, to make an extremely accurate test of this kind, it would be necessary always to have the water at the same temperature, a condition that can be determined only by testing the temperature, but such accuracy is not usually required.

58. TESTING CANDY.--Since you can't get accurate results by timing how long candy boils, you'll need to find other reliable tests. As mentioned earlier, a thermometer is possibly the most accurate tool to use for this. However, if you don’t have one, you can test a small amount of the hot mixture by cooling it in cold water, which is generally pretty accurate. Ice water isn’t necessary or especially useful for this testing. In fact, regular tap water works best since it’s easy to get and its temperature doesn’t change much unless it’s really hot or cold outside. To get an extremely accurate test, you’d need the water to be at the same temperature each time, which you can only find out by checking the temperature, but such precision isn't usually needed.

If the thermometer is used, all that need be done is to insert it into the candy and allow it to remain there until the temperature is registered. In case it does not reach the right temperature the first time, keep the mixture boiling until it registers the temperature that is decided on as the correct one.

If you're using a thermometer, just insert it into the candy and leave it there until it shows the temperature. If it doesn't hit the right temperature the first time, continue boiling the mixture until it reaches the target temperature you've chosen.

59. To test the mixture by the water method, allow it to boil almost long enough to be done, and then try it at close intervals when it is nearing the end of the boiling. Dip a little of the sirup into a spoon and drop it slowly into a cup containing a little water. Not much sirup is needed for the test, a few drops being sufficient. Gather the drops together with the tips of the fingers and judge from the ball that forms whether the candy has boiled sufficiently or not. If the ball is not of the right consistency, boil the candy a little longer, and test again. Be sure, however, to get fresh water for each test. When the candy is nearing the final test, and it is thought that the mixture has boiled enough, remove the pan from the heat while the test is being made so that the boiling will not be continued too long.

59. To test the mixture using the water method, let it boil until it’s almost done, and then check it at short intervals as it gets close to finishing. Spoon a little of the syrup and drop it slowly into a cup with some water. You don’t need much syrup for the test; just a few drops will do. Gather the drops with your fingertips and judge the consistency of the ball that forms to see if the candy has boiled enough. If the ball isn't the right consistency, boil the candy a bit longer and test again. Make sure to use fresh water for each test. When the candy is getting close to the final test and you think it has boiled enough, take the pan off the heat while you conduct the test to avoid overcooking.

60. To assist in making the tests for candy properly, Table I is given. This table shows both the water test and the corresponding temperature test for the representative variety of the leading classes of candies. In each one of these classes there are, of course, a number of varieties which may cause a slight variation in some of the tests, but on the whole these tests are uniform and can be relied on for practically all candies.

60. To help with the candy tests, Table I is provided. This table displays both the water test and the related temperature test for the key types of candies. Each of these types includes several varieties that might cause slight differences in some tests, but overall, these tests are consistent and can be trusted for nearly all candies.

TABLE I
TESTS FOR REPRESENTATIVE CLASSES OF CANDY
ClassesWater TestTemperature Test
Degrees Fahrenheit
Center CreamSoft ball234 to 236
FudgeFirm ball238 to 240
CaramelsHard ball246 to 248
TaffiesBrittle ball256 to 260

When candy is cooked long enough to form a soft ball, it can just be gathered together and held in the fingers. If it is held for any length of time, the warmth of the fingers softens it greatly and causes it to lose its form. This test is used for candies, such as soft-center cream. It will be found that when candy boiled to this degree is finished, it can scarcely be handled.

When candy is cooked long enough to create a soft ball, it can be gathered together and pinched between the fingers. If held for too long, the warmth from the fingers makes it quite soft and causes it to lose its shape. This test is used for candies like soft-center cream. You'll find that when candy cooked to this point is ready, it can barely be touched.

The firm ball is the stage just following the soft ball. It will keep its shape when held in the fingers for some time. This is the test for fudge, bonbon creams, and similar candies that are creamed and are expected to be hard and dry enough to handle when they are finished.

The firm ball is the stage right after the soft ball. It will hold its shape when you keep it in your fingers for a while. This is the test for fudge, bonbon creams, and similar candies that are creamed and need to be hard and dry enough to handle when they're done.

To form a hard ball, candy must be cooked longer than for the firm ball. At this stage, the ball that is formed may be rolled in the finger tips. It is not so hard, however, that an impression cannot be made in it with the fingers. It is the test for caramels, soft butter scotch, sea foam, and many other candies.

To make a hard ball, candy needs to be cooked longer than for a firm ball. At this point, the ball can be rolled between your fingertips. It’s not so hard that you can’t leave an impression with your fingers. This is the test for caramels, soft butterscotch, sea foam, and many other candies.

A brittle ball is the result of any temperature beyond 256 degrees up to the point where the sugar would begin to burn. It is hard enough to make a sound when struck against the side of the cup or to crack when an attempt is made to break it. This is the test that is made for taffy and other hard candies.

A brittle ball forms when the temperature goes over 256 degrees until it starts to burn. It’s hard enough to make a noise when hit against the cup or to shatter when you try to break it. This is the test used for taffy and other hard candies.


POURING AND COOLING THE MIXTURE

61. After the testing of the mixture proves that it is boiled sufficiently, there are several procedures that may be followed. The one to adopt depends on the kind of candy that is being made, but every candy that is cooked should be cooled by one of the following methods.

61. Once the mixture has been tested and confirmed to be boiled enough, there are several procedures that can be followed. The method to choose depends on the type of candy being made, but every candy that is cooked should be cooled using one of the following methods.

62. The first treatment consists in pouring the mixture at once from the pan to be finished without cooling, as, for instance, caramels and butter scotch, which are poured at once into a buttered pan to be cooled and cut; or, the hot sirup may be poured upon beaten egg whites, as in the case of sea foam or penuchie. In the making of either of these kinds, the sirup may be allowed to drip as completely as possible from the pan without injury to the finished product.

62. The first method involves pouring the mixture straight from the pan while it's still hot, just like when making caramels and butterscotch, which are poured directly into a buttered pan to cool and be cut; or, hot syrup can be poured onto beaten egg whites, like in sea foam or penuche. When making either of these types, the syrup can be allowed to drip as much as possible from the pan without damaging the finished product.

63. The second method by which the mixture is cooled calls for cooling the sirup in the pan in which it was cooked, as, for instance, in the case of fudge. When this is done, the pan should be carried from the stove to the place where the mixture is to be cooled with as little agitation as possible. Also, during the cooling, it should not be disturbed in any way. Stirring it even a little is apt to start crystallization and the candy will then be grainy instead of creamy.

63. The second way to cool the mixture involves cooling the syrup in the same pan it was cooked in, like with fudge, for example. When doing this, you should move the pan from the stove to the cooling area with minimal movement. Additionally, during the cooling process, it should not be disturbed at all. Even a small stir can trigger crystallization, resulting in grainy candy instead of a smooth, creamy texture.

64. In the third form of treatment, the sirup is poured out and then cooled before it is stirred to make it creamy, as in opera creams or bonbon creams. To accomplish this, the pan should be tipped quickly and all its contents turned out at once. It should not be allowed to drip even a few drops, for this dripping starts the crystallization. Candies that contain milk or butter, or sticky materials, such as taffies, should always be poured on a buttered surface. Those which are cooked with water but are to be creamed should be poured on a surface moistened with cold water.

64. In the third method of making candy, the syrup is poured out and then cooled before being stirred to create a creamy texture, like in opera creams or bonbon creams. To do this, the pan should be quickly tilted and all its contents dumped out at once. It shouldn’t be allowed to drip even a little, as this dripping triggers crystallization. Candies that include milk or butter, or sticky ingredients like taffies, should always be poured onto a buttered surface. Those that are cooked with water but will be creamed should be poured onto a surface dampened with cold water.

65. When candy mixtures are cooled before being completed, the cooling should be carried to the point where no heat is felt when the candy is touched. To test it, the backs of the fingers should be laid lightly on the surface of the candy, as they will not be so likely to stick as the moist tips on the palm side. It should be remembered that the surface must not be disturbed in the testing, as this is also apt to bring about crystallization.

65. When candy mixtures are cooled before being finished, they should be cooled until there’s no warmth felt when touching the candy. To check this, lightly place the backs of your fingers on the surface of the candy, as they’re less likely to stick compared to the moist tips on your palms. It’s important to remember not to disturb the surface while testing, as this can also cause crystallization.

Every precaution should be taken to prevent even the smallest amount of crystallization. Any crystals that may have formed can be easily detected when the stirring is begun by the scraping that can be felt by the spoon or paddle used. If a little crystallization has taken place before the candy has cooled completely, it being easily seen in the clear sirup, the mixture should be cooled still further, for nothing is gained by stirring it at once.

Every precaution should be taken to prevent even the smallest amount of crystallization. Any crystals that may have formed can be easily detected when stirring begins, as they'll create a scraping sensation felt by the spoon or paddle used. If a bit of crystallization has occurred before the candy has cooled completely and is visible in the clear syrup, the mixture should be cooled even more because stirring it immediately won’t help.

A point that should always be kept in mind in the cooling of candy is that it should be cooled as quickly as possible. However, a refrigerator should not be used for cooling, for the warm mixture raises the temperature of the refrigerator and wastes the ice and at the same time the moist atmosphere does not bring about the best results. As has already been learned, a platter or a slab is very satisfactory. If either of these is used, it should be as cold as possible when the sirup is poured on it. Cold weather, of course, simplifies this matter greatly, but if no better way is afforded, the utensil used should be cooled with cold water.

A key point to remember when cooling candy is that it should cool as quickly as possible. However, a refrigerator isn’t suitable for this because the warm mixture raises the temperature inside, wasting the ice, and the humid environment won’t give the best results. As we’ve already learned, using a platter or a slab works well. If you use one of these, it should be as cold as possible when the syrup is poured onto it. Cold weather makes this process much easier, but if there’s no better option, the utensil should be cooled down with cold water.


FINISHING CANDIES

66. The treatment through which candy mixtures are put after being cooled varies with the kind of candy being made. Some mixtures, as fudge, are beaten until creamy in the pan in which they are cooked. Others are worked on a platter or a slab with the proper kind of utensil. These are usually treated in a rather elaborate way, being often coated with bonbon cream or with chocolate. Still others, such as taffy, are pulled until light in color and then cut into small pieces with a pair of scissors. Again, certain candies, after being poured into a pan, are allowed to become hard and then cut into squares or broken into pieces. Usually candies made in the home are served without being wrapped, but when certain varieties are to be packed, it is advisable to wrap them. Directions for finishing confections in these different ways are here given.

66. The way candy mixtures are treated after cooling depends on the type of candy being made. Some mixtures, like fudge, are beaten in the pan until they become creamy. Others are worked on a platter or a slab using the right kind of tools. These are usually prepared in a more detailed manner, often coated with bonbon cream or chocolate. Still, others, like taffy, are pulled until they turn light in color and then cut into small pieces with scissors. Additionally, some candies, after being poured into a pan, are left to harden and then cut into squares or broken into pieces. Usually, homemade candies are served unwrapped, but when certain types need to be packaged, it's a good idea to wrap them. Instructions for finishing these different confections are provided here.

67. MARKING AND CUTTING CANDIES.--Much of the success of certain candies depends on their treatment after being cooled. Those which must be beaten in the pan until they are creamy should be beaten just as long as possible. Then, if the surface is not smooth when they are poured out, pat it out with the palm of the hand after the candy has hardened a little. As soon as it has hardened sufficiently to remain as it is marked and not run together, mark it in pieces of the desired size, using for this purpose a thin, sharp knife. Be careful to have the lines straight and the pieces even in size. Generally, candy that is treated in this manner is cut into squares, although it may be cut into other shapes if desired.

67. MARKING AND CUTTING CANDIES.--A lot of the success of certain candies depends on how they're handled after cooling. Those that need to be beaten in the pan until creamy should be beaten as long as possible. If the surface isn’t smooth when poured out, press it down with your palm once the candy has cooled a bit. As soon as it hardens enough to hold its shape without spreading, cut it into the desired size pieces using a thin, sharp knife. Make sure the lines are straight and the pieces are uniform in size. Typically, candy treated this way is cut into squares, but other shapes can be made if preferred.

68. COATING CANDIES WITH BONBON CREAM.--When especially nice candy is desired for a special occasion, it is often made into small pieces and then coated with bonbon cream. A large number of the centers to be coated should be made up before the coating is begun. In fact, if it is possible, all the centers should be made first and then the coating can proceed without interruption. The cream to be used for coating may be flavored or colored in any desirable way. Any flavoring or coloring that is to be used, however, should be added while the cream is melting.

68. COATING CANDIES WITH BONBON CREAM.--When especially nice candy is needed for a special occasion, it is often made into small pieces and then coated with bonbon cream. A large number of centers to be coated should be prepared before starting the coating process. Ideally, all the centers should be made first, allowing the coating to proceed without interruptions. The cream used for coating can be flavored or colored in any way you like. Any flavoring or coloring should be added while the cream is melting.

69. To coat with bonbon cream, put the cream in a double boiler without any water and allow it to melt with as little stirring as possible. It is best to use a small double boiler for this purpose and not to melt too much of the cream at one time, as it is apt to become grainy if it is used too long for dipping. When it has melted to the extent that the coating will not be too thick after it has cooled, the dipping of the candies may begin. As soon as it is found that no more centers can be dipped in the cream, melt some fresh cream for the remaining centers, but do not add it to that which has been used before. Instead, use the first up as closely as possible and then drop the remainder by spoonfuls on waxed paper. With all of it used, wash and dry the inner pan of the double boiler and start again with a fresh lot of the cream.

69. To coat with bonbon cream, place the cream in a double boiler without any water and let it melt with minimal stirring. It's best to use a small double boiler for this and to melt only a small amount of cream at a time, as it can become grainy if it's used for dipping for too long. Once it has melted enough so that the coating won’t be too thick after it cools, you can start dipping the candies. When you notice that no more centers can be dipped in the cream, melt some fresh cream for the remaining centers, but don’t mix it with what’s already been used. Instead, use the first batch as much as you can and then drop the leftover by spoonfuls onto waxed paper. After you’ve used it all, wash and dry the inner pan of the double boiler and start again with a new batch of cream.

70. To coat the centers, drop one at a time into the melted cream and turn over with a coating fork or an ordinary table fork. When the surface is entirely covered, lift out of the cream with the fork and allow any superfluous coating to drip off. Then drop the coated bonbons on waxed paper, to cool. While this work may prove a little difficult at first, it can be done with dexterity after a little practice. If an effort is made to have the centers uniform in size and shape, the finished candies will have the same appearance. While the cream is soft, tiny pieces of candied fruit or nuts may be pressed into the coating to decorate the bonbons.

70. To coat the centers, drop one at a time into the melted cream and turn it over with a coating fork or a regular table fork. When the surface is fully covered, lift it out of the cream with the fork and let any excess coating drip off. Then place the coated bonbons on waxed paper to cool. While this process might be a bit tricky at first, you can get the hang of it with some practice. If you make an effort to keep the centers uniform in size and shape, the finished candies will look the same. While the cream is still soft, you can press small pieces of candied fruit or nuts into the coating to decorate the bonbons.

71. COATING WITH CHOCOLATE.--Candies coated with chocolate are always desirable; so it is well for any one who aspires toward confection making to become proficient in this phase of the work. The centers should, of course, be prepared first and put in a convenient place on the table where the coating is to be done. They may be made in any desired size and shape.

71. COATING WITH CHOCOLATE.--Chocolate-coated candies are always a hit; so it's important for anyone who wants to make confections to get good at this part of the process. First, prepare the centers and set them up in an easily accessible spot on the table where you’ll be coating them. You can make them in any size and shape you like.

If it is possible to secure a regular coating chocolate, this should be obtained, for it produces better results than does a chocolate that can be prepared. However, unless one lives in a place where confectioner's supplies are on sale, it is almost impossible to purchase a chocolate of this kind. In such an event, a substitute that will prove very satisfactory for candy to be eaten in the home and not to be sold may be made as follows:

If you can get a regular coating chocolate, you should go for it because it gives better results than making your own chocolate. However, unless you live somewhere that sells confectioner's supplies, it's pretty hard to find this type of chocolate. In that case, you can make a substitute that works really well for candy meant to be enjoyed at home rather than sold, and here's how to do it:

COATING CHOCOLATE
  • 4 oz. milk chocolate
  • 2 oz. bitter chocolate
  • 1/2 oz. paraffin

To prepare the chocolate, put all the ingredients in a double boiler and allow them to melt, being careful that not a single drop of water nor other foreign substance falls into the mixture. Do not cover the boiler, for then the steam will condense on the inside of the cover and fall into the chocolate. As this will spoil the chocolate so that it cannot be used for coating, the pan in which the chocolate is melted should always be allowed to remain open. The paraffin used helps to harden the chocolate after it is put on the centers; this is a particular advantage at any time, but especially when chocolates are made in warm weather.

To prepare the chocolate, place all the ingredients in a double boiler and let them melt, making sure that not a single drop of water or any foreign substance gets into the mixture. Don’t cover the boiler, because the steam will condense on the inside of the cover and drip into the chocolate. This will ruin the chocolate, making it unsuitable for coating, so the pan where the chocolate melts should always be left open. The paraffin adds helps to harden the chocolate once it's applied to the centers; this is especially beneficial in warm weather when making chocolates.

72. When the chocolate HAS COMPLETELY MELTED, dip some of it into a small bowl or other dish or utensil having a round bottom and keep the rest over the heat so that it will not harden. With a spoon, beat that which is put into the bowl until it is cool enough to permit the fingers being put into it. Then work it with the fingers until all the heat is out of it and it begins to thicken. It may be tested at this point by putting one of the centers into it. If it is found to be too thin, it will run off the candy and make large, flat edges on the bottom. In such an event, work it and cool it a little more. When it is of the proper thickness, put the centers in, one at a time, and, as shown in Fig. 2, cover them completely with the chocolate and place them on waxed paper or white oilcloth to harden. As they harden, it will be found that they will gradually grow dull. No attempt whatever should be made to pick up these candies until they are entirely cold. This process is sometimes considered objectionable because of the use of the bare hands, but chocolate coating cannot be so successfully done in any other way as with the fingers. Therefore, any aversion to this method should be overcome if good results are desired.

72. When the chocolate has completely melted, pour some of it into a small bowl or another dish with a round bottom, and keep the rest over the heat to prevent it from hardening. Using a spoon, stir the chocolate in the bowl until it cools enough to touch with your fingers. Then, work it with your hands until it loses all its heat and starts to thicken. You can test its consistency by placing one of the centers in it. If it’s too thin, it will run off the candy, creating large, flat edges on the bottom. In that case, keep working and cooling it a bit more. Once it reaches the right thickness, add the centers one at a time, and as shown in Fig. 2, fully coat them with the chocolate and place them on waxed paper or white oilcloth to harden. As they set, you'll notice they gradually become dull. Don’t try to pick up the candies until they are completely cooled. Some people find the use of bare hands objectionable, but chocolate coating works best when done with your fingers. Therefore, any hesitation about this method should be set aside if you want good results.

[Illustration: FIG. 2]

73. When the chocolate begins to harden in the bowl and consequently is difficult to work with, add more of the hot chocolate from the double boiler to it. It will be necessary, however, to beat the chocolate and work it with the fingers each time some is added, for otherwise the coating will not be desirable. So as to overcome the necessity of doing this often, a fairly large amount may be cooled and worked at one time. Care should be taken to cover each center completely or its quality will deteriorate upon standing. With conditions right, the centers of chocolates and bonbons should soften and improve for a short time after being made, but chocolate-coated candies will keep longer than bonbons, as the coating does not deteriorate.

73. When the chocolate starts to harden in the bowl and becomes difficult to work with, add more of the hot chocolate from the double boiler. However, you'll need to beat the chocolate and knead it with your fingers each time you add more, or the coating won't turn out well. To reduce how often you have to do this, you can cool and work with a larger amount at once. Make sure to fully cover each center, or its quality will decrease over time. Under the right conditions, the centers of chocolates and bonbons should soften and improve slightly after being made, but chocolate-covered candies will last longer than bonbons since the coating doesn’t degrade.

[Illustration: FIG. 3]
[Illustration: FIG. 4]

74. WRAPPING CANDIES.--Such candies as caramels, certain kinds of taffies, and even chocolates are often wrapped in waxed paper, especially if they are to be packed in boxes. When this is to be done, cut the paper into pieces of the proper size and then wrap each piece separately. The best way to prepare the paper is to fold several sheets until they are the desired size and then, as in Fig. 3, cut them with a sharp knife. If a pair of scissors is used for this purpose, they are apt to slip and cut the paper crooked. The method of wrapping depends on the candy itself. Caramels are wrapped in square pieces whose ends are folded in neatly, as in Fig. 4, while taffy in the form of kisses is rolled in the paper and the ends are twisted to fasten the wrapping.

74. WRAPPING CANDIES.--Candies like caramels, some types of taffies, and even chocolates are often wrapped in waxed paper, especially when they're being packaged in boxes. To do this, cut the paper into pieces of the right size and then wrap each candy individually. The best way to prepare the paper is by folding several sheets until they're the desired size and then, like in Fig. 3, cutting them with a sharp knife. If you use scissors for this, they might slip and cut the paper unevenly. The wrapping technique varies depending on the type of candy. Caramels are wrapped in square pieces with the ends folded in neatly, as shown in Fig. 4, while taffy shaped like kisses is rolled in the paper and the ends are twisted to secure the wrapping.


VARIETIES OF CONFECTIONS AND THEIR PREPARATION

TAFFIES AND SIMILAR CANDIES

NATURE OF TAFFIES


75. TAFFY is probably one of the simplest candies that can be made. Indeed, if candy of this kind is boiled long enough, it is almost impossible to have unsatisfactory results. Taffies are usually made from white sugar, but a variety of flavors may be obtained by the use of different ingredients and flavors. For instance, molasses is used for some taffies, maple sirup for others, and brown sugar for others, and all of these offer an opportunity for variety. Then, again, taffy made from white sugar may be varied by means of many delightful colors and flavors. Melted chocolate or cocoa also makes a delightful chocolate-flavored taffy. Recipes for all of these varieties are here given, together with a number of recipes for closely related confections, such as butter scotch, glacé nuts and fruits, peanut brittle, and nut bars.

75. TAFFY is probably one of the easiest candies to make. In fact, if you boil this type of candy long enough, you’re likely to get good results every time. Taffies are typically made from white sugar, but you can create a variety of flavors using different ingredients. For example, some taffies use molasses, others use maple syrup, and some use brown sugar, all of which provide opportunities for variety. Additionally, taffy made from white sugar can be enhanced with many fun colors and flavors. Melted chocolate or cocoa can also be used to make delicious chocolate-flavored taffy. Recipes for all these varieties are provided here, along with several recipes for similar confections, such as butterscotch, glazed nuts and fruits, peanut brittle, and nut bars.

76. METHODS OF TREATING TAFFY.--Taffy may be poured out in a pan, allowed to become entirely cold, and then broken into irregular pieces for serving, or it may be pulled and then cut in small pieces with a pair of scissors. If it is to be pulled, it should be poured from the pan in which it is cooked into flat pans or plates and set aside to cool. As soon as it is cool enough to handle, it may be taken from the pans and pulled. It will be found that the edges will cool and harden first. These should be pulled toward the center and folded so that they will warm against the center and form a new edge. If this is done two or three times during the cooling, the candy will cool evenly and be ready to take up into the hands. The pulling may then begin at once. If it has been cooked enough, it will not stick to the hands during the pulling. It is usually wise, however, to take the precaution of dusting the hands with corn starch before starting to pull the candy. Grease should never be used for this purpose. When taffy is made in quantities, the work of pulling it is greatly lessened by stretching it over a large hook fastened securely to a wall.

76. METHODS OF TREATING TAFFY.--Taffy can be poured into a pan, allowed to cool completely, and then broken into uneven pieces for serving, or it can be pulled and then cut into small pieces with scissors. If it’s going to be pulled, it should be poured from the cooking pan into flat pans or plates and set aside to cool. As soon as it’s cool enough to handle, you can take it from the pans and start pulling. You’ll notice that the edges cool and harden first. These edges should be pulled toward the center and folded to warm against the center and create a new edge. If this is done two or three times while it cools, the candy will cool evenly and be ready to pick up with your hands. You can then start pulling right away. If it’s been cooked properly, it won’t stick to your hands while you’re pulling. However, it’s usually a good idea to dust your hands with cornstarch before you start. Grease should never be used for this. When making a large batch of taffy, using a large hook fastened securely to a wall can significantly reduce the effort needed to pull it.


RECIPES FOR TAFFY

77. VANILLA TAFFY.--The taffy explained in the accompanying recipe is flavored with vanilla and when pulled is white in color. However, it may be made in different colors and flavors by merely substituting the desired flavor for the vanilla and using the coloring preferred. This recipe may also be used for chocolate taffy by adding melted chocolate just before the taffy has finished boiling.

77. VANILLA TAFFY.--The taffy described in the recipe below is flavored with vanilla and is white when pulled. However, you can make it in different colors and flavors simply by substituting your chosen flavor for the vanilla and using your preferred coloring. This recipe can also be used for chocolate taffy by adding melted chocolate just before the taffy finishes boiling.

VANILLA TAFFY
  • 4 c. sugar
  • 1/4 tsp. cream of tartar
  • 1 Tb. vinegar
  • 1 c. boiling water
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

To the sugar, add the cream of tartar, vinegar, and boiling water. Place over the fire and boil until it will form a brittle ball when tested in cold water or will register at least 260 degrees on a thermometer. Just before the boiling is completed, add the butter. Remove from the fire, add the vanilla, pour in a shallow layer in a buttered pan or plate. Cool and pull. When the taffy has been pulled until it is perfectly white and is hard enough to retain its shape, twist it into a long, thin rope and cut with a pair of scissors into inch lengths.

To the sugar, add the cream of tartar, vinegar, and boiling water. Put it on the stove and boil until it forms a hard ball when tested in cold water or reaches at least 260 degrees on a thermometer. Just before it finishes boiling, add the butter. Take it off the heat, add the vanilla, and pour it into a buttered pan or plate in a thin layer. Let it cool and stretch. Once the taffy is pulled until it's completely white and firm enough to hold its shape, twist it into a long, thin rope and cut it into one-inch pieces with scissors.

78. BUTTER TAFFY.--Another variety of taffy flavored with vanilla is the one given in the accompanying recipe. It is called butter taffy because butter is used in a rather large amount for flavoring. It will be noted, also, that brown sugar and corn sirup are two of the ingredients. These, with the butter, give the taffy a very delightful flavor.

78. BUTTER TAFFY.--Another type of taffy flavored with vanilla is the one included in the recipe below. It's called butter taffy because it uses a significant amount of butter for flavor. You'll also notice that brown sugar and corn syrup are two of the ingredients. These, along with the butter, create a very delightful flavor in the taffy.

BUTTER TAFFY
  • 2 c. light-brown sugar
  • 1 c. white sugar
  • 1/2 c. corn sirup
  • 1 Tb. vinegar
  • 3/4 c. boiling water
  • 1/4 butter
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Mix all the ingredients except the butter and vanilla. Place over the fire and boil until a brittle ball will form in cold water or a temperature of 260 degrees is reached. Just before the boiling has been completed, add the butter. Remove from the fire, add the vanilla, and pour in a thin layer into greased pans or plates. Cool, pull, and cut.

Mix all the ingredients except the butter and vanilla. Set it over the heat and boil until a brittle ball forms in cold water or the temperature reaches 260 degrees. Just before it finishes boiling, add the butter. Take it off the heat, add the vanilla, and pour a thin layer into greased pans or plates. Let it cool, pull, and cut.

79. MOLASSES TAFFY.--Of all the taffies, that made with molasses is nearly always the favorite. A light cane molasses that is not very strong in flavor is the preferred kind for this candy. When cut into round flat pieces and wrapped in waxed paper, molasses taffy appeals to both old and young.

79. MOLASSES TAFFY.--Of all the taffies, the kind made with molasses is almost always the favorite. A light cane molasses that isn’t too strong in flavor is the best choice for this candy. When it’s cut into round flat pieces and wrapped in wax paper, molasses taffy attracts both kids and adults.

MOLASSES TAFFY
  • 2 c. light cane molasses
  • 1 c. sugar
  • 2 Tb. vinegar
  • 1/2 c. boiling water
  • 2 Tb. butter

Mix all the ingredients except the butter. Cook until a brittle ball will form or a temperature of 264 degrees is reached on the thermometer. Add the butter just before the boiling is completed. Remove from the fire, pour into greased pans or plates, and allow it to become cool enough to handle. Then pull and cut.

Mix all the ingredients except the butter. Cook until a brittle ball forms or until the thermometer reads 264 degrees. Add the butter just before the boiling finishes. Remove from heat, pour into greased pans or plates, and let it cool enough to handle. Then pull and cut.

80. CHEWING TAFFY.--A taffy that is hard enough not to be sticky and still soft enough to chew easily is often desired. Chewing taffy, which is explained in the accompanying recipe, is a candy of this kind. After being pulled, it may be cut as other taffy is cut or it may be piled in a mass and chopped into pieces.

80. CHEWING TAFFY.--A taffy that is firm enough not to be sticky yet still soft enough to chew easily is often wanted. Chewing taffy, as described in the recipe provided, is a candy of this type. After it’s pulled, it can be cut like other taffy or it can be formed into a pile and chopped into pieces.

CHEWING TAFFY
  • 1/2 Tb. unflavored gelatine
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1-1/2 c. corn sirup
  • 1-1/4 c. milk
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • Vanilla and lemon

Put the gelatine to soak in a few tablespoonfuls of cold water. Cook the sugar, sirup, and milk until the mixture will form a hard ball that may be dented with the fingers or it reaches a temperature of 252 degrees. Stir the mixture gently to prevent burning. Remove from the fire and add the butter. Take the gelatine from the water, squeeze it as dry as possible, and add it to the hot mixture, stirring until it is entirely dissolved. Pour on a greased surface, cool, and pull until it is a light-cream color. While pulling, flavor with vanilla and a few drops of lemon. Stretch into a long thin rope and cut into inch lengths or pile in a mass and chop into pieces.

Soak the gelatin in a few tablespoons of cold water. Cook the sugar, syrup, and milk until the mixture can form a hard ball that you can press with your fingers or until it reaches a temperature of 252 degrees. Stir the mixture gently to avoid burning. Take it off the heat and add the butter. Remove the gelatin from the water, squeeze it as dry as you can, and mix it into the hot mixture, stirring until it fully dissolves. Pour it onto a greased surface, let it cool, and then pull it until it turns a light cream color. While pulling, add vanilla and a few drops of lemon for flavor. Stretch it into a long thin rope and cut it into inch-long pieces, or gather it into a pile and chop it into smaller pieces.

81. BUTTER SCOTCH.--Closely related to taffies so far as ingredients are concerned is candy known as butter scotch. This variety, however, is not pulled as are the taffies, but is allowed to become cool and then marked in squares which are broken apart when the candy is entirely cold.

81. BUTTER SCOTCH.--Similar to taffies in terms of ingredients, candy called butter scotch is a bit different. Instead of being pulled like taffies, this type is allowed to cool down and then scored into squares that are broken apart once the candy is fully cold.

BUTTER SCOTCH
  • 2 c. white sugar
  • 2 c. brown sugar
  • 1/4 c. corn sirup
  • 1 Tb. vinegar
  • 1/4 tsp. cream of tartar
  • 1/4 c. butter
  • 1 tsp. lemon extract

Mix all the ingredients except the butter and the lemon extract. Boil until a hard ball will form or 256 degrees register on the thermometer. Just before the boiling is completed, add the butter, and when the mixture has been removed from the fire, add the lemon extract. Pour into a greased pan, and before it has entirely cooled, cut into squares with a knife. When cold and desired for serving, remove from the pan and break the squares apart. If desired, candy of this kind may be allowed to become entirely cold without cutting and then broken into irregular pieces just before being served.

Mix all the ingredients except the butter and lemon extract. Boil until a hard ball forms or the thermometer reads 256 degrees. Just before the boiling is finished, add the butter, and when you take the mixture off the heat, add the lemon extract. Pour it into a greased pan, and before it completely cools, cut it into squares with a knife. Once it's cool and ready to serve, take it out of the pan and break the squares apart. If you prefer, you can let the candy cool completely without cutting it and then break it into irregular pieces right before serving.

82. MARSHMALLOWS COATED WITH BUTTER SCOTCH.--A delightful confection may be made by covering marshmallows with hot butter scotch. To accomplish this, drop the marshmallows with a coating fork or an ordinary table fork into hot butter scotch that has just finished cooking. Remove them quickly, but see that the marshmallows are entirely covered. Drop on a buttered pan or plate and set aside to cool.

82. MARSHMALLOWS COATED WITH BUTTER SCOTCH.—You can make a delicious treat by coating marshmallows with hot butterscotch. To do this, use a coating fork or a regular table fork to dip the marshmallows into hot butterscotch that's just finished cooking. Quickly take them out, ensuring the marshmallows are fully covered. Place them on a buttered pan or plate and let them cool.

83. GLACÉ NUTS AND FRUITS.--Nuts and fruits covered with a clear, hard candy are known as glacé nuts and fruits. These are a very delightful confection, and can easily be made if the accompanying directions are carefully followed. Nuts of any variety may be used for this purpose, and such nuts as almonds need not be blanched. Candied cherries, candied pineapple, pressed figs, dates, and raisins are the fruits that are usually glacéd. Confections of this kind should be eaten while fresh or kept in a closed receptacle in a dry place.

83. GLACÉ NUTS AND FRUITS.--Nuts and fruits coated with a clear, hard candy are called glacé nuts and fruits. These are a very delightful treat and can be easily made if you follow the directions closely. You can use any variety of nuts for this, and nuts like almonds don’t need to be blanched. Candied cherries, candied pineapple, pressed figs, dates, and raisins are the fruits typically glacéd. These treats should be eaten fresh or stored in a closed container in a dry place.

GLACÉ NUTS AND FRUITS
  • Fruits and nuts
  • 2 c. granulated sugar
  • 1/8 tsp. cream of tartar
  • 3/4 c. water
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Prepare the nuts by shelling them and, if necessary, roasting them, and the fruits by cutting them into small strips or cubes. Mix the sugar and cream of tartar and add the water. Cook until it will form a very brittle ball in water, will spin hair-like threads when drops of it fall from the spoon, or registers 290 degrees on the thermometer. Remove from the fire and put in a convenient place for the dipping of the fruit and nuts. Drop these into the hot sirup, one at a time, with a coating fork or an ordinary table fork. When entirely covered with the sirup, remove and drop on greased plates or pans.

Prepare the nuts by shelling them and, if needed, roasting them, and the fruits by cutting them into small strips or cubes. Mix the sugar and cream of tartar, then add the water. Cook until it forms a very brittle ball in water, spins hair-like threads when drops fall from the spoon, or reaches 290 degrees on the thermometer. Remove from the heat and set aside for dipping the fruit and nuts. Drop these into the hot syrup, one at a time, using a coating fork or a regular table fork. Once completely covered with the syrup, remove and place on greased plates or pans.

84. PEANUT BRITTLE.--Peanuts are often used in confection making and are very much liked by the majority of persons. They come in two general varieties, which may be roasted before use or used unroasted, and it is well for the housewife to understand the difference between them. One variety is the large, oblong peanut generally sold at peanut stands and used for the salted peanuts sold in confectionery stores. The other is the variety known as Spanish peanuts, which are small and round. For some candies, it is necessary that the peanuts be roasted and the skins removed, while for others unroasted peanuts with the skins on are desirable. To remove the skins from unroasted peanuts, they must be blanched by immersing them in boiling water until the skins will slip off easily, but in the case of roasted peanuts, the skins may be removed without blanching.

84. PEANUT BRITTLE.--Peanuts are commonly used in making candies and are popular with most people. They come in two main types, which can be roasted before use or used raw, and it's important for the homemaker to know the difference between them. One type is the large, oblong peanut typically sold at peanut stands and used for the salted peanuts found in candy stores. The other type is known as Spanish peanuts, which are small and round. For some candies, peanuts need to be roasted and their skins removed, while for others, unroasted peanuts with the skins on are preferable. To remove the skins from unroasted peanuts, they should be blanched by soaking them in boiling water until the skins slip off easily, but with roasted peanuts, the skins can be removed without blanching.

85. Peanut brittle is one of the candies in which peanuts are used. As its name implies, it is very thin and brittle and it usually contains a great many peanuts. Two recipes for candy of this kind are here given, one requiring peanuts that are roasted and blanched and the other, peanuts that are unroasted and not blanched.

85. Peanut brittle is a type of candy made with peanuts. As the name suggests, it’s thin and crunchy, typically packed with lots of peanuts. Here are two recipes for this candy: one uses roasted and blanched peanuts, while the other uses unroasted and unblanched peanuts.

PEANUT BRITTLE NO. 1
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1/2 lb. shelled, roasted peanuts

Put the sugar in a saucepan without any water. Place it over a slow fire and allow it to melt gradually until a clear, reddish-brown liquid is formed, taking care not to allow it to burn. Have a pan greased and covered with a thick layer of a large variety of roasted peanuts. Pour the melted sugar over them and allow it to become hard. Then break into pieces and serve.

Put the sugar in a saucepan without any water. Place it over low heat and let it melt slowly until you get a clear, reddish-brown liquid, being careful not to let it burn. Have a greased pan covered with a thick layer of roasted peanuts. Pour the melted sugar over the peanuts and let it harden. Then break it into pieces and serve.

PEANUT BRITTLE NO. 2
  • 3 c. sugar
  • 1 c. corn sirup
  • 1 c. water
  • 1/4 c. butter
  • 1 lb. raw Spanish peanuts
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 1 Tb. soda

Mix the sugar, sirup, and water and place it over the fire. Boil until a hard ball will form or a temperature of 250 degrees is reached on the thermometer. Add the butter and the peanuts without removing their brown skins. Allow to cook, stirring all the time, until the mixture begins to turn a light brown and the skins of the peanuts pop open, showing that the peanuts are roasted. Remove from the fire, add the vanilla and the soda and stir rapidly. Then pour the mixture, which will become thick upon the addition of the soda, on a flat, greased surface. A slab is better for this purpose than anything else, but if this cannot be obtained a metal or other hard table top may be used. When the candy begins to get stiff, loosen it from the surface on which it was poured, cut it into two pieces, and turn each over; or, if it can be handled without cutting, turn the entire piece over. Then stretch the candy until it is just as thin as possible, beginning around the edge. As it becomes colder, stretch even thinner. When entirely cool, break into pieces and serve.

Mix the sugar, syrup, and water and put it on the stove. Boil until you can form a hard ball or until the thermometer reads 250 degrees. Add the butter and the peanuts without removing their brown skins. Keep cooking while stirring constantly until the mixture starts to turn light brown and the skins of the peanuts pop open, indicating that they’re roasted. Take it off the heat, add the vanilla and baking soda, and stir quickly. Then pour the mixture, which will get thick after adding the baking soda, onto a flat, greased surface. A slab works best, but if you can’t find one, a metal or other solid tabletop will do. When the candy starts to get firm, loosen it from the surface where you poured it, cut it into two pieces, and flip each piece over; or, if it’s manageable without cutting, flip the whole piece over. Then stretch the candy as thin as possible, starting from the edge. As it cools, stretch it even thinner. Once it’s completely cool, break it into pieces and serve.

86. NUT BARS.--Another excellent nut candy can be made by pouring a sirup made of sugar, corn sirup, and water over a thick layer of nuts. Such fruits as dates and figs or coconut, or a combination of these, may be used with the nuts, if desired.

86. NUT BARS.--Another great nut candy can be made by pouring a syrup made of sugar, corn syrup, and water over a thick layer of nuts. You can also add fruits like dates, figs, or coconut, or a mix of these, along with the nuts if you want.

NUT BARS
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 3/4 c. corn sirup
  • 1/4 c. water
  • 1-1/2 c. shelled nuts

Put the sugar, sirup, and water over the fire and stir until it boils. Cover and cook until a hard ball will form or a temperature of 254 or 256 degrees is reached. Spread the nuts on a buttered slab or pan, and to them add fruit or coconut if it is desired to use either of these. Pour the hot sirup over this until it is about 1 inch in thickness. When sufficiently cool, cut in pieces of any desirable size, using a quick, sliding motion of the knife and pressing down at the same time. Break into pieces when entirely cold and serve.

Put the sugar, syrup, and water in a pot and stir until it boils. Cover and cook until it forms a hard ball or reaches a temperature of 254 to 256 degrees. Spread the nuts on a buttered surface or pan, and add fruit or coconut if you want to use either. Pour the hot syrup over this until it's about 1 inch thick. Once it’s cool enough, cut into pieces of your desired size using a quick sliding motion of the knife while pressing down. Break it into pieces when it's completely cold and serve.


CARAMELS

87. NATURE OF CARAMELS.--Caramels are included among the popular candies, and they may be made in many varieties. To plain vanilla caramels, which are the simplest kind to make, may be added any desirable color or flavor at the time they are removed from the fire. To keep caramels from crystallizing after they are boiled, glucose in some form must be used, and the most convenient kind to secure is corn sirup. Then, too, caramels will cut more easily and will have less of a sticky consistency if a small piece of paraffin is boiled with the mixture. The addition of this material or any wax that is not a food is contrary to the pure-food laws, and such candy cannot be sold. However, paraffin is not harmful, but is merely a substance that is not digested, so that the small amount taken by eating candy in which it is used cannot possibly cause any injury.

87. NATURE OF CARAMELS.--Caramels are a popular type of candy, and they can be made in many varieties. You can add any desired color or flavor to plain vanilla caramels, which are the easiest to make, right after taking them off the heat. To prevent caramels from crystallizing after boiling, you need to use some form of glucose, with corn syrup being the most convenient option. Additionally, caramels will be easier to cut and less sticky if a small piece of paraffin is boiled in the mixture. However, adding this substance or any wax that isn’t food goes against pure food laws, and such candy cannot be sold. That said, paraffin is not harmful; it is simply a substance that isn’t digested, so the small amount consumed in candy won’t cause any harm.

88. In the making of caramels, it should be remembered that good results depend on boiling the mixture to just the right point. If they are not boiled enough, they will be too soft to retain their shape when cut, and if they are cooked too long, they will be brittle. Neither of these conditions is the proper consistency for caramels. To be right, they must be boiled until a temperature of 246 to 248 degrees is reached. However, chocolate caramels need not be boiled so long, as the chocolate helps to harden them.

88. When making caramels, it's important to remember that the success of the recipe depends on boiling the mixture to the exact right temperature. If it's not boiled enough, the caramels will be too soft to hold their shape when cut, and if it's cooked too long, they will become brittle. Neither outcome provides the right consistency for caramels. To achieve the correct texture, the mixture should be boiled until it reaches a temperature of 246 to 248 degrees. However, chocolate caramels don’t need to be boiled for as long, since the chocolate helps them to harden.

89. PLAIN CARAMELS.--The accompanying recipe for plain caramels may be made just as it is given, or to it may be added any flavoring or coloring desired. A pink color and strawberry flavor are very often found in caramels and are considered to be a delicious combination. As will be noted, white sugar is called for, but if more of a caramel flavor is preferred, brown sugar may be used instead of white. Maple sugar may also be used in candy of this kind. Nuts, fruits, or coconut, or any mixture of these materials, improves plain caramels wonderfully. If they are used, they should be stirred into the mixture at the time it is removed from the fire.

89. PLAIN CARAMELS.--The recipe for plain caramels can be made exactly as provided, or you can add any flavoring or coloring you like. A pink color with a strawberry flavor is commonly found in caramels and is considered a delicious combination. While the recipe calls for white sugar, brown sugar can be used instead for a deeper caramel flavor. Maple sugar can also be incorporated into this type of candy. Adding nuts, fruits, or coconut—or a mix of these—greatly enhances plain caramels. If you're using them, mix them in when you take the mixture off the heat.

PLAIN CARAMELS
  • 3 c. milk
  • 3 c. sugar
  • 1-1/2 c. corn sirup

The milk used for making caramels should be as rich as possible; in fact, if cream can be used, the candy will be very much better. Add half of the milk to the sugar and sirup and put over the fire to cook. Allow this mixture to boil until a soft ball will form when dropped in water, stirring when necessary to prevent burning. Then gradually add the remaining milk without stopping the boiling if possible. Cook again until a temperature of 248 degrees will register on the thermometer or a fairly hard ball will form when tried in water. In the water test, the ball, when thoroughly cold, should have exactly the same consistency as the finished caramels. Toward the end of the boiling, it is necessary to stir the mixture almost constantly to prevent it from burning. When done, pour it out on a buttered slab or some other flat surface and allow it to become cool. Then cut the candy into squares from 3/4 to 1 inch in size, cutting with a sliding pressure, that is, bearing down and away from you at the same time.

The milk used for making caramels should be as rich as possible; in fact, using cream will make the candy much better. Add half of the milk to the sugar and syrup and put it on the stove to cook. Let this mixture boil until a soft ball forms when dropped in water, stirring as needed to prevent burning. Then gradually add the rest of the milk without stopping the boil if you can. Cook again until the thermometer reads 248 degrees or a fairly hard ball forms when tested in water. In the water test, the ball, when completely cold, should have the same consistency as the finished caramels. Toward the end of boiling, it's important to stir the mixture almost constantly to avoid burning. When it's done, pour it out onto a buttered slab or another flat surface and let it cool. Then cut the candy into squares about 3/4 to 1 inch in size, using a sliding pressure—pushing down and away from you at the same time.

If the caramels are to be packed or kept for any length of time, it is well to wrap them in waxed paper. Before attempting to use caramels, however, they should be allowed to stand overnight in a cool, dry place, but not in a refrigerator.

If the caramels need to be packed or stored for a while, it's best to wrap them in waxed paper. Before using the caramels, though, let them sit overnight in a cool, dry place, but not in the refrigerator.

90. CHOCOLATE CARAMELS.--When chocolate caramels are made, the chocolate should be added just before the cooking is finished. The amount of chocolate to be used may be varied to suit the taste, but 2 squares are usually considered sufficient for the quantities given in the accompanying recipe.

90. CHOCOLATE CARAMELS.--When making chocolate caramels, add the chocolate just before the cooking is done. You can adjust the amount of chocolate to match your taste, but 2 squares are generally seen as enough for the amounts listed in the recipe that follows.

CHOCOLATE CARAMELS
  • 1 c. molasses or 1 c. maple sirup
  • 1/2 c. corn sirup
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1 pt. milk
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • 2 sq. chocolate
  • Pinch of salt
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Cook the molasses or maple sirup, the corn sirup, and the sugar with 1 cupful of the milk until the mixture will form a soft ball in cold water. Then add the remainder of the milk and cook until the mixture is thick. Add the butter, chocolate, and salt, and cook until a hard ball will form in cold water or a temperature of 248 degrees is reached, stirring constantly to prevent burning. Add the vanilla, pour on a buttered surface, cool, cut, and serve.

Cook the molasses or maple syrup, corn syrup, and sugar with 1 cup of milk until the mixture forms a soft ball in cold water. Then add the rest of the milk and cook until the mixture is thick. Add the butter, chocolate, and salt, and cook until a hard ball forms in cold water or the temperature reaches 248 degrees, stirring constantly to prevent burning. Add the vanilla, pour it onto a buttered surface, let it cool, cut, and serve.


CREAM CANDIES

NATURES OF CREAM CANDIES

91. There are numerous varieties of cream candies, some of which must be made with great care while others may be made quickly and easily. For instance, fudge, penuchie, divinity, and sea foam are examples of cream candies that do not require long preparation, but these must generally be used up quickly, as they do not stay soft upon exposure to the air unless it is very moist. On the other hand, such cream candies as opera cream, fondant, center cream, and orientals require both care and time in their preparation. If these are properly looked after, they may be kept for some time. In fact, it is necessary that some of them stand for several days before they can be made into the numerous varieties to which they lend themselves.

91. There are many types of cream candies. Some can be made with great care, while others are quick and easy to prepare. For example, fudge, penuche, divinity, and sea foam are cream candies that don’t take long to make, but they usually need to be eaten quickly since they won't stay soft when exposed to the air unless it's very humid. On the other hand, cream candies like opera cream, fondant, center cream, and orientals require both attention and time to make. If you take proper care of them, they can be stored for a while. In fact, some need to sit for several days before you can turn them into the various types they can become.

The main point to consider in the preparation of all cream candies is that crystallization of the sugar, which is commonly called graining, must be prevented if a creamy mixture is to be the result. Candies of this kind are not palatable unless they are soft and creamy. However, no difficulty will be experienced in preparing delicious cream candies if the principles of candy making previously given are applied.

The key thing to remember when making cream candies is that you need to avoid the crystallization of sugar, often referred to as graining, if you want the mixture to be creamy. These types of candies aren’t enjoyable unless they’re soft and creamy. However, you shouldn’t have any trouble making tasty cream candies if you follow the candy-making principles we discussed earlier.


FUDGES AND RELATED CANDIES

92. FUDGE NO. 1.--Probably no other candy is so well known and so often made as fudge. Even persons little experienced in candy making have success with candy of this kind. Another advantage of fudge is that it can be made up quickly, very little time being required in its preparation. Several varieties of fudge may be made, the one given in the accompanying recipe being a chocolate fudge containing a small quantity of corn starch.

92. FUDGE NO. 1.--Probably no other candy is as well-known and frequently made as fudge. Even people with little experience in candy making have success with this type of candy. Another advantage of fudge is that it can be made quickly, requiring very little time for preparation. Several varieties of fudge can be made, with the one in the accompanying recipe being a chocolate fudge that contains a small amount of corn starch.

FUDGE No. 1
  • 3 c. sugar
  • 1-1/4 c. milk
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 sq. chocolate
  • 1 Tb. corn starch
  • 3 Tb. water
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Mix the sugar, milk, butter, and salt and boil until a very soft ball will form in water. Then add the chocolate and the corn starch, which has been moistened with the cold water. Boil to a temperature of 236 degrees or until a ball that will hold together well and may be handled is formed in cold water. Remove from the fire and allow the mixture to cool until there is practically no heat in it. Add the vanilla, beat until thick, pour into a buttered pan, cut into squares, and serve.

Mix the sugar, milk, butter, and salt, and boil until a very soft ball forms in water. Then add the chocolate and the cornstarch that has been moistened with cold water. Boil until it reaches a temperature of 236 degrees or until a ball that holds together well and can be handled forms in cold water. Remove from heat and let the mixture cool until it’s nearly at room temperature. Add the vanilla, beat until thick, pour into a buttered pan, cut into squares, and serve.

93. FUDGE NO. 2.--A fudge containing corn sirup is liked by many persons. It has a slightly different flavor from the other variety of fudge, but is just as creamy if the directions are carefully followed.

93. FUDGE NO. 2.--A fudge made with corn syrup is enjoyed by many people. It has a slightly different flavor than the other type of fudge, but it’s just as creamy if the instructions are followed closely.

FUDGE No. 2
  • 3/4 c. milk
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1/4 c. corn sirup
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 sq. chocolate
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Cook the milk, sugar, corn sirup, butter, and salt until the mixture will form a very soft ball when tried in water. Add the chocolate and cook again until a soft ball that can be handled will form or the thermometer registers 236 degrees. Remove from the fire, cool without stirring until entirely cold, and then add the vanilla. Beat until creamy, pour into buttered pans, cut into squares, and serve.

Cook the milk, sugar, corn syrup, butter, and salt until the mixture forms a very soft ball when tested in water. Add the chocolate and cook again until a soft ball that can be handled forms or the thermometer reads 236 degrees. Remove from heat, let it cool without stirring until completely cold, and then add the vanilla. Beat until creamy, pour into buttered pans, cut into squares, and serve.

94. TWO LAYER FUDGE.--A very attractive as well as delicious fudge can be had by making it in two layers, one white and one dark. The dark layer contains chocolate while the white one is the same mixture, with the exception of the chocolate. The layers may be arranged with either the white or the dark layer on top, as preferred.

94. TWO LAYER FUDGE.--You can make a really appealing and tasty fudge by creating it in two layers, one white and one dark. The dark layer has chocolate, while the white layer is the same mix, just without the chocolate. You can stack the layers with either the white or dark layer on top, depending on your preference.

TWO-LAYER FUDGE
  • 4 c. sugar
  • 1-1/2 c. milk
  • 6 Tb. corn sirup
  • 2 Tb. butter
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 sq. chocolate
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Mix the sugar, milk, corn sirup, butter, and salt, and cook until a very soft ball will form. Transfer half of the mixture to another pan and add to it the chocolate, which has been melted. Boil each mixture until it tests 238 degrees with the thermometer or a soft ball that can be handled well will form in cold water. Upon removing it from the fire, add the vanilla, putting half into each mixture. Set aside to cool and when all the heat is gone, beat one of the mixtures until it becomes creamy and pour it into a buttered pan. Then beat the other one and pour it over the first. Cut into squares and serve.

Mix the sugar, milk, corn syrup, butter, and salt, and cook until a very soft ball forms. Transfer half of the mixture to another pan and add the melted chocolate. Boil each mixture until it reaches 238 degrees on the thermometer or a soft ball forms that can be easily handled in cold water. After removing it from the heat, add the vanilla, dividing it equally between the two mixtures. Set aside to cool, and when all the heat is gone, beat one of the mixtures until it's creamy and pour it into a buttered pan. Then beat the other mixture and pour it over the first. Cut into squares and serve.

95. BROWN-SUGAR FUDGE.--Fudge in which brown sugar is used for the largest part of the sweetening is explained in the accompanying recipe. Peanuts are added, but if desired nuts of any other kind may be used.

95. BROWN-SUGAR FUDGE.--This fudge uses brown sugar as the main sweetener, as detailed in the recipe below. Peanuts are included, but you can substitute other types of nuts if you prefer.

BROWN-SUGAR FUDGE
  • 2 c. brown sugar
  • 1 c. white sugar
  • 1 c. milk
  • 1 Tb. butter
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 3/4 c. chopped peanuts

Mix the sugar, milk, and butter and boil until a soft ball will form in cold water or a temperature of 238 degrees is reached on the thermometer. Remove from the fire, add the vanilla, and cool until the heat is out of the mixture. Beat, and when the candy begins to grow creamy, add the chopped nuts. When sufficiently thick, pour into a buttered pan, cut, and serve.

Mix the sugar, milk, and butter and boil until a soft ball forms in cold water or until the thermometer reads 238 degrees. Remove from the heat, add the vanilla, and let it cool until it's no longer hot. Beat the mixture, and when it starts to get creamy, add the chopped nuts. Once it's thick enough, pour it into a buttered pan, cut, and serve.

96. MAPLE PENUCHIE.--Almost any kind of maple candy finds favor with the majority of persons, but maple penuchie is especially well liked. Nuts and coconut are used in it, and these improve the flavor very much.

96. MAPLE PENUCHIE.--Almost any kind of maple candy is popular with most people, but maple penuchie is especially loved. It includes nuts and coconut, which greatly enhance the flavor.

MAPLE PENUCHIE
  • 3 c. maple sirup
  • 1/4 tsp. soda
  • 1 c. milk
  • Few grains of salt
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 1/2 c. chopped nuts
  • 1/2 c. shredded coconut

Into the maple sirup, stir the soda, and add the milk and salt. Place over the fire and boil until a soft ball that can be easily handled will form in cold water or a temperature of 238 degrees is reached on the thermometer. Remove from the fire, add the vanilla, and allow the mixture to become entirely cold. Beat, and when it begins to get thick, add the nuts and coconut. Continue beating until the candy grows stiff but can be poured out. Pour in a buttered pan, cut, and serve.

Into the maple syrup, stir the soda, and add the milk and salt. Place over the heat and boil until a soft ball that can be easily handled forms in cold water, or the thermometer reads 238 degrees. Remove from the heat, add the vanilla, and let the mixture cool completely. Beat it, and when it starts to thicken, add the nuts and coconut. Keep beating until the candy becomes firm but can still be poured. Pour it into a buttered pan, cut, and serve.

97. DIVINITY.--An excellent confection known as divinity can be made with very little difficulty if the accompanying recipe is carefully followed. Nuts and raisins are used in this confection, but if desired they may be omitted. As divinity is dropped from a spoon on oiled paper, care should be taken not to boil the mixture too long, or it will be necessary to work very rapidly in order to drop all of it before it becomes too dry.

97. DIVINITY.--You can make a delicious treat called divinity pretty easily if you follow the recipe closely. Nuts and raisins are included in this treat, but you can leave them out if you want. As you drop divinity from a spoon onto oiled paper, be careful not to cook the mixture for too long, or you’ll need to work quickly to drop it all before it dries out too much.

DIVINITY
  • 1/3 c. corn sirup
  • 1/2 c. water
  • 2 c. sugar
  • 1 egg white
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 1/4 c. nuts
  • 1/4 c. raisins

Boil the sirup, water, and sugar together until a fairly hard ball will form in cold water or the mixture registers 240 degrees on the thermometer, which is a trifle harder than the fudge mixture. Beat the egg white until it is stiff but not dry. Over this pour the hot mixture a drop at a time until it can be added faster without cooking the egg white. Beat rapidly until all the sirup is added, stir in the vanilla, and when fairly stiff add the nuts and raisins. Continue beating until the mixture will stand alone, and then drop by spoonfuls on oiled paper or a buttered surface. When dry enough to handle, divinity may be served.

Boil the syrup, water, and sugar together until a fairly hard ball forms in cold water or the mixture reaches 240 degrees on the thermometer, which is slightly harder than the fudge mixture. Beat the egg white until it’s stiff but not dry. Pour the hot mixture over it a drop at a time, then you can add it faster without cooking the egg white. Beat quickly until all the syrup is mixed in, stir in the vanilla, and when it’s fairly stiff, add the nuts and raisins. Keep beating until the mixture holds its shape, then drop spoonfuls onto oiled paper or a buttered surface. Once it's dry enough to handle, divinity can be served.

98. SEA FOAM.--Another candy in which a cooked sirup is poured over beaten egg white is known as sea foam. Candies of this kind should be served at once, for they are apt to become dry and hard if they are allowed to stand.

98. SEA FOAM.--Another candy made by pouring cooked syrup over beaten egg whites is called sea foam. This type of candy should be served immediately, as it can become dry and hard if left to sit.

SEA FOAM
<
  • 2 c. light-brown sugar
  • 1/2 c. water
  • Pinch of salt
  • 1 egg white
  • 1 tsp. vanilla

Boil the sugar, water, and salt until a fairly hard ball will form or the thermometer registers 240 degrees. Beat the egg white stiff, but not dry. Pour the hot sirup over the egg white, a drop at a time at first, and then as fast as possible without cooking the egg white. Add the vanilla and continue beating the mixture until it will stand alone. Drop by spoonfuls on a buttered surface or oiled paper. When sufficiently dry, remove from the surface and serve.

Boil the sugar, water, and salt until you can form a pretty hard ball or until the thermometer reads 240 degrees. Beat the egg white until it's stiff, but not dry. Pour the hot syrup over the egg white, starting with just a drop at a time, and then pour it as fast as you can without cooking the egg white. Add the vanilla and keep beating the mixture until it holds its shape. Drop spoonfuls onto a buttered surface or oiled paper. Once they're dry enough, take them off the surface and serve.


FONDANT AND RELATED CREAMS

99. NATURE OF FONDANT.--Fondant is the foundation cream out of which bonbons and various other fancy candies are made. It is also used for stuffing dates, taking the place of the pit. While it is not so desirable for the centers of chocolate creams as for most of the other candies for which it is used, it can, of course, be coated with chocolate if desired. Some persons have an idea that fondant and related candies are difficult to make, but if directions are followed carefully this will not be the case.

99. NATURE OF FONDANT.--Fondant is the basic cream used to create bonbons and various other fancy candies. It's also used to fill dates, replacing the pit. While it's not the best choice for the centers of chocolate creams compared to most other candies, it can definitely be dipped in chocolate if you want. Some people think fondant and similar candies are hard to make, but if you follow the instructions closely, it really isn't.

[Illustration: FIG. 5] [Illustration: FIG. 6]

100. In the first place, it should be remembered that the weather is an important factor in the success of candy of this kind. A clear, cold day should be selected, for it is difficult to make fondant successfully on a warm or a damp day. Then, too, it is an excellent plan to make more than can be used at one time, for no greater labor will be involved in the making of a large amount than a small amount and better results may be expected. If the fondant material is cared for properly, small quantities of it may be made up as desired. Therefore, if convenient equipment is on hand for making candies of this type, no less than 2-1/2 pounds should be made at one time. Five pounds is a preferable amount, but, if desired, 10 pounds may be made up at one time, although this amount is about as much as one person can handle and even this is somewhat difficult for some to work up.

100. First of all, it's important to remember that the weather plays a big role in the success of this type of candy. You should choose a clear, cold day, because it’s tough to make fondant successfully on a warm or damp day. Also, it’s a great idea to make more than you need at one time, since it doesn’t take much more effort to prepare a large batch than a small one, and you can expect better results. If you take good care of the fondant, you can easily prepare small amounts as needed. So, if you have suitable equipment for making this kind of candy, you should make at least 2-1/2 pounds at once. Five pounds is a better amount, but if you want, you can go for 10 pounds at a time, though that’s about the maximum one person can manage and can be quite challenging for some to work with.

A little ingenuity on the part of the person making up the fondant will result in many delightful bonbons. Candied fruits, nuts, coconut, and numerous varieties of flavoring and coloring may be utilized very successfully with fondant. It should be remembered, however, that bonbons do not keep fresh for more than a few days or a week at the most if they are exposed to the air. If it is desired to keep them for any length of time, they should be packed in a tin box, but when stored in this way, different colors should not be placed next to each other or they will mix.

A little creativity from the person making the fondant will lead to many tasty treats. You can successfully use candied fruits, nuts, coconut, and various flavors and colors with fondant. However, it's important to remember that bonbons won't stay fresh for more than a few days or a week at most if they're exposed to air. If you want to keep them for a longer time, you should store them in a tin box, but when doing so, make sure not to place different colors next to each other or they will mix.

101. FONDANT.--As will be noted, the accompanying recipe for fondant calls for 5 pounds of sugar. It is not necessary that all of the fondant be worked up at once. Indeed, it is suggested that this amount be prepared and then stored so that the fondant may be used as needed. If a smaller amount should be desired, half of each ingredient may be used.

101. FONDANT.--As you’ll see, the recipe for fondant calls for 5 pounds of sugar. You don’t have to make all the fondant at once. In fact, it’s recommended to prepare this amount and then store it so that you can use the fondant as needed. If you want a smaller amount, you can just use half of each ingredient.

FONDANT
  • 5 lb. sugar
  • 1 qt. water
  • 6 drops acetic acid or 1/4 tsp. cream tartar

Mix the sugar, water, and acetic acid or cream of tartar. Place over the fire and, as in Fig. 5, stir until the sugar is dissolved. Just before the mixture begins to boil, wash down the sides of the kettle with a wet cloth, as shown in Fig. 6. Then place a lid over the kettle and cook until almost ready to test. Remove the cover and, as in Fig. 7, insert a thermometer, which should register 238 degrees. If the fondant is to be stored for some time, it may be boiled to 240 degrees, but for general use a mixture that reaches a temperature of 238 degrees will be the most satisfactory. If the water test is applied, as in Fig. 8, the mixture should form a firm ball that can be easily held in the fingers. Just before the boiling is completed, cool a large platter or a slab and moisten it by wetting it with a damp cloth.

Mix the sugar, water, and acetic acid or cream of tartar. Place it on the heat and, as shown in Fig. 5, stir until the sugar dissolves. Just before the mixture starts to boil, wipe down the sides of the pot with a wet cloth, as illustrated in Fig. 6. Then cover the pot with a lid and cook until it’s almost ready to test. Remove the lid and, as shown in Fig. 7, insert a thermometer; it should read 238 degrees. If you're planning to store the fondant for a while, you can boil it to 240 degrees, but for everyday use, a mixture that hits 238 degrees will work best. If you perform the water test, as shown in Fig. 8, the mixture should form a firm ball that you can easily hold between your fingers. Just before the boiling is finished, cool a large platter or slab and dampen it with a wet cloth.

[Illustration: FIG. 7]

No time should intervene between the end of the boiling and the removal of the sirup from the stove, for every second that the sirup is allowed to stand over the hot burner before it is poured out will raise the temperature. Pour quickly on the platter, as in Fig. 9, and do not allow it to drip. If some sirup is left in the pan, utilize it for something else, rather than allow it to drop on the surface of the candy in the platter or slab. It is at this point that crystallization begins, and the fondant, instead of being creamy, will become grainy. Cool as quickly as possible, so as to lessen the chances for crystallization to begin, and do not disturb the sirup in any way during the cooling. The best way in which to accomplish this is to put the platter in a cool place and make it perfectly level before the sirup is poured into it.

No time should pass between the end of boiling and taking the syrup off the stove, because every second the syrup sits over the hot burner before it's poured out will increase the temperature. Pour it quickly onto the platter, as shown in Fig. 9, and avoid any drips. If there's some syrup left in the pan, use it for something else instead of letting it drop onto the candy's surface in the platter or slab. At this stage, crystallization starts, and the fondant will turn grainy instead of creamy. Cool it down as fast as you can to reduce the chances of crystallization starting, and don't disturb the syrup at all while it's cooling. The best way to do this is to place the platter in a cool spot and ensure it's perfectly level before pouring the syrup into it.

[Illustration: FIG. 8] [Illustration: FIG. 9]

When the mixture has cooled to the extent that it no longer retains any heat, it is ready to be stirred. As already explained, a putty knife or a wallpaper scraper is the most satisfactory utensil to use for this purpose, especially if a large batch is being made. However, a small batch may be stirred very successfully with a case knife. With whatever utensil is selected, scrape the fondant up into a heap, and then, as in Fig. 10, start the working. See that all parts are worked alike. Continue the operation, occasionally scraping off the knife or the paddle used. The first indication of the creaming stage will be a cloudy look in the mixture and a slight thinning of it, so that the work will be easier for a few minutes. It will then gradually begin to harden, and when the end of the work is reached the hardening will progress rapidly. At this stage, try to get the mass together, see that no loose fragments cling to the platter, and pile all into a heap. By the time the working is completed, the candy will be rather hard and will look as if it can never be worked into a soft, creamy candy. It will become soft, however, by the proper treatment.

When the mixture has cooled down enough that it doesn't feel warm anymore, it's ready to be stirred. As mentioned earlier, a putty knife or a wallpaper scraper is the best tool for this, especially for large batches. For smaller batches, a case knife works just as well. Whatever tool you choose, scrape the fondant into a pile, and then, like in Fig. 10, start mixing. Make sure to work all parts evenly. Keep going, occasionally scraping off the knife or paddle you’re using. The first sign that it's in the creaming stage will be a cloudy appearance and a slight thinning of the mixture, which will make it easier to work for a few minutes. Then it will start to harden, and as you finish, it will harden quickly. At this point, try to gather the mixture together, ensuring no loose bits are stuck to the platter, and pile everything into a heap. By the time you’re done mixing, the candy will be quite hard and may seem impossible to turn into a soft, creamy candy. However, with the right technique, it will soften up.

[Illustration: FIG. 10]
[Illustration: FIG. 11]

Wring a clean towel or napkin out of cold water, and, as in Fig. 11, place it tightly over the mass of fondant and tuck it in securely around the edges. Allow the candy to stand for an hour in this way. At the end of this time it will be sufficiently moist to work in any desired way. With a knife or a scraper, break it off into pieces of a size that can be handled well at one time and work each one of these soft by squeezing it in the manner shown in Fig. 12. When all of the pieces have been worked soft, pack them into a bowl and continue working until all the fondant has been worked together and is soft. Over the top of the bowl, as shown in Fig. 13, place a damp cloth and cover this with a plate or an earthen cover. Set away in some place where it will remain cool, but will not become too moist, until it is desired for further use.

Wring out a clean towel or napkin with cold water, and, as shown in Fig. 11, place it tightly over the fondant, tucking it securely around the edges. Let the candy sit like this for an hour. After that time, it will be moist enough to work with. Use a knife or a scraper to break it into manageable pieces, and work each piece by squeezing it as shown in Fig. 12. Once all the pieces are softened, pack them into a bowl and keep working until all the fondant is combined and soft. Over the bowl, as shown in Fig. 13, place a damp cloth and cover it with a plate or a clay lid. Store it in a cool place where it won't get too damp until you're ready to use it.

[Illustration: FIG. 12] [Illustration: FIG. 13]

The four recipes that follow show how fondant can be made up into attractive as well as delicious confections. They will doubtless give the housewife other ideas as to ways of preparing candies from this foundation material.

The four recipes that follow demonstrate how fondant can be turned into both attractive and tasty treats. They will surely inspire the homemaker with additional ideas for making candies using this base ingredient.

102. BONBONS.--In a broad sense, bonbons mean candy or confections in general, but it is also the name of candies made out of colored and flavored fondant. Sometimes they are made small and dainty and are decorated with a nut meat or a piece of maraschino or candied cherry or candied pineapple. Again, centers may be made that contain coconut, nuts, figs, dates, raisins, etc., and these then dipped in some of the fondant that has been colored, flavored, and melted.

102. BONBONS.--Generally, bonbons refer to candy or sweets in general, but it specifically denotes candies made from colored and flavored fondant. They are often made small and delicate, decorated with a nut, a piece of maraschino cherry, or candied cherry or pineapple. Additionally, the centers can include coconut, nuts, figs, dates, raisins, and so on, which are then dipped in colored, flavored, and melted fondant.

[Illustration: FIG. 14]

103. When bonbons are to be made, remove fondant in pieces from the utensil in which it has been stored. Work it with the hands as it was worked when put away and add the desired coloring and flavoring at this time. If simple bonbons are to be made, form the colored and flavored fondant into tiny balls, place them on oiled paper, and press a nut or a piece of maraschino or candied cherry or candied pineapple on top.

103. When making bonbons, take out the fondant in pieces from the container where it has been stored. Work it with your hands as it was when stored, and add the desired color and flavor now. If you're making simple bonbons, shape the colored and flavored fondant into small balls, lay them on oiled parchment paper, and press a nut, a piece of maraschino cherry, a candied cherry, or candied pineapple on top.

104. To make more elaborate bonbons, form, as in Fig. 14, small round centers out of the fondant to which have been added such materials as dates, figs, raisins, nuts, or coconut, or any combination of these. Only enough fondant should be used to make the other materials stick together. Then, in a double boiler, color, flavor, and melt some of the fondant and, with a coating or other fork, drop the centers into this melted cream. When thoroughly coated, remove, and place on waxed paper. While warm, a piece of nut or candied fruit may be placed on the top of each one. If it is desired not to use fondant in the centers, the nuts or candied fruits themselves may be dipped into the melted bonbon cream and then placed on waxed paper to harden.

104. To create more elaborate bonbons, shape small round centers from fondant mixed with ingredients like dates, figs, raisins, nuts, coconut, or any combination of these, as shown in Fig. 14. Use just enough fondant to bind the other ingredients together. Then, in a double boiler, melt, flavor, and color some fondant. Using a fork, drop the centers into the melted mixture. Once well-coated, remove them and set them on wax paper. While they're still warm, you can add a piece of nut or candied fruit on top of each bonbon. If you prefer not to use fondant for the centers, you can dip the nuts or candied fruits directly into the melted bonbon mixture before placing them on wax paper to harden.

 [Illustration: FIG. 15]

105. RECEPTION WAFERS.--Thin wafers made of fondant are a confection much used at parties, receptions, and similar social gatherings. One variety of these is colored pink and flavored with wintergreen, while another is flavored with peppermint and not colored in any way. Other colors and flavors may also be made if desired, but the usual kinds are the pink and white ones.

105. RECEPTION WAFERS.--Thin wafers made of fondant are a popular treat at parties, receptions, and similar social events. One type is colored pink and flavored with wintergreen, while another is flavored with peppermint and left uncolored. Other colors and flavors can also be created if desired, but the standard options are the pink and white ones.

Divide the mass of fondant to be used into two parts and color one of these a pale pink. Flavor the pink mass with wintergreen and the white one with peppermint. Put one of these in a double boiler and allow it to melt until it is soft enough to pour. Then, as in Fig. 15, with a dessert spoon or a tablespoon, drop the melted fondant on a smooth surface in sufficient amounts to make wafers about the size of a quarter. Drop quickly and as accurately as possible so that the wafers will be the same size and shape. Allow them to stand until cold and set.

Divide the mass of fondant to be used into two parts and color one of them a light pink. Flavor the pink mass with wintergreen and the white one with peppermint. Put one of these in a double boiler and let it melt until it’s soft enough to pour. Then, as shown in Fig. 15, using a dessert spoon or a tablespoon, drop the melted fondant onto a smooth surface in enough quantities to make wafers about the size of a quarter. Drop quickly and as accurately as possible so that the wafers will be the same size and shape. Let them sit until they’re cool and set.

Sometimes it will be found that two wafers can be dropped from the same spoonful before the material becomes too cold to pour, but usually it is necessary to dip a fresh spoonful for each wafer. As the fondant hardens on the back of the spoon it should be scraped off and put back into the double boiler. A comparatively small amount of fondant should be melted at one time in order to provide against its becoming sugary, but if it shows any signs of this condition the double boiler should be emptied and thoroughly cleaned before more of the fondant is melted in it.

Sometimes you'll find that you can drop two wafers from the same spoonful before the mixture gets too cold to pour, but generally, you'll need to scoop a new spoonful for each wafer. As the fondant hardens on the back of the spoon, it should be scraped off and returned to the double boiler. It's best to melt a relatively small amount of fondant at a time to prevent it from becoming sugary. If it starts to show any signs of that, the double boiler should be emptied and cleaned thoroughly before melting more fondant in it.

106. RAINBOW DELIGHT.--An especially attractive candy that has fondant for its foundation is rainbow delight. As may be inferred from its name, candy of this kind is in several colors.

106. RAINBOW DELIGHT.--A particularly appealing candy that uses fondant as its base is rainbow delight. As its name suggests, this type of candy comes in various colors.

To make rainbow delight, divide fondant into three parts. Flavor one with vanilla and to it add chopped nuts. Flavor the second with strawberry, color it pink, and, if desired, add shredded coconut. To the third, add melted bitter chocolate until it is as dark as preferred. Line a small bread pan or a box as smoothly as possible with waxed paper, place the white fondant in the bottom, and press it down into a layer. Over this put the chocolate fondant, press this into a layer, and on top of it place the pink candy. After making the mass smooth and even, allow it to remain where it will be cold until it is set. Then remove it from the pan or box by turning it out on a surface that has been slightly dusted with confectioner's sugar. Have coating chocolate melted and cover the surface of three sides of the candy with a thick layer of the chocolate. If, when the chocolate becomes dry and hard, it seems a little thin, give it a second coating.

To make rainbow delight, first divide the fondant into three parts. Flavor one part with vanilla and add chopped nuts. Flavor the second part with strawberry, color it pink, and if you'd like, mix in some shredded coconut. For the third part, add melted dark chocolate until it reaches your desired darkness. Line a small bread pan or box with wax paper as smoothly as possible. Place the white fondant at the bottom and press it down to form a layer. Next, add the chocolate fondant, press it down into another layer, and finally, place the pink candy on top. After smoothing everything out, let it sit in a cool place until it sets. Once set, remove it from the pan or box by turning it out onto a surface lightly dusted with confectioner's sugar. Melt some chocolate for coating and cover three sides of the candy with a thick layer. If the chocolate feels a bit thin once it dries and hardens, apply a second coat.

When it is entirely cold, turn the candy over and coat the remaining side. To serve, cut into slices and cut each slice into pieces.

When it's completely cool, flip the candy over and coat the other side. To serve, slice it up and cut each slice into pieces.

107. TUTTI-FRUTTI ROLLS.--Another very good candy that can be made from fondant is tutti-frutti roll. Secure nuts, cherries, candied pineapple, and citron, chop them fine, and to them add shredded coconut. Work these in any quantity desired into the fondant until all are worked through evenly and then flavor with vanilla. Shape the mass into a roll and let it stand until it is well set. Then coat it with coating chocolate. When it has become cold, turn it over and coat the bottom. To serve tutti-frutti roll, cut it into slices.

107. TUTTI-FRUTTI ROLLS.--Another really good candy that you can make from fondant is tutti-frutti roll. Gather nuts, cherries, candied pineapple, and citron, chop them finely, and add shredded coconut. Mix these into the fondant in your desired amount until everything is evenly incorporated, then flavor with vanilla. Shape the mixture into a roll and let it sit until it sets properly. Next, coat it with chocolate. Once it's cold, flip it over and coat the bottom. To serve tutti-frutti roll, cut it into slices.

108. OPERA CREAM.--No more delicious cream candy can be made than that known as opera cream. This may be colored and flavored in many different ways or made up in various forms. When chocolate is added to it, a better fudge than the ordinary kinds is the result. Sufficient time should be allowed for the making of opera cream, for it is necessary that this candy stand for several hours before it is worked up.

108. OPERA CREAM.--There’s no cream candy more delightful than opera cream. You can color and flavor it in many different ways or shape it into various forms. When you add chocolate, it results in a superior fudge compared to the usual kinds. Make sure to allow enough time for making opera cream, as this candy needs to sit for several hours before it can be worked with.

OPERA CREAM
  • 4 c. sugar
  • 1/8 tsp. cream of tartar
  • 2 Tb. corn sirup
  • 1 pt. thin cream
  • Vanilla

Mix the sugar and the cream of tartar, add the sirup and cream, and cook over a hot fire. Watch closely to see whether the cream looks as if it might curd, and if it does, beat rapidly with a rotary beater. Do not stir after the boiling has begun unless it is necessary to keep the mixture from sticking to the pan. Boil until a very hard ball will form in water or until it registers 240 degrees on the thermometer. Moisten a large, flat platter or a marble slab, pour the mixture on it, and allow it to remain until it is entirely cool, disturbing it in no way during this cooling. When cool, work up with a putty knife or a similar utensil in the same manner as for fondant until it becomes hard and creamy. Place all in a heap in the center of the slab or platter and cover closely with a damp cloth, a clean towel being desirable for this purpose. Allow it to stand for about 2 hours, and then work it with the hands, being careful to remove any lumps that it might contain.

Mix the sugar and cream of tartar, add the syrup and cream, and cook over a medium heat. Watch closely to see if the cream might curdle, and if it looks like it might, beat it quickly with a rotary beater. Don’t stir once it starts boiling unless you need to prevent it from sticking to the pan. Boil until it forms a very hard ball in water or reaches 240 degrees on the thermometer. Moisten a large, flat platter or marble slab, pour the mixture onto it, and let it cool completely without disturbing it. Once cool, work it with a putty knife or a similar tool like you would for fondant until it becomes hard and creamy. Gather it all in a pile in the center of the slab or platter and cover it tightly with a damp cloth, using a clean towel for this purpose. Let it sit for about 2 hours, then knead it by hand, making sure to remove any lumps it might have.

The cream is now ready to be worked up in any desirable way. Divide it into small batches, and then flavor and color it or work melted chocolate into it. Press it into a layer about 1 inch thick in a shallow box lined with waxed paper or a pan that has been buttered, cut it into squares, and allow it to stand for a few hours. Then remove and serve.

The cream is now ready to be used however you like. Split it into small portions, then add flavor and color, or mix in melted chocolate. Press it into a layer about 1 inch thick in a shallow box lined with wax paper or a greased pan, cut it into squares, and let it sit for a few hours. Then take it out and serve.

109. CENTER CREAM.--An excellent cream candy for the centers of chocolates is given in the accompanying recipe. As molds are necessary in its preparation, it is more difficult to make than fondant, but success can be had with this as well as with other candies.

109. CENTER CREAM.--Here's a great cream candy recipe to use as centers for chocolates. Since molds are needed for making it, it's a bit harder to prepare than fondant, but you can definitely achieve success with this and other candies too.

The cream used for these centers may be colored and flavored in any desirable way. It is somewhat firm while being handled, but will be found to soften after it has been made up and coated. It can be handled better if it is made 3 or 4 days before it is desired for use. As will be noted, the recipe is given in a fairly large quantity, for it is preferable to make a good-sized amount of the cream at a time; but it need not all be used up at once.

The cream used for these centers can be colored and flavored in any way you like. It’s a bit firm while being handled, but it will soften once it’s made up and coated. It's easier to work with if it's made 3 or 4 days before you need it. As you’ll see, the recipe is for a fairly large amount, since it’s better to make a good-sized batch of cream at once, but you don’t have to use it all at once.

CENTER CREAM
  • 8 c. sugar
  • 2 c. glucose or corn sirup
  • 3 c. water

Mix the sugar, glucose or corn sirup, and water and proceed in the same way as for fondant. Boil until the thermometer registers 234 or 236 degrees or a ball that is not quite so firm as for fondant will form in cold water. Pour on a moistened platter or slab to cool. Then cream in the same manner as for fondant, but allow more time for this part of the work, as the glucose does not cream rapidly. Just before it hardens, pour it into a crock or a bowl, place a damp cloth over the top of the bowl, and put away for a couple of days.

Mix the sugar, glucose or corn syrup, and water, and follow the same steps as for fondant. Boil until the thermometer reads 234 or 236 degrees, or until a ball forms in cold water that is slightly less firm than for fondant. Pour it onto a damp platter or slab to cool. Then, cream it in the same way as for fondant, but allow more time for this step, since the glucose doesn't cream quickly. Just before it sets, pour it into a crock or bowl, cover the top of the bowl with a damp cloth, and set it aside for a couple of days.

110. The molds for shaping center creams are formed in a thick layer of corn starch by means of a device that may be bought from a candy-making supply house or made at home. This device consists of a long strip with projections that may be pushed into the corn starch to make neatly shaped holes, or molds. These projections are spaced about 1 inch apart, so that the walls between the corn-starch molds will not fall down when the center-cream mixture is poured into them. A long stick, such as a ruler or a yardstick, and either corks of different sizes or plaster of Paris may be employed to make such a device. If corks are to be used, simply glue them to the stick, spacing them about 1 inch apart. If plaster of Paris is to be used, fill small receptacles about the size and shape of chocolate creams with a thin mixture of plaster of Paris and water and allow it to set. When hard, remove the plaster-of-Paris shapes and glue them to the stick, spacing them the same distance as mentioned for the corks. The home-made device will answer the same purpose as one that is bought, and is much less expensive.

110. The molds for shaping center creams are created in a thick layer of corn starch using a device that can be purchased from a candy-making supply store or made at home. This device consists of a long strip with projections that can be pushed into the corn starch to create evenly shaped holes, or molds. These projections are spaced about 1 inch apart, ensuring that the walls between the corn-starch molds remain sturdy when the center-cream mixture is poured in. You can use a long stick, like a ruler or a yardstick, along with corks of various sizes or plaster of Paris to make this device. If you're using corks, just glue them to the stick, spacing them about 1 inch apart. For plaster of Paris, fill small containers that are similar in size and shape to chocolate creams with a thin mixture of plaster of Paris and water, then let it set. Once hard, take out the plaster shapes and glue them to the stick, spacing them the same as the corks. This homemade device will work just as well as a purchased one and is much cheaper.

111. When it is desired to make up the creams, sift corn starch into a pan to form a thick layer, making it perfectly level on top with the straight edge of a knife. Then make depressions, or molds, in the corn starch by pressing into it the device just described. Make as many rows of molds as the space will permit, but do not make them so close together as to weaken the walls between the molds. Melt some of the center cream in a double boiler, color and flavor as desired, and pour into the molds made in the corn starch. Allow the centers to remain until they become hard in the molds. Then pick them out, blow off the corn starch, and set aside until ready to coat. Continue making centers in this way until all the cream is used up, resifting the corn starch and making new molds each time. Then coat with chocolate in the usual way.

111. To prepare the creams, sift corn starch into a pan to create a thick layer, leveling the top perfectly with the straight edge of a knife. Next, create depressions or molds in the corn starch by pressing the previously mentioned device into it. Make as many rows of molds as the space allows, but ensure they’re not too close together, so the walls between the molds remain sturdy. Melt some of the center cream in a double boiler, adding color and flavor as desired, and pour it into the molds formed in the corn starch. Let the centers sit until they harden in the molds. Then, gently remove them, blow off the corn starch, and set aside until you're ready to coat them. Continue making centers this way until all the cream is used, resifting the corn starch and creating new molds each time. Finally, coat them with chocolate as usual.

112. ORIENTALS.--Delicious chocolate creams known as orientals can be made by the amateur if a little care is exercised. It should be remembered, however, that these cannot be made successfully on a damp day and that it is somewhat difficult to make them in warm weather. A clear, cold day is required for satisfactory results. Unlike fondant, these creams must be made up at once, so it will be necessary to allow sufficient time not only for the cooking and creaming processes, but also for the making and coating as well. After being made up, however, they should be allowed to stand for 3 or 4 days, as they, like many other cream candies, improve upon standing.

112. ORIENTALS.--You can make delicious chocolate creams known as orientals at home with a little care. However, keep in mind that they won't turn out well on a damp day, and it’s also tricky to make them in warm weather. A clear, cold day is needed for the best results. Unlike fondant, these creams must be prepared right away, so you’ll need to set aside enough time for cooking, creaming, and the coating process. After you make them, let them sit for 3 or 4 days, as they, like many other cream candies, taste better after resting.

Since these centers are very sweet, a slightly bitter chocolate is the best kind with which to coat them. Confectioner's bitter-sweet chocolate will be found to be the most satisfactory, but if this cannot be procured, bitter chocolate may be mixed with sweet coating chocolate.

Since these centers are really sweet, a slightly bitter chocolate is the best option to coat them. Confectioner's bittersweet chocolate is the most satisfying, but if that’s not available, you can mix bitter chocolate with sweet coating chocolate.

ORIENTALS
  • 5 c. granulated sugar
  • 2 c. water
  • 1 tsp. glycerine
  • 6 drops acetic acid
  • 2 egg whites
  • Vanilla

Put the sugar, water, and glycerine over the fire and stir until the sugar is dissolved. Wash down the sides of the kettle with a cloth, and just as the mixture begins to boil, add the acetic acid. Place a cover over the pan and allow the mixture to boil until a temperature of 238 degrees is reached on the thermometer or a firm ball that can be easily held in the fingers will form. Pour out on a slab or a platter to cool, and when perfectly cool begin to work it as for fondant, but first beat the egg whites until they are stiff. As soon as the candy is collected into a mass, pour the egg whites over it, as shown in Fig. 16. Continue to work the candy until all of the egg white is worked in. Add the vanilla during this process. If the mixture seems stiff and the eggs do not work in, continue with a little patience, for they will eventually combine with the candy. Because of the eggs, oriental cream is whiter than bonbon cream, and so it is a little difficult to tell just when it is beginning to get creamy. However, it softens a little as it begins to set, just as fondant does. At this point work slowly, and as it hardens get it into a mass in the center of the slab. When completely worked, it will not be so hard as fondant. Make it up at once into small, round centers, and as they are made place them on pieces of oiled paper to become dry. Chopped nuts may be added to the filling if desired before it is made up. As soon as it is possible to handle the centers, coat them with chocolate in the usual way. Be careful to cover the entire surface with chocolate, for otherwise the quality of the center will deteriorate. A good plan is to wrap candies of this kind in waxed paper, especially if they are to be packed in boxes, for then they will not be so likely to crush.

Put the sugar, water, and glycerin over the heat and stir until the sugar dissolves. Wipe down the sides of the pot with a cloth, and just as the mixture starts to boil, add the acetic acid. Cover the pan and let the mixture boil until it reaches 238 degrees on the thermometer or until a firm ball that can be easily held between your fingers forms. Pour it out onto a slab or a platter to cool, and when it’s completely cool, start to work it like you would fondant, but first beat the egg whites until they’re stiff. Once the candy is gathered into a mass, pour the egg whites over it, as shown in Fig. 16. Keep working the candy until all the egg white is incorporated. Add the vanilla during this process. If the mixture seems stiff and the egg whites aren’t mixing in, keep at it with a little patience because they will eventually combine with the candy. Thanks to the eggs, oriental cream is whiter than bonbon cream, making it a bit tricky to tell when it starts to become creamy. However, it softens slightly as it begins to set, much like fondant. At this stage, work slowly, and as it hardens, shape it into a mass in the center of the slab. Once thoroughly worked, it won’t be as hard as fondant. Immediately shape it into small, round centers, and as you make them, place them on pieces of oiled paper to dry. If desired, you can add chopped nuts to the filling before shaping it. Once you can handle the centers, coat them with chocolate as usual. Make sure to cover the entire surface with chocolate, or else the quality of the center will decline. A good idea is to wrap these candies in waxed paper, especially if they’re going to be packed in boxes, as it helps prevent them from getting crushed.

[Illustration: FIG. 16]

113. UNCOOKED FONDANT.--A fairly satisfactory substitute for fondant can be made by moistening confectioner's sugar with egg white or sweet cream. A very fine sugar must be secured for this purpose or the candy will be granular, and even then the result will not be so satisfactory as in the case of cooked fondant properly made. Uncooked fondant, too, is more limited in its uses than cooked fondant, for it cannot be melted and used for bonbons.

113. UNCOOKED FONDANT.--You can make a reasonably good substitute for fondant by moistening confectioner's sugar with egg white or sweet cream. It's important to use a very fine sugar for this, or else the candy will be gritty, and even then, the result won't be as good as properly made cooked fondant. Also, uncooked fondant has fewer uses than cooked fondant because it can't be melted and used for bonbons.

UNCOOKED FONDANT
  • XXXX sugar
  • Egg white or sweet cream

Roll and sift the sugar if it is lumpy, making it as fine as possible. Beat the egg white just enough to break it up or pour into a bowl the desired amount of sweet cream, remembering that very little liquid will moisten considerable sugar. Add the sugar a little at a time, beating all the while, until a sufficient amount has been used to make the mixture dry enough to handle with the fingers. Then flavor and color in any desired way and make up as if it were fondant.

Roll and sift the sugar if it's lumpy, making it as fine as possible. Beat the egg white just enough to break it up or pour the desired amount of sweet cream into a bowl, keeping in mind that only a small amount of liquid will moisten a lot of sugar. Add the sugar gradually while beating continuously until you have enough to make the mixture dry enough to handle with your fingers. Then flavor and color it however you like and shape it as if it were fondant.


MISCELLANEOUS CONFECTIONS

114. STUFFED DATES.--Dates from which the seeds have been removed and which have been filled with nuts or fondant or a combination of both are a confection that meets with much favor. The uncooked fondant is entirely satisfactory for this purpose, but if some of the other is on hand it will make an especially fine confection. Regardless of what is used for a filling, though, the preparation of such dates is the same.

114. STUFFED DATES.--Dates with the seeds taken out and filled with nuts or fondant, or a mix of both, are a treat that is very popular. The uncooked fondant works well for this, but if you have some of the other type available, it will create an especially delightful treat. No matter what filling is used, the process for preparing these dates remains the same.

First wash the dates in warm water and rinse them in cold water. Then, if there is time, spread them out in a single layer on a cloth and let them remain until they are entirely dry. Cut a slit in the side of each one with a knife and remove the seed. If nuts, such as English walnuts, are to be used for the filling, place half a nut meat in the cavity left by the seed and press the date together over it. In case fondant and nuts are to be used, chop the nuts and mix them with the fondant. Coconut may be used in place of the nuts if desired or the fondant may be used alone. Shape the fondant into tiny balls, press one tightly into the cavity left by the seed, and close the date partly over the filling. When all the dates have been stuffed, roll them in sugar, preferably granulated, and serve.

First, wash the dates in warm water and rinse them in cold water. Then, if you have time, spread them out in a single layer on a cloth and let them dry completely. Cut a slit in the side of each date with a knife and remove the seed. If you're using nuts, like English walnuts, place half a nut in the cavity where the seed was and press the date back together over it. If you're using fondant and nuts, chop the nuts and mix them with the fondant. You can also use coconut instead of nuts or just use the fondant by itself. Shape the fondant into small balls, press one tightly into the cavity where the seed was, and close the date partially over the filling. Once all the dates are filled, roll them in sugar, preferably granulated, and serve.

115. SALTED NUTS.--Nuts to which salt has been added are an excellent contrast to the sweet confections that have been described. At social gatherings, luncheons, dinners, etc., they are often served in connection with some variety of bonbon and many times they replace the sweet confection entirely. Peanuts and almonds are the nuts generally used for salting. If peanuts are to be salted, the unroasted ones should be purchased and then treated in exactly the same way as almonds. Before nuts are salted, they must first be browned, and this may be accomplished in three different ways: on the top of the stove, in the oven, and in deep fat. Preparing them in deep fat is the most satisfactory method, for by it all the nuts reach the same degree of brownness.

115. SALTED NUTS.--Nuts that have been salted are a great contrast to the sweet treats mentioned earlier. At social events, luncheons, dinners, and so on, they are often served alongside some kind of candy and often replace the sweet treats entirely. Peanuts and almonds are the most common nuts used for salting. If you're salting peanuts, you should buy the unroasted ones and treat them the same way you would almonds. Before salting, the nuts need to be browned first, which can be done in three ways: on the stove, in the oven, or in hot oil. The deep-frying method is the best because it ensures all the nuts are evenly browned.

116. First blanch the nuts by pouring boiling water over them and allowing them to remain in the water until the skins can be removed; then slip off the skins without breaking the nuts apart if possible. Spread the nuts out on a towel to dry.

116. First, blanch the nuts by pouring boiling water over them and letting them sit in the water until the skins can be removed; then carefully slip off the skins without breaking the nuts apart if possible. Spread the nuts out on a towel to dry.

If the deep-fat method of browning them is to be followed, have in a small saucepan or kettle a sufficient quantity of cooking fat or oil.

If you're going to use the deep-frying method to brown them, have enough cooking fat or oil in a small saucepan or pot.

Allow it to become as hot as for frying doughnuts or croquettes, place the nuts in a sieve, and fry them in the fat until they become a delicate brown. Pour them out into a pan, sprinkle them with salt, cool, and serve.

Allow it to get as hot as for frying doughnuts or croquettes, place the nuts in a sieve, and fry them in the oil until they turn a light brown. Pour them into a pan, sprinkle with salt, let them cool, and serve.

To brown nuts on top of the stove, heat a heavy frying pan over a slow fire and into it put a small amount of fat. Add the nuts and stir constantly until they are browned as evenly as possible. This part of the work requires considerable time, for the more slowly it is done the less likely are the nuts to have burned spots. Salt the nuts before removing them from the pan, turn them out into a dish, cool, and serve.

To brown nuts on the stovetop, heat a heavy frying pan over low heat and add a small amount of fat. Add the nuts and stir them constantly until they're evenly browned. This process takes some time because the slower you do it, the less likely the nuts are to get burned spots. Season the nuts with salt before taking them out of the pan, transfer them to a dish, let them cool, and serve.

It is more difficult to brown nuts equally by the oven method, but sometimes it is desired to prepare them in this way. Put the nuts with a little fat into a pan and set the pan in a hot oven. Stir frequently until they are well browned, salt, cool, and serve.

It’s harder to brown nuts evenly using the oven method, but sometimes it’s preferred to prepare them this way. Place the nuts with a little oil in a pan and put the pan in a hot oven. Stir frequently until they’re nicely browned, then salt, cool, and serve.

[Illustration: FIG. 17]

117. ORIENTAL DELIGHT.--An excellent confection that can be prepared without cooking is known as oriental delight. It is composed of fruit, nuts, and coconut, which are held together with egg white and powdered sugar. When thoroughly set and cut into squares, oriental delight appears as in Fig. 17.

117. ORIENTAL DELIGHT.--An amazing treat that can be made without cooking is called oriental delight. It’s made with fruit, nuts, and coconut, all held together with egg whites and powdered sugar. Once it’s completely set and sliced into squares, oriental delight looks like what’s shown in Fig. 17.

ORIENTAL DELIGHT
  • 1/2 lb. dates
  • 1/2 lb. raisins
  • 1/2 lb. pressed figs
  • 1/2 c. shredded coconut
  • 1/2 c. English walnuts
  • 1 egg white
  • Powdered sugar

Wash all the fruits, put them together, and steam for about 15 minutes. Then put these with the coconut and nuts through a food chopper or chop them all in a bowl with a chopping knife. When the whole is reduced to a pulpy mass, beat the egg white slightly, add sufficient sugar to make a very soft paste, and mix with the fruit mixture. If it is very sticky, continue to add powdered sugar and mix well until it is stiff enough to pack in a layer in a pan. Press down tight and when it is set mark in squares, remove from the pan, and serve as a confection.

Wash all the fruits, combine them, and steam for about 15 minutes. Then, process them along with the coconut and nuts using a food chopper, or chop everything in a bowl with a knife. Once the mixture becomes a pulpy mass, lightly beat the egg white, add enough sugar to create a very soft paste, and combine it with the fruit mixture. If it’s too sticky, keep adding powdered sugar and mix well until it’s firm enough to press into a layer in a pan. Press it down firmly, and once it sets, cut it into squares, remove from the pan, and serve as a treat.

118. MARSHMALLOWS.--To be able to make marshmallows successfully is the desire of many persons. At first thought, this seems somewhat of a task, but in reality it is a simple matter if the directions are carefully followed. Upon being cut into squares, the marshmallows may be served plain or they may be coated with chocolate or, after standing several days, dipped into a warm caramel mixture.

118. MARSHMALLOWS.--Many people want to know how to make marshmallows successfully. At first glance, it might seem a bit challenging, but it’s actually quite simple if you follow the instructions closely. Once cut into squares, the marshmallows can be served plain or coated in chocolate, or after sitting for a few days, dipped in a warm caramel mixture.

MARSHMALLOWS
  • 8 tsp. gelatine
  • 1-1/4 c. water
  • 2 c. sugar
  • Few grains salt
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 1/2 Tb. corn starch

Soak the gelatine in one-half of the water for 5 minutes. Cook the sugar and the remaining water until it will spin a thread when dropped from a spoon. Remove from the fire and add the gelatine. When partly cold, add the salt and the flavoring. Beat with an egg whip, cooling the mixture as rapidly as possible, until it is light and fluffy. When the mixture is thick, add the corn starch slowly, working it in thoroughly. Then pour out on a flat surface that is well dusted with confectioner's sugar. Let stand in a cool place until thoroughly chilled. Cut in squares by pressing the blade of a knife down through the mass, but do not slide it along when cutting. Remove the pieces, dust on all sides with powdered sugar, and serve.

Soak the gelatin in half of the water for 5 minutes. Cook the sugar and the remaining water until it can spin a thread when dropped from a spoon. Take it off the heat and add the gelatin. When it’s partly cool, add the salt and flavoring. Whip it with an egg beater, cooling the mixture as quickly as possible, until it’s light and fluffy. When the mixture is thick, slowly add the cornstarch, mixing it in thoroughly. Then pour it out onto a flat surface dusted with powdered sugar. Let it sit in a cool place until it’s completely chilled. Cut into squares by pressing down with a knife blade, but don’t slide it along while cutting. Remove the pieces, dust all sides with powdered sugar, and serve.

119. NOUGAT.--The confection known as nougat consists usually of a paste filled with chopped nuts. Both corn sirup and honey are used in the preparation of this candy. Generally it is merely flavored with vanilla, but if chocolate flavoring is preferred it may be added.

119. NOUGAT.--Nougat is a candy that typically consists of a paste mixed with chopped nuts. It’s usually made with both corn syrup and honey. It is generally flavored with vanilla, but if you prefer chocolate, that can be added as well.

NOUGAT
  • 3 c. sugar
  • 1-1/2 c. corn sirup
  • 1/4 c. strained honey
  • 1 c. water
  • 2 egg whites
  • 1 tsp. vanilla
  • 2 c. nut meats

Put the sugar, corn sirup, honey, and water together and cook until a temperature of 260 degrees is reached or a brittle ball will form in water. Beat the egg whites stiff and pour the mass slowly into them, beating constantly until the mixture grows stiff and waxy. Then add the vanilla and nut meats. Mix well and pour into a small box or pan lined with waxed paper. If chocolate is to be used for flavoring, add the desired amount just before pouring the mixture into the pan. When it has cooled sufficiently, cut in squares or slices.

Put the sugar, corn syrup, honey, and water together and cook until it reaches a temperature of 260 degrees or a brittle ball forms in water. Beat the egg whites until stiff and slowly pour the mixture into them, beating constantly until it becomes stiff and waxy. Then add the vanilla and nuts. Mix well and pour into a small box or pan lined with waxed paper. If you want to use chocolate for flavor, add the desired amount just before pouring the mixture into the pan. Once it has cooled enough, cut it into squares or slices.

120. CANDIED PEEL.--Another favorite confection and one that is much used in connection with candies for social functions is candied orange, lemon, and grapefruit peel. After being removed from the fruit, the peel should be well scraped and then cut into thin strips. In this form, it is ready to coat with sirup.

120. CANDIED PEEL.--Another popular treat that is commonly used in candies for social events is candied orange, lemon, and grapefruit peel. After removing it from the fruit, the peel should be thoroughly scraped and then cut into thin strips. Once prepared, it’s ready to be coated with syrup.

CANDIED PEEL
  • 1/2 doz. lemons, oranges, or grapefruit
  • 1/2 c. water
  • 1 c. sugar

Remove the skin in quarters from the fruit, scrape off as much of the white as possible, and cut each piece of skin into narrow strips. Put these to cook in cold water, boil them until they may be easily pierced with a fork, and then drain off the water. Add the water to the sugar and cook until a thread will form when the sirup is dropped from a spoon. Add the cooked peel to the sirup and cook for 5 to 10 minutes. Drain and dredge in granulated sugar. Spread in a single layer to dry.

Remove the skin in quarters from the fruit, scrape off as much of the white as possible, and cut each piece of skin into narrow strips. Cook these in cold water, boiling them until they can be easily pierced with a fork, and then drain the water. Combine the drained water with the sugar and cook until a thread forms when the syrup is dropped from a spoon. Add the cooked peel to the syrup and cook for 5 to 10 minutes. Drain and coat in granulated sugar. Spread in a single layer to dry.

121. POP-CORN BALLS.--Pop corn in any form is always an attractive confection, especially to young persons. It is often stuck together with a sirup mixture and made into balls. In this form, it is an excellent confection for the holiday season.

121. POP-CORN BALLS.--Popcorn in any form is always an appealing treat, especially for young people. It's often combined with a syrup mixture and shaped into balls. In this way, it's a great snack for the holiday season.

To make pop-corn balls, first shell the corn and pop it. Then make a sirup with half as much water as sugar and cook it until it will spin a thread. Have the pop corn in a large bowl and pour the sirup over it, working quickly so that all the sirup can be used up while it is warm. To form the balls, take up a large double handful and press firmly together. If the sirup sticks to the hands, dip them into cold water so as to moisten them somewhat before the next handful is taken up. Work in this manner until all the corn is made into balls.

To make popcorn balls, first, shell the corn and pop it. Then make a syrup with half as much water as sugar and cook it until it can spin a thread. Put the popcorn in a large bowl and pour the syrup over it, working quickly so that all the syrup can be used while it's warm. To form the balls, take a large handful and press it firmly together. If the syrup sticks to your hands, dip them in cold water to moisten them a bit before grabbing another handful. Continue doing this until all the popcorn is made into balls.

122. CRACKER JACK.--Another pop-corn confection that is liked by practically every one is cracker jack. In this variety, pop corn and peanuts are combined and a sirup made of molasses and sugar is used to hold them together.

122. CRACKER JACK.--Another popcorn treat that almost everyone enjoys is Cracker Jack. This version combines popcorn and peanuts, and it uses a syrup made of molasses and sugar to stick them together.

CRACKER JACK
  • 4 qt. popped corn
  • 1 c. shelled, roasted peanuts
  • 1 c. molasses
  • 1/2 c. sugar

Put the popped corn and the peanuts together in a receptacle large enough to hold them easily. Cook the molasses and the sugar until the sirup spins a thread. Then pour this over the popped corn and peanuts and mix well until it becomes cold and hard.

Put the popcorn and peanuts together in a container that's big enough to hold them comfortably. Cook the molasses and sugar until the syrup threads when you pull it. Then pour this over the popcorn and peanuts and mix well until it cools and hardens.


SERVING CANDY

123. The best time to serve candy is when it will interfere least with the digestion, and this is immediately after meals. A dish of candy placed on the table with the dessert adds interest to any meal. It should be passed immediately after the dessert is eaten.

123. The best time to serve candy is when it will disrupt digestion the least, which is right after meals. A bowl of candy on the table with the dessert makes any meal more interesting. It should be served right after the dessert has been finished.

Various kinds of bonbon dishes in which to serve candies are to be had, some of them being very attractive. Those having a cover are intended for candy that is to be left standing for a time, while open dishes should be used for serving. Fig. 18 shows candy tastefully arranged on a silver dish having a handle. Dishes made of glass or china answer the purpose equally as well as silver ones, and if a bonbon dish is not in supply a small plate will do very well. A paper or a linen doily on the dish or plate adds to the attractiveness, as does also the manner in which the candy is arranged.

Various types of candy dishes are available, and many of them are quite appealing. Covered dishes are meant for candy that will be displayed for a while, while open dishes should be used for serving. Fig. 18 shows candy elegantly arranged on a silver dish with a handle. Glass or porcelain dishes work just as well as silver ones, and if you don't have a bonbon dish, a small plate will work fine. Adding a paper or linen doily on the dish or plate enhances the presentation, as does the way the candy is arranged.

[Illustration: FIG. 18: candies arranged on silver dish.]

CONFECTIONS


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) What are confections?

What are sweets?

(2) Discuss the use of confections in the diet of children and adults.

(2) Talk about the role of sweets in the diets of kids and adults.

(3) (a) What food substance is found in the largest proportion in candy? (b) Are candies high or low in food value?

(3) (a) What food ingredient is present in the greatest amount in candy? (b) Do candies have a high or low nutritional value?

(4) Discuss briefly the kinds and qualities of sugar and their uses.

(4) Briefly discuss the different types and qualities of sugar and how they're used.

(5) What is the value of glucose in candy making?

(5) What is the role of glucose in making candy?

(6) What kinds of flavorings are the most desirable?

(6) What types of flavorings are the most wanted?

(7) What care should be exercised in the use of colorings in candy?

(7) What precautions should be taken when using colors in candy?

(8) (a) What acids are used in candy making? (b) Why are these acids used?

(8) (a) What acids are used in candy making? (b) Why are these acids used?

(9) Of what value are milk, cream, and butter in the making of candy?

(9) How important are milk, cream, and butter in candy making?

(10) What may be said of the selection of a pan for cooking candy?

(10) What can be said about choosing a pan for making candy?

(11) (a) What methods are used for testing candies? (b) Which of these methods is the most accurate?

(11) (a) What methods are used to test candies? (b) Which of these methods is the most accurate?

(12) (a) How should the mixture be poured out to cool when a creamy candy is being made? (b) To what point should the sirup be cooled before the stirring is begun?

(12) (a) How should the mixture be poured out to cool when making creamy candy? (b) How much should the syrup cool before stirring starts?

(13) (a) How should chocolate be melted? (b) How should coating with chocolate be done?

(13) (a) What's the best way to melt chocolate? (b) How should you coat something with chocolate?

(14) How should waxed paper be cut for wrapping candies?

(14) How should you cut waxed paper for wrapping candies?

(15) Discuss the ingredients generally used for taffy.

(15) Talk about the common ingredients used for taffy.

(16) On what do good results in caramel making depend?

(16) What do good results in caramel making depend on?

(17) What should be guarded against in the making of all cream candies?

(17) What should we be careful about when making all cream candies?

(18) (a) What is fondant? (b) How may fondant be stored for future use?

(18) (a) What is fondant? (b) How can fondant be stored for later use?

(19) How should dates be prepared for stuffing?

(19) How should dates be prepared for stuffing?

(20) What is the best time for the serving of candy?

(20) When is the best time to serve candy?






BEVERAGES

BEVERAGES IN THE DIET

NATURE AND CLASSES OF BEVERAGES

1. Throughout the lifetime of every person there is constant need for solid food to preserve health and prolong life; and, just as such food is necessary to satisfy the requirements of the body, so, too, is there need for water. As is well known, the composition of the body is such that it contains more liquid than solid material, the tissues and the bones weighing much less than the liquid. A tremendous amount of this liquid is continually being lost through the kidneys, through each pore in the skin, and even through every breath that is exhaled, and if continued good health is to be maintained this loss must be constantly made up. This loss is greater in very hot weather or in the performance of strenuous exercise than under ordinary conditions, which accounts for the fact that more than the usual amount of liquid must be supplied during such times. So necessary is liquid refreshment that the body cannot exist without it for any great length of time. In fact, if the supply were cut off so that no more could be obtained, the body would begin to use its own fluids and death would soon occur. A person can live for many days without solid food, but it is not possible to live for more than a very few days without drink.

1. Throughout everyone's life, there’s always a need for solid food to stay healthy and live longer; just like food is essential for the body's needs, water is also crucial. It’s well known that the body is made up of more liquid than solid matter, with the tissues and bones weighing much less than the liquid. A significant amount of this liquid is continually lost through the kidneys, through every pore in the skin, and even with each breath we exhale. To maintain good health, this loss must always be replaced. The loss is greater in hot weather or during intense exercise than under normal conditions, which is why we need to drink more during those times. Liquid intake is so vital that the body can’t survive without it for long. In fact, if the supply were cut off and no more could be consumed, the body would start using its own fluids, leading to death soon after. A person can live for many days without solid food, but it's impossible to survive for more than just a few days without water.

2. Nature's way of serving notice that the body is in need of liquid refreshment is through the sensation of thirst. Satisfying thirst not only brings relief, but produces a decidedly pleasant sensation; however, the real pleasure of drinking is not experienced until one has become actually thirsty.

2. Nature lets us know when our body needs hydration through the feeling of thirst. Quenching that thirst not only brings relief but also gives a really nice feeling; however, the true enjoyment of drinking isn't felt until you're genuinely thirsty.

The various liquids by which thirst may be slaked, or quenched, are known as beverages. The first one of these given to man was water, and it is still the chief beverage, for it is used both alone and as a foundation for numerous other beverages that are calculated to be more tasty, but whose use is liable in some cases to lead to excessive drinking or to the partaking of substances that are injurious to health.

The different liquids that can satisfy thirst are called beverages. The first one given to humans was water, and it remains the primary beverage, as it is consumed on its own and as a base for many other drinks that are designed to be more flavorful. However, using these can sometimes lead to overconsumption or the intake of substances that are harmful to health.

3. The beverages that are in common use may be placed in three general classes: alcoholic, stimulating, and non-stimulating. The alcoholic beverages include such drinks as beer, wine, whisky, etc., some of which are used more in one country than in another. In fact, almost every class of people known has an alcoholic beverage that has come to be regarded as typical of that class. Alcoholic fermentation is supposed to have been discovered by accident, and when its effect became known it was recognized as a popular means of supplying a beverage and some stimulation besides. Under stimulating beverages come tea, coffee, and cocoa. These are in common use all over the world, certain ones, of course, finding greater favor in some countries than in others. With the exception of cocoa, they provide very little food value. In contrast with these drinks are the non-stimulating beverages, which include fruit punches, soft drinks, and all the milk-and-egg concoctions. These are usually very refreshing, and the majority of them contain sufficient nourishment to recommend their frequent use.

3. The drinks that people commonly use can be grouped into three main categories: alcoholic, stimulating, and non-stimulating. Alcoholic beverages include drinks like beer, wine, whisky, and others, with some being more popular in certain countries than in others. In fact, almost every social class has an alcoholic drink that is considered typical for that group. It’s believed that alcoholic fermentation was discovered by accident, and once its effects became known, it was seen as a popular way to enjoy a drink and obtain some stimulation. Stimulating beverages include tea, coffee, and cocoa, which are widely consumed around the globe, although some are more favored in specific countries. Except for cocoa, these drinks offer very little nutritional value. In contrast, non-stimulating beverages consist of fruit punches, soft drinks, and various milk-and-egg mixtures. These drinks are usually very refreshing, and most of them provide enough nourishment to encourage their regular consumption.


WATER IN BEVERAGES

4. Many persons restrict the term beverages, contending that it refers to refreshing or flavored drinks. It should be remembered, however, that this term has a broader meaning and refers to any drink taken for the purpose of quenching thirst. Water is the simplest beverage and is in reality the foundation of nearly all drinks, for it is the water in them that slakes thirst. Flavors, such as fruit juice, tea, coffee, etc., are combined with water to make the beverages more tempting, and occasionally such foods as eggs, cream, and starchy materials are added to give food value; but the first and foremost purpose of all beverages is to introduce water into the system and thus satisfy thirst.

4. Many people limit the term beverages, arguing that it only refers to refreshing or flavored drinks. However, it’s important to remember that this term has a broader meaning and includes any drink consumed to quench thirst. Water is the simplest beverage and actually serves as the foundation for almost all drinks, as it’s the water in them that satisfies thirst. Flavors like fruit juice, tea, coffee, and others are mixed with water to make beverages more appealing, and sometimes ingredients like eggs, cream, and starchy items are added for nutritional value; but the primary purpose of all beverages is to deliver water to the body and thus satisfy thirst.

5. KINDS OF WATER.--Inasmuch as water is so important an element in the composition of beverages, every one should endeavor to become familiar with the nature of each of its varieties.

5. KINDS OF WATER.--Since water is such an essential part of drinks, everyone should try to understand the different types of it.

SOFT WATER is water that contains very little mineral matter. A common example of soft water is rainwater.

SOFT WATER is water that has very few minerals in it. A common example of soft water is rainwater.

HARD WATER is water that contains a large quantity of lime in solution. Boiling such water precipitates, or separates, some of the lime and consequently softens the water. An example of the precipitation of lime in water is the deposit that can be found in any teakettle that has been used for some time.

HARD WATER is water that has a high amount of dissolved lime. Boiling this water causes some of the lime to settle out, which softens the water. A common example of lime settling in water is the buildup that occurs in any teakettle that has been used for a while.

MINERAL WATER is water containing a large quantity of such minerals as will go in solution in water, namely, sulphur, iron, lime, etc.

MINERAL WATER is water that contains a high amount of minerals that can dissolve in water, like sulfur, iron, lime, and others.

DISTILLED WATER is water from which all minerals have been removed. To accomplish this, the water is converted into steam and then condensed. This is the purest form of water.

DISTILLED WATER is water that has had all its minerals removed. To achieve this, the water is turned into steam and then cooled back into liquid. This is the purest form of water.

CARBONATED WATER is water that has had carbon-dioxide, or carbonic-acid, gas forced into it. The soda water used at soda fountains is an example of this variety. Carbonated water is bottled and sold for various purposes.

CARBONATED WATER is water that has carbon dioxide, or carbonic acid, gas pumped into it. The soda water served at soda fountains is a typical example of this type. Carbonated water is bottled and sold for various uses.

6. NECESSITY FOR PURE WATER.--The extensive use made of water in the diet makes it imperative that every effort be exerted to have the water supply as pure as possible. The ordinary city filter and the smaller household filter can be depended on to remove sand, particles of leaves, weeds, and such foreign material as is likely to drop into the water from time to time, but they will not remove disease germs from an unclean supply. Therefore, if there is any doubt about water being pure enough to use for drinking purposes, it should be boiled before it is used. Boiling kills any disease germs that the water may contain, but at the same time it gives the water a very flat taste because of the loss of air in boiling. However, as is mentioned in Essentials of Cookery, Part 1, the natural taste may be restored by beating the boiled water with an egg beater or by partly filling a jar, placing the lid on, and shaking it vigorously.

6. NECESSITY FOR PURE WATER.--The heavy use of water in our diet means it’s crucial to ensure our water supply is as clean as possible. Regular city filters and smaller household filters can remove sand, bits of leaves, weeds, and other debris that sometimes get into the water, but they won’t eliminate disease-causing germs from an unclean source. So, if there’s any doubt about the water being safe to drink, it should be boiled first. Boiling kills any germs that might be present, but it also makes the water taste flat because it loses air during the process. However, as mentioned in Essentials of Cookery, Part 1, you can restore its natural taste by whipping the boiled water with an egg beater or by partially filling a jar, putting a lid on it, and shaking it vigorously.


RELATION OF BEVERAGES TO MEALS

7. About one-third of all the water required each day is taken in the form of beverages with the meals. It was formerly thought that liquids dilute the gastric juice and so should be avoided with meals. However, it has been learned that beverages, either warm or cold, with the exception of an occasional case, may be taken with meals without injury. The chief point to remember is that it is unwise to drink beverages either too hot or too cold. For the best results, their temperature should be rather moderate.

7. About a third of the water we need each day comes from drinks consumed with meals. It used to be believed that liquids dilute stomach acid and should be avoided during meals. However, it's now understood that, with rare exceptions, drinks—whether warm or cold—can be consumed with meals without any harm. The main thing to keep in mind is that it's not a good idea to drink beverages that are too hot or too cold. For optimal results, their temperature should be relatively moderate.

8. Foods that may be dissolved in water can be incorporated in a beverage to make it nutritious. With many persons, as in the case of small children and invalids, this is often the only means there is of giving them nourishment. In serving beverages to healthy persons, the food value of the meal should be taken into consideration. The beverage accompanying a heavy meal should be one having very little food value; whereas, in the case of a light meal, the beverage can be such as will give additional nutrition. For instance, hot chocolate, which is very nutritious, would not be a good beverage to serve with a meal consisting of soup, meat, vegetables, salad, and dessert, but it would be an excellent drink to serve with a lunch that is made up of light sandwiches, salad, and fruit.

8. Foods that can dissolve in water can be added to a drink to make it nutritious. For many people, especially young children and those who are ill, this is often the only way to provide them with nourishment. When serving drinks to healthy individuals, the nutritional value of the meal should be considered. The drink served with a heavy meal should have very low nutritional value; on the other hand, with a light meal, the drink can provide extra nutrition. For example, hot chocolate, which is very nutritious, wouldn’t be a good beverage to serve with a meal that includes soup, meat, vegetables, salad, and dessert, but it would be an excellent choice with a lunch of light sandwiches, salad, and fruit.


ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES

9. ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES are made by allowing yeast to ferment the starch or the sugar in a certain kind of food, thus producing acid and alcohol. Grains and fruits are used oftenest for this purpose. In some cases, the fermentation is allowed to continue long enough to use up all the starch or sugar in the material selected, and in this event the resulting beverages are sour and contain a great deal of alcohol. In others, the fermentation is stopped before all the sugar or starch is utilized, and then the beverage is sweet and contains less alcohol. The higher the percentage of alcohol a beverage contains, the more intoxicating it is and the more quickly will a state of intoxication be reached by drinking it.

9. ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES are created by letting yeast ferment the starch or sugar in certain foods, producing acid and alcohol. Grains and fruits are the most common sources for this. Sometimes, the fermentation process is allowed to go on long enough to consume all the starch or sugar, resulting in beverages that are sour and have a high alcohol content. Other times, fermentation is stopped before all the sugar or starch is used up, resulting in a sweet beverage with less alcohol. The higher the alcohol percentage in a drink, the more intoxicating it is, and the more quickly a person will become intoxicated after drinking it.

10. HARMFUL EFFECTS OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES.--In years past, alcoholic beverages were considered to be a necessity for medicinal purposes in hospitals and in homes, but this use of them has been very greatly decreased. In fact, it is believed by most authorities that often more harm than good is done by using alcoholic beverages as a medical stimulant or as a carrier for some drug. As these drinks are harmful in this respect, so are they detrimental to health when they are taken merely as beverages. It is definitely known that alcohol acts as a food when it enters the body, for it is burned just as a carbohydrate would be and thus produces heat. That this action takes place very rapidly can be detected by the warmth that is produced almost immediately when the drink is taken. Some of it is lost through the breath and the kidneys without producing heat, and it also acts upon the blood vessels near the skin in such a way as to lose very quickly the heat that is produced. It is never conserved and used gradually as the heat from food is used. The taking of alcohol requires much work on the part of the kidneys, and this eventually injures them. It also hardens the liver and produces a disease known as hob-nailed, or gin, liver. In addition, if used continuously, this improper means of nourishing the body produces an excessive amount of fat. Because of these harmful effects on the various organs, its too rapid loss from the body, and the fact that it does not build tissue, alcohol is at best a very poor food and should be avoided on all occasions.

10. HARMFUL EFFECTS OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES.--In the past, alcoholic beverages were seen as essential for medicinal purposes in hospitals and homes, but this usage has significantly decreased. Most experts now believe that using alcoholic drinks as a medical stimulant or as a vehicle for drugs often causes more harm than good. These drinks are harmful in this sense, and they are also bad for health when consumed simply as beverages. It's well-known that alcohol acts as a source of energy when it enters the body, burning off like carbohydrates to produce heat. This process happens quickly, as you can feel the warmth almost immediately after drinking. Some of the alcohol is lost through breath and urine without generating heat, and it also affects blood vessels near the skin, causing the body to lose heat rapidly. Unlike the heat from food, which is stored and used gradually, heat from alcohol isn’t conserved. Drinking alcohol puts a lot of strain on the kidneys, which can lead to damage over time. It also hardens the liver, creating a condition known as hob-nailed or gin liver. Furthermore, if consumed continuously, this unhealthy way of fueling the body can lead to excessive fat accumulation. Due to these detrimental effects on various organs, its rapid elimination from the body, and the fact that it doesn’t help build tissue, alcohol is, at best, a very poor source of nutrition and should be avoided at all times.

11. KINDS OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES.--In spite of the truth that beverages containing alcohol are found to be harmful, many of them are in common use. Following are the names of these, together with a short account of their preparation:

11. KINDS OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES.--Even though it's known that drinks with alcohol can be harmful, many of them are widely consumed. Here are the names of these beverages, along with a brief description of how they are made:

BEER is an alcoholic beverage made from certain grains, usually barley, by malting the grain, boiling the product with hops, and finally fermenting it with yeast. The malting of grains, it will be remembered, is explained in Cereals. The hops are used to give the beer a desirable flavor. This beverage is characterized by a low percentage of alcohol, containing only 2 to 5 per cent., and consequently is not very intoxicating.

BEER is an alcoholic drink made from specific grains, typically barley, by malting the grain, boiling it with hops, and finally fermenting it with yeast. The malting of grains, as noted in Cereals, is a key process. The hops are added to give the beer a pleasant flavor. This drink is known for its low alcohol content, usually only 2 to 5 percent, which means it isn’t very intoxicating.

WINE is a beverage that is usually made from grapes, although berries and other small fruits are occasionally used. It contains from 7 to 16 per cent. of alcohol and is therefore more intoxicating than beer. The wines in which all of the sugar is fermented are known as sour, or dry, wines, while those in which not all of the sugar has been fermented are called sweet wines. Many classes of wines are made and put on the market, but those most commonly used are claret, sherry, hock, port, and Madeira.

WINE is a drink that is typically made from grapes, although sometimes berries and other small fruits are used. It has an alcohol content ranging from 7 to 16 percent, making it more intoxicating than beer. Wines in which all the sugar has fermented are called sour or dry wines, while those in which not all sugar has fermented are known as sweet wines. Many types of wines are produced and available on the market, but the most commonly used ones are claret, sherry, hock, port, and Madeira.

BRANDY is an alcoholic liquor distilled from wine. It is very intoxicating, for it consists of little besides alcohol and water, the percentage of alcohol varying from 40 to 50 per cent. Upon being distilled, brandy is colorless, but it is then stored in charred wooden casks, from which it takes its characteristic color.

BRANDY is an alcoholic drink made by distilling wine. It's quite strong, as it mainly contains alcohol and water, with the alcohol content typically ranging from 40 to 50 percent. When brandy is first distilled, it's clear, but then it's aged in charred wooden barrels, which give it its distinctive color.

GIN is a practically colorless liquor distilled from various grains and flavored with oil of juniper or some other flavoring substance, such as anise, orange peel, or fennel. It contains from 30 to 40 per cent. of alcohol. It is usually stored in glass bottles, which do not impart a color to it.

GIN is a nearly colorless spirit made from different grains and flavored with juniper oil or other flavoring agents like anise, orange peel, or fennel. It contains between 30% and 40% alcohol. It's typically kept in glass bottles, which don't affect its color.

RUM is an alcoholic beverage made by fermenting cane sugar, molasses, cane juice, or the scum and waste from sugar refineries and then distilling the product. It contains from 45 to 50 per cent. of alcohol, and has a disagreeable odor when it is distilled. This odor, however, is removed by storing the rum in wooden receptacles for a long period of time.

RUM is an alcoholic drink made by fermenting cane sugar, molasses, cane juice, or the leftover products from sugar refineries and then distilling it. It contains 45 to 50 percent alcohol and has an unpleasant smell when it's distilled. However, this smell is eliminated by aging the rum in wooden containers for an extended time.

CORDIALS are beverages made by steeping fruits or herbs in brandy. Absinthe, which is barred from the United States because it contains wormwood, a very injurious substance, is a well-known cordial. Besides being extremely intoxicating, it overstimulates the heart and the stomach if taken in even comparatively small quantities.

CORDIALS are drinks made by soaking fruits or herbs in brandy. Absinthe, which is banned in the United States because it contains wormwood, a very harmful substance, is a well-known cordial. Besides being highly intoxicating, it can overstimulate the heart and stomach if consumed in even relatively small amounts.

WHISKY is an alcoholic beverage obtained by distilling fermented grain several times until it has a strength of 40 to 50 per cent. of alcohol. Then it is flavored and stored in charred casks to ripen and become mellow, after which it has a characteristic color. As can readily be understood, distilled liquors contain the highest percentage of alcohol.

WHISKY is an alcoholic drink made by distilling fermented grains multiple times until it reaches an alcohol content of 40 to 50 percent. After that, it’s flavored and aged in charred barrels to mature and become smooth, which gives it a distinctive color. It's easy to see that distilled spirits have the highest alcohol percentage.


STIMULATING BEVERAGES

NATURE OF STIMULATING BEVERAGES


12. STIMULATING BEVERAGES are those which contain a drug that stimulates the nervous and the circulatory system; that is, one that acts on the nerves and the circulation in such a way as to make them active and alert. Common examples of these beverages are coffee, tea, and cocoa or chocolate. If the nerves are in need of rest, it is dangerous to stimulate them with such beverages, for, as the nervous system indirectly affects all the organs of the body, the effects of this stimulation are far-reaching. The immediate effect of the stimulant in these beverages is to keep the drinker awake, thus causing sleeplessness, or temporary insomnia. If tea and coffee are used habitually and excessively, headaches, dull brains, and many nervous troubles are liable to result.

12. STIMULATING BEVERAGES are drinks that contain a substance that boosts the nervous and circulatory systems; in other words, they affect the nerves and the circulation in a way that makes them active and alert. Common examples of these drinks include coffee, tea, and cocoa or chocolate. If the nerves need a break, it can be harmful to stimulate them with these beverages, because the nervous system has an indirect impact on all body organs, making the effects of this stimulation wide-reaching. The immediate effect of the stimulant in these drinks is to keep the drinker awake, which can lead to sleeplessness or temporary insomnia. If tea and coffee are consumed regularly and in large amounts, it can result in headaches, dullness, and various nervous issues.

13. The stimulant that is found in the leaves of tea is known as theine; that found in coffee beans, caffeine; and that found in cacao beans, from which cocoa and chocolate are made, theobromine. Each of these stimulants is extracted by the hot liquid that is always used to make the beverage. It is taken up by the liquid so quickly that the method used to prepare the beverage makes little difference as to the amount obtained. In other words, tea made by pouring water through the leaves will contain nearly as much of the stimulant as tea made by boiling the leaves.

13. The stimulant found in tea leaves is called theine; the one in coffee beans is caffeine; and the stimulant in cacao beans, which are used to make cocoa and chocolate, is theobromine. Each of these stimulants is extracted by the hot liquid used to brew the beverage. The liquid absorbs them so quickly that the preparation method has little impact on the amount obtained. In other words, tea made by pouring water over the leaves will have almost as much of the stimulant as tea made by boiling the leaves.

14. In addition to the stimulant, tea and coffee contain tannin, or tannic acid, an acid that is also obtained from the bark of certain trees and used in the tanning of animal hides in the preparation of leather. Tannin is not taken so quickly from tea and coffee by the hot liquid used in preparing the beverage as is the stimulant, so that the longer tea leaves and coffee grounds remain in the liquid, the more tannic acid will be drawn out. This fact can be detected by the bitter flavor and the puckery feeling in the mouth after drinking tea that has been allowed to remain on the leaves or coffee that has stood for some time on the grounds. Tannic acid has a decidedly bad effect on the digestion in the stomach, so that if improperly prepared tea or coffee is indulged in habitually, it may cause stomach disorders.

14. Besides the stimulant, tea and coffee also contain tannin, or tannic acid, which is an acid that comes from the bark of certain trees and is used in tanning animal hides for leather production. Tannin is not extracted from tea and coffee as quickly by the hot liquid used to make the drink as the stimulant is, meaning that the longer the tea leaves and coffee grounds stay in the liquid, the more tannic acid will be released. You can notice this by the bitter taste and dry sensation in your mouth after drinking tea that's been steeped too long or coffee that's been left sitting on the grounds. Tannic acid can negatively impact digestion in the stomach, so if you frequently drink improperly prepared tea or coffee, it may lead to stomach issues.



TABLE I
STIMULANT AND TANNIC ACID PRESENT IN STIMULATING BEVERAGES
BeverageStimulantQuantity of
Stimulant
Grains
Quantity of
Tannic Acid
Grains
CoffeeCaffeine2 to 31 to 2
TeaTheine1 to 21 to 4
Cocoa or chocolateTheobromine1 to 1-1/21/2 to 1


15. The quantity of stimulant and tannic acid contained in an ordinary cup of tea, coffee, and cocoa or chocolate is given in Table I. As this table shows, the quantity, which is given in grains, does not vary considerably in the different beverages and is not present in such quantity as to be harmful, unless these beverages are indulged in to excess.

15. The amount of stimulant and tannic acid found in an average cup of tea, coffee, and cocoa or chocolate is listed in Table I. As shown in this table, the amounts, measured in grains, don't differ much between the various drinks and are not present in amounts that could be harmful, unless someone consumes these beverages excessively.

To reduce the quantity of caffeine contained in coffee has been the aim of many coffee producers. As a result, there are on the market a number of brands of coffee that have been put through a process that removes practically all the caffeine. The beverage made from coffee so treated is less harmful than that made from ordinary coffee, and so far as the flavor is concerned this loss of caffeine does not change it.

To lower the amount of caffeine in coffee has been the goal of many coffee producers. As a result, there are several brands of coffee available on the market that have undergone a process to remove almost all the caffeine. The drink made from this treated coffee is less harmful than that made from regular coffee, and as far as flavor goes, this caffeine reduction does not alter it.

16. Neither tea nor coffee possesses any food value. Unless sugar or cream is added, these beverages contain nothing except water, flavor, stimulant, and tannic acid. Chocolate and cocoa, however, are rich in fat, and as they are usually made with milk and sugar they have the advantage of conveying food to the system. Because of their nature, tea and coffee should never be given to children. Cocoa and chocolate provide enough food value to warrant their use in the diet of young persons, but they should not be taken in too great quantity because of the large amount of fat they contain. Any of these beverages used in excessive amounts produces the same effect as a mild drug habit. Consequently, when a person feels that it is impossible to get along without tea or coffee, it is time to stop the use of that beverage.

16. Neither tea nor coffee has any nutritional value. Unless you add sugar or cream, these drinks consist of just water, flavor, caffeine, and tannic acid. However, chocolate and cocoa are high in fat, and since they're usually made with milk and sugar, they provide nutritional benefits. Because of their composition, tea and coffee shouldn't be given to children. Cocoa and chocolate offer enough nutritional value to be included in young people's diets, but they shouldn't be consumed in large amounts due to their high fat content. Overindulging in any of these beverages can lead to effects similar to a mild drug dependency. Therefore, if someone feels they can't function without tea or coffee, it's time to cut back on that drink.


COFFEE

HISTORY AND PRODUCTION OF COFFEE

17. COFFEE is the seed of the coffee tree, which in its wild state grows to a height of 20 feet, but in cultivation is kept down to about 10 or 12 feet for convenience in gathering the fruit. Coffee originated in Abyssinia, where it has been used as a beverage from time immemorial. At the beginning of the 15th century, it found its way into Arabia, where it was used by the religious leaders for preventing drowsiness, so that they could perform religious ceremonies at night. About 100 years later it came into favor in Turkey, but it was not until the middle of the 17th century that it was introduced into England. Its use gradually increased among common people after much controversy as to whether it was right to drink it or not. It is now extensively grown in India, Ceylon, Java, the West Indies, Central America, Mexico, and Brazil. The last-named country, Brazil, furnishes about 75 per cent. of the coffee used in the United States and about 60 per cent. of the world's supply.

17. COFFEE is the seed of the coffee tree, which in its natural state can grow up to 20 feet tall, but for easier harvesting, it’s usually kept at around 10 or 12 feet in cultivation. Coffee originated in Abyssinia and has been consumed as a drink for centuries. By the early 15th century, it made its way to Arabia, where religious leaders used it to stay alert during nighttime ceremonies. About 100 years later, it gained popularity in Turkey, but it wasn’t until the mid-17th century that it arrived in England. Its consumption grew among the general public despite much debate about whether it was appropriate to drink it. Today, it is widely cultivated in India, Ceylon, Java, the West Indies, Central America, Mexico, and Brazil. Brazil alone provides around 75 percent of the coffee consumed in the United States and about 60 percent of the global supply.

18. Coffee is a universal drink, but it finds more favor in some countries than others. The hospitality of a Turkish home is never thought to be complete without the serving of coffee to its guests; however, the coffee made by the Turks is not pleasant except to those who are accustomed to drinking it. As prepared in Turkey and the East, a small amount of boiling water is poured over the coffee, which is powdered and mixed with sugar, and the resulting beverage, which is very thick, is served in a small cup without cream. The French make a concoction known as café an lait, which, as explained in Essentials of Cookery, Part 2, is a combination of coffee and milk. These two ingredients are heated separately in equal proportions and then mixed before serving. This is a very satisfactory way in which to serve coffee if cream cannot be obtained.

18. Coffee is a global drink, but it’s more popular in some countries than others. You can’t consider the hospitality of a Turkish home complete without serving coffee to guests; however, the coffee made by the Turks isn’t enjoyable unless you’re used to it. In Turkey and the East, a small amount of boiling water is poured over finely ground coffee mixed with sugar, and the resulting thick beverage is served in a small cup without cream. The French have a drink called café au lait, which, as explained in Essentials of Cookery, Part 2, is a mix of coffee and milk. These two ingredients are heated separately in equal amounts and then combined before serving. This is a great way to serve coffee if cream isn’t available.

19. OBTAINING THE COFFEE SEEDS.--The seeds of the coffee tree are enclosed in pairs, with their flat surfaces toward each other, in dark, cherry-like berries. The pulp of the berry is softened by fermentation and then removed, leaving the seeds enclosed in a husk. They are then separated from the husks by being either sun-dried and rolled or reduced to a soft mass in water with the aid of a pulping machine. With the husks removed, the seeds are packed into coarse cloth bags and distributed.

19. GETTING THE COFFEE SEEDS.--The seeds from the coffee tree come in pairs, with their flat sides facing each other, inside dark, cherry-like berries. The pulp of the berry is softened through fermentation and then taken off, leaving the seeds covered in a husk. After that, they are separated from the husks by either sun-drying and rolling or turning them into a soft mass in water using a pulping machine. Once the husks are removed, the seeds are packed into coarse cloth bags and distributed.

20. ROASTING THE COFFEE BEANS.--The next step in the preparation of coffee for use is the roasting of the coffee beans. After being separated from the husks, the beans have a greenish-yellow color, but during the roasting process, when they are subjected to high temperature and must be turned constantly to prevent uneven roasting, they turn to a dark brown. As the roasting also develops the flavor, it must be done carefully. Some persons prefer to buy unroasted coffee and roast it at home in an oven, but it is more economical to purchase coffee already roasted. In addition, the improved methods of roasting produce coffee of a better flavor, for they accomplish this by machinery especially devised for the purpose.

20. ROASTING THE COFFEE BEANS.--The next step in preparing coffee for use is roasting the coffee beans. After being separated from the husks, the beans have a greenish-yellow color, but during the roasting process, where they are exposed to high temperatures and must be stirred constantly to avoid uneven roasting, they turn dark brown. Since roasting also enhances the flavor, it needs to be done carefully. Some people choose to buy unroasted coffee and roast it at home in an oven, but it's more cost-effective to buy coffee that’s already been roasted. Additionally, the improved roasting methods produce coffee with better flavor, as they use machinery specifically designed for this purpose.

21. GRINDING THE COFFEE BEANS.--During the roasting process there is developed an aromatic volatile oil, called caffeol, to which the flavor of the coffee is due. This oil is very strong, but upon being exposed to the air it passes off and thus causes a loss of flavor in the coffee. For this reason, roasted coffee should be kept in air-tight cans, boxes, or jars. Before it is used, however, it must be ground. The grinding of the coffee beans exposes more surface and hence the flavor is more quickly lost from ground than unground coffee. Because of this fact and because ground coffee can be adulterated very easily, it is not wise to buy coffee already ground. If only a small quantity is bought at a time and it can be used up at once, the grinding may be done by the grocer, but even in such a case the better plan is to grind it immediately before using it.

21. GRINDING THE COFFEE BEANS.--During the roasting process, an aromatic volatile oil called caffeol is produced, which gives coffee its flavor. This oil is very powerful, but when exposed to air, it evaporates, leading to a loss of flavor in the coffee. For this reason, roasted coffee should be stored in airtight containers, such as cans, boxes, or jars. However, before it can be used, it must be ground. Grinding the coffee beans increases the surface area, so the flavor dissipates more quickly from ground coffee than from whole beans. Because of this and the fact that ground coffee can be easily tampered with, it's not a good idea to buy pre-ground coffee. If only a small amount is purchased at a time and can be used right away, the grocer can grind it, but even so, the best approach is to grind it just before use.

22. The method by which the coffee is to be prepared for drinking will determine to a large extent the way in which the coffee beans must be ground. When coffee is to be made by a method in which the grounds are not left in the water for any length of time, the beans must be ground very fine, in fact, pulverized, for the flavor must be extracted quickly. For other purposes, such as when it is to be made in a percolator, the beans need not be ground quite so fine, and when it is to be made in an ordinary coffee pot they may be ground very coarse.

22. The way you prepare coffee for drinking greatly affects how finely you need to grind the coffee beans. If you're making coffee using a method where the grounds aren’t left in the water for long, the beans should be ground very fine, basically turned into powder, to extract the flavor quickly. For other methods, like using a percolator, the beans don't need to be ground as fine, and if you're using a regular coffee pot, they can be ground coarsely.

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

23. For use in the home, simple coffee mills that will grind coffee as coarse or as fine as may be desired are to be had. Fig. 1 shows two of the common types of home coffee mills.

23. For home use, there are simple coffee grinders that can grind coffee as coarse or as fine as you want. Fig. 1 shows two of the common types of home coffee grinders.

The one shown in (a) is fastened to a board so that it can be attached to the wall. The coffee to be ground is put in the chamber a, from which it is fed to the grinding rolls, and the ground coffee drops into the chamber b. The grinding rolls are adjusted to the desired fineness by the notched arrangement on the end of the shaft.

The one shown in (a) is attached to a board so it can be mounted on the wall. The coffee to be ground goes into the chamber a, from which it is sent to the grinding rolls, and the ground coffee falls into the chamber b. The grinding rolls are set to the desired fineness using the notched adjustment on the end of the shaft.

The coffee mill shown in (b) may be placed on a table top or some other flat surface, but it operates on the same principle as the other. The coffee beans are placed in the chamber at the top, and the ground coffee drops into the drawer a at the bottom. The adjustment of the grinding rolls is regulated by the notched head at the end of the vertical shaft.

The coffee grinder shown in (b) can be set on a tabletop or any flat surface, but it works the same way as the other one. The coffee beans go into the chamber at the top, and the ground coffee falls into the drawer a at the bottom. You can adjust the grinding rolls using the notched head at the end of the vertical shaft.

24. ADULTERATION OF COFFEE.--As in the case of numerous other foods, attempts are often made to adulterate coffee. Since the Pure Food Laws have been enforced, there is not so much danger of adulteration in a product of this kind; still, every housewife should be familiar with the ways in which this beverage may be reduced in strength or quality, so that she may be able to tell whether she is getting a good or an inferior product for her money.

24. ADULTERATION OF COFFEE.--Like many other foods, coffee is often tampered with. Since the Pure Food Laws have been put into effect, the risk of adulteration in such products has decreased, but every homeowner should know how this drink can be weakened or compromised in quality, so that they can identify whether they are buying a good or a subpar product for their money.

Coffee may be adulterated in a number of ways. Ground coffee is especially easy to adulterate with bread crumbs, bran, and similar materials that have been thoroughly browned. Many of the cheaper coffees are adulterated with chicory, a root that has a flavor similar to that of coffee and gives the beverages with which it is used a reddish-brown color. Chicory is not harmful; in fact, its flavor is sought by some people, particularly the French. The objection to it, as well as to other adulterants, is that it is much cheaper than coffee and the use of it therefore increases the profits of the dealer. The presence of chicory in coffee can be detected by putting a small amount of the ground coffee in a glass of water. If chicory is present, the water will become tinged with red and the chicory will settle to the bottom more quickly than the coffee.

Coffee can be mixed with lower-quality ingredients in several ways. Ground coffee is particularly easy to mix with breadcrumbs, bran, and similar materials that have been browned. Many of the cheaper coffee brands are mixed with chicory, a root that has a flavor similar to coffee and gives the drinks it’s added to a reddish-brown color. Chicory isn’t harmful; in fact, some people, especially the French, enjoy its flavor. The downside of chicory, as well as other fillers, is that it’s much cheaper than coffee, which means retailers can make more profit. You can tell if chicory is in the coffee by adding a small amount of the ground coffee to a glass of water. If chicory is present, the water will turn red, and the chicory will settle to the bottom quicker than the coffee.


PREPARATION OF COFFEE

25. SELECTION OF COFFEE.--Many varieties of coffee are to be had, but Mocha, Java, and Rio are the ones most used. A single variety, however, is seldom sold alone, because a much better flavor can be obtained from blend coffee, by which is meant two or more kinds of coffee mixed together.

25. SELECTION OF COFFEE.--There are many types of coffee available, but Mocha, Java, and Rio are the most commonly used. A single type is rarely sold by itself because a much better flavor can be achieved with blended coffee, which refers to a mix of two or more types of coffee together.

It is usually advisable to buy as good a quality of coffee as can be afforded. The more expensive coffees have better flavor and greater strength than the cheaper grades and consequently need not be used in such great quantity. It is far better to serve this beverage seldom and to have what is served the very best than to serve it so often that a cheap grade must be purchased. For instance, some persons think that they must have coffee for at least two out of three daily meals, but it is usually sufficient if coffee is served once a day, and then for the morning or midday meal rather than for the evening meal.

It’s generally a good idea to buy the best quality coffee you can afford. Higher-priced coffees have better flavor and stronger taste compared to cheaper options, so you don't need to use as much. It’s much better to serve this drink occasionally and make sure it’s the very best, rather than serve it frequently and settle for a low-quality brand. For example, some people think they need coffee with at least two out of three meals a day, but it’s usually enough to have it once a day, preferably during breakfast or lunch instead of dinner.

[Illustration: FIG. 2]

After deciding on the variety of coffee that is desired, it is well to buy unground beans that are packed in air-tight packages. Upon receiving the coffee in the home, it should be poured into a jar or a can and kept tightly covered.

After choosing the type of coffee you want, it's best to buy whole beans that are sealed in airtight packages. Once you receive the coffee at home, transfer it into a jar or can and keep it tightly closed.

26. NECESSARY UTENSILS.--Very few utensils are required for coffee making, but they should be of the best material that can be afforded in order that good results may be had. A coffee pot, a coffee percolator, and a drip pot, or coffee biggin, are the utensils most frequently used for the preparation of this beverage.

26. NECESSARY UTENSILS.--You don’t need many tools to make coffee, but they should be of high quality to ensure great results. The most commonly used items for brewing this drink are a coffee pot, a coffee percolator, and a drip pot, or coffee biggin.

27. If a COFFEE POT is preferred, it should be one made of material that will withstand the heat of a direct flame. The cheapest coffee pots are made of tin, but they are the least desirable and should be avoided, for the tin, upon coming in contact with the tannic acid contained in coffee, sometimes changes the flavor. Coffee pots made of enamelware are the next highest in price. Then come nickel-plated ones, and, finally, the highest-priced ones, which are made of aluminum. The usual form of plain coffee pot is shown in Fig. 2.

27. If you prefer a COFFEE POT, it should be made from a material that can handle the heat of a direct flame. The most affordable coffee pots are made of tin, but they are the least desirable and should be avoided because the tin can alter the flavor when it comes into contact with the tannic acid in coffee. Next in price are enamelware coffee pots. Then there are nickel-plated options, and lastly, the most expensive ones are made of aluminum. The typical design of a plain coffee pot is shown in Fig. 2.

[Illustration: FIG. 3]

28. PERCOLATORS are very desirable for the making of coffee, for they produce excellent results and at the same time make the preparation of coffee easy. Those having an electric attachment are especially convenient. One form of percolator is shown in Fig. 3. In this percolator, the ground coffee is put in the filter cup a and the water in the lower part of the pot b. The water immediately passes into the chamber c, as shown by the arrows. In this chamber, which is small, it heats rapidly and then rises through the vertical tube d. At the top e, it comes out in the form of a spray, strikes the glass top, and falls back on a perforated metal plate f, called the spreader. It then passes through this plate into the filter cup containing the grounds, through which it percolates and drops into the main chamber. The circulation of the water continues as long as sufficient heat is applied, and the rate of circulation depends on the degree of heat.

28. PERCOLATORS are highly sought after for making coffee because they deliver great results while making the process easy. Those with an electric option are particularly handy. One type of percolator is shown in Fig. 3. In this percolator, the ground coffee goes in the filter cup a, and the water is added to the bottom part of the pot b. The water quickly moves into chamber c, as indicated by the arrows. In this small chamber, it heats up rapidly and then rises through the vertical tube d. At the top e, it sprays out, hits the glass lid, and falls back onto a perforated metal plate f, known as the spreader. It then passes through this plate into the filter cup with the grounds, where it percolates and drips into the main chamber. The water circulation continues as long as there's enough heat applied, and the speed of circulation depends on the level of heat.

29. The DRIP POT, or coffee biggin, as it is sometimes called, one type of which is shown in Fig. 4, is sometimes preferred for the making of coffee. This utensil is made of metal or earthenware and operates on the same principle as a percolator. The ground coffee is suspended above the liquid in a cloth bag or a perforated receptacle and the water percolates through it.

29. The DRIP POT, or coffee biggin, as it’s sometimes called—one type of which is shown in Fig. 4—is sometimes preferred for making coffee. This tool is made of metal or ceramic and works on the same principle as a percolator. The ground coffee is held above the liquid in a cloth bag or a perforated container, and the water flows through it.

[Illustration: FIG. 4]

30. In case a more complicated utensil than any of those mentioned is used for the making of coffee, the directions that accompany it will have to be followed. But no matter what kind of utensil is selected for the preparation of coffee, it should be thoroughly cleaned each time it is used. To clean it, first empty any coffee it contains and then wash every part carefully and scald and dry it. If the utensil is not clean, the flavor of the coffee made in it will be spoiled.

30. If you use a more complicated tool than those mentioned for making coffee, be sure to follow the instructions that come with it. Regardless of the type of tool you choose for brewing coffee, it should be thoroughly cleaned every time you use it. To clean it, first empty out any leftover coffee, then wash each part carefully, scald it, and let it dry. If the tool isn’t clean, it will ruin the taste of the coffee brewed in it.

31. METHODS OF MAKING COFFEE.--Several methods are followed in the making of coffee, the one to select depending on the result desired and the kind of utensil to be used. The most common of these methods are: boiling, which produces a decoction; infusion, or filtration, which consists in pouring boiling water over very finely ground coffee in order to extract its properties; and percolating, in which boiling water percolates, or passes through, finely ground coffee and extracts its flavor. For any of these methods, soft water is better than water that contains a great deal of lime. Many times persons cannot understand why coffee that is excellent in one locality is poor in another. In the majority of cases, this variation is due to the difference in the water and not to the coffee. From 1 to 2 tablespoonfuls of coffee to 1 cupful of water is the usual proportion followed in making coffee.

31. METHODS OF MAKING COFFEE.--There are several ways to make coffee, and the choice of method depends on the desired outcome and the type of equipment used. The most common methods are: boiling, which creates a decoction; infusion, or filtration, where boiling water is poured over very finely ground coffee to extract its flavors; and percolating, in which boiling water passes through finely ground coffee to extract its taste. Soft water is preferable to hard water with a lot of lime for any of these methods. People often wonder why coffee that tastes great in one place can be subpar in another. Usually, this variation is due to the difference in water quality rather than the coffee itself. A typical ratio is 1 to 2 tablespoons of coffee per cup of water.

32. BOILED COFFEE.--Without doubt, coffee is more often boiled in its preparation than treated in any other way. Usually, an ordinary coffee pot is all that is required in this method of preparation. The amount of ground coffee used may be varied to obtain the desired strength.

32. BOILED COFFEE.--Without a doubt, coffee is most often boiled during its preparation more than being made any other way. Usually, a regular coffee pot is all that's needed for this method. The amount of ground coffee used can be adjusted to achieve the desired strength.

BOILED COFFEE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 c. cold water
  • 1/2 c. ground coffee
  • 3 c. boiling water

After scalding the coffee pot, put 1/2 cupful of the cold water and the ground coffee into it. Stir well and then add the boiling water. Allow it to come to the boiling point and boil for 3 minutes. Pour a little of the coffee into a cup to clear the spout of grounds, add the remaining cupful of cold water, and put back on the stove to reheat, but not to boil. When hot, serve at once. Never allow the liquid to stand on the grounds for any length of time, for the longer it stands the more tannic acid will be drawn out.

After boiling the coffee pot, add 1/2 cup of cold water and the ground coffee into it. Stir well, then pour in the boiling water. Let it reach a boil and cook for 3 minutes. Pour a little of the coffee into a cup to clear the spout of grounds, add the remaining cup of cold water, and put it back on the stove to reheat, but don’t let it boil. When it's hot, serve right away. Never let the liquid sit on the grounds for too long, because the longer it sits, the more tannic acid will be extracted.

33. As coffee made by boiling is usually somewhat cloudy, it may be cleared in one way or another. The last cold water is added for this purpose, for as it is heavier than the warm liquid it sinks to the bottom and carries the grounds with it. Coffee may also be cleared by stirring a small quantity of beaten raw egg, either the white or the yolk, or both, into the grounds before the cold water is added to them. One egg will clear two or three potfuls of coffee if care is exercised in its use. What remains of the egg after the first potful has been cleared should be placed in a small dish and set away for future use. A little cold water poured over it will assist in preserving it. If the egg shells are washed before the egg is broken, they may be crushed and added to the grounds also, for they will help to clear the coffee. The explanation of the use of egg for this purpose is that it coagulates as the coffee heats and carries the particles of coffee down with it as it sinks.

33. Since coffee made by boiling is typically a bit cloudy, it can be clarified in a few ways. The last cold water added helps with this because it's heavier than the warm liquid, allowing it to sink to the bottom and pull the grounds with it. Coffee can also be cleared by stirring in a small amount of beaten raw egg—whether just the white, just the yolk, or both—into the grounds before adding the cold water. One egg can clear two or three pots of coffee if used carefully. Any leftover egg after clearing the first pot should be placed in a small dish and saved for later. Pouring a little cold water over it will help preserve it. If the eggshells are washed before breaking the egg, they can be crushed and added to the grounds as well, as they will help to clear the coffee. The reason for using egg this way is that it coagulates as the coffee heats, trapping the coffee particles and bringing them down as it sinks.

34. Another very satisfactory way in which to make boiled coffee is to tie the ground coffee loosely into a piece of cheesecloth, pour the boiling water over it, and then let it boil for a few minutes longer than in the method just given. Coffee prepared in this manner will be found to be clear and therefore need not be treated in any of the ways mentioned.

34. Another great way to make boiled coffee is to put the ground coffee loosely in a piece of cheesecloth, pour boiling water over it, and then let it boil for a few minutes longer than in the method mentioned earlier. Coffee made this way will be clear, so it doesn't need to be handled in any of the ways described.

35. FILTERED COFFEE.--When it is desired to make coffee by the filtering process, the coffee must be ground into powder. Then it should be made in a drip, or French, coffee pot. If one of these is not available, cheesecloth of several thicknesses may be substituted. The advantage of making coffee by this method is that the coffee grounds may sometimes be used a second time.

35. FILTERED COFFEE.--To make coffee using the filtering process, you need to grind the coffee into a powder. Then brew it in a drip or French coffee pot. If you don't have one of those, you can use multiple layers of cheesecloth as a substitute. The benefit of this method is that you can sometimes reuse the coffee grounds.

FILTERED COFFEE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1/2 c. powdered coffee
  • 1 qt. boiling water

Place the coffee in the top of the drip pot, pour the boiling water over it, and allow the water to drip through into the vessel below. When all has run through, remove the water and pour it over the coffee a second time. If cheesecloth is to be used, put the coffee in it, suspend it over the coffee pot or other convenient utensil, and proceed as with the drip pot.

Place the coffee in the top of the drip pot, pour the boiling water over it, and let the water drip into the container below. Once everything has dripped through, take the water and pour it over the coffee again. If you’re using cheesecloth, put the coffee in it, hang it over the coffee pot or another suitable container, and follow the same steps as with the drip pot.

36. PERCOLATED COFFEE.--The coffee used for percolated coffee should be ground finer than for boiled coffee, but not so fine as for filtered coffee. This is perhaps the easiest way in which to prepare coffee and at the same time the surest method of securing good coffee.

36. PERCOLATED COFFEE.--The coffee for percolated coffee should be ground finer than for boiled coffee, but not as fine as for filtered coffee. This is probably the simplest way to make coffee and also the most reliable method for getting a good cup.

PERCOLATED COFFEE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1/2 c. finely ground coffee
  • 1 qt. cold water

Place the coffee in the perforated compartment in the top of the percolator and pour the cold water in the lower chamber. As the water heats, it is forced up through the vertical tube against the top. It then falls over the coffee and percolates through into the water below. This process begins before the water boils, but the hotter the water becomes the more rapidly does it percolate through the coffee. The process continues as long as the heat is applied, and the liquid becomes stronger in flavor as it repeatedly passes through the coffee. When the coffee has obtained the desired strength, serve at once.

Place the coffee in the perforated section at the top of the percolator and pour cold water into the bottom chamber. As the water heats up, it gets pushed up through the vertical tube to the top. It then drips down over the coffee and seeps through back into the water below. This starts happening before the water actually boils, but the hotter the water gets, the faster it filters through the coffee. The process keeps going as long as there's heat, and the liquid becomes richer in flavor as it circulates through the coffee multiple times. Once the coffee reaches your preferred strength, serve it right away.

37. AFTER-DINNER COFFEE.--After a rather elaborate meal, a small cup of very strong, black coffee is often served. To prepare after-dinner coffee, as this kind is called, follow any of the methods already explained, but make it twice as strong as coffee that is to accompany the usual meal. Sugar and cream may be added to after-dinner coffee, but usually this coffee is drunk black and unsweetened.

37. AFTER-DINNER COFFEE.--After a pretty fancy meal, a small cup of very strong, black coffee is often served. To make after-dinner coffee, as this type is called, follow any of the methods already described, but make it twice as strong as the coffee served with the regular meal. Sugar and cream can be added to after-dinner coffee, but usually, this coffee is enjoyed black and unsweetened.

38. VIENNA COFFEE.--An especially nice way in which to serve coffee is to combine it with boiled milk and whipped cream. It is then known as Vienna coffee. The accompanying directions are for just 1 cup, as this is prepared a cupful at a time.

38. VIENNA COFFEE.--A great way to serve coffee is to mix it with steamed milk and whipped cream. This is called Vienna coffee. The following instructions are for just 1 cup, as it's made one cup at a time.

VIENNA COFFEE

(
Sufficient to Serve One
)
  • 1/4 c. boiled milk
  • 3 Tb. whipped cream
  • 1/2 c. hot filtered coffee, or coffee prepared by any method

Place the boiled milk in a cup, add the whipped cream, and fill the cup with the hot coffee.

Place the boiled milk in a cup, add the whipped cream, and fill the cup with hot coffee.

39. ICED COFFEE.--Persons fond of coffee find iced coffee a most delicious hot-weather drink. Iced coffee is usually served in a glass, as shown in Fig. 5, rather than in a cup, and when whipped cream is added an attractive beverage results.

39. ICED COFFEE.--People who love coffee find iced coffee to be a really tasty drink for warm weather. Iced coffee is typically served in a glass, like in Fig. 5, instead of a cup, and adding whipped cream makes it an appealing beverage.

To prepare iced coffee, make coffee by any desired method, but if the boiling method is followed be careful to strain the liquid so that it is entirely free from grounds. Cool the liquid and then pour into glasses containing cracked ice. Serve with plain cream and sugar or with a tablespoonful or two of whipped cream. If desired, however, the cream may be omitted and the coffee served with an equal amount of milk, when it is known as iced café au lait.

To make iced coffee, brew coffee using any method you like, but if you're using the boiling method, make sure to strain it well so there are no grounds left. Let the liquid cool, then pour it into glasses filled with crushed ice. Serve it with plain cream and sugar, or add a tablespoon or two of whipped cream. If you prefer, you can skip the cream and serve the coffee with an equal amount of milk, which is called iced café au lait.

40. LEFT-OVER COFFEE.--The aim of the person who prepares coffee should be to make the exact quantity needed, no more nor no less, and this can usually be done if directions are carefully followed. However, if any coffee remains after all are served, it should not be thrown away, as it can be utilized in several ways. Drain the liquid from the grounds as soon as possible so that the flavor will not be impaired.

40. LEFTOVER COFFEE.--The goal of the person making coffee should be to brew just the right amount needed, neither more nor less, and this can usually be achieved if the instructions are followed closely. However, if there is any coffee left after everyone has been served, it shouldn't be discarded, as it can be used in various ways. Drain the liquid from the grounds as soon as possible so the flavor isn’t ruined.

[Illustration: FIG. 5]

If desired, left-over coffee may be added to fresh coffee when it is prepared for the next meal or, in hot weather, it may be used for iced coffee. It may also be used to flavor gelatine, which, when sweetened and served with whipped cream, makes an excellent dessert. Again, left-over coffee is very satisfactory as a flavoring for cake icing, for custards, or for whipped cream that is to be served with desserts. When coffee is desired for flavoring, it should be boiled in order to evaporate some of the water. Very good cake is made by using left-over coffee for the liquid and spices for the flavoring.

If you want, leftover coffee can be added to fresh coffee when you prepare it for the next meal, or, in hot weather, it can be used for iced coffee. It can also be used to flavor gelatin, which, when sweetened and served with whipped cream, makes a great dessert. Additionally, leftover coffee works really well as a flavoring for cake frosting, custards, or whipped cream that’s served with desserts. When you want coffee for flavoring, it should be boiled to evaporate some of the water. You can make really good cake by using leftover coffee as the liquid and adding spices for flavor.


SERVING COFFEE

41. The serving of coffee may be done in several ways, but, with the exception of iced coffee, this beverage should always be served as hot as possible. As can well be imagined, nothing is more insipid than lukewarm coffee. Therefore, coffee is preferably made immediately before it is to be served. Sugar and cream usually accompany coffee, but they may be omitted if they are not desired.

41. Coffee can be served in various ways, but except for iced coffee, it should always be served as hot as possible. It's easy to see that nothing is more bland than lukewarm coffee. Because of this, coffee is best made right before serving. Sugar and cream are typically offered with coffee, but they can be left out if not wanted.

Coffee may be served with the dinner course, with the dessert, or after the dessert. When it is served with the dinner course or the dessert, a coffee cup or a tea cup of ordinary size is used; but when it is served after the dessert, a demi-tasse, or small cup that holds less than half the amount of the other size, is preferable. Usually, after-dinner coffee, or café noir, as such black coffee is called, rather than coffee with cream and sugar, is served after the dessert course of a heavy dinner because it is supposed to be stimulating to the digestion.

Coffee can be served during dinner, with dessert, or after dessert. When served with dinner or dessert, a standard coffee cup or tea cup is used; however, when it's served after dessert, a demi-tasse, or small cup that holds less than half the amount of the regular size, is preferred. Typically, after-dinner coffee, known as café noir, which is black coffee rather than coffee with cream and sugar, is served after the dessert course of a heavy meal because it's believed to help digestion.

The pouring of coffee may be done at the table or in the kitchen. If it is done at the table, the person serving should ask those to be served whether or not they desire cream and sugar, and then serve accordingly. If it is done before the coffee is brought to the table, the cream and sugar should be passed, so that those served may help themselves to the desired amount. Care should always be taken in the serving of coffee not to fill the cup so full that it will run over or that it will be too full to handle easily when the cream and sugar are added.

The coffee can be poured either at the table or in the kitchen. If it's done at the table, the person serving should ask everyone if they want cream and sugar, and serve accordingly. If it's done before bringing the coffee to the table, the cream and sugar should be passed around so guests can help themselves to as much as they like. Always be careful not to fill the cup too full, so it doesn't spill over or become too full to handle easily when adding cream and sugar.


TEA

HISTORY AND PRODUCTION OF TEA

42. TEA consists of the prepared leaves or leaf buds of a plant known as the tea plant and is used as one of the three stimulating beverages. This plant is grown in China, Japan, India, Ceylon, and the East Indies, and to a small extent in South Carolina. There are two distinct varieties of tea, and each one may be used for the preparation of either green or black tea. The leaves of the tea plant, which are what is used for making the beverage, are gathered four times a year from the time the plants are 4 years old until they are 10 or 12 years old. Then the plants are pulled up and new ones planted. Upon being gathered, the leaves are put through a series of processes before they are ready for use. During this treatment, various modifications of flavor are developed and the leaves are changed in color to black or green, depending on the process used.

42. TEA is made from the processed leaves or leaf buds of the tea plant and is one of the three popular stimulating drinks. This plant is cultivated in China, Japan, India, Ceylon, and the East Indies, and to a lesser extent in South Carolina. There are two main varieties of tea, both of which can be used to make either green or black tea. The leaves, which are used to make the beverage, are picked four times a year from when the plants are 4 years old until they are 10 or 12 years old. After that, the plants are uprooted, and new ones are planted. Once harvested, the leaves go through a series of processes before they are ready to be used. During this treatment, different flavor profiles are developed, and the leaves change color to black or green, depending on the method applied.

43. It is surprising to most persons to learn that tea was known in China for many years before people began to make a beverage of it. The first record of its use as a beverage was probably in the 6th century, when an infusion of tea leaves was given to a ruler of the Chinese Empire to cure a headache. A century later, tea had come into common use as a beverage in that country. As civilization advanced and new countries were formed, tea was introduced as a beverage, and today there is scarcely a locality in which it is not commonly used.

43. Most people are surprised to find out that tea was known in China for many years before it became a drink. The earliest record of tea being used as a beverage probably dates back to the 6th century, when an infusion of tea leaves was given to a Chinese Empire ruler to help with a headache. A century later, tea became widely consumed as a drink in that country. As civilization evolved and new countries emerged, tea was introduced as a beverage, and today there's hardly a place where it isn't commonly enjoyed.

44. CLASSIFICATION OF TEA AS TO QUALITY.--The position of the leaf on the tea plant determines the quality of the tea. The farther from the top, the coarser are the leaves and the poorer is the quality. On the other hand, the smaller the leaves and the nearer the top, the better is the quality. In the very best qualities of tea, the buds of the plant are included with the tiny top leaves.

44. CLASSIFICATION OF TEA AS TO QUALITY.--The position of the leaf on the tea plant determines the quality of the tea. The farther the leaves are from the top, the coarser they are and the lower the quality. On the other hand, the smaller the leaves and the closer they are to the top, the higher the quality. In the very best qualities of tea, the buds of the plant are included along with the small top leaves.

45. Tea that is raised in China is graded in a particular way, and it will be well to understand this grading. The top buds are used entirely for a variety known as flowery pekoe, but this is seldom found in our markets. The youngest leaves next to the buds are made into a tea called orange pekoe; the next older leaves are used for pekoe; the third, for souchong first; the fourth, for souchong second; the fifth, for congou; and if there is another leaf, it is made into a tea known as bohea. Sometimes the first three leaves are mixed, and when this is done the tea is called pekoe. If they are mixed with the next two, the tea is called souchong pekoe. The laws controlling the importation of tea require that each shipment be tested before it passes the custom house, to determine whether or not it contains what the label claims for it.

45. Tea grown in China is graded in a specific way, and it's important to understand this grading system. The top buds are used exclusively for a type known as flowery pekoe, but this is rarely found in our markets. The youngest leaves next to the buds are made into a tea called orange pekoe; the next older leaves are used for pekoe; the third leaves, for souchong first; the fourth, for souchong second; the fifth, for congou; and if there are any additional leaves, they are used to make a tea called bohea. Occasionally, the first three leaves are mixed together, and when this happens, the tea is referred to as pekoe. If they are combined with the next two, the tea is called souchong pekoe. Regulations governing tea imports require that each shipment is tested before it goes through customs to ensure that it matches what the label claims.

46. VARIETIES OF TEA.--The teas that are put on the market are of two general varieties, black tea and green tea. Any quality of tea or tea raised in any country may be made into these two kinds, for, as has been mentioned, it is the method of preparation that is accountable for the difference. A number of the common brands of tea are blends or mixtures of green and black tea. These, which are often called mixed teas, are preferred by many persons to the pure tea of either kind.

46. VARIETIES OF TEA.--The teas available on the market come in two main types, black tea and green tea. Any quality of tea or tea grown in any country can be made into these two types, because, as previously mentioned, it's the preparation method that creates the difference. Many of the common tea brands are blends or mixtures of green and black tea. These, often referred to as mixed teas, are favored by many people over the pure version of either type.

47. BLACK TEA is made by fermenting the tea leaves before they are dried. This fermentation turns them black and produces a marked change in their flavor. The process of preparation also renders some of the tannin insoluble; that is, not so much of it can be dissolved when the beverage is made. Some well-known brands of black tea are China congou, or English breakfast, Formosa, oolong, and the various pekoes. The English are especially fond of black tea, and the people of the United States have followed their custom to the extent that it has become a favorite in this country.

47. BLACK TEA is made by fermenting the tea leaves before they are dried. This fermentation turns them black and changes their flavor significantly. The preparation process also makes some of the tannin insoluble, meaning less of it can dissolve when the drink is made. Some popular brands of black tea include China congou, English breakfast, Formosa, oolong, and the different types of pekoes. The English especially love black tea, and people in the United States have adopted this habit to the point where it has become a favorite here.

48. GREEN TEA is made by steaming the leaves and then drying them, a process that retains the green color. With tea of this kind, all fermentation of the leaves is carefully avoided. Some familiar kinds of green tea are hyson, Japan, and gunpowder. The best of these are the ones that come from Japan.

48. GREEN TEA is made by steaming the leaves and then drying them, a process that keeps their green color. With this type of tea, fermentation of the leaves is carefully avoided. Some well-known types of green tea are hyson, Japan, and gunpowder. The best of these come from Japan.


PREPARATION OF TEA

49. SELECTION OF TEA.--In the course of its preparation, tea is rolled either into long, slender pieces or into little balls. Knowing this, the housewife should be able to detect readily the stems and other foreign material sometimes found in teas, especially the cheaper varieties. Such teas should be avoided, for they are lacking not only in flavor but also in strength. If economy must be practiced, the moderately expensive grades will prove to be the best ones to buy.

49. SELECTION OF TEA.--During its preparation, tea is shaped into either long, thin strands or small balls. With this knowledge, the homemaker should be able to easily spot stems and other unwanted bits sometimes present in teas, especially the cheaper ones. Such teas should be avoided, as they lack both flavor and strength. If you need to save money, the moderately priced options will be the best to purchase.

50. METHODS OF MAKING TEA.--Upon steeping tea in hot water, a very pleasant beverage results. If this is properly made, a gentle stimulant that can be indulged in occasionally by normal adults without harmful results can be expected. However, the value of tea as a beverage has at all times been much overestimated. When it is served as afternoon tea, as is frequently done, its chief value lies in the pleasant hospitality that is afforded by pouring it. Especially is this the case in England, where the inhabitants have adopted the pretty custom of serving afternoon tea and feel that guests have not received the hospitality of the home until tea has been served. Through their continued use of this beverage, the English have become expert in tea making.

50. METHODS OF MAKING TEA.--When you steep tea in hot water, it creates a enjoyable drink. If made correctly, it serves as a mild stimulant that normal adults can enjoy occasionally without negative effects. However, the benefits of tea as a drink have often been overstated. When served as afternoon tea, as is commonly done, its main value lies in the warm hospitality offered by serving it. This is especially true in England, where people have embraced the lovely tradition of afternoon tea and believe that guests haven't truly experienced the warmth of the home until tea has been served. Through their regular consumption of this drink, the English have become skilled at making tea.

51. The Russians are also adepts so far as the making of tea is concerned. They use a very good kind of tea, called caravan tea, which is packed in lead-covered packages and brought to them by caravans. This method of packing and delivery is supposed to have a ripening effect on the leaves and to give them an unusually good flavor. For making tea, the Russians use an equipment called a samovar. This is an urn that is constantly kept filled with boiling water, so that tea can be served to all visitors or callers that come, no matter what time of day they arrive.

51. The Russians are also skilled when it comes to making tea. They use a high-quality tea known as caravan tea, which is packed in lead-covered packages and delivered by caravans. This packing and delivery method is believed to enhance the leaves and give them a uniquely great flavor. To make tea, the Russians use a device called a samovar. This is an urn that is always kept filled with boiling water, so tea can be served to any visitors or guests at any time of day.

52. Most persons, however, make tea into a beverage by steeping it in boiling water or by placing it in a tea ball or some similar utensil and then allowing it to stand in boiling water for a short time. Whichever method of preparation is followed, the water must be at the boiling point and it must be freshly boiled. Water that has been boiled for any length of time becomes very insipid and flat to the taste and affects the flavor of the tea. Tea leaves that have been used once should never be resteeped, for more tannin is extracted than is desirable and the good tea flavor is lost, producing a very unwholesome beverage. As a rule, 1 to 1-1/2 teaspoonfuls of tea to 1 cupful of water is the proportion followed in tea making.

52. Most people make tea by steeping it in boiling water or by placing it in a tea ball or a similar tool and letting it sit in boiling water for a short time. No matter which method you use, the water must be at a rolling boil and freshly boiled. Water that has been boiled for a while tastes bland and flat, which affects the tea's flavor. Used tea leaves shouldn't be steeped again because they release too much tannin, which ruins the good flavor and creates an unpleasant drink. Generally, the recommended ratio is 1 to 1.5 teaspoons of tea for every cup of water.

53. STEEPED TEA.--When tea is to be steeped, a teapot is used. That the best results may be secured, the teapot should always be freshly scalded and the water freshly boiled.

53. STEEPED TEA.--To steep tea, you need a teapot. To get the best results, always preheat the teapot with hot water and use freshly boiled water.

STEEPED TEA

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 Tb. tea
  • 1 qt. boiling water

Scald the teapot. Put the tea into the teapot and pour the boiling water over it. Let stand on the back of the stove for 3 minutes, when a beverage of sufficient strength will be formed. Strain the beverage from the tea leaves and serve at once.

Scald the teapot. Add the tea to the teapot and pour the boiling water over it. Let it sit on the back of the stove for 3 minutes, until the drink is strong enough. Strain the drink from the tea leaves and serve immediately.

[Illustration: FIG. 6]

54. AFTERNOON TEA.--When tea is desired for afternoon serving or when it is to be prepared at the table, a tea ball is the most satisfactory utensil to use. This is a perforated silver or aluminum ball, such as shown in Fig. 6, which opens by means of a hinge and into which the tea is placed. For convenience in use, a chain is attached to the ball and ends in a ring that is large enough to slip over the finger. Some teapots contain a ball attached to the inside of the lid and suspended inside the pot. Utensils of this kind are very convenient, for when the tea made in them becomes strong enough, the leaves may be removed without pouring off the tea.

54. AFTERNOON TEA.--When you want to serve tea in the afternoon or prepare it at the table, a tea ball is the best tool to use. This is a perforated silver or aluminum ball, like the one shown in Fig. 6, which opens with a hinge and holds the tea. For easy use, a chain is attached to the ball, ending in a ring that can slide over your finger. Some teapots feature a ball attached to the inside of the lid, hanging inside the pot. Tools like these are very convenient because once the tea is strong enough, you can remove the leaves without needing to pour out the tea.

To prepare afternoon tea with a tea ball, put 1 or 2 teaspoonfuls of tea in the ball, fasten it securely, and place it in a cup. Then pour enough freshly boiled water over the ball to fill the cup to the desired height. Allow the ball to remain in the water until the desired strength is attained and then remove it. If more than 2 or 3 persons are to be served, it will be necessary to refill the ball.

To make afternoon tea using a tea ball, add 1 or 2 teaspoons of tea into the ball, secure it tightly, and put it in a cup. Then, pour enough freshly boiled water over the ball to fill the cup to your preferred level. Let the ball steep in the water until it reaches the desired strength, then take it out. If you're serving more than 2 or 3 people, you'll need to refill the ball.

55. ICED TEA.--Perhaps one of the most refreshing drinks for warm weather is iced tea. A tea that is especially blended for this purpose and that is cheaper in price than other tea may be purchased. Slices of lemon or crushed mint leaves add much to the flavor of the tea and are often served with it.

55. ICED TEA.--One of the most refreshing drinks for warm weather is iced tea. You can buy tea specially blended for this purpose that is cheaper than other varieties. Slices of lemon or crushed mint leaves enhance the flavor of the tea and are often served with it.

Prepare tea by steeping it, but make it double strength. Strain it from the leaves and allow it to become cool. Then pour it into glasses containing cracked ice. Serve with sugar and slices of lemon or mint leaves.

Prepare tea by steeping it, but make it double strength. Strain it from the leaves and let it cool. Then pour it into glasses with crushed ice. Serve with sugar and slices of lemon or mint leaves.

56. LEFT-OVER TEA.--Tea that remains after all persons are served need not be wasted if it is poured off the leaves at once. Such tea is satisfactory for iced tea, or it may be combined with certain fruit juices in the preparation of various cold beverages. However, there are not many satisfactory uses for left-over tea; so it is best to take pains not to make more than will be required for one time.

56. LEFTOVER TEA.--Tea that’s left after everyone has been served doesn’t have to go to waste if you pour it off the leaves right away. This tea works well for iced tea or can be mixed with some fruit juices to make different cold drinks. However, there aren't many good uses for leftover tea, so it's best to make just enough for one serving.


SERVING TEA

[Illustration: FIG. 7]

57. Tea may be served as an accompaniment to meals or with small sandwiches, dainty cakes, or macaroons as an afternoon ceremony. If it is served with meals and is poured at the table, the hostess or the one pouring asks those to be served whether they desire sugar and cream and then uses these accompaniments accordingly. In the event that it is brought to the table poured, the sugar and cream are passed and those served may help themselves to what they desire. Lemon adds much to the flavor of tea and is liked by most persons. A dish of sliced lemon may be passed with the cream and sugar or placed where the hostess may add it to the tea. The Russians, who are inveterate tea drinkers, prepare this beverage by putting a slice of lemon in the cup and then pouring the hot tea over it. If this custom is followed, the lemons should be washed and sliced very thin and the seeds should be removed from the slices. The flavor may also be improved by sticking a few cloves in each slice of lemon; or, if the clove flavor is desired, several cloves may be put in the teapot when the tea is made. Fig. 7 shows slices of lemons ready to be served with tea. Some of them, as will be observed, have cloves stuck in them.

57. Tea can be served alongside meals or with small sandwiches, delicate cakes, or macaroons as part of an afternoon tradition. If it’s served with meals and poured at the table, the hostess or server asks if anyone wants sugar and cream, then adds them accordingly. If the tea is brought to the table already poured, the sugar and cream are passed around, and guests can help themselves to what they prefer. Lemon enhances the flavor of tea and is enjoyed by most people. A dish of sliced lemon can be passed along with the cream and sugar or placed for the hostess to add to the tea. The Russians, who are dedicated tea drinkers, make their tea by putting a slice of lemon in the cup and then pouring hot tea over it. If you follow this method, the lemons should be washed, sliced very thin, and have the seeds removed. The flavor can also be enhanced by adding a few cloves to each slice of lemon, or if you want a stronger clove flavor, you can put several cloves in the teapot while brewing the tea. Fig. 7 shows slices of lemons ready to be served with tea. Some of them, as you’ll notice, have cloves stuck in them.

Lemon is almost always served with iced tea, for it adds a delightful flavor. If it is not squeezed into the glass, it should be cut into quarters or eighths lengthwise and then cut across so that small triangular pieces are formed. These are much easier to handle than whole slices.

Lemon is usually served with iced tea because it adds a great flavor. If it isn't squeezed into the glass, it should be cut into quarters or eighths lengthwise, and then cut across to create small triangular pieces. These are much easier to handle than whole slices.

58. In the serving of afternoon tea, the pouring of the tea is the main thing, and the remainder of the service simply complements this pleasant ceremony. Tiny sandwiches, small cakes, or macaroons usually accompany the tea, while such confections as candied orange peel, stuffed dates, or salted nuts are often served also. When sandwiches are used, they may be merely bread-and-butter sandwiches or they may contain marmalade or any desired filling. The principal requirement is that they be made as small and thin as possible, so that they will be extremely dainty in appearance.

58. When serving afternoon tea, pouring the tea is the main focus, and everything else is just a nice addition to this enjoyable ritual. Small sandwiches, little cakes, or macaroons usually go along with the tea, and treats like candied orange peel, stuffed dates, or salted nuts are often included too. If sandwiches are part of the service, they can be simple bread-and-butter ones or have marmalade or any filling you like. The key is that they should be made as small and thin as possible, so they look really delicate.

59. A tea cozy is a convenient device to use when tea is served from the pot. It consists of a padded cap, or cover, that may be slipped over the teapot to prevent the heat from escaping after the tea is infused. It is made of several thicknesses of material in a shape and size that will slip over the teapot easily and can then be removed when the tea is to be poured. This can be made very attractive by means of a nicely embroidered cover.

59. A tea cozy is a handy item to use when serving tea from the pot. It’s a padded cover that can be placed over the teapot to keep the heat in after the tea has steeped. It’s made from multiple layers of material, designed to fit easily over the teapot and can be removed when it’s time to pour the tea. It can look really nice with a beautifully embroidered cover.

60. Fig. 8 shows an attractive table that may be used for serving tea. The top folds over vertically, so that when the table is not in use it may be disposed of by placing it against the wall of a room. This table holds nothing except the pot containing the tea, which must be made in the kitchen and placed in the pot before it is brought to the table, the sugar and cream, the teacups, and the lemon. Sandwiches, wafers, or cakes that are to be served with the tea should be passed to the guests.

60. Fig. 8 shows a stylish table that can be used for serving tea. The top folds down vertically, allowing the table to be stored against the wall when not in use. This table holds only the teapot, which needs to be prepared in the kitchen and filled before being brought to the table, along with the sugar, cream, teacups, and lemon. Any sandwiches, wafers, or cakes meant to accompany the tea should be served to the guests.

[Illustration: FIG. 8] [Illustration: FIG. 9]

61. Fig. 9 shows a tea wagon and the equipment for making tea, with the sandwiches and cakes to be served arranged on a muffin stand, or Lazy Susan. When tea is to be made with an equipment of this kind, the water is heated in the little kettle by means of the alcohol burner. The can with the long spout contains an extra supply of alcohol with which to keep the burner filled. The tea ball, which is in the little glass, is filled with tea and the boiling water is poured over it into each cup. The ball is allowed to remain until the tea is of the desired strength, when it is removed and used for another cup, provided sufficient strength remains in the tea leaves.

61. Fig. 9 shows a tea cart and the tools for making tea, with the sandwiches and cakes arranged on a muffin stand, or Lazy Susan. When tea is made with this kind of setup, the water is heated in the small kettle using the alcohol burner. The can with the long spout holds extra alcohol to keep the burner filled. The tea ball, which is in the small glass, is filled with tea, and boiling water is poured over it into each cup. The ball stays inside until the tea reaches the desired strength, after which it is removed and can be used for another cup, as long as there's still enough strength left in the tea leaves.

The silver tea caddy at the back of the wagon contains the tea, and lemon with a fork for serving it is on a small plate near the front of the wagon. Napkins and plates for the cakes and sandwiches are on the lower part of the wagon. The napkins and plates are first passed; then the tea is served with the sandwiches, after which cakes are served.

The silver tea caddy at the back of the wagon holds the tea, and there's lemon with a fork for serving it on a small plate near the front of the wagon. Napkins and plates for the cakes and sandwiches are on the lower part of the wagon. The napkins and plates are handed out first; then the tea is served with the sandwiches, followed by the cakes.


COCOA AND CHOCOLATE

NATURE AND SELECTION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE

[Illustration: FIG. 10]

62. COCOA and CHOCOLATE are made from the fruit of the cacao, or chocolate, tree. This tree is native to Mexico, where cocoa was first used as a beverage, but it is also grown in South America and the West Indies. The fruit of this tree was named cocoa Theobroma, which means "food for the gods," because of its excellent flavor. The original natives of Mexico and Peru used cocoa in place of money. When the Spanish invaded these countries, they learned its use and took it back to Spain, where it is still a popular beverage. In many localities in Spain it became a fashionable morning drink, but it was also served at other times.

62. COCOA and CHOCOLATE come from the fruit of the cacao or chocolate tree. This tree is native to Mexico, where cocoa was first enjoyed as a drink, but it also thrives in South America and the West Indies. The fruit was named cocoa Theobroma, meaning "food for the gods," due to its wonderful flavor. The original inhabitants of Mexico and Peru used cocoa as currency. When the Spanish conquered these regions, they discovered its use and brought it back to Spain, where it remains a popular drink. In various parts of Spain, it became a trendy morning beverage but was also served at different times of the day.

63. PRODUCTION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--The fruit of the cacao tree is in the form of pods from 6 to 10 inches in length and 3 to 4 inches in diameter. These pods are filled with a white, pulpy mass in which are embedded from twenty to forty seeds about twice the size and very much the shape of kidney beans. Fig. 10 shows the three stages of the treatment through which the seeds are put before they can be used for a beverage. After they are removed from the pod, they are fermented and then dried, when they appear as at a. In this form they are packed in bags and distributed. The beans are then roasted to develop their flavor and are crushed into small pieces called cocoa nibs, as shown at b. The cocoa nibs are then ground fine, when they become almost a liquid mass because of the very large amount of fat contained in cocoa. To make the ordinary bitter chocolate used so extensively for cooking purposes, this mass is run into shallow pans, where it hardens as it cools. It is often flavored and sweetened and then forms the confection known as sweet chocolate. The application of pressure to bitter chocolate extracts considerable fat, which is known as cocoa butter and is used largely in creams and toilet preparations. The remaining material is ground into a powder, as shown at c, and becomes the commercial cocoa.

63. PRODUCTION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--The fruit of the cacao tree comes in the form of pods that are 6 to 10 inches long and 3 to 4 inches wide. These pods contain a white, pulpy substance filled with twenty to forty seeds, which are about twice the size and have a shape similar to kidney beans. Fig. 10 illustrates the three stages of processing the seeds before they can be used for a drink. Once removed from the pod, the seeds are fermented and then dried, appearing as shown at a. In this form, they are packed into bags for distribution. The beans are then roasted to bring out their flavor and crushed into small pieces called cocoa nibs, as seen at b. The cocoa nibs are ground finely until they turn into a nearly liquid mass due to the high fat content in cocoa. To produce the common bitter chocolate widely used in cooking, this mass is poured into shallow pans, where it hardens as it cools. It's often flavored and sweetened to create the treat known as sweet chocolate. Applying pressure to bitter chocolate extracts a significant amount of fat, known as cocoa butter, which is primarily used in creams and personal care products. The remaining substance is ground into a powder, as illustrated at c, becoming commercial cocoa.

To prevent the formation of a large amount of sediment in the bottom of the cup, cocoa is treated with various kinds of alkali. Some of these remain in the cocoa and are supposed to be harmful if it is taken in any quantity. The cocoas that are treated with alkali are darker in color than the others. The Dutch cocoas are considered to be the most soluble and also contain the most alkali.

To avoid a lot of sediment accumulating at the bottom of the cup, cocoa is processed with different types of alkali. Some of these substances stay in the cocoa and are thought to be harmful if consumed in large amounts. Alkali-treated cocoas are darker than the others. Dutch cocoas are regarded as the most soluble and also have the highest alkali content.

64. SELECTION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--Chocolate is usually pure in the form in which it is sold, because it does not offer much chance for adulteration. However, the volume of cocoa can be easily increased by cheaper materials, such as starch, ground cocoa shells, etc. Cocoa so adulterated should be avoided if possible. Generally the best brands, although higher in price than others, are free from adulteration, and from these a selection should be made. The particular brand of chocolate or cocoa to buy must be governed by the taste of those to whom it is to be served.

64. SELECTION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--Chocolate is usually sold in a pure form, as there's not much opportunity for it to be mixed with other substances. However, the quantity of cocoa can easily be increased with cheaper fillers like starch or ground cocoa shells. It's best to avoid cocoa that has been adulterated. Typically, the best brands, while more expensive, are free from these additions, and you should choose from them. The specific brand of chocolate or cocoa you buy should depend on the preferences of the people who will be enjoying it.


PREPARATION OF COCOA AND CHOCOLATE

65. As a beverage, cocoa probably has greater use than chocolate; still there are some who prefer the flavor of chocolate to that of cocoa. Directions for preparing beverages from both of these materials are given, with the intention that the housewife may decide for herself which one she prefers to use. For either one, any ordinary saucepan or kettle may be used, but those made of enamel or aluminum are best. Of these two materials, aluminum is the better, for milk is less liable to scorch in a vessel of this kind than in one of any other material.

65. As a drink, cocoa is probably used more than chocolate; however, some people still prefer the taste of chocolate over cocoa. Instructions for making drinks from both of these ingredients are provided, so that the homemaker can choose which one she prefers to use. For either option, any regular saucepan or kettle can be used, but those made of enamel or aluminum are the best. Of these two materials, aluminum is superior because milk is less likely to scorch in an aluminum vessel than in one made of other materials.

66. When chocolate is to be used for a beverage, the amount required varies with the strength desired. Recipes for bitter chocolate usually give the amount in squares, but no difficulty will be experienced in determining the amount, for the cakes of chocolate are marked in squares of 1 ounce each. If sweet chocolate is used, less sugar should, of course, be added to the beverage.

66. When using chocolate for a drink, the amount needed depends on how strong you want it to be. Recipes for bitter chocolate typically specify the amount in squares, but it’s easy to figure out the quantity since the chocolate bars are divided into 1-ounce squares. If you’re using sweet chocolate, you should add less sugar to the drink, of course.

67. In all but the first of the recipes that follow, it will be observed that milk is used for a part of the liquid. The quantity given makes an excellent beverage, but more or less may be used if desired. However, if the quantity of milk is changed, the quantity of water should be changed accordingly. Condensed or evaporated milk may be utilized very nicely in the making of these two beverages. Milk of this kind should, of course, be diluted, a half-pint can requiring 2 to 3 cupfuls of water. If condensed milk is used, less sugar than the recipe calls for may be employed. A few drops of vanilla added just before serving always improves the flavor of cocoa or chocolate.

67. In all the recipes that follow, except for the first, you'll notice that milk is part of the liquid. The amount given makes a great drink, but you can adjust it if you prefer. Just make sure to change the amount of water accordingly if you adjust the milk. You can also use condensed or evaporated milk quite effectively for these two drinks. Just remember to dilute this type of milk; a half-pint can needs 2 to 3 cups of water. If you use condensed milk, you can use less sugar than the recipe suggests. Adding a few drops of vanilla right before serving always enhances the flavor of cocoa or chocolate.

68. PLAIN COCOA.--The quickest and cheapest method of making cocoa is explained in the recipe that follows. It may be prepared in a saucepan and poured into the cups or it may be made in the cups themselves. To improve the flavor of cocoa made in this way, as well as add to its food value, cream should be served with it. Salt also is used to improve the flavor of all cocoa and chocolate beverages.

68. PLAIN COCOA.--The fastest and most affordable way to make cocoa is explained in the recipe below. You can prepare it in a saucepan and then pour it into cups, or you can make it directly in the cups themselves. To enhance the flavor and nutritional value of the cocoa made this way, it's recommended to serve it with cream. Adding a pinch of salt also improves the taste of all cocoa and chocolate drinks.

PLAIN COCOA

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2-1/2 Tb. cocoa
  • 2-1/2 Tb. sugar
  • Few grains of salt
  • 4 c. boiling water

Mix the cocoa, sugar, and salt, form into a paste by stirring in a little of the water, and then add the remainder of the water. Serve with cream.

Mix the cocoa, sugar, and salt, then stir in a bit of water to make a paste. Add the rest of the water afterward. Serve with cream.

69. BREAKFAST COCOA.--Delicious cocoa can be made by following the directions given in the accompanying recipe. Here milk and water are used in equal amounts. When milk is used in the preparation of this beverage, a scum of albumin is likely to form on the top of the cups unless care is taken. To prevent this, the cocoa, as soon as it is prepared, should be beaten with a rotary egg beater until a fine froth forms on top. This process is known as milling, and should always be applied whenever milk is used in the preparation of these beverages.

69. BREAKFAST COCOA.—You can make delicious cocoa by following the recipe provided. This recipe uses equal parts milk and water. When you use milk to make this drink, a layer of albumin might form on the surface of the cups unless you take care. To avoid this, as soon as the cocoa is ready, beat it with a rotary egg beater until a fine froth appears on top. This technique is called milling, and it should always be used whenever milk is involved in making these drinks.

BREAKFAST COCOA

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 2 c. milk
  • 2 Tb. cocoa
  • 2 Tb. sugar
  • Few grains of salt
  • 2 c. boiling water

Scald the milk. Mix the cocoa, sugar, and salt, form into a paste by stirring in a little of the boiling water, and then add the scalded milk and the remainder of the water. Beat with an egg beater until a froth is formed and serve at once.

Scald the milk. Mix the cocoa, sugar, and salt, then create a paste by stirring in a bit of the boiling water. After that, add the scalded milk and the rest of the water. Beat with an electric mixer until frothy and serve immediately.

70. RICH COCOA.--There are times when it is desired to serve rich cocoa, as, for instance, with a lunch that is not high in food value or with wafers at afternoon social affairs. The accompanying recipe explains how to make cocoa that will be suitable for such occasions.

70. RICH COCOA.--There are times when you want to serve rich cocoa, like during a lunch that isn't very filling or with wafers at afternoon gatherings. The recipe below shows how to make cocoa that's perfect for these occasions.

RICH COCOA

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 4 c. milk
  • 3 Tb. cocoa
  • 1/4 c. sugar
  • Few grains of salt
  • 1/2 c. boiling water

Scald the milk. Stir the cocoa, sugar, and salt into a smooth paste with the boiling water and boil for 2 or 3 minutes. Add the scalded milk, mill, and serve.

Scald the milk. Mix the cocoa, sugar, and salt into a smooth paste with the boiling water and boil for 2 or 3 minutes. Add the scalded milk, blend, and serve.

71. CREAMY COCOA.--When there is not very much milk on hand and still a rich, creamy cocoa is desired, the accompanying recipe should be tried. As will be noted, flour is used in addition to the usual ingredients. While this is accountable for the creamy consistency of the cocoa, it should be remembered that the cocoa must be cooked long enough to remove the raw, starchy flavor of the flour.

71. CREAMY COCOA.--When you don't have much milk but still want a rich, creamy cocoa, try the recipe below. You'll notice that flour is included along with the usual ingredients. While this gives the cocoa its creamy texture, remember that you need to cook it long enough to get rid of the raw, starchy taste of the flour.

CREAMY COCOA

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 4 Tb. cocoa
  • 1 Tb. flour
  • 4 Tb. sugar
  • Few grains of salt
  • 2 c. boiling water
  • 2 c. milk

Mix the cocoa, flour, sugar, and salt, and stir into a paste with some of the water. Add the rest of the water, cook for 5 minutes, and then add the milk, which has been scalded. Mill and serve.

Mix the cocoa, flour, sugar, and salt, and stir into a paste with some of the water. Add the rest of the water, cook for 5 minutes, and then add the scalded milk. Blend and serve.

72. HOT CHOCOLATE.--Very good hot chocolate can be made by following the directions here given. As will be noted, this recipe is similar to several of those given for cocoa, except that chocolate is substituted for the cocoa. It may therefore be used on any occasion when cocoa would be served. It is especially delicious when served with a tablespoonful or two of whipped cream.

72. HOT CHOCOLATE.--You can make really good hot chocolate by following the directions provided here. As you’ll see, this recipe is similar to several for cocoa, except that chocolate is used instead of cocoa. So, it can be enjoyed on any occasion when cocoa would be served. It’s especially delicious when topped with one or two tablespoons of whipped cream.

HOT CHOCOLATE

  • 2 c. milk
  • 1-1/2 sq. unsweetened chocolate
  • 1/4 c. sugar
  • Few grains of salt
  • 2 c. boiling water

Scald the milk. Melt the chocolate over the fire, add the sugar and salt, and gradually stir in the boiling water. Place over the fire, let boil for 2 or 3 minutes, and add the scalded milk. Mill and serve plain or with whipped cream.

Scald the milk. Melt the chocolate over the heat, add the sugar and salt, and gradually stir in the boiling water. Place it over the heat, let it boil for 2 or 3 minutes, and then add the scalded milk. Blend and serve plain or with whipped cream.

73. ICED COCOA OR CHOCOLATE.--An excellent warm-weather beverage consists of cold cocoa or cold chocolate served either with or without sweetened whipped cream. Prepare the cocoa or chocolate according to any of the recipes already given and then allow it to cool. Fill glasses with cracked ice, pour the cocoa or chocolate over it, and serve either with or without sweetened whipped cream.

73. ICED COCOA OR CHOCOLATE.--A fantastic drink for hot weather is cold cocoa or cold chocolate, served either with or without sweetened whipped cream. Make the cocoa or chocolate using any of the recipes provided earlier, then let it cool. Fill glasses with crushed ice, pour the cocoa or chocolate over it, and serve with or without sweetened whipped cream.

74. LEFT-OVER COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--As the materials used in the preparation of cocoa and chocolate are rather expensive, not the slightest quantity of these beverages that remains after serving should be wasted. However, a small amount of chocolate usually has to be added so that it will have a stronger flavor. It may then be thickened with corn starch for chocolate blanc mange or with gelatine for chocolate jelly. Either of these served with whipped cream or a sauce of some kind makes an excellent dessert. Chocolate bread pudding may also be flavored with these left-over beverages.

74. LEFT-OVER COCOA AND CHOCOLATE.--Since the ingredients used to make cocoa and chocolate are relatively pricey, not a single drop of these drinks that remains after serving should go to waste. However, you might need to add a bit more chocolate to enhance the flavor. It can then be thickened with corn starch for chocolate panna cotta or with gelatin for chocolate jelly. Either option, served with whipped cream or some sort of sauce, makes for a fantastic dessert. You can also use these leftover drinks to add flavor to chocolate bread pudding.

It is also a good plan to utilize left-over cocoa or chocolate for flavoring purposes. However, additional cocoa or chocolate and sugar should first be added to it, and the mixture should then be boiled to a sirup. When so prepared it may be used whenever a chocolate flavoring is desired, such as for flavoring other beverages, cake icings, custards, sauces for desserts, and ice creams.

It’s also a great idea to use leftover cocoa or chocolate for flavoring. However, you should first add more cocoa or chocolate and sugar, and then boil the mixture to create a syrup. Once prepared, it can be used whenever you want a chocolate flavor, like for flavoring other drinks, cake frostings, custards, dessert sauces, and ice creams.


SERVING COCOA AND CHOCOLATE

75. When cocoa or chocolate is used to accompany meals, it is served in the usual sized teacup. However, when either of these beverages is served at receptions or instead of tea in the afternoon, regular chocolate cups, which hold only about half as much as teacups, are used. An attractive chocolate service to use for special occasions is shown in Fig. 11. The cocoa or chocolate is prepared in the kitchen, but is served to the guests from a chocolate pot, such as the one shown, in tall cups that match the chocolate pot in design. If such a service is not available, the cocoa or chocolate may be poured into the cups in the kitchen and then brought to the guests on a tray.

75. When cocoa or chocolate is served with meals, it's typically presented in a standard teacup. However, at receptions or as a substitute for afternoon tea, it's served in regular chocolate cups that hold about half the amount of a teacup. An appealing chocolate service for special occasions is illustrated in Fig. 11. The cocoa or chocolate is made in the kitchen, but it is served to guests from a chocolate pot, like the one shown, in tall cups that match the design of the pot. If this type of service isn't available, the cocoa or chocolate can be poured into the cups in the kitchen and then taken to the guests on a tray.

[Illustration: FIG. 11]

Besides sugar, which is generally added in the preparation of cocoa and chocolate, cream usually accompanies these beverages, especially when they are made without milk or with only a little. If the cream is whipped and slightly sweetened, a spoonful or two will be sufficient to render the beverage delightful. In case no cream is on hand, marshmallows make a very good substitute. One of these should be placed in the bottom of each cup and the hot beverage poured over it. The marshmallow softens and rises to the top. When marshmallows are to be added to cocoa, less sugar should be used in its preparation.

Besides sugar, which is usually added when making cocoa and chocolate, cream often goes with these drinks, especially when they’re made without milk or with just a little. If the cream is whipped and slightly sweetened, a spoonful or two is enough to make the drink delightful. If you don’t have any cream, marshmallows are a great substitute. Just put one at the bottom of each cup and pour the hot beverage over it. The marshmallow will soften and float to the top. When adding marshmallows to cocoa, use less sugar in the preparation.


NON-STIMULATING BEVERAGES

CEREAL BEVERAGES

76. NON-STIMULATING BEVERAGES are those which contain neither stimulant nor alcohol. They are the ones usually depended on to carry nutrition into the body and to provide the necessary refreshment. In this class of beverages come the various cereal beverages, fruit drinks, soft drinks, and milk-and-egg drinks. With the exception of the cereal beverages, these drinks are of a very refreshing nature, for they are served as cold as possible and they contain materials that make them very pleasing to the taste. Most of them can be prepared in the home at much less cost than they can be purchased commercially prepared or at soda fountains; so it is well for the housewife to be familiar with their nature and their preparation.

76. NON-STIMULATING BEVERAGES are those that contain neither stimulants nor alcohol. They are typically relied upon to deliver nutrition to the body and provide necessary refreshment. This category includes various cereal beverages, fruit drinks, soft drinks, and milk-and-egg drinks. With the exception of cereal beverages, these drinks are quite refreshing, as they are served as cold as possible and include ingredients that make them very enjoyable to taste. Most of them can be made at home for much less than the cost of buying them commercially or at soda fountains; therefore, it's beneficial for the homemaker to know about their characteristics and how to prepare them.

77. CEREAL BEVERAGES, as the name implies, are made from cereals. Of these, the cereal coffees are perhaps the most common. They contain nothing that is harmful, and are slightly beneficial in that they assist in giving the body some of the necessary liquid. However, they have absolutely no food value and are therefore of no importance in the diet except to take the place of stimulating beverages that are likely to injure those who drink them. They are made of cereals to which sugar or molasses is added, and the whole is then baked until the cereals brown and the sugar caramelizes, the combination producing a flavor much like that of coffee. Plain roasted wheat or bran can be used very well as a substitute in the making of these beverages. In the parts of the country where rye is extensively grown, it is roasted in the oven until it is an even brown in color. It is then used almost exclusively by some persons to make rye coffee, a beverage that closely resembles coffee in flavor.

77. CEREAL BEVERAGES, as the name suggests, are made from grains. Among these, cereal coffees are probably the most popular. They don’t contain anything harmful and are somewhat helpful because they provide the body with some needed liquid. However, they have zero nutritional value and are therefore not important for the diet, except as a replacement for stimulating drinks that might harm those who consume them. They are made from grains with added sugar or molasses, and then baked until the grains are browned and the sugar caramelizes, creating a flavor similar to coffee. Plain roasted wheat or bran can be effectively used as a substitute in making these drinks. In regions where rye is widely cultivated, it is roasted in the oven until it reaches a consistent brown color. Some people then use it almost exclusively to make rye coffee, a drink that closely resembles coffee in taste.

78. The instantaneous cereal beverages are made by drawing all the flavor possible out of the material by means of water. The water is then evaporated and the hard substance that remains is ground until it is almost a powder. When water is added again, this substance becomes soluble instantly. Instantaneous coffee is prepared in the same way. The way in which to use these beverages depends, of course, on the kind selected, but no difficulty will be experienced in their preparation, for explicit directions are always found in or on all packages containing them.

78. The instant cereal drinks are made by extracting all the flavor from the ingredients using water. The water is then evaporated, leaving behind a solid that is ground down to a near-powder form. When you add water again, this substance dissolves instantly. Instant coffee is made the same way. How you use these drinks depends on the specific type you choose, but you won’t have any trouble preparing them, as clear instructions are always included on or in all the packages.


FRUIT BEVERAGES

INGREDIENTS FOR FRUIT BEVERAGES

79. FRUIT BEVERAGES are those which contain fruit and fruit juices for their foundation. As there are many kinds of fruit that can be used for this purpose, almost endless variety can be obtained in the making of these beverages. One of the important features is that a great deal of nourishment can be incorporated into them by the materials used. In addition, the acids of fruits are slightly antiseptic and are stimulating to the digestion as well as beneficial to the blood.

79. FRUIT BEVERAGES are drinks made with fruit and fruit juices as their base. Since there are many types of fruit that can be used, there’s almost limitless variety in creating these beverages. One key aspect is that they can be packed with nutrition from the ingredients. Plus, the acids in fruits have mild antiseptic properties, stimulate digestion, and are good for the blood.

80. Lemon juice, when mixed with other fruit juices, seems to intensify the flavor. Because of this fact, practically all the recipes for fruit beverages include this juice as one of the ingredients. The combination of pineapple and lemon yields a greater quantity of flavor for beverages, ices, etc. than any other two fruit flavors. Juice may be extracted from all fruits easily. To obtain lemon juice for a fruit beverage, first soften the fruit by pressing it between the hand and a hard surface, such as a table top, or merely soften it with the hands. Then cut it in two, crosswise, and drill the juice out, as shown in Fig. 12, by placing each half over a drill made of glass or aluminum and turning it around and around until all the juice is extracted. To remove the seeds and pulp, strain the juice through a wire strainer. The juice from oranges and grapefruit, if they are not too large, may be extracted in the same way.

80. Lemon juice, when combined with other fruit juices, seems to enhance the flavor. Because of this, nearly all recipes for fruit drinks feature this juice as an ingredient. The mix of pineapple and lemon provides a stronger flavor for drinks, sorbets, and other items than any other two fruit flavors. Juice can be easily extracted from all fruits. To get lemon juice for a fruit drink, first soften the fruit by pressing it between your hand and a hard surface, like a tabletop, or just by using your hands. Then cut it in half, crosswise, and squeeze out the juice, as shown in Fig. 12, by placing each half over a juicer made of glass or aluminum and twisting it until all the juice is extracted. To remove any seeds and pulp, strain the juice through a wire strainer. The juice from oranges and grapefruits, if they're not too large, can be extracted in the same way.

81. It is not always necessary to extract juices from fresh fruit for fruit beverages; in fact, juice from canned fruit or juice especially canned for beverage making is the kind most frequently employed. For instance, in the canning of fruit there is often a large quantity of juice left over that most persons use for jelly. It is a good plan to can this juice just as it is and then use it with lemon juice or other fruit juices for these beverages. Also, juices that remain after all the fruit has been used from a can may be utilized in the same way, no matter what the kind or the quantity. In fact, unless otherwise stated in the recipes that follow, the fruit juices given, with the exception of orange and lemon juice, are those taken from canned fruit or juices canned especially for beverage making. These juices also lend themselves admirably to various other uses, for, as has already been learned, they are used in ices, gelatine desserts, salad dressing, pudding sauces, etc. Therefore, no fruit juice should ever be wasted.

81. You don’t always need to squeeze fresh fruit for fruit drinks; actually, juice from canned fruit or juice specifically canned for making beverages is used most often. For example, when fruit is canned, there’s usually a lot of juice left over that many people use for making jelly. A smart idea is to can this juice just as it is and then mix it with lemon juice or other fruit juices for these drinks. Additionally, the juices left after all the fruit has been taken out of a can can be used in the same way, regardless of the type or amount. In fact, unless the recipes that follow indicate otherwise, the fruit juices mentioned—aside from orange and lemon juice—come from canned fruit or juices canned specifically for beverage making. These juices are also great for various other uses, as we’ve already noted, such as in sorbets, gelatin desserts, salad dressings, pudding sauces, etc. So, no fruit juice should ever go to waste.

[Illustration: FIG. 12]

82. The clear-fruit beverages become more attractive when they are garnished in some way. A slice of lemon, orange, or pineapple, or a fresh strawberry put into each glass improves the flavor and makes the beverage more appetizing. Red, yellow, and green cherries may be bought in bottles and used for such purposes. As these are usually preserved in wine and are artificially colored, many persons object to their use. A good substitute for them is candied cherries. These can be bought from any confectioner and do very well when a red decoration is desired.

82. Clear-fruit drinks look more appealing when they're garnished. Adding a slice of lemon, orange, or pineapple, or a fresh strawberry to each glass enhances the flavor and makes the drink more inviting. Red, yellow, and green cherries can be purchased in bottles for this purpose. However, since they are usually preserved in wine and artificially colored, many people prefer not to use them. A great alternative is candied cherries. You can buy these from any candy store, and they work well when you want a red decoration.


PREPARATION OF FRUIT BEVERAGES

83. LEMONADE.--Next to water, no other drink is so refreshing nor quenches the thirst to so great an extent as lemonade. Lemonade is suitable for many occasions, and as lemons can be purchased at any time of the year it can be made at almost any season. The lemon sirup prepared for this beverage may be used as desired, for if it is put in a cool place it will keep for a long time. The more the sirup is boiled down, the better will it keep. A tablespoonful or two of glucose or corn sirup added to such mixtures when they are boiled will help to keep them from crystallizing when they stand.

83. LEMONADE.--Next to water, there’s no drink as refreshing or as thirst-quenching as lemonade. It’s perfect for many occasions, and since lemons are available year-round, you can make it in almost any season. The lemon syrup made for this drink can be used whenever you want, and if stored in a cool place, it will last for a long time. The more you reduce the syrup by boiling, the longer it will keep. Adding a tablespoon or two of glucose or corn syrup to the mixture while boiling will help prevent it from crystallizing when it sits.

LEMONADE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 c. sugar
  • 1 qt. water
  • 1/2 c. lemon juice

Make a sirup by boiling the sugar and water for a few minutes, and set aside to cool. Add the lemon juice and then dilute with ice water to suit the taste. Serve in glasses and garnish each one with a slice of lemon or a red cherry.

Make a syrup by boiling sugar and water for a few minutes, then set it aside to cool. Add the lemon juice, then dilute it with ice water to taste. Serve in glasses and garnish each one with a slice of lemon or a red cherry.

84. ORANGEADE.--While not so acid in flavor as lemonade, orangeade is also a delightful drink. On warm days, drinks of this kind should take the place of the hot ones that are generally used during the cold weather.

84. ORANGEADE.--Although it's not as tart as lemonade, orangeade is a refreshing drink. On warm days, these types of drinks should replace the hot ones that are usually enjoyed during colder weather.

ORANGEADE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 3/4 c. sugar
  • 1 qt. water
  • 1/2 c. orange juice
  • 3 Tb. lemon juice

Make a sirup of the sugar and 1 cupful of the water. Allow this to become cool and then add the fruit juices and the remaining water. Pour into glasses and garnish each glass with a slice of orange, a red cherry, or a fresh strawberry.

Make a syrup using the sugar and 1 cup of water. Let it cool, then mix in the fruit juices and the rest of the water. Pour into glasses and top each glass with a slice of orange, a red cherry, or a fresh strawberry.

85. GRAPE LEMONADE.--An excellent combination in the way of a beverage is lemonade and grape juice. Besides adding flavor to the lemonade, the grape juice gives it a delightful color.

85. GRAPE LEMONADE.--A great drink combination is lemonade and grape juice. In addition to enhancing the flavor of the lemonade, the grape juice adds a lovely color.

GRAPE LEMONADE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 qt. lemonade
  • 1 c. grape juice

Prepare the lemonade in the manner explained in Art. 83. Add the grape juice to the lemonade and stir well. Serve ice cold in glasses.

Prepare the lemonade as described in Art. 83. Mix the grape juice into the lemonade and stir thoroughly. Serve it ice cold in glasses.

86. PINEAPPLE LEMONADE.--Another variation of lemonade is produced when pineapple juice is added to it. To garnish this beverage, a slice of lemon and a spoonful of grated pineapple are generally used. This pineapple beverage is delightful with wafers or small cakes as refreshments for informal social affairs during hot weather.

86. PINEAPPLE LEMONADE.--Another twist on lemonade is created by adding pineapple juice. To garnish this drink, you typically use a slice of lemon and a spoonful of grated pineapple. This pineapple drink pairs wonderfully with wafers or small cakes as refreshments for casual gatherings during warm weather.

PINEAPPLE LEMONADE

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1 c. water
  • 3/4 c. sugar
  • 3 c. ice water
  • 1 c. juice from canned pineapple
  • 3 lemons

Make a sirup of the water and sugar, and set aside to cool. Add the ice water, the pineapple juice, and the juice of the lemons. Stir well, strain, and serve. Garnish with a slice of lemon and a spoonful of grated pineapple added to each glass.

Make a syrup with the water and sugar, then let it cool. Add the ice water, pineapple juice, and lemon juice. Mix well, strain, and serve. Garnish with a slice of lemon and a spoonful of grated pineapple in each glass.

87. MINT JULEP.--Mint drinks are not served so often as some of the other fruit beverages, but those with whom they find favor will undoubtedly be delighted with mint julep prepared according to the following recipe:

87. MINT JULEP.--Mint drinks aren't served as frequently as some of the other fruit beverages, but those who enjoy them will surely be pleased with a mint julep made using the following recipe:

MINT JULEP

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 4 sprigs mint
  • 1 c. sugar
  • 1 qt. water
  • 1 c. red cherry juice
  • 1/2 c. pineapple juice
  • 1/2 c. orange juice
  • 1/4 c. lemon juice

Crush the mint with the sugar, using a potato masher or a large spoon. Add the water and fruit juices and strain. Serve over crushed ice and garnish the glasses with sprigs of mint. Tall, narrow glasses are especially attractive for serving this drink.

Crush the mint with the sugar using a potato masher or a big spoon. Add the water and fruit juices, then strain. Serve over crushed ice and garnish the glasses with mint sprigs. Tall, narrow glasses look especially nice for serving this drink.

88. FRUIT NECTAR.--The term nectar was used by the early Greeks to mean the drink of the gods. Now it is often applied to an especially delightful beverage. Pineapple combined with lemon is always good, but when orange juice is also used, an excellent nectar is the result.

88. FRUIT NECTAR.--The word nectar was used by the ancient Greeks to refer to the drink of the gods. Today, it’s often used to describe a particularly enjoyable beverage. Pineapple mixed with lemon is always tasty, but adding orange juice creates an amazing nectar.

FRUIT NECTAR

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 3/4 c. sugar
  • 2 c. water
  • 1-1/2 c. orange juice
  • 1 c. pineapple juice
  • 1/2 c. lemon juice

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and then cool. Add the fruit juices, strain, and serve over cracked ice.

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes, then let it cool. Add the fruit juices, strain it, and serve over crushed ice.

89. RED-RASPBERRY NECTAR.--A beverage that is pleasing to the eye, as well as delightful to the taste, can be made by combining red-raspberry juice and lemon juice with the required amount of sugar and water. The juice from canned raspberries may be used for this drink.

89. RED-RASPBERRY NECTAR.--A drink that looks good and tastes great can be made by mixing red raspberry juice and lemon juice with the right amount of sugar and water. You can use juice from canned raspberries for this beverage.

RED-RASPBERRY NECTAR

(
Sufficient to Serve Six
)
  • 1/2 c. sugar
  • 2 c. water
  • 1/2 c. lemon juice
  • 1-1/2 c. red raspberry juice

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and allow the sirup to become cool. Then add the fruit juices, strain, and serve over cracked ice.

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and let the syrup cool. Then add the fruit juices, strain, and serve over crushed ice.

90. SPICE CUP.--Occasionally a spice drink seems to be just what is desired. When this is the case, the directions given in the accompanying recipe for spice cup should be followed.

90. SPICE CUP.--Sometimes a spice drink is exactly what you need. When that happens, follow the instructions in the recipe for spice cup included here.

SPICE CUP

(
Sufficient to Serve Eight
)
  • 1-1/2 c. sugar
  • 1-1/2 pt water
  • 12 cloves
  • 2-in. stick cinnamon
  • 3 lemons
  • 4 oranges
  • 2 drops oil of wintergreen

Boil the sugar, water, and spices together for 5 minutes and allow the sirup to become cool. Add the juice of the lemons and oranges and the wintergreen oil and serve in glasses over cracked ice. Garnish each glass with slices of orange and lemon or a piece of preserved ginger.

Boil the sugar, water, and spices together for 5 minutes, then let the syrup cool. Stir in the juice of the lemons and oranges, along with the wintergreen oil, and serve in glasses over crushed ice. Garnish each glass with slices of orange and lemon or a piece of candied ginger.

91. FRUIT PUNCH.--As fruit beverages are very often served at small receptions, club meetings, or parties, a recipe that will make a sufficiently large quantity is often desired. The amounts mentioned in the following recipe will make enough fruit punch to serve thirty to forty persons if punch glasses are used, or sixteen to twenty if ordinary drinking glasses are used.

91. FRUIT PUNCH.--Since fruit drinks are commonly served at small gatherings, club meetings, or parties, a recipe that yields a large enough quantity is usually needed. The amounts listed in the following recipe will make enough fruit punch to serve thirty to forty people if punch glasses are used, or sixteen to twenty if regular drinking glasses are used.

FRUIT PUNCH

  • 2-1/2 c. sugar
  • 1 qt. water
  • 2 c. fruit juice (raspberry, strawberry, or cherry)
  • 6 oranges
  • 6 lemons
  • 1 pt. can grated pineapple
  • 1 c. strong black tea (strained)
  • 1 qt. carbonated water

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and allow the sirup to become cool. Then add the fruit juice, the juice of the oranges and lemons, the pineapple, and the tea. Just before serving, add the carbonated water, which lends a sparkling appearance and a snappy taste to a beverage of this kind. Pour over cracked ice into sherbet or punch glasses or into tall narrow ones.

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and let the syrup cool. Then add the fruit juice, the juice of the oranges and lemons, the pineapple, and the tea. Just before serving, add the carbonated water, which gives a sparkling look and a refreshing taste to this drink. Pour over crushed ice into sherbet or punch glasses, or into tall narrow ones.

92. GINGER-ALE PUNCH.--As most persons like the flavor of ginger ale, punch containing ginger ale is always a favorite when a large company of persons is to be served. The quantity that the accompanying recipe makes will serve twenty to twenty-five persons if punch glasses are used, or ten to twelve persons if drinking glasses are used.

92. GINGER-ALE PUNCH.--Since most people enjoy the taste of ginger ale, a punch made with ginger ale is always a hit when serving a large group. The amount produced by the recipe below will serve twenty to twenty-five people if using punch glasses, or ten to twelve people if using drinking glasses.

GINGER-ALE PUNCH

  • 1-1/2 c. sugar
  • 1 pt. water
  • 2 lemons
  • 3 oranges
  • 1 pt. grape juice
  • 4 sprigs fresh mint (crushed)
  • 1 lemon sliced thin
  • 1 qt. ginger ale

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and allow the sirup to become cool. Drill the juice from the lemons and oranges and add this with the grape juice, crushed mint, and sliced lemon to the sirup. Just before using, add the ginger ale and serve over cracked ice.

Boil the sugar and water for 2 minutes and let the syrup cool. Squeeze the juice from the lemons and oranges, then add this along with the grape juice, crushed mint, and sliced lemon to the syrup. Just before serving, add the ginger ale and pour over crushed ice.


SOFT DRINKS

93. A class of very popular non-stimulating beverages are the SOFT DRINKS sold at the soda fountains. Many of them can also be bought in bottles and so may be purchased and served at home. These drinks really consist of carbonated water and a flavoring material that is either prepared chemically and colored or made of fruit extracts. Sometimes ice cream is added, and the drink is then called ice-cream soda.

93. A group of widely enjoyed non-caffeinated drinks is the SOFT DRINKS sold at soda fountains. Many of these can also be purchased in bottles, allowing them to be served at home. These beverages typically consist of carbonated water and a flavoring agent that is either chemically made and colored or derived from fruit extracts. Occasionally, ice cream is added, and the drink is then referred to as ice-cream soda.

94. Soft drinks include phosphates, ginger ale, coca cola, birch beer, root beer, and various other drinks called mashes, sours, and freezes. While these are pleasing to the taste and have the advantage of being ready to drink when prepared, it is advisable not to indulge in them too frequently, because excessive use of them is liable to affect the system. Besides, beverages that are just as satisfactory as these so far as flavor is concerned and that are made of much better material can be prepared at home at far less cost. With these drinks, as with other commercially prepared articles of food, the cost of preparation and service in addition to the cost of materials must be paid for by the consumer.

94. Soft drinks include phosphates, ginger ale, Coca-Cola, birch beer, root beer, and various other drinks called mashes, sours, and freezes. While these are enjoyable to drink and are conveniently ready to consume, it's best not to have them too often, as excessive consumption can negatively impact your health. Moreover, there are beverages that taste just as good and are made from much better ingredients that you can make at home for a lot less money. With these drinks, as with other commercially prepared food products, the consumer has to cover the costs of preparation and service in addition to the price of the ingredients.


NOURISHING BEVERAGES

95. Many times it is necessary or desirable to administer food in the form of liquid. When this is to be done, as much nourishment as possible should generally be incorporated into the beverage. To meet such a need, the following recipes are presented. In each case, the quantities mentioned make a drink sufficient for only one person, so that if more than one are to be served the amounts should be multiplied by the number desired. The food materials used in these drinks are easily digested, and the beverages are comparatively high in food value.

95. Often, it's necessary or preferable to provide food in liquid form. When doing this, it's important to include as much nutrition as possible in the drink. To accommodate this need, the following recipes are provided. Each recipe makes enough for just one person, so if you're serving more than one person, you'll need to multiply the amounts by the number of servings required. The ingredients used in these drinks are easy to digest, and the beverages are relatively high in nutritional value.

96. At most soda fountains, these nourishing drinks are offered for sale, so that if one does not desire the work of preparation, they may be obtained at such places. However, as practically all the ingredients are materials used in the home and are therefore nearly always on hand in most households, drinks of this kind may be prepared at home at much less cost than when purchased already made. The main thing to remember in their preparation is that the ingredients should be as cold as possible and that the beverage should be cold when served.

96. Most soda fountains sell these refreshing drinks, so if you don’t want to make them yourself, you can get them there. However, since almost all the ingredients are things you usually have at home, you can make these drinks yourself for a lot less money than buying them pre-made. The main thing to keep in mind when making them is that the ingredients should be as cold as possible and that the drink should be served cold.

97. The beverages containing eggs may be made in more than one way. They may be mixed in a bowl or an enamelware dish with a rounded bottom and then beaten with a rotary egg beater, or they may be mixed in a metal shaker designed especially for this purpose and then shaken thoroughly in that. In drinks of this kind, the point to remember is that the eggs should be beaten or shaken until they are light and foamy.

97. Drinks with eggs can be prepared in several ways. You can mix them in a bowl or an enamel dish with a rounded bottom and then beat them with a rotary egg beater, or you can mix them in a metal shaker made specifically for this purpose and shake them well. The key thing to remember with these drinks is that the eggs should be beaten or shaken until they are light and frothy.

98. CHOCOLATE SIRUP.--While chocolate sirup is not a beverage in itself, it is used to such an extent in beverages, as well as an accompaniment to numerous desserts, that it is well for the housewife to know how to prepare it. It may be kept an indefinite length of time if it is put into a glass jar and sealed. Here, as in the preparation of other sirups, a tablespoonful or two of corn sirup or glucose will help to keep the sirup from crystallizing.

98. CHOCOLATE SYRUP.--Although chocolate syrup isn’t a drink on its own, it’s widely used in drinks and as a topping for many desserts, so it’s useful for anyone to know how to make it. It can last indefinitely if stored in a glass jar and sealed properly. As with other syrups, adding a tablespoon or two of corn syrup or glucose will help prevent it from crystallizing.

CHOCOLATE SIRUP
  • 4 sq. chocolate
  • 1 c. water
  • 3/4 c. sugar

Melt the chocolate in a saucepan, stir in the water, and add the sugar. Boil until a thick sirup is formed.

Melt the chocolate in a saucepan, mix in the water, and add the sugar. Bring to a boil until a thick syrup forms.

99. PLAIN MILK SHAKE.--A pleasant variation for milk is the plain milk shake here given. Even those who are not fond of milk and find it hard to take like it when it is prepared in this way.

99. PLAIN MILK SHAKE.--A nice twist on regular milk is the plain milk shake described here. Even people who usually don’t like milk and struggle to drink it enjoy it when it’s made this way.

PLAIN MILK SHAKE
  • 1 c. milk
  • 2 tsp. sugar
  • Few drops of vanilla
  • Dash of nutmeg

Beat all the ingredients together with an egg beater or shake well in a shaker and serve in a glass with cracked ice.

Beat all the ingredients together with an egg beater or shake well in a shaker and serve in a glass with crushed ice.

100. EGG MILK SHAKE.--The simplest form of egg drink is the egg milk shake explained in the accompanying recipe. This is an extremely nutritious drink and is often served to invalids and persons who must have liquid nourishment.

100. EGG MILK SHAKE.--The simplest type of egg drink is the egg milk shake described in the recipe below. This is a highly nutritious drink and is often given to those who are ill or need liquid nourishment.

EGG MILK SHAKE
  • 3/4 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 1 Tb. sugar
  • Pinch of salt
  • Few drops of vanilla

Mix all the ingredients and beat the mixture with a rotary beater or shake it in a shaker. Serve in a glass over cracked ice.

Mix all the ingredients and whip the mixture with a hand mixer or shake it in a shaker. Serve in a glass over crushed ice.

101. EGG CHOCOLATE.--The addition of chocolate to an egg milk shake improves it very much and makes a drink called egg chocolate.

101. EGG CHOCOLATE.--Adding chocolate to an egg milkshake greatly enhances it and creates a drink known as egg chocolate.

EGG CHOCOLATE
  • 3/4 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 2 Tb. chocolate sirup
  • Few drops of vanilla
  • Pinch of salt

Mix all the materials and beat with an egg beater or shake thoroughly in a shaker. Serve in a glass with cracked ice.

Mix all the ingredients and beat with an electric mixer or shake well in a shaker. Serve in a glass over crushed ice.

102. CHOCOLATE MALTED MILK.--A preparation that is much used in nourishing drinks and that furnishes a great deal of nutrition is malted milk. This is made from cow's milk and is blended by a scientific process with malted grains. It comes in powder form and may be purchased in bottles of various sizes. It is well to keep a good brand of malted milk on hand, as there are various uses to which it can be put.

102. CHOCOLATE MALTED MILK.--A popular ingredient in nutritional drinks that offers plenty of nourishment is malted milk. This is made from cow's milk and is combined through a scientific process with malted grains. It comes in powder form and can be bought in bottles of different sizes. It's a good idea to keep a reliable brand of malted milk available, as it has various uses.

CHOCOLATE MALTED MILK

  • 3/4 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 2 Tb. malted milk
  • 2 Tb. chocolate sirup
  • Few drops of vanilla
  • Pinch of salt

Mix and shake in a shaker or beat with a rotary egg beater. Serve in a glass with cracked ice.

Mix and shake in a shaker or beat with an electric mixer. Serve in a glass filled with crushed ice.

103. ORANGE EGG NOG.--The accompanying recipe for egg nog requires orange for its flavoring, but any fruit juice may be substituted for the orange if desired. Pineapple and apricot juices are exceptionally good.

103. ORANGE EGG NOG.--The recipe for egg nog included here uses orange for flavor, but you can replace the orange with any fruit juice if you want. Pineapple and apricot juices work especially well.

ORANGE EGG NOG

  • 1/4 c. cream
  • 1/4 c. milk
  • 1 egg
  • 1 Tb. sugar
  • 2 oranges

Mix the cream, milk, egg, and sugar, beat well with an egg beater, and continue beating while adding the juice of the oranges. Serve in a glass over crushed ice.

Mix the cream, milk, egg, and sugar, and beat well with an electric mixer. Keep mixing while you add the juice from the oranges. Serve in a glass over crushed ice.

104. FOAMY EGG NOG.--An egg nog can be made foamy and light by separating the eggs and beating the yolks and whites separately. Either cream or milk may be used for this drink, and it may be flavored with vanilla or fruit juice, as preferred. A small piece of red jelly beaten into the egg white makes this drink very attractive; or, jelly may be used as a flavoring and beaten with the ingredients.

104. FOAMY EGG NOG.--You can make egg nog foamy and light by separating the eggs and beating the yolks and whites separately. You can use either cream or milk for this drink, and you can flavor it with vanilla or fruit juice, depending on your preference. A small piece of red jelly mixed into the egg white makes this drink look very appealing; alternatively, jelly can be used as a flavoring and whipped in with the ingredients.

FOAMY EGG NOG

  • 2 eggs
  • 1 Tb. sugar
  • 1/2 c. cream or milk
  • 2 Tb. fruit juice or 1/2 tsp. vanilla

Separate the yolks and whites of the eggs. Mix the yolks with the sugar, cream or milk, and the fruit juice or vanilla and beat thoroughly. Beat the whites stiff and fold into the first mixture, retaining a tablespoonful of the beaten white. Pour into a tall glass, put the remaining white on top, and serve.

Separate the egg yolks and whites. Mix the yolks with the sugar, cream or milk, and the fruit juice or vanilla, and beat well. Whip the whites until stiff and gently fold them into the first mixture, saving a tablespoon of the beaten white. Pour it into a tall glass, place the remaining white on top, and serve.


BEVERAGES


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) What is a beverage?

What’s a beverage?

(2) What does boiling do to: (a) hard water? (b) impure water?

(2) What does boiling do to: (a) hard water? (b) impure water?

(3) What is the value of beverages in the diet?

(3) What role do beverages play in our diet?

(4) Mention and define the three classes of beverages.

(4) Name and define the three types of beverages.

(5) (a) What are caffeine, theine, and theobromine? (b) Where is each found? (c) What effect do they have on the human body?

(5) (a) What are caffeine, theine, and theobromine? (b) Where can each of them be found? (c) What impact do they have on the human body?

(6) (a) Where is tannic acid found? (b) What effect does it have on the human body?

(6) (a) Where can tannic acid be found? (b) What impact does it have on the human body?

(7) Tell briefly about the preparation of coffee for the market.

(7) Briefly explain how coffee is prepared for the market.

(8) How should coffee be bought?

(8) How should you buy coffee?

(9) What are the general proportions of coffee and liquid used in the making of coffee?

(9) What are the usual ratios of coffee to water when making coffee?

(10) What use can be made of left-over coffee?

(10) What can you do with leftover coffee?

(11) Tell briefly about the preparation of black and green tea for the market.

(11) Briefly explain how black and green tea is prepared for the market.

(12) What points should be observed in the selection of tea?

(12) What factors should be considered when choosing tea?

(13) What general proportions of tea and water are used for the making of tea?

(13) What are the typical proportions of tea and water used to make tea?

(14) Tell briefly about the preparation of cocoa and chocolate for the market.

(14) Briefly explain how cocoa and chocolate are prepared for the market.

(15) What advantage have cocoa and chocolate over tea and coffee as. articles of food?

(15) What benefits do cocoa and chocolate have compared to tea and coffee as food items?

(16) What use can be made of left-over cocoa and chocolate?

(16) What can you do with leftover cocoa and chocolate?

(17) (a) How are cereal coffees made? (b) Of what value are they?

(17) (a) How are cereal coffees made? (b) What are their benefits?

(18) Of what value are fruit beverages?

(18) What are the benefits of fruit drinks?

(19) What uses can be made of left-over fruit juices?

(19) What can you do with leftover fruit juices?

(20) What good use can be made of nourishing beverages?

(20) How can we make good use of healthy drinks?






THE PLANNING OF MEALS

NECESSITY FOR CAREFUL MEAL PLANNING

1. As every housewife realizes, the feeding of the members of her family places upon her serious and important responsibilities. While she deserves and receives credit for their good health, the blame for much of their ill health falls upon her, too. The reason for this is that illness is due in a greater measure to wrong food than to any other single factor; and even if improper diet is not directly responsible for ill health, it certainly lowers the bodily resistance and thus makes a person susceptible to disease.

1. Every homemaker knows that feeding her family comes with significant responsibilities. While she deserves recognition for keeping them healthy, she also bears much of the blame when they’re not. This is mainly because poor nutrition contributes more to sickness than any other single cause; even if a bad diet isn't the direct reason for health issues, it definitely weakens the body’s defenses, making a person more vulnerable to illness.

The health of her family is naturally the housewife's first and greatest consideration, and as this depends so much on correct diet, it should be the aim of every housewife to plan her meals in the careful, intelligent way required to supply her household with the food each member needs.

The health of her family is obviously the housewife's top priority, and since this relies heavily on a proper diet, every housewife should aim to plan her meals in a thoughtful and smart way to provide her household with the necessary food for each member.

2. As has already been learned, a knowledge of the selection, care, and preparation of food is absolutely necessary in providing proper diet. But correct feeding requires more than this. In addition, the housewife must have a working knowledge of what foods contain and their effect in the body. She must also learn what her family needs and then make every effort to supply this need in the most economical way. The result will be a sufficient amount of food of the right kind at a minimum expenditure of funds.

2. As we’ve already discussed, knowing how to choose, care for, and prepare food is essential for providing a proper diet. But feeding a family correctly involves more than just that. The homemaker also needs to understand what different foods contain and how they affect the body. She should learn about her family's nutritional needs and do her best to meet those needs in the most cost-effective way. This will ensure there’s enough of the right kinds of food with minimal spending.

She should keep in mind, however, that the cost of diet has no direct relation to its food value, but that economy and proper feeding are closely connected. For instance, an inexpensive diet may be just as satisfactory from a food-value standpoint as an expensive one. But in order to make the inexpensive one adequate and the expensive one balanced, the housewife must apply her knowledge of the general composition of food; that is, she must know whether a food predominates in carbohydrate, fat, or protein, and whether or not it furnishes minerals. Equipped with such knowledge, she will be able to purchase the largest amount of nutritive material for the smallest outlay of money. The cheapest food is not always the one that sells for the lowest price per pound, quart, or bushel, but the one that furnishes the most nutritive material at the lowest cost; also, food that is the wrong kind to serve is not an economical one to purchase.

She should remember, though, that the cost of food doesn’t directly relate to its nutritional value, but that budget and proper nutrition are closely linked. For example, an affordable diet can be just as nutritious as an expensive one. However, to ensure that the affordable one is adequate and the expensive one is balanced, the homemaker must use her understanding of the general makeup of food; she needs to know whether a food is mainly carbohydrates, fats, or proteins, and whether it provides minerals. With this knowledge, she'll be able to buy the most nutritious food for the least amount of money. The cheapest food isn’t always the one that has the lowest price per pound, quart, or bushel, but rather the one that offers the most nutrients for the lowest cost; also, food that isn't the right kind to serve isn’t economical to buy.

3. Many housewives regard it as unnecessary to plan beforehand and persist in preparing meals without giving any previous thought to them. But to begin thinking about an hour before meal time what to have for a meal is neither wise nor economical, for then it is too late to determine what ought to be served from a diet standpoint and there can be prepared only those foods which the time will allow. As can well be understood, this is both a disastrous plan for correct diet and a very extravagant way in which to feed a family. Quickly broiled steaks and chops, commercially canned vegetables and fruits, and prepared desserts should be the occasional treat rather than the daily food. Instead of using these constantly, time should be allowed for the preparation of the less expensive meats and vegetables and the home-made desserts.

3. Many housewives think it's unnecessary to plan ahead and continue to prepare meals without any prior consideration. But deciding what to make just an hour before mealtime isn’t practical or cost-effective, as it’s too late to consider what should be served for a balanced diet, and you can only prepare foods that can be made in the available time. This approach is clearly not a good strategy for healthy eating and is a very wasteful way to feed a family. Quick-cooked steaks and chops, store-bought canned vegetables and fruits, and pre-made desserts should be occasional treats rather than everyday food. Instead of relying on these frequently, there should be time set aside for preparing less expensive meats and vegetables, as well as homemade desserts.

To prepare such foods successfully requires that meals should be planned at least 24 hours before they are to be served, and in reality the main dishes should be decided on 48 hours ahead of time. Then, sometime between breakfast and luncheon and before the day's marketing is done, detailed plans should be made for luncheon and dinner of that day and for breakfast of the next. Nor should the left-overs be disregarded if economy would be the watchword in the management of the household. Rather, they should be included in the plans for each day and used up as fast as possible.

To successfully prepare such meals, you should plan them at least 24 hours in advance, and ideally decide on the main dishes 48 hours ahead of time. Then, sometime between breakfast and lunch, and before doing the day's shopping, you should make detailed plans for lunch and dinner that day, as well as breakfast for the next day. Don’t overlook leftovers if saving money is important in running the household. Instead, they should be factored into daily plans and used up quickly.


PURCHASE OF FOODS

SUCCESSFUL MARKETING

4. The truly economical housewife will find it necessary each day to determine three things: (1) what is left from yesterday's meals and what use can be made of it; (2) what is in supply that can be used for that day; and (3) what must be added to these things to provide satisfactory meals for the family. Having determined these points, she should make a list of the articles that she must purchase when she does her marketing. A pad fastened to the kitchen wall and a pencil on a string attached to the pad are convenient for this purpose. At the same time, they serve as a reminder that when all of any article, such as coffee, sugar, baking powder, etc., has been used, a note should be made of this fact. To her list of supplies that have become exhausted since her preceding marketing day should be added the fresh fruits, vegetables, and other perishable foods needed for the next day or preferably for the next two days if they can be kept.

4. The truly budget-savvy homemaker will find it necessary each day to figure out three things: (1) what’s leftover from yesterday’s meals and how it can be used; (2) what supplies are available that can be used today; and (3) what needs to be added to these items to provide satisfying meals for the family. Once she’s figured these out, she should make a list of the items she needs to buy when she goes shopping. A pad attached to the kitchen wall and a pencil on a string are handy for this purpose. They also serve as a reminder that when any item, like coffee, sugar, baking powder, etc., runs out, a note should be made. Her list should include supplies that have been used up since her last shopping trip, along with fresh fruits, vegetables, and other perishable items needed for the next day—or preferably for the next two days if they can be kept.

5. It is only with proper preparation that the housewife may expect her marketing trips to be successful. If she starts to market with merely two or three items in mind and then tries to think of what she needs as she orders, not only does she waste the grocer's time, but her marketing trip will be a failure. After she arrives home, she will find that there are other things she should have purchased, and the grocer will be forced to make an extra delivery to bring them to her. This is more than she has a right to expect, for the grocer should not be obliged to pay for her lack of planning.

5. A housewife can only expect her shopping trips to be successful with proper planning. If she heads out to shop with just two or three items in mind and tries to remember what else she needs while ordering, she not only wastes the grocer's time, but her shopping trip will end up being a bust. When she gets home, she'll realize there are other things she should have bought, and it will mean an extra delivery from the grocer. This is more than she should expect, as the grocer shouldn't have to cover for her poor planning.

6. To purchase economically, it is advisable, when possible, to buy at a cash grocery and to pay cash for what is bought. When this is done, one is not helping to pay the grocer for accounts he is unable to collect. It is a fortunate grocer who is able to collect 80 per cent. of his bills from his patrons when he conducts his business on the credit plan. However, if it is desired to deal with a credit grocer, all bills should be paid at least once a month. No customer has a right to expect the grocer to wait longer than 30 days for his money.

6. To save money when shopping, it’s best, whenever possible, to buy from a cash grocery store and pay cash for what you purchase. By doing so, you’re not contributing to the grocer's losses from unpaid accounts. It’s fortunate for a grocer if they can collect 80 percent of their bills from customers when operating on credit. However, if you choose to shop at a credit grocery store, all bills should be settled at least once a month. No customer should expect the grocer to wait longer than 30 days for payment.

In many of the cities and large towns, some credit grocers have adopted what is called the "cash-and-carry plan." All customers, whether they buy for cash or on credit, must pay the same price for groceries, but those who wish their goods delivered must pay additional for delivery and those who buy on credit must pay a certain percentage additional on each purchase for bookkeeping. It will readily be seen that such a plan gives the cash customers, especially if they carry their purchases, a decided advantage over credit customers. Also, the grocer is better able to sell his wares at a lower price than the credit grocer who makes free deliveries and no charge for bookkeeping.

In many cities and larger towns, some grocery stores have adopted what's known as the "cash-and-carry plan." All customers, whether they pay in cash or on credit, must pay the same price for groceries. However, those who want their items delivered have to pay extra for delivery, and those who buy on credit have to pay a certain percentage more on each purchase for bookkeeping. It's clear that this plan gives cash customers, especially those who take their goods themselves, a significant advantage over credit customers. Additionally, the store owner is able to sell their products at a lower price compared to credit stores that offer free delivery and don’t charge for bookkeeping.


KEEPING HOUSEHOLD ACCOUNTS

7. NECESSITY FOR KEEPING ACCOUNTS.--Practically every family is limited to a definite sum of money that may be spent for food. The first consideration, then, while it may not be the most important one, is that of making each dollar buy all that it possibly can in order that the income may meet all the demands upon it. Various conditions arise that affect the proportion of the income to be used for this purpose. For instance, two women whose husbands have equal incomes would, under the same conditions, have an equal amount of money to spend for food, but as a rule there is something to cause this amount to become unequal. One woman may have two children in her family while the other has none, a condition that means, of course, that the woman with the children will have less money to spend for food and with that money she must feed more persons. Her family must be, if possible, as well nourished as the other one. In order to accomplish this task, it will be necessary to supply all the required food material in a form that will cost less than the food purchased by the woman who has a smaller family to feed and clothe.

7. NEED FOR KEEPING TRACK OF EXPENSES.--Almost every family has a specific budget for food. Therefore, the first consideration, while it may not be the most significant, is to ensure that every dollar stretches as far as possible so that the income can cover all expenses. Various factors can influence the portion of income allocated for this purpose. For instance, two women whose husbands earn the same amount would typically have the same budget for food, but usually, something creates a disparity. One woman might have two kids, while the other has none, which obviously means the woman with children will have less to spend on food and needs to feed more people with that amount. Her family must be, if possible, as well-fed as the other. To achieve this, she'll need to provide all necessary food items in a way that costs less than the food bought by the woman with a smaller family to support.

An excellent way in which to keep expenses down and consequently to live within one's income is to keep a simple record of household expenses. Such a record will enable every housewife to determine just what each item of household necessities costs and whether or not the proportion of cost to income is correct. To keep a record of expenditures will not prove much of a task if it is done systematically, for a few minutes a day will be sufficient time in which to keep accounts up to date. However, if account keeping is attempted, it should not be neglected even for a day, for it will soon assume the proportions of a large task and will have a tendency to discourage the housewife with this part of her work.

A great way to keep expenses down and live within your means is by maintaining a simple record of household expenses. This record will help any homemaker see exactly how much each essential item costs and whether the ratio of costs to income is right. Keeping track of spending isn't too much of a chore if done consistently; just a few minutes each day is enough to stay on top of things. However, once you start tracking expenses, don't let it slide even for a day, or it can quickly become overwhelming and discourage you in this aspect of your responsibilities.

8. EQUIPMENT FOR HOUSEHOLD ACCOUNT KEEPING.--For convenience in keeping household accounts, a small desk like the one shown in Fig. 1 should, if possible, be secured and placed in an unoccupied or convenient corner of the kitchen. Here can be kept cook books, recipes, suitable books or cards for account keeping, the marketing pad, a file for bills from the grocer and the butcher, labels for cans and jars, etc. Here may also be placed an extension telephone, which, by being so convenient, will save the housewife many steps. A white desk with a chair to match is the most attractive kind to select for kitchen use, but a dark one may be used if preferred. The desk illustrated was a simple wooden one that was enameled white after it was bought, but it is possible to buy white desks for this purpose. A small, plain table will, of course, answer very well if no desk is available and it is desired not to buy one.

8. EQUIPMENT FOR HOUSEHOLD ACCOUNT KEEPING.--For easy household accounting, it’s best to have a small desk like the one shown in Fig. 1, placed in an unused or convenient corner of the kitchen. This space can hold cookbooks, recipes, appropriate books or cards for managing accounts, a marketing pad, a file for bills from the grocer and butcher, labels for cans and jars, and so on. An extension telephone can also be set up here, making it easier for the housewife to save time. A white desk with a matching chair is typically the most attractive choice for the kitchen, but a dark one can be used if preferred. The desk shown was a simple wooden one that was painted white after purchase, but you can also find white desks available for this purpose. A small, plain table will work just as well if a desk isn’t available and you’d prefer not to buy one.

[Illustration: FIG. 1]

9. METHODS OF HOUSEHOLD ACCOUNT KEEPING.--If the housewife runs a credit account with the grocer, she will learn that different grocers have different ways of recording her purchases.

9. METHODS OF HOUSEHOLD ACCOUNT KEEPING.--If the homemaker has a credit account with the grocery store, she will find that different stores have their own methods for tracking her purchases.

[Illustration: FIG. 2]

In some cases, she is provided with a "store book," which she takes to the grocer each time she makes a purchase and in which he records the date and the items bought by her. Then at the end of a stated time, usually the end of the month, when a settlement is to be made, the amounts for the month are totaled and a new account is started. With such a plan, the housewife does not have to keep any record for herself. To be certain that the grocer's account is accurate, she simply has to check the entries each time they are made in the book by the grocer.

In some cases, she is given a "store book," which she takes to the grocery store every time she makes a purchase. The grocer writes down the date and the items she buys in it. Then, at the end of a designated period, usually the end of the month when it's time to settle up, the total for the month is calculated, and a new account is started. With this system, the housewife doesn’t have to keep any record herself. To ensure that the grocer's account is correct, she just needs to check the entries each time the grocer writes them in the book.

In other cases, the grocer merely makes out a slip, or bill, for each purchase and at the end of the month presents his statement for the amount due. In such an event, provided the housewife does not wish to make entries into a suitable book, she may file the slips as she receives them in order that she may check the grocer's monthly bill as to accuracy. A bill file like that shown in Fig. 2 is very convenient for the filing of bills. However, if she does not wish to save each slip she receives, she may adopt one of two methods of account keeping, depending on how much time she has to devote to this matter.

In other cases, the grocer simply writes up a receipt for each purchase, and at the end of the month, he presents a statement for the total amount due. In this situation, if the housewife doesn't want to enter details into a record book, she can keep the receipts as she gets them so she can verify the grocer's monthly bill for accuracy. A bill organizer like the one shown in Fig. 2 is very handy for storing bills. However, if she doesn't want to keep every receipt she receives, she can choose one of two methods of managing her accounts, depending on how much time she can spend on this task.

10. If she desires to be very systematic and has sufficient time, it will prove a good plan to record each purchase in a suitable book in the manner shown in Fig. 3. Books for this purpose can be purchased in any store where stationery is sold and are not expensive. In this method of recording, as a page becomes filled with items, the total is carried forward to each new page until the bill is paid at the end of the month. Then, for the next month, a new account may be started. This same method may also be followed in keeping accounts for meats, milk, and such household expenses as rent, light, heat, and laundry. All these accounts, together with an account for clothing and one for miscellaneous expense, make up a complete expense account.

10. If she wants to be very organized and has enough time, it’s a good idea to record each purchase in a suitable book as shown in Fig. 3. You can buy books for this purpose at any store that sells stationery, and they’re not expensive. With this recording method, as a page fills up with items, the total is carried forward to each new page until the bill is paid at the end of the month. Then, for the next month, a new account can be started. This same method can also be used for tracking expenses for meat, milk, and other household costs like rent, electricity, heating, and laundry. All of these accounts, along with one for clothing and another for miscellaneous expenses, create a complete expense account.


GROCERY ACCOUNT
With ___John Smith, 420 Fourth Avenue__________
10/151 pk. Apples$ .45
1 doz. Eggs.55
1 lb. Butter.53
2 lb. Sweet Potatoes.15
2 cans Duff's Molasses.54
1 pt. Vinegar.10
10/171 cake Yeast.04
6 lb. Crisco1.98
1 box Coconut.35
1 can Pineapple.25
1 lb. coffee.40
2 qt. Carrots.10
10/191 box Matches.10
2 bars Laundry Soap.12
1 head Lettuce.08
1 can Corn.20
1 bu. Potatoes2.00
1 qt. Maple Sirup.65
Forwarded$8.59
FIG 3


11. A somewhat simpler plan and one that requires less time is shown in Fig. 4. When the slips are received, they should be checked to see whether they are correct and then added to get the total. Only this total, together with the date, is placed in the book kept for the purpose, the slips then being discarded. Such a plan will prove very satisfactory for the various household expenses if care is used in checking the items of the slips and in adding them.

11. A simpler plan that takes less time is shown in Fig. 4. When you receive the slips, check to make sure they're correct and then total them up. Only this total, along with the date, should be recorded in the designated book, while the slips can be thrown away. This method will work well for tracking household expenses if you’re careful about checking the items on the slips and adding them correctly.

Regarding the settlement of her accounts, the housewife who buys on credit will find it a good plan to pay her bills by check. Then receipts will not have to be saved, for the returned check is usually all that is required to prove that a bill has been paid.

Regarding her account settlement, a housewife who shops on credit will find it wise to pay her bills by check. This way, she won’t need to save receipts, as the returned check is typically enough to show that a bill has been paid.

12. The housewife who buys for cash does not necessarily have to keep a detailed record of her purchases, for by simply filing her purchase slips in the manner shown in Fig. 2 she can determine at any time what her money has been used for. Still, in every well-regulated household, it is advisable to keep a daily record of income and expenditure; that is, to put down every day how much is spent for food, laundry, cleaning, and, in fact, all expenditures, as well as how much cash is received. Indeed, if such an account is kept, the tendency of money to "slip away" will be checked and a saving of money is bound to result.

12. A housewife who pays in cash doesn’t have to keep a detailed record of her purchases. By simply organizing her receipts like shown in Fig. 2, she can easily see how her money has been spent. However, in any well-managed household, it’s a good idea to keep a daily record of income and expenses. This means noting every day how much is spent on food, laundry, cleaning, and all other costs, as well as how much cash is received. In fact, keeping such a record will help reduce the tendency for money to "slip away," and it will likely lead to saving more money.



GROCERY ACCOUNT
With______John Smith, 420 Fourth Avenue_____
10/2Groceries$ 2.10
10/3Groceries2.76
10/6Groceries.42
10/8Groceries4.12
10/10Groceries1.09
10/13Groceries.32
10/15Groceries2.30
10/17Groceries2.13
10/20Groceries1.93
10/22Groceries3.97
10/24Groceries1.69
10/27Groceries4.10
10/29Groceries1.12
10/31Groceries3.35
Forwarded$31.40
FIG. 4


13. A simple plan for keeping such a record is illustrated in Fig. 5. For this record it is possible to buy sheets of paper or cards already ruled at any stationery store, but it is a simple matter to rule sheets of blank paper that will answer the purpose very well. As will be observed, there is a space provided for every day of the month and columns into which may be placed the expenditures for groceries, including fruits and vegetables, as well as for meats and fish, milk, laundry and cleaning, and miscellaneous items, such as ice and other necessities that are not ordinarily classed as groceries. Of course, the number of columns to be used can be regulated by the person keeping the account, the illustration simply showing the general procedure. However, one column should be devoted to the daily expenditure, the figures here being the amounts of the total money spent for the different items each day. In the last column should be recorded the various amounts of money received by the housewife during the month for the settlement of her bills. At the end of the month, all of the columns should be totaled. The total of the daily outlay should equal that of the preceding columns. The difference between this total and that of the money received will show the housewife just how she stands with regard to income and expenditure for foods and kitchen supplies. In this case, there is an excess of expenditure amounting to $10.68, and this sum should be forwarded to the June account. On the other hand, should the housewife find that her expenses exceed her allowance, she will know that it will be necessary for her to curtail her expenditures in some way.

13. A simple way to keep this record is shown in Fig. 5. You can buy pre-printed sheets of paper or cards at any stationery store, but it's also easy to draw lines on blank paper to create your own. As you can see, there's a space for each day of the month and columns for recording expenses for groceries, including fruits and vegetables, as well as for meats and fish, milk, laundry and cleaning, and miscellaneous items like ice and other essentials that aren't usually categorized as groceries. Naturally, the number of columns can be adjusted based on the preferences of the person keeping the record—the illustration just demonstrates the general idea. However, one column should be dedicated to daily spending, where the amounts spent on different items each day will be noted. In the last column, the various amounts of money received by the housewife throughout the month for bill payments should be recorded. At the end of the month, all columns should be totaled. The total of daily spending should match the total from the previous columns. The difference between this total and the money received will help the housewife understand her balance regarding income and spending for food and kitchen supplies. In this case, there's an overspend of $10.68, and this amount should be carried over to the June account. Conversely, if the housewife finds her expenses exceed her budget, she will know she needs to cut back on her spending in some way.



Expenditures and Receipts for the Month of ___May___, 19___
DateGroceriesMeats
and
Fish
MilkLaundry
and
Cleaning
Miscell-
aneous
Expend-
itures
Daily
Outlay
Money
Rec'vd
1$ 2.10$.60$.28$ 1.50 $ 4.48$ 5.70
2 .40.28  .58 
32.761.90.28 $.355.2915.00
4  .28  .28 
5  .28  .28 
6.42 .28 .351.05 
7 .36.28 .10.74 
84.12 .282.00.406.80 
9  .28  .28 
101.091.83.28 .383.6015.00
11  .28  .28 
12  .28 .35.63 
13.32.76.28  1.36 
14  .28 .19.47 
152.30 .281.50.124.20 
16 .53.28  .81 
172.131.63.28 .604.6415.00
18  .28  .28 
19  .28 .22.50 
201.93 .28 .402.61 
21 .90.28  1.18 
223.97 .282.00.406.65 
232.10 .28  .28 
242.102.24.28 .805.0115.00
25  .28 .10.38 
26  .281.50 1.78 
274.10 .28 .354.73 
28 .38.28  .66 
291.12.46.281.50.403.76 
30  .28  .28 
313.351.87.28 .556.0515.00
Total$31.40$13.88$ 8.68$10.00$ 6.66$70.02$80.70
FIG. 5


Such a method of record keeping could also be followed with good results for showing the distribution of the entire income of a family. It would simply mean the planning of suitable columns for the different items of expenditure.

Such a method of record keeping could also be used effectively to show how a family's total income is distributed. It would just require setting up appropriate columns for different categories of spending.

14. Too much cannot be said of the merit of following some such simple account-keeping method as the ones here outlined, for, as has been explained, it will enable the housewife to know with a fair degree of accuracy what she has spent her money for. In addition to the satisfaction this will give, it will supply a basis from which she can apportion, or budget, her yearly income if she so desires. By giving careful consideration to the various items of expense, she may find it possible to reduce some of them in order to increase her savings account or to have money for other items that require a larger expenditure.

14. You can’t underestimate the value of using a simple method for keeping track of expenses like the ones described here. As mentioned, it helps the housewife clearly see where her money is going. Not only does this provide peace of mind, but it also creates a foundation for her to budget or plan her yearly income if she wants to. By closely examining the different expenses, she might discover ways to cut back on some of them to boost her savings or to afford bigger purchases.


COST OF FOODS

FACTORS INFLUENCING COST

15. Certain factors that enter into the production of food add so much to the cost that they must be taken into consideration when food is purchased. The housewife who disregards these factors fails in the purchase of food, for she does not know so well what foods to buy nor how to buy them in a way to keep down the cost as the woman who is familiar with these matters. It is possible that the cost of a food may be out of all proportion to its value because of the profits that must necessarily be paid to each person through whose hands the food passes. In the first place, the overhead expenses of the food dealer must be paid by the housewife, who is regarded as the consumer. These expenses include his rent, light, and heat, his hired help, such as clerks, bookkeepers, delivery men, and the cost of delivery. In addition, the cost of transportation figures in prominently if the foods have to be shipped any distance, the manufacturer's profit must often be counted in, and the cost of advertising must not be overlooked. With all such matters, the housewife must acquaint herself if she would buy in the most economical way.

15. Certain factors involved in food production add so much to the cost that they need to be considered when purchasing food. A housewife who overlooks these factors is likely to struggle with buying food, as she doesn’t know as well which foods to choose or how to purchase them in a way that minimizes the cost, unlike a woman who is knowledgeable about these issues. It’s possible for the cost of a food item to be disproportionately high relative to its value due to the profits that must be shared among everyone who handles the food. First, the overhead costs of the food retailer must be covered by the housewife, who is seen as the consumer. These expenses include rent, utilities, employee wages for clerks, bookkeepers, delivery staff, and the cost of delivery. Additionally, transportation costs play a significant role if the food needs to be shipped over long distances, the manufacturer's profit often has to be factored in, and advertising costs shouldn’t be ignored. The housewife needs to familiarize herself with all these aspects if she wants to shop in the most economical way.

[Illustration: FIG. 6]

16. CHART OF FOOD PROBLEM.--To assist the housewife in her mastery of the purchasing side of the food problem, a chart, Fig. 6, is presented. This chart shows the various routes through which foods travel before they reach the housewife, or consumer. The lines used to connect all dealers from the producer to the consumer represent transportation or delivery, and the increase in cost due to overhead expense and profit is indicated by the black spaces, which increase in size as the number of dealers increase. The producer may be the manufacturer, but in most cases he is the farmer, the stockman, the dairyman, or the fruit grower. The dealers handling the food between the producer and the consumer are known as middlemen. They include the wholesaler, the jobber, and the retailer. The retailer is the grocer, the butcher, or the green grocer.

16. CHART OF FOOD PROBLEM.--To help the homemaker master the buying aspect of the food issue, a chart, Fig. 6, is provided. This chart illustrates the different paths that foods take before they reach the homemaker or consumer. The lines connecting all the dealers from the producer to the consumer represent transportation or delivery, and the increase in cost due to overhead expenses and profit is shown by the black spaces, which get larger as the number of dealers increases. The producer can be the manufacturer, but most often he is the farmer, stockman, dairyman, or fruit grower. The dealers who handle the food between the producer and the consumer are known as middlemen. This includes the wholesaler, jobber, and retailer. The retailer can be the grocer, butcher, or green grocer.

17. So that this chart may be clearly understood, several concrete examples are given. Thus, the farmer who delivers vegetables directly to the consumer is an example of plan No. 1. He has very little overhead expense and consequently can sell cheaper than dealers who have a large overhead expense. However, when the farmer delivers his vegetables to the grocer and the grocer sells them to the consumer, an example of plan No. 2 is afforded. Food bought in this way costs more than that bought directly from the farmer. In plan No. 3, the farmer, for instance, sells his vegetables to a wholesaler, who perhaps buys from other farmers and then sells small quantities of them to the grocer for sale to the consumer. This plan, as will readily be seen, is more involved than either No. 1 or No. 2, but a still more roundabout route is that of plan No. 4. In this case, for instance, the farmer sells his vegetables to a canning factory, where they are canned and then sold to the grocer, who sells them in this form to the consumer. Often two wholesalers, the second one being known as a jobber, are involved in the transaction, as in plan No. 5. In such an event, the farmer sells to the wholesaler, who sells to the jobber, who, in turn, sells to the grocer, from whom the consumer secures the goods. The most complicated route is that shown in plan No. 6. This illustrates the case of the farmer who sells his cereal products to a manufacturer, who makes them up into breakfast foods. He then sells them in large quantities to the wholesaler, who sells them in 50- or 100-case lots to the jobber. From the jobber they go to the grocer, who delivers them to the consumer.

17. To make this chart easier to understand, several real-life examples are provided. For instance, the farmer who sells vegetables directly to consumers is an example of plan No. 1. He has very low overhead costs, so he can sell at a lower price than dealers with higher expenses. However, when the farmer sells his vegetables to a grocer, who then sells them to consumers, this represents plan No. 2. Food purchased this way is more expensive than when bought directly from the farmer. In plan No. 3, the farmer sells his vegetables to a wholesaler, who may buy from other farmers and then sells smaller amounts to the grocer for resale to consumers. This plan is clearly more complex than either No. 1 or No. 2, but an even more complicated option is plan No. 4. In this case, for instance, the farmer sells his vegetables to a canning factory, where they are canned and then sold to the grocer, who sells them to consumers in that form. Often, two wholesalers are involved in this process, with the second being called a jobber, as shown in plan No. 5. In this scenario, the farmer sells to the wholesaler, who sells to the jobber, and then the jobber sells to the grocer, from whom consumers buy the goods. The most complicated route is illustrated in plan No. 6. This shows the case of a farmer who sells his cereal products to a manufacturer, who turns them into breakfast foods. The manufacturer then sells them in bulk to the wholesaler, who sells them in 50- or 100-case lots to the jobber. From the jobber, they go to the grocer, who delivers them to the consumer.

From a study of this chart, it can be readily seen that the cost of food may be reduced if the middlemen can be eliminated. For instance, the housewife will be able to get fruits and vegetables cheaper if she buys them from a farmer instead of a grocer, for she will not be called on to pay any of the grocer's overhead expense or profit. Again, if she buys her staple groceries in a store that is able to eliminate the wholesaler or the jobber, she will get them at a lower price than if she deals where these agencies must receive their share of the profits.

From looking at this chart, it's clear that food costs can be lowered by cutting out the middlemen. For example, the homemaker can get fruits and vegetables for less if she buys them directly from a farmer rather than a grocery store because she won't have to cover any of the store's overhead costs or profits. Similarly, if she buys her staple groceries from a store that removes the wholesaler or the jobber, she'll pay less compared to shopping where these intermediaries take their cut of the profits.

18. NATIONALLY ADVERTISED GOODS.--Much is said about the fact that the consumer, in buying package foods that are nationally advertised, must pay for the package and the advertising. This statement is absolutely true; but it must be remembered that where large quantities of foods are handled, the materials can be bought by the manufacturer or the wholesaler at a lower price than by one who purchases only a small amount. Then, too, if great quantities are sold, and this condition is made possible only through advertising, the profit on each package sold can be much smaller than that which would have to be made when less is sold. Often, therefore, in spite of the advertising cost, a widely advertised food can be sold for less than one that is not advertised at all because a much greater quantity is sold.

18. NATIONALLY ADVERTISED GOODS.--A lot has been said about how consumers, when buying packaged foods that are nationally advertised, end up paying for the packaging and the advertising. This is absolutely accurate; however, it's important to remember that when large quantities of food are involved, manufacturers or wholesalers can buy the materials at a lower cost than someone who is only buying a small amount. Furthermore, if large quantities are sold, which is only possible through advertising, the profit on each package sold can be much less than what would be needed if fewer packages were sold. Therefore, despite the advertising costs, a widely advertised food product can often be sold for less than one that isn't advertised at all because a much larger volume is sold.

19. CHAIN STORES.--The principle of selling great quantities of food at a comparatively small profit on each item is put into practice in chain stores, which are operated by different companies throughout the United States. Such stores are a boon to the housewife who must practice economy, for they eliminate a middleman by acting both as wholesaler and as retailer. Because of this fact, foods that are purchased in large quantities from the producer or manufacturer can be offered to the consumer at a lower price than in a retail store not a part of a chain. Therefore, if foods of the same quality are not lower in price in chain stores, it must be because the buying is not well done or a greater profit is made in selling them. In addition, chain stores generally require cash for all purchases made in them and they do not usually deliver goods. Consequently, their overhead expense is materially reduced and they do not need to make such a large profit.

19. CHAIN STORES.--The approach of selling large quantities of food at a relatively small profit per item is implemented in chain stores, which are run by various companies across the United States. These stores are a great help to budget-conscious shoppers, as they remove the middleman by functioning as both wholesaler and retailer. Because of this, foods bought in bulk from producers or manufacturers can be sold to consumers at lower prices than those in independent retail stores. So, if the prices for the same quality foods aren’t cheaper in chain stores, it likely means buying isn’t being done effectively or they’re making a bigger profit on sales. Additionally, chain stores usually require cash for all purchases and typically do not offer delivery services. As a result, their overhead costs are significantly lower, allowing them to operate with smaller profit margins.


ECONOMICAL BUYING

20. APPORTIONMENT OF INCOME.--When the housewife thoroughly understands the qualities of foods as well as their comparative food values and is familiar with the factors that govern food prices, she is well equipped to do economical buying for her family. Then it remains for her to purchase the right kind of food and at the same time keep within her means. A good plan is to apportion the household expenses according to a budget; that is, to prepare a statement of the financial plans for the year. Then the amount of money that can be used for this part of the household expenses will be known and the housewife will be able to plan definitely on what she can buy. If necessary, this amount may be reduced through the housewife's giving careful attention to the details of buying, or if she is not obliged to lower her expenses, she may occasionally purchase more expensive foods, which might be considered luxuries, to give variety to the diet. The amount of money that may be spent for food depends, of course, on the income, and the greater the income, the lower will be the proportion of money required for this item of the household expense.

20. APPORTIONMENT OF INCOME.--When the homemaker fully understands the qualities of foods and their relative nutritional values and is aware of the factors that influence food prices, she is well-prepared to make budget-friendly purchases for her family. Then, it's important for her to buy the right kind of food while staying within her budget. A good strategy is to allocate household expenses based on a budget; that means creating a financial plan for the year. This way, she will know how much money can be spent on this part of the household expenses, allowing her to plan precisely what she can buy. If necessary, she can lower this amount by paying close attention to the details of her purchases, or if she's not required to cut her expenses, she might sometimes choose to buy more expensive food items, which could be seen as treats, to add variety to the meals. The amount budgeted for food will naturally depend on the overall income; the higher the income, the smaller the percentage of money needed for this household expense.

21. To throw some light on the proper proportion of the family income to spend for food, Table I is given. As the basis of this table, a family of five is taken and the proportion that may be spent for food has been worked out for incomes ranging from $600 to $2,400 a year. As will be noted, an income of $600 permits an expenditure of only 19 cents a day for each person. When food prices are high, it will be a difficult matter to feed one person for that amount, and still if the income is only $600 it will be necessary to do this. To increase the food cost over 39 cents a day per person, which is the amount allotted for an income of $2,400, would denote extravagance or at least would provide more luxury than is warranted.

21. To clarify the appropriate percentage of family income to spend on food, Table I is provided. The table is based on a family of five and shows the percentage that can be spent on food for incomes ranging from $600 to $2,400 a year. As you can see, an income of $600 allows for only 19 cents a day for each person. When food prices are high, it will be challenging to feed one person for that amount, yet if the income is only $600, that's what needs to be done. Spending more than 39 cents a day per person, which is what’s allocated for an income of $2,400, would suggest being wasteful or at least indulging in more luxury than is justified.



TABLE I
PROPORTION OF FAMILY INCOME FOR FOOD
Income
per
Year
Per Cent. of
Income Spent
for Food
Amount Spent
per year
for Food
Amount Spent
per Day for
Five Persons
Amount Spent
per Day per
Person
$60060$360$ .98$.19
$80055$500$1.36$.27
$1,00050$576$1.57$.31
$1,20048$576$1.57$.31
$1,50044$660$1.80$.36
$1,80039$702$1.92$.38
$2,40030$720$1.97$.39


Various conditions greatly affect this proportion. One of these is the rise and fall of the food cost. Theoretically, the buyer should adjust this difference in the food cost rather than increase her expenditures. For instance, if in a certain year, the general cost of food is 20 per cent. greater than it was in the preceding year, the housewife should adjust her plan of buying so that for the same amount of money spent in the previous year she will be able to supply her family with what they need. Of course, if there is an increase in the income, it will not be so necessary to work out such an adjustment.

Various factors significantly influence this ratio. One of these is the fluctuation of food prices. In theory, the buyer should adapt to these changes in food costs instead of simply increasing her spending. For example, if in a given year the overall price of food is 20 percent higher than in the previous year, the housewife should modify her purchasing strategy so that with the same amount of money spent as the year before, she can provide for her family's needs. Naturally, if there is an increase in income, it won't be as crucial to make such adjustments.

22. ECONOMIES IN PURCHASING FOOD.--Through her study of the preceding lessons, the student has had an opportunity to learn how to care for food in order to avoid loss and waste, how to prepare it so that it may be easily digested and assimilated, and how to make it appetizing and attractive so that as little as possible is left over and none is wasted. She should therefore be thoroughly acquainted with the methods of procedure in regard to all such matters and should have worked out to her satisfaction the best ways of accomplishing these things to suit her individual needs. But, in addition to these matters, she must give strict attention to her food purchases if she would secure for her family the most wholesome and nourishing foods for the least expenditure of money.

22. ECONOMIES IN PURCHASING FOOD.--Through her study of the previous lessons, the student has had a chance to learn how to take care of food to prevent loss and waste, how to prepare it so that it's easy to digest and absorb, and how to make it appetizing and appealing so that as little as possible is left over and nothing is wasted. She should be well-versed in the procedures for all these matters and should have figured out the best ways to achieve these goals to meet her individual needs. Additionally, she must pay close attention to her food purchases if she wants to provide her family with the healthiest and most nourishing foods for the least amount of money.

23. To purchase food that will provide the necessary food value for a small outlay is possible to a certain extent, but it cannot be done without the required knowledge. In the first place, it means that fewer luxuries can be indulged in and that the family dietary will have to be reduced to necessities. It may also mean that there will probably be a difference in the quality of the food purchased. For instance, it may be necessary to practice such economies as buying broken rice at a few cents a pound less than whole rice or purchasing smaller prunes with a greater number to the pound at a lower price than the larger, more desirable ones. The housewife need not hesitate in the least to adopt such economies as these, for they are undoubtedly the easiest ways in which to reduce the food expenses without causing detriment to any one.

23. It's possible to buy food that provides the necessary nutritional value for a low cost, to some extent, but you need the right knowledge to do so. First, it means cutting down on luxuries and focusing the family diet on essentials. It might also result in a difference in the quality of food purchased. For example, it could be necessary to economize by buying broken rice at a few cents less per pound than whole rice or opting for smaller prunes, which come in larger quantities at a lower price than the bigger, more desirable ones. The housewife shouldn’t hesitate to adopt these kinds of savings, as they are undoubtedly the easiest ways to cut food costs without harming anyone.

24. Further economy can be practiced if a little extra attention is given in the purchase of certain foods. As is well known, the packages and cans containing food are labeled with the contents and the weight of the contents. These should be carefully observed, as should also the number of servings that may be obtained from the package or can. For instance, the housewife should know the weight per package of the various kinds of prepared cereals she uses and the number of servings she is able to procure from each package.

24. You can save even more money by paying a bit more attention when buying certain foods. It's common knowledge that food packages and cans have labels that show what's inside and the weight of the contents. You should pay close attention to these labels, as well as the number of servings you can get from each package or can. For example, a homemaker should know the weight of different types of prepared cereals she buys and how many servings she can get from each package.

Let it be assumed that she buys two packages of different cereals at the same time, which, for convenience, may be called package No. 1 and package No. 2. She finds that No. 1 contains 16 ounces and No. 2, only 12 ounces; so she knows that No. 1 furnishes the greater amount of food by weight for the money spent. But, on the other hand, No. 2 may go farther; that is, it may serve a greater number of persons. This, in all probability, means that the cereals are similar in character, but that the food value of the servings from No. 2 is greater than that of the servings from No. 1. No. 2 is therefore the more economical of the two. Matters of this kind must not be overlooked, especially in the feeding of children.

Let’s assume she buys two different packages of cereal at the same time, which we'll call package No. 1 and package No. 2 for convenience. She discovers that No. 1 contains 16 ounces while No. 2 has only 12 ounces; so she realizes that No. 1 provides more food by weight for the money spent. However, No. 2 might go further; it could serve more people. This likely indicates that the cereals are similar in type, but the food value of servings from No. 2 is higher than that from No. 1. Therefore, No. 2 is the more economical option of the two. These kinds of considerations should not be overlooked, especially when feeding children.

Then, too, the housewife should work out carefully which she can use to greater advantage, prepared or unprepared cereals. If she finds that unprepared cereals are the more economical and if she can depend on their food value as being as high as that of the prepared ones, she should by all means give them the preference. Of course, she may use prepared cereals for convenience or for varying the diet, but the more economical ones should be used with greater regularity.

Then, the housewife should carefully decide whether to use prepared or unprepared cereals to get the most benefit. If she finds that unprepared cereals are more economical and can rely on their nutritional value being just as good as the prepared ones, she should definitely prioritize them. Of course, she can use prepared cereals for convenience or to add variety to the diet, but the more affordable option should be used more consistently.

25. Canned goods should be carefully observed. A certain brand of tomatoes, for instance, may have 16 ounces to the can, whereas another brand that can be bought for the same price may have 24 ounces. There may be, however, and there probably is, a great difference in the quality of the tomatoes. The 24-ounce can may have a much greater proportion of water than the 16-ounce can, and for this reason will not serve to the same advantage. As it is with canned tomatoes, so is it with canned corn, peas, and other canned vegetables, for the price depends altogether on the quality. Therefore, several brands should be compared and the one should be purchased which seems to furnish the most food or the best quality of food for the least money, provided the quality continues.

25. Canned goods should be carefully checked. For example, one brand of tomatoes might have 16 ounces per can, while another brand available for the same price might have 24 ounces. However, there’s likely a significant difference in the quality of the tomatoes. The 24-ounce can might contain a much higher proportion of water than the 16-ounce can, making it less advantageous. The same applies to canned corn, peas, and other canned vegetables, as the price is entirely dependent on quality. Therefore, it’s important to compare several brands and choose the one that offers the most food or the best quality food for the lowest cost, as long as the quality remains consistent.

26. In the preparation of meat, there is always some waste, and as waste is a factor that has much to do with the increasing of costs, it should be taken into consideration each time a piece of meat is purchased. If there is time for some experimenting, it makes an interesting study to weigh the meat before and after preparation, for then the amount of shrinkage in cookery, as well as the waste in bone, skin, and other inedible material, can be determined.

26. When preparing meat, there’s always some waste, and since waste significantly impacts costs, it should be considered every time you buy meat. If you have some time to experiment, it can be interesting to weigh the meat before and after preparation; this way, you can figure out how much it shrinks during cooking and what the waste is from bones, skin, and other inedible parts.

An actual experiment made with a 4-pound chicken showed that there was a loss of 2-3/4 pounds; that is, the weight of the edible meat after deducting the waste was only 1-1/4 pounds. The following shows how this weight was determined:

An actual experiment with a 4-pound chicken showed a loss of 2-3/4 pounds; that is, the weight of the edible meat after subtracting the waste was only 1-1/4 pounds. The following illustrates how this weight was determined:



 POUNDS
Weight of chicken, including head, feet, and entrails4
Weight of head, feet, and entrails1-1/4
Weight of bones after cooking7/8
Weight of skin after cooking1/4
Shrinkage in cooking3/8
 -----
Total amount of waste2-3/4
 -----
Actual weight of edible meat1-1/4


It will readily be seen that chicken at 40 cents a pound would make the cost per pound of edible meat amount to exactly $1.28, a rather startling result. It is true, of course, that the busy housewife with a family can hardly spare the time for the extra labor such experiments require; still the greater the number of persons to be fed, the more essential is the need for economy and the greater are the possibilities for waste and loss.

It’s easy to see that chicken at 40 cents a pound would make the cost per pound of edible meat exactly $1.28, which is quite surprising. It’s true that a busy housewife with a family can hardly find the time for the extra effort these experiments need; however, the more people there are to feed, the more important it is to save money, and the higher the chances for waste and loss.

27. The home production of foods does not belong strictly to economical buying, still it is a matter that offers so many advantages to the economical housewife that she cannot afford to overlook it. A small garden carefully prepared and well cultivated will often produce the summer's supply of fresh vegetables, with sufficient overproduction to permit much to be canned for winter. Not only do foods produced in a home garden keep down the cost of both summer and winter foods, but they add considerably to the variety of menus.

27. Growing your own food isn't just about saving money; it offers so many benefits that a budget-savvy homemaker can't ignore it. A small, well-tended garden can often provide a summer's worth of fresh vegetables, with enough extra to can for the winter. Not only do homegrown foods lower the cost of summer and winter meals, but they also greatly increase the variety of dishes.



CORRECT DIET

SUITABILITY OF FOOD

28. At the same time the housewife is making a study of economy and trying to procure as nearly as possible the best quality and the largest quantity of food for the amount of money she has to spend, she must consider the suitability of this food for the persons to whom it is to be served. This matter is undoubtedly of greater importance than economy, for, regardless of the amount of money that is to be spent, suitable foods for the nourishment of all the members of the family must be supplied to them. For instance, a family of two may have $10 a week to spend for food, whereas one of five may perhaps have no more; but the larger family must have nourishing food just as the one of two must have. Therefore, whether the housewife has much or little to spend, her money must purchase food suited to the needs of her family. Unless she is able to accomplish this, she fails in the most important part of her work as a housewife, and as a result, the members of her family are not properly nourished.

28. While the homemaker is learning about budgeting and trying to get the best quality and largest amount of food for the money she has, she also has to think about whether the food is suitable for the people it’s being prepared for. This consideration is definitely more important than just saving money, because no matter how much she has to spend, the family needs to receive appropriate food for their health. For example, a family of two might have $10 a week for groceries, while a family of five might have the same amount; however, the larger family still requires nutritious food just like the smaller one does. So, whether the homemaker has a lot or a little to spend, her budget must provide food that meets her family’s needs. If she can’t do this, she fails at the most crucial part of her role as a homemaker, and as a result, her family members won't be properly nourished.

29. It has long been an established fact that correct diet is the greatest factor in maintaining bodily health. Food is responsible for the growth and maintenance of the body tissues, as well as for their repair. In addition, it supplies the body with heat and energy. Consequently, taking the right food into the body assists in keeping a person in a healthy condition and makes work and exercise possible.

29. It's been well known for a long time that a proper diet is the most important factor in staying healthy. Food is essential for the growth and upkeep of body tissues, as well as for repairing them. Additionally, it provides the body with heat and energy. Therefore, eating the right foods helps keep a person healthy and enables them to work and exercise effectively.

Because so much depends on the diet, the housewife, while considering what can be bought with the money she has to spend, must also decide whether the foods she plans to buy are suitable for the needs of her family. In fact, she should be so certain of this matter that she will automatically plan her menus in such a way that they will contain all that is necessary for each person to be fed. But, as every housewife knows, the appetites of her family must also be taken into consideration. Theoretically, she should feed her family what the various members need, regardless of their likes and dislikes. However, very few persons are willing to be fed in this way; in truth, it would be quite useless to serve a dish for which no one in the family cared and in addition it would be one of the sources of waste.

Because so much relies on the diet, the homemaker, while figuring out what she can buy with her budget, also has to decide if the foods she plans to buy are suitable for her family's needs. In fact, she should be confident enough about this that she'll automatically plan her menus to include everything each person needs to be fed. But, as every homemaker knows, she also has to consider her family's appetites. Theoretically, she should provide her family with what each member needs, regardless of their likes and dislikes. However, very few people are willing to eat this way; in reality, it would be pointless to serve a dish that no one in the family wanted, and it would also lead to waste.

30. To make the work of the housewife less difficult, children should be taught as far as possible to eat all kinds of food. Too often this matter is disregarded, and too often, also, are the kinds of food presented, to a family regulated by the likes and dislikes of the person preparing the food. Because she is not fond of certain foods, she never prepares them; consequently, the children do not learn to like them. On the other hand, many children develop a habit of complaining about foods that are served and often refuse to eat what is set before them. Such a state of affairs should not be permitted. Indeed, every effort should be made to prevent a spirit of complaint. If the housewife is certain that she is providing the members of her family with the best that she can purchase with the money she has to spend and that she is giving them what they need, complaining on their part should be discouraged.

30. To make a housewife's job easier, children should be taught to eat a variety of foods as much as possible. This issue is often overlooked, and too frequently, the types of food served are based on the personal preferences of the person cooking. If she doesn’t like certain foods, she never makes them; as a result, the children don’t learn to appreciate them. On the flip side, many children develop a habit of complaining about the food that’s served and often refuse to eat what’s placed in front of them. This situation should not be allowed. In fact, every effort should be made to prevent a culture of complaining. If the housewife knows she is providing her family with the best food she can buy within her budget and is meeting their nutritional needs, they should be discouraged from complaining.

31. With a little effort, children can be taught to like a large variety of foods, especially if these foods are given to them while they are still young. It is a decided advantage for every one to form a liking for a large number of foods. The person who can say that he cares for everything in the way of food is indeed fortunate, for he has a great variety from which to choose and is not so likely to have served to him a meal in which there are one or more dishes that he cannot eat because of a distaste for them.

31. With a bit of effort, parents can teach children to enjoy a wide range of foods, especially if they're introduced when they're young. It's definitely beneficial for everyone to develop a taste for many different foods. A person who can say they enjoy everything to eat is truly lucky, as they have plenty of options and are less likely to face a meal that includes dishes they don't like.

Every mother should therefore train her children during their childhood to care for all the cereals, vegetables, and fruits. Besides affording the children a well-balanced diet, these foods, particularly vegetables and fruits, when served in their season, offer the housewife a means of planning economical menus, for, as every one knows, their price is then much lower than at any other time and is less than that of most other foods. During the winter, turnips, carrots, onions, and other winter vegetables are more economical foods than summer vegetables that must be canned or otherwise prepared to preserve them for winter use or the fresh summer vegetables purchased out of season. However, it is advisable to vary the diet occasionally with such foods.

Every mother should teach her children during their childhood to appreciate all the grains, vegetables, and fruits. In addition to providing a well-balanced diet, these foods, especially vegetables and fruits when they're in season, give the homemaker a way to plan budget-friendly meals. As everyone knows, their prices are much lower during this time compared to any other time and are less than most other foods. In the winter, turnips, carrots, onions, and other winter vegetables are more cost-effective than summer vegetables that need to be canned or otherwise preserved for winter use or fresh summer vegetables bought out of season. However, it's a good idea to occasionally mix in different foods.


COMPOSITION OF FOOD

32. To feed her family properly, the housewife should understand that the daily food must include the five food substances--protein, fat, carbohydrate, mineral matter, and water. As these are discussed in Essentials of Cookery, Part 1, they should be clear to the housewife, but if they are not fully understood, a careful review should be made of the discussions given there. The ways in which these food principles contribute to the growth and health of the body, as well as the ordinary foods that supply them in the greatest number, are tabulated in Table II for easy reference. This information will assist the housewife materially in the selection and preparation of food for her family; consequently, close attention should be given to it and constant application made of it.

32. To properly feed her family, the housewife needs to know that daily meals must include the five essential food groups—protein, fats, carbohydrates, minerals, and water. As explained in Essentials of Cookery, Part 1, these should be clear to her, but if there’s any confusion, she should carefully review the discussions there. The ways these food principles support growth and health, along with the common foods that provide them in abundance, are listed in Table II for easy reference. This information will greatly help the housewife in choosing and preparing food for her family; therefore, she should pay close attention to it and consistently apply it.

33. As has already been learned and as will be noted here, a food substance often has more than one use in the body. For instance, protein builds tissue and also yields energy, but its chief work is that of building tissue, and so it is classed first as a tissue-building food substance. The fats and carbohydrates also have a double use in the body, that of producing heat and energy and of building fatty tissue. However, as their chief use is to produce heat and energy, they are known principally as heat-producing foods. Mineral matter not only is necessary for the building of bone and muscle, but also enters into the composition of the blood and all the fluids in the body. Growth and development are not ideal without an adequate supply of the many kinds of these salts, which go to make up the tissues, nerves, blood, and other fluids in the body.

33. As has already been explained and will be noted here, a food substance often has multiple roles in the body. For example, protein not only builds tissue but also provides energy, with its main function being tissue building, so it is primarily classified as a tissue-building food. Fats and carbohydrates also serve dual purposes in the body: they provide heat and energy while also helping to build fatty tissue. However, since their primary function is to generate heat and energy, they are mainly referred to as heat-producing foods. Mineral matter is not just essential for building bone and muscle; it also contributes to the composition of blood and all bodily fluids. Growth and development cannot be optimal without an adequate supply of various types of these salts, which are vital components of tissues, nerves, blood, and other fluids in the body.

34. The body regulators must be included in the food given, for they assist in all processes carried on in the body. Some are necessary to aid in the stimulation required to carry on the processes of digestion and in some cases make up a part of the digestive fluids. Consequently, vegetables and fruits that supply these body regulators and foods that supply vitamines should be provided.

34. The body regulators need to be included in the food we eat because they support all the processes happening in the body. Some are essential for the stimulation needed for digestion and, in some cases, are part of the digestive fluids. Therefore, we should provide vegetables and fruits that offer these body regulators, as well as foods that supply vitamins.

Water, the chief body regulator, not only is essential to life itself, but forms by far a greater proportion of the body than any other single substance. The largest part of the water required in the body is supplied as a beverage and the remainder is taken in with the foods that are eaten.

Water, the primary regulator of the body, is not just essential for life, but makes up a larger portion of the body than any other single substance. Most of the water needed by the body comes from drinks, while the rest is obtained through the foods we consume.



TABLE II
FOOD SUBSTANCES AND THEIR RELATION TO GROWTH AND HEALTH
I Body-building
materials
Proteins. Meat
Fish and
shell fish
Poultry and
game
Eggs
Milk and
milk products
Legumes
(dried beans,
peas, lentils)
Wheat and
wheat products,
as corn starch
Nuts
Mineral matter,
or ash
Vegetables
Fruits
Eggs
Milk
Cereals
Meats
 
II Heat-producing
materials
Fats Animal Lard
Suet
Tallow
Butter and
cream
Vegetable Olive oil
Corn oil
Cottonseed
oil
Coconut
oil
Nut oils
Mixed
oils
Oleomargarine
Butterine
Nut butter
Crisco, etc.
Carbohydrates Starch Cereals and cereal
products
Irish and sweet
potatoes
Sugar Cane sugar and
molasses
Beet sugar
Maple sugar
and sirup
Honey
Corn sirup
and other
manufactured sirups
Proteins Same as in I
 
III Body
regulators
Water 
Mineral matter,
or ash
Same as in I
Cellulose Fruits
Vegetables
Covering of
cereals
and nuts
Food Acids Sour fruits--citric
and malic
Tomatoes--malic
Spinach--oxalic
Rhubarb--oxalic
Vitamines Fat soluble A Milk
Butter
Egg yolk
Water soluble B Green vegetables, as
spinach, chard,
lettuce, beet greens
Asparagus and stem
vegetables,
as celery
Fruit vegetables,
as tomatoes,
peppers, okra
Fruits


The importance of bulk in foods cannot be emphasized too much. The indigestible cellulose of fruits, vegetables, and cereals is of such importance in the body that some of these foods should be supplied with every meal. Therefore, their incorporation into the diet should be considered as a definite part of the menu-making plan.

The importance of bulk in foods can't be overstated. The indigestible cellulose found in fruits, vegetables, and grains plays such a crucial role in the body that some of these foods should be included in every meal. Because of this, adding them to the diet should be viewed as a key component of meal planning.

The acids of fruits are valuable as stimulants both to the appetite and to the digestion. Then, too, they give a touch of variety to a menu otherwise composed of rather bland foods. The stimulation they produce is much more healthful than that of condiments, drugs, or alcoholic beverages and should receive the preference.

The acids in fruits are great for boosting both appetite and digestion. Plus, they add a bit of variety to a menu that might otherwise be pretty bland. The stimulation they provide is far healthier than that from condiments, medications, or alcoholic drinks and should be preferred.

Vitamines are substances necessary for both growth and health. A child deprived of the foods containing them is usually not well and does not grow nor develop normally. These substances are also required in the diet of adults in order to maintain the body in a healthy condition. The leafy vegetables and milk are the foods that yield the greatest supply of vitamines. In fact, it is claimed by those who have experimented most with this matter that these two sources will supply the required amount of vitamines under all conditions.

Vitamins are essential substances for both growth and health. A child who doesn't eat foods that contain them typically isn't healthy and doesn't grow or develop normally. Adults also need these substances in their diet to keep their bodies healthy. Leafy vegetables and milk provide the highest amounts of vitamins. In fact, experts who have studied this claim that these two sources can meet the required amount of vitamins in all situations.


BALANCING THE DIET

QUANTITY AND PROPORTION OF FOODS

35. FACTORS INFLUENCING FOOD.--Numerous factors affect the kind and quantity of food necessary for an individual. Chief among these are age, size, sex, climate, and work or exercise. In addition to determining the amount of food that must be taken into the body, these factors regulate largely the suitability of the foods to be eaten. It is true, of course, that all the food substances mentioned in Table II must be included in every person's diet after the first few years of his life, but the quantity and the proportion of the various substances given vary with the age, sex, size, and work or exercise of the person and the climate in which he lives. Merely to provide dishes that supply sufficient food value is not enough. This food material must be given in forms that can be properly digested and assimilated and it must be in the right proportion for the person's needs. The aim should therefore be to provide a balanced diet, by which is meant one that includes the correct proportion of the various food substances to supply the needs of the individual.

35. FACTORS INFLUENCING FOOD.--Many factors influence the type and amount of food an individual needs. The main ones are age, size, sex, climate, and activity level. These factors not only determine how much food should be consumed but also greatly influence what kinds of food are suitable to eat. It's essential that all the food substances listed in Table II are included in everyone's diet after the first few years of life, but the amount and balance of these various substances differ based on a person's age, sex, size, activity level, and the climate they live in. Simply offering meals with enough nutritional value isn’t sufficient. The food must be presented in forms that can be properly digested and absorbed, and it needs to be in the right balance for the person's requirements. Therefore, the goal should be to provide a balanced diet, which means one that offers the right proportions of different food substances to meet an individual's needs.

36. QUANTITY OF FOOD IN CALORIES.--Without doubt, the most intelligent way in which to feed people is to compute the number of calories required daily. As will be remembered, the calorie is the unit employed to measure the amount of work that the food does in the body, either as a tissue builder or a producer of energy. The composition and food value of practically all foods are fairly well known, and with this information it is a simple matter to tell fairly accurately the amount of food that each person requires.

36. QUANTITY OF FOOD IN CALORIES.--Without a doubt, the smartest way to feed people is to calculate the number of calories they need each day. As you may recall, a calorie is the unit used to measure how much work food does in the body, whether as a builder of tissue or a source of energy. The composition and nutritional value of nearly all foods are fairly well understood, and with this information, it's relatively easy to estimate the amount of food each person needs.

As has been stated, the number of calories per day required by a person varies with the age, size, sex, and occupation of the person, as well as with the climate in which he lives. For the adult, this will vary from 1,800 to 3,000, except in cases of extremely hard labor, when it may be necessary to have as high as 4,500 calories. The average number of calories for the adult, without taking into consideration the particular conditions under which he lives or works, is about 2,500. Still a small woman who is inactive might be sufficiently fed by taking 1,800 calories a day, whereas a large man doing heavy, muscular work might require 3,500 to 4,000 daily.

As mentioned, the number of calories a person needs each day depends on their age, size, sex, occupation, and the climate they live in. For adults, this requirement typically ranges from 1,800 to 3,000 calories, except in cases of very intense labor, where it can go up to 4,500 calories. On average, adults need about 2,500 calories without considering their specific living or working conditions. However, a small, inactive woman might get by on just 1,800 calories a day, while a large man engaged in heavy physical work could require 3,500 to 4,000 calories daily.

37. IMPORTANCE OF PROPER AMOUNT OF FOOD.--Most authorities agree that it is advisable for adults and children well past the age of infancy to take all the food required in three meals. The taking of two meals a day is sometimes advocated, but the possibility of securing in two meals the same quantity of food that would ordinarily be taken in three is rather doubtful, since it is assumed that large amounts of food are not so easily disposed of as are smaller ones.

37. IMPORTANCE OF PROPER AMOUNT OF FOOD.--Most experts agree that adults and children who are beyond infancy should eat all the necessary food in three meals. Some suggest having only two meals a day, but it's questionable whether you can get the same amount of food in two meals that you would typically consume in three, as it's believed that larger quantities of food aren't as easily digested as smaller ones.

On the other hand, to overeat is always a disadvantage in more respects than one. Taking food that is not required not only is an extravagance in the matter of food, but overtaxes the digestive organs. In addition, it supplies the body with material that must be disposed of, so that extra work on the part of certain organs is required for this activity. Finally, overeating results in the development of excessive fatty tissue, which not only makes the body ponderous and inactive, but also deadens the quickness of the mind and often predisposes a person to disease or, in extreme cases, is the actual cause of illness.

On the other hand, overeating is always detrimental in more ways than one. Consuming food that isn’t necessary is not only wasteful but also puts a strain on the digestive system. Additionally, it provides the body with substances that need to be processed, which requires extra effort from certain organs. Ultimately, overeating leads to the accumulation of excess body fat, which makes a person feel heavy and sluggish, dulls mental sharpness, and often increases the risk of illness or, in severe cases, can directly cause health problems.

38. EFFECT OF WEIGHT ON DIET.--An idea of the way in which the weight of a person affects the amount of food required can be obtained by a study of Tables III and IV. As will be observed,

38. EFFECT OF WEIGHT ON DIET.--You can get an idea of how a person's weight influences their food needs by looking at Tables III and IV. As you’ll see,

Table III gives the number of calories per pound of body weight required each day by adults engaged in the various normal activities that might be carried on within 24 hours. It deals only with activity, the various factors that might alter the amounts given being taken up later. The figures given are for adults and the factors mentioned are those which affect the intake of food to the greatest extent.

Table III shows the number of calories per pound of body weight that adults need each day for different normal activities that can occur in 24 hours. It focuses solely on activity, with various factors that might change these amounts addressed later. The numbers provided are for adults, and the mentioned factors are those that most significantly influence food intake.

The lowest food requirement during the entire 24 hours is during the time of sleep, when there is no activity and food is required for only the bodily functions that go on during sleep. Sitting requires more food than sleeping, standing, a still greater amount, and walking, still more, because of the increase in energy needed for these activities.

The least amount of food needed over a 24-hour period is while sleeping since there's no activity and only the body’s functions during sleep require nutrients. Sitting needs more food than sleeping, standing requires even more, and walking demands the most because of the increased energy needed for these activities.

In a rough way, the various occupations for both men and women are classified under three different heads: Light Work, Moderate Work, and Heavy Work. It is necessary that these be understood in examining this table.

In general, the different jobs for both men and women are categorized into three groups: Light Work, Moderate Work, and Heavy Work. It's important to understand these categories when looking at this table.



TABLE III
CALORIES PER POUND FOR 24 HOURS FOR ADULTS
OccupationCalories
Sleeping12
Sitting14
Standing17
Walking20
Light work22
Moderate work24
Heavy work27


Those considered as doing light work are persons who sit or stand at their employment without any great degree of activity. They include stenographers, dressmakers, milliners, teachers, clerks, shoemakers, tailors, machine operators, elevator operators, and conductors.

Those classified as doing light work are individuals who sit or stand at their jobs with minimal physical effort. This includes stenographers, dressmakers, milliners, teachers, clerks, shoemakers, tailors, machine operators, elevator operators, and conductors.

Moderate work involves a little more activity than light work, but not so much as heavy work. Professional cooks, professional housekeepers, housekeepers in their own homes, professional chambermaids, waitresses, masons, drivers, chauffeurs, plumbers, electricians, and machinists come under this class.

Moderate work involves a bit more activity than light work, but not as much as heavy work. This category includes professional cooks, professional housekeepers, housekeepers in their own homes, professional chambermaids, waitresses, masons, drivers, chauffeurs, plumbers, electricians, and machinists.

Persons doing heavy work are the most active of all. They include farmers, laundresses, excavators, lumbermen, miners, metal workers, and soldiers on forced march.

People doing heavy work are the most active of all. They include farmers, laundry workers, excavators, lumberjacks, miners, metal workers, and soldiers on a forced march.

39. To show the variation in the amount of food required according to body weight, Table IV is given. The scale here presented has been worked out for two persons who are normal and whose weight is correct, but different, one weighing 130 pounds and the other 180 pounds. It is assumed, however, that they are occupied in 24 hours with activities that are identical, each one sleeping 8 hours, working at moderate labor for 8 hours, walking 2 hours, standing 2 hours, and sitting 4 hours.

39. To illustrate the difference in food needs based on body weight, Table IV is provided. The scale shown here is calculated for two individuals who are normal and have healthy weights, but differ from each other, with one weighing 130 pounds and the other 180 pounds. It is assumed that both are engaged in the same activities over a 24-hour period, each sleeping for 8 hours, doing moderate work for 8 hours, walking for 2 hours, standing for 2 hours, and sitting for 4 hours.



TABLE IV
DIFFERENCE IN FOOD REQUIREMENTS THROUGH VARIATION IN WEIGHT
Number of Calories for 130 Pounds
8hours, sleeping520
4hours, sitting303
2hours, standing184
2hours, walking216
8hours, moderate work1,040
-------
242,263
Number of Calories for 180 Pounds
8hours, sleeping720
4hours, sitting430
2hours, walking300
2hours, standing238
8hours, moderate work1,440
-------
243,128


To find the total number of calories required for these activities, the weight, in pounds, is multiplied by the calories per pound for 24 hours for a certain activity. Thus, as in Table IV, if a person weighing 130 pounds sleeps for 24 hours, the number of pounds of weight, or 130, would be multiplied by 12, which is the number of calories required per pound in 24 hours for sleeping. However, since only 8 hours is occupied by sleep and 8 is 1/3 of 24, the required number of calories would be only 1/3 of this number. In this way each item is worked out in the table, as is clearly shown by the following figures:

To calculate the total number of calories needed for these activities, you multiply the weight in pounds by the calories per pound needed for 24 hours for a specific activity. For example, as shown in Table IV, if a person weighs 130 pounds and sleeps for 24 hours, you would multiply their weight, 130, by 12, which is the number of calories needed per pound for sleeping over 24 hours. However, since only 8 hours are spent sleeping, and 8 is 1/3 of 24, the actual calories required would only be 1/3 of that total. This method is applied to each item in the table, as clearly demonstrated by the figures below:


For sleeping130 X 12 X 1/3 =520
For sitting130 X 14 X 1/6 =303
For standing130 X 17 X 1/12 =184
For walking130 X 20 X 1/12 =216
For moderate work130 X 24 X 1/3 =1,040
Total, as in Table IV2,263


40. In this connection, it may be interesting to know the ideal weight for persons of a given height. Table V shows the various heights for both men and women, in inches, and then gives, in pounds, the correct weight for each height. When, from this table, a person determines how far he is above or below the ideal weight, he can tell whether he should increase or decrease the number of calories he takes a day. For persons who are under weight, the calories should be increased over the number given in Table III for the normal individual if the ideal weight would be attained. On the other hand, persons who are overweight should decrease the number of calories until there is sufficient loss of weight to reach the ideal. Of course, an adjustment of this kind should be gradual, unless the case is so extreme as to require stringent measures. In most cases, a slight decrease or increase in the quantity of food taken each day will bring about the desired increase or decrease in weight.

40. In this context, it might be interesting to know the ideal weight for people of a certain height. Table V shows the different heights for both men and women, in inches, and then provides the corresponding ideal weight for each height in pounds. By using this table, someone can find out how much they are above or below their ideal weight and decide whether they need to increase or decrease their daily calorie intake. For those who are underweight, they should increase their calorie intake above the amount listed in Table III for a normal individual to reach their ideal weight. Conversely, people who are overweight should reduce their calorie intake until they lose enough weight to hit the ideal. Of course, any changes should be gradual unless the situation is severe enough to require more drastic measures. In most cases, a small increase or decrease in daily food intake will lead to the desired weight change.




TABLE V
CORRECT WEIGHT FOR CERTAIN HEIGHTS
MenWomen
Height InchesWeight Pounds Height InchesWeight Pounds
6113159119
6213360122
6313661124
6414062127
6514363131
6614764134
6715265139
6815766143
6916267147
7016768151
7117369155
7217970159
73185  
74192  
75200  

41. EFFECT OF SEX ON DIET.--The difference in sex does not affect the diet to any great extent. Authorities claim that persons of opposite sex but of the same weight and engaged in the same work require equal quantities of food. But, in most cases, the work of women is lighter than that of men, and even when this is not the case women seem to require less food, probably because of a difference in temperament. That taken by women is usually computed to be about four-fifths of the amount necessary for a man. The proportion of food substances does not differ, however, and when individual peculiarities are taken into consideration, no definite rules can be made concerning it.

41. EFFECT OF SEX ON DIET.--Gender does not significantly impact diet. Experts suggest that individuals of different genders but the same weight and engaged in similar activities need roughly the same amount of food. However, in many cases, women's work is less physically demanding than men's, and even when that’s not true, women often seem to need less food, likely due to differences in temperament. The food intake for women is generally estimated to be about 80% of what is needed for men. The types of food consumed don’t differ, and when considering individual differences, no specific guidelines can be established.

In the case of boys and girls up to the age of young manhood and womanhood, the same amount of food is required, except for the difference in activity, boys usually being more active than girls.

In the case of boys and girls up to the age of young manhood and womanhood, they both need about the same amount of food, except for the difference in their activity levels; boys are generally more active than girls.

42. EFFECT OF CLIMATE ON DIET.--The climate in which a person lives has much to do with the kind of diet he requires. In the extreme North, the lack of vegetation makes it necessary for the inhabitants to live almost entirely upon animal food except during the very short warm season. Consequently, their diet consists largely of protein and fat. Under some circumstances, a diet of this kind would be very unfavorable, but it seems to be correct for the people who live in these regions, for generations of them have accustomed themselves to it and they have suffered no hardship by doing so. It is true, however, that races of people who do not live on a well-balanced diet are not physically such fine specimens as the majority of persons found in countries where it is possible to obtain a diet that includes a sufficient supply of all the food substances.

42. EFFECT OF CLIMATE ON DIET.--The climate where a person lives greatly influences their dietary needs. In the extreme North, the lack of vegetation means that people almost exclusively rely on animal food, except during the very brief warm season. As a result, their diet is mostly made up of protein and fat. In some situations, this type of diet could be very unhealthy, but it appears to suit the people living in these areas, as generations have adapted to it without significant issues. However, it is true that groups of people who do not eat a balanced diet tend to be less physically robust compared to the majority of individuals in countries where a well-rounded diet is accessible.

43. In hot countries, the diet consists much more largely of vegetables than any other class of foods. This means that it is very high in carbohydrate and comparatively low in protein and fat. As can well be understood, a diet of this kind is much more ideal for a warm climate than a diet composed to a great extent of animal foods.

43. In hot countries, the diet mainly consists of vegetables rather than any other type of food. This means it's very high in carbohydrates and relatively low in protein and fat. It’s easy to see that a diet like this is much better suited for a warm climate than one that relies heavily on animal products.

44. In temperate zones, the diet for both summer and winter seasons varies according to the appetite of the inhabitants themselves. Usually a light diet consisting of fruits, vegetables, cereals, and a small amount of meat is found the most desirable for summer weather, while a similar one with a larger proportion of meat is the usual winter diet. On the whole, the desire for food, which, to a certain extent, is regulated by the climate, can be trusted to vary the diet fairly well for the existing conditions.

44. In temperate zones, the diet for both summer and winter seasons changes based on the appetites of the people. Typically, a lighter diet that includes fruits, vegetables, grains, and a little bit of meat is preferred in the summer, while a similar diet with a higher amount of meat is common in the winter. Overall, the craving for food, which is somewhat influenced by the climate, tends to adjust the diet quite well to fit the current conditions.

45. EFFECT OF AGE ON DIET.--The proper diet for infancy and childhood is a matter that must be discussed by itself, for it has practically no connection with other diet. It is also well understood that up to maturity there is a difference in the diet because of a difference in the needs of the body. However, from maturity up to 60 years of age, the diet is altered by the conditions already mentioned, namely weight, size, sex, climate, and work or exercise. At the age of 60, the amount of food required begins to decrease, for as a person grows older, the body and all of its organs become less active. Then, too, there is a reduced amount of physical exercise, which correspondingly reduces the necessity for food. At this time, an oversupply of food merely serves to overwork the organs, which being scarcely able to handle the normal quantity of food certainly keep in better condition if the amount of work they are called upon to do is decreased rather than increased.

45. EFFECT OF AGE ON DIET.--The right diet for infants and children is something that needs to be addressed separately, as it is largely unrelated to other diets. It’s also well known that dietary needs change until adulthood due to the body’s varying requirements. However, from adulthood up to age 60, diet should be adjusted based on factors like weight, size, sex, climate, and level of work or exercise. Once a person turns 60, their food requirements start to decrease because, as they age, the body and all its organs become less active. Additionally, there is typically less physical activity, which further lowers the need for food. At this stage, consuming too much food only puts extra strain on the organs, which already struggle to process the usual amount, and they tend to stay healthier when the workload is reduced rather than increased.

It has been estimated that persons 60 years of age require 10 per cent. less food than they formerly did; those 70 years old, 20 per cent. less; and those 80 years old, 30 per cent. less. Usually the appetite regulates this decrease in food, for the less active a person is, the less likely is the appetite to be stimulated. However, the fact that there is also a great difference in persons must not be lost sight of. Some men and women at 70 years of age are as young and just as active as others at 50 years. For such persons, the decrease in quantity of food should not begin so soon, nor should it be so great as that given for the more usual cases.

It’s estimated that people who are 60 years old need about 10% less food than they used to; those who are 70 need about 20% less; and those who are 80 need around 30% less. Typically, appetite manages this reduction in food intake, since the less active someone is, the less likely they are to feel hungry. However, it's important to consider that there are significant differences among individuals. Some men and women at 70 can be just as youthful and active as others at 50. For these individuals, the reduction in food shouldn’t start as early or be as drastic as what’s recommended for most people.

46. As there is a decrease in quantity with advancing years, so should there be a difference in the quality of the food taken. That which is easily digested and assimilated is preferable to food that is rich or highly concentrated. Usually, it is necessary to increase the laxative food in the diet at this time of life, but this matter is one of the abnormalities of diet and therefore belongs properly to medical dietetics rather than to a lesson on normal diet.

46. As we age and our appetite decreases, the quality of our food should change as well. Foods that are easy to digest and absorb are better than those that are rich or overly concentrated. It’s often necessary to add more laxative foods to the diet during this stage of life, but this topic relates more to specific dietary issues and should be addressed by medical nutrition rather than being part of a lesson on a normal diet.


DIET FOR INFANTS AND CHILDREN

47. From birth until a child has attained full growth, the food requirement is high in proportion to the size of the child. This is due to the fact that energy must be supplied for a great deal of activity, and at the same time new tissue must be manufactured from the food taken. It should be remembered, too, that all body processes during growth are extremely rapid. At birth, the average child weighs about 7 pounds, and for several days after birth there is a normal loss of weight. In a few days, however, if the diet is correct, the child begins to increase in weight and should gain about 1/2 pound a week until it is 3 months old. From this time on, its weekly gain should be slightly less, but it should be constant. If the weight remains the same or there is a decrease for a number of consecutive days or weeks, it is certain that the diet is incorrect, that the quantity of food is insufficient, or that the child is ill. The reason for the loss should be determined at once and the trouble then corrected.

47. From birth until a child reaches full growth, their food needs are high compared to their size. This is because they require energy for a lot of activity, and at the same time, new tissue needs to be built from the food consumed. It's also important to remember that all bodily processes during growth are very rapid. At birth, the average baby weighs around 7 pounds, and there is typically a normal weight loss in the first few days. However, within a few days, if the diet is right, the baby starts to gain weight and should increase by about 1/2 pound a week until they are 3 months old. After that, their weekly gain should be slightly less but still steady. If their weight stays the same or decreases for several days or weeks in a row, it's a clear sign that the diet is off, the amount of food is not enough, or the baby might be sick. The cause of the weight loss should be identified immediately, and then the issue should be addressed.

Normal diet for the infant is the mother's milk, but if this cannot be supplied, the next best diet is modified cow's milk, which for the young child must be greatly diluted. If it is found necessary to give proprietary, or manufactured, foods, raw food of some kind should be used in addition, the best way to supply this being with a little orange juice or other fruit juice. At the age of 3 months, this may be given in small quantity if it is diluted, and then the amount may be gradually increased as the child grows older.

The normal diet for an infant is the mother's milk, but if that's not available, the next best option is modified cow's milk, which needs to be heavily diluted for a young child. If it's necessary to use store-bought, or commercial, baby foods, some form of raw food should also be included, ideally a little orange juice or another fruit juice. Starting at 3 months, this can be given in small amounts if diluted, and the quantity can be gradually increased as the child grows.

48. EFFECT OF WEIGHT ON CHILDREN'S DIET.--The food requirement in the case of children is determined by weight. To decide on the proper amount, it is necessary to know the normal weight at certain ages. At birth, as has been stated, the normal weight is 7 pounds; at 6 months, 15 pounds; at 1 year, 21 pounds; at 2 years, 30 pounds. The food requirement for 24 hours per pound of weight is as follows:

48. EFFECT OF WEIGHT ON CHILDREN'S DIET.--A child's food needs depend on their weight. To figure out the right amount, you need to know the typical weight at specific ages. At birth, the normal weight is 7 pounds; at 6 months, it's 15 pounds; at 1 year, it's 21 pounds; at 2 years, it's 30 pounds. The daily food requirement per pound of weight is as follows:


CALORIES PER LB. IN 24 HOURS
Children up to 1 year45
Children from 1 to 2 years40
Children from 2 to 5 years36

From a study of these figures, it will be noted that there is a gradual decrease in the required number of calories per pound as the child grows older. The decrease continues until maturity is reached, and then the scale for adults applies.

From a study of these figures, it will be noted that there is a gradual decrease in the required number of calories per pound as the child grows older. The decrease continues until maturity is reached, and then the scale for adults applies.

49. EFFECT OF AGE ON CHILDREN'S DIET.--A child should not be kept exclusively on milk for more than 6 or 8 months, and then only in case it is fed on the mother's milk. Fruit juice, which has already been mentioned as an additional food, is recommended if the diet requires raw food or if it is necessary to make the child's food more laxative. When the child reaches the age of 6 months, it should be taught to take foods from a spoon or a cup; then when it must be weaned, the task of weaning will be much easier. At the age of 8 or 9 months, depending on the condition of the child, small amounts of well-cooked, strained cereals may be added to the diet, and these may gradually be decreased as the food is increased in variety. Up to 1-1/2 years of age, a child should have 8 ounces of milk three times a day, which amounts to 1-1/2 pints. At this age, half of a soft-cooked egg or a spoonful or two of tender meat chopped very fine, may be given, and for each such addition 4 ounces of milk should be taken out of the day's feeding. But from 1-1/2 years up to 5 years, at least 1 pint of milk a day should be included in the diet.

49. EFFECT OF AGE ON CHILDREN'S DIET.--A child shouldn’t be fed only milk for more than 6 to 8 months, and even then, it should ideally be breast milk. Fruit juice, which has already been mentioned as an extra food option, is recommended if the diet needs raw foods or if it’s necessary to help with digestion. When the child turns 6 months old, they should start learning to eat from a spoon or a cup; this will make weaning much easier when the time comes. By 8 or 9 months, depending on the child’s condition, small amounts of well-cooked, strained cereals can be introduced, and these can be gradually reduced as the variety of foods increases. Up to 1.5 years, a child should have 8 ounces of milk three times a day, totaling 1.5 pints. At this age, they can have half of a soft-cooked egg or a spoonful or two of finely chopped tender meat, and for each addition, 4 ounces of milk should be taken out of the daily intake. However, from 1.5 years to 5 years, at least 1 pint of milk a day should be part of the diet.

At a little past 1 year of age, a normal child may begin taking a few well-cooked vegetables, such as a bit of baked potato, a spoonful of spinach, carrot, celery, green peas, or other vegetables that have been forced through a sieve or chopped very fine. At 1-1/2 years, the normal child should be taking each day one vegetable, a cereal, buttered bread or toast softened with milk, eggs, fruit juice, a little jelly, and plain custards. However, each of these foods should be added to the diet with caution and in small amounts, and if it appears to disagree with the child in any way, it should be discontinued until such time as it can be tolerated.

At just over 1 year old, a typical child might start eating small amounts of well-cooked vegetables, like a bit of baked potato, a spoonful of spinach, carrot, celery, green peas, or other veggies that have been mashed or finely chopped. By 1.5 years, the average child should be eating a vegetable, some cereal, buttered bread or toast soaked in milk, eggs, fruit juice, a little jelly, and plain custards every day. However, each of these foods should be introduced carefully and in small portions, and if any of them seem to upset the child in any way, they should be removed from the diet until they can be tolerated.

In case a child is being raised on a formula of cow's milk and it is a strong, normal child, it should be taking whole milk at the age of 8 or 10 months. If the child is not strong, the milk may still be diluted with a small amount of sterile water, but this should be gradually decreased until the child is able to tolerate whole milk.

If a child is being raised on cow's milk formula and is strong and healthy, they should start drinking whole milk at 8 or 10 months old. If the child isn't strong, the milk can be diluted with a little bit of sterile water, but this should be gradually reduced until the child can handle whole milk.

50. FEEDING SCALE FOR INFANTS.--It is, of course, a difficult matter to make definite rules for the feeding of all children, for conditions arise with many children that call for special plans. However, for children that are normal, a feeding scale may be followed quite closely, and so the one given in Table VI is suggested.

50. FEEDING SCALE FOR INFANTS.--It’s definitely challenging to create strict guidelines for feeding all children, as different situations may require unique approaches for many kids. However, for children who are developing normally, a feeding scale can be closely adhered to, so the one provided in Table VI is recommended.



TABLE VI

FEEDING SCALE FOR INFANTS
First Three MonthsMilk.
Fourth MonthSame as for preceding months and orange juice and cereal waters.
Sixth MonthSame as for preceding months and well-cooked and strained cereal.
Eighth MonthSame as for preceding months and beef juice, beef broth, and yolk of soft-cooked egg.
Tenth Month Same as for preceding months and unstrained cereal, half of soft-cooked egg, both white and yolk, chopped or strained cooked vegetables, such as spinach and other greens, asparagus, carrots, celery, and squash, stale bread, crackers, toast and butter.
Eleventh Month Same as for preceding months and well-cooked rice, baked potato, jelly, plain custard, corn-starch custard, and junket.
Twelfth Month Same as for preceding months and whole egg, a tablespoonful of tender meat, string beans, peas, turnips, onions, chopped or strained applesauce, stewed prunes, and other fruits.
Eighteenth Month Same as for preceding months and home-made ice cream, plain sponge cake, milk soups, and cereal puddings.


This scale is to be used by adding to the diet for one month the foods suggested for the next month, giving them at the time the child reaches the age for which they are mentioned. For instance, a child of 8 months may have everything included in the first three, four, and six months and, in addition, beef juice, beef broth, and the yolk of a soft-cooked egg, which is the diet suggested for the eighth month. Then at the tenth month it may have all of these things together with those given for this month.

This scale should be used by adding the recommended foods for the next month to the child's diet for one month, starting when the child reaches the appropriate age. For example, a child who is 8 months old can have everything that’s included in the menus for the first three, four, and six months, plus beef juice, beef broth, and the yolk of a soft-cooked egg, which are part of the suggested diet for the eighth month. Then at the tenth month, the child can have all of these foods along with those recommended for that month.

51. When any of these foods is first added to the diet, much care is necessary. Each new food should be given cautiously, a teaspoonful or two at a time being sufficient at first, and its effect should be carefully observed before more is given. If it is found to disagree, it should not be repeated. If at any time a child is subject to an attack of indigestion, its diet should be reduced to simple foods and when it has recovered, new foods should be added slowly again. In the case of any of the ordinary illnesses to which children are subject, such as colds, etc., the diet should be restricted to very simple food, and preferably to liquids, until the illness has passed. The diet of a baby still being fed on milk should be reduced to barley water or a very little skim milk diluted with a large amount of sterile water. When the illness is over, the child may be gradually brought back to its normal diet.

51. When introducing any of these foods into the diet for the first time, it's important to be cautious. Each new food should be given carefully, with just a teaspoon or two at a time initially, and its effects should be closely monitored before giving more. If it seems to cause any issues, it should not be offered again. If a child has an upset stomach at any point, their diet should go back to simple foods, and once they're better, new foods can be reintroduced slowly. In the case of common illnesses that affect kids, like colds, the diet should be limited to very simple foods, preferably liquids, until the illness is over. For babies who are still on milk, the diet should be limited to barley water or a small amount of skim milk mixed with a lot of sterile water. Once the illness is resolved, the child can gradually return to their usual diet.


DIET FOR THE FAMILY

52. One of the difficulties of every housewife having a family composed of persons of widely different tastes and ages is the preparation of meals that will contain sufficient food of the correct kind for all of them. Children up to 6 years of age usually require something especially prepared for their meals, except breakfast, but, as a rule, the selection of the diet for children from 6 years up to 15 or 16 years of age is merely a matter of taking from the meal prepared for the remainder of the family the right amount of the various foods. Tea and coffee should not be included in the diet of growing children, and should under no circumstances be given to small children. If the proper method is followed in this matter, no difficulty will result, but where children expect to eat the food served to the others at the table and are not content with what is given to them, it is better not to feed them at the same table with the adults.

52. One of the challenges faced by every homemaker with a family of differing tastes and ages is preparing meals that provide the right kinds of food for everyone. Kids up to 6 years old usually need meals specially made for them, except at breakfast. However, for children aged 6 to 15 or 16, it's mostly about taking the right portions of the foods prepared for the rest of the family. Tea and coffee shouldn't be part of growing children's diets and must never be given to young kids. If the right approach is followed, there shouldn’t be any issues. However, if children expect to eat what the adults have and are dissatisfied with their own food, it might be best not to serve them at the same table as the adults.

53. The most satisfactory way in which to arrange meals that are to be served to persons of different ages is to include several foods that may be fed to all members of the family and then to select certain others proper only for adults and still others suitable for the children. A sample of such a menu for supper is the one here given. It is assumed that the children that are to eat this meal are not infants.

53. The best way to plan meals for people of different ages is to include a variety of foods that everyone in the family can enjoy, while also selecting some dishes that are just for adults and others that are suitable for kids. Here’s an example of a dinner menu that fits this criteria. It’s assumed that the children eating this meal are not infants.

SUPPER MENU


ADULTS

  • Rice Croquettes with Cheese Sauce
  • Lettuce Salad
  • Bread, Butter, Jelly
  • Baked Apples
  • Plain Cookies
  • Tea
CHILDREN

  • Steamed Rice
  • Bread, Butter, Jelly
  • Baked Apples
  • Plain Cookies
  • Milk

A menu of this kind is not difficult to prepare, and still it meets the needs of both the children and the adults of the family. The main dish for each has the same foundation--rice. Enough to serve the entire family may be steamed. Then some may be retained for the children and the rest made up into croquettes and served with cheese sauce to the adults. The remainder of the menu, bread, butter, jelly, baked apples, and plain cookies, may be eaten by every one. Tea will probably be preferred by the adults, but milk should be served to the children. Other suitable menus may be planned without any extra trouble if just a little thought is given to the matter.

A menu like this is easy to prepare, and it satisfies both the kids and the adults in the family. The main dish for everyone is based on rice. You can steam enough to serve the whole family. Some can be saved for the kids, while the rest can be made into croquettes and served with cheese sauce for the adults. The rest of the menu—bread, butter, jelly, baked apples, and plain cookies—can be enjoyed by everyone. Adults will probably prefer tea, but kids should get milk. With just a little thought, you can come up with other suitable menus without any extra hassle.


PROPORTION OF FOOD SUBSTANCES

54. The proportion of food substances necessary for building and repairing the body and for providing it with material necessary for its various functions is a matter to which much discussion has been given. Formerly, it was not understood that the protein should be limited to exactly what the body needed and that its requirements were comparatively low regardless of conditions or exercise. The standard for diet very often allowed as much as 25 per cent. in protein. This percentage has been gradually reduced by the discovery of the actual body needs, so that now it is believed by the most dependable authorities that only about 10 per cent. of the entire day's rations for the adult should be protein. The growing child needs a greater proportion than this because he is building up muscle tissue. The adult whose muscles have been entirely constructed requires protein only for repair, and 10 per cent. of the day's food in protein is sufficient for this. This means that if the total calories for the day are 2,500, only 250 of them need be protein.

54. The amount of food needed to build and repair the body, as well as to provide materials for its various functions, has been a topic of much discussion. In the past, it wasn’t understood that protein intake should be limited to exactly what the body needs and that those needs are relatively low, regardless of conditions or exercise. The standard diet often allowed for as much as 25 percent protein. This percentage has gradually decreased as we’ve learned more about the body’s actual requirements, so now most reliable experts believe that only around 10 percent of an adult's total daily intake should come from protein. Growing children require a larger percentage because they are building muscle tissue. An adult, whose muscles are already developed, only needs protein for repair, and 10 percent of daily food intake in protein is adequate for this. This means that if the total calorie intake for the day is 2,500, only 250 calories need to come from protein.

55. The remainder of the calories are largely made up by fat and carbohydrate. These, however, need not be in such exact proportion as the protein, for no real danger lies in having either one in a greater amount than the ideal proportion. This is usually three-tenths fat and six-tenths carbohydrate or in a diet of 2,500 calories, 750 fat and 1,500 carbohydrate. The carbohydrate is very much in preponderance because of its easy digestion and assimilation. As may be imagined, it is not a simple matter to figure a diet as closely and carefully as this, and it is only in extreme cases where such planning is necessary.

55. The rest of the calories mainly come from fat and carbohydrates. However, they don’t need to be in such precise amounts as protein, because there’s no real risk in having either one exceed the ideal ratio. This is typically three tenths fat and six tenths carbohydrate, or in a 2,500 calorie diet, 750 calories from fat and 1,500 from carbohydrates. The carbohydrate is much more dominant due to its easy digestion and absorption. As you can imagine, it's not easy to calculate a diet this precisely, and such detailed planning is only necessary in extreme situations.

56. The required amount of protein for the ordinary daily diet can be had with about 3 ounces of meat, together with that which is found in the bread, vegetables, and cereals taken each day. At any rate, the menu should be planned so as to supply a protein dish for at least one meal in the day. The fat is supplied largely by the butter taken and the fat used in the cooking of foods. The carbohydrate is provided by the starch found in cereals, bread, and vegetables and by the sugar contained in fruits, as well as that used in the preparation of various foods and in the sweetening of beverages, cereals, and fruits.

56. The average daily diet needs about 3 ounces of meat to get the required amount of protein, along with the protein found in the bread, vegetables, and grains consumed each day. In any case, the menu should be designed to include a protein-based dish for at least one meal each day. Fat mainly comes from the butter used and the fat involved in cooking the food. Carbohydrates are supplied by the starch in grains, bread, and vegetables, as well as the sugar found in fruits and that added in the preparation of various foods and in sweetening drinks, grains, and fruits.

In addition to providing these food substances, each meal should include at least one food, and for dinner preferably two foods, that will supply a large amount of mineral salts, cellulose, and vitamines. As will be remembered, fruits and vegetables are the foods to be used for this purpose.

In addition to providing these food substances, each meal should include at least one food, and for dinner preferably two foods, that will supply a large amount of minerals, fiber, and vitamins. As you may recall, fruits and vegetables are the foods to be used for this purpose.

57. This method of menu planning may seem somewhat difficult at first thought, but in reality it is not different from that which the intelligent housewife follows who attempts to provide her family with a variety of foods and who appreciates the value of that variety. If she plans her menu in this manner, prepares the food so that it will be wholesome, easily digested, and given in the proper proportion, and at the same time watches the weights of the members of the family in the manner suggested, she need have no fear about the general health of her family, for it will be well maintained.

57. This way of planning meals might seem a bit challenging at first, but it's really not any different from what a smart homemaker does to provide her family with a range of foods while recognizing the importance of variety. If she organizes her meals like this, prepares the food to be nutritious, easy to digest, and served in the right amounts, and also keeps an eye on the family members' weights as suggested, she shouldn't worry about their overall health, as it will be well taken care of.



MENU MAKING AND TABLE SERVICE

GENERAL RULES FOR MENU MAKING

58. Perhaps the greatest problem in the planning of menus for a family is that of securing sufficient variety. A housewife who uses the same recipes and the same combinations of food repeatedly is apt to get into a rut and the members of her family will undoubtedly lose interest in their meals. This condition results even with the dishes of which those of the family are extremely fond. However, they will not tire so quickly of the foods they care for if such foods are served to them less often. Then, too, there is more chance to practice economy when a larger variety of food is used.

58. One of the biggest challenges in planning family meals is ensuring enough variety. A homemaker who keeps using the same recipes and food combinations can easily fall into a routine, and her family members will likely lose interest in their meals. This can happen even with dishes that everyone loves. However, they won't get tired of their favorite foods as quickly if those foods are served less often. Plus, using a wider variety of foods can help save money.

The importance of planning menus systematically should not be overlooked, either, no matter how simple they may be. Even if breakfast consists of only two or more dishes, luncheon of three or four, and dinner of no more than four or five, a certain amount of planning should be done in order that the meal may be properly balanced. If the suggestions for meal planning already given are applied to this work, very little difficulty will be experienced in providing meals that are both attractive and properly balanced. In addition to these suggestions, a few general rules for menu making ought to be observed. Most of these are simple and can be followed with very little effort.

The importance of planning menus in an organized way shouldn't be ignored, no matter how basic they are. Even if breakfast includes just two dishes, lunch has three or four, and dinner features no more than four or five, some planning is necessary to ensure the meal is well-balanced. If the meal planning tips provided earlier are applied here, it will be easy to create meals that are both appealing and balanced. Along with these tips, a few general rules for creating menus should be kept in mind. Most of these are straightforward and can be followed with minimal effort.

59. Unless the menu is planned for a special occasion, the cost of the various dishes should be made to balance. For instance, if an expensive meat is to be served, the vegetables and the salad selected to accompany it should be of moderate cost. On the other hand, if an expensive salad is to be served, a dessert of moderate cost, such as a simple rice pudding, should be used to offset the price of the other dish. Planning meals in this way is urged for the sake of economy, and if it is carefully followed, all the meals may be made to average about the same cost.

59. Unless the menu is for a special occasion, the costs of the different dishes should be balanced. For example, if you're serving an expensive meat, the vegetables and salad that go with it should be reasonably priced. Conversely, if you're serving a pricey salad, opt for a more affordable dessert, like a simple rice pudding, to balance the overall cost. Planning meals this way is recommended for the sake of budgeting, and if you stick to it carefully, all the meals can average out to about the same cost.

60. Another important point in successful meal planning is the avoidance of two dishes in the same meal made from the same food. For instance, tomato soup and tomato salad should not be served in the same meal, for the combination is undesirable. Corn soup contrasts much better with tomato salad than does the tomato soup, for it has the bland flavor that is needed to offset the acid salad. Some housewives, it is true, object to such planning on the ground that it does not give them opportunity to utilize all the materials they may have on hand at the same time. But in nearly every instance the materials can be used to excellent advantage in meals that are to follow and, in addition, the gain in variety is sufficient to warrant the adoption of such a method.

60. Another important aspect of successful meal planning is avoiding two dishes made from the same main ingredient in the same meal. For example, you shouldn't serve tomato soup and tomato salad together, as this combination isn't appealing. Corn soup pairs much better with tomato salad because it has a mild flavor that balances out the acidity of the salad. Some homemakers may resist this approach, arguing that it doesn't allow them to use all the ingredients they have at once. However, in most cases, the ingredients can be used effectively in upcoming meals, and the increase in variety is worth adopting this method.

61. As there should be variety in the materials used to make up the dishes of a meal, so should there be variety in the flavor of the foods selected. Rice, macaroni, and potato, for instance, make an undesirable combination. They are too similar because they are all high in starch; besides, they resemble one another too closely in consistency and they are all bland in flavor. If a meal contains one or two bland dishes, a special effort should be made to supply some highly flavored dish in order to relieve the monotony. The same thing may be said of acid foods; that is, an oversupply of these is just as distasteful as too many bland foods.

61. Just as there should be variety in the ingredients used to prepare a meal, there should also be variety in the flavors of the foods chosen. For example, rice, macaroni, and potatoes together make a poor combination. They are too similar because they are all starchy; also, they have a similar texture and are all pretty bland in flavor. If a meal includes one or two bland dishes, extra effort should be made to add a highly flavored dish to break the monotony. The same applies to acidic foods; having too many of them is just as unappetizing as having too many bland foods.

62. To have fresh fruit for the daily breakfast would be very delightful, but such fruit cannot always be secured. When fresh fruit cannot be had every day, it is better to alternate it with canned fruit or stewed dried fruit than to have it for several days in succession and then have to serve the alternative for a number of days. The same is true of cereals. If use is to be made of both cooked and uncooked cereals, it is much better to alternate them than to serve the cooked ones for breakfast for an entire week and then uncooked ones the next week.

62. It would be really nice to have fresh fruit for breakfast every day, but that isn't always possible. When fresh fruit isn't available daily, it's better to mix it up with canned fruit or stewed dried fruit instead of having fresh fruit for several days in a row and then switching to the alternative for a long stretch. The same goes for cereals. If you plan to use both cooked and uncooked cereals, it's much better to alternate them rather than serving cooked ones every day for a whole week and then switching to uncooked ones the following week.

63. When two vegetables are used in the same meal, they should be different. Sweet potatoes and white potatoes, although often served together, do not belong in the same meal. In fact, for most seasons of the year, two vegetables dissimilar in consistency should be supplied. For instance, if spinach is included in a meal, some contrasting vegetable, such as carrots, shell beans, etc., should be served with it. Beets and carrots would not make a good combination, nor should cabbage be combined with spinach, especially if both vegetables are prepared with a sour dressing.

63. When you include two vegetables in a meal, they should be different from each other. Sweet potatoes and white potatoes, even though they’re often served together, shouldn’t be in the same meal. In fact, for most of the year, it’s best to have two vegetables that differ in texture. For example, if spinach is on the menu, it should be paired with a contrasting vegetable, like carrots or shell beans. Beets and carrots don’t make a good combo, and cabbage shouldn’t be served with spinach, especially if both are dressed with something sour.

64. A bland food or one high in fat, such as roast pork, certain kinds of fish, etc., is much more palatable if a highly seasoned sauce or another highly seasoned food or, in fact, a food of an entirely different flavor is served with it. Apple sauce or baked apples are usually served with roast pork for this purpose, while sour sauces or pickles of some description are served with fish to relieve its blandness.

64. A plain food or one that's high in fat, like roast pork or some types of fish, tastes way better when paired with a flavorful sauce or another seasoned dish, or even something that has a completely different taste. Apple sauce or baked apples are typically served with roast pork for this reason, while sour sauces or some kind of pickles are served with fish to counter its blandness.

65. To secure the most successful meals, the main course should be decided upon first and the additional dishes, such as soup, salad, and dessert, should be the second consideration. In this method of planning meals, they can be properly balanced, for if the main course is heavy, the others can be made light or some of them omitted altogether, while if the main course is a light one, heavier dishes may be selected to accompany it.

65. To create the best meals, you should choose the main course first and then think about the other dishes, like soup, salad, and dessert. This way of planning meals helps to keep them balanced. If the main course is heavy, the other dishes can be lighter or skipped completely, and if the main course is light, you can choose heavier dishes to go with it.

Whenever it is possible to do so, the heavy meal of the day should be served at noon and the lighter one in the evening. This plan should always be followed for children, and it is preferable for adults. However, having dinner at noon is often very inconvenient and sometimes impossible, because frequently one or more members of the family are at business some distance from home and their coming home at noon for dinner is impractical. In such an event, the evening meal should be the heavy one, but it should not be made too hearty and overeating should be avoided.

Whenever possible, the biggest meal of the day should be served at noon, with a lighter meal in the evening. This should always be the case for children, and it’s better for adults too. However, having dinner at noon is often very inconvenient and sometimes impossible, as one or more family members are often at work far from home, making it impractical for them to come home for lunch. In that case, the evening meal should be the larger one, but it shouldn't be too heavy, and overeating should be avoided.

At all meals, tea and coffee should be used sparingly. Especially should this rule be followed by persons who are nervous, or high strung, or are troubled with indigestion and insomnia. At any rate, it is advisable not to drink either of these beverages at night.

At every meal, tea and coffee should be consumed in moderation. This guideline is especially important for those who are anxious, high-strung, or have issues with indigestion and insomnia. In any case, it's best to avoid drinking either of these drinks at night.


METHODS OF SECURING VARIETY IN MEALS

CARD-FILE SYSTEM OF MENU MAKING

66. With the general rules for meal planning in mind, the housewife is well prepared to arrange menus that will be properly balanced, as well as varied and attractive. One means of securing variety in menus, and at the same time supplying oneself with a very convenient piece of kitchen equipment, consists in placing the recipes used on small cards and filing them in a card file under the headings to which they belong, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8. For instance, a heading should be made for soups, one for potatoes, and so on. These cards may then be rotated in order to make up menus. When the first card of each group has been used, it should be placed at the back of the others in that group; then each one will come in the order in which it was originally placed in the file. Of course, when the cards are not filed alphabetically, it is a little more difficult to find the recipes one needs at a particular time, and so if desired other means of using the cards for menu making may be easily devised without changing their position.

66. With the basic rules for meal planning in mind, the homemaker is ready to create menus that are well-balanced, varied, and appealing. One way to add variety to menus while also providing a handy piece of kitchen equipment is to write recipes on small cards and organize them in a card file under relevant categories, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8. For example, create a category for soups, another for potatoes, and so forth. These cards can be rotated to help create menus. Once the first card in each category has been used, it should be moved to the back of the stack, allowing each card to be used in the order it was originally arranged in the file. However, if the cards are not organized alphabetically, it can be a bit harder to find the recipes you need at a specific moment, so other methods of using the cards for menu planning can be easily developed without changing their order.

[Illustration: FIG. 7]

In addition to serving as a basis for menus, this arrangement takes the place of a cook book. In fact, it is much more convenient, for instead of a book containing recipes on the table where the work is being done, a small card, which takes up less space and is much less likely to be in the way, may be substituted.

In addition to being a foundation for menus, this layout acts as a cookbook. In fact, it's way more convenient because instead of having a book filled with recipes on the table where the cooking is happening, you can use a small card that takes up less space and is much less likely to get in the way.

[Illustration: FIG. 8]

DINNER MENUS

67. To assist the housewife materially in planning dinners in great variety, Table VII, which contains suggestions for dinner menus, is given. As will be noted, it is intended that each dinner shall consist of a soup, a meat, potatoes in some form, another vegetable, a salad, and a dessert. It is not necessary, of course, to include all these dishes when a simpler meal is desired, but a number of suggestions are given in each group so that there may be a good selection. In order to use this table to advantage and to secure a large variety of menus, different combinations of the various foods may be made. Then, too, the combinations given may be rotated so that frequent repetition of the same combination will be avoided. This table therefore has the advantage over meals planned for 14 or even 21 days, for these must be repeated once in 2 or 3 weeks.

67. To help the homemaker plan a variety of dinners, Table VII provides suggestions for dinner menus. Each dinner is designed to include a soup, a meat dish, potatoes in some form, another vegetable, a salad, and a dessert. Of course, it’s not necessary to include all these dishes if a simpler meal is preferred, but there are plenty of suggestions in each category to ensure a good selection. To make the most of this table and create a wide variety of menus, different combinations of the various foods can be used. Additionally, the suggested combinations can be rotated to avoid repeating the same combination too often. This table offers an advantage over meal plans that cover 14 or even 21 days, as those need to be repeated once every 2 or 3 weeks.



TABLE VII
SUGGESTIONS FOR DINNER MENUS
SOUP 1. Tomato Bouillon
2. Rice
3. Cream of Corn
4. Noodle
5. Cream of Pea
6. Julienne
7. Clear Bouillon
8. Oxtail
9. Split-Pea Purée
10. Cream of Tomato
11. Celery
12. Cream of Onion
13. Barley Broth
14. Cream of Asparagus
15. Vegetable
16. Corn Chowder
MEAT 1. Roast Beef
2. Pork Chops
3. Macaroni and Cheese
4. Broiled Hamburg
5. Baked Fish
6. Broiled Steak
7. Kidney-Bean Loaf
8. Roast Pork
9. Lamb Chops
10. Roast Chicken
11. Baked Beans
12. Meat Loaf
13. Liver and Bacon
14. Roast Mutton
15. Broiled Ham
16. Scalloped Salmon
17. Roast Lamb
18. Lima-Bean Loaf
19. Veal Tongue
20. Fried Oysters
POTATOES 1. Boiled Potatoes with Butter and Parsley
2. Scalloped Potatoes
3. Hashed-Brown Potatoes
4. Baked Potatoes
5. Potato Puff
6. French Fried Potatoes
7. Potato Patties
8. Roast Potatoes
9. Candied Sweet Potatoes
10. Mashed Potatoes
11. Creamed Potatoes
12. Stuffed Potatoes
13. Baked Sweet Potatoes
14. Potatoes au Gratin
15. Sautéd Potatoes
VEGETABLES 1. Spinach
2. Green Peas
3. Breaded Tomatoes
4. Squash
5. Red Beets
6. Sweet Corn
7. Buttered Carrots
8. Mashed Turnips
9. Scalloped Eggplant
10. Buttered Cauliflower
11. Hot Slaw
12. Scalloped Tomatoes
13. Carrots and Peas
14. Buttered Kohlrabi
15. Baked Onions
16. Sautéd Eggplant
17. Stuffed Peppers
18. Creamed Turnips
19. Browned Parsnips
20. Sautéd Tomatoes
21. Escalloped Cabbage
22. Creamed Onions
23. String Beans
24. Asparagus
25. Succotash
SALADS 1. Apple and Celery
2. Lettuce
3. Banana
4. Orange and Coconut
5. Cabbage
6. Tomato
7. Peas and Celery
8. Apple, Date, and Orange
9. Asparagus
10. Pineapple and Nut
11. Green Pepper and Cheese
12. String Bean
13. Fruit
14. Combination
15. Cucumber
16. Waldorf
17. Cabbage and Celery
18. Pineapple and Cream Cheese
19. Humpty Dumpty
DESSERTS 1. Chocolate Blanc Mange
2. Brown Betty
3. Raisin Pie
4. Crackers and Cheese
5. Fruit Gelatine
6. Cake and Fruit
7. Apricot Fluff
8. Tapioca Pudding
9. Steamed Pudding
10. Short Cake
11. Prunes in Jelly
12. Rice Pudding
13. Custard Pie
14. Baked Apples
15. Peach Cobbler
16. Chocolate Bread Pudding
17. Pineapple Tapioca
18. Ice Cream
19. Jelly Tarts
20. Gingerbread and Whipped Cream
21. Indian Pudding, with Custard Sauce
22. Floating Island
23. Prune Fluff
24. Nuts and Raisins


68. In the application of Table VII, use should be made of the dishes numbered 1 in the various groups for the first day's menu. This dinner, then, will consist of tomato bouillon, roast beef, boiled potatoes with butter and parsley, spinach, apple-and-celery salad, and chocolate blanc mange. In this way, the menus should be made by going through the entire list and combining the dishes whose numbers correspond. Upon coming to the last of the soups, which is No. 16, and attempting to make up a menu, it will be discovered that there are only fifteen varieties of potato dishes. In order to obtain a menu, the rotation must be begun again, and so No. 1 of the potato dishes is used. This menu would therefore consist of corn chowder, scalloped salmon, boiled potatoes with butter and parsley, sautéd eggplant, peach-and-cream-cheese salad, and chocolate bread pudding.

68. When using Table VII, start with the dishes numbered 1 from each group for the first day's menu. This dinner will include tomato broth, roast beef, boiled potatoes with butter and parsley, spinach, apple and celery salad, and chocolate panna cotta. You should create menus by going through the whole list and combining dishes with corresponding numbers. When you reach the last soup, No. 16, you'll notice there are only fifteen types of potato dishes. To create a menu, you need to start the rotation again, so you use No. 1 from the potato dishes. This menu would then include corn chowder, scalloped salmon, boiled potatoes with butter and parsley, sautéed eggplant, peach and cream cheese salad, and chocolate bread pudding.

In planning menus with the aid of this table, the housewife may not be able to use a certain dish that is suggested because it is out of season, cannot be procured, or resembles too closely some of the other dishes in the menu. In such an event, she should select another dish to take the place of the one that spoils the combination. Likewise, she should not hesitate to make any change that will result in producing properly balanced meals.

In planning menus using this table, the homemaker might not be able to include a particular dish that’s suggested because it’s out of season, unavailable, or too similar to other dishes in the menu. In that case, she should choose another dish to replace the one that disrupts the combination. Similarly, she shouldn't hesitate to make any changes that will result in well-balanced meals.


LUNCHEON MENUS

69. To aid the housewife in the preparation of suitable luncheons, a large number of luncheon menus are here given. These menus will serve to give variety in the preparation of meals if they are rotated properly and changes are made every once in a while in making up combinations of food for this important and interesting meal.

69. To help the homemaker with planning appropriate lunches, a wide range of lunch menus is provided here. These menus can add variety to meal preparation when rotated properly, and it's a good idea to occasionally change up the combinations of foods for this important and enjoyable meal.

THE PLANNING OF MEALS

No. 1
  • Rice Croquettes
  • Bread and Butter
  • Fruit Salad
  • Gingerbread and Cream Cheese
No. 2
  • Cream-of-Corn Soup
  • Egg Salad
  • Whole-Wheat Muffins
  • Baked Bananas
  • Tea
No. 3
  • Creamed Chicken on Toast
  • Sliced Tomatoes
  • Rolls
  • Fruit Cake
No. 4
  • Scalloped Oysters
  • Apple-and-Celery Salad
  • Wafers
  • Tea
No. 5
  • Cream-of-Tomato Soup
  • Hashed-Brown Potatoes
  • Graham Bread and Butter
  • Baked Apples
  • Tea
No. 6
  • Macaroni and Cheese
  • Cabbage Salad
  • Wafers
  • Sugar Cookies
  • Coffee
No. 7
  • Eggs à la Goldenrod
  • Rice with Raisins
  • Bread and Jam
  • Tea
No. 8
  • Omelet
  • Toast
  • Prune Whip
  • Vanilla Wafers
  • Tea
No. 9
  • Consommé
  • Chicken Salad
  • Rolls
  • Warm Gingerbread and Whipped Cream
No. 10
  • Creamed Dried Beef on Toast
  • Lettuce Salad
  • Stewed Fruit
  • Tea
No. 11
  • Scalloped Corn
  • Brown Bread and Butter
  • Fruit Salad
  • Cheese Straws
  • Coffee
No. 12
  • Cold Ham
  • Potato Salad
  • Graham Bread and Butter
  • Cookies
  • Tea
No. 13
  • Oyster Stew
  • Wafers
  • Celery
  • Pineapple
  • Sponge Cake
No. 14
  • Cheese Soufflé
  • Baked Tomato on Toast
  • Rice Pudding
  • Tea
No. 15
  • Meat Pie
  • Cranberry Jelly
  • Table Raisins
  • Coffee

BREAKFAST MENUS

70. WINTER BREAKFAST MENUS.--To assist the housewife in planning properly balanced breakfast menus for winter, a number of suggestions are here given. These necessarily differ from breakfast menus for other seasons because of the difference in the food that can be obtained. They are usually of a more hearty nature and contain more heat-producing foods.

70. WINTER BREAKFAST MENUS.--To help the homemaker plan well-balanced breakfast menus for winter, here are some suggestions. These menus are different from those for other seasons because of the availability of different foods. They tend to be more filling and include more heat-producing foods.

No. 1
  • Oranges
  • Rolled Oats with Cream
  • Soft-Cooked Eggs
  • Toast and Butter
  • Coffee
No. 2
  • Stewed Prunes
  • Cream of Wheat with Cream
  • Broiled Bacon
  • Muffins and Butter
  • Coffee
No. 3
  • Baked Apples
  • Griddle Cakes with Maple Sirup
  • Sausage Patties
  • Coffee
No. 4
  • Rolls and Butter
  • Corn Flakes with Hot Milk
  • Grapefruit
  • Coffee
No. 5
  • Vitos with Dates
  • French Toast and Butter
  • Jelly
  • Hot Chocolate
No. 6
  • Apple Sauce
  • Fried Cornmeal Mush with Sirup
  • Broiled Bacon
  • Coffee
No. 7
  • Orange Juice
  • Steamed Rice
  • Omelet
  • Cornmeal Muffins and Butter
  • Coffee
No. 8
  • California Grapes
  • Hominy Grits
  • Waffles and Sirup
  • Coffee
No. 9
  • Sliced Bananas
  • Pearl Barley
  • Codfish Balls
  • Marmalade
  • Toast
  • Coffee
No. 10
  • Popovers Filled with Warm Apple Sauce
  • White Cornmeal Mush
  • Baked Eggs in Cream
  • Toast
  • Coffee

71. SUMMER BREAKFAST MENUS.--During the summer season, fresh fruits of various kinds can be obtained, and these are generally used as the first course for breakfast. As the menus here given show, it is well to vary the fruit course as much as possible, so that there will be no danger of tiring the persons to be served. An uncooked breakfast food is preferable to a cooked one for summer and so several varieties of these are here suggested.

71. SUMMER BREAKFAST MENUS.--During the summer, you can find a variety of fresh fruits, which are usually served as the first course for breakfast. As the menus provided show, it's good to mix up the fruit options as much as possible to keep things interesting for those being served. An uncooked breakfast option is better than a cooked one for summer, so several varieties are suggested here.

No. 1
  • Strawberries and Cream
  • Scrambled Eggs
  • Toast
  • Coffee
No. 2
  • Raspberries
  • Puffed Rice
  • Baking-Powder Biscuits and Honey
  • Coffee
No. 3
  • Blackberries
  • Corn Flakes
  • Creamed Toast
  • Coffee
No. 4
  • Blueberries
  • Grape Nuts and Cream
  • Jelly
  • Omelet
  • Toast
  • Coffee
No. 5
  • Sliced Peaches
  • Puffed Wheat
  • Clipped Eggs
  • Toast
  • Coffee
No. 6
  • Cantaloupe
  • Krumbles with Cream
  • French Toast and Sirup
  • Coffee

MENUS FOR SPECIAL OCCASIONS

72. Special occasions, such as New Year's, Easter, Fourth of July, Thanksgiving, Christmas, etc., are usually celebrated with a dinner that is somewhat out of the ordinary. Then, too, on such days as St. Valentine's, St. Patrick's, Hallowe'en, etc., it is often desired to invite friends in for a social time of some kind, when dainty, appetizing refreshments make up a part of the entertainment. To assist the housewife in planning menus for occasions of this kind, a number of suggestions are here given. Suitable decorations are also mentioned in each instance, for much of the attraction of a special dinner or luncheon depends on the form of decoration used.

72. Special occasions like New Year's, Easter, the Fourth of July, Thanksgiving, Christmas, and so on are typically celebrated with a dinner that's a bit different than usual. Plus, on days like St. Valentine's, St. Patrick's, Hallowe'en, etc., it's common to invite friends over for a social gathering, where tasty snacks are part of the fun. To help the host plan menus for these events, several suggestions are provided here. Appropriate decorations are also included for each occasion, as much of the appeal of a special dinner or lunch relies on the decorations used.

It should not be thought that elaborate, costly decorations are necessary, for often the most effective results can be achieved with some very simple decoration. Of course, the decorations should be suitable for the occasion to be celebrated. Favors of various kinds are generally on sale in confectioners' and stationers' shops, so that, if desired, favors may be purchased. However, the ingenious housewife can, with very little trouble, make favors that will be just as attractive as those she can buy and that will be much less expensive. She may copy some she sees in the shops or work out any original ideas she may have on the most suitable decorations for the occasion.

It shouldn't be assumed that fancy, expensive decorations are necessary, as often the most impressive results can come from very simple decor. Naturally, the decorations should fit the occasion being celebrated. Various types of favors are usually available at candy stores and stationery shops, so if you want to, you can buy them. However, a clever homemaker can easily create favors that are just as appealing as the store-bought ones and will cost much less. She can replicate items she sees in shops or come up with her own creative ideas for the best decorations for the occasion.

NEW YEAR'S DINNERS


No. 1


DECORATION--Ground Pine
  • Cream-of-Tomato Soup
  • Mustard Pickles
  • Croutons
  • Baked Ham
  • Hot Slaw
  • Candied Sweet Potatoes
  • String Beans
  • Orange-and-Pineapple Salad
  • Maple Parfait
  • Macaroons
  • Salted Nuts
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATION--Potted Jerusalem Cherries
  • Crab-Flake Cocktail
  • Asparagus Broth
  • Radishes
  • Wafers
  • Roast Goose
  • Hot Baked Apples
  • Creamed Turnips
  • Mashed Potatoes
  • Peas-and-Celery Salad
  • Vanilla Ice Cream, Apricot Sauce
  • Table Raisins
  • Coffee
EASTER DINNERS


No. 1


DECORATION--Daffodils
  • Clear Tomato Soup
  • Mixed Pickles
  • Croutons
  • Creamed Mushrooms in Timbale Cases
  • Roast Spring Chicken
  • Mint Sauce
  • Potato Puff
  • Creamed Peas and Carrots
  • Grapefruit-and-Celery Salad
  • Milk Sherbet
  • Sponge Cake
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Chinese Lilies and Iris

  • Fruit Cocktail
  • Bouillon with Whipped Cream and Pimiento
  • Celery Wafers
  • Fricassee of Chicken
  • Riced Potatoes Scalloped Corn
  • Tomato Salad
  • Bavarian Cream Salted Nuts
  • Coffee
ST. VALENTINE PARTIES


DINNER MENU


DECORATIONS--Red Hearts and Ribbons, Red Candle Shades
  • Heart-Shaped Canapes Olives
  • Clam Bouillon
  • Creamed Chicken and Mushrooms in Pattie Shells
  • Potatoes au Gratin
  • Grapefruit-and-California-Grape Salad
  • Vanilla Ice Cream Heart-Shaped Cakes
  • Candies
LUNCHEON MENU


DECORATIONS--Red Roses, Heart-Shaped Favors, Cupids
  • Tuna-Fish Salad
  • Heart-Shaped Brown Bread and Marmalade Sandwiches
  • Nut Sandwiches
  • Ice Cream in Heart-Shaped Cases
  • Small Decorated Cakes
  • Candies Nuts
ST. PATRICK'S DAY PARTIES


DINNER MENU


DECORATIONS--Shamrocks and Green Ribbon
  • Cream-of-Pea Soup
  • Olives Wafers
  • Roast Pork Loin Potatoes with Parsley Sauce
  • Tomatoes au Gratin
  • Green-Peppers-and-Cheese Salad
  • Lemon Ice Cakes
  • Coffee Green Mints
LUNCHEON MENU


DECORATIONS--White Narcissus, Green Carnations, Shamrocks
  • Chicken Salad
  • Cheese-and-Green-Pepper Sandwiches
  • Pistachio Ice Cream Sponge Cake
  • Mint Punch
FOURTH-OF-JULY LUNCHEONS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Sweet Peas, Small Flags
  • Iced Tomato Bouillon
  • Wafers
  • Cold Sliced Ham
  • Swiss Cheese
  • Creamed Potatoes and Peas
  • Strawberry-and-Pineapple Salad
  • Coconut Cream Pie
  • Iced Tea
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Cornflowers and Daisies
  • Iced Watermelon with Mint
  • Creamed Chicken and Mushrooms on Toast
  • Potato Croquettes
  • Corn on the Cob
  • Sliced Cucumbers
  • Vanilla Ice Cream
  • Chocolate Sauce
  • Punch
HALLOWE'EN LUNCHEONS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Pumpkin Jack o' Lantern, Black-Paper Cats and Witches
  • Tongue Sandwiches
  • Swiss-Cheese Sandwiches
  • Cider
  • Doughnuts
  • Pumpkin Pie
  • Molasses Taffy
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Tiny Paper Jack o' Lanterns
  • Pink Bunny
  • Brown-Bread-and-Marmalade Sandwiches
  • Nut Cookies
  • Gingerbread
  • Candies
  • Cider
THANKSGIVING DINNERS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Basket of Fruit
  • Oyster Cocktail
  • Consommé with Peas
  • Celery
  • Wafers
  • Roast Turkey
  • Candied Sweet Potatoes
  • Asparagus with Drawn-Butter Sauce
  • Cranberry Frappé
  • Head Lettuce
  • Thousand-Island Dressing
  • Pumpkin Pie
  • Fruit
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Baby Chrysanthemums
  • Grapefruit Cocktail
  • Celery Soup
  • Olives
  • Bread Sticks
  • Roast Chicken
  • Cranberry Jelly
  • Mashed Potatoes
  • Cottage-Cheese Balls
  • Baked Onions
  • Stuffed Dates
  • Mince Pie
  • Coffee
CHRISTMAS DINNERS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Small Christmas Tree
  • Oyster Broth
  • Oyster Crackers
  • Small Pickles
  • Olives
  • Chicken Pie
  • Pickled Peaches
  • Baked Sweet Potatoes
  • Creamed Cauliflower
  • Fruit Salad
  • Christmas Pudding
  • Sauce
  • Bonbons
  • Salted Nuts
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Poinsettias and Holly
  • Grapefruit with Grape Juice
  • Cream Chicken Bouillon
  • Stuffed Celery
  • Wafers
  • Roast Duck
  • Currant Jelly
  • Mashed Potatoes
  • Baked Squash
  • Spiced Punch
  • Cabbage-and-Green-Pepper Salad
  • Plum Pudding
  • Sauce
  • Mints
  • Almonds
  • Coffee
WEDDING BREAKFASTS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Iced Fruit
  • Creamed Chicken on Toast
  • Stuffed Potato
  • Asparagus with Butter Sauce
  • Rolls
  • Marmalade
  • Butter
  • Ice
  • Cake
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Orange and Grapefruit Juice
  • Broiled Sweetbreads
  • Creamed Potatoes
  • Lima-Bean Soufflé
  • Hot Biscuits
  • Honey
  • Butter
  • Pineapple Fritters
  • Milk Sherbet
  • Cake
  • Coffee
WEDDING LUNCHEONS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Oyster Cocktail
  • Chicken Soup
  • Radishes
  • Olives
  • Broiled Squab
  • Browned Potatoes
  • Fresh String Beans
  • Fruit Salad
  • French Ice Cream
  • Cake
  • Candies
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Grapefruit Cocktail
  • Bouillon
  • Celery
  • Radishes
  • Chicken Croquettes
  • Potato Puff
  • Stuffed Tomatoes
  • Bread-and-Butter Sandwiches
  • Hearts of Lettuce
  • Mayonnaise
  • Chocolate Nut Ice Cream
  • Cake
  • Mints
  • Coffee
WEDDING DINNERS


No. 1


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Fresh Pineapple
  • Cream-of-Celery Soup
  • Ripe Olives
  • Radishes
  • Broiled Chicken
  • Candied Sweet Potatoes
  • Green Peas in Cream
  • Corn Fritters
  • Whole-Wheat Rolls
  • Butter
  • Grapefruit Salad
  • Individual Molds of Ice Cream
  • Cake
  • Mints
  • Coffee
No. 2


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers
  • Crabflake Cocktail
  • Consommé Julienne
  • Celery
  • Olives
  • Radishes
  • Roast Young Duck
  • Mashed Potatoes
  • Green Lima Beans
  • Creamed Cauliflower
  • Rolls
  • Butter
  • Waldorf Salad
  • Vanilla Ice Cream
  • Chocolate Sauce
  • Cake
  • Candies
  • Coffee
BIRTHDAY PARTIES FOR CHILDREN


BIRTHDAY DINNER


DECORATIONS--Kewpies with Large Bows of Ribbon To be Used as Favors
  • Fruit Cocktail in Orange Basket
  • Creamed Sweetbreads on Toast
  • Mashed Potatoes
  • Asparagus Soufflé
  • Peach-and-Cream-Cheese Salad
  • Vanilla Ice Cream with Maple Sirup
  • Birthday Cakes
  • Candies
  • Nuts
BIRTHDAY LUNCHEON


DECORATIONS--Pink Sweet Peas, Maiden-Hair Fern, Pink Favors Filled with Candy
  • Fruit Salad
  • Wafers
  • Punch
  • Chocolate Ice Cream with Marshmallow
  • Birthday Cake
  • Stuffed Dates
BIRTHDAY PARTIES FOR ADULTS


BIRTHDAY DINNER


DECORATIONS--Pink Roses, Pink Candle Shades
  • Fruit Cocktail
  • Cream-of-Pea Soup
  • Radishes
  • Olives
  • Wafers
  • Chicken Croquettes
  • Stuffed Potatoes
  • Asparagus Tips
  • Pineapple-and-Cream-Cheese Salad
  • Meringue Glacé
  • Birthday Cake
  • Coffee
BIRTHDAY LUNCHEON


DECORATIONS--Seasonal Flowers, Candle Shades, and Favors to Match
  • Lobster Cocktail
  • Clear Soup
  • Wafers
  • Stuffed Olives
  • Chicken à la King
  • Julienne Potatoes
  • Stuffed-Tomato Salad
  • Chocolate Parfait
  • Birthday Cake
  • Candies
  • Nuts
  • Coffee
AFTERNOON TEAS


No. 1
  • Ribbon Sandwiches
  • Date-and-Nut Sandwiches
  • Toasted Pound Cake
  • Salted Nuts
  • Tea
No. 2
  • Apricot Sandwiches
  • Cream-Cheese-and-Peanut Sandwiches
  • Marguerites
  • Candied Orange Peel
  • Tea
SUPPER PARTIES


No. 1
  • Welsh Rarebit
  • Tomato Sandwiches
  • Chocolate Éclairs
  • Coffee
No. 2
  • Club Sandwiches
  • Bisque Ice Cream
  • Cakes
  • Coffee

TABLE SERVICE

73. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD TABLE SERVICE.--Too much cannot be said of the importance of attractive table service. The simplest kind of meal served attractively never fails to please, while the most elaborate meal served in an uninviting way will not appeal to the appetite. Therefore, a housewife should try never to neglect the little points that count so much in making her meals pleasing and inviting. It is not at all necessary that she have expensive dishes and linen, nor, in fact, anything out of the ordinary, in order to serve meals in a dainty, attractive way. Some points, however, are really essential and should receive consideration.

73. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD TABLE SERVICE.--You can't underestimate the importance of attractive table service. Even the simplest meal served nicely will always please, while the fanciest meal served unattractively won't appeal to anyone. So, a housewife should never overlook the little details that make her meals more enjoyable and appealing. It’s not necessary to have expensive dishes or linens, or anything extraordinary, to serve meals in a delightful, attractive manner. However, there are some key points that are truly essential and deserve attention.

74. In the first place, there should be absolute cleanliness in everything used. To make this possible, the dishes should be properly washed and dried. The glasses should be polished so that they are not cloudy nor covered with lint. The silver should be kept polished brightly. The linen, no matter what kind, should be nicely laundered. Attention given to these matters forms the basis of good table service.

74. First and foremost, everything that is used should be completely clean. To achieve this, dishes should be thoroughly washed and dried. Glasses should be polished so they’re clear and not covered in lint. Silverware should be kept shining brightly. The linen, no matter the type, should be well laundered. Paying attention to these details is essential for good table service.

[Illustration: FIG. 9]

Close in hand with these points comes a well-arranged and neatly set table. To this may be added some attractive touches in the way of flowers or other simple decoration. These need cost little or nothing, especially in the spring and summer seasons, for then the fields and woods are filled with flowers and foliage that make most artistic table decorations. Often, too, one's own garden offers a nice selection of flowers that may be used for table decoration if a little time and thought are given to their arrangement. In the winter, a small fern or some other growing plant will answer.

Close at hand with these points is a well-arranged and neatly set table. You can add some appealing touches with flowers or other simple decorations. These can cost very little or nothing, especially in spring and summer when the fields and woods are full of flowers and greenery that make beautiful table decorations. Often, your own garden provides a nice variety of flowers that can be used for table décor if you spend a little time and thought on their arrangement. In winter, a small fern or another potted plant will do just fine.

75. BREAKFAST, LUNCHEON, AND DINNER SERVICE.--To give an idea of proper table service for the three meals, breakfast, luncheon, and dinner, Figs. 9, 10, and 11 are offered. Attention should be given to the details of each of these, for they show how to arrange meals that are intended to be served tastily and invitingly.

75. BREAKFAST, LUNCH, AND DINNER SERVICE.--To illustrate proper table service for the three meals—breakfast, lunch, and dinner—Figs. 9, 10, and 11 are provided. It's important to pay attention to the details of each meal, as they demonstrate how to arrange food in a way that is both appealing and appetizing.

76. In Fig. 9 is shown a breakfast cover for one. By a cover is meant the silver and dishes placed on the table for one person. In a simple meal, this might consist of a knife, a fork, spoons, a plate, a glass, a cup and saucer, and a bread-and-butter plate. Here the cover has been arranged on a breakfast tray for service at a bedside. This meal is not in the least unusual, but it is very dainty and pleasing. It consists of strawberries with the stems left on so that they may be dipped into sugar and eaten, a cereal, a roll with butter, a hot dish of some kind, such as eggs, and a hot beverage.

76. Fig. 9 shows a breakfast setup for one person. By a cover, we mean the silverware and dishes set on the table for one individual. In a simple meal, this might include a knife, fork, spoons, a plate, a glass, a cup and saucer, and a bread-and-butter plate. Here, the setup has been arranged on a breakfast tray for serving in bed. This meal is quite ordinary, but it looks very elegant and appealing. It includes strawberries kept with the stems on so they can be dipped in sugar and eaten, a cereal, a roll with butter, a hot dish like eggs, and a hot beverage.

[Illustration: FIG. 10]

77. A luncheon table with covers for six is shown in Fig. 10. The first course consists of a fruit cocktail, which is placed on the table before the persons to be served are seated. The silver required up to the dessert course is also laid beforehand. Just before the dessert is served, the entire table should be cleared and the silver necessary for this course laid at each place.

77. A lunch table set for six is shown in Fig. 10. The first course is a fruit cocktail, which is placed on the table before the guests are seated. The silverware needed up to the dessert course is also set out in advance. Right before dessert is served, the entire table should be cleared and the silverware needed for this course placed at each setting.

A point to be remembered in the placing of silver is that the various pieces should always be placed on the table in the order in which they are to be used. Here the first spoon is for the cocktail, which is already on the table, while the second spoon is for the soup, the next course. The knife, which is the third piece of silver, with the two forks on the opposite side will be required for the dinner course, while the third fork is a fork for the salad course.

A key thing to remember when setting the table with silverware is to arrange the pieces in the order they'll be used. The first spoon is for the cocktail that's already on the table, while the second spoon is for the soup, the next course. The knife, which is the third piece of silverware, along with the two forks on the other side, will be needed for the dinner course, while the third fork is for the salad course.

As will be noted, doilies have been used in place of a table cloth for this luncheon. These, which may be as simple or as elaborate as desired, save laundering and, if they are inexpensive, they are an economy as well as a convenience. Since they also make a luncheon table very attractive, they are strongly recommended for meals of this kind. The luncheon napkin, which is smaller than that used for dinner service, should always be placed where it is shown here, that is, at the left of the forks. If only one beverage is to be served, as is usually the case, the glass is placed at the tip of the knife.

As you'll see, doilies have been used instead of a tablecloth for this lunch. They can be as simple or as fancy as you want, saving you laundry time, and if they're cheap, they're both a good deal and convenient. Since they also make the lunch table look really nice, they're highly recommended for this type of meal. The lunch napkin, which is smaller than the dinner napkin, should always be placed as shown here, meaning at the left of the forks. If only one drink is being served, which is usually the case, the glass goes at the tip of the knife.

[Illustration: FIG. 11]

78. An example of a correctly set dinner table is shown in Fig. 11. A table cloth, as will be noted, is used, for a cloth is always preferable to doilies for dinner. At this meal, the first course is soup. This, with anything that is to be eaten with the soup, such as the wafers used here, or a relish, should be placed before the guests are seated. The bread-and-butter plate, which is placed just at the top of the fork, should also be on the table. Between each two persons, it is well to have a set of salt-and-pepper shakers.

78. An example of a properly set dinner table is shown in Fig. 11. A tablecloth is used, as it’s always better than doilies for dinner. For this meal, the first course is soup. This, along with anything meant to be eaten with the soup, like the wafers shown here or a relish, should be set out before the guests sit down. The bread-and-butter plate, which is positioned just above the fork, should also be on the table. Between every two guests, it’s a good idea to have a set of salt-and-pepper shakers.


THE PLANNING OF MEALS


EXAMINATION QUESTIONS


(1) What knowledge is necessary for the planning of economical and well-balanced meals?

(1) What knowledge is needed to plan affordable and balanced meals?

(2) Discuss a systematic plan for the purchasing of foods.

(2) Talk about a systematic approach for buying food.

(3) Compare the advantages of buying foods at a cash store and a credit store.

(3) Compare the benefits of shopping for groceries at a cash store vs. a credit store.

(4) Mention the advantages of keeping an account of household expenditures.

(4) List the benefits of tracking household expenses.

(5) Tell how economy in the purchase of foods may be practiced.

(5) Explain how to save money when buying food.

(6) Discuss the training of a child's appetite.

(6) Talk about how to train a child's appetite.

(7) Why is a variety of food necessary in the diet?

(7) Why is it important to have a variety of foods in your diet?

(8) Name the factors that influence the amount and proportion of food substances required for an adult.

(8) Name the factors that affect the amount and proportion of food substances needed for an adult.

(9) (a) Explain the meaning of calorie as applied to food. (b) What is the average number of calories required by the adult?

(9) (a) Explain what a calorie means in relation to food. (b) What is the average number of calories an adult needs?

(10) With the aid of Table V, find out how many pounds you are under weight or over weight. Then tell how you would proceed to acquire your correct weight.

(10) Using Table V, determine how many pounds you're underweight or overweight. Then explain how you would go about reaching your correct weight.

(11) Make out menus for breakfast, dinner, and supper for 1 day for a child 12 months old.

(11) Plan menus for breakfast, lunch, and dinner for one day for a 12-month-old child.

(12) Plan a dinner menu that contains foods suitable for both adults and a child 4 years old, and from it select the foods you would give the child.

(12) Plan a dinner menu with foods that are appropriate for both adults and a 4-year-old child, and then choose the foods you would serve to the child.

(13) What does a balanced diet include?

(13) What does a balanced diet consist of?

(14) What can be done to balance the cost of foods used in a meal?

(14) What can be done to balance the cost of the foods used in a meal?

(15) Give several points of importance in selecting the dishes for a meal.

(15) List several key factors to consider when choosing dishes for a meal.

(16) Make out menus for the seventeenth and eighteenth days from Table VII.

(16) Create menus for the seventeenth and eighteenth days from Table VII.

(17) Plan an original menu and decorations for a dinner you can serve for a special occasion.

(17) Create an original menu and decorations for a dinner you can host for a special occasion.

(18) What are the advantages of a nicely arranged table?

(18) What are the benefits of a well-organized table?

(19) Give a few general rules for the correct serving of food and setting of tables.

(19) Provide some basic guidelines for properly serving food and setting tables.

(20) Why is the following menu undesirable and what changes would you suggest to make it more nearly correct?

(20) Why is the following menu not appealing and what changes would you suggest to improve it?

  • Cream Soup
  • Potatoes
  • Roast Pork
  • Greens
  • Bread and Butter
  • Pudding
  • Hard Sauce





INDEX

A


Absinthe,

Accounts, Equipment for keeping household,

Keeping of household,
Housekeeping,
Methods of keeping household,
Household management methods,
Acids in confections, Use of,

in fruit,
in fruit,
Adulteration of coffee,

of flavorings,
of seasonings,
Adults, Birthday parties for,

Advertised goods, Nationally,

After-dinner coffee,

Afternoon tea,

teas,
teas,
Age on children's diet, Effect of,

on diet, Effect of,
on diet, Effects of,
Alcoholic beverages,

beverages, Harmful effects of,
beverages, Negative effects of,
beverages, Kinds of,
types of drinks,
Alligator pear, or avocado,

Apple butter,

sauce,
sauce,
Apples,

apricots, and peaches, Dried,
dried apricots and peaches,
Composition and food value of,
Composition and nutritional value of,
Drying of,
Drying of,
Maple,
Maple,
Porcupine,
Porcupine,
Steamed,
Steamed,
Stewed quinces and,
Stewed quinces and,
Apportionment of income,

Apricot soufflé,

Apricots,

Drying of,
Drying of,
Food value and composition of,
Food value and composition of,
peaches, and apples, Dried,
dried peaches and apples,
Artificial flavorings,

Asparagus, Canning of,

Automatic seal tops,

Avocado, or alligator pear,


B


Baked apples,

bananas,
bananas,
peaches,
peaches,
pears,
pears,
Balancing the diet,

Banana fritters,

Bananas,

Baked,
Baked,
Food value and composition of,
Food value and composition of,
Beans, Canning of lima and other shelled,

Canning of string,
String canning,
Drying of string,
Drying string,
Pickled,
Pickled,
Roasting the coffee,
Coffee roasting,
Beer,

Beet relish,

sugar,
sugar,
Beets, Canning of,

Pickled,
Pickled,
Berries, Miscellaneous,

Nature and care of,
Nature and care of,
Berry, or fruit, sugar,

Beverage, Definition of,

Beverages, Alcoholic,

Cereal,
Cereal,
Fruit,
Fruit,
Harmful effects of alcoholic,
Harmful effects of alcohol,
in the diet,
in the diet,
Ingredients for fruit,
Ingredients for fruit,
Instantaneous cereal,
Instant cereal,
Kinds of alcoholic,
Types of alcohol,
Nature and classes of,
Nature and types of,
Nature of stimulating,
Nature of stimulation,
Non-stimulating,
Not stimulating,
Nourishing,
Nourishing,
Preparation of fruit,
Fruit prep,
Stimulating,
Exciting,
Table showing stimulant and tannic acid in stimulating,
Table showing stimulant and tannic acid in stimulating,
Beverages to meals, Relation of,

Water in,
Water in,
Birthday-party menus,

Bitter chocolate,

Black tea,

Blackberries,

Composition and food value of,
Composition and nutritional value of,
Blackberry jam,

sponge,
sponge
Blanching and scalding foods to be canned,

Blend coffee,

Blueberries,

Blueberry pudding,

pudding, Pressed,
pudding, Pressed,
Bohea tea,

Boiled coffee,

Boiling fruit juice and sugar in jelly making,

the confection mixture,
the candy mixture,
Bonbon cream, Coating candies with,

Bonbons,

Brandy,

Breakfast cocoa,

luncheon and dinner service,
lunch and dinner service,
menus,
menus,
menus, Summer,
menus, summer,
menus, Wedding-,
wedding menus,
menus, Winter,
menus, winter,
Brown-sugar fudge,

Brussels sprouts, Canning of,

Budget, Household,

Butter, Apple,

Cocoa,
Cocoa,
milk, and cream in confections,
milk and cream in desserts,
Peach,
Peach,
Pear,
Pear,
Plum,
Plum,
scotch,
scotch,
scotch, Marshmallows coated with,
Scotch marshmallows coated with,
taffy,
taffy,
Butters, Fruit,

Buying, Economical,


C


Cabbage, Canning of,

Cafe au lait, Iced,

noir,
noir,
Caffeine,

Caffeol,

California oranges,

Calories, Quantity of foods in,

Candied and dried fruits in confections,

peel,
peel
Candies, Cream,

Finishing,
Finishing,
Marking and cutting,
Marking and cutting,
Nature of cream,
Nature of cream,
with bonbon cream, Coating,
with bonbon cream, coating,
with chocolate, Coating,
with chocolate coating,
Wrapping,
Wrapping,
Candy, Serving,

Table showing tests for,
Table showing tests for,
Testing,
Testing,
Cane sugar,

Canned food, Flavor of,

food, General appearance of,
food, Overall look of,
food, Proportion of food to liquid,
food, Ratio of food to liquid,
food, Score card for,
food, Scorecard for,
food, Texture of,
food, Texture of,
foods from spoiling, Preventing,
Preventing foods from spoiling,
foods, Method of sealing,
foods, Sealing method,
foods, Scoring,
foods, Scoring,
foods, Spoiling of,
food spoilage,
Preparation of food to be,
Food prep for
Canning and drying,

Cold-pack method of,
Cold-pack method for,
Commercial,
Ad,
Definition of,
Definition of,
Equipment for,
Gear for,
fruit juices for jelly,
fruit juices for jelly,
fruits, Directions for,
fruit, Instructions for,
fruits, Table of sirups for,
fruits, Syrup table for,
greens,
greens,
Measuring devices for,
Measuring tools for,
method, Fractional-sterilization,
method, fractional sterilization,
method, Oven,
method, Oven,
methods,
methods,
methods for fruits,
fruit techniques,
methods, Steam-pressure,
methods, steam pressure,
of asparagus,
of asparagus,
of beets,
of beets,
of Brussels sprouts,
of Brussels sprouts,
of cabbage,
of cabbage,
of carrots,
of carrots,
of cauliflower,
of cauliflower,
of eggplant,
of eggplant,
of fish,
of fish,
of fruits,
of fruits,
of green corn,
of fresh corn,
of green peppers,
of green peppers,
of lima and other shelled beans,
of lima and other shelled beans,
of meat,
of meat,
of okra,
of okra,
of parsnips,
of parsnips,
of peas,
of peas,
of pumpkin,
of pumpkin,
of root and tuber vegetables,
of root and tuber veggies,
of squash,
of squash,
of string beans,
of green beans,
of succotash,
of succotash,
of summer squash,
of summer squash,
of tomatoes,
of tomatoes,
of tomatoes and corn,
of tomatoes and corn,
of tomatoes for soup,
for soup tomatoes,
of turnips,
of turnips,
of vegetables,
of veggies,
Canning, Open-kettle method of,

Oven method of,
Oven method for,
Preparation of fruits and vegetables for,
Preparation of fruits and vegetables for,
preservatives,
preservatives,
Principles of,
Principles of,
Sealing the jars when,
Sealing the jars when,
Selection of food for,
Food selection for,
Sirups for,
Syrups for,
Steam-pressure method of,
Steam pressure method of,
Tin cans for,
Tin cans for,
Utensils for,
Utensils for,
Utensils required for open-kettle method of,
Utensils needed for the open-kettle method of,
vegetables, Directions for,
vegetables, Cooking Instructions,
Vessels for,
Vessels for,
with a pressure cooker,
using a pressure cooker,
with the water-seal outfit,
with the watertight gear,
with tin cans,
with tin cans,
Cans for canning, Tin,

Cantaloupes and muskmelons,

Serving,
Serving,
Caramels,

Chocolate,
Chocolate,
Nature of,
Nature of,
Plain,
Simple,
Caravan tea,

Carbohydrate in confections,

in fruit,
in fruit,
Carbonated water,

Card-file system for menu making,

Carrot conserve,

Carrots, Canning of,

Casaba melons,

Cash-and-carry plan of marketing,

Catsup, Grape,

Tomato,
Tomato,
Cauliflower, Canning of,

Pickled,
Pickled,
Cellulose in fruit,

Center cream,

Cereal beverages,

beverages, Instantaneous,
drinks, Instant,
coffees,
coffees,
Chain stores,

Chemical or mineral colorings,

Cherries,

Composition and food value of,
Composition and nutritional value of,
Sour,
Sour,
Cherry-and-pineapple conserve,

fritters,
fritters,
preserve,
preserve,
Chewing taffy,

Children and infants, Diet for,

Children's birthday parties, Menus for,

diet, Effect of age on,

diet, Effect of weight on,

Chilli sauce,

China congou tea,

Chocolate and cocoa,

and cocoa in confections,
and chocolate in treats,
and cocoa, Left-over,
and cocoa, Leftover,
and cocoa, Preparation of,
and cocoa, Preparation of,
and cocoa, Production of,
and cocoa, Production of,
and cocoa, Selection of,
and cocoa selection,
and cocoa, Serving,
and cocoa, Serving,
and cocoa, Source of,
and cocoa, Source of,
Bitter,
Bitter,
caramels,
caramels,
Coating candies with,
Coating candies with,
Egg,
Egg,
Hot,
Hot,
malted milk,
malted milk,
or cocoa, Iced,
or iced cocoa,
sirup,
syrup,
Sweet,
Sweet,
Table showing tannic acid and stimulant in,
Table displaying tannic acid and stimulant in,
Chow chow,

Christmas dinners,

Citric acid,

Citrus fruits,

Classification of fruits,

of tea,
tea,
of vegetables,
of veggies,
Climate on diet, Effect of,

Clingstone peaches,

Closing and storing jelly,

Coarse granulated sugar,

powdered sugar,
powdered sugar,
Coating candies with bonbon cream,

candies with chocolate,
chocolate candies,
Cocktail, Fruit,

Grapefruit,
Grapefruit,
Summer,
Summer,
Cocoa and chocolate,

and chocolate in confections,
and chocolate in sweets,
and chocolate, Left-over,
and chocolate, Leftover,
and chocolate, Preparation of,
and chocolate, Preparation of,
and chocolate, Production of,
and chocolate production,
and chocolate, Selection of,
and chocolate, Selection of,
and chocolate, Serving,
and chocolate, Serving,
and chocolate, Source of,
and chocolate, Source of,
Breakfast,
Breakfast,
butter,
butter,
Commercial,
Advertisment,
Creamy,
Creamy,
Milling of,
Milling of,
nibs,
nibs,
Plain,
Simple,
or chocolate, Iced,
or iced chocolate,
Rich,
Rich,
Table showing tannic acid and stimulant in,
Table displaying tannic acid and stimulant in,
Theobroma,
Theobroma,
Coconut in confections,

Coffee, Adulteration of,

After-dinner,
After dinner,
beans, Grinding,
beans, Grinding,
Coffee beans, Roasting,

biggin,
biggin,
Blend,
Blend,
Boiled,
Boiled,
Filtered,
Filtered,
History and production of,
History and production of,
Iced,
Iced,
Instantaneous,
Instant,
Java,
Java,
Left-over,
Leftover,
Mocha,
Mocha,
Percolated,
Brewed,
percolators,
coffee makers,
pot,
pot,
Preparation of,
Preparation of,
Rio,
Rio,
Rye,
Rye,
seeds, Obtaining,
seeds, Getting,
Selection of,
Selection of,
Serving,
Serving,
Table showing stimulant and tannic acid in,
Table displaying stimulant and tannic acid in,
Vienna,
Vienna,
Coffees, Cereal,

Colander and wire strainer for canning,

Cold-dipping,

-pack method of canning,
-pack canning method,
-pack method, Procedure in one-period,
-pack method, one-period procedure,
-pack method, Utensils for,
-pack method, Utensils for,
Color of jelly,

Colorings for confections,

Mineral, or chemical,
Mineral or chemical,
Vegetable,
Vegetable,
Combination drying methods,

Combining sugar and liquid in confection making,

Commercial canning,

cocoa,
cocoa,
Composition and food value of bananas,

and food value of black raspberries,
and the nutritional value of black raspberries,
and food value of blackberries,
and nutritional value of blackberries,
and food value of cherries,
and nutritional value of cherries,
and food value of cranberries,
and nutritional value of cranberries,
and food value of currants,
and nutritional value of currants,
and food value of dates,
and nutritional value of dates,
and food value of dried apples,
and the nutritional value of dried apples,
and food value of dried apricots,
and the nutritional value of dried apricots,
and food value of dried figs,
and the nutritional value of dried figs,
and food value of dried prunes,
and the nutritional value of dried prunes,
and food value of fresh apples,
and the nutritional value of fresh apples,
and food value of fresh apricots,
and the nutritional value of fresh apricots,
and food value of fresh figs,
and the nutritional value of fresh figs,
and food value of fresh prunes,
and the nutritional value of fresh prunes,
and food value of fruits,
and nutritional value of fruits,
and food value of grapefruit,
and the nutritional value of grapefruit,
and food value of grapes,
and nutritional value of grapes,
Composition and food value of huckleberries,

and food value of lemons,
and nutritional value of lemons,
and food value of muskmelon,
and nutritional value of muskmelon,
and food value of nectarines,
and nutritional value of nectarines,
and food value of oranges,
and nutritional value of oranges,
and food value of peaches,
and nutritional value of peaches,
and food value of pears,
and nutritional value of pears,
and food value of persimmons,
and nutritional value of persimmons,
and food value of pineapple,
and nutritional value of pineapple,
and food value of plums,
and nutritional value of plums,
and food value of pomegranates,
and nutritional value of pomegranates,
and food value of raisins,
and nutritional value of raisins,
and food value of red raspberries,
and the nutritional benefits of red raspberries,
and food value of rhubarb,
and nutritional value of rhubarb,
and food value of strawberries,
and nutritional value of strawberries,
and food value of watermelon,
and nutritional value of watermelon,
of confections,
of sweets,
of food,
of food,
of fruits,
of fruits,
Confection making,

making, Combining sugar and liquid in,
making, Mixing sugar and liquid in,
making, Effect of weather on,
making, Impact of weather on,
making, Equipment for,
making, equipment for,
making, Procedure in,
making, Procedure in,
mixture, Boiling,
mixture, boiling,
mixture, Pouring and cooling,
mixture, pouring and cooling,
Confectioners', or XXXX, sugar,

Confections,

Candied and dried fruits in,
Candied and dried fruits in,
Carbohydrate in,
Carbs in,
Chocolate and cocoa in,
Chocolate and cocoa in,
Coconut in,
Coconut in,
Composition of,
Composition of,
Cooking,
Cooking,
Definition of,
Definition of,
Fat in,
Fat in,
Food materials in,
Food supplies in,
Ingredients used in,
Ingredients used in,
Milk, cream, and butter in,
Milk, cream, and butter in,
Mineral salts in,
Mineral salts in,
Miscellaneous,
Miscellaneous,
Nature of,
Nature of,
Nuts in,
Nuts in,
Pop-corn in,
Popcorn in,
Protein in,
Protein included,
Use of acids in,
Use of acids in,
Varieties and preparations of,
Varieties and preparations of,
Congou tea,

tea, China,
tea, China,
Conservation of foods,

Conserve, Carrot,

Cherry-and-pineapple,
Cherry and pineapple,
Crab-apple-and-orange,
Crab apple and orange,
Definition of,
Definition of,
Pineapple-and-apricot,
Pineapple and apricot,
Plum,
Plum,
Red-raspberry-and-currant,
Red raspberry and currant,
Conserve, strawberry-and-pineapple

strawberry-and-rhubarb
strawberry rhubarb
Containers for jelly

Cooking and storing of dried foods

confections
sweets
fruit in jelly-making
fruit in jam-making
on fruit, effect of
on fruit, impact of
Cooling and pouring the confection mixture

Cordials

Corn, canning of green

Canning of tomatoes and

Drying of
Drying of
sirup
syrup
Correct diet

weights for certain heights, table showing,
weights for specific heights, table displaying,
Cost of foods

Covers, jar tops, or

Crab-apple-and-orange conserve

-apple jelly
apple jelly
-apple relish
apple relish
-apples, pickled
-pickled apples
Cracker jack

Cranberries

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Cranberry jelly

sauce
sauce
Cream candies

Center
Center
milk, and butter in confections
milk and butter in treats
Opera
Opera
Creamy cocoa

Cucumber pickles, Sliced

pickles, small
small pickles
Cucumbers in brine

Currant jelly

Currants

Food value and composition of
Nutritional value and composition of
Cutting and marking candies


D


Dates

Food value and composition of
Food value and composition of
Stuffed
Stuffed
Density of sirup for canning

Desserts, fruit

Devices for canning, measuring

for drying
for drying out
Diet, balancing the

Beverages in the
Beverages in the
Correct
Correct
Effect of age on
Age impact on
Effect of age on children's
Impact of age on kids'
Effect of climate on
Impact of climate on
Effect of sex on
Sexual impact on
Effect of weight on
Effect of weight on
Effect of weight on children's
Impact of weight on kids
for infants and children
for babies and kids
Diet, Fruit in the

Pickles in the
Pickles in the
Preserves and jellies in the
Preserves and jellies in the
Digestibility of fruits

Dinner, breakfast, and luncheon service

menus
menus
menus, suggestions for
menus, recommendations for
Dinners, Christmas

Easter
Easter
New Year's
New Year's
Thanksgiving
Thanksgiving
Wedding
Wedding
Distilled water

Divinity

Dried and candied fruits in confections

apples
apples
apricots
apricots
foods, cooking and storing
food, cooking, and storage
fruits, varieties of
fruit varieties
peaches
peaches
Drip pot

Drying and canning

devices for
devices for
method, electric-fan
method, electric fan
method, stove
cooking method, stove
method, sun
method, sun
methods, combination
methods, combo
of apples
of apples
of apricots
of apricots
of corn
of corn
of food
food
of greens
of veggies
of peaches
peach juice
of pears
of pears
of quinces
of quinces
of small fruits
of tiny fruits
of string beans
of green beans
of tuber and root vegetables
of tubers and root vegetables
preparation of foods for
food prep for
vegetables and fruits, directions for
veggies and fruits, instructions for

E


Easter dinners

Economical food buying

Economies in purchasing food

Economy of food preservation

of jelly making and preserving
jelly making and preserving
Egg chocolate

milk shake
milkshake
nog, foamy
frothy, bubbly
nog, orange
nog, orange
Eggplant and summer squash, canning of,

Electric-fan drying method

English breakfast tea

Equipment for canning

for confection making
for making sweets
for household accounts
for home finances
Equipment for jelly making,

Exhausting in canning, Meaning of,

Extra fine, or fancy fine, granulated sugar,

Extracting fruit juice in jelly making,

Extracts, Flavoring,


F


Factors influencing cost of foods,

influencing foods,
impactful foods,
Family income for food, Table showing proportion of,

Fancy fine, or extra fine, granulated sugar,

Fat in confections,

in fruits, Protein and,
in fruits, protein and,
Feeding scale for infants,

Fermentation of fruit juices,

Figs,;

Composition and food value of dried,
Composition and nutritional value of dried,
Composition and food value of fresh,
Composition and nutritional value of fresh,
Pressed,
Stressed,
Pulled,
Pulled,
Steamed,
Steamed,
Stewed,
Braised,
Filtered coffee,

Fine granulated sugar,

Fish and meat, Canning of,

Flat sour in canning,

Flavor fruits,

of canned food,
of canned goods,
of jelly,
of jelly,
Flavoring extracts,

oils,
oils,
Flavorings, Adulteration of,

Artificial,
Artificial,
Natural,
Natural,
Flavors, Synthetic,

Florida oranges,

Flowery pekoe tea,

Foamy egg nog,

Fondant,

and related creams,
and related creams,
Nature of,
Nature of,
Uncooked,
Raw,
Food, Composition of,

cost, Chart of factors in,
cost, Factors chart in,
Drying of,
Drying of,
Economies in purchasing,
Buying economies,
Factors influencing,
Influencing factors,
Factors influencing cost of,
Factors affecting cost of,
for canning, Selection of,
for canning, Selection of,
fruits,
fruits,
Importance of proper amount of,
Importance of the right amount of,
in calories, Quantity of,
in calories, Quantity of,
materials in confections,
ingredients in sweets,
Preparation of fruits as,
Preparing fruits as,
Food preservation, Economy of,

Principles of drying,
Drying principles,
Sterile,
Clean,
substances to growth and health, Relation of,
substances related to growth and health, Relation of,
Suitability of,
Suitability of,
Table showing proportion of family income for,
Table showing the proportion of family income for,
to be canned, Preparation of,
to be canned, Preparation of
value and composition of apples,
value and nutrition of apples,
value and composition of apricots,
value and composition of apricots,
value and composition of bananas,
value and composition of bananas,
value and composition of black raspberries,
the value and composition of black raspberries,
value and composition of blackberries,
value and composition of blackberries,
value and composition of cherries,
value and composition of cherries,
value and composition of cranberries,
value and composition of cranberries,
value and composition of currants,
value and makeup of currants,
value and composition of dates,
value and makeup of dates,
value and composition of figs,
value and composition of figs,
value and composition of fruits,
value and composition of fruits,
value and composition of grapefruit,
value and composition of grapefruit,
value and composition of grapes,
value and composition of grapes,
value and composition of huckleberries,
value and makeup of huckleberries,
value and composition of lemons,
value and composition of lemons,
value and composition of muskmelon,
value and composition of cantaloupe,
value and composition of nectarines,
nectarines' value and composition,
value and composition of oranges,
value and composition of oranges,
value and composition of peaches,
value and composition of peaches,
value and composition of pears,
value and composition of pears,
value and composition of persimmons,
value and composition of persimmons,
value and composition of pineapple,
value and composition of pineapple,
value and composition of plums,
value and composition of plums,
value and composition of pomegranates,
value and makeup of pomegranates,
value and composition of prunes,
value and composition of prunes,
value and composition of raisins,
value and composition of raisins,
value and composition of red raspberries,
the value and composition of red raspberries,
value and composition of rhubarb,
value and composition of rhubarb,
value and composition of strawberries,
value and composition of strawberries,
value and composition of watermelon,
value and composition of watermelon,
value of fruits,
value of fruits,
Foods, Conservation of,

Cost of,
Cost of,
for drying, Preparation of,
for drying, Preparation of,
from spoiling, Preventing canned,
Preventing canned spoilage,
Methods for preserving,
Methods for preservation,
Necessity for preserving,
Need for preservation,
Purchase of,
Purchase of,
Quantity and proportion of,
Quantity and proportion of,
Foods, Scoring canned

Spoiling of canned
Canned food spoilage
Storing and serving canned
Storing and serving canned food
Formosa tea

Fourth-of-July luncheons

Fractional-sterilization method of canning

Freestone peaches

Fritters, Banana

Cherry
Cherry
Fruit, Acids in

and fruit desserts
and fruit desserts
as food, Preparation of
Food prep
beverages
drinks
beverages, Ingredients for
drinks, Ingredients for
beverages, Preparation of
drinks, Preparation of
butters
butter
Carbohydrate in
Carbohydrates in
Cellulose in
Cellulose in
cocktails
drinks
cultivation, Advance in
cultivation, Progress in
Definition of
Definition of
desserts, Fruit and
desserts, fruits, and
Effect of cooking on
Cooking impact on
for preserving, Selection of
for preservation, Selection of
in jars, Packing
in jars, Packing
in jelly making, Cooking
in jelly making, Cooking
in the diet
in the diet
juice and sugar in jelly making, Boiling the
Juice and sugar in jelly making, boiling the
juice and sugar in jelly making, Combining the
Juice and sugar in jelly making, combining the
juice for pectin in jelly making, Testing the
juice for pectin in jelly making, Testing the
juice lacking in pectin in jelly making
juice low in pectin for making jelly
 Using

Minerals in
Minerals in
nectar
nectar
or berry, sugar
or berry, sugar
Preparing and serving
Prep and serve
punch
punch
sugar, or levulose
sugar or fructose
Water in
Water in
Fruits and vegetables, Directions for drying

and vegetables for canning, Preparation of
and vegetables for canning, preparation of
Canning methods for
Canning techniques for
Canning vegetables and
Canning veggies and
Citrus
Citrus fruits
Classification of
Classification of
Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Composition of
Composition of
Digestibility of
Digestibility of
Directions for canning
Canning instructions
Dried
Dried
Drying of small
Drying small
Effect of ripeness on
Effect of ripeness on
Flavor
Flavor
Food
Food
Fruits, Food value of

Hard
Challenging
in confections, Candied and dried
in sweets, Candied and dried
Miscellaneous citrus
Mixed citrus
Miscellaneous tropical
Tropical essentials
Nature of
Nature of
Non-tropical
Non-tropical
Protein and fat in
Protein and fat in
Serving
Serving
Soft
Soft
Sour soft
Sour candy
Special
Special
Sweet soft
Sweet and soft
Table showing composition and food value of
Table showing the composition and nutritional value of
Tropical
Tropical
Varieties of dried
Types of dried
Varieties of tropical
Tropical varieties
Very sour soft
Very sour candy
Washing
Washing
Fudge, Brown-sugar

recipes
recipes
Two-layer
Two-layer
Fudges and related candies


G


General appearance of canned food

Gin

Ginger-ale punch

Glacé nuts and fruits

Glass jars

Glasses, Closing and storing jelly

Filling jelly
Jelly filling
Glove oranges

Glucose

Goods, Nationally advertised

Gooseberries

Green
Green
Gooseberry jam

Graining of sugar in candy making

Granulated sugar

sugar, Coarse
sugar, coarse
sugar, Fancy fine, or extra fine
sugar, fancy fine, or extra fine
sugar, Fine
sugar, refined
sugar, Standard
sugar, Standard
Grape catsup

jelly
jam
juice, Unfermented
juice, unfermented
lemonade
lemonade
marmalade
marmalade
Grapefruit cocktail

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
or shaddock
or shaddock
Preparation of
Preparing for
Selection of
Selection of
Serving
Serving
Grapes

Food value and composition of
Nutritional value and composition of
Green corn, Canning of

-gage jam
-gage jam
Green gooseberries

peppers, Canning of okra and
peppers, canning okra and
tea
tea
-tomato pickle
-tomato chutney
Greens

Canning
Canning
Drying of
Drying of
Growth and health, Relation of food substances to

Guavas

Red
Red
White
White
Gunpowder tea


H


Hallowe'en luncheons

Hard fruits

water
water
Heavy sirup

Honey

Hot chocolate

Household accounts, Equipment for

accounts, Keeping of
account management
accounts, Methods of keeping
accounts, Ways to keep
budget
budget
Huckleberries

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Hydrometer, or sirup gauge

Hyson tea


I


Ice-cream soda

Iced café au lait

cocoa or chocolate
cocoa or chocolate
coffee
coffee
tea
tea
Income, Apportionment of

Infants and children, Diet for

Feeding scale for
Feeding scale for
Ingredients used in confections

Instantaneous cereal beverages

coffee
coffee

J


Jam

Blackberry
BlackBerry
Definition of
Definition of
Gooseberry
Gooseberry
Green-gage
Green gage
Raspberry
Raspberry
Strawberry
Strawberry
Japan tea

Jar covers or tops

rubbers
condoms
tops or covers
tops or covers
Jars, Glass

Wrapping and labeling
Packing and tagging
Java coffee

Jellies and preserves in the diet

preserves, and pickles, Value of
preserves and pickles, Value of
Jelly bag

Jelly, Canning fruit juices for

Color of
Color of
Containers for
Containers for
Crab-apple
Crabapple
Cranberry
Cranberry
Currant
Currant
Flavor of
Flavor of
glasses, Closing and storing
glasses, closing and storing
glasses, Filling
glasses, Filling
Grape
Grapes
making
creating
making and preserving, Economy of
making and preserving, Economy of
making, Cooking fruit in
Cooking fruit in
making, Extracting fruit juice in
juicing fruit
making, Kettles for
making, Kettles for
making, Necessary equipment for
getting, Necessary equipment for
making, preserving, and pickling
canning, preserving, and pickling
making, Principles of
making, Principles of
making, Procedure in
making, Procedure in
making, Proportion of sugar in
sugar content in
making, Sheeting in
making, Sheeting in
making, Utensils for
making, Utensils for
Method of sealing
Sealing method
mixture, Testing the
mixture, Testing the
Peach
Peach
Plum
Plum
Quince
Quince
Raspberry
Raspberry
recipes
recipes
Score card for
Scorecard for
Scoring
Scoring
Solidity of
Strength of
Strawberry
Strawberry
Sugar content of
Sugar content of
Juice in jelly making, Extracting fruit

Juices for jelly, Canning fruit

Julep, Mint


K


Ketchup, Tomato

Kettles for jelly making,

Kumquats

and loquats
and loquats

L


Left-over cocoa and chocolate

-over coffee
-over coffee
-over tea
-over tea
Lemonade

Grape
Grapes
Pineapple
Pineapple
Lemons

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Levulose, or fruit sugar

Light sirup

Lima and other shelled beans, Canning of

Limes

Liquid and sugar in confection making

Loganberries

Long-boiling process

Loquats and kumquats

Luncheon, breakfast, and dinner service

menus
menus
menus, Fourth-of-July
menus, July 4th
menus, Hallowe'en
menus, Halloween
menus, Suggestions for
menus, Suggestions for
menus, Wedding
wedding menus

M


Malic acid

Malted milk, Chocolate

Mandarins

Mangoes, Tamarinds and

Maple apples

penuchie
penuchie
sirup and maple sugar
syrup and maple sugar
Marketing, Cash-and-carry plan of

Successful
Successful
Marking and cutting candies

Marmalade

Grape
Grapes
Orange
Orange
Orange-and-pineapple
Orange Pineapple
Quince
Quince
Marshmallows

coated with butter scotch
coated with butterscotch
Meals, Planning of

Relation of beverages to
Relation of drinks to
Mean-boiling process

Measuring devices for canning

Meat and fish, Canning of

Medium sirup

Melons

Casaba
Casaba melon
Menu making and table service

making, Card-file system of
creating a card file system
making, Rules for
making, Rules for
Menus, Breakfast

Dinner
Dinner
for adults' birthday parties
for adult birthday parties
for afternoon teas
for afternoon tea
for children's birthday parties
for kids' birthday parties
for Christmas dinners
for Christmas dinners
for Easter dinners
for Easter meals
for Fourth-of-July luncheons
for Fourth of July lunches
for Hallowe'en luncheons
for Halloween lunches
for New Year's dinners
for New Year's dinners
for Saint Patrick's day parties
for St. Patrick's Day parties
for Saint Valentine's day parties
for Valentine's Day parties
for special occasions
for special events
for supper parties
for dinner parties
for wedding breakfasts
for wedding brunches
for wedding dinners
for wedding receptions
for wedding luncheons
for wedding brunches
Menus, Luncheon

Summer breakfast
Summer brunch
Winter breakfast
Winter breakfast
Method of drying foods, Stove

of drying foods, Sun
sun-drying foods
of sealing canned food
canning food
of sealing jelly
of sealing gel
Methods of canning

of keeping household accounts
managing household finances
of making tea
making tea
of securing variety in meals
ensuring variety in meals
Middlemen

Milk, cream, and butter in confections

shake, Egg
shake, egg
shake, Plain
shake, Plain
Milling of cocoa

Mineral, or chemical, colorings

salts in confections
salts in treats
water
water
Minerals in fruit

Mint julep

Miscellaneous berries

citrus fruits
citrus fruits
confections
sweets
tropical fruits
tropical fruits
Mixed teas

Mocha coffee

Molasses

Sorghum
Sorghum
taffy
taffy
Muskmelon, Composition and food value of

Muskmelons and cantaloupes

Serving
Serving
Mustard pickles


N


Nationally advertised goods

Natural flavorings

Nature of confections

Navel oranges

Nectar, Fruit

Red-raspberry
Red raspberry
Nectarines

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
New Year's dinners

Non-stimulating beverages

-tropical fruits
-tropical fruit
Nougat

Nourishing beverages

Nut bars

Nuts in confections

Salted
Salted

O


Okra and green peppers, Canning of

One-period cold-pack method of canning

Onions, Pickled

Oolong tea

Open-kettle method of canning

-kettle method of canning, Procedure in
-kettle method of canning, Procedure in
-kettle method of canning, Utensils required for
-kettle method of canning, utensils needed for
Opera cream

Orange-and-pineapple marmalade

-and-rhubarb marmalade
-and-rhubarb jam
egg nog
eggnog
marmalade
jam
pekoe tea
pekoe tea
Orangeade

Oranges

California
California
Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Florida
Florida
Glove
Glove
Navel
Belly button
Preparation of
Preparing for
Oriental delight

Orientals

Oven method of canning


P


Packing fruit or vegetables in jars

Parsnips, Canning of

Parties for adults, Menus for birthday

for children, Menus for birthday
for kids, Birthday Menu
Menus for Saint Patrick's day
Saint Patrick's Day Menus
Menus for Saint Valentine
Valentine's Day Menus
Menus for supper
Dinner menus
Peach butter

jelly
jam
pitter
drizzle
preserve
keep
Peaches

apples, and apricots, Dried
dried apples and apricots
Clingstone
Clingstone
Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Drying of
Drying of
Freestone
Freestone
Kinds of
Types of
Pickled
Pickled
Stewed
Braised
Peanut brittle

Pear butter

Pears

Baked
Baked
Drying of
Drying of
Food value and composition of
Food value and composition of
Pickled
Pickled
Peas, Canning of

Pectin

Testing fruit juice for
Testing juice for
Using fruit juice lacking in
Using fruit juice without
Pekoe tea

tea, Flowery
tea, Floral
tea, Orange
tea, Orange
Penuchie, Maple

Peppers, Canning of okra and green

Percolated coffee

Persimmons

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Pickle, Green-tomato

Ripe-tomato
Fresh tomato
Pickled beans

beets
beets
cauliflower
cauliflower
crab apples
crab apples
onions
onions
peaches
peaches
pears
pears
watermelon rind
watermelon skin
Pickles in the diet

jellies, and preserves, Value of
jellies and preserves, Value of
Mustard
Mustard
Sliced-cucumber
Sliced cucumber
Small cucumber
Mini cucumber
Pickling

Definition of
Definition of
Principles of
Principles of
recipes
recipes
Pineapple-and-apricot conserve

Food value and composition of
Food value and composition of
lemonade
lemonade
Preparation of
Preparation of
pudding
pudding
Pineapples

Selecting
Choosing
Plain caramels

cocoa
chocolate
milk shake
milkshake
Planning of meals

Plum butter

conserve
save
jelly
gel
preserve
preserve
Plums

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Stewed
Braised
Pod and related vegetables

Pomegranates

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Pomelo grapefruit

Pop-corn balls

corn, Preparing
corn, Preparing
Porcupine apples

Pouring and cooling the candy mixture

Powdered sugar, Coarse

sugar, Standard
sugar, standard
sugar, XXXX
sugar, XXXX
Preparation of cocoa and chocolate

of coffee
coffee
of confections, Varieties and
of sweets, Varieties and
of food to be canned
to be canned food
of fruit as food
fruit as food
Preparation of grapefruit

of oranges
of oranges
of pineapple
of pineapple
Preparing and serving fruit

Preservatives, Canning

Preserve, Cherry

Peach
Peach
Plum
Plum
Quince
Quince
Raspberry
Raspberry
Strawberry
Strawberry
Preserved-fruit recipes

fruits, Varieties of
fruit varieties
Preserves and jellies in the diet

jellies, and pickles, Value of
jellies and pickles, value of
proper
proper
Preserving

foods, Methods for
foods, Methods for
foods, Necessity for
food, Necessity for
Methods of
Ways of
Principles of
Principles of
Selection of fruit for
Fruit selection for
Utensils for
Cooking tools for
Pressed blueberry pudding

figs
figs
Pressure cooker

cooker, Canning with a
cooker, Canning with a
Preventing canned goods from spoiling

Principles of canning

of drying food
of dehydrating food
of preserving
of preserving
Procedure in confection making

in one-period cold-pack method
in a one-period cold-pack method
in open-kettle method of canning
in open-kettle canning method
Processing

Proportion of family income for food, Table showing

of food to liquid in canned food
of food to liquid in canned food
of foods in balanced diet, Quantity and
of foods in a balanced diet, quantity and
of sugar in jelly making
of sugar in jelly making
Protein and fat in fruits

in confections
in sweets
Prune whip

Prunes

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Stewed
Stewed
Stuffed
Stuffed
Pudding, Blueberry

Pineapple
Pineapple
Pressed blueberry
Pressed blueberries
Pulled figs

Pulverized sugars

Pumpkin and squash, Canning of

Punch, Fruit

Ginger-ale
Ginger ale
Purchase of foods

Purchasing food, Economies in

Pure water, Necessity for


Q


Quality of canned food

Quantity and proportion of foods

of foods in calories
of foods and calories
Quince jelly

marmalade
jam
preserve
preserve
Quinces

and apples, Stewed
and stewed apples
Drying of
Drying of

R


Rainbow delight

Raisins

Composition and food value of
Nutrition and food value of
Raspberries

Black
Black
Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Red
Red
Raspberry-and-currant conserve, Red-,

jam
jelly
jelly
jam
nectar, Red-,
nectar, Red-
preserve
preserve
shortcake
shortcake
whip, Red
whip, Red
Reception wafers

Red-raspberry-and-currant conserve

-raspberry nectar
raspberry juice
-raspberry whip
raspberry mousse
Relation of beverages to meals

of food substances to growth and health
of food substances to growth and health
Relish, Beet

Crab-apple
Crabapple
Spanish
Spanish
Relishes

Rhubarb

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Stewed
Braised
Rio coffee

Ripe-tomato pickle

Rolls, Tutti-frutti

Root and tuber vegetables

and tuber vegetables, Canning of
and tuber vegetables, Canning of
and tuber vegetables, Drying of
and tuber vegetables, Drying of
Rubbers, Jar

Rules for menu making

Rum

Rye coffee


S


Saint Patrick's day parties, Menus for

Valentine parties, Menus for
Valentine's parties, Menus for
Salted nuts

Samovar

Sauce, Apple

Cranberry
Cranberry
Scalding or blanching in canning

Score card for canned food

card for jelly
jelly card
Scoring canned foods

jelly
jam
Sea foam

Seal tops, Automatic

Sealing jars when canning

Selection of coffee

of food for canning
canning food
of fruit for preserving
for canning fruit
of grapefruit
of grapefruit
Service, Essentials of good table

Serving candy

canned foods, Storing and
canned foods, Storing and
cantaloupes
cantaloupes
cocoa and chocolate
cocoa & chocolate
coffee
coffee
fruit, Preparing and
fruit, prep and
grapefruit
grapefruit
muskmelons
cantaloupes
tea
tea
Sex on diet, Effect of

Shaddock, or grapefruit

Sheeting in jelly making

Short-boiling process

Shortcake, Raspberry

Strawberry
Strawberry
Sirup, Chocolate

Corn
Corn
Density of
Density of
gauge, or hydrometer
gauge or hydrometer
Heavy
Heavy
Light
Light
Maple
Maple
Medium
Medium
Sirups for canning

for canning fruits, Table of
for preserving fruits, Table of
Sliced-cucumber pickles

Small cucumber pickles

fruits, Drying of
Drying fruits
Soft drinks

drinks, Definition of
drinks, Definition of
fruits
fruits
fruits, Sour
sour fruits
fruits, Sweet
sweet fruits
fruits, Very sour
fruits, Very tart
sugars
sugar
water
water
Solidity of jelly

Sorghum molasses

Souchong first tea

pekoe tea
pekoe tea
second tea
second tea
Soufflé, Apricot

Soup, Canning of tomatoes for

Sour cherries

soft fruits
soft fruits
soft fruits, Very
soft fruits, Very
Spanish relish

Special fruits

vegetables
veggies
Spice cup

Spoiling of canned foods

Sponge, Blackberry

Spores

Squash and pumpkin, Canning of

Canning of eggplant and summer
Canning eggplant and summer
Standard granulated sugar

powdered sugar
confectioners' sugar
Steam-pressure methods of canning

Steamed apples

figs
figs
Steeped tea

Sterile food

Sterilizer

Stewed figs

peaches
peaches
plums
plums
prunes
dried plums
quinces with apples
quinces and apples
rhubarb
rhubarb
Stimulant and tannic acid in stimulating beverages, Table showing

Stimulating beverages

beverages, Definitions of
beverages, Definitions of
beverages, Nature of
drinks, Nature of
beverages, Table showing stimulant and tannic acid in
drinks, Table displaying stimulant and tannic acid in
Stores, Chain

Storing and cooking dried foods

and serving canned foods
and serving canned goods
jelly glasses, Closing and
jelly cups, Closing and
Stove-drying method

Strainer for canning, Colander and wire

Strawberries

Composition and food value of
Composition and nutritional value of
Strawberry-and-pineapple conserve

-and-rhubarb conserve
-and-rhubarb jam
desserts, Miscellaneous
desserts, Miscellaneous
huller
huller
jam
jam
jelly
jello
preserve
preserve
shortcake
shortcake
whip
whip
String beans, Canning of

beans, Drying of
Beans, drying them
Stuffed dates

prunes
dried plums
Successful marketing

Succotash, Canning of

Sugar and fruit juice in jelly making, Boiling the

and fruit juice in jelly making, Combining the
and fruit juice in jelly making, combining the
and liquid in confection making
and liquid in candy making
Sugar, Beet

Cane
Cane
Coarse granulated
Coarse granules
Coarse powdered
Coarse powder
content of jelly
jelly filling
Fancy fine, or extra fine, granulated
Fancy fine, or extra fine, granulated
Fine granulated
Fine granules
Fruit, or berry
Fruit or berry
Graining of
Graining of
Granulated
Granulated
in jelly making, Proportion of
in jelly making, Ratio of
Levulose, or fruit
Fructose, or fruit
Maple
Maple
Pulverized
Ground to dust
Soft
Soft
Standard granulated
Granulated sugar
Standard powdered
Standard powder
XXXX, or confectioners'
XXXX, or candy makers
XXXX powdered
XXXX powdered
Suggestions for dinner menus

for luncheon menus
for lunch menus
Suitability of food

Summer breakfast menus

cocktail
drink
squash, Canning of eggplant and
squash, canning eggplant and
Sun-drying method

Supper parties, Menus for

Sweet chocolate

soft fruits
soft fruits
Synthetic flavors

System of menu making, Card-file


T


Table of sirups for canning fruits

service
service
service and menu making
service and menu creation
service, Essentials of good
service, Essentials of good
showing composition and food value of fruits
displaying the nutritional content and value of fruits
showing correct weight for certain heights
displaying appropriate weight for specific heights
showing proportion of family income for food
showing the percentage of family income spent on food
showing stimulant and tannic acid in stimulating beverages
showing stimulant and tannic acid in energizing drinks
showing tests for candy
candy test results
Tables showing effect of weight on diet

Taffies and similar candies

Nature of
Nature of
Taffy, Butter

Chewing
Chewing
Method of treating
Treatment method
Molasses
Molasses
recipes
recipes
Vanilla
Vanilla
Tamarinds and mangoes

Tangerines

Tannic acid in stimulating beverages

Table showing stimulant and
Table showing stimulants and
acid, or tannin
acid or tannin
Tartaric acid

Tea, Afternoon

ball
ball
Black
Black
Bohea
Bohea tea
Caravan
RV
China congou
China black tea
Classification of
Categorization of
Congou
Congou
English breakfast
Full English breakfast
Flowery pekoe
Flowery Pekoe
Formosa
Taiwan
Green
Green
Gunpowder
Gunpowder
History and production of
History and production of
Hyson
Hyson
Iced
Iced
Japan
Japan
Left-over
Leftover
Methods of making
Making methods
Mixed
Mixed
Oolong
Oolong tea
Orange pekoe
Orange pekoe
Pekoe
Pekoe
Preparation of
Prep of
Selection of
Choose from
Serving
Serving
Souchong first
Souchong first
Souchong pekoe
Souchong tea
Souchong second
Souchong tea
Steeped
Imbued
Table showing stimulant and tannic acid in
Table displaying stimulant and tannic acid in
Varieties of
Types of
Teas, Afternoon

Testing candy

fruit juice for pectin
fruit juice for pectin
the jelly mixture
the jelly blend
Tests for candy, Table showing

Texture of canned food

Thanksgiving dinners, Menus for

Theine

Theobromine

Tin cans, Canning with

cans for canning
canning jars
Tomato catsup

ketchup
ketchup
Tomatoes and corn, Canning of

Canning of
Canning of
for soup, Canning of
soup canning
Tops, Jar covers or

Tropical fruits

fruits, Miscellaneous
fruits, Miscellaneous
fruits, Varieties of
fruit varieties
Tuber and root vegetables, Canning of

vegetables, Root and
vegetables, root and
Tubers and root vegetables, Drying of

Turnips, Canning of

Tutti-frutti rolls

Two-layer fudge


U


Uncooked fondant

Unfermented grape juice

Utensils for canning

for coffee making
for making coffee
for confection making
for making candy
for drying
for drying out
for jelly making
for making jelly
for preserving
for saving
for tea making
for making tea
required for cold-pack method
required for cold pack method
required for open-kettle method of canning
required for the open-kettle canning method

V


Value of jellies, preserves, and pickles

Vanilla taffy

Varieties and preparation of confections

of tea
tea
of tropical fruits
tropical fruits
Variety in meals, Methods for securing

Vegetable colorings

Vegetables and fruits, Canning

and fruits, Directions for drying
and fruits, Instructions for drying
Canning of root and tuber
Canning root vegetables
Classification of
Classification of
Direction for canning
Canning instructions
Drying of root and tuber
Drying root vegetables
for canning, Preparation of fruits and
for canning, Preparation of fruits and
Pod and related
Pod and related items
Vegetables, Root and tuber

Special
Special
Very sour soft fruits

Vessels for canning

Vienna coffee

Vitamines


W


Washing fruits

Water bath in canning, Preparing jars for the

Carbonated
Sparkling
Distilled
Distilled
Hard
Tough
in beverages
in drinks
in fruit
in fruit
Kinds of
Types of
Mineral
Mineral
Necessity for pure
Need for pure
-seal outfit
-seal costume
-seal outfit, Canning with a
-seal outfit, canning with a
Soft
Soft
Watermelon, Composition and food value of

rind, Pickled
pickled rind
Watermelons

Wedding-breakfast menus

-dinner menus
-dinner menus
-luncheon menus
-lunch menus
Weight on children's diet, Effect of

on diet, Effect of
on diet, Effect of
Whip, Prune

Red-raspberry
Red raspberry
Strawberry
Strawberry
Whisky

Wine

Winter breakfast menus

Wire strainer, Colander and

Wrapping and labeling jars

candies


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!